OSN 8800 V100R008C10 Product Description 01

OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport
Platform
V100R008C10
Product Description
Issue 01
Date 2014-03-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Product Description About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 8800 V100R008C10
iManager U2000 V200R001C00
iManager U2000 Web LCT V200R001C00
Intended Audience
This document describes the orientation, technical features, functions, software and hardware
structure, and technical specifications of the product in addition to the compliance standards.
This document is intended for:
l Network Planning Engineer

l Data Configuration Engineer
l System Maintenance Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Symbol Description
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

CAUTION avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Based on Product Version

V100R008C10
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R008C10.
Update Description
1 Introduction Updated the description of 1.1.1 Product Highlights.
4 Product l 4.1 Line Rate: 4.1.1.2 100 Gbit/s Metro Solution is added.
Features l 4.4 ROADM Feature: 4.4.2 Flexible ROADM Application is
added.
l Updated the description of 4.10 Single-Fiber Bidirectional
Transmission.
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Update Description
5 Hardware l The TN15LSC, TN57NS4, TN54NS4M, TN12WSMD9,

Architecture TN15WSMD9, TN13WSMD4, TN16WSD9, TN16WSM9,
TN12HSC1 and TN12STG boards are added.
l Updated the description of this chapter.
9 Operation and 9.17 License Control: WSS Flexible Grid Tunable Funciton Fee is added
Maintenance in feature license.
A Power The TN15LSC, TN57NS4, TN54NS4M, TN12WSMD9,

Consumption, TN15WSMD9, TN13WSMD4, TN16WSD9, TN16WSM9, TN12HSC1
Weight, and and TN12STG boards are added.
Valid Slots of
Boards
B Complied Updated the complied standards.

Standards

V100R008C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R008C00. Compared with
the 01 issue, updating of SPC120 and SPC200 are added.
Update Description
5 Hardware l The TN12LTX and TN13OAU107 boards are added.

Architecture l OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports the TN12LSX board.
6 Node 6.1 Configuration Principles for Optical Attenuators is added.

Configurations
A Power The TN12LTX and TN13OAU107 boards are added.

Consumption,
Weight, and
Valid Slots of
Boards
B Complied Updated the complied standards.

Standards

V100R008C00
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Update Description
Whole manual l Deleted the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack.

l Added descriptions of the TN13LSC, TN54HUNQ2, TN54HUNS3,
TN56NS3 and TN56NS4.
1 Introduction Added 1.3 Typical Application.
2 System Added the description of the universal line board.

Architecture
4 Product l 4.1 Line Rate: Updated the description of 100 Gbit/s.

Features l 4.2 OTN Feature: Added 4.2.6 OTN OCS Application.
l 4.12 Automatic Optical Power Management: Added 4.12.1 ALS,
4.12.2 AGC, 4.12.3 ALC, 4.12.4 APE, 4.12.5 IPA, 4.12.6 IPA of
Raman System, 4.12.7 IPA of PID, and 4.12.8 OPA.
9.17 License 9.17.1 Feature License: Added the TP-Assist enhanced function license,
Control Optical Doctor management system license, SDH/packet service license
for universal line boards, and 100G line board license for general OptiX
OSN 8800 T32 subracks.
5 Hardware l Added 5.5 OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack.

Architecture l Added the board for the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack
in OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category.
6 Node Modified the typical configurations of an OLA node.

Configurations
9 Operation and 9.6 Optical Doctor: Updated the description of this chapter.
Maintenance
A Power Added the specifications of the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 universal
Consumption, platform subrack.
Weight, and
Valid Slots of
Boards

V100R007C02
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R007C02. Compared with the
02 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
3 Service Access 3.1 Service Types: Modified the boards that support FE electrical signal
and GE electrical signal.
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Update Description
11 Technical 11.6 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications: Modified the

Specifications specification of the LOA board.

V100R007C02
the 01 issue, updating of SPC100 and SPC200 are added.
Update Description
Whole manual The required U2000 version is changed from V100R008C01 to

V100R008C00.
9 Operation and l Deleted the "Automatic Deployment Commissioning".

Maintenance l Modified the descriptions of 9.16 One-Click Data Collection.
11 Technical 11.1 Transmission Distance and Optical Spans: Modified the 100
Specifications Gbit/s span transmission distance.
13 Environment Update the descriptions of the environment requirement.

Requirement
A Power Added descriptions of the TN52NS2.

Consumption,
Weight, and
Valid Slots of
Boards

V100R007C02
Update Description
Whole manual l Added descriptions of the TN54TTX, TN54TSC, TN14LSX.

l Added descriptions of the TN11LSQ, TN13LSX, TN11LOA,
TN12LSC, TN12LOG, TN12TMX, TN11LTX, TN12LDX boards
for the OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack.
l Modified the descriptions of 10 Security Management.
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

Update Description
3 Service Access For 3.1 Service Types,

l "Mapping between service types and OptiX OSN 8800 service
boards" is added.
l Deleted the OTU4 service.
4.11 Deleted the ELPS feature of 4.11.3 Network Level Protection

Redundancy (Ethernet and Packet).
and Protection
5 Hardware Modified the description of Cross-Connect Unit and System and

Architecture Communication Unit.
6 Node Modified the figure of "Typical configurations for the optical layer of an
Configurations OLA node" in 6.2.6.2 Subrack Layout.
9.17 License l Modified the descriptions of 9.17.1 Feature License.

Control l Modified the descriptions of 9.17.2 Service Type and Cross-
Connect Capacity License.
11 Technical l Modified the title of 11.16 Cross-Connect Unit and System and
Specifications Communication Unit Specifications, and added the specification of
the SCC and AUX boards.
l Deleted the "System Control, Supervision and Communication Board
Specifications".

V100R007C00
02 issue, updating of SPC200 is added.
Update Description
3 Service Access For 3.1 Service Types, "Mapping between service types and OptiX OSN
8800 service boards" is added.
5 Hardware Modified the descriptions of Cross-Connect Unit and System and

Architecture Communication Unit.
6 Node Modified the figure of "Typical configurations for the optical layer of an
Configurations OLA node" in 6.2.6.2 Subrack Layout.
9 Operation and l Deleted the "Automatic Deployment Commissioning".

Maintenance l Modified the descriptions of 9.16 One-Click Data Collection.
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Update Description
11 Technical Modified the 100 Gbit/s Span Transmission Distance of 11.1

Specifications Transmission Distance and Optical Spans.
B Complied l Added B.3 IETF Standards and B.5 MEF Standards.

Standards l Added recommendations on packet features in B.2 IEEE
Standards and B.4 ITU-T Recommendations.

V100R007C00
the 01 issue, updating of SPC100 is added.
Update Description
Whole manual l Added descriptions of the TN11LSQ, TN13LSX, TN11LOA,

TN12LSC, TN12LOG, TN12TMX, TN11LTX, TN12LDX boards
for the OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack.
l Modified the descriptions of 10 Security Management.
9.17 License l Modified the descriptions of 9.17.1 Feature License.

3 Service Access Deleted the OTU4 service of 3.1 Service Types.
4.11 Deleted the ELPS feature of 4.11.3 Network Level Protection

Redundancy (Ethernet and Packet).
and Protection

V100R007C00
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

Update Description
Whole manual Added descriptions of the TN52AUX, TN15AUX, TN15EFI,

TN54EG16, TN54EX2, TN54PND2, TN55NO2, TN54NS4,
TN12TD20, TN11TM20, TN55TOX, TN12OPM8, TN15PIU,
TN11RAU2, TNK2USXH, TN52UXCH, TN52UXCM, TN16UXCM,
TNK2UXCT.
Added the descriptions of "Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64".
1 Introduction l Added the descriptions of 1.2.2 Typical OCS Networking.

l Modified the descriptions of 1.1 Product Highlights and
Specifications.
3 Service Access l Modified the descriptions of 3.1 Service Types.

l Modified the descriptions of 3.3 Sevice Mapping.
l Modified the descriptions of 3.3.2 Multiplexing and Mapping
ODUk Signals into OTUk Signals.
4 Product l Added the descriptions of 4.11.4.6 AUX Board 1+1 Redundancy.

Features l Modified the descriptions of 100 Gbit/s.
l Modified the descriptions of 4.1.5 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s
Hybrid Transmission.
l Modified the descriptions of 4.4 ROADM Feature.
l Modified the descriptions of 4.6 Ethernet and Packet Feature.
5 Hardware l Added the descriptions of DC Power Distribution Box (PDP63-8-8).

Architecture l Added the descriptions of OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack.
l Added the descriptions of 5.8.21 TDM Board.
l Modified the descriptions of OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category.
l Modified the descriptions of OTN Tributary Board.
l Modified the descriptions of OTN Line Board.
l Modified the descriptions of Cross-Connect Unit and System and
Communication Unit.
l Modified the descriptions of Spectrum Analyzer Board.
6 Node l Added the descriptions of 6.2.2 1 Degree ROADM.

Configurations l Added the descriptions of 6.2.3 2 Degree ROADM.
l Added the descriptions of 6.2.4 3 Degree ROADM.
9.17 License l Added the descriptions of 9.17.1 Feature License.

9 Operation and l Added the descriptions of 9.6 Optical Doctor.

Maintenance l Added the descriptions of 9.7 TP-Assist Solution of Packet
Services.
l Modified the descriptions of 9.8 Loopback.
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

Update Description
C Technology Modified the descriptions of C.6 GFP Technology.

Reference

V100R006C03
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R006C03. Compared with the
third official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
Whole manual Added descriptions of the TN15LSXL.
4.12 Automatic Optical Modified the descriptions of "4.12.1 ALS".

Power Management
6 Node Configurations l Added the descriptions of 6.2.2 1 Degree ROADM.


V100R006C03
second official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
Whole manual Added the descriptions of "Security Management".

Added the descriptions of "ANSI Standards".
Added the descriptions of "Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32".
Modified the descriptions of "System Architecture".
Modified the descriptions of "Service Mapping".
Modified the descriptions of "Ethernet Feature".
Modified the descriptions of "Energy Saving and Environment
Protection".
Deleted the "Fiber Management".
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x


V100R006C03
the first official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
Whole manual The structure of the contents is adjusted.

Deleted the TN15LSXL board.

V100R006C03
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32/T16 V100R006C03.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32/T16 V100R006C01, OptiX OSN 8800
V100R006C03 provides the following updates.
Update Description
Product Features Added the descriptions of "40G/100G Coherent Technology" and

"Ethernet over OTN".
Typical OTN Added the descriptions of "EoO Solution".

Networking
Optical Layer Modified the descriptions of "Grooming Ability".

Grooming Added the descriptions of "Scenarios of Optical-Layer Grooming".
WDM Added the descriptions of "Coherent Receiver Technology", "ePDM-

Technologies QPSK Technology" and "ePDM-BPSK Technology".
Data Added the descriptions of "Implementation Solution".

Characteristics
Whole manual Added the descriptions of TN12LSC, TN11LTX, TN15LSXL,

TN55NS3, TN54TSXL, TN54TEM28, TN11RAU1, TN13OAU106,
and TN14FIU.

V100R006C01
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 T16 V100R006C01.
Compared with the second official release, the manual of this issue provides the following
updates.
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

Update Description
2 System System Architecture is modified.

Architecture
Whole manual Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

V100R006C01
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 T16 V100R006C01.
Compared with the first official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
2 System System Architecture is modified.

Architecture
Protection Equipment Level Protection is modified.
OTN l ODUflex is modified.

Technologies l Mapping and Multiplexing is added.
Whole manual Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

V100R006C01
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 T16 V100R006C01.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 V100R006C00, OptiX OSN 8800 V100R006C01
provides the following updates.
Update Description
Overview Overview is added.
OTN Added the descriptions of ODUflex and OTN Technologies.

Technologies
Function Boards Added the descriptions of TN13OAU101, TN13OAU103,

TN13OAU105, TN11LOA, TN53NS2, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2,
TN55TQX, TN53TDX, TN12D40, TN12M40, TN12M40V,
TN55NPO2E boards.
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii

Update Description
11 Technical Added the descriptions of TN13OAU101, TN13OAU103,

Specifications TN13OAU105, TN11LOA, TN53NS2, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2,
TN55TQX, TN53TDX, TN12D40, TN12M40, TN12M40V,
TN55NPO2E boards.

Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

V100R006C00
Update Description
5.1 Cabinet Cabinet is modified.
Introduction Introduction to PID IPA is added.


V100R006C00
Update Description
Function Boards Added the descriptions of SXH, THA and TOA boards.
OTN Tributary Added the descriptions of TN53TQX, TN54THA and TN54TOA

Board boards.
11 Technical Added the descriptions of TNKS2XH, TN12OBU1P1, TN53TQX,

Specifications TN54THA and TN54TOA boards.
NE Type and Signal Modified the typical configuration according to the principle of the
Flow separated optical and electrical subracks.
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

Update Description
A Power Added the descriptions of TNKS2XH, TN12OBU1P1, TN54TOA,

Consumption, TN54THA and TN53TQX boards.
Weight, and Valid
Slots of Boards
Whole manual Deleted the descriptions of TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12PTQX,

TN12ELQX boards.

V100R006C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 T16 V100R006C00.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 V100R005C00, OptiX OSN 8800 V100R006C00
provides the following updates.
Update Description
UPM Added the descriptions of UPM.
DC Power Added the descriptions of TN16PDU.

Distribution Box
Function Boards Added the descriptions of TN11DAS1, TN11LSQ and TN11WSMD9

boards.
11 Technical Added the specifications of TN11DAS1, TN11LSQ and

Specifications TN11WSMD9 boards.

V100R005C00
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R005C00. Compared with the
third official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
11.3 Nominal Central Changed the number of CWDM wavelengths from 16

Wavelengths of the CWDM to 8.
System
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv


V100R005C00
Update Description
Function Boards Deleted the descriptions of TN12PTQX, TN12ELQX,

TN11BMD4 and TN11BMD8 boards.
11 Technical Specifications Deleted the specifications of TN12PTQX,

TN12ELQX, TN11BMD4 and TN11BMD8 boards.
A Power Consumption, Weight, Deleted the power consumption of TN12PTQX,

and Valid Slots of Boards TN12ELQX, TN11BMD4 and TN11BMD8 boards.
Added the power consumption of TN52XCM02 board.

V100R005C00
Update Description
Network Deleted the descriptions of MDS 6630.

Management Tools
and Protocols
9.17 License Control Deleted the descriptions of version license.
Master-Slave Modified the descriptions of master-slave subrack.

Subrack
Management
Function Boards Deleted the descriptions of TN13LSXL board.
11 Technical Deleted the specifications of TN13LSXL board.

Specifications

V100R005C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R005C00. Compared with OptiX
OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 8800 V100R005C00 provides the following updates.
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

Update Description
Whole manual The equipment name is changed from OptiX

OSN 8800 I to OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or from
OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
Whole manual Added the description of OCS system.
Network Level Protection Added the descriptions of SW SNCP protection,

VLAN SNCP protection, DBPS protection and
Ethernet protection.
Data Characteristics Added the section "Data Characteristics".
Function Boards Added the descriptions of TN11LEM24,

TN11LEX4, TN54NS3, TN53TSXL,
TN54ENQ2, TN54NPO2, TN12WSMD4,
TN11ST2, TN11SFIU and TN11OPM8 boards.
11 Technical Specifications Added the specifications of TN11LEM24,

TN11LEX4, TN54NS3, TN53TSXL,
TN54ENQ2, TN54NPO2, TN12WSMD4,
TN11ST2, TN11SFIU and TN11OPM8 boards.
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi

Product Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Product Highlights and Specifications...........................................................................................................................2
1.1.1 Product Highlights.......................................................................................................................................................2
1.1.2 Product Specifications.................................................................................................................................................3
1.2 Typical Networking........................................................................................................................................................5
1.2.1 Typical OTN Networking............................................................................................................................................5
1.2.2 Typical OCS Networking............................................................................................................................................6
1.2.3 Typical MS-OTN Networking.....................................................................................................................................7
1.3 Typical Application........................................................................................................................................................8
1.3.1 Mobile Service Transmission: Fast Service Deployment with High Bandwidth, Low Latency, and Low Costs
..............................................................................................................................................................................................8
1.3.2 MAN Broadband Transmission: Addressing the Issue of Insufficient Bandwidth and Fiber Resources.................10
1.3.3 Leased Line Transmission: Services of Various Types and Rates............................................................................12
1.3.4 Integrated Transmission of Fixed Network Services and Mobile Services: Broadband, Mobile, and Private Line
Services Carried Over the Same Network..........................................................................................................................17
2 System Architecture....................................................................................................................18
3 Service Access...............................................................................................................................22
3.1 Service Types...............................................................................................................................................................23
3.2 Capability of Service Access........................................................................................................................................27
3.3 Sevice Mapping............................................................................................................................................................29
3.3.1 Mapping Client Services into ODUk Signals............................................................................................................32
3.3.2 Multiplexing and Mapping ODUk Signals into OTUk Signals................................................................................34
4 Product Features...........................................................................................................................35
4.1 Line Rate.......................................................................................................................................................................37
4.1.1 100 Gbit/s..................................................................................................................................................................37
4.1.1.1 100 Gbit/s Coherent Solution.................................................................................................................................37
4.1.1.2 100 Gbit/s Metro Solution......................................................................................................................................40
4.1.2 40 Gbit/s....................................................................................................................................................................41
4.1.3 10 Gbit/s....................................................................................................................................................................42
4.1.4 2.5 Gbit/s...................................................................................................................................................................42
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

4.1.5 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s Hybrid Transmission..............................................................................................43

4.2 OTN Feature.................................................................................................................................................................44
4.2.1 OTN Cross-Connection.............................................................................................................................................45
4.2.2 GE E2E Transmission Based on ODU0....................................................................................................................46
4.2.3 Flexible Bandwidth Utilization Based on ODUflex..................................................................................................47
4.2.4 E2E Service Management Based on OTN Overhead................................................................................................48
4.2.5 Channel Monitoring over Different Operators' Networks.........................................................................................49
4.2.6 OTN OCS Application..............................................................................................................................................50
4.3 OCS Feature.................................................................................................................................................................51
4.3.1 Multi-Granularity Service Grooming and Convergence...........................................................................................51
4.3.2 Ethernet Service Transmission and Layer 2 Switching.............................................................................................52
4.4 ROADM Feature..........................................................................................................................................................54
4.4.1 Basic Concepts..........................................................................................................................................................55
4.4.2 Flexible ROADM Application..................................................................................................................................56
4.4.3 1-Degree ROADM....................................................................................................................................................57
4.4.4 2-Degree ROADM....................................................................................................................................................58
4.4.5 3-Degree ROADM....................................................................................................................................................60
4.4.6 4-Degree ROADM....................................................................................................................................................64
4.4.7 9-Degree ROADM....................................................................................................................................................68
4.5 OTN + ROADM Feature..............................................................................................................................................71
4.6 Ethernet and Packet Feature.........................................................................................................................................72
4.6.1 Supported Ethernet Service Models..........................................................................................................................72
4.6.1.1 E-Line/E-LAN........................................................................................................................................................73
4.6.1.2 VPWS/VPLS..........................................................................................................................................................77
4.6.1.3 EPL/EVPL/EPLAN/EVPLAN...............................................................................................................................78
4.6.2 Service Carrier Solutions and Technologies.............................................................................................................82
4.6.2.1 Service Carrier Solutions........................................................................................................................................82
4.6.2.2 Service Carrier Technologies.................................................................................................................................84
4.6.3 Quality of Service (QoS)...........................................................................................................................................86
4.6.4 Typical Application...................................................................................................................................................88
4.6.4.1 Leased Line Application.........................................................................................................................................88
4.6.4.2 Broadband Aggregation Application......................................................................................................................95
4.7 PID Feature...................................................................................................................................................................98
4.8 CWDM Feature............................................................................................................................................................99
4.9 DWDM over CWDM Feature....................................................................................................................................100
4.10 Single-Fiber Bidirectional Transmission..................................................................................................................102
4.11 Redundancy and Protection......................................................................................................................................102
4.11.1 Network Level Protection (OTN)..........................................................................................................................102
4.11.2 Network Level Protection (OCS)..........................................................................................................................103
4.11.3 Network Level Protection (Ethernet and Packet)..................................................................................................104
4.11.4 Equipment Level Redundancy...............................................................................................................................106
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii

4.11.4.1 Power Redundancy.............................................................................................................................................107

4.11.4.2 Fan Redundancy.................................................................................................................................................111
4.11.4.3 Cross-Connect Board Redundancy.....................................................................................................................112
4.11.4.4 System Control and Communication Board Redundancy..................................................................................115
4.11.4.5 Centralized Clock Board Redundancy...............................................................................................................116
4.11.4.6 AUX Board 1+1 Redundancy.............................................................................................................................117
4.12 Automatic Optical Power Management...................................................................................................................118
4.12.1 ALS........................................................................................................................................................................119
4.12.2 AGC.......................................................................................................................................................................120
4.12.3 ALC.......................................................................................................................................................................122
4.12.4 APE........................................................................................................................................................................123
4.12.5 IPA.........................................................................................................................................................................124
4.12.6 IPA of Raman System...........................................................................................................................................125
4.12.7 IPA of PID.............................................................................................................................................................127
4.12.8 OPA.......................................................................................................................................................................128
4.13 Synchronization........................................................................................................................................................130
4.13.1 Requirements on Clock Synchronization..............................................................................................................130
4.13.2 Frequency Synchronization Typical Application..................................................................................................132
4.13.3 Phase Synchronization Typical Application..........................................................................................................133
5 Hardware Architecture.............................................................................................................136
5.1 Cabinet........................................................................................................................................................................138
5.1.1 Cabinet Introduction................................................................................................................................................138
5.1.2 Cabinet Installation Mode.......................................................................................................................................139
5.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack...................................................................................................................................139
5.2.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................................139
5.2.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................................141
5.2.3 Management Interfaces............................................................................................................................................142
5.2.4 Cross-Connect Capacities........................................................................................................................................155
5.2.5 Fan and Heat Baffle.................................................................................................................................................156
5.2.6 Power Consumption................................................................................................................................................163
5.2.7 Mechanical Specifications.......................................................................................................................................165
5.3.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................................166
5.4.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................................180
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix


5.5 OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack...........................................................................................................204
5.5.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................................204
5.6 Power Supply..............................................................................................................................................................227
5.6.1 Power Requirement.................................................................................................................................................227
5.6.2 DC Power Distribution Box (TN16PDU)...............................................................................................................228
5.6.3 DC Power Distribution Box (TN11PDU)...............................................................................................................230
5.6.4 DC Power Distribution Box (DPD63-8-8)..............................................................................................................232
5.6.5 UPM.........................................................................................................................................................................237
5.6.6 PIU...........................................................................................................................................................................245
5.7 Frames........................................................................................................................................................................250
5.7.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module...............................................................................................................................250
5.7.2 CRPC Frame............................................................................................................................................................253
5.7.3 E2000 ODF Frame...................................................................................................................................................255
5.8 Board..........................................................................................................................................................................256
5.8.1 Appearance and Dimensions...................................................................................................................................256
5.8.2 Symbols on Boards..................................................................................................................................................258
5.8.3 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category...........................................................................................................................259
5.8.4 Optical Transponder Board.....................................................................................................................................280
5.8.5 OTN Tributary Board..............................................................................................................................................285
5.8.6 OTN Line Board......................................................................................................................................................289
5.8.7 Universal Line Board...............................................................................................................................................292
5.8.8 Packet Service Board...............................................................................................................................................294
5.8.9 PID Board................................................................................................................................................................296
5.8.10 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board......................................................................................................298
5.8.11 Fixed Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Board.........................................................................................................300
5.8.12 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Board..........................................................................................301
5.8.13 Optical Amplifier Board........................................................................................................................................303
5.8.14 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit .................................................................................306
5.8.15 Optical Supervisory Channel Board......................................................................................................................308
5.8.16 Optical Protection Board.......................................................................................................................................309
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xx

5.8.17 Spectrum Analyzer Board.....................................................................................................................................311

5.8.18 Variable Optical Attenuator Board........................................................................................................................312
5.8.19 Dispersion Equalizing Board.................................................................................................................................314
5.8.20 Clock Board...........................................................................................................................................................315
5.8.21 TDM Board............................................................................................................................................................316
5.8.22 Interface Board......................................................................................................................................................317
5.9 Optical Attenuator......................................................................................................................................................318
5.9.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator.........................................................................................................................................318
5.9.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................................318
5.10 Pluggable Optical Modules......................................................................................................................................319
5.11 Housekeeping Alarm Interfaces...............................................................................................................................322
6 Node Configurations................................................................................................................329
6.1 Configuration Principles for Optical Attenuators.......................................................................................................330
6.1.1 Planning Fixed Optical Attenuators........................................................................................................................330
6.1.1.1 FOA Configuration Principles for the Client Side of OTU and Tributary Boards...............................................330
6.1.1.2 FOA Configuration Principles for the WDM Side of OTU and Line Boards......................................................330
6.1.1.3 FOA Configuration Principles for OSC Boards...................................................................................................334
6.1.1.4 FOA Configuration Principles for CWDM Systems............................................................................................334
6.1.2 Planning Variable Optical Attenuators....................................................................................................................335
6.1.2.1 EVOA Configuration Principles for OTM Sites..................................................................................................336
6.1.2.2 EVOA Configuration Principles for FOADM Sites.............................................................................................337
6.1.2.3 EVOA Configuration Principles for ROADM Sites............................................................................................340
6.1.2.4 EVOA Configuration Principles for OLA Sites...................................................................................................342
6.2 OTN Typical Configuration.......................................................................................................................................344
6.2.1 OTM/Back to Back OTM........................................................................................................................................345
6.2.1.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................345
6.2.1.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................346
6.2.1.3 Subrack Connections............................................................................................................................................347
6.2.2 1 Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................348
6.2.2.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................349
6.2.2.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................350
6.2.3 2 Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................352
6.2.3.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................352
6.2.3.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................354
6.2.4 3 Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................356
6.2.4.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................356
6.2.4.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................359
6.2.5 4 Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................361
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi

6.2.5.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................361

6.2.5.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................364
6.2.6 OLA.........................................................................................................................................................................366
6.2.6.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................366
6.2.6.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................367
6.2.7 Regenerator..............................................................................................................................................................369
6.2.7.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................369
6.2.7.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................370
6.2.8 FOADM...................................................................................................................................................................372
6.2.8.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................373
6.2.8.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................373
6.2.9 CWDM....................................................................................................................................................................375
6.2.9.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................375
6.2.9.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................376
6.3 OCS Typical Configuration........................................................................................................................................378
7 Network Management..............................................................................................................380
7.1 Network Management System....................................................................................................................................382
7.2 Inter-NE Communication Management Based on DCN............................................................................................383
7.2.1 DCN Implementation Scheme.................................................................................................................................383
7.2.2 DCN Network Application......................................................................................................................................384
7.3 Intra-NE Communication Management based on Master-Slave Subrack..................................................................386
7.3.1 Master-Slave Subrack Planning Principles and Capabilities...................................................................................386
7.3.2 Master-slave Cascading Scheme.............................................................................................................................389
7.4 Management Connections and Interfaces...................................................................................................................390
7.4.1 Introduction to Network Cables..............................................................................................................................390
7.4.2 Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800 T16.......................................................................392
7.4.3 Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T64................................................................395
7.4.4 Management Connections among OptiX OSN 8800&6800&3800........................................................................398
7.5 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs.............................................................................................................400
7.6 Interfaces Between the NMS and OSS.......................................................................................................................401
8 ASON Feature............................................................................................................................404
8.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................407
8.1.1 Background and Advantages...................................................................................................................................407
8.1.2 Features of the ASON..............................................................................................................................................408
8.1.3 Huawei OTN ASON Solution.................................................................................................................................408
8.1.4 Huawei OCS ASON Solution..................................................................................................................................410
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxii

8.1.5 Introduction and Development of the OTN ASON.................................................................................................412

8.1.6 Introduction and Development of the OCS ASON.................................................................................................413
8.2 ASON Software and ASON Functions......................................................................................................................413
8.2.1 Basic Concepts of ASON........................................................................................................................................414
8.2.2 Structure of the ASON Transmission Network.......................................................................................................415
8.2.3 Location of ASON Software...................................................................................................................................416
8.2.4 Structure of ASON Software...................................................................................................................................417
8.2.5 ASON Standards......................................................................................................................................................419
8.2.6 ASON Protocol........................................................................................................................................................420
8.2.7 OTN ASON Links...................................................................................................................................................423
8.2.8 OCS ASON Links...................................................................................................................................................429
8.2.9 Function Structure of the OTN ASON....................................................................................................................430
8.2.10 Function Structure of the OCS ASON..................................................................................................................432
8.2.11 ASON Network Protection and Restoration..........................................................................................................434
8.3 Creation and Deletion of the ASON Trail..................................................................................................................435
8.3.1 Creation of an LSP..................................................................................................................................................435
8.3.2 Deletion of an LSP..................................................................................................................................................436
8.3.3 Rerouting of an LSP................................................................................................................................................437
8.3.4 Change of an LSP....................................................................................................................................................439
8.4 Specifications of ASON Services...............................................................................................................................439
8.5 Conditions for Configuring ASON Services..............................................................................................................446
8.6 OTN ASON Feature...................................................................................................................................................449
8.6.1 End-to-End Service Configuration..........................................................................................................................449
8.6.2 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration.........................................................................................................450
8.6.3 Automatic Discovery of Topologies and Resources Management..........................................................................451
8.6.3.1 Auto-Discovery of ASON NEs............................................................................................................................452
8.6.3.2 Auto-Discovery of Control Links.........................................................................................................................452
8.6.3.3 Auto-Discovery of TE Links................................................................................................................................454
8.6.3.4 Monitoring Link Loss Status................................................................................................................................455
8.6.3.5 Wavelength Range Configuration and Management............................................................................................457
8.6.4 SLA Classification of Services................................................................................................................................457
8.6.4.1 Diamond WDM ASON Trail...............................................................................................................................458
8.6.4.2 Dual-Homing Diamond ASON Trails..................................................................................................................462
8.6.4.3 Silver WDM ASON Trail.....................................................................................................................................463
8.6.4.4 Copper WDM ASON Trail...................................................................................................................................465
8.6.5 Rerouting Trigger Policy.........................................................................................................................................466
8.6.6 Crankback Mechanism ...........................................................................................................................................469
8.6.7 Network Traffic Engineering...................................................................................................................................470
8.6.8 Service Association.................................................................................................................................................472
8.6.9 Service Optimization...............................................................................................................................................474
8.6.10 Service Migration..................................................................................................................................................474
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiii

8.6.11 Preset Restoration Trail.........................................................................................................................................475

8.6.12 Trail Pre-Computation and Adjustment................................................................................................................478
8.6.13 Service Reversion Mechanism..............................................................................................................................478
8.6.14 Dynamic Rerouting Based on Optical Parameters................................................................................................480
8.6.15 Resource Sharing of Trails....................................................................................................................................480
8.6.16 ASON Features Based on the Split of Optical and Electrical NEs........................................................................483
8.6.17 ASON Services Traversing Third-Party Equipment.............................................................................................486
8.6.18 ASON Service Creation on Faulty Trails..............................................................................................................487
8.6.19 Auto-Separation of the Working and Protection Trails.........................................................................................488
8.7 OCS ASON Feature....................................................................................................................................................489
8.7.1 End-to-End Service Configuration..........................................................................................................................489
8.7.2 Protection and Restoration in an ASON Network...................................................................................................490
8.7.3 Automatic Discovery of Topologies and Resources Management..........................................................................491
8.7.3.1 Auto-Discovery of ASON Nes.............................................................................................................................491
8.7.3.2 Auto-Discovery of Control Links.........................................................................................................................492
8.7.3.3 Auto-Discovery of TE Links................................................................................................................................494
8.7.4 SLA..........................................................................................................................................................................494
8.7.4.1 Diamond Services.................................................................................................................................................497
8.7.4.2 Gold Services........................................................................................................................................................502
8.7.4.3 Silver Services......................................................................................................................................................504
8.7.4.4 Copper Services....................................................................................................................................................506
8.7.4.5 Iron Services.........................................................................................................................................................506
8.7.5 Rerouting Trigger Policy.........................................................................................................................................507
8.7.6 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail................................................................................................................................511
8.7.7 Crankback Mechanism ...........................................................................................................................................512
8.7.8 Network Traffic Engineering...................................................................................................................................513
8.7.9 Service Association.................................................................................................................................................515
8.7.10 Service Optimization.............................................................................................................................................516
8.7.11 Service Migration..................................................................................................................................................516
8.7.12 Presetting the Restoration Trail.............................................................................................................................517
8.7.13 Trail Pre-Computation and Adjustment................................................................................................................518
8.7.14 Reverting Services to Original Routes..................................................................................................................518
8.7.15 Merging an ASON Network with a Traditional SDH Network............................................................................518
8.7.16 ASON Service Creation on Interrupted Trails......................................................................................................524
9 Operation and Maintenance....................................................................................................526

9.1 End-to-End Service Configuration.............................................................................................................................528
9.2 Alarm and Performance Event Management..............................................................................................................528
9.3 Online Monitoring......................................................................................................................................................529
9.4 ETH-OAM..................................................................................................................................................................532
9.5 MPLS-TP OAM.........................................................................................................................................................534
9.6 Optical Doctor............................................................................................................................................................535
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiv

9.6.1 System Overview.....................................................................................................................................................535

9.6.2 Glance at OD Functions..........................................................................................................................................539
9.7 TP-Assist Solution of Packet Services.......................................................................................................................541
9.8 Loopback....................................................................................................................................................................544
9.8.1 Hardware Loopback................................................................................................................................................544
9.8.2 Software Loopback .................................................................................................................................................545
9.8.3 Software Loopback (with L2 Function)..................................................................................................................547
9.8.4 Software Loopback For TN52TOM........................................................................................................................549
9.8.5 Software Loopbacks for TN11LOA........................................................................................................................554
9.8.6 Software Loopbacks for TN54TOA........................................................................................................................557
9.8.7 Software Loopbacks for TN54THA........................................................................................................................559
9.9 PRBS Test...................................................................................................................................................................561
9.10 Tunable Wavelengths...............................................................................................................................................563
9.11 Jitter Suppression Function......................................................................................................................................563
9.12 Hot Patch..................................................................................................................................................................563
9.13 Software Package Loading and Software Package Diffusion..................................................................................564
9.14 OAMS.......................................................................................................................................................................565
9.15 Orderwire Function...................................................................................................................................................570
9.16 One-Click Data Collection.......................................................................................................................................571
9.17 License Control.........................................................................................................................................................571
9.17.1 Feature License......................................................................................................................................................571
9.17.2 Service Type and Cross-Connect Capacity License..............................................................................................572
10 Security Management.............................................................................................................575
11 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................578
11.1 Transmission Distance and Optical Spans................................................................................................................580
11.2 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the DWDM System ....................................................................582
11.3 Nominal Central Wavelengths of the CWDM System ............................................................................................584
11.4 Laser Class................................................................................................................................................................584
11.5 General Specifications..............................................................................................................................................585
11.5.1 Cabinet Specifications...........................................................................................................................................585
11.5.2 Subrack Specifications..........................................................................................................................................586
11.5.3 DCM Frame Specifications...................................................................................................................................596
11.5.4 CRPC Frame Specification....................................................................................................................................597
11.5.5 Fan-Tray Assembly Specifications........................................................................................................................597
11.6 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications.................................................................................................................598
11.6.1 LDM Board Specifications....................................................................................................................................598
11.6.2 LDMD Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................607
11.6.3 LDMS Board Specifications..................................................................................................................................615
11.6.4 LDX Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................622
11.6.5 LEM24 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................630
11.6.6 LEX4 Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................636
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxv

11.6.7 LOA Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................642

11.6.8 LOG Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................660
11.6.9 LOM Board Specifications....................................................................................................................................673
11.6.10 LQM Board Specifications..................................................................................................................................687
11.6.11 LQMD Board Specifications...............................................................................................................................696
11.6.12 LQMS Board Specifications................................................................................................................................706
11.6.13 LSC Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................715
11.6.14 LSQ Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................732
11.6.15 LSX Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................734
11.6.16 LSXL Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................747
11.6.17 LSXLR Board Specifications..............................................................................................................................751
11.6.18 LSXR Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................753
11.6.19 LTX Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................757
11.6.20 LWXS Board Specifications...............................................................................................................................762
11.6.21 TMX Board Specifications..................................................................................................................................771
11.6.22 Jitter Transfer Characteristics..............................................................................................................................782
11.6.23 Input Jitter Tolerance...........................................................................................................................................783
11.6.24 Output Jitter.........................................................................................................................................................784
11.7 OTN Tributary Unit Specifications..........................................................................................................................785
11.7.1 TDX Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................785
11.7.2 TEM28 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................789
11.7.3 THA Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................792
11.7.4 TOA Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................797
11.7.5 TOG Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................807
11.7.6 TOM Board Specifications....................................................................................................................................811
11.7.7 TOX Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................825
11.7.8 TQX Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................829
11.7.9 TSC Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................834
11.7.10 TSXL Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................842
11.7.11 TTX Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................846
11.8 OTN Line Board Specifications...............................................................................................................................849
11.8.1 ND2 Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................849
11.8.2 NO2 Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................857
11.8.3 NQ2 Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................860
11.8.4 NS2 Board Specifications......................................................................................................................................865
11.8.7 NS4M Board Specifications..................................................................................................................................890
11.9 Universal Line Board Specifications........................................................................................................................891
11.9.1 HUNQ2 Board Specifications...............................................................................................................................891
11.9.2 HUNS3 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................896
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvi

11.10 Packet Service Board Specifications......................................................................................................................898

11.10.1 EG16 Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................898
11.10.2 EX2 Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................901
11.10.3 PND2 Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................903
11.11 PID Unit Specifications..........................................................................................................................................907
11.11.1 ENQ2 Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................907
11.11.2 NPO2 Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................908
11.11.3 NPO2E Board Specifications..............................................................................................................................910
11.12 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Demultiplexer Unit Specifications..........................................................................912
11.12.1 D40 Board Specifications....................................................................................................................................913
11.12.2 D40V Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................914
11.12.3 FIU Board Specifications....................................................................................................................................915
11.12.4 ITL Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................................916
11.12.5 M40 Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................918
11.12.6 M40V Board Specifications................................................................................................................................919
11.12.7 SFIU Board Specifications..................................................................................................................................920
11.13 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Unit Specifications...............................................................................922
11.13.1 CMR2 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................922
11.13.2 CMR4 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................923
11.13.3 DMR1 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................925
11.13.4 MR2 Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................926
11.13.7 MR8V Board Specifications................................................................................................................................933
11.13.8 SBM2 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................936
11.14 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit Specifications.............................................................936
11.14.1 RDU9 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................937
11.14.2 RMU9 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................937
11.14.3 ROAM Board Specifications...............................................................................................................................938
11.14.4 TD20 Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................940
11.14.5 TM20 Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................941
11.14.6 WSD9 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................942
11.14.7 WSM9 Board Specifications...............................................................................................................................944
11.14.8 WSMD2 Board Specifications............................................................................................................................946
11.14.9 WSMD4 Board Specifications............................................................................................................................947
11.14.10 WSMD9 Board Specifications..........................................................................................................................948
11.15 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications....................................................................................................................951
11.15.1 BPA Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................952
11.15.2 CRPC Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................953
11.15.3 DAS1 Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................954
11.15.4 HBA Board Specifications..................................................................................................................................957
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvii

11.15.5 OAU1 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................958

11.15.6 OBU1 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................970
11.15.7 OBU2 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................973
11.15.8 RAU1 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................975
11.15.9 RAU2 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................980
11.16 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit Specifications...........................................................984
11.16.1 TN52XCH Board Specifications.........................................................................................................................984
11.16.2 TN16XCH Board Specifications.........................................................................................................................985
11.16.3 SXH Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................986
11.16.4 SXM Board Specifications..................................................................................................................................986
11.16.5 USXH Board Specifications................................................................................................................................987
11.16.6 UXCH Board Specifications...............................................................................................................................988
11.16.7 TN16UXCM Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................989
11.16.8 TN52UXCM Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................989
11.16.9 UXCT Board Specifications................................................................................................................................990
11.16.10 XCM Board Specifications................................................................................................................................991
11.16.11 XCT Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................991
11.16.12 SCC Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................992
11.16.13 AUX Board Specifications................................................................................................................................993
11.17 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Specifications..................................................................................................994
11.17.1 HSC1 Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................994
11.17.2 SC1 Board Specifications....................................................................................................................................996
11.17.3 SC2 Board Specifications....................................................................................................................................997
11.17.4 ST2 Board Specifications....................................................................................................................................998
11.18 Optical Protection Unit Specifications...................................................................................................................999
11.18.1 DCP Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................999
11.18.2 OLP Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................1000
11.18.3 SCS Board Specifications..................................................................................................................................1002
11.19 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications...............................................................................................................1003
11.19.1 MCA4 Board Specifications..............................................................................................................................1003
11.19.2 MCA8 Board Specifications..............................................................................................................................1004
11.19.3 OPM8 Board Specifications..............................................................................................................................1005
11.19.4 WMU Board Specifications...............................................................................................................................1006
11.20 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications..................................................................................................1007
11.20.1 VA1 Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................1007
11.20.2 VA4 Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................1008
11.21 Dispersion Equalizing Board Specifications........................................................................................................1009
11.21.1 DCU Board Specifications................................................................................................................................1009
11.21.2 TDC Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................1011
11.22 Clock Unit Specifications.....................................................................................................................................1012
11.22.1 STG Board Specifications.................................................................................................................................1012
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxviii

11.23 TDM Board Specifications...................................................................................................................................1012

11.23.1 EAS2 Board Specifications...............................................................................................................................1013
11.23.2 EGSH Board Specifications..............................................................................................................................1016
11.23.3 SF64 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................1017
11.23.4 SF64A Board Specifications.............................................................................................................................1020
11.23.5 SFD64 Board Specifications.............................................................................................................................1022
11.23.6 SL64 Board Specifications................................................................................................................................1025
11.23.7 SLD64 Board Specifications.............................................................................................................................1027
11.23.8 SLH41 Board Specifications.............................................................................................................................1029
11.23.9 SLO16 Board Specifications.............................................................................................................................1033
11.23.10 SLQ16 Board Specifications...........................................................................................................................1036
11.23.11 SLQ64 Board Specifications...........................................................................................................................1039
11.24 DCM Specifications ............................................................................................................................................1040
12 Energy Saving and Environment Protection....................................................................1044

12.1 Energy Saving.........................................................................................................................................................1045
12.1.1 Static Energy Conservation.................................................................................................................................1045
12.1.2 Dynamic Energy Conservation............................................................................................................................1045
12.1.3 Control and Monitoring of Energy Conservation................................................................................................1046
12.2 Environment Protection..........................................................................................................................................1046
13 Environment Requirement..................................................................................................1048
13.1 Storage Environment..............................................................................................................................................1049
13.2 Transport Environment...........................................................................................................................................1050
13.3 Operation Environment..........................................................................................................................................1053
A Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards..............................................1056

B Complied Standards...............................................................................................................1138
B.1 ANSI Standards.......................................................................................................................................................1139
B.2 IEEE Standards........................................................................................................................................................1139
B.3 IETF Standards........................................................................................................................................................1140
B.4 ITU-T Recommendations........................................................................................................................................1141
B.5 MEF Standards.........................................................................................................................................................1146
B.6 International Standards............................................................................................................................................1147
B.7 EMC Standards........................................................................................................................................................1147
B.8 Environment Related Standards...............................................................................................................................1149
B.9 Grounding Standards...............................................................................................................................................1153
B.10 Laser Security Standards........................................................................................................................................1153
B.11 Security Standards.................................................................................................................................................1153
B.12 Noise Standards.....................................................................................................................................................1154
B.13 Fireproofing Standards...........................................................................................................................................1154
C Technology Reference...........................................................................................................1156
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxix

C.1 FEC Function...........................................................................................................................................................1158

C.2 Coherent Receiver Technology................................................................................................................................1158
C.3 Chromatic Dispersion Compensation......................................................................................................................1159
C.4 Delay........................................................................................................................................................................1159
C.5 SBS Suppresses........................................................................................................................................................1160
C.6 GFP Technology......................................................................................................................................................1160
C.7 ODB Technology.....................................................................................................................................................1160
C.8 DQPSK Technology................................................................................................................................................1161
C.9 ePDM-QPSK Technology.......................................................................................................................................1161
C.10 ePDM-BPSK Technology......................................................................................................................................1161
C.11 EDFA Technology.................................................................................................................................................1162
C.12 Raman Amplification.............................................................................................................................................1162
D Glossary....................................................................................................................................1164
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxx

Product Description 1 Introduction
1 Introduction
About This Chapter
1.1 Product Highlights and Specifications

The OptiX OSN 8800 equipments use the same software and hardware platforms and therefore
they share most of the boards. However, each of them has its own highlights that address diverse
network requirements.
1.2 Typical Networking

The OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform (OptiX OSN 8800 for short) is a
new generation of intelligent MS-OTN product. It is a future-proof product launched to address
the IP-based metro network development trend. Using a new architecture, the product supports
dynamic optical-layer grooming and flexible electrical-layer grooming. In addition, the product
features high integration and reliability and supports multi-service transmission.
1.3 Typical Application
Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.1 Product Highlights and Specifications

The OptiX OSN 8800 equipments use the same software and hardware platforms and therefore
they share most of the boards. However, each of them has its own highlights that address diverse
network requirements.
1.1.1 Product Highlights

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports 40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s line rates and a 6.4 Tbit/s cross-connect
capacity. It features power saving, and high reliability and maintainability.
Highest Cross-Connect Capacity with Flexible Large-Capacity Service Grooming

l Features high cross-connect capacity. A single subrack supports a maximum of 6.4 Tbit/s
cross-connect capacity, implementing large-capacity service grooming. Only one subrack
is required for the large-capacity service grooming and therefore lowers power
consumption and reduces the floor space.
l Supports multi-granularity OTN cross-connection, that is, ODUk cross-connection, where
k can be 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex.
l Supports encapsulation of VC, ODUk, and packet services by using universal line boards
and unified switching of VC, ODUk, and packet services by using cross-connect boards,
which achieves converged service grooming planes and flexible bandwidth allocation.
Leading 100G Transport Solution

l Supports comprehensive soft decision (SDFEC and SDFEC2) and hard decision (HFEC)
schemes to address various long-haul transmission requirements.
l Supports cost-effective metro 100G solutions to provide large-bandwidth and low-delay
pipes for metro networks.
l Supports hybrid transmission of 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s services, protecting
carriers' investments.
l Supports flexible ROADM to provide the optical-layer platform for a beyond 100G system
in future.
Tier 1 Reliability and Mass Data Transmission with Optimal Architecture

l Provides multiple network-level protection schemes and intelligent network management
based on automatically switched optical network (ASON)/generalized multiprotocol label
switching (GMPLS) technologies to protect all fibers and services.
l Provides protection for power supply devices, fans, communication control boards, and the
cross-connection resource pool.
Low Power Consumption and High Maintainability, Providing the Minimizing

OPEX
l Provides environment-friendly OTN solutions using various low-carbon technologies.

l Newly supports 19-inch subracks and can be installed in various types of cabinets, such as
19-inch cabinet or ETSI cabinet.
l Supports overall network performance monitoring using the user-friendly optical doctor
(OD) system embedded in the U2000.
l Supports seamless interconnection with OptiX OSN 6800/3800/1800 and achieves end-to-
end network management.
1.1.2 Product Specifications
Table 1-1 describes the product appearance and highlights for OptiX OSN 8800.
Table 1-1 Product appearance and highlights for OptiX OSN 8800
Specifications OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 8800 T32a OptiX OSN 8800 T64a
Product appearance
Dimensions (mm) 498 (W) x 295 (D) x 450 498 (W) x 295 (D) x 900 498 (W) x 580 (D) x 900
(H) (H) (H)
Number of slots for 16 32 64

service boards
Optical 1 to 9-degree ROADM
l 1.6T ODUk(k=0, 1, 2, Enhanced subrack: Enhanced subrack:

2e, 3, 4, flex) l 3.2T ODUk(k=0, 1, 2, l 6.4T ODUk(k=0, 1, 2,
l 640G VC-4 and 20G 2e, 3, 3e, 4, flex) 2e, 3, 4, flex)
VC-3/VC-12 l 1.28T VC-4 and 80G l 1.28T VC-4 and 80G
l 800G Packet VC-3/VC-12 VC-3/VC-12
Switc
h l 1.6T Packet General subrack:
Electrical
General subrack: l 2.56T ODUk(k=0, 1, 2,
l 2.56T ODUk(k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex)
2e, 3, 4, flex) l 1.28T VC-4 and 80G
l 1.28T VC-4 and 80G VC-3/VC-12
VC-3/VC-12
l 640G Packet
Wavelength (max) DWDM: 80-ch, CWDM: 8-ch
Wavelength range DWDM: 1529.16 nm to 1560.61 nm (Band-C, ITU-T G.694.1)

CWDM: 1471 nm to 1611 nm (Band S+C+L, ITU-T G.694.2)

Max. rate per channel 100Gbit/s (OTU4)
Max. distance Multi-span transmission (without electrical regeneration): 32 span x 22 dB/span (10G),
25 span x 22 dB/span (40G), 26 span x 22 dB/span (100G)
Ultra-long single-span transmission: 1 span x 81 dB/span (10G), 1 span x 71 dB/span
(40G)
Service types supported SDH, SONET, Ethernet, SAN, OTN, Video
Line rate 2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s
Supported pluggable eSFP, SFP+, XFP, CFP

optical modules
Max. capacity per PID 200 Gbit/s

group
Topology Point-to-point, chain, star, ring, ring-with-chain, tangent ring, intersecting ring and
mesh
Redun Network level Optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, client 1+1 protection, ODUk
dancy protection SNCP, tributary SNCP, SW SNCP, ODUk SPRing protection, OWSP
and (OTN)
Protec
tion Network level Linear MSP, MSP ring, transoceanic MSP ring, SNCP, SNCTP
protection
(OCS)
Network level DBPS, DLAG, ERPS, DBPS, DLAG, ERPS, DBPS, DLAG, ERPS,
protection LAG, LPT, MC-LAG, LAG, LPT, MC-LAG, LAG, LPT, MC-LAG,
(Ethernet and MSTP, PW APS, STP and MSTP, PW APS, STP and MSTP, STP and RSTP,
packet) RSTP, Tunnel APS, RSTP, Tunnel APS, VLAN SNCP
VLAN SNCP VLAN SNCP
Equipment Power redundancy, fan redundancy, cross-connect board redundancy, system control
level protection and communication board redundancy, centralized clock board redundancy, AUX
Board 1+1 Redundancy
Optical power ALS, AGC, ALC, APE, IPA, OPA

management
Synchronization l Synchronous Ethernet clock

l IEEE 1588v2
l 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz (with the SSM function), ITU-T G.703-compliant external clock
source
l External time source (1PPS+TOD)
ASON l An OTN network supports the Optical-Layer ASON and electrical-Layer ASON.
l An OCS network supports the SDH ASON feature.
Nominal working -48 V DC/-60 V DC

voltage

Typical configuration l OTN subrack: 700W Enhanced 8800 T32 Enhanced 8800 T64
power consumption l OCS subrack: 821W l OTN subrack: 3300W l OTN subrack: 6000W
l OCS subrack: 1791W l OCS subrack: 2135W
General 8800 T32 General 8800 T64
l OTN subrack: 2000W l OTN subrack: 3700W
l OCS subrack: 1282W l OCS subrack: 1748W
Maximum subrack 1800W l Enhanced 8800 T32: l Enhanced 8800 T64:

power consumptionb 4800W 9600W
l General 8800 T32: l General 8800 T64:
3500W 6500W
Operation Environment Subrack temperature:

l Long-term operation: 5°C (41 °F) to 40°C (104 °F)
l Short-term operation: -5°C (23 °F) to 45°C (113 °F)
Relative humidity:
l Long-term operation: 5% to 85%
l Short-term operation: 5% to 90%
Mean Time to Repair 4 hours 4 hours 4 hours

(MTTR)
Mean Time Between 62.80 years 60.40 years 58.68 years

Failures (MTBF)
1.2 Typical Networking

The OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform (OptiX OSN 8800 for short) is a
new generation of intelligent MS-OTN product. It is a future-proof product launched to address
the IP-based metro network development trend. Using a new architecture, the product supports
dynamic optical-layer grooming and flexible electrical-layer grooming. In addition, the product
features high integration and reliability and supports multi-service transmission.
The OptiX OSN 8800 is used for long haul backbone, area backbones, local networks,
metropolitan convergence layers and metropolitan core layers. The OptiX OSN 8800 uses dense
wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) or coarse wavelength division multiplexing
(CWDM) technologies to achieve transparent transmission with multiple services and large
capacity.
1.2.1 Typical OTN Networking

The OptiX OSN 8800 can interconnect with any product from the OptiX OSN product series,
such as the OptiX OSN 1800, to form an end-to-end OTN network.

Figure 1-1 shows typical OTN networking. The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 mainly applies to the
metropolitan convergence layers. The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN 8800 T64 mainly
apply to the backbone or metropolitan core layer.
Figure 1-1 Typical OTN networking
OptiX OSN
8800 T32 OptiX OSN
8800 T32
ODUk ODUk
OptiX OSN
8800 T64 Switching Switching
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN Backbones
8800 T64 8800 T64 core layers
OptiX OSN
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN
8800 T16
8800 T16 OptiX OSN OptiX OSN
8800 T16
8800 T32 8800 T32
ODUk ODUk ODUk

Switching Switching Switching
Metropolitan
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN OptiX OSN convergence layers/
OptiX OSN
8800 T16 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Metropolitan
8800 T16 core layer
8800 T16
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN

1800 OptiX OSN 1800
OptiX OSN
1800 1800
ODUk ODUk
Switching Switching
OptiX OSN ODUk
1800 Switching
OptiX OSN
1800 OptiX OSN OptiX OSN Access
1800 OptiX OSN 1800 layers
1800
1.2.2 Typical OCS Networking

The OptiX OSN 8800 can interconnect with the NG SDH equipment to form a hybrid network,
which results in a complete transport solution. The OptiX OSN 8800 intelligent optical switching
platform (the OptiX OSN 8800 for short) functions as optical core switching (OCS) equipment.
It is mainly used as key service grooming nodes at national backbones, provincial backbones,
and metropolitan area network (MAN) backbones.
Figure 1-2 shows typical OCS networking.

Figure 1-2 Typical OCS networking

OptiX OSN OptiX OSN
8800 T64 8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN VC
STM-64 VC
8800 T32 Switching STM-64
Switching
OptiX OSN
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN Backbones
8800 T64 8800 T16 core layers
OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN OptiX OSN
2500 3500 OptiX OSN
VC 3500
STM-16
Switching VC
STM-16
Switching
OptiX OSN
Metropolitan
2500
convergence layers/
OptiX OSN 2500 Metropolitan
OptiX OSN 3500
core layer
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN

1500 OptiX OSN 2500
2500
VC
STM-4/1 VC OptiX OSN
Switching STM-4/1 2500
Switching
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN
1500 1500
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN
1500 2500
Access
layers
1.2.3 Typical MS-OTN Networking

The OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T16 supports unified switching and control based on ODUk, VC,
and packets, achieving unified switching and transmission for multiple services on a single multi-
service optical transport network (MS-OTN).
Figure 1-3 shows typical MS-OTN networking.

Figure 1-3 Typical MS-OTN networking
OptiX OSN
8800 T32 OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN ODUk/VC/Packet ODUk/VC/Packet

Switching Switching
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN Backbones
OptiX OSN
8800 T32 core layers
8800 T32
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN

OptiX OSN OptiX OSN
8800 T32 8800 T32
8800 T32 8800 T32
ODUk/VC/Packet ODUk/VC/Packet ODUk/VC/Packet

STM-16 Switching
STM-64
Switching Switching
OptiX OSN Metropolitan

8800 T32 OptiX OSN OptiX OSN convergence layers/
8800 T16 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN Metropolitan
8800 T32 8800 T32
core layer
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN

550 OptiX OSN 1800
OptiX OSN
500 1800
VC/Packet ODUk
Switching Switching
VC/Packet
OptiX OSN
Switching
550 OptiX OSN
550 OptiX OSN OptiX OSN Access
500 OptiX OSN 1800 layers
500
1.3 Typical Application
1.3.1 Mobile Service Transmission: Fast Service Deployment with

High Bandwidth, Low Latency, and Low Costs
As the mobile network evolves from 2G to 3G/LTE, the transport network faces higher
requirements. An E2E multi-service OTN (MS-OTN) mobile bearer solution can address issues
generated during mobile broadband evolution and support fast service deployment with low
costs.
Mobile broadband (MBB) has the following requirements on the transport network:
l High bandwidth: The bearer bandwidth requirement rapidly increases as data services grow
rapidly.
l Low latency: The latency is shortened to 50 ms while the latency of a 2G network is 200
ms.
l Multi-layer structure: Three layers are involved (macro, micro, and pico base stations) and
each layer has an explosive growth.

l Use of X2 interfaces: eNodeBs are connected and the connections increase exponentially,
making deployment complex.
The MS-OTN mobile bearer solution can carry 2G, 3G, and LTE services at the same time. Base
transceiver stations (BTSs) are connected to an MS-OTN network through E1 links, while
NodeBs and eNodeBs are connected to the MS-OTN network through FE and GE links, as shown
in Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4 MS-OTN mobile bearer solution
Table 1-2 Comparison of MS-OTN mobile service transmission solutions
Solution Application Scenario
E2E VPWS VLANs that support unified planning of transport and wireless
devices.
Services at different base stations are identified using VLAN
IDs.
VPWS+VPLS VLANs that do not support unified planning of transport and

wireless devices.
Base stations can use duplicate VLAN IDs. Core devices
forward services to correct destinations based on MAC
addresses.
NOTE
l VPWS (Virtual Private Wire Service): a technology that bears Layer 2 private line services. VPWS
emulates services such as Ethernet and low-speed time division multiplexing (TDM) in a packet
switched network (PSN).
l VPLS (Virtual Private LAN Service): a technology that bears Layer 2 private network services based
on MPLS and Ethernet technologies. VPLS is also called transparent LAN service (TLS) or virtual
private switched network service (VPSNS).

1.3.2 MAN Broadband Transmission: Addressing the Issue of

Insufficient Bandwidth and Fiber Resources
Metropolitan area network (MAN) broadband is the main fixed network bearer scenario. With
the multi-service OTN (MS-OTN), MAN broadband networks can address the issue of
insufficient bandwidth and fiber resources and at the same time provide better service
transmission quality.
The MAN has two development trends and therefore MAN broadband networks face higher
requirements.
l As bandwidth requirements increase, a device is expected to address the issue of insufficient

bandwidth and fiber resources so that the network becomes flattened.
In the next several years, the compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of MAN bandwidth
is estimated to exceed 35%. In other words, MAN bandwidth five years later will become
4 times of the existing bandwidth. The main drive for bandwidth demand growth is no
longer the Internet access services that have a high convergence ratio, but is the video
services that do not have convergence requirements during network transmission. Then the
MAN capacity will be expanded 20 times five years later. On a typical traditional MAN
equipped with switches or routers, a single device is unable to meet the bandwidth
requirements after capacity expansion and therefore more devices need to be added in an
equipment room, which may result in insufficiency of fiber resources. Therefore, single
devices are expected to meet the bandwidth requirements, to address the issue of insufficient
fiber resources, and further to build a flat network. This becomes one of the main demands
for MAN development.
l Emergence of new applications and services request high-quality networks.
Diversified types of new services, such as Internet Protocol television (IPTV) and video
services, are developed. They have high requirements on network quality. For example,
video services require high bandwidth, low latency, and stable bidirectional flows, while
IPTV services have heavy downlink traffic and therefore have high requirements on
latency, packet loss rate, and protection. These high-quality requirements, such as low
latency and high reliability, cannot be addressed by a traditional MAN network.
Against this backdrop, the MS-OTN becomes the optimal application in the MAN broadband
network. The MS-OTN solution has the following significant benefits:
l Large capacity: The MS-OTN devices and single fibers support large capacity, which not
only addresses the current issue of insufficient resources but also meets future long-term
network development requirements.
l Flat network architecture: The all-in-one MS-OTN network prevents stacking of
redundancy devices. The solution not only reduces the number of required devices, power
consumption, and required floor space of an equipment room, but also reduces network
layers.
l High reliability: The MS-OTN solution provides various protection schemes against node,
fiber, and service faults and meets the carrier-class protection switching time requirement
(50 ms).
l Easy O&M: A visualized O&M system is used to support fault diagnosis during service
provisioning, commissioning, and O&M, improving network quality.
As shown in Figure 1-5, a MAN broadband network can be divided into the following parts:

l Application layer: It provides users with various content services, such as Internet access,
IPTV, and voice over IP (VoIP) soft switching services.
l MAN backbone layer: It implements port aggregation and rate conversion. For example,
services are received on 10GE ports at an access node and are converged and then
transmitted using 100GE ports at an convergence node connected to a core router.
l Broadband network gateway (BNG): It implements user authentication and protocol and
address conversion.
l MAN convergence layer: It implements service allocation, service transmission, and
distance extension.
l Access layer: It provides applications, such as the x digital subscriber line (xDSL), to
implement conversion between IP and Ethernet services.
l Home/Business network layer: It is an end user network providing users with TV, Internet,
and telephone interfaces.
Figure 1-5 MAN broadband network
On a MAN broadband network, the MS-OTN applies to the MAN backbone and MAN
convergence layers.

1.3.3 Leased Line Transmission: Services of Various Types and

Rates
Leased lines are important for network operation. The multi-service OTN (MS-OTN) can carry
leased line services of various types and rates and has many advantages, such as high bandwidth,
high reliability, high security, high flexibility, and low costs.
E1 services were mainstream leased line services. With the wider deployment of information
technologies, new applications, such as video conference and cloud computing, are rapidly
developed, and FE and GE services are gradually becoming the mainstream private line services.
As a result, private line services of various types and rates will coexist for a long time.
A traditional solution uses different types of devices, such as SDH devices, switches, and WDM
devices, to transmit specific types and rates of services. Consequently, a huge number of devices
are stacked, occupying plenty of equipment room space, consuming much power, and making
network O&M difficult.
MS-OTN devices use both bandwidth-fixed and bandwidth-flexible channels to flexibly allocate
line bandwidth resources and effectively carry any-rate granularities. This capability resolves
the issues of device stacking and difficult O&M.
As shown in Figure 1-6, three leased line models are available: point to point (P2P), point to
multi-point (P2MP), and multi-point to multi-point (MP2MP). Layer 2 switching is required for
P2MP and MP2MP leased lines.

Figure 1-6 Leased line models
P2P
UNI UNI
CE CE
P2MP UNI
CE
UNI UNI
CE CE
CE
UNI
MP2MP UNI
CE
UNI
CE UNI
CE
CE
UNI
The MS-OTN can carry services based on specific cross-connect planes (OTN, packet, and TDM
planes) to provide users with differentiated services. On the MS-OTN, leased line services on
different planes are encapsulated into different lower order ODUk channels and then multiplexed
into the same higher order ODUk channels for unified transmission.
Table 1-3 MS-OTN leased line solution
Solution Name Characteristic
Leased line based on High-level large-granularity leased line services are supported, and
the OTN plane bandwidth-fixed ODUk channels are mainly used. Particularly, the
supported Ethernet over OTN (EoO) feature not only adjusts
bandwidth at the access side through Layer 2 processing, but also
supports bandwidth-flexible ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, flex) channels on the
line side. Services can be provided with high quality of service (QoS),
high security, and high reliability.

Solution Name Characteristic
Leased line based on Dynamic grooming and flexible bandwidth adjustment are supported,
the packet plane and E2E multiprotocol label switching transport profile (MPLS-TP)
lines are mainly used.
Leased line based on Traditional time division multiplexing (TDM) services are supported,
the TDM plane and E1 or STM-N channels are mainly used.
Leased Line Based on the OTN Plane

A leased line based on the OTN plane directly encapsulates the received services into ODUk
granularities, which are then transmitted over the MS-OTN network. Service grooming is
implemented using ODUk cross-connections. Figure 1-7 uses a GE service as an example to
explain the leased line solution based on the OTN plane.
Figure 1-7 GE leased line based on the OTN plane
Encapsulation Encapsulation
and transparent and transparent
transmission transmission
MS-OTN
GE ODUk GE
N/A ODUk SNCP N/A

Protection
Leased Line Based on the Packet Plane

A leased line based on the packet plane implements Layer 2 switching on the received services,
which are then encapsulated into PWE3 for transmission over MPLS tunnels. Service grooming
is implemented using packet cross-connections. Figure 1-8, Figure 1-9, and Figure 1-10 use
an Ethernet service as an example to explain the leased line solution based on the packet plane.

Figure 1-8 P2P leased line based on the packet plane
VPWS VPWS
MS-OTN
VLAN LSP VLAN
LAG Tunnel APS/PW APS LAG

Protection
Figure 1-9 P2MP leased line based on the packet plane
VPWS VPWS
VLAN VLAN
MS-OTN
B C
LSP
LSP
VLAN LSP VLAN

A VPLS/VPWS D
VPWS

Protection

Figure 1-10 MP2MP leased line based on the packet plane
VPLS
VLAN
MS-OTN
B
LSP
LSP
VLAN
VLAN
VPLS LSP
A VPLS C

Protection
A leased line based on the packet plane can be equipped with the QoS feature to provide
differentiated services, and the OAM feature to effectively detect, identify, and locate network
faults.
Leased Line Based on the TDM Plane

A leased line based on the TDM plane directly encapsulates the received services into VCs.
Service grooming is implemented using VC cross-connections. Figure 1-11 uses an STM-N
service as an example to explain the leased line solution based on the TDM plane.
Figure 1-11 STM-N leased line based on the TDM plane
Encapsulation and Encapsulation and

transparent transparent
transmission transmission
MS-OTN
STM-N STM-N
N/A SNCP/LMSP N/A

Protection

1.3.4 Integrated Transmission of Fixed Network Services and

Mobile Services: Broadband, Mobile, and Private Line Services
Carried Over the Same Network
Fixed mobile integrated carrier application is also called fixed mobile convergence (FMC),
which in essence carries fixed bandwidth, mobile, and private line services over one network.
As network operating services rapidly develop, many network carriers start to run mobile
services in addition to fixed network services, or vices versa. There are strong demands for
running new services.
The FMC solution supports various types of services, such as mobile, private line, and broadband
services. The MS-OTN uses E2E MPLS-TP channels to achieve integrated transmission of
various services.
Figure 1-12 FMC solution
Mobile services Router RNC/

E2E MPLS-TP
MME/
BTS/
SGW
NodeB/
eNB MS-OTN BSC
Broadband services MS-OTN

BRAS
DSLAM BRAS
Leased line services
Enterprises/government ... Enterprises/government ...

Product Description 2 System Architecture
2 System Architecture
The OptiX OSN 8800 system uses the L0 + L1 + L2 architecture. Ethernet/MPLS-TP switching
is implemented on Layer 2, ODUk/VC switching on Layer 1, and wavelength switching on Layer
0.
Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 8800 used as an
MS-OTN and an OCS system, respectively.

Figure 2-1 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 8800 (MS-OTN)

To line fiber
Client-side optical module

L0 Optical-layer board
L2 switching module
WDM-side optical module
Signal processing module
ODUk
Tributary board
L1 ODUk L1
Inteface processing module
Cross- Cross-
Signal processing module connect connect
VCx board board
VCx
(active) (standby)
SDH board
L2 Packets
Universal Line Board L2
(OTN/SDH/Packet)
Packets
WDM-side optical module Ethernet packet
switch board

ODUk
Line board
Clock board (active)
WDM-side optical module
Clock board (standby)
Signal processing module -48 V/-60 V DC

Power (active)
Power (standby)
L2 switching module
NMS Fans

External alarm
OTU board
Auxiliary
interface External clock/
System control and communication board external time
DCN board (active)
System control and communication
board (standby)
Backplane
Control and communication bus & Clock bus Electrical signal
Electrical cross-connect bus(ODUk/ODUflex) Optical-layer service
Electrical cross-connect bus(packets)

NOTE
In Figure 2-1, L2 switching module is marked in a dotted line box, indicating that not all the OTU or
tributary boards provide a Layer 2 switching module.
l An OTU board equipped with a Layer 2 switching module is referred to as an Ethernet over WDM
(EoW) board, such as an LEM24 or LEX4 board.
l A tributary board equipped with a Layer 2 switching module is referred to as an Ethernet over OTN
(EoO) board, such as a TEM28 board.
Figure 2-2 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS)

To line fiber
L0 Optical-layer board
Inteface processing module Inteface processing module
Signal processing module Signal processing module

L1 VCx VCx L1
Line board Line board
Cross- Cross-
connect connect
Inteface processing module board board
Clock board (active)
(active) (standy)
Clock board (standby)
L2 L2 switching module
、
Signal processing module Power (active) -48 V/-60 V DC
VCx
EoS board Power (standby)
Fans
NMS
External alarm
Auxiliary
interface External clock/
board external time
DCN System control and communication

board (active)
System control and communication
board (standby)
Backplane
Control and communication bus & Clock bus Optical-layer service
Electrical cross-connect bus Electrical signal
NOTE
An board equipped with a L2 switching module is referred to as an Ethernet over SDH (EoS) board in
Figure 2-2. such as an EGSH or EAS2 board.
Functions of modules are as follows:

l Optical-layer boards are classified into optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards,
optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) boards, optical amplifier (OA) boards, optical
supervisory channel (OSC) boards, optical spectrum analysis boards, optical variable
attenuator boards, and optical power and dispersion equalization boards. These boards are
intended to process optical-layer services, for example, to cross-connect wavelengths at
the optical layer.
l Electrical-layer boards such as OTU, tributary, and line boards are used to process
electrical-layer signals, and perform conversion between optical and electrical signals. The
OptiX OSN 8800 uses a tributary-line-separate architecture, and a centralized cross-
connect unit to flexibly groom electrical-layer signals at different granularities.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, an universal line board is used to process electrical-layer signals and
perform conversion between optical and electrical signals. In addition, an universal line
board can work with a centralized cross-connect board to achieve hybrid transmission and
fine-grained grooming of OTN, SDH, and packet services.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, EoO, EoW, Ethernet over SDH (EoS), and packet boards have L2
processing capabilities. They can add, strip, and exchange MPLS or VLAN tags, learn
MAC addresses, and forward packets. Only packet boards can add, strip, or exchange
MPLS tags.
l As the control center of the entire system, the system control and communication (SCC)
board cooperates with the network management system (NMS) to manage boards in the
system and to implement inter-subrack communication.
l The clock board provides system clock signals and frame header signals to each service
board, and synchronizes the local system time with the upstream system time, achieving
clock and time synchronization.
l The power supply and fan systems with a redundancy protection design ensure highly-
reliable equipment operation.
l The auxiliary interface board provides functional ports such as clock/time input/output
ports, management serial port, alarm output and cascading ports, and alarm input/output
ports.
l Inter-board communication and service cross-connections, clock synchronization, and
power supplies are implemented using the backplane buses. Backplane buses include
control and communication buses, clock buses, and power buses.

Product Description 3 Service Access
3 Service Access
About This Chapter
3.1 Service Types

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) services, synchronous
optical network (SONET) services, Ethernet services, storage area network (SAN) services,
optical transmission network (OTN) services, and video services.
3.2 Capability of Service Access
3.3 Sevice Mapping

This section describes the service mapping process on various boards for the OptiX OSN
8800.

3.1 Service Types

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) services, synchronous
optical network (SONET) services, Ethernet services, storage area network (SAN) services,
optical transmission network (OTN) services, and video services.
Table 3-1 lists the service types and rates that the OptiX OSN 8800 supports.
Table 3-2 lists the mapping between service types and OptiX OSN 8800 service boards.
Table 3-1 Service types and rates that the OptiX OSN 8800 supports
Service Service Type Service Rate Reference Standard

Category
SDH STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s ITU-T G.707
STM-4 622.08 Mbit/s ITU-T G.691

ITU-T G.957
STM-16 2.5 Gbit/s
ITU-T G.693
STM-64 9.95 Gbit/s ITU-T G.783
STM-256 39.81 Gbit/s ITU-T G.825
SONET OC-3 155.52 Mbit/s GR-253-CORE

GR-1377-CORE
OC-12 622.08 Mbit/s
ANSI T1.105
OC-48 2.5 Gbit/s
OC-192 9.95 Gbit/s
OC-768 39.81 Gbit/s
Ethernet FE (optical signal) Interface rate: 125 IEEE 802.3u

service Mbit/s
Service rate: 100 Mbit/
s
FE (electrical signal) Interface rate: 100

Mbit/s
Service rate: 100 Mbit/
s
GE(optical signal) Interface rate: 1.25 IEEE 802.3z

Gbit/s
Service rate: 1 Gbit/s
GE (electrical signal) Interface rate: 1 Gbit/s

Service rate: 1 Gbit/s
10GE WAN 9.95 Gbit/s IEEE 802.3ae


Category
10GE LAN 10.31 Gbit/s
40GE 41.25 Gbit/s IEEE 802.3ba
100GE 103.125 Gbit/s
SAN service ETR 16 Mbit/s IBM GDPS

( Geographically
CLO 16 Mbit/s Dispersed Parallel
Sysplex) Protocol
FDDI 125 Mbit/s ISO 9314
ESCON 200 Mbit/s ANSI X3.296

ANSI X3.230
FICON 1.06 Gbit/s
ANSI X3.303
FICON Express 2.12 Gbit/s
FC100 1.06 Gbit/s
FC200 2.12 Gbit/s
FC400 4.25 Gbit/s
FC800 8.5 Gbit/s
FC1200 10.51 Gbit/s
FICON4G 4.25 Gbit/s
FICON8G 8.5 Gbit/s
FICON10G 10.51 Gbit/s
ISC 1G 1.06 Gbit/s IBM GDPS

( Geographically
ISC 2G 2.12 Gbit/s Dispersed Parallel
Sysplex) Protocol
InfiniBand 2.5G 2.5 Gbit/s InfiniBand TM

Architecture Release
InfiniBand 5G 5 Gbit/s 1.2.1
OTN service OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s ITU-T G.709

ITU-T G.959.1
OTU2 10.71 Gbit/s
GR-2918-CORE
OTU2e 11.10 Gbit/s
OTU3 43.02 Gbit/s
OTU4 111.81 Gbit/s
Video service DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s EN 50083-9


Category
SDI 270 Mbit/s SMPTE 259M
HD-SDI 1.49 Gbit/s SMPTE 292M
HD-SDIRBR 1.49/1.001 Gbit/s
3G-SDI 2.97 Gbit/s SMPTE 424M
3G-SDIRBR 2.97/1.001 Gbit/s
FE: Fast Ethernet

GE: Gigabit Ethernet
ESCON: Enterprise System Connection
FICON: Fiber Connect
FC: Fiber Channel
DVB-ASI: Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface
SDI: Serial Digital Interface. As specified in the SMPTE-259M, SDI is also called SD-SDI.
HD-SDI: High Definition-Serial Digital Interface Signal
3G-SDI: 3G Serial Digital Interface
Table 3-2 Mapping between service types and OptiX OSN 8800 service boards
Service Service Type Board

Category
SDH STM-1 LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LQM, LQMD,

LQMS, LWXS, THA, TOA, TOM
STM-4 LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LQM, LQMD,

STM-16 LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LQM, LQMD,

LQMS, LWXS, TMX, THA, TOA, TOM
STM-64 LDX, LSX, LTX, TDX, TOX, TQX, TTX
STM-256 LSQ, LSXL, TSXL
SONET OC-3 LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LQM, LQMD,

OC-12 LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LQM, LQMD,

OC-48 LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LQM, LQMD,

LQMS, LWXS, TMX, THA, TOA, TOM
OC-192 LDX, LSX, LTX, TDX, TOX, TQX, TTX


Category
OC-768 LSQ, LSXL, TSXL
Ethernet FE (optical signal) EG16, LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LEM24, LOA,

service LQM, LQMD, LQMS, LWXS, THA, TOM
FE (electrical EG16, LEM24, TEM28

signal)
GE (optical signal) EG16, LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LOG, LOM,

LQM, LQMD, LQMS, LWXS, TEM28, THA,
TOG, TOM
GE (electrical EG16, LEM24, LOA, LOG, LOM, TEM28, TOA,

signal) TOG, TOM
10GE WAN LDX, LEM24, LEX4, LSX, LTX, TDX, TOX,

TQX, TTX
10GE LAN EX2, LDX, LEM24, LEX4, LOA, LSX, LTX,

TDX, TEM28, TOX, TQX, TTX
40GE TSXL
100GE LSC, TSC
SAN service ETR LWXS
CLO LWXS
FDDI LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LQM, LQMD,

ESCON LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LQM, LQMD,

ISC 1G LOM
ISC 2G LOM
FICON LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LOM, LQM, LQMD,

FICON Express LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LOM, LQM, LQMD,

FICON4G LOA, LOM, TOA
FICON8G LOA
FICON10G LOA
FC100 LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LOM, LQM, LQMD,



Category
FC200 LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LOM, LQM, LQMD,

FC400 LOA, LOM, TOA
FC800 LOA, TDX, TQX
FC1200 LOA, LSX, TDX, TQX
InfiniBand 2.5G LOA
InfiniBand 5G LOA
OTN service OTU1 LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LQM, LQMD,

LQMS, TMX, TOA
OTU2 LDX, LSX, LSXR, LTX(TN12), TDX, TOX, TQX
OTU2e LDX, LSX, LSXR, LTX(TN12), TDX, TOX, TQX
OTU3 LSQ, LSXL, LSXLR, TSXL
OTU4 LSC, TSC
Video service DVB-ASI LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LOA, LQM, LQMD,

SDI LOA, TOA, TOM(TN52)
HD-SDI LOA, TOA, TOM(TN52)
HD-SDIRBR LOA, TOA
3G-SDI LOA, LOM, TOA
3G-SDIRBR LOA, TOA
3.2 Capability of Service Access

Table 3-3 lists the capability of service access when the OptiX OSN 8800 functions as the
equipment in the OTN system.
Table 3-3 Maximum of Service Amount for a Subrack
Service 8800 T16 General Enhance General Enhance 8800

Type 8800 T32 d 8800 8800 T64 d 8800 universal
T32 T64 platform
subrack
STM-1/ 256 512 512 1024 1024 112

OC-3


T32 T64 platform
subrack
STM-4/ 256 512 512 1024 1024 112

OC-12
STM-16/ 256 512 512 1024 1024 64

OC-48
STM-64/ 160 256 320 256 640 40

OC-192
STM-256/ 16 32 32 64 64 8
OC-768
FE 256 512 512 1024 1024 112
GE 256 512 512 1024 1024 128
10GE 160 256 320 256 640 40

LAN
10GE 160 256 320 256 640 40

WAN
40GE 16 32 32 64 64 -
100GE 8 16 16 32 32 8
ETR/CLO 18 32 32 64 64 16
FDDI 256 512 512 1024 1024 112
ESCON 256 512 512 1024 1024 112
ISC 1G 128 256 256 512 512 128
ISC 2G 64 128 128 256 256 64
FC100/ 256 512 512 1024 1024 128

FICON
FC200/ 256 512 512 1024 1024 64

FICON
Express
FC400/ 64 128 128 256 256 32

FICON4G
FC800/ 64 128 128 256 256 14

FICON 8G
FC1200/ 64 128 128 256 256 16

FICON
10G


T32 T64 platform
subrack
InfiniBand 32 64 64 128 128 28

2.5G
InfiniBand 16 32 32 64 64 14
5G
OTU1 256 512 512 1024 1024 64
OTU2/ 128 256 256 256 512 32

OTU2e
OTU3 16 32 32 64 64 8
OTU4 8 16 16 32 32 8
DVB-ASI 256 512 512 1024 1024 112
SDI 128 256 256 512 512 112
HD-SDI 256 512 512 1024 1024 56
HD- 256 512 512 1024 1024 56

SDIRBR
3G-SDI 80 160 160 320 320 32
3G- 80 160 160 320 320 28

SDIRBR
NOTE
The maximum service amount in the preceding table is the permitted number of services without having
line boards configured or considering the limit on the power supply capability.
3.3 Sevice Mapping

This section describes the service mapping process on various boards for the OptiX OSN
8800.
Electrical-layer boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 can be classified into data boards and non-data
boards, depending on whether they are equipped with L2 switching modules. Non-data boards
include OTU, tributary, and line boards not equipped with L2 switching modules, and they
process only L1 service mapping. Data boards include EoO, EoW, EoS, and packet boards, and
they support L1 + L2 service processing. Table 3-4 lists the implementation details of service
mapping on each board.
l The following processes are performed on Layer 1: mapping client services into ODUk
signals and converting the ODUk signals into OTUk signals; or mapping client services
into VC signals and converting the VC signals into STM-N optical signals.

NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 is used as OCS equipment, the OCS boards on the equipment perform
SDH mapping and convert services into STM-N optical signals for transmission in an SDH network.
The SDH mapping process is mature and simple, so this document does not elaborate on this process.
To learn more about this process, see ITU-T G.707.
l The following processes are performed on Layer 2: adding, stripping, and exchanging
MPLS labels and VLAN tags, learning MAC addresses, and forwarding packets. Only
packet boards can add, strip, or exchange MPLS labels.
Table 3-4 Implementation of service mapping on each board
Board Type Implementation
Non-data boards OTU boards Client side WDM side
Client Services OTU board OTUk
The OTU board receives client services. After encapsulation, mapping,

and OTN framing processes, client services are converted into OTU
optical signals and are sent to the WDM side.
Tributary boards ODUk ODUk

Client side WDM side
and line boards
Tributary Line
Client Services board board OTUk
The tributary board receives client services, which are encapsulated and
mapped into ODUk signals. ODUk signals are transmitted to the line
board through the centralized cross-connect board. The line board
multiplexes and maps the ODUk signals into OTU optical signals and
sends the signals to the WDM side.
Data boards Packet boards Client side Packets Packets WDM side
(EG16, EX2, and EG16
PND2) L2
GE/FE switching PND 2
module
L2 OTN
switching processing 2 xOTU 2
module module
EX2
10 GE LAN L2
switching
module
L2 L1
The EG16 or EX2 board receives Ethernet services on the client side.
After L2 service processing on client side, the services are transmitted
to the PND2 board through the centralized cross-connect board. The
PND2 board maps the services into OTU2 optical signals after L2
service processing on network side and sends the signals to the WDM
side.

Board Type Implementation
EoO boards Client side ODUk ODUk WDM side

(TEM28)
TEM28
L2 OTN Line
GE/FE/ switching processing
board OTUk
10GE LAN module module
L2 L1
The TEM28 board receives Ethernet services on the client side. After
L2 service processing, the services are encapsulated and mapped into
ODUk signals, which are then transmitted to the line board through the
centralized cross-connect board. The line board multiplexes and maps
the ODUk signals into OTUk optical signals and sends the signals to
the WDM side.
EoW boards Client side WDM side

(LEM24 and LEX4) LEM24
GE/FE L2 OTN
10GE LAN/ switching processing 2xOTU2
10GE WAN module module
LEX4
10GE LAN/ L2 OTN
switching processing 2xOTU2
10GE WAN module module
L2 L1
The LEM24 or LEX4 board receives Ethernet services on the client side.
After L2 service processing, client Ethernet services are mapped into
OTU2 optical signals and are sent to the WDM side.
EoS boards (EGSH VC VC

and EAS2)
EGSH
L2 SDH OCS
GE/FE switching processing line STM-N
module module board
L2 L1
VC VC
EAS2
L2 SDH OCS
10GE LAN switching processing line STM-N
module module board
L2 L1
The EGSH or EAS2 board receives Ethernet services on the client side.
After L2 service processing, client Ethernet services are encapsulated
and mapped into VC signals, which are transmitted to the OCS line
board through the centralized cross-connect board. The OCS board
multiplexes and maps the VC signals into STM-N optical signals, and
sends the signals to the line side.
The service mapping process includes two procedures:

l Mapping client services into ODUk signals.

l Multiplexing and mapping ODUk signals into OTUk signals.
The following sections describe the two processes in details.
3.3.1 Mapping Client Services into ODUk Signals

This section describes how the OptiX OSN 8800 maps services into ODUk signals. WDM
equipment uses standard mapping procedures or timeslots to map signals into ODUk signals.
l When using the standard mapping procedures, the OptiX OSN 8800 directly maps signals
into ODUk signals and supports flexible grooming of services.
l When using timeslots, the WDM equipment can aggregate multiple services at rates lower
than 1.25 Gbit/s into one ODU0 signal, or multiple services at rates lower than 2.5 Gbit/s
into one ODU1 signal. This function enables multiple services to share the same ODU0 or
ODU1 bandwidth.
Mapping Client Services Using Standard Mapping Procedures

The OptiX OSN 8800 can map client services without using timeslots. It can use standard
mapping procedures to map client services directly into ODUk signals, as shown in Figure
3-1.
Figure 3-1 Mapping client services into ODUk

OPUk container ODUk container
mapping mapping
Client services OPUk ODUk
Mapping Client Services Using Timeslots

The OptiX OSN 8800 divides an ODUk (k = 0, 1) signal into several timeslots, each with a
bandwidth of 155 Mbit/s. It slices client services into 155 Mbit/s signal segments, each mapped
into ODUk signals. The OptiX OSN 8800 can map multiple low-rate client services into one
ODUk (k = 0, 1) signal, thereby improving bandwidth utilization.
The services that can be mapped into one ODU0 by OptiX OSN 8800 using timeslots include
the following: FE, FDDI, ESCON, SDI, DVB-ASI, FC100, and FICON. Figure 3-2 shows how
FE/FDDI and ESCON/SDI/DVB-ASI services are aggregated into one ODU0.
Figure 3-2 Aggregating client services into one ODU0

Client services 155 Mbit/s segments OPU0 container ODU0 container
FE/FDDI ESCON/
SDI/DVB-ASI
Slicing
FE/FDDI
1x155 Aggr
egat
Mbit/s ing
T T T T T T T T
Mapping
ting S S S S S S S S ODU0
ESCON/SDI Slicing A ggrega 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2x155
/DVB-ASI 2x155
Mbit/s
Mbit/s

The services that can be mapped into one ODU1 by the OptiX OSN 8800 using timeslots include
the following: FE, FDDI, STM-1, OC-3, ESCON, SDI, DVB-ASI, STM-4, OC-12, FC100,
FICON, GE, HD-SDI, FC200, and FICON Express. Figure 3-3 shows how GE, STM-1/OC-3,
and FC100 services are aggregated into one ODU1.
Figure 3-3 Aggregating client services into one ODU1

Client services 155 Mbit/s segments OPU1 container ODU1 container
Slicing 7x155
7x155
GE 7x155
Mbit/s
7x155 STM-1/OC3
7x155
Mbit/s
7x155
GE FC100
Mbit/s
Mbit/s
7x155 Ag
Mbit/s
Mbit/s gre
Mbit/s ga
t in
g T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T
S S S S S S S Mapping
Slicing 1x155
Aggregating S S S S S S S S S ODU1
STM-1/OC3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Mbit/s 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
t in g
ga
gre
Ag
Slicing
FC100 2x155
6x155
Mbit/s
Mbit/s
The number of timeslots varies according to the type of service. Table 3-5 lists the number of
timeslots that each service type requires.
Table 3-5 Service timeslots
Service Type Number of Timeslots Required
GE 7
FE 1
STM-1 1
STM-4 4
OC-3 1
OC-12 4
FC100 6
FC200 12
FICON 6
FICON Express 12
HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR 11
DVB-ASI 2
SDI 3
ESCON 2
FDDI 1

3.3.2 Multiplexing and Mapping ODUk Signals into OTUk Signals

This section describes the structure that the OptiX OSN 8800 uses to multiplex and map ODUk
signals into OTUk signals. After the E/O conversion, the signals are sent to the WDM side.
The OptiX OSN 8800 can multiplex and map client signals into ODUk (k= 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 3e, 4,
flex) signals and produce OTUk (k=1, 2, 2e, 3, 3e, 4) signals on the WDM side for line
transmission. Figure 3-4 shows the ODUk multiplexing and mapping structure that the OptiX
OSN 8800 supports.
Figure 3-4 Multiplexing and mapping ODUk signals into OTUk signals (OptiX OSN 8800)

Product Description 4 Product Features
4 Product Features
About This Chapter
4.1 Line Rate

The OptiX OSN 8800 use dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) technologies to
achieve transparent transmission with multiple services and large capacity.
4.2 OTN Feature

The optical transport network (OTN) technology ensures flexible service cross-connections in
an end-to-end manner, and enables services of different types to share bandwidth. With the help
of numerous OTN overheads and easy operations on the NMS, users can easily maintain
networks and locate faults.
4.3 OCS Feature
4.4 ROADM Feature
4.5 OTN + ROADM Feature

The OTN + ROADM feature cross-connects a client service in any optical direction while
ensuring high bandwidth utilization.
4.6 Ethernet and Packet Feature

The product support various Ethernet services and provide multiple solutions to carry them.
4.7 PID Feature

PID helps to effectively eliminate bandwidth and O&M bottlenecks on a WAN, leveraging the
features such as large capacity, high integration, versatile multi-service access, small size, and
environment-friendly design.
4.8 CWDM Feature

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides an 8-wavelength CWDM transmission solution with a channel
spacing of 20nm in the C band, which complies with ITU-T G.694.2, and can carry 2.5 Gbit/s
or 5 Gbit/s services over a single wavelength.
4.9 DWDM over CWDM Feature

DWDM wavelengths can be transported in the window of CWDM 1531 nm to 1551 nm to
expand the CWDM system capacity.

4.10 Single-Fiber Bidirectional Transmission
4.11 Redundancy and Protection

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides abundant equipment-level protection and network-level
protection.
4.12 Automatic Optical Power Management
4.13 Synchronization
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports IEEE 1588v2, Sync-E, 2 MHz, and 2 Mbit clocks. When
deployed with MSTP or PTN products, the OptiX OSN 8800 can provide an end-to-end clock
transport solution.

4.1 Line Rate

The OptiX OSN 8800 use dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) technologies to
achieve transparent transmission with multiple services and large capacity.
Currently, the OptiX OSN 8800 can multiplex up to 80 service channels in a single fiber. That
is, it can transmit 80 carrier signals of different wavelengths.
The OptiX OSN 8800 systems provide multiple transmission solutions based on different line
rate:
l 40/80 x 100 Gbit/s transmission solution

l 40 x 2.5 Gbit/s transmission solution
l 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s Hybrid Transmission
4.1.1 100 Gbit/s

Huawei provides the 100 Gbit/s coherent transmission solution and 100 Gbit/s Metro solution.
4.1.1.1 100 Gbit/s Coherent Solution
The OptiX OSN 8800 systems provide 40/80 x 100 Gbit/s transmission solution. By using the
edge-cutting modulation formats and coherent detection technology, the OptiX OSN 8800
supports ultra long-haul transmission with high OSNR by overcoming physical limitations on
100 Gbit/s transmission, such as chromatic dispersion (CD), polarization mode dispersion
(PMD), and non-linear effects.
Figure 4-1 shows the a typical application of the 100 Gbit/s transmission solutions.
Figure 4-1 Typical application of 100 Gbit/s transmission solution
OTU M OTU
M
U U
OTU X 40/80x100 Gbit/s X OTU
Client / /
D D Client
services
M M services
T N U U N T
X X
ODU4/ODU3/ODU2/ODU1 ODU4/ODU3/ODU2/ODU1
/ODU0/ODUflex /ODU0/ODUflex
T: Tributary boards N: Line boards
The unique technical advantages of Huawei's coherent 100 Gbit/s transmission solution allow
for ultra long-haul transmission, simplified network structure, high bandwidth utilization, and
smooth upgrade.

Ultra Long-Haul Transmission

Huawei 100 Gbit/s coherent transmission solution uses multiple technologies, such as ePDM
+QPSK modulation, coherent detection, FEC and Hybrid OA, to achieve ultra-long-haul (ULH)
transmission without electrical regeneration.
l ePDM+QPSK modulation
These modulation formats decrease the baud rate of an optical signal by half, while keeping
the line rate unchanged. As a result, they reduce the spectral width of the optical signal by
half, overcoming the bandwidth limitations of transmission devices.
l Coherent detection
This technology provides for a better OSNR and receiver sensitivity than those in a non-
coherent system.
l FEC technology
Huawei coherent transmission solutions support soft-decision FEC (SDFEC),SDFEC2
and hard-decision FEC (HFEC) schemes. Using advanced algorithms, Huawei coherent
solutions offer higher net coding gain and thus extends the transmission distance.
l Hybrid optical amplifier technology
Huawei has specifically developed hybrid OA boards (RAU) for coherent systems.
Compared with common OA boards, the RAU boards have a smaller noise figure and
provide for longer transmission distance, which substantially reduces the number of
electrical regenerators.
Figure 4-2 Ultra-Long-Haul Transmission of Coherent Transmission System
Simplified Network Architecture

Huawei coherent transmission solution simplifies network architecture and design, and reduces
network OPEX owing to its DCM-free design, high PMD tolerance, and simplified ROADM
architecture.
l DCM-free design
OTU boards uniformly compensate for accumulated fiber dispersion using specific
algorithms, eliminating the need of DCMs for dispersion compensation. The elimination

of DCMs reduces transmission latency and helps extend the transmission distance. In
addition, network design becomes more simple and saves some space in the equipment
room.
l High PMD tolerance
PMD greatly limits the service transmission distance, so there is a high requirement on
fiber routing to reduce PMD. However, a coherent system allows for ultra-high PMD, so
PMD is no longer a factor hindering service transmission. As such, a coherent system allows
for aging optical cables and aerial optical cables, and supports fiber routing in desert areas.
l Simplified ROADM architecture
Huawei coherent systems provide TM20 and TD20 ROADM boards to add/drop a
maximum of 20 wavelengths. The use of TM20 and TD20 boards not only saves boards
and slots but also simplifies the colorless and directionless ROADM solution and optical-
layer ASON node configurations.
Figure 4-3 Simplified Network Architecture of Coherent Transmission System
High Bandwidth Utilization

Huawei coherent transmission solution supports various service types and data rates. Received
services of different types are encapsulated into ODUk (k=0,1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, ODUflex) signals
using OTN technology, and groomed and provisioned through central OTN cross-connections.
Bandwidth sharing, to the maximum extent, ensures high bandwidth utilization and reduces the
transmission cost per bit.
l Various service types and data rates are supported and carried over 40G/100G transmission
channels.
l ODUflex technology provides for flexible bandwidth adjustment and grooming.

Figure 4-4 High Bandwidth Utilization of Coherent Transmission System
Low Latency
Due to low latency, Huawei coherent transmission equipment is especially suitable for transport
networks providing dedicated transport pipes for various business services, such as financial,
data center application, and cloud computing that allow for very low latency.
l Huawei advanced FEC technology provides optimal net coding gain while introducing
extremely low latency.
l Huawei coherent boards are equipped with DSP chips, which have superior performance
in CD and PMD compensation. Therefore, DCMs are no longer required in new 100G
networks, which not only reduces the network construction cost but also eliminates the
latency of the DCMs.
Figure 4-5 Low Latency of Coherent Transmission System
4.1.1.2 100 Gbit/s Metro Solution

The 100 Gbit/s Metro solution is a non-coherent transmission solution and mainly applies to
short-reach transmission scenarios, such as data center networks.
As shown in Figure 4-6, the TN54NS4M boards use four wavelengths to transmit one OTU4
signal and employ the HFEC scheme to improve OSNR performance, achieving 100 Gbit/s
Metro transmission.
Figure 4-6 Typical application of the 100 Gbit/s Metro solution
Compared with the 100 Gbit/s coherent transmission solution, the 100 Gbit/s Metro solution has
the following features:
l Low cost
l Low power consumption
l Low latency
4.1.2 40 Gbit/s
The OptiX OSN 8800 provides a 40/80 x 40 Gbit/s transmission solution. With different
modulation and detection technologies, the OptiX OSN 8800 provides coherent transmission
and non-coherent transmission, to address diverse requirements.
l 40 Gbit/s non-coherent transmission solution

Figure 4-7 shows the a typical application of the 40 Gbit/s non-coherent transmission
solution.
Figure 4-7 Typical application of the 40 Gbit/s non-coherent transmission solution

OTU 40/80x40 Gbit/s OTU
M M
U DCM DCM DCM U ODU3
ODU3
X X
Client / / Client
services T N N T services
D D
M M
U U
T N X X N T
ODU2/ODU1/ODU0/ODUflex ODU2/ODU1/ODU0/ODUflex

l 40 Gbit/s coherent transmission solution

Figure 4-8 shows the a typical application of the 40 Gbit/s coherent transmission solution.
Thanks to the edge-cutting coherent detection technology, extra DCM or DCU boards are
not required for CD and PMD compensation.
Figure 4-8 Typical application of the 40 Gbit/s coherent transmission solution
OTU OTU
M M ODU3
ODU3 U U
X 40/80x40 Gbit/s X
Client T N / / N T Client
services D D services
M M
U U
T N X X N T
ODU2/ODU1/ODU0/ODUflex ODU2/ODU1/ODU0/ODUflex
4.1.3 10 Gbit/s
The OptiX OSN 8800 provides a 40/80 x 10 Gbit/s transmission solution. Figure 4-9 shows the
a typical application of the 10 Gbit/s transmission solution.
Figure 4-9 Typical application of the 10 Gbit/s transmission solutions
OTU 40/80x10 Gbit/s OTU

M M
ODU2 U DCM U ODU2
DCM DCM
X X
Client / / Client
services T N N T services
D D
M M
U U
T N X X N T
ODU1/ODU0/ODUflex ODU1/ODU0/ODUflex
4.1.4 2.5 Gbit/s

The OptiX OSN 8800 system provides 40 x 2.5 Gbit/s transmission solution.
Figure 4-10 shows the a typical application of the 2.5 Gbit/s transmission solution.

Figure 4-10 Typical application of the 2.5 Gbit/s transmission solution

40 x 2.5 Gbit/s
M DCM DCM DCM M
OTU OTU
U U
X X
Client / / Client
M M
OTU U U OTU
X X
4.1.5 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s Hybrid Transmission

With the emergence of service requirements, the existing 10 Gbit/s WDM transmission system
may be gradually upgraded to the 40 Gbit/s or 100Gbit/s transmission system. When this occurs,
the hybrid transmission of the 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s signals or the hybrid transmission of the
coherent and non-coherent signals becomes very important. The OptiX OSN 8800 supports
hybrid transmission of the 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s signals, and hybrid transmission of the
coherent and non-coherent signals and ensures the smooth upgrade from the 10 Gbit/s system
to the 40Gbit/s system or from the non-coherent system to the coherent system.
Hybrid transmission of the non-coherent system

The new and upgraded 40G wavelengths with the existing 10G wavelengths can be sent to the
same multiplexing unit and transmitted over the same fiber. The hybrid transmission does not
affect the existing and new services. Figure 4-11 shows the typical application of the hybrid
transmission of 40G and 10G signals.
Figure 4-11 Hybrid transmission of 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s signals in the non-coherent system
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s
T N N T
10 Gbit/s M M 10 Gbit/s
OTU U DCM DCM DCM U OTU
X X
/ / Client
Client D D services
services M M
40 Gbit/s U U 40 Gbit/s
OTU OTU
X X
40 Gbit/s 40 Gbit/s
T N N T
Hybrid transmission of the coherent system

The non-coherent wavelengths and the coherent wavelengths can be sent to the same
multiplexing unit and transmitted over the same fiber. The hybrid transmission does not affect

the existing and new services. Figure 4-12 shows the application of a system that transmits
coherent and non-coherent wavelengths together.
Figure 4-12 Hybrid transmission of 100 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s signals in the coherent
system
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s
T N N T
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s
OTU OTU
M M
40 Gbit/s
T N U DCM DCM DCM U 40 Gbit/s N T
X X
Client / / Client
M M 40 Gbit/s
40 Gbit/s N T
T N U U
X X
100 Gbit/s 100 Gbit/s

OTU OTU
100 Gbit/s 100 Gbit/s

T N N T
: Coherent board : Non-coherent board : Coherent wavelength : Electrical signal
N : Line board T : Tributary board : Non-coherent wavelength
NOTE
When the coherent and non-coherent wavelengths are transmitted hybrid, the electrical-layer ASON is
supported, and the optical-layer ASON is not supported.
4.2 OTN Feature

The optical transport network (OTN) technology ensures flexible service cross-connections in
an end-to-end manner, and enables services of different types to share bandwidth. With the help
of numerous OTN overheads and easy operations on the NMS, users can easily maintain
networks and locate faults.
l OTN Cross-Connection
With the help of OTN cross-connections, any granularity traffic can be aggregated into any
ODUk pipe, and different types of services from multiple sites can be mixed in one ODUk
pipe. This enables flexible service grooming and improves bandwidth utilization.
l GE E2E Transmission Based on ODU0
For end-to-end service cross-connections, cross-connections are only required on the line
side for intermediate sites. Physical fiber connections between back-to-back installed
equipment are not required. This application helps save time in connecting fibers at
intermediate sites, which enables quick service provisioning. This application also reduces
fault potentials and maintenance workloads.
l Flexible Bandwidth Utilization Based on ODUflex

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the optical data unit flexible (ODUflex) feature. This feature
enables the OptiX OSN 8800 to adapt itself to various services, such as video, storage, and
data services as well as future IP services.
l E2E Service Management Based on OTN Overhead
With the help of numerous OTN overheads defined in ITU-T G.708 as well as easy
operations on the NMS, services can be managed and monitored in an end-to-end manner.
With the help of OTN overheads, an OTN network can transparently transmit client services
and provide powerful forward error correction (FEC) capabilities. The overheads and NMS
together enables easy end-to-end service monitoring and management. They can easily
locate a fault.
l Channel Monitoring over Different Operators' Networks
When networks of different operators are interconnected, the OTN overheads at the tandem
connection monitoring (TCM) layer can be used to monitor the quality of the channels that
different operators provide. The ODUk TCM function makes it easy to locate faults.
4.2.1 OTN Cross-Connection

With the help of OTN cross-connections, any granularity traffic can be aggregated into any
ODUk pipe, and different types of services from multiple sites can be mixed in one ODUk pipe.
This enables flexible service grooming and improves bandwidth utilization.
Figure 4-13 shows an OTN cross-connection application. The OTN network flexibly cross-
connects client services at any bit rate and enables them to share bandwidth. Then these client
services reach the IP/MPLS backbone.
l Site A receives service 1, service 2, and service 3. The services are encapsulated separately
while they share bandwidth.
– At site A, service 1 and service 2 are encapsulated into one ODU2 pipe, which still has
idle bandwidth; service 3 is encapsulated into an ODU3 pipe.
– ODU2 and ODU3 are converted into OTU signals, which are then transmitted to site
B.
l After the OTU signals reach site B, they are flexibly added or dropped, and then
encapsulated into an ODUk pipe for further transmission to their destinations.
– At site B, service 3 is terminated and service5 can use the ODU3 pipe, which is initially
used by service 3.
– Service4 is placed in the same ODU2 pipe as service 1 and service 2, which uses the
idle bandwidth.
– Then ODU2 and ODU3 are processed as OTU signals and are further transmitted to site
C.

Figure 4-13 OTN cross-connection application
4.2.2 GE E2E Transmission Based on ODU0

For end-to-end service cross-connections, cross-connections are only required on the line side
for intermediate sites. Physical fiber connections between back-to-back installed equipment are
not required. This application helps save time in connecting fibers at intermediate sites, which
enables quick service provisioning. This application also reduces fault potentials and
maintenance workloads.
Figure 4-14 shows GE E2E transmission based on ODU0. In a system with tributary/line
separation, after GE signals are encapsulated in ODU0 signals, users only need to configure
cross-connections on the NMS, instead of connecting the fibers on site.
l After receiving two client services, site A encapsulates them in two ODU0 signals, and
maps them to one ODU2 signal, which is carried over one wavelength to site B.
l After the wavelength reaches site B, the signals are cross-connected at the ODU0 level
between different line boards, such as NQ2 and NS3, and are encapsulated with other ODUk
signals from site B for further cross-connections. Then they are transmitted separately to
site C and site D.

Figure 4-14 GE E2E transmission based on ODU0
4.2.3 Flexible Bandwidth Utilization Based on ODUflex

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the optical data unit flexible (ODUflex) feature. This feature
enables the OptiX OSN 8800 to adapt itself to various services, such as video, storage, and data
services as well as future IP services.
Transport of Generic CBR Signals

ODUflex can be used to transmit constant bit rate (CBR) services on an optical transport network
(OTN). The services whose CBRs are higher than 2.48832 Gbit/s are mapped to an ODUflex
(CBR) container in bit synchronization mode. Functions such as end-to-end performance
monitoring and protection switching are feasible on the ODUflex (CBR) container. The
overheads and monitoring management modes of ODUflex services and traditional ODUk are
the same.
Figure 4-15 shows how ODUflex is used to transport generic CBR signals. An FC400 service
occupies four ODTUk timeslots and is mapped to an ODUflex container. A 3G-SDI service
occupies three ODTUk timeslots and is mapped to an ODUflex container. Each ODTUk
timeslots provides 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. The FC400 and 3G-SDI services share the same OTU2
wavelength.
Figure 4-16 shows how ODU2 is used to transport generic CBR signals. The FC400 and 3G-
SDI services are mapped to different ODU2 containers. Therefore they occupy different OTU2
wavelengths.
Figure 4-15 Transport of generic CBR signals (ODUflex)

FC400 and 3G-SDI share a same OTU2 wavelength
FC400 FC400
(4 x ODTUk TS) (4 x ODTUk TS)
ODUk XC
ODUk XC
ODUflex ODUflex
HO ODUk
HO ODUk
OTU2 OTU2
OTN Network
3G-SDI 3G-SDI
(3 x ODTUk TS) (3 x ODTUk TS)
ODUflex ODUflex
Client side WDM side WDM side Client side

Figure 4-16 Transport of generic CBR signals (ODU2)

FC400 and 3G-SDI each occupy a OTU2 wavelength
Client Line Line Client
HO ODUk
HO ODUk
FC400 OTU2 OTU2 FC400
ODUk XC
ODUk XC
ODU2 ODU2
OTN Network
HO ODUk
HO ODUk
3G-SDI OTU2 OTU2 3G-SDI
ODU2 ODUflex
ODU2
Client side WDM side WDM side Client side
Transport of VBR Packet Services

ODUflex can also be used to transport variable bit rate (VBR) packet services to address the
requirements of transporting packet services running at VBRs. Since packet services run at
VBRs, ITU-T has defined ODUflex(GFP) signals for transporting packet services over an OTN
network. The ODUflex(GFP) signals are mapped differently from CBR client signals and use
different bit rates as the ODUflex(CBR) signals. The ODUflex(GFP) signals are mapped using
the GFP-F method and the bit rate for the signals is defined to about N x 1.25 Gbit/s, where N
represents the number of the ODTUk timeslots.
In this application, ODUflex ensures that resilient packet services are correctly transmitted over
an OTN network. For example, ODUflex can be used in a 3G backhaul bearer network or an
enterprise/bank packet quality private line application. ODUflex(GFP) can flexibly resize the
bandwidth based on the bandwidth required by packet services and therefore adapts to flexible
changes in service bandwidth and ensures high-quality service transmission.
4.2.4 E2E Service Management Based on OTN Overhead

With the help of numerous OTN overheads defined in ITU-T G.708 as well as easy operations
on the NMS, services can be managed and monitored in an end-to-end manner.
With the help of OTN overheads, an OTN network can transparently transmit client services
and provide powerful forward error correction (FEC) capabilities. The overheads and NMS
together enables easy end-to-end service monitoring and management. They can easily locate a
fault. Figure 4-17 shows E2E service management based on OTN overhead.

Figure 4-17 E2E service management based on OTN overhead
OTS: Optical transmission section OMS: Optical multiplex section OCH: Optical channel
SM: Section monitoring PM: Path monitoring -
4.2.5 Channel Monitoring over Different Operators' Networks

When networks of different operators are interconnected, the OTN overheads at the tandem
connection monitoring (TCM) layer can be used to monitor the quality of the channels that
different operators provide. The ODUk TCM function makes it easy to locate faults.
Figure 4-18 shows how a network uses TCM overheads to monitor the quality of the channels
that different operators provide. According to ITU-G G.709, six levels of TCM overheads are
supported to the maximum. In this example, three levels of TCM overheads are used to supervise
different networks:
l The customer uses TCM1 to monitor the optical UNI-UNI QoS.

l The operator uses TCM2 to monitor the QoS of the operator's network.
l Operators A and B use TCM3 to monitor the intra- and inter-domain connections of their
own networks.
If a fault occurs, the specific position of the fault can be located based on the TCM1, TCM2,
and TCM3 status.

Figure 4-18 TCM functions
Operator B
network
Operator A Operator A
network network
Intra- and Inter- Domain connection supervision (TCM3)

Customer Customer
network Operator QoS supervision (TCM2) network
Customer QoS supervision UNI-UNI (TCM1)
4.2.6 OTN OCS Application

A traditional WDM network is usually a segmented chain network built with WDM equipment
from only one vendor. Such a network transmits small-granular services with a limited service
grooming capability, and thus cannot function as a national backbone network, which involves
multiple vendors and planes. Huawei's OTN optical core switching (OCS) application supports
electrical-layer grooming of large-granular services with a large capacity. In this application,
WDM equipment from different vendors is interconnected to achieve OTN networking, and the
complex physical-layer environment is no longer an obstacle. The OTN OCS application
supports free transmission of multiple services, such as SDH, Ethernet, OTN, and video, between
WDM equipment from different vendors. Services can be added/dropped or transparently
transmitted as planned.
Figure 4-19 shows an example of the OTN OCS application.
1
l The OTN signals from site A are sent to third-party WDM device at site B and then
are converted into OTUk gray optical signals.
l Some of the OTUk gray optical signals are locally dropped through Huawei's OTN OCS
application.
l The other OTUk gray optical signals and locally added service signals are mapped and
2
multiplexed into OTUk gray optical signals by third-party WDM device at site B,
and then the OTUk gray optical signals are sent to site C.

Figure 4-19 Example of the OTN OCS application

OTU FC
FC OTU OC-n
OTU
OD
OTN OCS
OTU GE
OTN OCS OC-n OTU
OM
GE OTU OTU L T FC
GE T GE
L OTU Third-party
GE T
Third-party FC GE WDM devices Huawei devices
Huawei devices WDM devices
FC
B
GE
C
FC A FC
OC-n
GE
OC-n GE GE
1 OTN OCS 2
OTU L L OTU
OTU L L OTU
OM
OD
L Line board OTU L L OTU
T Tributary board OTU L L OTU
Third-party T T T Third-party
WDM devices WDM devices
GEGE FC
Huawei devices
Add/drop
Pass-through service
service
4.3 OCS Feature

As optical core switching (OCS) equipment, the OptiX OSN 8800 has a large switching capacity
and supports flexible networking modes, such as chain, ring, and mesh networks. The OptiX
OSN 8800 supports cross-connections of VC–4, VC–3, and VC–12 granularities, which satisfies
various requirements.
l Multi-Granularity Service Grooming and Convergence

The OptiX OSN 8800 can provide the networking application of the multi-granularity
service grooming and service convergence functions.
The OptiX OSN 8800 implements the large-capacity grooming of STM-64, STM-16,
STM-4, and STM-1 services. The OptiX OSN 8800 can form a hybrid network with
different equipment such as DWDM and MSTP.
l Ethernet Service Transmission and Layer 2 Switching
The networking application of Ethernet services includes point-to-point networking for
GE/10GE services, Layer 2 switching networking for GE/10GE services, and transparent
transmission networking for GE services.
4.3.1 Multi-Granularity Service Grooming and Convergence

The OptiX OSN 8800 can provide the networking application of the multi-granularity service
grooming and service convergence functions.
Figure 4-20 shows the networking application of the multi-granularity service grooming and
service convergence functions of the OptiX OSN 8800. The OptiX OSN 8800 implement the
large-capacity grooming of STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, and STM-1 services. The OptiX OSN
8800 can form a hybrid network with different equipment such as DWDM and MSTP.

Figure 4-20 Networking configuration of the OptiX OSN 8800 performing multi-granularity
service grooming and service convergence
4.3.2 Ethernet Service Transmission and Layer 2 Switching

The networking application of Ethernet services includes point-to-point networking for GE/
10GE services, Layer 2 switching networking for GE/10GE services, and transparent
transmission networking for GE/10GE services.
Table 4-1 describes the networking application of Ethernet services.

Table 4-1 Ethernet over SDH service applications
EoS Application Description
Transparent transmission The Layer 2 switching boards of the OptiX OSN 8800
networking for GE/10GE can transparently transmit GE/10GE services.
services Moreover, it can be directly accessed to a router.
Layer 2 switching networking The OptiX OSN 8800 provides Layer 2 switching boards
for GE/10GE services to achieve Layer 2 switching from a GE/10GE service
to a GE/10GE service.
Figure 4-21 Transparent transmission of GE/10GE services

Figure 4-22 Layer 2 switching networking for GE/10GE services

Company B3
Company A3
GE/10GE
GE/10GE
C
GE/10GE GE/10GE GE/10GE GE/10GE
Company A1 Company B1 Company A2 Company B2
SDH
board
Ethernet Ethernet
GE
Service board STM-N
GE
SDH
board
A B C
OSN 8800 Company A Company B Signal Flow
4.4 ROADM Feature

With ROADM technology, the OptiX OSN 8800 supports flexible optical-layer grooming in
one to nine degrees. The ROADM solution realizes reconfiguration of wavelengths by blocking
or cross-connecting of wavelengths. This ensures that the static distribution of the wavelength
resource is flexible and dynamic. ROADM with U2000 can remotely and dynamically adjust
the status of wavelength adding/dropping and passing through. A maximum of 80 wavelengths
can be adjusted.
The OptiX OSN 8800 delivers flexible-grid ROADM features in addition to traditional fixed-
grid ROADM features.

4.4.1 Basic Concepts

ROADM application scenarios include colored & directioned, colored & directionless, and
colorless & directionless. For concepts about colored, colorless, directioned, and directionless,
see Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Basic Concept
Concept Description Application
Colored The M40, D40, and M40V boards are used to add l Colored add/drop ports(fixed wavelength)
and drop wavelengths. Each add port or drop port have the advantages of lower insertion loss
can add or drop fixed wavelengths only. and lower cost. If new wavelengths need to
ROADM board replace the existing wavelengths, a site visit
is necessary to connect the line card/OTU
colored port to the matching add/drop port.
M40 D40 l On an ASON network, the services can be
rerouted only on the same wavelength, so
the wavelengths may be blocked.
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
Colorless The WSM9+WSD9, WSM9+RDU9, TM20 l Colorless add/drop ports(tunable) allow

+TD20, WSMD4, WSMD9 boards are used to add remotely provisioned reconfigurability of
and drop wavelengths. Any wavelengths can be the ROADM. However, the OTU/line
added at a port on the board and dropped at the boards must be installed in the subrack in
port. order to automatically provision new
NOTE services. If the OTU/line boards are not
The following figure shows a non-coherent system that physically present in the subrack, a site visit
uses WSM9+WSD9 boards. For the applications of a is necessary to install the required boards
coherent system that uses TM20+TD20 boards, see for the new services.
4.4.5 3-Degree ROADM, 4.4.6 4-Degree ROADM,
and 4.4.7 9-Degree ROADM. l On an ASON network, if a wavelength-
tunable OTU or line board is used in the
ROADM board colorless scenario, service wavelengths can
be flexibly converted during rerouting to
avoid a wavelength congestion.
WSM9 WSD9
WSM9 WSD9
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

Concept Description Application
Directione A local wavelength carrying services can be l In a directioned scenario, the current path
d transmitted to a specific direction. cannot be adjusted flexibly. If the current
Direction 1 path must be adjusted, a site visit is required
to adjust the fiber connections for the
network.
l A directioned scenario applies to non-
IN OUT ASON networks.
ROADM board
AM1 DM1 AMx DMx
Local wavelengths
add&drop only
to/from direction 1
Directionle A local wavelength carrying services can be l On a non-ASON network, the current path
ss transmitted to any directions. cannot be automatically adjusted in the
Direction 1 Direction x directionless scenario. When services are
adjusted or the protection path is used in
case of a faulty working path, manually
configure optical cross-connections to
AM1 DM1 AMx DMx achieve flexible service grooming.
ROADM board l On an ASON network, the rerouting
IN OUT function automatically finds a path and
automatically creates an optical cross-
connection.
Local wavelengths
add&drop to/from
any direction
4.4.2 Flexible ROADM Application

In a beyond 100G system, flexible ROADM sites can groom optical signals at flexible grids
while supporting optical signals at fixed grids.
The future beyond 100G system requires more flexible spectrum allocation for high-rate optical
signals and different bandwidths for signals in different modulation formats. The current
ROADM technology uses the fixed grid technique, in which the bandwidth is fixed to 50 or 100
GHz. Hence, this technique cannot provide flexible bandwidth allocation.
Flexible ROADM uses the flexible grid technique to allocate different bandwidths for different
signals, improving spectrum utilization and addressing the flexible signal grooming
requirements of future beyond 100G systems.
Flexible ROADM is compatible with existing networks and supports fixed 50 GHz and 100 GHz
bandwidth defined in ITU-T Recommendations.

Figure 4-23 shows the networking of an example 2-degree flexible ROADM. Flexible grid
wavelengths are received, and the bandwidth of the wavelengths is not fixed to 50 or 100 GHz
but can be configured. For example, depending on the modulation format, the bandwidth
required by a 400 Gbit/s signal can be 75 GHz or 150 GHz. Flexible ROADM allocates different
bandwidths for different signals and grooms the signals to the specified direction based on
network configurations.
Figure 4-23 Networking of a flexible ROADM

NE1
NE2
OA
OA
W ROADM ROADM E
OA OA
E
NE1
NE3 AM1 DM1 AMx DMx

ROADM
W IN OUT
Flexible grid wavelength

50GHz 75GHz 150GHz
400G
400G
100G
100G
NE4
Wavelength
West add&drop signal flow East add&drop signal flow
Local wavelength add&drop to/from any direction
NOTE
OTU boards that use the flexible grid technique will be provided in future versions.
4.4.3 1-Degree ROADM

This configuration generally applies to a terminal node. Services are not interrupted during
expansion.
NOTE
The WSMD4 in the figure below can be replaced with the RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, WSMD2 , or
WSMD9.
The WSMD2 board supports only a 40-channel system, and other board groups support 80-channel systems.

Figure 4-24 1-degree ROADM application

On a 2-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in two directions. To smoothly
upgrade a network to one with over four degrees, configure RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9,
WSMD2, or WSMD9.
NOTE
The WSMD4 in the figure below can be replaced with the RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, WSMD2, or
WSMD9.
The WSMD2 supports only a 40-channel system, and other board groups support 80-channel systems.
Colored & Directioned Scenario

This section uses the west service as an example to describe the signal flow.
Local services are added to the west WSMD4 board through the AM1 port and then transmitted
to the west through the OUT port. Services from the east pass through the AM4 port on the west
WSMD4 board and head west.
In a colored & directioned scenario, to ensure that local services of NE1 can be transmitted in
optical directions west and east, one group of M40+D40 must be configured for each optical
direction. In each optical directions, the WSMD4 board connects to one M40 board and one D40
board.

Figure 4-25 Colored & directioned scenario of the 2-degree ROADM application
Colored & Directionless Scenario

Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west or east.
l To adjust the current path (for example, when services are adjusted or the protection path
is used in case of a faulty working path), manually configure optical cross-connections to
achieve flexible service grooming.
l On an ASON network, the rerouting function automatically finds a path and automatically
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure proper service transmission on NE1. In the
colored scenario, only the same wavelength can be used for service rerouting.
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction west or east, only one group
of M40+D40 is required.

Figure 4-26 Colored & directionless scenario of the 2-degree ROADM application

On a 3-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in three directions. To smoothly
upgrade a network to one with over four degrees, configure RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, or
WSMD9.
NOTE
The WSMD4 in the figure below can be replaced with the RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9 , or WSMD9.

Local services are added to the WSMD4 through the AM4 port and then transmitted to the south
through the OUT port. Services from the west and east pass through the AM1 and AM3 ports
on the WSMD4 and head south.
In this scenario, to cross-connect services on NE1 in directions west, south, and east, three groups
of M40+D40 must be configured. In each direction, a M40+D40 combination must be
configured.


Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, or east.
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure proper service transmission on NE1. In the
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction west, north, or east, only
one group of M40+D40 is required.

Colorless & Directionless Scenario

Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, or east.
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure proper service transmission on NE1. If a
wavelength-tunable OTU or line board is used in the colorless scenario, service
wavelengths can be flexibly converted during rerouting to avoid a wavelength congestion.
A WSM9+WSD9 combination can be used for colorless scenarios in a non-coherent system, as

shown in Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29 Colorless & directionless scenario of the 3-degree ROADM application (non-coherent system)
As for the colorless scenario in a coherent system, when the WSMD4, WSMD9, RDU9 or TD20
board is used to drop services, it is not necessary to configure a DEMUX board. The coherent
OTU board uses the coherent receiver technology and therefore can correctly select the
wavelength to be dropped at the local end among the multiplexed signals. The following uses
the TM20+TD20 combination to describe the colorless scenario, as shown in Figure 4-30.

Figure 4-30 Colorless & directionless scenario of the 3-degree ROADM application (coherent transmission systems)

On a 4-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in four directions. To smoothly
upgrade a network to one with over four degrees, configure RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, or
WSMD9.
NOTE
The WSMD4 in the figure below can be replaced with the RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9 , or WSMD9.

Local services are added to the WSMD4 board through the AM4 port and then transmitted to
the south through the OUT port. Services from the west, north, and east pass through the AM1,
AM2, and AM3 ports on the WSMD4 board, heading for the south.
In this scenario, to cross-connect services on NE1 in directions west, north, east, and south, four
groups of M40+D40 must be configured. In each direction, a M40+D40 combination must be
configured.


Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, east, or south.
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure correct service transmission on NE1. In the
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction west, north, east, or south,
only one group of M40+D40 is required.


Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, east, or south.
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure correct service transmission on NE1. If a




On a 9-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in nine directions. Each node must
use RDU9+WSM9 boards, WSD9+WSM9 boards, or WSMD9 boards

Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in nine directions.
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure correct service transmission on NE1. In the
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction 1 to direction 9, only one
group of M40+D40 is required.


Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in nine directions.
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure correct service transmission on NE1. If a



4.5 OTN + ROADM Feature

The OTN + ROADM feature cross-connects a client service in any optical direction while
ensuring high bandwidth utilization.
Figure 4-38 illustrates how OTN and ROADM effectively transmit client services.
l A tributary board receives client services at any bit rate. After OTN mapping and ODUk
cross-connection are complete, the client signals are flexibly cross-connected on the
electrical layer and share bandwidth. A line board then outputs the signals over different
wavelengths.
l Along the optical cross-connections on the ROADM board, the signals over different
wavelengths can be transmitted in any optical direction.
l If the signals in an optical direction do not need to be locally terminated, they can be directly
transmitted to another optical direction through the optical cross-connections on the
ROADM board.

Figure 4-38 OTN + ROADM application
4.6 Ethernet and Packet Feature

The product support various Ethernet services and provide multiple solutions to carry them.
4.6.1 Supported Ethernet Service Models

MEF, ITU-T, and IETF have separately defined Ethernet service models at Layer 2.
In essence, the Ethernet service models defined by MEF, ITU-T and IETF are the same although
they have different names. The product support all the service models listed in Table 4-3. This
table also presents the mappings between the service models, transport tunnels, and service
multiplexing methods.
Table 4-3 Ethernet service models
MEF Model ITU-T Model IETF Model Transport Service

Tunnel Multiplexing
(Network Method
Side) (Access Side)
E-Line EPL - Physically Physically

isolated isolated

MEF Model ITU-T Model IETF Model Transport Service

Tunnel Multiplexing
(Network Method
Side) (Access Side)
EVPL - VLAN Physically

isolated
VPWS MPLS
- Physically VLAN
isolated
- VLAN
VPWS MPLS
E-LAN EPLAN - Physically Physically

isolated isolated
EVPLAN - Physically VLAN

isolated
- VLAN
VPLS MPLS
4.6.1.1 E-Line/E-LAN
MEF defines two types of Layer 2 Ethernet services: E-Line service using point-to-point Ethernet
virtual connection (EVC) and E-LAN service using multipoint-to-multipoint EVC.
E-Line Service
Any Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC shall be designated as an Ethernet
Line (E-Line) service type, as shown in Figure 4-39.
Figure 4-39 E-Line Service
A
EVC1
A Metro carrier
Ethernet
EVC2
B
B
E-Line1
E-Line2

The E-Line services that the product support are:

l E-Line Services Carried by PWs
l E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links
l E-Line Services Carried by Ports
l Configuration Flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line Services
NOTE
Native Ethernet services include E-Line/E-LAN services carried over QinQ links, E-Line/E-LAN services
carried over PWs, and UNI-UNI E-Line services. The E-Line services carried over PWs are also called
PWE3 services.
Table 4-4 shows different E-Line services and related carrier technologies.
Table 4-4 E-Line Service
E-Line Service Carrier Schematic Diagram

technol
ogies
E-Line Services MPLS PSN

Ethernet service Ethernet
Ethernet service
Carried by PWs Ethernet
service PW Label=20
Tunnel Label=100
PW Label=20
Tunnel Label=101
service
NE2 A
NE1
A
Ethernet service Ethernet service

PW Label=21 PW Label=21 NNI UNI
UNI NNI Tunnel Label=101
Tunnel Label=100 B
B
PW Tunnel
E-Line Services VLAN A：VLAN = 1-100
Carried by QinQ Ethernet

service NE1
Links A PSN
Ethernet service
A : SVLAN = 30
A：VLAN = 1-100
Ethernet service
Ethernet
B: SVLAN = 40 service
B
B：VLAN = 1-200
A
NE2
B
QinQ link B：VLAN = 1-200
E-Line Services Port Ethernet Ethernet

Carried by Ports carrier service
Port3
NE1
Ethernet service
NE2 service
Port3
(physical A
Port4 Port4
A
isolation) UNI NNI

PSN
NNI UNI
B
B

E-Line Service Carrier Schematic Diagram

technol
ogies
Configuration Port NE2
Flow for the carrier

Ethernet
UNI-UNI E-Line (physical service UNI
Services isolation) A
Port3 NE1 NE3
PSN
Port4
Ethernet
service UNI
A
NE4
E-LAN Service
Any Ethernet service that is based on a Multipoint-to-Multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection
(EVC) shall be designated as an Ethernet Line (E-LAN) Service type, as shown in Figure
4-40.
Figure 4-40 E-LAN Service
A Metro carrier B
Ethernet
B
A
The E-LAN services that the product support are:

l E-LAN Services Carried by PWs
l E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links
l E-LAN Services Carried by Ports
Table 4-5 shows the different E-LAN services and related carrier technologies.

Table 4-5 E-LAN Service
E-LAN Carrier Schematic Diagram

Service technolo
gies
E-LAN MPLS
CE A
Services
Carried
by PWs Ethernet
service
NE A
PW 2
NE C
PW1
Ethernet service PSN CE C
PW Label=20
Tunnel Label=100
PW3
NE B
Ethernet
service
PW
Tunnel
CE B
Service flow
E-LAN VLAN
CE A
Services
Carried
Ethernet
by QinQ service
NE A
Links
Ethernet service
SVLAN NE C
PSN CE C
NE B
Ethernet
service
QinQ link
CE B Service flow
E-LAN Port
CE A
Services carrier
Carried (physical Ethernet
UNI
by Ports isolation) service

Port1 NNI
NE A
Port3
NNI Port2
Port2 NE C
Ethernet PSN
service CE C
Port 3 Port1
Port2
NE B Port 3
Ethernet
service Port1
CE B
Service flow

4.6.1.2 VPWS/VPLS
Layer 2 virtual private network (L2VPN) defined by IETF includes the virtual private wire
service (VPWS) and virtual private LAN service (VPLS). VPWS is used to provide point-to-
point service at Layer 2 and VPLS is used to simulate a local area network (LAN) in a wide area
network (WAN).
VPWS
VPWS is a Layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) technology for point-to-point transmission.
It performs one-to-one mapping between a received attachment circuit (AC) and a pseudo wire
(PW). By binding ACs and PWs in the <AC, PW, AC> format to form a virtual circuit, which
is used to transparently transmit Layer 2 services between users. Figure 4-41 shows the
application of VPWS.
Figure 4-41 Application of VPWS
VPLS
VPLS is a Layer 2 VPN technology for simulating LANs. Using VPLS, each L2VPN considers
an NE as a virtual switching instance (VSI), and this VSI is used to achieve mapping between
multiple ACs and PWs, and connect multiple Ethernet LANs so that the LANs work as if they
are one LAN.
VPLS is an important technology for MANs. It can connect multiple Ethernet-powered

enterprise networks. As shown in Figure 4-42, VPLS provides LAN services across the WAN
for customer A.

Figure 4-42 Application of VPLS

AC
VSI PW
PW
HQ of PW
company A VPLS
VSI AC
NE 1
PW
VPLS
PSN
NE 3
Branch of
company A
PW
VSI PW
NE 2
AC
VPLS AC Tunnel
PW Service flow
Branch of
company A
4.6.1.3 EPL/EVPL/EPLAN/EVPLAN
According to ITU-T, Layer 2 Ethernet services are classified into four types: Ethernet private
line (EPL), Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL), Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN), and Ethernet
virtual private LAN (EVPLAN).
The OptiX OTN product series support transmission of EPL/EVPL or EPLAN/EVPLAN

services between the headquarters (HQ) of a company and its branches through a Layer 2
switching network. Table 4-6 shows the Ethernet service models of the equipment.
Table 4-6 Ethernet service models
Service Model Description
Private Ethernet private line (EPL) Both EPL and EVPL services are point-to-point
line (P2P) services, using a communication channel
service Ethernet virtual private line between two ends. The difference is that, each
(EVPL) EPL service exclusively uses network resources,
while multiple EVPL services share network
resources.
Private Ethernet private LAN EPLAN and EVPLAN are multipoint-to-

network (EPLAN) multipoint services but they can provide point-
service to-multipoint services. They are used to establish
communication channels between multiple

Service Model Description
Ethernet virtual private LAN organizations. Each EPLAN service exclusively

(EVPLAN) uses network resources but different EVPLAN
services share the same network resources.
EPL Services
Each EPL service exclusively uses physical ports and line resources. It features high costs and
high security. As shown in Figure 4-43, the EPL service between the HQ of company A and its
branch, and the EPL service between the HQ of company B and its two branches are transmitted
using their own VCTRUNK channels. In this context, "VCTRUNK channel" is a channel that
carries Ethernet services. It can be a standard ODUk or VC container, or a virtual container
consisting of multiple concatenated standard containers.
Figure 4-43 EPL services
HQ of HQ of
company A company B
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
Branch of Branch of
company A company B
Branch of
company B
Service flow for company A PORT port VCTRUNK channel
Service flow for company B VCTRUNK port
EVPL Services
Different EVPL services share the same physical ports or line resources. Therefore, the use of
EVPL services increases bandwidth utilization and reduces network costs. Different EVPL

services are distinguished by VLAN IDs or QinQ tags, ensuring high reliability. Figure 4-44
shows the application of EVPL services.
Figure 4-44 EVPL Services
HQ of
company A HQ of
company B
VLAN 10 VLAN 11/12
NE 1
VLAN 10
VLAN 12
VLAN 11
Branch of NE 2
company A NE 3
Branch of
company B
Branch of
company B
Service flow for company A PORT port VCTRUNK channel
Service flow for company B VCTRUNK port
As shown in Figure 4-44, EVPL services are classified into two types:
l EVPL services sharing the same PORT port: Data for multiple users is transmitted on the
same PORT port at a site and the data is isolated by VLAN IDs. As shown in Figure
4-44, the two EVPL services between the HQ of company B and its two branches are
identified as VLAN 11 and VLAN 12, each being transmitted over a specific VCTRUNK
channel.
l EVPL services sharing the same VCTRUNK port: Data for multiple users is transmitted
over the same VCTRUNK channel and the data is isolated by VLAN IDs. As shown in
Figure 4-44, between the HQ of company A and its branch, and between the HQ of
company B and one of its branches, two EVPL services are transmitted over the same
VCTRUNK channel and identified as VLAN 10 and VLAN 11.
EPLAN Services
Each EPLAN service exclusively uses physical ports and line resources. It features high costs
and high security. As shown in Figure 4-45, each NE has one or more IEEE 802.1d virtual
bridges (VBs). Each VB creates a forwarding table that is based on MAC addresses. The
forwarding table is updated periodically using the self-learning function of the system. The
incoming Ethernet services are transmitted through different ports based on the MAC addresses
stored in the forwarding table.

Figure 4-45 EPLAN Services
HQ of
company A
VCTRUNK2
VB PORT3
VCTRUNK1
NE 1
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
PORT3 VB VB PORT3
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
NE 2
NE 3
Branch of Branch of
company A company A
Service flow for company A VCTRUNK channel
NOTE
EPLAN services cannot form a ring. Otherwise, a broadcast storm may occur. If necessary, run a spanning
tree protocol on the network or configure some ports mounted to VBs as SPOKEN ports as required.
EVPLAN Services
EVPLAN services can dynamically share resources between multiple points after IEEE 802.1q
VBs or IEEE 802.1ad VBs are established. Unlike EPLAN services, different EVPLAN services
share the same physical ports and line resources. Therefore, the use of EVPLAN services
increases bandwidth utilization and reduces network costs. Different EVPLAN services are
distinguished by VLAN IDs, ensuring high reliability. See Figure 4-46.

Figure 4-46 EVPLAN Services

HQ of
company A
HQ of
VCTRUNK2 company B
PORT3 VB
PORT4
VCTRUNK1
VLAN 10
VLAN 11
VCTRUNK2
PORT3 NE 1
VB
PORT4
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
VB PORT3
PORT4
VCTRUNK1
VLAN 10
VLAN 11 VLAN 11
Branch of NE 2 VLAN 10
company A NE 3 Branch of
company B
Branch of
company B Branch of
company A
Service flow for company A VCTRUNK channel
Service flow for company B
NOTE
EVPLAN services cannot form a ring. Otherwise, a broadcast storm may occur. If necessary, run a spanning
tree protocol on the network or configure some ports mounted to VBs as SPOKEN ports as required.
4.6.2 Service Carrier Solutions and Technologies

The product provide multiple solutions and technologies for carrying Ethernet services.
4.6.2.1 Service Carrier Solutions

In addition to transparently transmitting traditional Ethernet services, the product support Layer
2 switching of Ethernet data packets, provides protection for Ethernet services, and performs
QoS and OAM functions for the Ethernet services. It provides a series of flexible data service
transmission solutions, including packet transport, Ethernet over OTN (EoO), Ethernet over
WDM (EoW), and Ethernet over SDH (EoS).
Table 4-7 describes the Ethernet service transmission solutions.

Table 4-7 Transmission solutions for Ethernet services
Ethernet Service Main Feature Supported Available Board

Transmission Ethernet Services Type
Solution
Packet transmission l Supports end-to- E-Line/E-LAN, EX2, EG16, PND2,

end MPLS-TP VPWS/VPLS HUNS3, HUNQ2
packet
transmission.
l Supports end-to-
end flexible
LSPs, providing
bandwidth at any
rate.
l Uses the
centralized
packet service
grooming
algorithm to
achieve
directionless
grooming
between boards
and ports.
EoO l Encapsulates EPL, EVPL, TEM28

services into 16 EPLAN, EVPLAN
channels of
ODU0, 8
channels of
ODU1, 2
channels of
ODU2, or 8
channels of
ODUflex signals,
and supports
ODUk grooming,
fully using
functions of the
OTN cross-
connect plane.
l Provides
tributary-line-
separate boards.

Ethernet Service Main Feature Supported Available Board

Transmission Ethernet Services Type
Solution
EoW l Encapsulates EPL, EVPL, LEM24, LEX4

services into EPLAN, EVPLAN
OTU2 signals
and enables all
the received
services to share
OTU2
bandwidth.
l Provides
tributary-line-
combined boards.
EoS l Encapsulates EPL, EVPL, EGSH, EAS2

services into EPLAN, EVPLAN
VC-4 or VC-3
signals and
supports VC
grooming.
l Provides
tributary-line-
separate boards.
4.6.2.2 Service Carrier Technologies

The product support Ethernet service carrier technologies such as port carrier (physical
isolation), VLAN, and multi-protocol label switching (MPLS). The VLAN technology includes
QinQ technology. This section describes the MPLS and QinQ technologies, which are more
complex.
MPLS
MPLS is a type of transmission technology and it is used to transparently transmit data packets
between users. The MPLS technology includes pseudo wire edge to edge emulation (PWE3)
and MPLS tunnel.
l PWE3
PWE3 is a type of L2VPN protocol. In a packet switched network (PSN), PWE3 provides
tunnels and emulates various services, for example, Ethernet services. PWE3 carries
services that are received over different mediums on one MPLS network, eliminating the
need for constructing multiple networks and therefore reducing the OPEX.
PWE3 creates point-to-point tunnels, which are separated from each other. The Layer 2
packets from users are transparently transmitted in PWs. PWs must be carried on the MPLS
Tunnel.

Figure 4-47 Application of PWE3
Branch of
company A
NE3
HQ of
company A NE1 PSN
NE2
HQ of
company B
Branch of
company B
PW Service flow
l MPLS Tunnel
The MPLS tunnel is defined by the MPLS protocol. Independent from services, the MPLS
tunnel implements end-to-end transmission and carries PWs that contain the services.
Figure 4-48 shows how the MPLS tunnel is used to transmit services.
Figure 4-48 Application of the MPLS tunnel
HQ of Branch of
company A company A
NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
PSN
HQ of Branch of
company B company B
PW MPLS tunnel
QinQ
Services from the user side are carried by the QinQ link on the network side. Multiple VLANs
of the user network are encapsulated in QinQ mode into one VLAN in the transport network. In
this way, the VLAN resources in the transport network are saved. The QinQ technology is a
VLAN stacking and nesting technology. Using the QinQ technology, data packets carry two
layers of VLAN tags for the identification purpose. This removes the limit of the original solution
in which only one layer of VLAN tag is used, extending the VLAN IDs. Figure 4-49 shows the
application of the QinQ technology.

Figure 4-49 Application of the QinQ technology

C-VLAN1
NE1 Service
Network A
S-VLAN1 C-VLAN1
NE2
C-VLAN1
S-VLAN2 C-VLAN1
S-VLAN1 C-VLAN1
Service
Network B
S-VLAN2 C-VLAN1 C-VLAN1
NE3
C-VLAN1
4.6.3 Quality of Service (QoS)

Quality of service (QoS) can properly allocate limited bandwidth resources by service type. In
case of network congestion, QoS preferentially guarantees committed bandwidth for important
services to ensure their availability.
QoS is a network traffic management mechanism ensuring end-to-end transmission quality of

customer services.
The mechanism provides the following functions:

l Identifies and classifies incoming service flows, and specifies service levels for different
classes.
l Allocates different traffic classes their required network resources, such as bandwidth and
forwarding priorities. If network congestion occurs, ensuring that data packets with higher
priorities are forwarded according to the specified QoS requirements.
l Uses uniform QoS policies networkwide to provide quality guarantees for customer
services from end to end.
QoS Behaviors for Packet Transport Networks

The following describes the QoS behaviors that are performed by the product in a packet
transport network.
l When functioning as an edge node on a PSN network, OTN equipment implements the
following QoS behaviors:
– DiffServ domain mapping
Supports mapping between service packet priorities and PHB levels, providing different
QoS guarantees for service traffic with different PHB levels.
– Port policies
– At an ingress port
Filters service traffic using the access control list (ACL) and denies the access of
service traffic in the blacklist.
– At an egress port
Configures discarding policies to specify different discarding modes for packets with
different forwarding priorities, ensuring a lower discarding rate and discarding delay

for packets with high forwarding priorities compared with those with low forwarding
priorities.
Configures scheduling policies for queues at the egress port, ensuring that queues
with high priorities are preferentially forwarded.
– V-UNI ingress policies
Performs class of service (CoS) and committed access rate (CAR) behaviors for service
traffic in the complex traffic classification, providing precise QoS control over service
traffic.
– Traffic shaping: Shapes service flows into an egress port, ensuring that the port evenly
transmits packets.
l When functioning as intermediate nodes on a PSN network, the product provides required
PHB levels for service traffic with different priorities according to the DiffServ domain
mapping.
QoS Behaviors for EoO/EoW/EoS Networks

Figure 4-50 shows QoS behaviors on Ethernet boards on an EoO/EoW/EoS network.
Figure 4-50 QoS application points

Ingress side Egress side
Traffic
1 3 CoS
classification
Data
flow
Ethernet
board
2 CAR 4 Shaping
l On the ingress side, OptiX OSN 8800 support the following QoS behaviors:
– Traffic classification: identifies the data flow that enters the board. Ethernet boards
support simple traffic classification based on ports and Ethernet packet labels.
– CAR: limits the rate of the specified data flow, ensuring that the conformant packets
are forwarded.
l On the egress side, OptiX OSN 8800 support the following QoS behaviors:
– CoS: binds CoS behaviors to specified packets, ensuring that high-priority data packets
are preferentially forwarded.
– Traffic shaping: ensures that the specified packets are transmitted evenly at a defined
rate, preventing burst traffic and packet loss.

4.6.4 Typical Application

The OptiX OSN 8800 products support the leased line application and broadband aggregation
application in a data communication network.
4.6.4.1 Leased Line Application

OptiX OSN 8800 products support point-to-point (P2P), point-to-multipoint (P2MP), and
multipoint-to-multipoint (MP2MP) services on leased lines.
Application of Leased Lines for Packet Transport

l Point-to-Point Service
As shown in Figure 4-51, a point-to-point service is required between the headquarters
(HQ) of company A and its branch. The OptiX OSN 8800 is used as the service access
nodes. In this situation, the E-Line service can be used to emulate the point-to-point service.
The data flows are separated by ports or VLAN IDs and are forwarded based on the VLAN
IDs and MAC addresses.
Figure 4-51 Point-to-point service
Access Access
Point Point
HQ of company A NE 1 NE 2 Branch of company A
Ethernet MPLS-TP Ethernet
Tunnel Service flow for company A
l Point-to-Multipoint Service
As shown in Figure 4-52 and Figure 4-53, a point-to-multipoint service is required between
the HQ of company A and its branches. The OptiX OSN 8800 is used as the service access
nodes. In this situation, the E-Line or E-LAN service can be used to emulate the point-to-
multipoint service.
– When the E-Line service is implemented, the services between the HQ of company A
and its branches are separated by VLAN IDs.
– When the E-LAN service is implemented, the data flows between the HQ of company
A and its branches are separated by ports or VLAN IDs and forwarded based on VLAN
IDs and MAC addresses.

Figure 4-52 Point-to-multipoint service (implemented by using the E-Line service)

HQ of
company A
Ethernet
Access NE 1
Point E-Line
VLAN1 VLAN2 VLAN3

MPLS-TP
NE 2 NE 4
Access
Access Point
Ethernet Point NE 3
Access
Point
Branch of
Branch of
company A
company A
Branch of
company A

Figure 4-53 Point-to-multipoint service (implemented by using the E-LAN service)
HQ of
company A
Ethernet
Access NE 1
E-LAN
Point
Split Horizon Group

MPLS-TP
NE 2 NE 4
Access
Access Point
Point
Ethernet NE 3
Access
Point
Branch of Branch of
company A company A
Branch of
company A
l Multipoint-to-Multipoint Service
As shown in Figure 4-54, a multipoint-to-multipoint service is required between the HQ
of company A and its branches. The OptiX OSN 8800 is used as the service access nodes.
In this situation, the E-LAN service can be used to emulate the multipoint-to-multipoint
service. The data flows are separated by ports or VLAN IDs and are forwarded based on
the VLAN IDs and MAC addresses.

Figure 4-54 Multipoint-to-multipoint service
HQ of
company A
E-LAN
Ethernet
NE 1
MPLS-TP
NE 2
E-Line
NE 3
Ethernet
E-Line
Branch of Branch of
company A company A
Application of Leased Lines for EoO/EoW/EoS

l P2P Services
As shown in Figure 4-55, a P2P service is required between the HQ of company A and its
branch, and OptiX OSN 8800 products function as service access points. To address these
requirements, EPL/EVPL services can be configured considering the following aspects:
– If an EPL service is configured, specific physical ports are required.
– If an EVPL service is configured, it needs to be identified using a VLAN ID.

Figure 4-55 P2P services

EVPL
VLAN 1
Other VLAN
EPL
PORT VCTRUNK
Access Access
Point Point
HQ of company A NE 1 NE 2 Branch of company A
Ethernet over
Ethernet Ethernet
WDM/OTN/SDH
VCTRUNK channel Service flow for company A
l P2MP Services
As shown in Figure 4-56 and Figure 4-57, P2MP services are required between the HQ
of company A and its branches, and OptiX OSN 8800 products function as service access
points. To address these requirements, EVPL/EPLAN/EVPLAN services can be
configured considering the following aspects:
– If EVPL services are configured, they need to be identified using VLAN IDs.
– If EPLAN services are configured, they need to be isolated using ports and forwarded
according to MAC addresses.
– If EVPLAN services are configured, they need to be isolated using VLAN IDs and
forwarded according to MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.

Figure 4-56 P2MP services (EVPL)
HQ of
company A
Ethernet
NE 1 EVPL
VLAN1 VLAN2 VLAN3

Ethernet
over
WDM/OTN NE 2 NE 4
Ethernet NE 3
Branch of Branch of
company A company A
Branch of company A

Figure 4-57 P2MP services (EVPLAN/EPLAN)

HQ of
company A
Ethernet HUB
EVPLAN/
NE 1 EPLAN
Spoken Spoken Spoken
Ethernet
over
WDM/OTN/SDH NE 2 NE 4
Ethernet NE 3
Branch of
company A Branch of
company A
Branch of
company A
l MP2MP Services
As shown in Figure 4-58, MP2MP services are required between the HQ of company A
and its branches, and OptiX OSN 8800 products function as service access points. To
address these requirements, EPLAN/EVPLAN services can be configured considering the
following aspects:
– If EPLAN services are configured, they need to be isolated using ports and forwarded
according to MAC addresses.
– If EVPLAN services are configured, they need to be isolated using ports or VLAN IDs
and forwarded according to MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.

Figure 4-58 MP2MP services

HQ of
company A
Ethernet
NE 1 EVPLAN/
EPLAN
Ethernet
over
WDM/OTN/SDH
EVPL/
NE 2 NE 3 EPL
Ethernet
EVPL/
EPL
Branch of Branch of
company A company A
4.6.4.2 Broadband Aggregation Application

OptiX OSN 8800 products support broadband aggregation application, such as high-speed
Internet (HSI), voice over IP (VoIP), and Internet Protocol television (IPTV) services.
HSI and VoIP Application

The OptiX OSN 8800 can be used to increase the bandwidth of metropolitan area networks
(MANs), packet networks, and EoO/EoW/EoS networks. The E-Line and EPL/EVPL
technologies are used to establish dedicated channels to transmit high speed Internet (HSI) or
voice over IP (VoIP) services, providing premium HSI and VoIP services for broadband users.
Figure 4-59 shows the application of HSI/VoIP services.

Figure 4-59 HSI/VoIP application
IP
Internet
network
Softswitch
BRAS
10GE
NE 1
NE 2 NE 4
NE 3
FE/GE/
10GE
DSLAM DSLAM DSLAM
xDSL
Modem
HSI service VoIP service
Different services such as HSI and VoIP have varied network requirements and transmission
performance. The OptiX OSN 8800 performs service-specific QoS behaviors to ensure that
services on the OTN network comply with the service level agreement (SLA).
IPTV Application
In a MAN where multicast services (for example, IPTV) are deployed, the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping is usually used at the Layer 2 network to enhance the

management of multicast services and therefore to prevent a bandwidth waste caused by

multicast video streams at the Layer 2 network.
The OptiX OSN 8800 uses E-LAN (packet network) and EPLAN/EVPLAN (EoO/EoW/EoS
network) technologiesEPLAN/EVPLAN technology (EoO/EoW network) to define a broadcast
domain for multicast services. The equipment for which IGMP snooping is enabled distributes
video streams only to ports that have multicast users; it does not broadcast the video streams to
all downstream nodes. This design helps reduce a bandwidth waste caused by multicast streams
on Layer 2 equipment. The IPTV application for packet networks and IPTV application forEoO/
EoW/EoS networks are shown in Figure 4-60 and Figure 4-61.
Figure 4-60 IPTV application for packet networks
IPTV program
source Multicast NE 1
router
NE 4 DSLAM
MPLS-TP
NE 2 IGMP
NE 3 Snooping
IGMP
Snooping
DSLAM
DSLAM DSLAM
Request
Request for video
for video
Multicast subcriber
Multicast subcriber (host)
(host)
Multicast video stream Tunnel

Figure 4-61 IPTV application for EoO/EoW/EoS networks
DSLAM
IPTV program
source Multicast
router NE 1
NE 4
DSLAM
NE 2 IGMP snooping
NE 3 IGMP
snooping
DSLAM
DSLAM DSLAM DSLAM
Request
Request for video
for video
Multicast subcriber
Multicast subcriber (host)
(host)
Multicast video stream Port currently connected to a multicast subscriber
Port currently not connected to a multicast subscriber
4.7 PID Feature

PID helps to effectively eliminate bandwidth and O&M bottlenecks on a WAN, leveraging the
features such as large capacity, high integration, versatile multi-service access, small size, and
environment-friendly design.
On a WAN, a 40G/80G/120G/200G aggregation ring based on PID boards only is recommended,

eliminating commissioning while enabling quick service provision. At the OTN aggregation
layer, 13 to 20 aggregation rings can be deployed with two to four NEs in each ring. A PID board
(s) is used on each NE's line side. Build a 40G/80G/120G/200G network using PID groups as
required. Figure 4-62 shows the details.

Figure 4-62 Typical application
Line
borad
... Line
borad
Centralized cross connect board
1 2
80x40G Mesh N E
P
3 N
O Q
2 2
Backbone layer
Aggregation layer East West

12xOTU2/ 12xOTU2/
12xOTU2e 12xOTU2e
N 3 E N 3 E
P N P N
O Q O Q
2 2 2 2
120G Ring East
40G Ring ... ... 1 2 1 2
200G Ring
Centralized cross connect board

West
Tributary board
: High-end router : Router : NG WDM equipment Service 1

Service 2
: BRAS : PID-installed NG WDM equipment
1 : 64xODU0/ 32xODU1/8xODU2/8xODU2e
2 : 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e
3 : 4xOTU2/4xOTU2e
In Figure 4-62, service 1 is received through the client-side tributary board and is converted
into an ODUk signal. Then the ODUk signal is cross-connected to the PID board by the cross-
connect board and is finally converted into an OTUk optical signal before it is sent to the east
direction on the WDM side. Service 2 is received by the west PID board. After the OTUk-to-
ODUk conversion is performed, the signal is cross-connected to the east PID board by the cross-
connect board. After the ODUk-to-OTUk conversion, the signal is sent to the east direction on
the WDM side.
4.8 CWDM Feature

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides an 8-wavelength CWDM transmission solution with a channel
spacing of 20nm in the C band, which complies with ITU-T G.694.2, and can carry 2.5 Gbit/s
or 5 Gbit/s services over a single wavelength.

Application
CWDM systems have no OA boards or multiplexer and demultiplexing boards. They use fixed
optical add/drop multiplexer boards to multiplex single-wavelength signals from OTU boards
and send the multiplexed wavelength to the line for transmission
Figure 4-63 shows a typical application of CWDM systems.
Figure 4-63 Typical application of CWDM systems
2.5 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s

OTU OTU
O O
Client A A Client
5 Gbit/s M M 5 Gbit/s
OTU OTU
4.9 DWDM over CWDM Feature

DWDM wavelengths can be transported in the window of CWDM 1531 nm to 1551 nm to
expand the CWDM system capacity.
Figure 4-64 shows the expansion of wavelength allocation. With this expansion scheme, a
CWDM system can transmit a maximum of 26 DWDM wavelengths at 100 GHz channel
spacing. If the DWDM wavelength is 50 GHz in channel spacing, a CWDM system can transmit
a maximum of 50 DWDM wavelengths.

Figure 4-64 DWDM wavelength expansion and allocation in a CWDM system
CWDM DWDM over CWDM DWDM

wavelengths wavelengths
1471nm 1529.55nm
1471nm
1530.33nm
1531.12nm
1491nm 1491nm 1531.90nm

1532.68nm
1533.47nm
1511nm 1511nm 1534.25nm
1529.55nm
- 1535.04nm
1536.61nm 1535.82nm
1531nm 10λ 1536.61nm
1545.32nm
1551nm 16λ
1546.12nm
1545.32nm 1546.92nm
- 1547.72nm
1571nm 1571nm 1557.36nm 1548.51nm
1549.32nm
1550.12nm
1591nm 1591nm 1550.92nm
1551.72nm
1552.52nm
1553.33nm
1611nm 1611nm
1554.13nm
1554.94nm
1555.75nm
1556.55nm
1557.36nm
Figure 4-65 shows the equipment configuration in which DWDM wavelengths are transported
in the window of CWDM 1531 nm to 1551 nm. The DWDM wavelengths need to pass through
the DWDM MUX/DEMUX and CWDM MUX/DEMUX. Hence, the optical amplifier unit
needs to be configured in between.

Figure 4-65 Application of DWDM wavelengths in a CWDM system
OTU
OTU OA
MUX/ MUX/
DEMUX DEMUX
OTU OA
MO M1
OTU MO M1
CWDM
DWDM
4.10 Single-Fiber Bidirectional Transmission

Traditional WDM optical network usually use the single-fiber directional transmission. That is,
one receive fiber and one transmit fiber are used for multi-wavelength optical signals. The
products provide the single-fiber bidirectional transmission solution. That is, the filter function
of an board enables sharing of one fiber for receiving and transmitting multi-wavelength optical
signals. In this way, fiber resources are effectively utilized. The following details the application
scenarios:
l On the WDM side, the SBM2 board extracts two wavelengths of optical signals from the
multiplexed signals and multiplexes another two wavelengths of optical signals into the
multiplexed signals, thereby achieving the add/drop and transmission of four wavelengths.
This scenario applies only to the CWDM system.
l On the client side, a client-side single-fiber bidirectional eSFP/XFP optical module
simultaneously transmits one wavelength of optical signals and receives another
wavelength of optical signals, achieving transmission of signals in both directions over one
fiber.
4.11 Redundancy and Protection

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides abundant equipment-level protection and network-level
protection.
4.11.1 Network Level Protection (OTN)

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides various types of network level protection (OTN), as listed in
Table 4-8.
Table 4-8 Network Level Protection (OTN)
Protection Description
Optical Line It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the OLP board to
Protection protect line fibers between adjacent stations by using diverse routing.
Intra-Board 1+1 It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the OTU/OLP/
Protection DCP board to protect the OCh fibers by using diverse routing.
Client 1+1 It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the OLP/DCP/SCS
Protection board to protect the OTU and the OCh fibers.
ODUk SNCP It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the electrical layer
grooming to protect the line board and the OCh fibers. The cross-connect
granularity is ODUk signals.
Tributary SNCP Protects the tributary service by using the dual-fed and selectively-
receiving function at the electrical cross-connect layer. The cross-connect
granularity is ODUk signals.
SW SNCP The SW SNCP protection uses intra-board cross-connections on the TOM

board to implement the dual fed and selective receiving function. In this
manner, the SW SNCP protection protects the OCh fiber.
ODUk SPRing The ODUk SPRing protection mainly applies to the ring network with
protection distributed services. This protection uses two different ODUk channels
to achieve the protection of multiple distributed services between all
stations.
OWSP It applies to the ring networks. This protection uses two different
wavelengths to achieve the protection of one wavelength of service
between all stations.
4.11.2 Network Level Protection (OCS)

This section describes OCS-based network level protection, including linear MSP, MSP ring,
transoceanic MSP ring, SNCP, and SNCTP.
Table 4-9 Network Level Protection (OCS)
Linear MSP The LMSP uses the MSOH bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic
protection switching and to protect services. OptiX OSN equipment
supports 1+1 and 1:N (N≤14) LMSP.

MSP Ring The ring MSP scheme uses the multiplex section overhead (MSOH)
bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching and
to protect services. OptiX OSN equipment supports two-fiber
bidirectional MSP ring and four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.
Transoceanic MSP A transoceanic multiplex section (MS) is an MS based on the

Ring transoceanic MSP protocol and is used to provide path protection for
higher order services on a transoceanic ring network. OptiX OSN
equipment supports two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring and four-fiber
bidirectional MSP ring.
SNCP The SNCP scheme, which requires one working subnet and one
protection subnet, is to select one service from the dually transmitted
services. If the connection of the working subnet fails or if the
performance of the working subnet fails to meet certain
requirements, the connection of the protection subnet takes over.
SNCTP SNCTP is short for subnetwork connection tunnel protection.

SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC4 level. When the
working path is faulty, all its services can be switched to the
protection path.
4.11.3 Network Level Protection (Ethernet and Packet)

This section describes Ethernet/packet-related network level protection.
The OptiX OSN 8800 provides various types of network level protection (Ethernet and packet),
as listed in Table 4-10.
Table 4-10 Network level protection (Ethernet and packet)
DBPS Distribute board protect system (DBPS) protection protects the

BRAS equipment and links through the virtual router redundancy
protocol (VRRP). DBPS protection implements switching of the
DBPS protection group and switching between the working and
protection BRAS equipment synchronously, and therefore
implementing protection for the links between the data board and
BRAS equipment.
DLAG On an NE, two ports of the same port number on two boards of the
same type are aggregated into a DLAG group, achieving 1+1
protection for the two ports.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) is a protocol for Ethernet

link protection. This protocol is running in an Ethernet ring and
protects links that carry Ethernet services on the ring, improving the
availability of Ethernet services.

LAG The LAG aggregates multiple physical links to form a logical link
that is at a higher rate. Link aggregation functions between adjacent
equipment. Hence, link aggregation is not related to the architecture
of the entire network. Link aggregation is also called port
aggregation because each link corresponds to a port on an Ethernet.
LPT The link pass through (LPT) function detects and reports faults at the
service access points and on the intermediate networks, and helps
the data communication equipment such as routers to switch to the
backup network in a timely manner for communication. In this case,
important services can still be normally transmitted even when the
link is faulty.
MC-LAG Multi-chassis link aggregation group (MC-LAG) enables inter-

device link aggregation and provides dual-homing protection for
Ethernet services.
MSTP The MSTP protocol prevents loops on a network. It is compatible

with the STP and RSTP protocols and resolves the limitations of the
two protocols.
The MSTP protocol trims a ring network into a loop-free tree
network, preventing proliferation and endless cycling of packets on
the network. In addition, the MSTP protocol can trim a ring network
inside an MSTP region into multiple spanning trees based on VLAN
information to balance the network load.
PW APS As network-level protection, PW APS uses a protection PW to

protect the working PW, and helps prevent service interruptions
resulting from the working PW failure. PW APS is available in two
types: PW APS 1+1 and PW APS 1:1.
STP/RSTP The STP and RSTP protocols break a loop network into a loop-free
network using the spanning tree algorithm (STA) to ensure that each
data transmission path is unique on the network and to prevent packet
increasing and cycling.
Tunnel APS As a network protection scheme, tunnel APS uses a protection tunnel
to protect the working tunnel and prevent service interruptions in
case of the working tunnel failures. Tunnel APS is available in two
types: tunnel APS 1+1 and tunnel APS 1:1.

VLAN SNCP Virtual local area network (VLAN) subnetwork connection

protection (SNCP) is a Huawei-developed VLAN-specific
protection scheme for Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) services.
It applies to low-delay and low-jitter transport networks to provide
carrier-level protection for large-traffic and stable EVPL services.
VLAN SNCP protection is implemented using the dual feeding and
selective receiving function. To be specific, the transmit end dually
transmits the VLAN-based Ethernet services to the working and
protection links. The receive end selects the service flow from the
working or protection link based on the service traffic statistics on
the working and protection links. In normal cases, the receive end
selects the service flow from the working link. When the working
link is faulty, the receive end selects the service flow from the
protection link.
4.11.4 Equipment Level Redundancy

Equipment-level protection includes power redundancy, fan redundancy, cross-connect board
redundancy, system control and communication board redundancy, centralized clock board
redundancy, and AUX Board 1+1 Redundancy.
The OptiX OSN 8800 provides equipment level redundancy protection described in Table
4-11.
Table 4-11 Equipment Level Redundancy
Category Description
Power Redundancy Two PIU boards in hot backup mode supply power to one
subrack at the same time. When one of the PIU boards
becomes faulty, the other PIU board continues to supply
power to the subrack to ensure that the subrack can still
function properly.
Fan Redundancy If a fan in the fan tray assemblies fails, the system can
continue to operate for 96 consecutive hours in an
environment with temperatures between 0°C to 45°C (32°
F to 113°F).
Cross-Connect Board Two cross-connect boards can be configured for 1+1

Redundancy backup. The active and standby cross-connect boards in a
subrack connect to all other boards through the backplane
bus to protect cross-connection services.

Category Description
System Control and Two system control and communication boards can be
Communication Board configured for 1+1 backup. The active and standby SCC
Redundancy boards in a subrack connect to all other boards through the
backplane bus to provide the following functions:
l NE database management
l Inter-board communication
l Inter-subrack communication
l Overhead management
Centralized Clock Board Two centralized clock boards can be configured for 1+1
Redundancy backup. The active and standby STG boards in a subrack
connect to all other service boards through the backplane
bus to provide the following functions:
l NE clock management
l Synchronous clock issuing
AUX Board 1+1 Redundancy The active and standby AUX boards in a subrack connect
to all other boards through the backplane bus to protect the
following functions:
4.11.4.1 Power Redundancy

Two PIU boards in hot backup mode supply power to one subrack at the same time. When one
of the PIU boards becomes faulty, the other PIU board continues to supply power to the subrack
to ensure that the subrack can still function properly.
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Power Redundancy

The power distribution and redundancy for the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and general
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 are shown in Figure 4-66 and Figure 4-67, respectively. Each area is
configured with a pair of power supplies in mutual backup. The normal operation of the
equipment is not affected in the case of failure of any external input -48 V/-60V power supply
of each area.

Figure 4-66 Power distribution and redundancy for the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
Mutual backup DC input for area 1
IU91 IU93
A A
U SCC STG U SCC STG
IU EF
PIU PIU EFI2 X IU PIU PIU PIU PIU STI X IU ATE PIU PIU
73 I1
IU69 IU70 IU71 IU74 IU75 77 IU78 IU79 IU80 IU81 IU82 84 IU85 IU86 IU87 IU88 IU89
IU IU IU
72 76 83
IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Cross-connect board
Cross-connect board
Cross-connect board
Cross-connect board
IU IU IU IU
9 10 43 44
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
IU90 IU92
Front Rear
Figure 4-67 Power distribution and redundancy for the general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
Mutual backup DC input for area 2 Mutual backup DC input for area 4
Mutual backup DC input for area 1 Mutual backup DC input for area 3
IU91 IU93
A A
U SCC STG U SCC STG
IU EF
PIU PIU EFI2 X IU PIU PIU PIU PIU STI X IU ATE PIU PIU
73 I1
IU69 IU70 IU71 IU74 IU75 77 IU78 IU79 IU80 IU81 IU82 84 IU85 IU86 IU87 IU88 IU89
IU IU IU
72 76 83
Cross-connet board
Cross-connet board
Cross-connet board
Cross-connet board
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
IU IU IU IU
9 10 43 44
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
IU90 IU92
Front Rear


As shown in Figure 4-68. Each area is configured with a pair of power supplies in mutual backup.
The normal operation of the equipment is not affected in the case of failure of any external input
-48 V/-60V power supply of each area.
Figure 4-68 Power distribution and redundancy for the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack
IU51
EFI1 PIU PIU AUX STG STG PIU PIU STI ATE
EFI2 IU43
IU37 IU38 IU39 IU40 IU41 IU42 IU44 IU45 IU46 IU47 IU48
SCC
Cross-connect board
Cross-connect board
IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU27 IU29 IU30 IU31 IU32 IU33 IU34 IU35 IU36
IU28
IU IU
9 10
SCC
IU11
IU50
NOTE
The power distribution and redundancy for the enhanced subrack and general subrack is the same.


As shown in Figure 4-69. OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is configured with a pair of power supplies of
mutual backup. The normal operation of the equipment is not affected in the case of failure of
any external input -48 V/-60V power supply.
Figure 4-69 Power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
Mutual backup DC input
IU19 IU20 IU21 IU23 IU24

IU22
EFI PIU AUX PIU ATE
IU9 IU10
IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
IU25 FAN
OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack Power Redundancy

As shown in Figure 4-70. OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack is configured with a pair
of power supplies of mutual backup. The normal operation of the equipment is not affected in
the case of failure of any external input -48 V/-60V power supply.

Figure 4-70 Power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack
4.11.4.2 Fan Redundancy
Table 4-12 Number of fan tray assemblies and the number of fans in each fan tray assembly
Subrack Number of Fan Tray Number of Fans in a Fan

Assemblies Tray Assembly
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 4 3
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 2 3
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 1 10
OptiX OSN 8800 platform 1 10

subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 universal 1 8

platform subrack
If a fan in the fan tray assemblies fails, the system can continue to operate for 96 consecutive
hours in an environment with temperatures between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F).
Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following situations:

l OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies of any side (front or back).
One or more fans fail in each of the four fan tray assemblies.

Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.
One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assembly.
l OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack
Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assembly.
4.11.4.3 Cross-Connect Board Redundancy

Two cross-connect boards can be configured for 1+1 backup.
Table 4-13 Relationship between cross-connect boards and equipment
Product Cross-connect Board Supported
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 SXM+XCT, SXH+XCT, or USXH

+UXCT
General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 SXM+XCT or SXH+XCT
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 XCM, XCH, UXCM, or UXCH
General OptiX OSN 8800 T32 XCH or XCM
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 XCH or UXCMa
a: A TN16XCH/TN16UXCM board integrates the functions of the cross-connect board,

system control and communication board, and clock board.
The active and standby cross-connect boards in a subrack connect to all other boards through
the backplane bus to protect cross-connection services. For details, see Figure 4-71, Figure
4-72, and Figure 4-73 .
When the standby cross-connect board detects that the active cross-connect board is faulty or
receives a switching command from the NMS, it immediately takes over the active cross-connect
board, sets itself as the active cross-connect board, and reports a switching event. Services on
the subrack are not affected during the switching.
There are two types of switching for the 1+1 protection switching of cross-connect boards:
l Automatic switching
The cross-connect board detects its own status through hardware or software. If it is in the
abnormal status, a switching is performed automatically. The switching is performed by
the board and no manual operation is required.
Switching trigger conditions are as follows:
– A hardware fault occurs on the cross-connect board.
– The cross-connect board goes offline when, for example, it is removed or undergoes a
cold reset.
– A fault occurs on bus between a service board and the cross-connect board.

– Switching occurs between the active and standby STG boards in an OptiX OSN 8800
T64/T32 subrack.
l Manual switching
When a switching is required in a test during the normal running of the active and the
standby SCCs, the switching can be performed manually.
Figure 4-71 Cross-connect boards in mutual backup for OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU45 IU68
Active Standby
backplane backplane
bus SXM + XCT bus
SXM + XCT SXH + XCT
SXH + XCT USXH+UXCT
USXH+UXCT Standby
Active
ODUk/VC-n
ODUk/VC-n
IU1 IU8 IU11 IU42
NOTE
The letter k in "ODUk" is 0, 1, 2, 3,4, or flex

The letter n in "VC-n" is 12, 3, or 4
The SXM board supports VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 signals. The SXH/USXH board supports VC-4 signals.

IU20 IU27 IU29 IU36
Active Standby
backplane backplane
bus XCH bus
XCH XCM
XCM UXCH Standby
Active UXCH UXCM
UXCM ODUk/VC-n/Packet
ODUk/VC-n/Packet
IU1 IU8 IU12 IU19
NOTE
The letter k in "ODUk" is 0, 1, 2, 3,4, or flex

Only UXCH/UXCM board supports packet services.
The XCM/UXCM board supports VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 signals. The XCH/UXCH board supports VC-4 signals.
IU1 IU8 IU11 IU18
Active Standby
backplane backplane
bus XCH bus
XCH UXCM
UXCM
Active Standby
ODUk/VC-n//Packet
ODUk/VC-n/Packet
NOTE

The letter k in "ODUk" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or flex
Only UXCM board supports packet services.
Only UXCM board supports VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 signals.

4.11.4.4 System Control and Communication Board Redundancy

Two system control and communication boards can be configured for 1+1 backup.
Table 4-14 Relationship between system control and communication boards and equipment
Product SCC Board Supported
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 TNK2SCC
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 TN52SCC/TN51SCCa
OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack TN52SCC
a: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 enhance subrack does not support TN51SCC board.
b:A TN16XCH/TN16UXCM board integrates the functions of the cross-connect board,
Figure 4-74 SCC boards in mutual backup
Universal
IU1 IUn
slots
Active Standby
backplane backplane
bus bus
Active SCC Standby SCC
The active and standby SCC boards in a subrack connect to all other boards through the backplane
bus to provide the following functions:
l NE database management
l Overhead management
When the standby SCC detects that the active SCC board is faulty or receives a switching
command from the NMS, it immediately takes over the active SCC board, sets itself as the active
SCC board, and reports a switching event. The preceding functions are not affected during the
switching.
There are two types of switching for the 1+1 protection switching of SCCs:
The SCC detects its own status through hardware or software. If it is in the abnormal status,
a switching is performed automatically. The switching is performed by the board and no
manual operation is required.

The following conditions trigger automatic switching:

– A hardware fault occurs on the SCC board.
– The SCC board goes offline when, for example, it is removed or undergoes a cold reset.
l Manual switching
standby SCCs, the switching can be performed manually.
4.11.4.5 Centralized Clock Board Redundancy

Two centralized clock boards can be configured for 1+1 backup.
Table 4-15 Relationship between centralized clock boards and equipment
Product STG/XCH/UXCM Board Supported
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 TNK2STG
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 TN52STG
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 TN16XCH/TN16UXCMa
OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack TN12STG
a: A TN16XCH/TN16UXCM board integrates the functions of the cross-connect board,

Figure 4-75 STG/XCH/UXCM boards in mutual backup
Service
IU1 IUn
slots
Active Standby
backplane backplane
bus bus
Active STG Standby STG
The active and standby STG/XCH/UXCM boards in a subrack connect to all other service boards
through the backplane bus to provide the following functions:
l NE clock management
l Synchronous clock issuing
When the standby STG/XCH/UXCM detects that the active STG/XCH/UXCM board is faulty
or receives a switching command from the NMS, it immediately takes over the active STG/
XCH/UXCM board, sets itself as the active STG/XCH/UXCM board, and reports a switching
event. The preceding functions are not affected during the switching.

There are two types of switching for the 1+1 protection switching of STG/XCH/UXCMs:
The STG/XCH/UXCM detects its own status through hardware or software. If it is in the
abnormal status, a switching is performed automatically. The switching is performed by
the board and no manual operation is required.
– A hardware fault occurs on the STG/XCH/UXCM board.
– The STG/XCH/UXCM board goes offline when, for example, it is removed or
undergoes a cold reset.
– Switching occurs between the active and standby cross-connect boards in an OptiX
OSN 8800 T64/T32 subrack.
l Manual switching
standby STG/XCH/UXCMs, the switching can be performed manually.
4.11.4.6 AUX Board 1+1 Redundancy

The AUX board of OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32/T16 subrack adopts 1+1 backup, as shown in
Table 4-16.
Table 4-16 Mapping relationship between AUX board and equipment
Product Subrack Board Type Slots for Active and

Type Supported Standby Boards
Supported
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Enhanced TN52AUX IU72 & IU73, IU83 & IU84
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 IU41 & IU43
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 - TN16AUX IU21 & IU22
The active and standby AUX boards in a subrack connect to all other boards (as shown in Figure
4-76 ) through the backplane bus to protect the following functions:
When the standby AUX detects that the active AUX board is faulty or receives a switching
command from the NMS, it immediately takes over the active AUX board, sets itself as the
active AUX board, and reports a switching event. The preceding functions are not affected during
the switching.

Figure 4-76 AUX boards in mutual backup
Universal IU1 IUn

slots
Active Standby
backplane backplane
bus bus
Active AUX Standby AUX
There are two types of switching for the 1+1 protection switching of AUXs:
The AUX detects its own status through hardware or software. If it is in the abnormal status,
a switching is performed automatically. The switching is performed by the board and no
manual operation is required.
– A hardware fault occurs on either AUX board.
– The AUX board is offline after it is removed or reset (cold).
NOTE
AUX board only supports the non-revertive switching.

l Manual switching
standby AUXs, the switching can be performed manually.
4.12 Automatic Optical Power Management

l ALS
After the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function is enabled on an OTU or a tributary
board, the board disables the laser in the transmit direction when it receives no optical
signals from the upstream board and re-enables the laser after it receives optical signals.
The ALS function prevents human injuries and prolongs the life of a laser by decreasing
the working time of the laser.
l AGC
The automatic gain control (AGC) function ensures that channel gain is not affected when
wavelengths are added or dropped or when there is optical power fluctuation in the WDM
system. This function guarantees normal service running in the WDM system.
The AGC function locks the gain of a single channel using forward and backward feedback
control loops. When an optical amplifier (OA) works in gain locking mode and the input
optical power fluctuates, the AGC function automatically starts without requiring
configuration on the NMS. In this case, the output optical power of the OA changes
according to the input optical power and channel gain remains the same.

l ALC
Optical fiber aging, optical connector aging, multiple wavelengths added or dropped
simultaneously or other power changes are factors that may lead to abnormal loss on the
line. When this happens, line loss is changed, the optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) of
the system is degraded. To minimize such influence, the automatic level control (ALC)
function automatically adjusts the output power of the amplifiers in the link according to
the line loss change. When the line loss changes, the output power of it will remain
unchanged.
l APE
The automatic power equilibrium (APE) function automatically detects and adjusts the
optical power along channels on WDM-side ports to ensure the required channel optical
power flatness. If the channel optical power varies and flatness is not maintained to a
specified requirement, the OSNR of the optical transmission line will deteriorate, which
will degrade and possibly interrupt the communication.
l IPA
The optical amplifiers (OAs) have high optical power. If the fiber connecting to the OA
breaks, the OA will still emit light if the laser on the amplifier is not shut down. The intense
light will cause injuries to maintenance personnel during fiber maintenance. To prevent the
personal injuries, the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function promptly shuts down
lasers on the affected OAs if the fiber breaks.
l IPA of Raman System
The laser hazard class of the Raman board is class 4 and the maximum output optical power
of the LINE optical port on the Raman board is above 27 dBm (500 mW). To prevent
personal injuries to human body especially to the eyes caused by laser radiation from
exposed fibers, the system provides the IPA function and auto Raman laser shutdown to
promptly turn off the lasers on Raman amplifiers in events of line faults. This ensures that
the line optical power stays at a safe level.
l IPA of PID
The system provides the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function for PID boards. When
there is a fiber break on the line, the upstream PID board is shut down to prevent injuries.
After the system is recovered, the PID board resumes normal operation.
l OPA
Users can specify a mode on the NMS when configuring optical cross-connections. If the
auto mode is selected during deployment, the optical power adjust (OPA) function adjusts
the attenuation of each EVOA on cross-connect paths to make services available. In
practical applications, however, the OPA function should be used together with manual
adjustment or the MDS 6630 to accurately adjust EVOA attenuation, ensuring that the input
power of optical amplifier and OTU boards meets the anticipated system requirements.
4.12.1 ALS
When a client-side or WDM-side fault occurs, the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function, if
being enabled, shuts down the laser(s) on the associated transmit ports. It turns on the laser(s)
on the transmit port(s) again when the fault has been eliminated. With ALS being enabled, fault
information about the WDM equipment can be transmitted to client equipment.

NOTE
The ALS function provided by wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) products is different from the
ALS defined in ITU-T G.664. The latter applies to SDH systems to turn off line-side lasers on SDH boards
in the event of a line fiber cut, protecting maintenance personnel against laser radiation. However, in a
WDM system, the IPA function is used to turn off lasers on optical amplifiers, which are used to amplify
the power of multiplexed wavelength signals, in the event of a line fiber cut, limiting line power below a
normal level. For details on IPA implementation, see sections "IPA", "IPA of Raman System", and "PID
IPA" in "Automatic Optical Power Management".
Table 4-17 describes the application scenarios of ALS.
Table 4-17 ALS Application Scenario
Unidirectional Fault Transmission Bidirectional Fault Transmission
l In the case of a fault occurs on the client l In the case of a fault occurs on the client
side: side:
OTU A OTU B OTU A OTU B
Laser off Laser off

Fault Fault
Fault
status
status Fault
Laser off
l In the case of a fault occurs on the WDM

l In the case of a fault occurs on the WDM
side:
side: OTU A OTU B
OTU A OTU B
Laser off
Laser off Fault
Fault status
Fault Fault
status Laser off
4.12.2 AGC
The automatic gain control (AGC) function ensures that channel gain is not affected when
wavelengths are added or dropped or when there is optical power fluctuation in the WDM system.
This function guarantees normal service running in the WDM system.
The AGC function locks the gain of a single channel using forward and backward feedback
control loops. When an optical amplifier (OA) works in gain locking mode and the input optical
power fluctuates, the AGC function automatically starts without requiring configuration on the
NMS. In this case, the output optical power of the OA changes according to the input optical
power and channel gain remains the same. Figure 4-77 shows how the AGC function works
during optical power fluctuation.

Figure 4-77 AGC function during optical power fluctuation
Gain unchanged
Gain = M dB
Gain = M dB Input optical
power } Variation
increases.
OA OA
Gain unchanged
Gain = M dB Input optical

power Gain = M dB
decreases. } Variation
OA OA
The AGC function also ensures that the channel gain remains the same when wavelengths added
or dropped, as shown in Figure 4-78.
Figure 4-78 AGC function during wavelength adding or dropping
Gain unchanged
Gain = M dB Gain = M dB
Wavelength
adding
OA OA
Gain unchanged
Gain = M dB Gain = M dB
Wavelength
dropping
OA OA

4.12.3 ALC
A number of factors may cause abnormal line loss, such as the aging of optical fibers and optical
connectors, simultaneous adding or dropping of multiple wavelengths, or optical power changes.
Increased loss on a section of the line will deteriorate the optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR)
performance of the whole system. To minimize such effects, the product provides the automatic
level control (ALC) function. The ALC function automatically adjusts the output power of the
amplifiers on a link according to the line loss variation, and in this way maintains the same output
power for the line even when line loss is changing.
l System power without ALC: As shown in Figure 4-79, when the fiber between node 2 and
node 3 ages, the line loss increases and the output power of node 5 decreases, impairing
the OSNR performance of the whole system.
Figure 4-79 System power without ALC
Fiber aging causes

high line loss here.
1
Fault
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Node 5

Normal output
Attenuated output
Attenuated input
2 3
Optical power Optical power
decreases. decreases at last.
OTM OLA Wavelengths
l System power with ALC: As shown in Figure 4-80, line loss increases when the fiber
between node 2 and node 3 ages. The system automatically adjusts the power of link 1 and
maintains the output power of node 3 within the normal range. In this way, the output power
of node 5 stays within the permitted range and the effect on the OSNR performance of the
system is minimized.

Figure 4-80 System power with ALC
Fiber aging causes

high line loss here.
1
Fault
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Node 5

Normal output
Normal input
Attenuated intput
2 3 4
Optical power Ajusted automatically, Optical power is
decreases. output becomes normal. normal finally.
OTM OLA Wavelengths Link 1
4.12.4 APE
The automatic power equilibrium (APE) function automatically detects and adjusts the optical
power of the channels on WDM-side ports to ensure the required channel optical power flatness.
If flatness is not maintained at a required level due to channel optical power changes, the OSNR
performance of the optical transmission line will deteriorate, which will impair and may
eventually interrupt the communication. The APE function can prevent this problem.
In practical applications of a WDM system, the channel optical power flatness at the receive end
may differ greatly from the channel optical power flatness achieved during the deployment
process, due to changes in fiber conditions, as shown in Figure 4-81.
Figure 4-81 Changes in the channel optical power flatness at the receive end (without APE)
Optical power
flatness
Transmit end OLA OADM Receive end OTM
When the optical power of channels at the receive end is not flat, the optical power of the channels
must be adjusted to ensure the required optical power flatness. However, manually adjusting the
optical power is not only complex but also demanding.
To ease maintenance, use the APE function to automatically balance optical power, as shown
in Figure 4-82.

Figure 4-82 Changes in the channel optical power flatness at the receive end (with APE)
Adjusts channel Optical power
optical power. flatness
Transmit end OLA OADM Receive end OTM

(Adjustment site) (Detection site)
Detects channel
optical power.
Communication channel between NEs
As shown in the preceding figure, the APE function applies to both the transmit and receive ends
of the signal. The transmit and receive ends exchange APE protocol frames, deliver APE
instructions, and advertise APE execution results using an NE communication channel.
l At the receive end (detection site), the detection unit automatically detects the optical power
of each channel. If the optical power does not meet the requirement, the detection unit
delivers an instruction to the adjustment site requesting the adjustment site to adjust the
channel optical power.
l At the transmit end (adjustment site), the adjustment unit automatically adjusts channel
optical power after receiving the optical power adjustment instruction and informs the
detection site of the power adjustment results.
l A detection site and an adjustment site constitute an APE pair.
4.12.5 IPA
The optical amplifiers (OAs) have high optical power. If the fiber connecting to the OA breaks,
the OA will still emit light if the laser on the amplifier is not shut down. The intense light will
cause injuries to maintenance personnel during fiber maintenance. To prevent the personal
injuries, the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function promptly shuts down lasers on the
affected OAs if the fiber breaks.
NOTICE
If optical amplifiers boards maximum output optical power is over 21.3 dBm, the IPA function
must be configured; otherwise, safety cannot be ensured and injuries may result.
If the IPA function is not configured for such a system, all these boards will report a
LASER_HAZARD_WARNING alarm.
l Without IPA: as shown in Figure 4-83, after a fiber is broken, the optical amplifiers still
emit light during fiber maintenance if the IPA function is not configured. The laser radiation
from the exposed fiber will cause injuries to human body.

Figure 4-83 Without IPA
l With IPA: as shown in Figure 4-84, after a fiber is broken, lasers on the optical amplifiers
are shut down during fiber maintenance if the IPA function is configured and enabled. No
laser radiation comes from the exposed fiber, and therefore human safety is ensured.
Figure 4-84 With IPA
4.12.6 IPA of Raman System

The output optical power of the LINE optical port on the Raman board is very high. To prevent
personal injuries to human body especially to the eyes caused by laser radiation from exposed
fibers, the system provides the IPA function and auto Raman laser shutdown to promptly turn
off the lasers on Raman amplifiers in events of line faults. This ensures that the line optical power
stays at a safe level.

NOTICE
If boards with higher lasers, for example, Raman amplifier boards, are configured in the system,
the IPA function must be configured; otherwise, personal safety cannot be ensured and injuries
may result.
If the IPA function is not configured for such a system, all these boards will report a
LASER_HAZARD_WARNING alarm.
l Without IPA: as shown in Figure 4-85, after a fiber is broken, the Raman board and optical
amplifier board (OA board) still emit light during fiber maintenance if the IPA function is
not configured. The laser radiation from the exposed fiber will cause injuries to human
body.
Figure 4-85 Without IPA
l With IPA: as shown in Figure 4-86, after a fiber is broken, lasers on the Raman amplifier
and optical amplifier are shut down during fiber maintenance if the IPA function is
configured and enabled. No laser radiation comes from the exposed fiber, and therefore
human safety is ensured.
Figure 4-86 With IPA

4.12.7 IPA of PID

The system provides the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function for PID boards. When there
is a fiber break on the line, the upstream PID board is shut down to prevent injuries. After the
system is recovered, the PID board resumes normal operation.
Common IPA and PID IPA are implemented in the same way; however, compared with common
IPA, PID IPA is easier to configure.
The principle for implementing PID IPA is as follows:
l As shown in Figure 4-87, when the fiber between sites A and B is broken, the PID board
at site B reports a MUT_LOS alarm. After the PID board detects the MUT_LOS alarm, the
PID board shuts down the laser on its OUT port. Then the PID board at site A detects a
MUT_LOS alarm and also shuts down the laser on its OUT port.
l As shown in Figure 4-88, after the fiber is repaired, the PID boards at sites A and B
successfully receive optical signals and terminate the MUT_LOS alarm. The PID boards
open the lasers on their OUT ports. Then the optical line is restored.
Figure 4-87 PID IPA (fiber break detection and laser shutdown procedure)
A B
5. Shut down
1. Fiber Cut 2. MUT_LOS
Laser
OUT IN
Fault OBU1P1
PID PID
IN OUT
OBU1P1
3. Shut down
4. MUT_LOS Laser

Figure 4-88 PID IPA (Laser enabling procedure)

A B
2. MUT_LOS
5. Open Laser
disappear
OUT IN
OBU1P1
1. Send Laser
impulse
PID PID
IN OUT
OBU1P1
4. MUT_LOS
3. Open Laser
disappear
4.12.8 OPA
Optical power adjust (OPA) function is used during the creation of an optical service.
Users can specify the power adjustment mode on the NMS when configuring optical cross-
connections. If the auto mode is selected during deployment, the OPA function adjusts the
attenuation of each EVOA on cross-connect paths to make services available. In practical
applications, however, the OPA function should be used together with manual adjustment or the
MDS 6630 to accurately adjust EVOA attenuation, ensuring that the input power of optical
amplifier and OTU boards meets the anticipated system requirements.
Overview
For an ROADM site as shown in Figure 4-89, an OPA adjustment area includes power
adjustment points and power reference points. Each OPA adjustment area can have one or
multiple power adjustment points. The OPA function automatically adjusts the attenuation of
each EVOA inside each OPA adjustment area based on the optical power at the output and input
power reference points.
l Power reference point: the rated input and output power of the optical amplifier boards and
the input power of the OTU at the edges of an OPA adjustment area on the line.
l Power adjustment point: EVOA-equipped boards inside an OPA adjustment area, including
ROADM boards, M40V, TN12OAU1, TN13OAU1, TN12OBU1, TN12OBU2, and VAx
boards.
l OPA adjustment area: the area made up of power adjustment and reference points.
The OPA function does not adjust the attenuation of an EVOA that is out of the OPA adjustment
area. Instead users have to manually adjust the attenuation of the EVOA, if required. For
example, the VA1 board in Figure 4-89 is a such EVOA.

Figure 4-89 Schematic diagram of the OPA function
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
…… ……
Drop DMUX MUX
wavelength 5 Add wavelength
1 2 3 4
OA OA
ROADM ROADM
VA1
OPA adjustment area
Pass-through wavelength
Output power reference point 1 ……5 Power adjustment points
Input power reference point EVOA
Multi-section power adjustment by OPA

In a multi-section application, the OPA function divides the optical cross-connect path on an
NE into multiple OPA adjustment areas along the signal flow on the line. Each OPA adjustment
area starts from an output power reference point and terminates at an input power reference
point.
For example, on the optical cross-connect path as shown in Figure 4-90, the OPA function
performs power adjustment for the first section prior to the second section. If it fails to perform
power adjustment for the first section, it terminates the power adjustment and will not perform
power adjustment for the second section.
Figure 4-90 Multi-section power adjustment by OPA

OPA adjustment
area
OPA adjustment
area
OTU OA ROADM ROADM OA
Section 2
Section 1
Output power Input power
reference point reference point

Typical Application Scenarios
Table 4-18 Typical application scenarios of OPA
Add Direction Drop Direction Pass-through Direction
l OTU>M40V/ l OA>D40V>OTU l OA>RDU9>WSM9>OA

MR8V>OA l OA>WSD9>D40/ l OA>WSD9>RMU9>OA
l OTU>M40/ MRx>OTU l OA>WSD9>WSM9>OA
MRx>WSM9>OA l OA>WSMD9/WSMD4/ l OA>WSMD9/WSMD4/
l OTU>RMU9>OA WSMD2>D40/ WSMD2>WSMD9/
l OTU>M40V>RMU9>O MRx>OTU WSMD4/WSMD2>OA
A
l ROAM>OA
l OTU>VAx>OA
l OTU>M40/
MRx>WSMD9/
WSMD4/WSMD2>OA
4.13 Synchronization
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports IEEE 1588v2, Sync-E, 2 MHz, and 2 Mbit clocks. When
deployed with MSTP or PTN products, the OptiX OSN 8800 can provide an end-to-end clock
transport solution.
When the OptiX OSN 8800 uses IEEE 1588v2 to implement phase synchronization, it supports
the following NE clock types: OC, TC, BC, TC+BC, and TC+OC.
NOTE
When the ST2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack, the board cannot process
IEEE 1588v2 clock signals and physical clock, but the board can transparently transmit IEEE 1588v2 clock
signals and physical clock.
4.13.1 Requirements on Clock Synchronization

This section describes a service network's requirements on frequency and phase synchronization.
An OTN network does not require clock synchronization. However, a service access network,
especially a radio access network (RAN), requires clock synchronization. Therefore, an OTN
network that must connect to service access networks must meet the clock transport requirements
of the service access networks.
Clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks
Table 4-19 lists mobile communication network requirements on clock synchronization for each
wireless access mode.

Table 4-19 Clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks
Wireless Access Precision of Precision of Phase Recommended

Mode Frequency Synchronization Synchronization
Synchronization Mode
GSM 0.05 ppm Phase Physical clock

synchronization is
not required.
WCDMA 0.05 ppm Phase Physical clock

synchronization is
not required.
TD-SCDMA 0.05 ppm ±1.5us IEEE 1588v2
CDMA2000 0.05 ppm ±3us IEEE 1588v2
WiMax FDD 0.05 ppm Phase Physical clock

synchronization is
not required.
WiMax TDD 0.011ppm/3.5G, 7 ±1us IEEE 1588v2

carrier wave
LTE FDD 0.05 ppm Phase Physical clock

synchronization is
not required.
LTE TDD 0.05 ppm ±1.5us IEEE 1588v2
Phase synchronization requirements of common systems
In addition to communication networks, billing and network management systems also require
phase synchronization. Table 4-20 lists the requirements of some common systems on phase
synchronization.
Table 4-20 Phase synchronization requirements of common systems
System Phase Synchronization Recommended

Precision Synchronization Mode
Billing system 500 ms IEEE 1588v2
Communication network 500 ms IEEE 1588v2

management system
Signaling system No. 7 1 ms IEEE 1588v2
Positioning system 1 us (equivalent to a IEEE 1588v2

positioning precision of 300
m)

4.13.2 Frequency Synchronization Typical Application

This section describes the implementation methods and the typical applications of frequency
synchronization.
Typical Application of Frequency Synchronization

Physical clock synchronization is used as an example to describe two application scenarios
corresponding to the two methods of obtaining frequency sources from a BITS. Figure 4-91
shows the application where frequency sources are obtained from clock signals carried over GE
services, and Figure 4-92 shows the application where frequency sources are obtained from 2M
external clocks.
Application 1: Clock transmission based on physical clocks carried over GE services
As shown in Figure 4-91, the other device (such as the OptiX PTN device) obtains clock signals
from the BITS device and transmits the clock signals to the connected OptiX OSN 8800 on the
OTN network. On the other side of the OTN network, another OptiX OSN 8800 transmits the
clock signals to the two other devices (such as OptiX PTN devices or OptiX OSN 1800) over
GE services. After receiving the clock signals, the two other devices (such as OptiX PTN devices
or OptiX OSN 1800) transmit them to the Node Bs. For details about the configurations, see
Example Description.
Figure 4-91 Clock transmission based on physical clocks carried over GE services (using ESC
channels over the OTN network)
Frequency Transport Network Base Stations
GE East West
Slave
BITS
H West A
East GE
GE F
Master
B OTN Network D
BITS
E West G
East C
West East
Optical Cables
Sites Direction Board
Cables
East 12-52ND2-1
Physical synchronization route A,B,C,D
West 12-52ND2-2
Physical synchronization protection route
BITS OptiX OTN product series Other devices Node B
Application 2: Clock transmission based on physical clocks from 2M external clocks
As shown in Figure 4-92, on one side of the OTN network, two OptiX OSN 8800 obtain 2M
clock signals from the master and slave BITS devices and transmit them to other OptiX OSN
8800 on the network. On the other side of the network, after processing the clock signals by

using the OSC boards, the egress OptiX OSN 8800 transmits them to the connected other devices
(such as OptiX PTN devices or OptiX OSN 1800). Then, the other devices (such as OptiX PTN
devices or OptiX OSN 1800) transmit the clock signals to the Node Bs. For details about the
configurations, see Example Description.
Figure 4-92 Clock transmission based on physical clocks from 2M external clocks (using OSC
channels over the OTN network)
Frequency Transport Network Base Stations
2M Clock East West

Slave
BITS
A
West 2M
2M Clock East
OTN E
Master
B Network D
BITS
F
East West
C 2M
West East
Optical Cables
Cables
East 1-11ST2-1
A,B,C,D
Physical synchronization route West 1-11ST2-2
BITS OptiX OTN product series Other devices Node B
4.13.3 Phase Synchronization Typical Application

This section describes the implementation methods and the typical applications of phase
synchronization.
Typical Application of Phase Synchronization

Figure 4-93 shows an example in which frequency and phase signals are transmitted over GE
services and phase synchronization is implemented using the first method (IEEE 1588v2-
compliant frequency synchronization and phase synchronization).
Application 1: Time transmission based on IEEE 1588v2-compliant frequency

synchronization and phase synchronization
As shown in Figure 4-93, the other device (such as the OptiX PTN device) obtains frequency
and phase signals from the BITS device and transmits the frequency and phase signals to the
connected OptiX OSN 8800 on the OTN network. On the other side of the OTN network, another
OptiX OSN 8800 transmits the frequency and phase signals to the two other devices (such as
OptiX PTN devices or OptiX OSN 1800) over GE services. After receiving the frequency and
phase signals, the two other devices (such as OptiX PTN devices or OptiX OSN 1800) send the
frequency and phase signals to the Node Bs over GE services. For details about the
configurations, see Example Description.

Figure 4-93 IEEE 1588v2-compliant time transmission over GE services (using OSC channels
over the OTN network)
Frequency/Phase Sources Transport Network Base Stations
GE East West
Slave
BITS
West
A GE
East
GE
Master E
BITS B OTN Network D
F
East
C West GE
Optical Cables West East
Cables
1588v2 frequency synchronization route
1588v2 phase synchronization route Sites Direction Board
1588v2 frequency synchronization protection route East 1-11ST2-1
1588v2 phase synchronization protection route A,B,C,D
West 1-11ST2-2
OptiX OTN
BITS Other devices Node B
product series
Figure 4-94 shows an example in which frequency and phase signals are received using 2M
external clocks and 1PPS+TOD and phase synchronization is implemented using the second
method (IEEE 1588v2-compliant frequency synchronization + IEEE 1588v2-compliant phase
synchronization).
Application 2: Time transmission based on physical clock frequency synchronization and

IEEE 1588v2-compliant phase synchronization
As shown in Figure 4-94, on one side of the OTN network two OptiX OSN 8800 obtain 2M
clock signals and 1PPS+TOD time signals from the master and slave BITS devices and send the
frequency and phase signals to other OptiX OSN 8800 on the network. On the other side of the
OTN network, after processing the frequency and phase signals using the ESC boards, the egress
OptiX OSN 8800 sends the frequency and phase signals to the connected other devices (such as
OptiX PTN devices or OptiX OSN 1800). Then, the other devices (such as OptiX PTN devices
or OptiX OSN 1800) send the frequency and phase signals to the Node Bs through their 2M
external ports and external time ports (1PPS+TOD ports). For details about the configurations,
see Example Description.

Figure 4-94 Physical clock frequency synchronization + IEEE 1588v2-compliant phase

synchronization (using ESC channels over the OTN network)
Frequency/Phase Sources Transport Network Base Stations

2M/1PPS
East West
+TOD
Slave
BITS
West GE
A East E
E
Master
B OTN Network D
BITS
2M/1PPS F
+TOD East GE
C West
West East
Optical Cables
Cables
Physical synchronization route
1588v2 phase synchronization protection route
East 12-52ND2-1
1588v2 frequency synchronization protection route A,B,C,D
West 12-52ND2-2
OptiX OTN
BITS Other devices Node B
product series

Product Description 5 Hardware Architecture
5 Hardware Architecture
About This Chapter
5.1 Cabinet
In typical configuration, the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 are installed
in N63B cabinet. The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 is installed in N66B cabinet.
5.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack

There are two types of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks: enhanced and general. Enhanced and
general subracks are the same in appearance except for the bandwidth of the backplane and
electrical cross-connect capacities.

5.5 OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack

The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack can be installed in an N63B, N66B, or 19-inch
cabinet. The subrack has 16 service slots and its rated current is 60 A.
5.6 Power Supply
5.7 Frames
5.8 Board
5.9 Optical Attenuator

Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical
attenuators (VOAs).
5.10 Pluggable Optical Modules
5.11 Housekeeping Alarm Interfaces

OptiX OSN 8800 provides alarm input and output interfaces. The alarm input interfaces are
designed for remotely monitoring alarms of external systems, such as an environmental

monitoring system. The alarm output interfaces are designed to output alarms to a centralized
management system for management.

5.1 Cabinet
In typical configuration, the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 are installed
in N63B cabinet. The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 is installed in N66B cabinet.
The OptiX OSN 8800 has subracks as the basic working units and has independent power supply.
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32/OptiX OSN 8800 T16 can be installed in N63B cabinet,
or N66B cabinet. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 can be installed in N66B cabinet.
5.1.1 Cabinet Introduction

Huawei provides two types of ETS 300-119-compliant cabinets: N66B and N63B.
Parameter N66B (ETSI 600 mm Cabinet) N63B (ETSI 300 mm Cabinet)
Appearance
Height
extension
frame
(optional)a
Doors/ Front and rear doors: They can be Front door: The door can be
Panels disassembled. A key is provided for disassembled. A key is provided for
unlocking each of the doors. unlocking the door.
Side panels: They are secured with Rear and side panels: They are
screws and can be disassembled. secured with screws. Only the side
panels can be disassembled.
Door keys The door keys for all N66B cabinets and N63B cabinets are the same.
Dimensions l Not equipped with a height l Not equipped with a height

(H x W x D) extension frame: 2200 mm (86.6 extension frame: 2200 mm (86.6
in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) x 600 mm in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) x 300 mm
Height
(23.6 in.) (11.8 in.)

De
pth dth l Equipped with a height extension l Equipped with a height extension
Wi
frame: 2600 mm (102.4 in.) x 600 frame: 2600 mm (102.4 in.) x 600
mm (23.6 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) mm (23.6 in.) x 300 mm (11.8 in.)

Parameter N66B (ETSI 600 mm Cabinet) N63B (ETSI 300 mm Cabinet)
Weight l Not equipped with a height l Not equipped with a height

extension frame: 120 kg (264.6 extension frame: 60 kg (132.3 lb.)
lb.) l Equipped with a height extension
l Equipped with a height extension frame: 66 kg (145.5 lb.)
frame: 130 kg (286.6 lb.)
Standard -48 V DC or -60 V DC

working
voltage
Working -48 V DC power source: -40 V to -57.6 V

voltage -60 V DC power source: -48 V to -72 V
range
a: A 400 mm height extension frame can be placed at the top of the cabinet, which increases
the height of the cabinet to 2600 mm.
5.1.2 Cabinet Installation Mode

The ETSI 300 mm cabinet supports three installation modes: back-to-back installation, face-to-
face installation, and side-by-side installation. They can be located on cement floors or anti-
static floors. There are two ways of cabling for the cabinets: upward cabling and downward
cabling.
The ETSI 600 mm cabinet supports two installation modes: face-to-face installation, and side-
by-side installation. They can be located on cement floors or anti-static floors. There are two
ways of cabling for the cabinets: upward cabling and downward cabling.

In this document, "OptiX OSN 8800 T64" refers to both enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and
general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks unless otherwise specified.
5.2.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Each subrack has independent
power supply.
Figure 5-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.

Figure 5-1 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
1. Board area 2. Fiber cabling area 3. Fan tray assembly

4. Air filter 5. Fiber spool 6. Mounting ear

NOTE
Both the front and rear sides of a subrack have mounting ears and fiber spools. Install mounting ears and fiber
spools on the rear side of a subrack only after the subrack has been installed into a cabinet. The figure illustrates
only the front side.
A subrack identified by "Enhanced" is an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, and the one that is not
identified by "Enhanced" is a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack. These two types of subracks are displayed
as OSN8800 T64 Enhanced and OSN8800 T64 Standard respectively on the U2000.
l Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 93 slots are available.
l Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed
to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack.
l Fan tray assembly: Four fan tray assemblies are available for this subrack. Each fan tray
assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack.
The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and
related information.
l Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning.
l Fiber spool: Rotable fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in
the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack.
l Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.
5.2.2 Slot Description

The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack provide 93 slots.
Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack are shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

Front Back
IU91 IU93
A A A A
U U SCC STG U U SCC STG
EF
PIU PIU EFI2 X X IU PIU PIU PIU PIU STI X X ATE PIU PIU
I1
IU69 IU70 IU71 IU IU IU74 IU75 IU 77 IU78 IU79 IU80 IU81 IU82 IU IU IU85 IU86 IU87 IU88 IU89
72 73 76 83 84
Cross-connect board
Cross-connect board
Cross-connect board
Cross-connect board
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
IU IU IU IU
9 10 43 44
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
IU90 IU92
Paired slots
For one-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 and IU2, slots IU3 and IU4, and so on.
For two-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU2 and slots IU3 to IU4, slots IU5 to IU6 and slots IU7 to IU8, and so on.
For four-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU4 and slots IU5 to IU8, slots IU11 to IU14 and slots IU15 to IU18, and so on.

l : houses service boards and supports service cross-connections.

l Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the
buses on the backplanes.
l In a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, IU73 and IU84 are reserved for future use, and
IU72 and IU83 are used to house AUX boards. In an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack, IU72 and IU83 are used to house the active AUX boards, and IU73 and IU84 are
used to house the standby AUX boards.
NOTE
Only the TN52AUX board supports 1+1 backup.
l IU77 is reserved for future use.
l IU9 and IU43 are reserved for the cross-connect board.
– Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK2UXCT or TNK4XCT.
– General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK4XCT or TNK2XCT.
l IU10 and IU44 are reserved for the cross-connect board.
– Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK2USXH, TNK4SXH or TNK4SXM.
– General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK4SXH, TNK2SXH, TNK4SXM or
TNK2SXM.
l The following table provides the slots for housing active and standby boards of the subrack.
Board Slots for Active and Standby Boards
PIU l General OptiX 8800 T64: IU69 & IU78, IU70 & IU79, IU80 &
IU88, and IU81 & IU89
l Enhanced OptiX 8800 T64: IU69 & IU89, IU70 & IU88, IU78
& IU81, and IU79 & IU80
SCC IU74 & IU85
STG IU75 & IU86
SXM/SXH/ IU10 & IU44

USXH
XCT/UXCT IU9 & IU43
TN52AUX Enhanced OptiX 8800 T64: IU72 & IU73, IU83 & IU84
5.2.3 Management Interfaces

The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack provides various communication and maintenance interfaces
for the management and maintenance purposes, as shown in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1 Management interfaces
Boar Front Panel Interface Specification

d
Name Conne Pino Description
ctor ut
Type
TN5 EFI2 NM_E RJ45 Tabl NM_ETH1: l Dimensions

1EFI TH1/ e 5-2 l Connects the network of front panel
2 ETH1/ Tabl interface on the (H x W x D):
LAMP1
ETH1
ETH2/ e 5-3 equipment through a 80 mm (3.1

ETH3: network cable to that on in.) x 50.8 mm
LAMP2
ETH2
networ an NM server so that the (2.0 in.) x 220

k NM can manage the mm (8.7 in.)
NM_ETH1
ETH3
manag equipment. l Weight: 0.3

ement kg (0.66 lb.)
interfac l Connects the NM_ETH1/
es NM_ETH2 network l Power
interface on one NE consumption:
through a network cable Typical
to that on another NE to power
achieve communication consumption
between NEs. (W): 13 W
ETH1-ETH3: Maximum
l Connects a network cable power
from the ETH1/ETH2/ consumption
ETH3 interface on one (W)b: 15 W
subrack to corresponding
interfaces on the other
subracks to achieve the
communication between
the master subrack and
slave subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack
protection is configured,
the ETH3 interface cannot
be used for the
the master and slave
subracks.
l Connects a network cable
to a CRPC or ROP board
to achieve
communication with the
CRPC or ROP board.


d
ctor ut
Type
LAMP RJ45 Tabl Outputs single-subrack or

1- e 5-5 multi-subrack alarms to the
LAMP cabinet indicator interface to
2: light the corresponding alarm
subrac indicators on the cabinet.
k alarm NOTICE
output/ The LAMP interfaces on the
cascadi EFI board provide 5 V power, it
ng is only used for the indicators on
a cabinet. It cannot connect to
interfac
an RJ45 cable intended for the
es NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or
CLK interface; otherwise, the
EFI board, the connected test
instrument, or the equipment
will be damaged.
For information about the
interface cables, see Cabinet
Alarm Indicator Cable.
TN5 EFI1 NM_E RJ45 Tabl NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 l Dimensions

1EFI TH2: e 5-2 have the same function. of front panel
1a networ (H x W x D):
NM_ETH2
k 80 mm (3.1
manag in.) x 25.4
ement (1.0 in.) x 220
SERIAL
interfac mm (8.7 in.)

e l Weight: 0.2
kg (0.44 lb.)
SERIA DB9 Tabl The serial interface provides
L: e 5-4 functions of serial NM and l Power
manag supports X.25 protocol. consumption:
ement Typical
serial power
interfac consumption
e (W): 5 W
Maximum
power
consumption
(W)b: 7 W


d
ctor ut
Type
TN5 ATE ALMO RJ45 Tabl l Alarm outputs are sent to l Dimensions
1AT 1- e 5-6 the DC power distribution of front panel
E ALMO Tabl cabinet through the output (H x W x D):
ALMI2
ALMI1
4: e 5-7 interface and the 80 mm (3.1

housek cascading interface. You in.) x 50.8 mm
ALMO1
ALMO3
eeping can configure it to be the (2.0 in.) x 220

alarm other outputs to mm (8.7 in.)
ALMO4
ALMO2
output implement integrated l Weight: 0.2

interfac display of alarms. The kg (0.44 lb.)
es alarm outputs are
controlled by the internal l Power
relay contact. When the consumption:
relay contact is closed, the Typical
resistance of each ALMO power
interface is less than 1 consumption
ohm. When the relay (W): 0.3 W
contact is open, the Maximum
resistance of each ALMO power
interface is an infinite consumption
number. (W)b: 0.3 W
l The ALMO1 and
ALMO2 interfaces have
the same pin usage and are
a pair of housekeeping
alarm output/cascading
interfaces. Similarly, the
ALMO3 and ALMO4
interfaces also have the
same pin usage and are
another pair of
housekeeping output/
cascading interfaces. For
example, when ALMO1
and ALMO3 are used to
output housekeeping
alarm signals, ALMO2
and ALMO4 can be
cascaded to ALMO2 and
ALM04 on another
subrack.
l The OptiX OSN 8800
provides for eight alarm
outputs. By default, the
first three alarm outputs


d
ctor ut
Type
are defined as critical

alarm, major alarm, and
minor alarm. The other
five are reserved. Alarm
outputs can be cascaded.
interface cables, see Alarm
Output Interface Cable.
ALMI1 RJ45 Tabl The OptiX OSN 8800

- e 5-8 provides for eight
ALMI2 Tabl housekeeping alarm inputs.
: e 5-9 The user can manually
housek configure the severity of the
eeping eight alarms for remote
alarm monitoring of external device
input alarms.
interfac For information about the
es interface cables, see Alarm
Input Interface Cable.
TN5 STI CLK1- RJ45 Tabl CLK1/CLK2 interface can l Dimensions

2STI CLK2: e input or output clock signals. of front panel
clock 5-10 CLK1/CLK2 interface is (H x W x D):
CLK2
CLK1
signal bidirectional. That is, they 80 mm (3.1

input input and output signals at the in.) x 50.8 mm
TOD2
TOD1
and same time. (2.0 in.) x 220

output TOD1/TOD2 interface can mm (8.7 in.)
interfac input or output time signals. l Weight: 0.3
es At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 kg (0.66 lb.)
interface can either input or l Power
TOD1- RJ45 Tabl
output time signals. consumption:
TOD2: e
time 5-10 For information about the Typical
signal interface cables, see Clock/ power
input Time Cable. consumption
and (W): 1.5 W
output Maximum
interfac power
e consumption
(W)b: 1.5 W


d
ctor ut
Type
TNL STI CLK1- RJ45 Tabl The two interfaces have the l Dimensions
1STI CLK2: e same functions as the CLK1 of front panel
clock 5-10 and CLK2 interfaces on the (H x W x D):
CLK2
CLK1
signal TN52STI board. 80 mm (3.1

input in.) x 50.8 mm
TOD2
TOD1
and (2.0 in.) x 220

output mm (8.7 in.)
PHONE
F1
interfac l Weight: 0.4

es kg (0.88 lb.)
TOD1- RJ45 Tabl The two interfaces have the l Power
TOD2: e same functions as the TOD1 consumption:
time 5-10 and TOD2 interfaces on the Typical
signal TN52STI board. power
input consumption
and (W): 3 W
output Maximum
interfac power
e consumption
(W)b: 3 W
Phone: RJ11 Tabl -
orderw e
ire 5-12
phone
interfac
e
F1 RJ45 Tabl -
interfac e
e 5-13
a: Two DIP switches are present on the TN51EFI1 board for setting the subrack ID. For details, see DIP Switches
on the TN51EFI1 Board.
b: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the
highest ambient temperature.
DIP Switches on the TN51EFI1 Board

The EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface.
The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can
be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-
ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these
ID values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5-
ID1, by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates

the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 5-3 shows the position of
the DIP switches on the EFI1 board.
l The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the
CPLD.
l When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
l As shown in Figure 5-3, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in
decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Figure 5-3 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board
NM_ETH2
CPLD (ID5) ON (ID1) ON

(ID6) ON (ID2) ON
SERIAL (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON
SW1 SW2
NOTE
Ensure that the ID6 to ID8 switches are turned on as shown in Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-4 Mapping between DIP switch binary values and subrack IDs
Subrack
ID:1-15
Subrack Subrack Subrack
SW1 SW2 ID SW1 SW2 ID SW1 SW2 ID
ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON
ON
(ID2)
(ID3) 1
ON (ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3) 2 ON (ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3) 3
ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON(ID5) ON (ID1)

ON (ID6) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2)
ON (ID7) ON (ID3) 4
ON
ON
(ID6)
(ID7) ON (ID3) 5 ON (ID6)
ON (ID7) ON (ID3) 6

ON (ID7) ON (ID3) 7 ON (ID7) ON (ID3) 8 ON (ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON
ON
(ID2)
(ID3) 9
ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) (ID4)
ON (ID8) ON

ON (ID7) ON (ID3) 10 ON (ID7) ON (ID3) 11 ON (ID7) ON (ID3) 12

ON (ID7) ON (ID3) 13 ON (ID7) ON (ID3) 14 ON (ID7) ON (ID3) 15

Subrack
ID:16-31
Subrack Subrack
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ID ID
ON (ID5)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3)
16 ON(ID5)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3) 17
ON (ID5)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3) 18
ON (ID5)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3)
19 ON(ID5)
ON(ID6)
ON(ID7)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3) 20
ON(ID5)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3) 21
ON (ID7)
ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4)
ON(ID5)
ON(ID6)
ON(ID7)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3)
22 ON(ID5)
ON(ID6)
ON(ID7)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3) 23
ON (ID5)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3) 24
ON(ID8) ON (ID4) ON(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4)
ON (ID5)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2) 25 ON(ID5)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
26
ON (ID5)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
27
ON (ID5)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3)
28 ON(ID5)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3) 29
ON(ID5)
ON(ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3) 30
"EE" indicates that the subrack ID is

ON (ID5)
ON (ID6)
ON (ID7)
ON (ID1)
ON (ID2)
ON (ID3) 31 incorrect or the subrack ID fails to be Err
ON (ID8) ON (ID4)
obtained. or
Pin Assignment
Figure 5-5 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Figure 5-6 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9

Table 5-2 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 NM_ETNTXP NM communications,
transmits the data positive
2 NM_ETNTXN NM communications,
transmits the data negative
3 NM_ETNRXP NM communications,
receives the data positive
4 NC Not connected.
5 NC Not connected.
6 NM_ETNRXN NM communications,
receives the data negative
7 NC Not connected.
8 NC Not connected.
Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 ETH_TXP Transmits the data positive

for inter-subrack ordinary
communications
2 ETH_TXN Transmits the data negative

communications
3 ETH_RXP Receives the data positive for

inter-subrack ordinary
communications
4 ETH_CRIT_TXP Transmits the data positive

for inter-subrack emergent
communications
5 ETH_CRIT_TXN Transmits the data negative

communications
6 ETH_RXN Receives the data negative

communications

Pin Signal Function
7 ETH_CRIT_RXP Receives the data positive for

inter-subrack emergent
communications
8 ETH_CRIT_RXN Receives the data negative

communications
Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface
Pin Signal Function
1 N.C Not defined
2 RXD Receive end of data
3 TXD Transmit end of data
4 DTR Data terminal equipment

ready
5 GND Ground
6 - Reserved
7 - Reserved
8 GND GND
9 N.C Not defined
Table 5-5 Pin assignment of the LAMP1/LAMP2 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 CRIT_ALMP Critical alarm signal positive
2 CRIT_ALMN Critical alarm signal negative
3 MAJ_ALMP Major alarm signal positive
4 RUNP Power indicating signal

positive
5 RUNN Power indicating signal

negative
6 MAJ_ALMN Major alarm signal positive
7 MIN_ALMP Minor alarm signal positive

Pin Signal Function
8 MIN_ALMN Minor alarm signal negative
Table 5-6 Pin assignment of the ALMO1/ALMO2 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the critical alarm

signal positive
2 CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the critical alarm

signal negative
3 MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the major alarm

signal positive
4 MIN_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the minor alarm

signal positive
5 MIN_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the minor alarm

signal negative
6 MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the major alarm

signal negative
7 ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P Alarm signal output 1

positive
8 ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N Alarm signal output 1

negative
Pin Signal Function

positive

negative

positive

positive

negative

Pin Signal Function

negative

positive

negative
Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 SWITCHI_IN1 Alarm input 1
2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI2
Pin Signal Function
2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 RJ0_E1_RX_N 2MHz/2Mbit input negative
2 RJ0_E1_RX_P 2MHz/2Mbit input positive
3 NC Not connected
4 RJ0_E1_TX_N 2MHz/2Mbit output negative
5 RJ0_E1_TX_P 2MHz/2Mbit output positive
6 NC Not connected
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 GND Ground
2 GND Ground
3 DCLS_IN0_N 1PPS negative
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 DCLS_IN0_P 1PPS positive
7 DCLS_OUT0_N TOD negative
8 DCLS_OUT0_P TOD positive
Table 5-12 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface
Pin Signal Function
1 NC Not connected
2 NC Not connected
3 NC Not connected
4 RING Signal 1
5 TIP Signal 2
6 NC Not connected

Pin Signal Function
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
Table 5-13 Pin assignment of the F1 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 TX_P Transmitting (+)
2 TX_N Transmitting (-)
3 RX_P Receiving (+)
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 RX_N Receiving (-)
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
5.2.4 Cross-Connect Capacities

The cross-connect capacity of a slot in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack vary according to the
type of cross-connect board installed in the slot.
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks can cross-connect ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3,
ODU4, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12 granularities at the same time. Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-
IU42, and IU45-IU68 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in Table 5-14.
Table 5-14 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
Subrack Cross- Maximum Cross-Connect Maximum Cross-Connect

Type Connect Capacity of Each Slota Capacity of Subrack
Board
ODUkb VC-4 VC-3/ ODUkb VC-4 VC-3/
VC-12e VC-12
Enhance USXH N/A 20 Gbit/ N/A N/A 1.28 Tbit/ N/A

d s s
Enhance USXH 100 20 Gbit/ N/A 6.4 Tbit/s 1.28 Tbit/ N/A
d +UXCTc Gbit/s s s
Enhance SXH N/A 20 Gbit/ N/A N/A 1.28 Tbit/ N/A

d s s

Subrack Cross- Maximum Cross-Connect Maximum Cross-Connect

Type Connect Capacity of Each Slota Capacity of Subrack
Board
ODUkb VC-4 VC-3/ ODUkb VC-4 VC-3/
VC-12e VC-12
Enhance SXM N/A 20 Gbit/ 20 Gbit/ N/A 1.28 Tbit/ 80 Gbit/s

d s s s
Enhance SXH 40 Gbit/ 20 Gbit/ N/A 2.56 Tbit/ 1.28 Tbit/ N/A
d +XCTc s s s s
Enhance SXM 40 Gbit/ 20 Gbit/ 20 Gbit/ 2.56 Tbit/ 1.28 Tbit/ 80 Gbit/s
d +XCTc s s s s s
General SXH N/A 20 Gbit/ N/A N/A 1.28 Tbit/ N/A

s s
General SXM N/A 20 Gbit/ 20 Gbit/ N/A 1.28 Tbit/ 80 Gbit/s

s s s
General SXH 40 Gbit/ 20 Gbit/ N/A 2.56 Tbit/ 1.28 Tbit/ N/A
+XCTd s s s s
General SXM 40 Gbit/ 20 Gbit/ 20 Gbit/ 2.56 Tbit/ 1.28 Tbit/ 80 Gbit/s
+XCTd s s s s s
a: In OptiX OSN 8800 T64 enhanced subrack, the maximum OTN service cross-connect
capacity of a single slot can be smoothly increased from 40 Gbit/s to 100 Gbit/s by replacing
the cross-connect board.
b: k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex. Only the USXH+UXCT supports ODU4 granularities.
c: Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks must be configured with both the USXH and
UXCT boards, the SXH and XCT boards or the SXM and XCT boards to cross-connect ODUk
granularities.
d: General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks must be configured with both the SXH and XCT
boards or the SXM and XCT boards to cross-connect ODUk granularities.
e: All service slots share a bandwidth of 80 Gbit/s.
Two functional versions are available for SXH, SXM, and XCT boards: TNK2 and TNK4.
The boards can be used in OptiX OSN 8800 T64 enhanced subrack only when they are of the
TNK4 version.
5.2.5 Fan and Heat Baffle

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has four fan tray assemblies, each of which includes three
independent fans. In each subrack, the lower fan tray assembly has an air filter, but the upper
fan tray assembly does not. The user can withdraw, clean, and replace each air filter.
Version Description
Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN51.

Functions and Features

Table 5-15 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly.
Table 5-15 Functions
Function Description
Basic function Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that
the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature
range.
Commissioning control l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed

regulation, depending on the subrack temperature.
l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan
speed.
Section-dependent heat Each subrack is divided into six sections to provide efficient heat
dissipation dissipation. The fan speed in each section is independently
regulated.
Hot swapping Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly.
Alarming Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information.
Status checking Checks and reports on the fan status.
Working Principle
A fan tray assembly inside a subrack ventilates the subrack to ensure that the subrack works
effectively at an appropriate temperature. The fan tray assembly is located in the lower portion
of a subrack. It draws in air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other
boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air
duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 5-7 shows how ventilation is
performed in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
Figure 5-7 shows how ventilation is performed in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

Figure 5-7 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Side view
Front Back
Air outlet Air outlet
Fan Fan
Fan Fan
Air inlet Air filter Air filter Air inlet
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 5-16. The section-
dependent speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. The Auto Speed Mode
is recommended.

Table 5-16 FAN speed mode
FAN Speed Description

Mode
Auto Speed Mode Fan speed in each section is regulated automatically according to the
temperature of the boards in the section that the fans are targeted for.
l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed.
l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed.
l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their
rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving.
Fan speed in each section is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signal is abnormal.
If one of the fans in one section fails, the other fans in this section run at
full speed.
When the user queries the fan speed using the NMS, the highest fan speed
among all sections is displayed. In other words, if the fans in one section
rotate at high speed, the NMS displays the fan speed as high speed in the
query result.
Adjustable Speed Six fan speeds are supported: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed,
Mode Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. In this mode,
the user manually sets the fan speed and fans in all sections run at the
same speed. The user cannot independently set the fan speed for a
specific section.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack is divided into six partitions in terms of heat dissipation.
See Figure 5-8.

Figure 5-8 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
IU91
Front
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3
IU69 IU70 IU71 IU72 IU73 IU74 IU75

IU76 IU77 IU78 IU79
IU9 IU10
IU50
FAN4 FAN5 FAN6
IU90
Partition 1 Partition 2 Partition 3

IU93
Back
FAN7 FAN8 FAN9
IU83 IU84 IU85 IU86

IU80 IU81 IU82 IU87 IU88 IU89
IU43 IU44
IU50
FAN10 FAN11 FAN12
Partition 4 Partition 5 Partition 6 IU92
NOTE
l If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can remain operational for a
short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure
long-term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner.
Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the
accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days.
l Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations:
l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.
l One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
l In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same section (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run
at the same speed.
The fan tray assembly consists of fans and fan control board. Figure 5-9 shows the functional
blocks of the fan tray assembly.

Figure 5-9 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
Speed adjusting Speed adjusting

signal signal
SCC Fan control

Status signal board Status signal
FAN
External power External power

supply 1 supply 2
l FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the
fan tray assembly.
l Fan control board:
– Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals.
– Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control board reports an alarm. In this
case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed.
– Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan
tray assembly.
– Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the
fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 5-10 shows a fan tray assembly.
Figure 5-10 Fan tray assembly
SYSTEM
1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (three in total)
NOTE
An air filter is installed on the lower fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU90,
IU91, IU92 and IU93 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly

Table 5-17 lists the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly.
NOTE
For transport equipment, the heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be considered
the same. Heat consumption is expressed in BTU/h and power consumption is expressed in W. The
conversion between the two units is as follows: 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W.
Table 5-17 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly
Item Specification
Dimensions (H x W x D) 64.0 mm (2.5 in.) x 493.7 mm (19.4 in.) x 280.5 mm (11.0 in.)
Weight 3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)
Power Consumptiona l Low Speed: 70 W

l Medium-Low Speed: 95 W
l Medium Speed: 150 W
l Medium-High Speed: 225W
l High Speed: 270W
a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured,
rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully
configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high
ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 270 W.
5.2.6 Power Consumption

This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications.
Table 5-18 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
NOTE
Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with
the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the room temperature. Maximum power consumption
indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in an environment with
extreme conditions.

Table 5-18 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Item Enhanced 8800 T64 General 8800 T64
Maximum subrack power 9600 W 6500 W

consumptiona
Typical configuration power 6000 W 3700 W

consumption (OTN)

consumption (OCS)
a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the theoretical power consumption
obtained when boards with the highest power consumption are installed in every slot on the
subrack.
NOTE
The NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value specified on the U2000 must match the actual power
distribution capability.
Table 5-19 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX
OSN 8800 T64.
Table 5-19 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Unit Name Typical Power Maximum Remarks

Consumption Power
(W)a Consumption
(W)a
OTU subrack 1804.6 2827.9 32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x

1 AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
and 4 x fan tray assembly
OTU subrack 1119.98 2011.14 4 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU,

2 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x
ATE, 4 x fan tray assembly
OTU 2172.7 2822.9 2 x XCT, 2 x SXH, 8 x NS3, 2 x SCC,

electrical 2 x STG, 8 x PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA,
cross- 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x
connect ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly
subrack 1
(general
subrack)


Consumption Power
(W)a Consumption
(W)a
OTU 1839.1 2776.7 2 x XCT, 2 x SXM, 20 x NQ2, 1 x

electrical SCC, 8 x PIU, 5 x TOA, 5 x TQX, 2
cross- x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
connect and 4 x fan tray assembly
subrack 2
(general
subrack)
OTU 5384.9 6754.8 2 x UXCT, 2 x USXH, 16 x NS4

electrical (SDFEC2), 8 x TSC, 4 x TTX, 5 x
cross- TOX, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1
connect x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, 4 x fan
subrack tray assembly
(enhanced
subrack)
OTM 963.78 1860.3 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x

subrack 1 OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 1 x SC2,
8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2,
1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly
OTM 1168.98 2077.14 1 x M40V, 1 x D40+1 x OAU1+1 x

subrack 2 OBU1, 4 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC,
1 x ATE, 4 x fan tray assembly
OCS subrack 1748 2636 2 x SXM, 20 x SLD64, 8 x SLO16, 4

(general x SLQ16, 4 x SLH41, 4 x EGSH, 2 x
subrack) STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x
AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
OCS subrack 2135 3076 2 x USXH, 20 x SLD64, 8 x SLO16,

(enhanced 4 x SLQ16, 4 x SLH41, 4 x EGSH, 2
subrack) x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2
x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and
cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module. The maximum power
consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest
ambient temperature.
5.2.7 Mechanical Specifications

Table 5-20 lists the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Table 5-20 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Item Specification
Dimensions 498 mm (W) × 580 mm (D) × 900 mm (H)

(19.6 in. (W) × 22.8 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H))
Weight (empty subracka) 65 kg (143 lb.)
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly
or air filter is installed.

In this document, "OptiX OSN 8800 T32" refers to both enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and
general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks unless otherwise specified.
5.3.1 Structure
power supply.
Figure 5-11 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.

Figure 5-11 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack
OSN 8800 T32
or
OSN 8800 T32
5
1

NOTE
A subrack identified by "Enhanced" is an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, and the one that is not
identified by "Enhanced" is an general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. These two types of subracks are displayed
as OSN8800 T32 Enhanced and OSN8800 T32 Standard

l Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that
indicate subrack status.


IU51
AUX STG AUX STG

EFI2 EFI1 PIU PIU PIU PIU STI ATE
IU37 IU38 IU39 IU40 IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44 IU45 IU46 IU47 IU48
SCC
Cross-connect board
Cross-connect board
IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU27 IU28 IU29 IU30 IU31 IU32 IU33 IU34 IU35 IU36
SCC or service board
IU9 IU10
IU50
Paired slots
For one-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 and IU2, slots IU3 and
IU4, and so on.
For two-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU2 and slots IU3 to
IU4, slots IU5 to IU6 and slots IU7 to IU8, and so on.
For four-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU4 and slots IU5 to

l Slot IU43 in a general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is reserved for future use. Slot IU41 and slot
IU43 in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack are used to house the active and standby
AUX boards, respectively.
NOTE
Only the TN52AUX board supports 1+1 backup.

l IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the cross-connect board: UXCH, UXCM, XCH or XCM
PIU IU39 & IU45 and IU40 & IU46
SCC IU28 & IU11
STG IU42 & IU44
XCH/XCM/ IU9 & IU10

UXCH/UXCM
TN52AUX Enhanced OptiX 8800 T32: IU41 & IU43
The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 has the same management interfaces as the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
For details of these interfaces, see OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Management Interfaces.

The cross-connect capacity of a slot in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack vary the type of cross-
connect board installed in the slot.
ODU4, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, VC-12 granularities and packet services at the same time. Slots
IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, and IU29-IU36 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in
Table 5-21.
Subr Cros Maximum Cross-Connect Maximum Cross-Connect

ack s- Capacity of Each Slota Capacity of Subrackc
Type Con
nect ODU VC-4 VC-3/ Packe ODU VC-4 VC-3/ Packe
Boar kb VC-12 tc kb VC-12 tc
d
d
Enha UXC 100 40 N/A 50 3.2 1.28 N/A 1.6

nced H Gbit/s Gbit/s Gbit/s Tbit/s Tbit/s Tbit/s
Enha UXC 100 40 40 50 3.2 1.28 80 1.6

nced M Gbit/s Gbit/s Gbit/s Gbit/s Tbit/s Tbit/s Gbit/s Tbit/s
Enha XCH 40 40 N/A N/A 1.28 1.28 N/A N/A

nced Gbit/s Gbit/s Tbit/s Tbit/s
Enha XCM 40 40 40 N/A 1.28 1.28 80 N/A

nced Gbit/s Gbit/s Gbit/s Tbit/s Tbit/s Gbit/s

Subr Cros Maximum Cross-Connect Maximum Cross-Connect

ack s- Capacity of Each Slota Capacity of Subrackc
Type Con
nect ODU VC-4 VC-3/ Packe ODU VC-4 VC-3/ Packe
Boar kb VC-12 tc kb VC-12 tc
d
d
Gene UXC 80 40 N/A 20 2.56 1.28 N/A 640

ral H Gbit/s Gbit/s Gbit/s Tbit/s Tbit/s Gbit/s
Gene UXC 80 40 40 20 2.56 1.28 80 640

ral M Gbit/s Gbit/s Gbit/s Gbit/s Tbit/s Tbit/s Gbit/s Gbit/s
Gene XCH 40 40 N/A N/A 1.28 1.28 N/A N/A

ral Gbit/s Gbit/s Tbit/s Tbit/s
Gene XCM 40 40 40 N/A 1.28 1.28 80 N/A

ral Gbit/s Gbit/s Gbit/s Tbit/s Tbit/s Gbit/s
a: In enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the maximum OTN service cross-connect
capacity of a single slot can be smoothly increased from 40 Gbit/s to 100 Gbit/s by replacing
the cross-connect board. In general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the maximum OTN service
cross-connect capacity of a single slot can be smoothly increased from 40 Gbit/s to 80 Gbit/
s by replacing the cross-connect board.
b: k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex.
c: Theoretically, the enhanced subrack supports grooming of a maximum of 1.6 Tbit/s packet
services. In practice, however, the packet service grooming capability of the enhanced subrack
is determined by packet boards. The current version provides a packet service grooming
capability up to 640 Gbit/s.
d: All service slots share a bandwidth of 80 Gbit/s.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack has two fan tray assemblies, each of which includes three
independent fans. In each subrack, the lower fan tray assembly has an air filter, but the upper
fan tray assembly does not have an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.
Version Description


Table 5-22 Functions of a fan tray assembly
range.

speed.
Partitioned heat Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide
dissipation efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is
independently regulated.
Working Principle
A fan tray assembly inside a subrack dissipates heat for the subrack to ensure that the subrack
works effectively at a specified temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part
of a subrack. It blows air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards
in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This
design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 5-13 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation
system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.

Side view
Front
Air outlet
Fan
Fan
Air inlet Air filter
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 5-23. The section-
dependent speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. The Auto Speed Mode
is recommended.


Mode
Auto Speed Mode Fan speed in each section is regulated automatically according to the
temperature of the boards in the section that the fans are targeted for.
Fan speed in each section is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signal is abnormal.
If one of the fans in one section fails, the other fans in this section run at
full speed.
When the user queries the fan speed using the NMS, the highest fan speed
among all sections is displayed. In other words, if the fans in one section
rotate at high speed, the NMS displays the fan speed as high speed in the
query result.
Adjustable Speed Six fan speeds are supported: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed,
Mode Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. In this mode,
the user manually sets the fan speed and fans in all sections run at the
same speed. The user cannot independently set the fan speed for a
specific section.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is divided into three partitions in terms of heat dissipation.
The subrack adopts two fan tray assemblies to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See
Figure 5-14.

FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 IU51
IU37 IU38 IU39 IU40 IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44 IU45 IU46 IU47 IU48
IU9 IU10
IU50
FAN4 FAN5 FAN6 IU50
Partition 1 Partition 2 Partition 3
NOTE
l If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can remain operational for a
short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure
l Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations:
l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.
l One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
l In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4)
run at the same speed.


signal signal
SCC Fan control

FAN

supply 1 supply 2
fan tray assembly.
tray assembly.
Appearance
SYSTEM
1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (three in total)
NOTE
An air filter is installed on the lower fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU50 and
IU51 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.

NOTE
Item Specification

l High Speed: 270W

NOTE
extreme conditions.


consumptiona
Recommended typical 3300 W 2000 W

configuration power
consumption (OTN)

configuration power
consumption (OCS)
subrack.
NOTE
distribution capability. On the U2000, the default power consumption threshold of the OptiX OSN 8800
T32 is 4800 W. If a 30 A power supply is used, change the NE Power Consumption Threshold (W)
value to 2400 W.
Table 5-26 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX
OSN 8800 T32.
Table 5-26 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 8800
T32

Consumption Power
(W)a Consumption
(W)a
OTU 1633.4 2254.6 32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x

subrack 1 AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
OTU 927.58 1412.54 4 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 4 x

subrack 2 PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1
x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly
OTU 1641.6 2166.5 2 x XCH, 20 x NQ2, 1 x SCC, 4 x

electrical PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1
cross- x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x
connect fan tray assembly
subrack 1
(general
subrack)


Consumption Power
(W)a Consumption
(W)a
OTU 1670.3 2182.5 2 x XCH, 8 x NS3, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU,

electrical 2 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 2 x STG, 1 x
cross- AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
subrack 2
(general
subrack)
OTU 3255.7 3981.1 2 x UXCH, 10 x NS4(SDFEC2), 2 x

electrical TSC, 8 x TTX, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1
subrack
(enhanced
subrack)
OTM 792.5 1287.1 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x

subrack 1 OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU,
1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x
ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly
OTM 976.58 1478.54 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x

subrack 2 OBU1, 4 x LSC (SDFEC2), 2 x SCC,
OLA 290.3 706 4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 1 x

subrack SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1
x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray
assembly
OADM 974 1497.2 2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 16 x LDX, 1

subrack x SC2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x
fan tray assembly
378.2 811 2 x M40V, 2 x D40, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2,

2 x RMU9, 2 x WSM9, 2 x OAU1, 2
x OBU1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
fan tray assembly
373.1 306.6 2 x M40, 2 x D40, 2 x WSMD9, 2 x

DAS1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
fan tray assembly


Consumption Power
(W)a Consumption
(W)a
OCS subrack 1282 1755 2 x XCM, 10 x SLQ64, 8 x SLO16,

(general 2 x SLH41, 2 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x
subrack) STI, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x
EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan
tray assembly
OCS subrack 1791 2321 2 x UXCM, 10 x SLQ64, 8 x SLO16,

(enhanced 2 x SLH41, 2 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x
tray assembly
Table 5-27 lists the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 equipment.
Item Specification

(19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H))
Weight (empty subracka) 35 kg (77.1 lb.)
5.4.1 Structure
power supply.

Figure 5-17 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack (subrack door excluded)
6
1
2
3
4

l Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that
indicate fan status and related information.


IU19 IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24

EFI PIU AUX AUX PIU ATE
IU IU
9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
IU25 FAN
Paired slots
For one-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 and IU2, slots IU3 and
IU4, and so on.
For two-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU2 and slots IU3 to
For four-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU4 and slots IU5 to
IU8, slots IU11 to IU14 and slots IU15 to IU18.

l IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the TN16UXCM/TN16XCH/TN16SCC or for the other
service boards.
NOTE
Slots IU9 and IU10 can be used to house service boards only when the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions
as a slave subrack.
If slots IU9 and IU10 are used to house service boards or SCC boards, install a special filler panel in each
slot first
AUX IU21 & IU22
PIU IU20 & IU23

TN16UXCM/ IU9 & IU10

TN16XCH/
TN16SCC

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack provides various communication and maintenance interfaces
for the management and maintenance purposes, as shown in Table 5-28.

Bo Front Panel Interface Specification

ard
Name Con Pinou Description
nect t
or
Typ
e
TN NM_ETH RJ4 Table NM_ETH1-NM_ETH2: l Dimensions

EFI
16E 1/ 5 5-29 l Connects the network of front
FIa NM_ETH panel (H x
LAMP1
ETH1
Table interface on the

SERIAL
2/ETH1/ 5-30 equipment through a W x D): 80

LAMP2
ETH2
ETH2/ network cable to that on mm (3.1 in.)

ETH3: x 76.2 mm
NM_ETH1
an NM server so that the

NM_ETH2
ETH3
network NM can manage the (3.0 in.) x

manageme equipment. 220 mm
nt (8.7 in.)
interfaces l Connects the
NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 l Weight: 0.5
network interface on one kg (1.1 lb.)
NE through a network l Power
cable to that on another consumptio
NE to achieve n:
communication between Typical
NEs. power
ETH1-ETH3: consumptio
n: 2 W
l Connects a network
cable from the ETH1/ Maximum
ETH2/ETH3 interface power
on one subrack to consumptio
corresponding interfaces nb: 2.5 W
on the other subracks to
achieve the
the master subrack and
slave subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack
protection is configured,
the ETH3 interface cannot
be used for the
the master and slave
subracks.
l Connects a network
cable to a CRPC or ROP
board to achieve
communication with the
CRPC or ROP board.


ard
nect t
or
Typ
e
SERIAL: DB9 Table The serial interface provides

manageme 5-31 functions of serial NM and
nt serial supports X.25 protocol.
interface
LAMP1/ RJ4 Table Outputs single-subrack or

LAMP2: 5 5-32 multi-subrack alarms to the
subrack cabinet indicator interface to
alarm light the corresponding
output/ alarm indicators on the
cascading cabinet.
interfaces NOTICE
The LAMP interfaces on the
EFI board provide 5 V power,
it is only used for the indicators
on a cabinet. It cannot connect
to an RJ45 cable intended for
the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO,
or CLK interface; otherwise,
the EFI board, the connected
test instrument, or the
equipment will be damaged.
interface cables, see Cabinet
Alarm Indicator Cable.


ard
nect t
or
Typ
e
TN ALMO1- RJ4 Table l Alarm outputs are sent to l Dimensions

16 ATE
ALMO4: 5 5-33 the DC power of front
AT housekeep Table distribution cabinet panel (H x
ALMI2
ALMI1
E ing alarm 5-34 through the output W x D): 80

CLK2
CLK1
ALMO1
ALMO3
output interface and the mm (3.1 in.)

TOD2
TOD1
interfaces cascading interface. You x 76.2 mm

ALMO4
ALMO2
can configure it to be the (3.0 in.) x

other outputs to 220 mm
implement integrated (8.7 in.)
display of alarms. The l Weight: 0.5
alarm outputs are kg (1.1 lb.)
controlled by the internal
relay contact. When the l Power
relay contact is closed, consumptio
the resistance of each n:
ALMO interface is less Typical
than 1 ohm. When the power
relay contact is open, the consumptio
resistance of each n: 0.2 W
ALMO interface is an Maximum
infinite number. power
l The ALMO1 and consumptio
ALMO2 interfaces have nb: 0.3 W
the same pin usage and
are a pair of
housekeeping alarm
output/cascading
interfaces. Similarly, the
ALMO3 and ALMO4
interfaces also have the
same pin usage and are
another pair of
housekeeping output/
cascading interfaces. For
example, when ALMO1
and ALMO3 are used to
output housekeeping
alarm signals, ALMO2
and ALMO4 can be
cascaded to ALMO2 and
ALM04 on another
subrack.


ard
nect t
or
Typ
e
l The OptiX OSN 8800

provides for eight alarm
outputs. By default, the
first three alarm outputs
are defined as critical
alarm, major alarm, and
minor alarm. The other
five are reserved. Alarm
Output Interface Cable.
ALMI1- RJ4 Table The OptiX OSN 8800

ALMI2: 5 5-35 provides for eight
housekeep Table housekeeping alarm inputs.
ing alarm 5-36 The user can manually
input configure the severity of the
interfaces eight alarms for remote
monitoring of external
device alarms.
Input Interface Cable.
CLK1- RJ4 Table CLK1/CLK2 interface can

CLK2: 5 5-37 input or output clock
clock signals. CLK1/CLK2
signal interface is bidirectional.
input and That is, they input and
output output signals at the same
interfaces time.
TOD1/TOD2 interface can
TOD1- RJ4 Table
input or output time signals.
TOD2: 5 5-38
At any time, a TOD1/TOD2
time signal
interface can either input or
input and
output time signals.
output
interface For information about the
interface cables, see Clock/
Time Cable.


ard
nect t
or
Typ
e
a: Two DIP switches are present on the TN16EFI board for setting the subrack ID. For details, see DIP Switches
on the TN16EFI Board.
DIP Switches on the TN16EFI Board

The master and slave subracks are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on the
EFI. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI board. The value that
can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1.
ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among
these ID values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are
ID5-ID1, by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0"
indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks.
Figure 5-19 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI board.
l The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the T1.
l When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
l As shown in Figure 5-19, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in
decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Figure 5-19 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board
U8
SERIAL
T1
NM_ETH2
SW1
SW2
(ID8)
(ID7)
(ID6)
(ID5)
(ID4)
(ID3)
(ID2)
(ID1)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW1 SW2

189
Subrack
ID
15
12
6
9
3
ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1)

SW2

ON (ID5) ON(ID5) ON (ID5) ON (ID5) ON (ID5)

SW1

Ensure that the ID6 to ID8 switches are turned on as shown in Figure 5-19.
Subrack
ID

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
8
5
11
14
2

SW2

SW1

ON (ID7) ON (ID7) ON (ID7) (ID7)
ON ON (ID7)
ON (ID8) ON (ID8) ON (ID8) (ID8)
ON ON (ID8)
Subrack
ID
10
13
7
1
4
SW2
Subrack ON (ID4) (ID4)
ID:1-15
ON (ID4) ON ON (ID4) ON (ID4)
ON (ID5) ON (ID5) ON (ID5)
SW1
NOTE
ON (ID5) ON (ID5)
ON ON (ID7) ON (ID6) ON (ID6)
(ID7) ON (ID7)
ON (ID8)
ON (ID8) ON (ID8)
Issue 01 (2014-03-31)
Product Description
190
Subrack
ID
Err
21
27
30
24
or
18
ON (ID1) ON (ID1)
SW2

"EE" indicates that the subrack ID is

incorrect or the subrack ID fails to
SW1
ON (ID5) ON(ID5) ON (ID5) ON (ID5) ON(ID5)

ON (ID6) ON (ID6) ON (ID6) ON (ID6) ON(ID6)
Subrack

ID
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

17
20
23
26
29

be obtained.
SW1 SW2

ON(ID5) ON(ID5) ON(ID5) ON(ID5) ON(ID5)
ON (ID6) ON(ID6) ON(ID6) ON (ID6) ON (ID6)
Subrack
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ID
16
19
22
25
28
31
SW2

Subrack
ON (ID3)
ID:16-31
ON (ID3) ON (ID3)
.
ON (ID5) ON (ID5)
SW1

Pin Assignment
Issue 01 (2014-03-31)
Product Description
Figure 5-22 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
Table 5-29 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface
Pin Signal Function
4 NC Not connected.
5 NC Not connected.
7 NC Not connected.
8 NC Not connected.
Pin Signal Function

communications

communications

Pin Signal Function

communications

communications

communications

communications

communications

communications
Table 5-31 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface
Pin Signal Function
1 N.C Not defined
2 RXD Receive end of data
3 TXD Transmit end of data
4 DTR Data terminal equipment

ready
5 GND Ground
6 - Reserved
7 - Reserved
8 GND GND
9 N.C Not defined

Pin Signal Function

positive

negative
Pin Signal Function

signal positive

signal negative

signal positive

signal positive

signal negative

signal negative

positive

negative

Pin Signal Function

positive

negative

positive

positive

negative

negative

positive

negative
Pin Signal Function
2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
Table 5-36 Pin assignment of the ALMI2
Pin Signal Function

Pin Signal Function
2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
Table 5-37 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface
Pin Signal Function
3 NC Not connected
6 NC Not connected
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
Table 5-38 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 GND Ground
2 GND Ground
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground

Pin Signal Function

ODU4, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, VC-12 granularities and packet services at the same time. Slots
IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU18 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in Table 5-39.
Cross Maximum Cross-Connect Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of

- Capacity of Each Slot Subrack
Conn
ect ODU VC-4 VC-3/ Pack ODUka VC-4 VC-3/ Packet
Boar ka VC-12b etc VC-12 c
TN16 40 N/A N/A N/A 640 Gbit/ N/A N/A N/A

XCH Gbit/s s
TN16 100 40 20 Gbit/ 50 1.6 T 640 20 Gbit/ 800

UXC Gbit/s Gbit/s s Gbit/s Gbit/s Gbit/s s Gbit/s
M
a: k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex.
b: All service slots share a bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s.
c: Theoretically, the subrack supports grooming of a maximum of 800 Gbit/s packet services.
In practice, however, the packet service grooming capability of the subrack is determined by
packet boards. The current version provides a packet service grooming capability up to 320
Gbit/s.
The maximum OTN service cross-connect capacity of each slot can be expanded from 40
Gbit/s to 100 Gbit/s by replacing the cross-connect boards in the subrack.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent
fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.
Version Description


range.

speed.
Partitioned heat Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide
dissipation efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is
independently regulated.
Working Principle
system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.


Side view
Front
Air outlet
Fan
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 5-41. The
partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that
you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default.

Mode
Auto Speed Mode Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the
temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed.
Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal.
If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed.


Mode
Adjustable Speed Five fan speed modes are available: Low Speed, Medium-Low
Mode Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You
can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in
all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned
manual fan speed adjustment.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation.
The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure
5-24.
IU19 IU20 IU21 IU23 IU24

IU22
EFI PIU AUX PIU ATE
IU9 IU10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Fan tray
A B C D E
assembly
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, there are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two
fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
l If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can remain operational for a short
term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure long-
term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner.
l Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.


signal signal
SCC Fan control

FAN

supply 1 supply 2
fan tray assembly.
tray assembly.
Appearance
SYSTEM
2
1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (ten in total)
NOTE
An air filter is installed on the fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU25 in the
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

NOTE
Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W)
x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H))
Power Consumptiona l Low Speed: 42.7 W

l Medium-Low Speed: 74.8 W
l Medium Speed: 106.8 W
l Medium-High Speed: 165.5 W
l High Speed: 215 W

NOTE
extreme conditions.

Item Specification
Maximum subrack power consumptiona 2400 W
Typical configuration power consumption 700 W

(OTN)

(OCS)
subrack.
NOTE
Table 5-44 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an 8800
T16.
Unit Name Typical Maximum Remarks

Power Power
Consumptio Consumptio
n (W)a n (W)a
OTU subrack 1 509.2 615.6 8 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX,

1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
assembly
OTU subrack 2 846.18 1103.64 4 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 2 x PIU,

2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x
fan tray assembly
OTU electrical 501 808 5 x NQ2, 2 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x TQX,

cross-connect 2 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE,
subrack 1 and 1 x fan tray assembly
OTU electrical 779.9 1021 2 x XCH, 4 x NS3, 2 x PIU, 1 x TTX,

cross-connect 1 x TQX, 2 x TOA, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
subrack 2 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly
OTU electrical 1267.5 1578.6 2 x UXCM, 4 x NS4(SDFEC2), 2 x

cross-connect TSC, 2 x TTX, 2 x AUX, 2 x PIU, 1 x
subrack 3 EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
assembly


Power Power
n (W)a n (W)a
OTM subrack 1 468.7 569.7 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x

OBU1, 6 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1
x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan
tray assembly

OBU1, 2 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 2
x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and
1 x fan tray assembly
OLA subrack 228.1 294.3 4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 2 x FIU,

1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
OADM subrack 449.5 561.5 2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 2 x FIU, 8 x

LSX, 1 x SC2, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x
AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan
tray assembly
221 269.2 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 1 x WSMD9, 1 x

DAS1, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1
x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
assembly
OCS subrack 821 1109 2 x UXCM, 4 x NS3, 2×PIU, 5 x

SLQ64, 4 x SLO16, 1 x SLH41, 1 x
EGSH, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE,
Table 5-45 lists the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.
Item Specification

(19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 17.7 in. (H))

Item Specification
5.5 OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack

The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack can be installed in an N63B, N66B, or 19-inch
cabinet. The subrack has 16 service slots and its rated current is 60 A.
5.5.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack. The
OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack has an independent power supply. A universal
platform subrack supports two mounting options: ETSI cabinet mounting and 19-inch rack
mounting.
Figure 5-27 shows the structure of the subrack.
Figure 5-27 OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack structure diagram
1 2 3 4
SYSTEM EFI
SE
T
PWR CRI MAJ MIN STAT PROG
RE
OG
PR
AT
ST
MIN
J
MA
IT
ST CR
TE R
MP PW
LA
5
9
6
10
7
1. LAMP TEST Button 2. Indicator/Interface area 3. RESET Button

4. SubRACK_ID LED indicator 5. Board area 6. Fiber cabling area
7. Fan tray assembly 8. Air filter 9. Mounting ear
10. Fiber spool
NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel
before you connect cables.

l LAMP TEST button: tests whether the indicators on the subrack are normal. After you
press the button, all the indicators should be lit. It has the same function as the LAMP TEST
button on the SCC board.
l Indicators: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack and EFI board
software.
l RESET button: warm resets the EFI board.
l SubRack_ID LED indicator: displays the master/slave relationships between subracks
when multiple subracks are cascaded. It has the same function as the subrack ID LED on
the front panel of the SCC board. "0" indicates that the subrack housing the SCC board is
the master subrack, "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or the subrack ID fails
to be obtained, and other values indicate slave subracks. For the meanings of other values
displayed on the LED, see DIP Switches on the TN18EFI Board.
l Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 18 slots are available.
l Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains eight fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack.
l The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as management interface, inter-
subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, network
management interface, alarm input and output interface. It is behind the subrack indicator
panel.

The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack provides 20 slots.
Slots of the subrack are shown in Figure 5-28.

Figure 5-28 Slots of the subrack
IU21 EFI PWR CRI MAJ MIN STAT PROG
IU17

PIU
IU18
IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU7 IU8 IU9 IU10 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 PIU
Fiber cabling area
IU19 Fan
Paired slots Mutual backup

For one-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 and IU2, slots IU3 and IU4,
and so on.
For two-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU2 and slots IU3 to IU4,
slots IU5 to IU6 and slots IU7 to IU8, and so on.
For four-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU4 and slots IU5 to IU8,
slots IU9 to IU12 and slots IU13 to IU16.
: houses service boards.
Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses
on the backplanes.
l When a universal platform subrack serves as a master subrack, the subrack can be
provisioned with two or one SCC board.
– When two SCC boards are provisioned, they are in mutual backup and are inserted in
slots IU1 and IU2.
– When only one SCC board is provisioned, it can be inserted in either slot IU1 or IU2.
When the SCC board is inserted in slot IU1, slot IU2 can be used to hold a service board.
When the SCC board is inserted in slot IU2, slot IU1 cannot be used to hold a service
board.
l When the universal platform subrack serves as a slave subrack, the SCC board cannot be
configured. In this case, slots IU1 and IU2 are used to hold service boards.

The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack uses the TN18EFI boards to provide various
communication and maintenance interfaces for the management and maintenance purposes.

There are two types of the TN18EFI boards, which have the same functions but different network
interface quantities and DIP switches.
l Type A
– Panel schematic diagram:
– Network management interface: NM_ETH/ETH1/ETH2/ETH3

– DIP switches: eight DIP switches within the board
l Type B
– Panel schematic diagram:
– Network management interface: NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2/ETH1/ETH2/ETH3

– DIP switches: five DIP switches on the board panel
Table 5-46 shows the communication and maintenance interfacesmaintenance purposes.

Boar Front Interface/Button/LED Specificatio

d Panel n
Name Conn Pino Description
ector ut
Type
TN18 See the NM_ETH/ RJ45 Table NM_ETH/NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2: l Dimension

EFIa previous NM_ETH1/ 5-47 l Connects the network interface s of front
figures. NM_ETH2/ Table on the equipment through a panel: (H x
ETH1/ETH2/ 5-48 network cable to that on an NM W x D): 28
ETH3: server so that the NM can manage mm (1.10
network the equipment. in.) x 428
management mm (16.85
interfaces l Connects the NM_ETH network in.) x 287
interface on one NE through a mm (11.30
network cable to that on another in.)
NE to achieve communication
between NEs. l Weight:
1.17 kg
ETH1-ETH3: (2.58 lb.)
l Connects a network cable from l Power
the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface consumpti
on one subrack to corresponding on:
interfaces on the other subracks to Typical
achieve the communication power
between the master subrack and consumpti
slave subracks. on: 12 W
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection is
Maximum
configured, the ETH3 interface power
cannot be used for the consumpti
communication between the master onb: 13 W
and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a
CRPC or ROP board to achieve
communication with the CRPC or
ROP board.
See Network Management for
more information.


d Panel n
ector ut
Type
LAMP1- RJ45 Table Outputs single-subrack or multi-

LAMP2: 5-49 subrack alarms to the cabinet
subrack alarm indicator interface to light the
output/ corresponding alarm indicators on
cascading the cabinet.
interfaces NOTICE
The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board
provide 5 V power, it is only used for the
indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect
to an RJ45 cable intended for the
NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK
interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the
connected test instrument, or the
For information about the interface
cables, see Cabinet Alarm Indicator
Cable.


d Panel n
ector ut
Type
ALMO1- RJ45 Table l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC

ALMO2: 5-50 power distribution cabinet
housekeeping through the output interface and
alarm output the cascading interface. You can
interfaces configure it to be the other
outputs to implement integrated
display of alarms. The alarm
outputs are controlled by the
internal relay contact. When the
relay contact is closed, the
resistance of each ALMO
interface is less than 1 ohm. When
the relay contact is open, the
resistance of each ALMO
interface is an infinite number.
l The definitions for the pins of the
ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces
are the same. The two interfaces
are used for output/cascading,
respectively. For example, if
ALMO1 is used to output alarm
signals, ALMO2 can be cascaded
to ALMO1 on another subrack.
l The OptiX OSN 8800 universal
platform subrack provides four
alarm outputs. Defaults of the
first three are critical alarm, major
alarm, and minor alarm. The
other one are reserved. Alarm
For information about interface
cables, see Alarm Output Interface
Cable.


d Panel n
ector ut
Type
ALMI1: RJ45 Table External alarm signal input function

housekeeping 5-51 is designed for requirements when
alarm input the alarm signals of the external
interface systems (such as the environment
monitory) need remote monitoring.
The OptiX OSN 8800 universal
platform subrack provides four alarm
inputs. The severity of the four
alarms can be configured to
cooperate with the external system to
implement remote monitoring of
external alarms.
For information about the interface
cable, see Alarm Input Interface
Cable.
SubRACK_ID - - The LED displays the master/slave

: subrack ID relationships between subracks. This
indicator subrack ID LED has the same
function as that on front panel of the
SCC board.
l "0" indicates that the subrack
housing the EFI board is the
master subrack,
l "EE" indicates that the subrack
ID is incorrect or the subrack ID
fails to be obtained.
l Other values indicate slave
subracks.
For the values displayed on the LED,
see Figure 5-31.
LAMP TEST - - Tests whether the indicators on the

button subrack are normal. After you press
the button, all the indicators should
be lit. It has the same function as the
LAMP TEST button on the SCC
board.


d Panel n
ector ut
Type
RESET button - - Used to perform a warm reset on the

EFI board. After a warm reset of the
board, FPGA of the board is not
updated, and the configuration data
in the memory of the board remains
the same.
TN12 IN: clock SMB - The CLK port and the IN/OUT port l Dimension
STG signal input cannot be used as the input or output s of front
STG
STAT
interface port at the same time. If the CLK port panel:
ACT
PROG is used to input or output clock 264.6 mm
SRV OUT: clock SMB - signals, the IN/OUT port cannot be (10.4 in.) x
signal output used to input/output clock signals. If 25.4 mm
interface the IN/OUT port is used to input/ (1.0 in.) x
CLK: clock RJ45 Table output clock signals, the CLK port 220 mm
signal input 5-52 cannot be used to input or output (8.7 in.)
TOD
and output clock signals. l Weight:
interface For information about the interface 1.1 kg (2.4
cables, see Clock/Time Cable. lb.)
TOD: time RJ45 Table
l Power
signal input 5-53
consumpti
and output
CLK
on:
interface
Typical
power
consumpti
IN on: 8.7W
Maximum
power
OUT consumpti
onb: 9.6W
STG
a: Two DIP switches are present on the TN16EFI board for setting the subrack ID. For details, see DIP Switches
on the TN18EFI Board.

DIP Switches on the TN18EFI Board

The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack supports the master/slave subrack management
mode. When this mode is used, the ID of each subrack must be set by using two DIP switches
on the EFI board.
DIP switches within the board (type A): Figure 5-29 shows the position of the DIP switches on
the EFI board.
l The TN18EFI board has a set of eight DIP switches. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of
SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-
ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5-ID1. Each DIP
switch can be used to set a binary digit, 0 or 1. When the DIP switch is toggled to ON, the
value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
l A maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the master
subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. As shown in Figure 5-29, the value
represented by the ID5-ID1 is 00001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID
is 1.
Figure 5-29 Position of the DIP switches within the board (type A)
ON (ID8) ON (ID4)
ON (ID7) ON (ID3)
ON (ID6) ON (ID2)
ON (ID5) ON (ID1)
SW1 SW2
DIP switches on the board panel (type B): Figure 5-30 shows the position of the DIP switches
on the EFI board.
l The TN18EFI board has a set of five DIP switches whose IDs are ID1-ID5 from the lower
bit to the higher bit. Each DIP switch can be used to set a binary digit, 0 or 1. When the
DIP switch is toggled to 0, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0. DIP switches must
be toggled to the topmost or the bottommost. Otherwise, the subrack ID cannot be
intuitively identified.
l A maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the master
subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. As shown in Figure 5-30, the value

represented by the ID5-ID1 is 00001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID
is 1.
Figure 5-30 Position of the DIP switches on the board panel (type B)
NM_ETH1 ALMI1 ALMO1 ALMO2 NM_ETH2

ID5 ID4 ID3ID2ID1
1
ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1

1
Figure 5-31 shows the mapping between the DIP switch binary values and subrack IDs.

Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack

DIP ID DIP ID DIP ID DIP ID
ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4
0 0 0 0
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8
0 0 0 0
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12
0 0 0 0
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16
0 0 0 0
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20
0 0 0 0
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
1 21 1 22 1 23 1 24
0 0 0 0
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
1
25 1
26 1
27 1
28
0 0 0 0
"EE" indicates
ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID that the subrack
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
ID is incorrect or
1 29 1 30 1 31 the subrack ID or
Err
0 0 0 fails to be
obtained.
NOTE
When DIP switches are within the board, ON indicates bit 0. ID6-ID8 are reserved. You must keep the default
setting, as shown in Figure 5-29.
When it is the first time that the EFI board is installed in an OSN 8800 universal platform subrack
or when the changed subrack ID is the same as the previous subrack ID, the subrack_ID LED
on the SCC and EFI boards will display the newly specified subrack ID.
If the newly specified subrack differs from the previous subrack ID, the subrack_ID LED on the
SCC and EFI boards will alternately display the previous subrack ID and the EE value. When
this occurs, determine whether the newly specified subrack ID is correct. If it is correct, power-
cycle all the PIU boards inside the subrack to make it take effect. If it is incorrect, configure the
DIP switches again to recover the previous subrack ID.

Pin Assignment
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Table 5-47 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH/NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface
Pin Signal Function
4 NC Not connected.
5 NC Not connected.
7 NC Not connected.
8 NC Not connected.
Pin Signal Function

communications

communications

Pin Signal Function

communications

communications

communications

communications

communications

communications
Pin Signal Function

positive

negative

Pin Signal Function

signal positive

signal negative

signal positive

signal positive

signal negative

signal negative

positive

negative
Pin Signal Function
2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
Table 5-52 Pin assignment of the CLK interface
Pin Signal Function

Pin Signal Function
3 NC Not connected
6 NC Not connected
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
Table 5-53 Pin assignment of the TOD interface
Pin Signal Function
1 GND Ground
2 GND Ground
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground

Each OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes
eight independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and replaced.
Version Description

Basic function Dissipates the heat generated by an subrack so that the subrack can
operate normally within the designated temperature range.
Commissioning l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation,

control depending on the subrack temperature.
l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed.
Partitioned heat Each subrack is divided into four partitions to help provide efficient
dissipation heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently
regulated.
Hot swapping Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly.
Working Principle
system in the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack.

Figure 5-33 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Side view
Front
Air outlet
Fan
The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack supports two fan speed modes, as shown in
Table 5-55. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is
recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.

Mode
Auto Speed Mode There are four areas (A, B, C, and D) in each subrack. The boards in the
areas overlap and the heat generated by the overlapped boards is
dissipated to the two areas where they are located. Fan speed in each
partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the
boards in the partition where the fans are installed.
Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal.
When one fan becomes faulty, the other fan in the same area adjusts the
fan speed based on the temperature reported by the board. When two
fans become faulty, all the remaining fans run at full speed.


Mode
Adjustable Speed Six fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low
Mode Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You
can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in
all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned
manual fan speed adjustment.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack is divided into four partitions in terms of heat
dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation.
See Figure 5-34.
Figure 5-34 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack
PWR CRIT MAJ MIN STAT PROG
P
I
I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I U
U U U U U U
U U U U U U U U U U
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 P
I
U
Fan Tray
A B IU22 C D
Assembly
There are four areas (A, B, C, and D) in each subrack. The boards in the areas overlap and the
heat generated by the overlapped boards is dissipated to the two areas where they are located so
that the heat of the two areas is automatically regulated. Two fans in each area dissipate heat
generated by the boards in the area where the fans are located.

NOTE
l Area A: houses service boards in slots IU1 to IU5.

l Area B: houses service boards in slots IU5 to IU9.
l Area C: houses service boards in slots IU9 to IU13.
l Area D: houses service boards in slots IU13 to IU16 and PIU.
NOTE
l If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can remain operational for a short
term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure
l Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.
The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control board. Figure 5-35 shows the
functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.

signal signal
SCC Fan control

FAN

supply 1 supply 2
fan tray assembly.
– Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals.
case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same area to adjust
the fan speed based on the temperature reported by the board.
– Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of
the fan tray assembly.

Appearance
3 CAUTION
Hazardous moving parts,keep fingers
and other body parts away.
严禁在风扇旋转时接触扇叶！
PULL
FAN
PULL
2
1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (eight in total)
NOTE
An air filter is installed on the fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.
Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU19.

Table 5-56 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack
fan tray assembly.
NOTE
Item Specification
Dimensions 442 mm (W) x 279 mm (D) x 47 mm (H) (17.40 in. (W) x 10.98 in.
(D) x 1.85 in. (H))
Weight 3.4 kg (7.5 lb)

l Medium-High Speed: 134 W
l High Speed: 190 W

Item Specification

This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications
Table 5-57 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack.
NOTE
extreme conditions.
Table 5-57 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack.
Item Value
Maximum subrack power consumption 2400 W

NOTE
distribution capability. The default power consumption threshold of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal
platform subrack is 1200 W and maps to a 30 A power supply. If a 60 A power supply is used, change the
NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value on the U2000 to 2400 W.
Table 5-58 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 universal
platform subrack.
Table 5-58 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 8800
universal platform subrack
Unit Namea Typical Maximu Remarks

Power m Power
Consumpt Consump
iona tiona
Electr Subrack 790 1003 8 x NO2, 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, and

ical 1 fan tray assembly
relay


Power m Power
Consumpt Consump
iona tiona
subra Subrack 1343 1654 7 x NS4 (SDFEC2), 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x

ck 2 SCC, and fan tray assembly
OTM Subrack 931 1207 3 x LTX (SDFEC), 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x

subra 1 SCC, and fan tray assembly
ck
Subrack 1241 1497 7 x LSC (SDFEC2), 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x
2 SCC, and fan tray assembly
Subrack 389 661 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU101, 1 x

3 OBU103, 1 x FIU, 1 x SC1, 2 x PIU, 1 x
EFI, 2 x SCC, and fan tray assembly
OLA subrack 158 352 2 x OAU101, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x PIU, 1

x EFI, 2 x SCC, fan tray assembly
ROA Subrack 129 326 1 x WSMD4, 1 x DAS1, 1 x M40, 1 x D40,

DM 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, and fan tray assembly
subra
ck (4
x
dime
nsion
s)b
OTM cabinet 2561 3365 OTM subrack1, OTM subrack2, and OTM
subrack3
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis
and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module. The maximum
power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the
b: At the ROADM site, it is recommended to deploy one subrack per direction. This table
assumes that the four directions are configured identically and provides only the reference
configurations for one direction.

Table 5-59 lists the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform
subrack.

Table 5-59 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack
Dimensions Specification
Dimensions 442 mm (W) × 295 mm (D) × 397mm (H)

(17.4 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 15.6 in. (H))
Weight (empty subrack) 19 kg (41.89 lb.)
is installed.
5.6 Power Supply
5.6.1 Power Requirement
Table 5-60 provides the requirements on voltage and current of a PDU.
Table 5-61 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 subrack.
Table 5-60 Requirements on voltage and current of a PDU
Item Requirement
Nominal -48 V DC/-60 V DC

working
voltage
Working -48 V DC: -40 V to -57.6 V

voltage -60 V DC: -48 V to -72 V
range
Rated This parameter is determined by the PDU type and terminal connections on the
working PDU. For details, see External Power (from the PDF to the Cabinet).
current
(-48 V)
Table 5-61 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 subrack
Item Requirement

working
voltage

range

Item Requirement
Rated 8800 T64: 200 A (Independent power supplies to four sections of each subrack,
working with 50 A for each section)
current 8800 T32: 100 A (Independent power supplies to two sections of each subrack,
(-48 V) with 50A for each section)
8800 T16: 50 A
8800 universal platform subrack: 50 A
5.6.2 DC Power Distribution Box (TN16PDU)

The TN16PDU/TN51PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks
inside the cabinet.
NOTE
The TN51PDU and TN16PDU have the same functions but differ in height. The TN51PDU is 133.4 mm
high. When two OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are installed on a cabinet, one more DCM frame can be
configured if the TN16PDU is used, compared with the TN51PDU.
TN51PDU can be substituted by the TN16PDU.This topic describes the TN16PDU.
The TN16PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive
four -48V/-60V power supplies and output four power supplies for subracks in the cabinet.
Whether short-circuiting copper bars are required is determined by the current of power supplied
by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room:
l When eight 63 A power supplies are provided, no short-circuiting copper bar is required.
l When four 125 A power supplies are provided, short-circuiting copper bars are required
for dividing one 125 A power supply into two 63 A power supplies.
For more information about short-circuiting copper bars, see Short-Circuiting Copper
Bar.
Figure 5-37 shows the front panel of the TN16PDU.
Figure 5-37 Front panel of the TN16PDU

Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply
output area switch area input area switch area output area
- - - - - - - -
+ + + + + + + +
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
A B
1 2 3
1. Output cable terminal block 2. Input cable terminal block 3. Power switch

l Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) (21.1 in. (W) x 3.9 in. (H))
l Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output cable terminal
blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.
l Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four input cable terminal
blocks and receive four -48V/-60V DC power supplies, eight -48V/-60V DC power supplies
in total.
l Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output power switches to control
power supplies for subracks inside the cabinet and provide overcurrent protection for each
other.
Figure 5-38 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN16PDU.
Figure 5-38 TN16PDU internal pin assignments
OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
- - - - - - - -
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
+ + + + + + + +
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
INPUT A INPUT B
OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
+ + + + OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
+ + + +
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
- - - - - - - -
INPUT A INPUT B
Short-Circuit Copper Bar

If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies
in total. In this case, short-circuit copper bars are required for both A and B. Figure 5-39 shows
the appearance of the short-circuiting copper bar.
Figure 5-39 Appearance
Copper Plate

5.6.3 DC Power Distribution Box (TN11PDU)

The TN11PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the
cabinet.
DC PDU
The TN11PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive
two -48V/-60V power supplies and output six power supplies for subracks in the cabinet.
Whether junction boxes are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power
supply equipment in the telecommunications room:
l If a power supply is 63 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power
supplies in total. In this case, no junction box is required.
l If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power
supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for dividing one 125 A current
into four 32 A currents.
For more information about junction boxes, see Junction Box.
Figure 5-40 shows the front panel of the TN11PDU.
Figure 5-40 Front panel of the TN11PDU

1 2 3 3 2 1
A B
4 4
1. Output cable terminal block 2. Ground screw 3. Input cable terminal block 4. Power switch
l Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 131 mm (H) (21.1 in. (W) x 5.2 in. (H))
l Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six output cable terminal
blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.
l Ground screw: used to connect (protection ground) PGND cables.
l Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have two input cable terminal
blocks and receive two -48V/-60V DC power supplies, four -48V/-60V DC power supplies
in total.
l Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six power output switches (corresponding
to the six output cable terminal blocks) to control power supplies for subracks in the cabinet.
Figure 5-41 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN11PDU.

Figure 5-41 TN11PDU internal pin assignments
OUTPUT OUTPUT
- - - - - -
+- +- + - + - +- + - +- +- + - + - +- + -
ON ON
OFF OFF
+ + - - + + - -
INPUT INPUT
Junction Box
If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies
in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for both A and B. Figure 5-42 shows the junction
box structure and Figure 5-43 shows the installation position of the junction box.
Figure 5-42 Structure

Figure 5-43 Installation position
5.6.4 DC Power Distribution Box (DPD63-8-8)

The DPD63-8-8 PDU is installed at the top of a cabinet to power subracks inside the cabinet.
NOTE
The TN11PDU/TN16PDU/TN51PDU can be substituted by the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
DC PDU
The DPD63-8-8 PDU consists of two sections: A and B, which provide backup for each other.
Both A and B accept four -48V/-60V power inputs and produce four power outputs for subracks
in the cabinet.
According to the currents provided by the power source inside the equipment room, the
DPD63-8-8 PDU can have different configurations. Table 5-62 lists the typical configurations
of the PDU.
Table 5-62 Typical configurations of the DPD63-8-8 PDU
N Input Output Circuit Copper Fitting Configuration

o. Current Current Breaker
Requirement
1 8 x 63A 8 x 63A 8 x 63A None
2 4 x 125A 8 x 63A 8 x 63A Two-in-one copper fittings in the left,

right, and middle of the PDU
3 4 x 63A 8 x 32A 8 x 32A Two-in-one copper fittings in the left,

right, and middle of the PDU
4 2 x 125A 8 x 32A 8 x 32A l Four-in-one copper fittings in the

left, right, and middle of the PDU
l Two-in-one copper fittings in the
middle of the PDU

N Input Output Circuit Copper Fitting Configuration

o. Current Current Breaker
Requirement
5 2 x 125A + 2 4 x 63A + 4 4 x 63A + 4 x Two-in-one copper fittings in the left,

x 63A x 32A 32A right, and middle of the PDU
When working at the ambient temperature of 65°C (149°F) of the air exhaust vent, the PDU
output current decreases from 63 A to 53.7 A or from 32 A to 29.1 A.
For more information about copper fitting configuration, see Copper Fittings.
Figure 5-44 shows the front panel of the PDU (DPD63-8-8).
Figure 5-44 Front panel of the DPD63-8-8 PDU
! CAUTION
This device has more than one power input.
Disconnect all the power inputs to power off this
device.
此设备有多路电源输入。设备断电时必须断开所有电
源输入。
!CAUTION
Disconnect power before servicing. Also all metal
jewelry, such as watchs, rings, etc, should be
removed from hands and wrists.
维护前先断电。同时将金属饰物手表、戒指等取下。
PER INPUT -48V—-60V; 63A MAX
A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 B1 B2 B3 B4
NEG(-) RTN(+) RTN(+) NEG(-)
OUTPUT

Figure 5-45 shows the terminals on the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Note that there are two types of RTN
(+) terminal blocks for the DPD63-8-8 PDU and they just look differently.
Figure 5-45 Terminals on the DPD63-8-8 PDU
1. NEG(-) power input interface 2. RTN(+) power input interface 3. RTN(+) power output interface
4. NEG(-) power output interface 5. Power switch
l Panel dimensions (H x W x D): 110 mm (4.3 in.) x 442 mm (17.4 in.) x 89.2 mm (3.5 in.)
l Power output interfaces: Four power output interfaces are located in each of sections A and
B of the PDU. These interfaces connect to subrack power cables and distribute power to
the subracks inside a cabinet.
l Power input interfaces: Four power input interfaces are located in each of sections A and
B of the PDU. The four interfaces in each section accept four -48 or -60 V DC power inputs,
providing a total of eight -48 or -60 V DC power inputs in both sections.
l Power switches: Four power switches are located in each of sections A and B of the PDU.
They are in a one-to-one mapping relationship with power output interfaces and control
the power inputs to the subracks inside the cabinet.
Figure 5-46 shows the internal pin assignments of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.

Figure 5-46 DPD63-8-8 PDU internal pin assignments
INPUT A INPUT B
INPUT A INPUT B
+ + + + + + + +
- - - - 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 - - - -
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
- - - - - - - -
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
+ + + + + + + +
OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
Copper Fittings
When sections A and B each require two power inputs (four power inputs in total), two-in-one
copper fittings must be installed in both sections. Figure 5-47 shows the appearance of two-in-
one copper fittings and how they are installed on the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
Figure 5-47 Appearance of the two-in-one copper fittings (four power inputs and eight power outputs)
3
1
2
1 Two-in-one copper fitting 3
Two-in-one copper fitting (left) Two-in-one copper fitting (right)

When sections A and B require one power input each (two power inputs in total), four-in-one
copper fittings must be installed on the left and right terminals and two-in-one copper fittings
must be installed on the middle terminals of the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Figure 5-48 shows the
appearance of four-in-one copper fittings and how they are installed on the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
Figure 5-48 Appearance of the four-in-one copper fittings (two power inputs and eight power outputs)
3 1 3
1 2 3
Four-in-one copper fitting Two-in-one Four-in-one copper fitting
copper fitting
NOTE
Eight holes are located on the terminal block in the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Four two-in-one copper
fittings designated for the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU are installed to cover the first to eighth holes, as shown
in Figure 5-47 and Figure 5-48. In total, four two-in-one copper fittings are required to combine the RTN(+)
power inputs in the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
As shown in Figure 5-48, one four-in-one copper fittings are vertically installed on the RTN(+) power input
terminals in the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
There are also two types of two-in-one copper fittings to match the two types of RTN(+) terminal
blocks on the DPD63-8-8 PDU, as shown in Figure 5-49. Install corresponding copper fittings
in the middle area of the DPD63-8-8 PDU based on the type of the RTN(+) block.

Figure 5-49 Two-in-one copper fittings for the middle area of the DPD63-8-8 PDU
5.6.5 UPM
The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/
220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The UPM
is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or requires
batteries.
Application
Figure 5-50 shows the application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.
Figure 5-50 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16
OptiX OSN equipment
Backplane
110V/220V -48V
UPM PIU
Board A
-48V
PIU
Board B
-48V

Appearance
The UPM is a special power supply system and EPS75-4815AF is one type of the UPM.
The output power of a single EPS75-4815AF power system is 2000 W. The EPS75-4815AF
power system is 3U high. Figure 5-51 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power
system.
Figure 5-51 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system

UPM can work with storage batteries . When the external AC power system supplies power
normally, the batteries store power. When the 110 V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the
batteries can supply power for 3 to 4 hours. To supply power to the OptiX OSN 8800 T16
equipment, only one power system is required to be connected to the batteries.
The standard maximum configuration of each EPS75-4815AF power system includes five
rectifier modules and one monitoring module.
NOTE
The batteries do not belong to the EPS75-4815AF. Therefore, the batteries need to be configured separately.
If the batteries are required, a battery cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the equipment
cabinet is reserved for the batteries.
Table 5-63 provides the functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Table 5-63 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Function and EPS75-4815AF

Feature
Hot-swappable The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you
function replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still
work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is
improved.

Function and EPS75-4815AF

Feature
Storage battery The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the
protection function mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment
automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the
equipment operates normally. The battery module provides a capacity
of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah.
Loading capacity The loading capability of each rectifier module is 800 W.
Lightning-proof The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof protector.

function The rectifier module can bear the 1.2/50 us x 6 kV or 8/20 us x 3 kA
lightning surge. When the lightning current enters the rectifier module
along with the power cable, install category-C and category-B light
arresters before you connect the AC mains supply to the power system
to prevent the overvoltage caused by the direct lightning strike from
damaging the rectifier module.
Working Principle and Signal Flow

The UPM is fed by one 110 V/220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts
the input power into –48 V DC voltage to provide four DC branches and one battery branch.
When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage
battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings. The
monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage battery loop,
and load loop.
In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is
connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains supply
fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the monitoring module
reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the battery voltage starts
to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring module reports the DC
undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery group enables the power-
off protection function to interrupt the connection between the battery group and the equipment.
As a result, the batteries are automatically protected.
When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.
Interfaces and Indicators

Figure 5-52 shows the rear view of the EPS75-4815AF power system (subject to the UPM on
site).

Figure 5-52 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system
1. Control circuit breaker of the AC 2. Control circuit breaker of the 3. Control circuit breaker of load 1 (10
input (30 A) battery branch (80 A) A)
4. Control circuit breaker of load 2 (30 5. Control circuit breaker of 6. Control circuit breaker of load 4 (40
A) load 3 (40 A) A)
7. AC phase line terminal 8. AC zero line terminal 9. Negative 48 V terminal of the battery
branch
10. Negative 48 V terminal of the load 11. Positive 48 V terminal of 12. Positive 48 V terminal of the load
branch the battery branch branch
13. Connecting terminal of the PGND 14. DB44 signal interface 15. Communication interface (COM)
cable
16. Communication test interface
(TEST)
Interfaces
The front panel of the EPS75-4815AF has seven interfaces. Table 5-64 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF.
Table 5-64 Interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Interface Type of Interface Usage
Power Power interface "7" and "8" indicate the AC mains input terminals, which
input access 110 V/220 V AC power.
interface
Power Power interface The power output interfaces are in the lower left corner
output on the front panel of the UPM. The terminals indicated
interface by "9" and "11" constitute a battery interface, through
which the power system is connected to the battery input
socket at the back of the storage battery box through a
battery cable. "10" and "12" indicate the output
interfaces of four loads. The output interfaces can supply
power to the OptiX OSN equipment by using power
cables.

Interface Type of Interface Usage
Connectin Power interface The UPM is grounded through the cabinet.

g terminal
of the
PGND
cable
DB44 DB44 The backplane of the subrack can be connected to the

signal sensor transfer box (an optional device) through the
interface DB44 signal interface and to the monitoring module
through the 96-pin DIN connector. In addition, the
sensor transfer box can be connected to multiple sensors.
As a result, the monitoring function is extended.
Communi RJ45 Reserved

cation
interface
(COM)
Communi RJ45 It is used for internal test.

cation test
interface
(TEST)
Switch Button The switch buttons are on the left of the UPM, as shown
button in Figure 5-52. "1" indicates the control circuit breaker
of the AC input (30 A), which enables and disables the
input of the AC mains supply. "2", "3", "4", and "5"
indicate the load control switches, which enable and
disable the load output.
Definition of DB44 signal pins
Table 5-65 provides the definition of DB44 signal pins.

Table 5-65 Definition of DB44 signal pins
Pin Diagram Pin Definiti Function Pin Definit Function

on ion
1 24 V Auxiliary power 23 SMOK Smoke sensor

output E
2 12 V Auxiliary power 24 WATE Water damage detection

output R
3 12 V Auxiliary power 25 DOOR Door status switch (DSS)

output signal detection
4 GND Signal ground 26 WIRE Distribution frame

connection
5 GND Signal ground 27 JK1+ Positive terminal of dry

contact 1
6 SIM1 Voltage 28 JK1- Negative terminal of dry

detection of the contact 1
first battery pack
7 SIM2 Voltage 29 JK2+ Positive terminal of dry

detection of the contact 2
second battery
pack
8 - - 30 JK2- Negative terminal of dry

contact 2
9 - - 31 CONT1 Positive terminal for output

O+ control of optical coupler 1
10 GND Signal ground 32 CONT1 Negative terminal for output

O- control of optical coupler 1
11 VHUM Ambient 33 CONT2 Positive terminal for output

humidity O+ control of optical coupler 2
measurement
12 VBTEM Battery 34 CONT2 Negative terminal for output

1 temperature O- control of optical coupler 2
measurement 1
13 VBTEM Battery 35 FANCT Positive terminal for fan

2 temperature R1+ rotation control
measurement 2
14 VTEM1 Ambient 36 FANCT Negative terminal for fan

temperature R1- rotation control
measurement 1

Pin Diagram Pin Definiti Function Pin Definit Function

on ion
15 VTEM2 Ambient 37 JKM1+ Positive terminal for a surge

temperature protector failure alarm
measurement 2
16 JTD1 Backup 1 38 JKM1- Negative terminal for a surge

protector failure alarm
17 JTD2 Backup 2 39 JKM2+ Positive terminal for an AC

power-off alarm
18 JTD3 Backup 3 40 JKM2- Negative terminal for an AC

power-off alarm
19 JTD4 Backup 4 41 JKM3+ Positive terminal for a battery

undervoltage alarm
20 JTD5 Backup 5 42 JKM3- Negative terminal for a

battery undervoltage alarm
21 JTD6 Backup 6 43 JKM4+ Positive terminal for power

supply system failure
22 JTD7 Backup 7 44 JKM4- Negative terminal for power

supply system failure
Indicators
The front panel of each rectifier module has the following indicators:
l Running status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)

l Alarm and protection indicator (ALM) – one color (yellow)
l Faulty state indicator (FAULT) – one color (red)
The front panel of the monitoring module has the following indicators:
l Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) – one color (red)

l Power supply system status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)
Valid Slots
The UPM is case shaped. Therefore, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack.
Technical Specifications
A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output
power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W.
Table 5-66 lists the power parameters of the UPM.

Table 5-66 Power parameters of the UPM
Parameter Value
Voltage range 90-290 V AC

of the AC input
AC input One single-phase three-wire system: 45-65 Hz
Rated input ≤ 28 A
current
Output 53.5±0.5 V
nominal
voltage
Rated output DC output branches Load circuit breaker 1: 10 A

current Load circuit breaker 2: 30 A
Load circuit breaker 3: 40 A
Load circuit breaker 4: 40 A
Battery circuit breaker: 80 A
Total output DC current 37.5±3 A to 75±3 A
Regulated ≤ ±1%
voltage
precision
Non-balance of ≤ ±5% (50%-100% load)

load sharing
Rated ≥ 89%
efficiency of
the integrated
equipment
Power factor ≥ 0.99 (nominal input or output)
Peak-to-peak ≤ 200 mV (within the range of 20 MHz)

noise voltage
Electrical ≤ ±0.1%
network
adjustment rate
Lightning When the UPM works alone, the input end can bear the simulated lightning
protection surge current whose waveform is 8/20μs and amplitude is 5 kA for five
performance times in both directions. The interval between two surges must be at least
one minute. If the lightning surge current is higher than the preceding
indexes, the UPM may be damaged and cannot work normally.
Cooling The fan that is embedded in the rectifier module cools the module.
method

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the UPM are as follows:
l Dimensions of the UPM: 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 133 mm (H) (17.2 in. (W) x 10.0
in. (D) x 5.2 in. (H))
l Weight: 15 kg (33.1 lb.)
5.6.6 PIU
A PIU board is used to power boards inside a subrack.
Mappings Between the Board and Equipment

The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the
board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local
Huawei office.
Board 8800 T64 8800 T32 8800 T16 8800 Universal

Subrack Subrack Subrack Platform
Subrack
TN16PI Y Y Y N
U
TN18PI N N N Y
U
TN51PI Y Y N N
U
Function
Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V and provides lightning protection and power
filtering functions.
TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter function, which enables the TN16PIU to detect the power
consumption of the entire subrack and report the power consumption to the system control unit.
TN18PIU provides 3.3 V power supply in centralized manner, with the maximum power of 40
W.
NOTE
The overcurrent protection function for the access power supplies of each subrack is realized by the magnetic
circuit breaker of the PDU.
Front Panel
l Appearance

Figure 5-53 Front panel of the TN16PIU
PIU
PWR
RTN(+) NEG(-)

RTN(+)
NEG(-)

NOTE
As shown in the following figures, two types of front panel are available for The TN51PIU board. The
difference between the two types of front panel lies in the silkscreen.

PIU
PWR
RTN(+) NEG(-)
PIU
PWR
RTN -48V
l Indicator:
Running status indicator (PWR/RUN) - green
Valid Slots
Table 5-67 Valid slots for the TN16PIU
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81, IU88, and IU89
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46

subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 IU20 and IU23

subrack

Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 IU17 and IU18

universal platform
subrack
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81, IU88, and IU89
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46

subrack
Specifications
l Performance Specifications
Table 5-70 Performance specifications of the PIU board
Item Specifications
Number of DC input power 1

supplies
Input DC power voltage range -48 V DC: -40 V to -57.6 V

-60 V DC: -48 V to -72 V
Input DC power current TN16PIU/TN18PIU/TN51PIU: ≤ 60A
l Mechanical Specifications
Dimensions of front panel:
– TN16PIU/TN51PIU: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in.
(D) x 3.1 in. (H))
– TN18PIU: 25 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 120 mm (H) (0.98 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.72
in. (H))
Weight:
– TN16PIU: 0.65 kg (1.43 lb.)
– TN18PIU: 0.45 kg (0.99 lb.)
– TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.)
l Power Consumption

Board Typical Power Maximum Power

Consumption (W) Consumptiona (W)
TN16PIU 3 3.6
TN18PIU 7.5 8
TN51PIU 5 5
a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works
normally under the highest ambient temperature.
5.7 Frames
5.7.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module

DCM modules are installed in DCM frames and are used to compensate for the positive
dispersion of transmission fibers to help maintain the shape of a propagated signal.
After an optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, the optical signal pulse expands
because of the accumulation of positive dispersion. This pulse expansion has a negative impact
on system transmission performance. Therefore, dispersion compensation modules (DCMs),
which are passive devices, are required to compensate for the positive dispersion. DCMs use
the inherent negative dispersion of a dispersion compensating fiber to offset the positive
dispersion of transmission fibers to prevent pulse expansion.
Depending on the technology that DCMs use, two types of DCMs are available: dispersion
compensating fiber (DCF)-DCMs and fiber Bragg grating (FBG)-DCMs.
These DCMs can compensate for the following transmission distances: 5 km (3.1 mi.), 10 km
(6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.), 100 km (62.1
mi.), 120 km (74.6 mi.), 160 km (99.4 mi.), 200 km (124.2 mi.), and 240 km (149.1 mi.).
Each DCM frame can hold up to two DCM modules. The left- and right-side mounting ears
attach the DCM frame to the columns of . For the appearance of the DCM, see Figure 5-56.

Figure 5-56 Appearance of the DCM frame
1 2
1. DCM frame 2. DCMs
Table 5-71, Table 5-72, Table 5-73 and Table 5-74 describes the performance requirements
for C-band dispersion compensation in different fibers. Each DCM supports a dispersion slope
compensation rate (DSCR) within the range of 90% to 110% and an operating wavelength within
the range of 1528 nm to 1568 nm.
Table 5-71 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (G.652 fibers)
DCM Module Transmission Max. PMD PDL Max.

Distance (mi./ Insertion (ps) (dB) Allowable
km) Loss (dB) Powera
(dBm)
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2.3 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(T) 6.2/10 2.8 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 8 0.7 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 9 0.8 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 9.8 0.8 0.1 20
FBG-DCM(80) 49.7/80 4 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(100) 62.1/100 4 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(120) 74.5/120 4 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(160) 99.4/160 8 1.6 0.4 23
FBG-DCM(200) 124.2/200 8 1.6 0.4 23


(dBm)
FBG-DCM(240) 149.1/240 8 1.6 0.4 23
a: The Max. Allowable Power refers to the maximum input optical power allowed into the
optical module without causing damage.
Table 5-72 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (G.655 LEAF fibers)

(dBm)
DCM(A) 12.4/20 4 0.4 0.3 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 5 0.5 0.3 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 5.9 0.7 0.3 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 6.9 0.8 0.3 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 7.8 0.9 0.3 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 8.8 1.0 0.3 20
FBG-DCM(120) 74.5/120 3.7 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(160) 99.4/160 3.7 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(200) 124.2/200 3.7 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(240) 149.1/240 3.7 1.0 0.2 23
DCM Transmission Max. PMD PDL Max.

Module Distance (mi./ Insertion (ps) (dB) Allowable
(dBm)
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2 0.2 0.1 20
DCM(T) 6.2/10 3 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 5 0.5 0.1 20


(dBm)
Table 5-74 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (TW-RS fibers)

(dBm)
DCM(A) 12.4/20 2.3 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 2.8 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 3.8 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 4.2 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
Table 5-75 Mechanical specifications of the DCM frame
Parameter Specifications
Dimensions (H x 48 mm (1.9 in.) x 484 mm (19.1 in.) x 270.5 mm (10.6 in.)

W x D)
5.7.2 CRPC Frame

The CRPC frame holds a CRPC board, a fan tray assembly, and a power distribution unit. The
frame is installed in an open rack.
Figure 5-57 shows the appearance of the CRPC frame. Situated in the middle of the frame is a
CRPC board. On the left of the frame is a fan tray assembly, and on the right is a power source
with two power inputs in mutual backup.

Figure 5-57 CRPC frame appearance
1: Fan tray assembly 2: CRPC board 3: Power distribution box
Table 5-76 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame
Parameter Value
Dimensions (H x W x D) 86 mm (3.4 in.) x 535 mm (21.1 in.) x 257 mm (10.1

in.)
Weight 3 kg (6.6 lb)
Table 5-77 Voltage and current requirements for the CRPC frame
Parameter Specifications
Rated working current 10 A
Nominal working voltage -48V DC/-60V DC
Working voltage range -48V DC: -40V DC to -57.6V DC

-60V DC: -48V DC to -72V DC

5.7.3 E2000 ODF Frame

E2000-ODF is a functional box that enables fiber splicing and fiber distribution between high-
power optical amplifier boards and an ODF. E2000-ODF can house a maximum of six pairs of
LSH/APC-LSH/APC (E2000-E2000) connectors. It decreases the number of common fiber
connectors and helps ensure the cleanness of fiber endfaces to effectively reduce link loss.
E2000-ODF can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or ETSI cabinet. The following figures show
its appearance and structure.
Figure 5-58 E2000-ODF appearance
E2000-ODF
Figure 5-59 E2000-ODF structure
1. Fiber spool: coils redundant fiber patch cords. 2. LSH/APC-LSH/APC (E2000-E2000) connectors: connect
to LSH/APC fiber patch cords and provide protection.
3. Dustproof cap: protects a connector port. 4. Splicing tray: protects fusion splicing points and coils
redundant fiber patch cords.
The following figure shows the appearance of an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (E2000-E2000)

connector.

Figure 5-60 LSH/APC optical connector
The following table lists the mechanical specifications of E2000-ODF.
Table 5-78 E2000-ODF mechanical specifications
Item Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D) 43.6 mm (H) x 482.6 mm (W) x 265 mm (D)
Weight 5 kg
Connector type LSH/APC-LSH/APC (E2000-E2000)
Fiber quantity 6 fibers
5.8 Board
5.8.1 Appearance and Dimensions

This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.
NOTICE
Always wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap when holding a board to prevent static from
damaging the board.
Table 5-79 shows the appearance and dimensions of the different board types.

Table 5-79 Board appearance and dimensions
Board Appearance Board Name Numbe Heig Wi Dep

r of ht dt th
Slots (mm h (m
Per /in.) (m m/
Board m/ in.)
in.
)
TN11OAU1 2 264.6 50. 220.

Width
/10.4 8 0/8.
7
Height
Depth
Width TN11M40 3 264.6 76. 220.

/10.4 2 0/8.
7
Height
Depth
Width TN11LSXL 4 264.6 10 220.

/10.4 1.6 0/8.
/ 7
4.0
Height
Depth

5.8.2 Symbols on Boards

This section describes the symbols on boards.
Table 5-80 Symbols on Boards
Label Type Description
Laser safety Indicates that the laser

class label safety class of boards
is HAZARD LEVEL
CAUTION 1M and there may be
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
laser radiation. It
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH warns users not to
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS directly look into fiber
connectors without
taking any protection
measures; instead an
optical instrument
that can attenuate
optical power must be
used.
Fiber type It specifies the fiber

G.657A2 FIBER ONLY label type for the boards.
只能使用G.657A2 光纤
NOTE
To prevent the cabinet
door from squeezing
fibers, the board can
use G.657A2 fibers.
Warning Applies to CRPC

警告:开启电源前，务必连好光纤 label boards. It provides
WARNING:FIBERS MUST precautions for the
!
BE CONNECTED BEFORE boards.
POWER UP
Heat hazard Indicates that the

label board surface
temperature is high
and it may cause body
injury.
Warning Applies to PIU

label boards.
It warns the user to
shut down the PDU
power inputs
corresponding to a
PIU board before the
user replaces the PIU
board.

Label Type Description
Suggestion Applies to PIU

label boards.
It advises the user to
consult related
documents for
operations specific to
PIU boards.
5.8.3 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category

The following types of boards are available for the system.
Optical transponder unit, see Table 5-81.
OTN Tributary unit, see Table 5-82.
OTN Line unit, see Table 5-83.
Universal Line Board, see Table 5-84.
Packet Service Unit, see Table 5-85.
PID unit, see Table 5-86.
Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit, see Table 5-87.
Fixed optical add and drop multiplexing unit, see Table 5-88.
Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, see Table 5-89.
Optical amplifier unit, see Table 5-90.
Cross-connect unit and system and communication unit, see Table 5-91.
Optical supervisory channel unit, see Table 5-92.
Optical protection unit, see Table 5-93.
Spectrum analyzer unit, see Table 5-94.
Variable optical attenuator unit, see Table 5-95.
Dispersion compensation unit, see Table 5-96.
Clock unit, see Table 5-97.
TDM unit, see Table 5-98.
Interface area unit, see Table 5-99.
Fan, see Table 5-100.
ROPA subsystem unit, see Table 5-101.

Table 5-81 Boards for optical transponder unit
Board Board Description General Enhanc General Enhanc 8800 8800 T16
Name 8800 T64 ed 8800 8800 T32 ed 8800 Univers Subrack
Subrack T64 Subrack T32 al
Subrack Subrack Platform
Subrack
TN12L 2-channel multi-rate Y Y Y Y Y N

DM (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
wavelength conversion
board
TN11L 2-channel multi-rate Y Y Y Y N N

DMD (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
board, dual fed and
selective receiving

DMS (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
board, single fed and
single receiving
TN12L 2 x 10 Gbit/s Y Y Y Y Y Y
DX wavelength conversion
unit
TN11L 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and Y Y Y Y N Y

EM24 2 x OTU2 Ethernet
switch board
TN11L 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Y Y Y Y N Y

EX4 Ethernet switch board
TN11L 8 x Any-rate MUX Y Y Y Y Y Y

OA OTU2 Wavelength
Conversion Board
TN11L 8 x Gigabit Ethernet Y Y Y Y N N

OG unit
TN12L Y Y Y Y Y Y
OG
TN11L 8-port multi-service Y Y Y Y N N

OM multiplexing & optical
TN12L board Y Y Y Y Y Y
OM

Subrack
TN13L 4-channel multi-rate Y Y Y Y Y N

QM (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
unit

QMD (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
unit, dual fed and
selective receiving

QMS (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
unit, single fed and
single receiving
TN12L 100Gbit/s wavelength Y Y Y Y Y Y

SC conversion board

SC conversion board

SC conversion board
TN11L 40 Gbit/s wavelength Y Y Y Y Y Y

SQ conversion board
TN12L 10 Gbit/s wavelength Y Y Y Y Y Y

SX conversion unit
TN13L Y Y Y Y Y Y
SX
TN14L Y Y Y Y Y Y
SX
TN12L 40 Gbit/s wavelength Y Y Y Y Y N

SXL conversion board
TN15L Y Y Y Y Y Y
SXL

SXLR conversion relay unit

SXR conversion relay unit

Subrack
TN11L 10-Port 10Gbit/s Y Y Y Y Y Y

TX Service Multiplexing &
Optical Wavelength
TN12L Conversion Board Y Y Y Y Y Y
TX
TN11L arbitrary rate (16Mbit/ N N N N Y N

WX2 s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-
board
TN11L arbitrary rate (16Mbit/ N N N N Y N

WXS s-2.7Gbit/s)
board (single transmit)
TN12L arbitrary rate (16Mbit/ Y Y Y Y Y Y

WXS s-2.7Gbit/s)
board (single transmit)
TN11T 4 channels STM-16/ Y Y Y Y N N

MX OC-48/OTU1
asynchronism mux
TN12T OTU-2 wavelength Y Y Y Y Y Y
MX conversion board
Table 5-82 Boards for OTN tributary unit
Board Board General Enhanced General Enhanc 8800 8800 T16

Name Description 8800 T64 8800 T64 8800 T32 ed 8800 Universal Subrack
Subrack Subrack Subrack T32 Platform
Subrack Subrack
TN52TD 2 x 10G tributary Y Y Y Y N Y

X service
processing
TN53TD board Y Y Y Y N Y
X
TN54TE 24xGE Y Y Y Y N Y
M28 +4x10GE
Ethernet
tributary unit


Subrack Subrack
TN54TH 16 Any-rate Y Y Y Y N Y
A Ports Service
Processing
Board
TN54TO 8 Any-rate Ports Y Y Y Y N Y

A Service
Processing
Board
TN52TO 8 x GE tributary Y Y Y Y N Y
G service
processing
board
TN52TO 8 x multi-rate Y Y Y Y Y Y
M ports service
processing
board
TN55TO 8 x 10 Gbit/s N Y Y Y N Y
X tributary service
processing
board
TN52TQ 4 x 10 Gbit/s Y Y Y Y N Y
X tributary service
processing
TN53TQ board Y Y Y Y N Y
X
TN55TQ Y Y Y Y N Y
X
TN54TS 100 Gbit/s N Y N Y N Y

C tributary service
processing
board
TN53TS 40 Gbit/s Y Y Y Y N Y
XL tributary service
processing
TN54TS board Y Y Y Y N Y
XL
TN54TT 10 x 10 Gbit/s N Y N Y N Y
X tributary service
processing
board

Table 5-83 Boards for OTN line unit

Subrack Subrack
TN12ND 2 x 10G line N N N N only N

2 service supports
processing relay mode
board
TN52ND Y Y Y Y only Y
2 supports
relay mode
TN53ND Y Y Y Y only Y
2 supports
relay mode
TN52NQ 4 x 10G Line Y Y Y Y N N

2 Service
Processing
TN53NQ Board Y Y Y Y only Y
2 supports
relay mode
TN54NQ Y Y Y Y N Y
2
TN55NO 8 x 10G Line only Y Y Y only Y

2 Service supports supports
Processing relay mode relay mode
Board
TN52NS 10G Line Y Y Y Y N Y

2 Service
Processing
TN53NS Board Y Y Y Y N Y
2
TN52NS 40G Line Y Y Y Y N Y

3 Service
Processing
TN54NS Board Y Y Y Y only Y
3 supports
relay mode
TN55NS Y Y Y Y only Y
3 supports
relay mode


Subrack Subrack
TN56NS Y Y Y Y only Y
3 supports
relay mode
TN54NS 100G Line only Y only Y only Y

4 Service supports supports supports
Processing relay mode relay mode relay mode
Board
TN56NS 100G Line only Y Y Y only Y

4 Service supports supports
Processing relay mode relay mode
Board
TN57NS 100G Line only Y only Y only Y

4 Service supports supports supports
Processing relay mode relay mode relay mode
Board
TN54NS 100G Line Y Y Y Y N N

4M Service
Processing
Board
Table 5-84 Boards for universal Line Board
Boar Board General Enhanced General Enhanced 8800 8800 T16

d Description 8800 T64 8800 T64 8800 T32 8800 T32 Universa Subrack
Nam Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack l
e Platform
Subrack
TN54 4 x 10G N N Y Y N Y
HUN Universal Line
Q2 Service
Processing
Board
TN54 40G Universal N N Y Y N Y

HUN Line Service
S3 Processing
Board

Table 5-85 Boards for packet service unit

d Description 8800 T64 8800 T64 8800 T32 8800 T32 Universal Subrack
Nam Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack Platform
e Subrack
TN54 16-port gigabit N N Y Y N Y

EG16 ethernet packet
switch board
TN54 2 x 10GE N N Y Y N Y
EX2 ethernet packet
switch board
TN54 2 x 10G bit/s N N Y Y N Y

PND packet switch
2 line board
Table 5-86 Boards for PID unit

e Subrack
TN54 4 x 10G line Y Y Y Y N Y

ENQ service
2 processing board
TN54 12 x OTU2 PID Y Y Y Y N Y

NPO board
2
TN55 Y Y Y Y N Y
NPO
2
TN55 10G PID line Y Y Y Y N Y

NPO service
2E processing
board, 20–
channel extended

Table 5-87 Boards for optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit

e Subrack
TN11 40-channel Y Y Y Y Y Y
D40 demultiplexing
unit
TN12 Y Y Y Y Y Y
D40
TN11 40-channel Y Y Y Y N N
D40 demultiplexing
V unit with VOA
M40 multiplexing unit
TN12 Y Y Y Y Y Y
M40
M40 multiplexing unit
V with VOA
TN12 Y Y Y Y Y Y
M40
V
TN12 fiber interface Y Y Y Y Y Y

FIU unit
TN13 Y Y Y Y Y Y
FIU
TN14 Y Y Y Y Y Y
FIU
TN11 interleaver board Y Y Y Y Y Y

ITL
TN12 Y Y Y Y Y Y
ITL
TN11 fiber interface Y Y Y Y Y Y

SFIU unit for sync
timing

Table 5-88 Board for fixed optical add and drop multiplexing unit

e Subrack
TN11 CWDM 2- Y Y Y Y Y Y
CMR channel optical
2 add/drop
multiplexing unit
TN11 CWDM 4- Y Y Y Y Y Y
CMR channel optical
4 add/drop
multiplexing unit
TN11 CWDM 1- Y Y Y Y N N
DMR channel
1 bidirectional
optical add/drop
multiplexing
board
TN11 2-channel optical Y Y Y Y Y Y

MR2 add/drop
multiplexing unit

MR4 add/drop
multiplexing unit
TN11 8-channel optical Y Y Y Y Y N

MR8 add/drop
multiplexing unit

MR8 add/drop
V multiplexing unit
with VOA
TN11 2-channel Y Y Y Y Y N
SBM CWDM single-
2 fiber
bidirectional add/
drop board

Table 5-89 Boards for reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit

e Subrack
TN11 9-port ROADM Y Y Y Y Y Y

RDU demultiplexing
9 board
TN11 9-port ROADM Y Y Y Y Y Y

RMU multiplexing
9a board
TN11 reconfigurable Y Y Y Y N N
ROA optical adding
M board
TN12 20-ports Tunable Y Y Y Y Y Y

TD20 Demultiplexing
Board
TN11 20-ports Y Y Y Y Y Y
TM2 Wavelength
0 Tunable
Multiplexing
Board
TN12 9-port Y Y Y Y Y Y
WSD wavelength
9 selective
switching
demultiplexing
board
WSD wavelength
9 selective
switching
demultiplexing
board
WSD wavelength
9 selective
switching
demultiplexing
board


e Subrack
WSM wavelength
9 selective
switching
multiplexing
board
WSM wavelength
9 selective
switching
multiplexing
board
WSM wavelength
9 selective
switching
demultiplexing
board
TN11 2-port Y Y Y Y Y N
WSM wavelength
D2 selective
multiplexer and
demultiplexer
board
TN11 4-port Y Y Y Y Y N
WSM wavelength
D4 selective
multiplexer and
demultiplexer
board
WSM wavelength
D4 selective
multiplexer and
demultiplexer
board
WSM wavelength
D4 selective
multiplexer and
demultiplexer
board


e Subrack
WSM wavelength
D9 selective
multiplexing and
demultiplexing
board
WSM wavelength
D9 selective
multiplexing and
demultiplexing
board
WSM wavelength
D9 selective
multiplexing and
demultiplexing
board
a: For TN11RMU9: OptiX OSN 8800 T16 only supports the TN11RMU902.
Table 5-90 Boards for optical amplifier unit

e Subrack
SSN4 optical booster Y Y Y Y N Y

BPA and pre-amplifier
board
TN11 case-shape Y Y Y Y Y Y
CRP Raman pump
C amplifier unit for
C-band
TN11 optical amplifier Y Y Y Y Y Y

DAS unit
1
TN11 high-power Y Y Y Y Y Y
HBA booster amplifier
board


e Subrack
TN11 optical amplifier Y Y Y Y N N

OAU unit
1

OAU unit
1

OAU unit
1
TN11 optical booster Y Y Y Y N N

OBU unit
1
TN12 optical booster Y Y Y Y Y Y

OBU unit
1
TN11 optical booster Y Y Y Y N N

OBU unit
2
TN12 optical booster Y Y Y Y Y Y

OBU unit
2
TN11 backward raman Y Y Y Y Y Y

RAU and erbium
1 doped fiber
hybrid optical
amplifier unit
TN11 backward raman Y Y Y Y Y Y

RAU and erbium
2 doped fiber
hybrid optical
amplifier unit

Table 5-91 Boards for cross-connect unit and system and communication unit
Board Board General Enhanced General Enhanced 8800 8800 T16

Name Description 8800 T64 8800 T64 8800 T32 8800 T32 Universal Subrack
Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack Platform
Subrack
TN16XC High Cross- N N N N N Y

H connection,
System Control
and Clock
Processing
Board
TNK2SX OptiX OSN Y N N N N N

M 8800 T64
centralized cross
TNK4SX connect board Y Y N N N N
M
TN52UX 3.2T Universal N N Y Y N N

CH Cross Connect
Board
TN52XC OptiX OSN N N Y Y N N

H 8800 T32
centralized cross
connect board
TN52UX 3.2T Universal N N Y Y N N

CM Cross Connect
Board
TN52XC Cross & connect N N Y Y N N

M process board
(Support high-
cross and low-
cross)
TNK2U 6.4T Universal N Y N N N N

XCT Cross Connect
Board
TNK2X OptiX OSN Y N N N N N

CT 8800 T64
centralized cross
TNK4X connect board Y Y N N N N
CT

Board Board General Enhanced General Enhanced 8800 8800 T16

Name Description 8800 T64 8800 T64 8800 T32 8800 T32 Universal Subrack
Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack Platform
Subrack
TN16UX 1.6T Universal N N N N N Y

CM Cross
Connect,System
Control and
Clock
Processing
Board
TN16SC system control N N N N N Y

C and
communication
TN51SC unit N N Y N N N
C
TN52SC N N Y Y Y N
C
TNK2SC Y Y N N N N
C
TN16AU system auxiliary N N N N N Y

X interface board
TN51AU Y Y Y Y N N
X
TN52AU Y Y Y Y N N
X
TNK2US 6.4T Universal N Y N N N N

XH Cross Connect
Board
TNK2SX OptiX OSN Y N N N N N

H 8800 T64
centralized cross
TNK4SX connect board Y Y N N N N
H

Table 5-92 Boards for optical supervisory channel unit

e Subrack
TN11 high power Y Y Y Y Y Y

HSC1 unidirectional
optical
supervisory
channel board
TN12 high power Y Y Y Y Y Y

HSC1 unidirectional
optical
supervisory
channel board
TN12 unidirectional Y Y Y Y Y Y
SC1 optical
supervisory
channel unit
TN12 bidirectional Y Y Y Y Y Y
SC2 optical
supervisory
channel unit
TN11 bidirectional Y Y Y Y Y Y
ST2 optical
supervisory
channel and
timing
transmission unit
Table 5-93 Boards for optical protection unit

e Subrack
TN11 Optical Y Y Y Y Y N
DCP protection unit
TN12 Y Y Y Y Y Y
DCP
TN11 optical line Y Y Y Y Y N

OLP protection unit


e Subrack
TN12 Y Y Y Y Y Y
OLP
TN11 sync optical Y Y Y Y Y Y

SCS channel separator
unit
Table 5-94 Boards for spectrum analyzer unit

e Subrack
MCA spectrum
4 analyzer unit
MCA spectrum
8 analyzer unit

OPM power
8 monitoring board
TN12 Y Y Y Y Y Y
OPM
8
TN11 wavelength Y Y Y Y Y Y
WM monitoring unit
U
Table 5-95 Boards for variable optical attenuator unit

e Subrack
VA1 variable optical
attenuator unit


e Subrack
VA4 variable optical
attenuator unit
Table 5-96 Boards for dispersion compensation unit

e Subrack
TN11 dispersion Y Y Y Y Y Y
DCU compensation
board
TN11 single- Y Y Y Y Y Y
TDC wavelength
tunable-
dispersion
compensation
board
Table 5-97 Boards for clock unit

e Subrack
TN12 centralized clock N N N N Y N

STG board
TN52 centralized clock N N Y Y N N

STG board
TNK centralized clock Y Y N N N N

2STG board

Table 5-98 Boards for TDM unit

e Subrack
SSN3 2-port 10xGE Y Y Y Y N Y

EAS2 switching and
processing board
SSN1 16 x GE Ethernet Y Y Y Y N Y
EGS switching and
H processing board
SSN4 1 x STM-64 Y Y Y Y N Y
SF64 optical interface
board with the
FEC function
SF64 optical interface
A board with the
FEC function
SFD6 optical interface
4 board with the
FEC function
SL64 optical interface
board
SLD6 optical interface
4 board
SSN3 16 x STM-4/ Y Y Y Y N Y
SLH4 STM-1 optical
1 interface board
SLO1 optical interface
6 board
SSN4 4xSTM-16 Y Y Y Y N Y
SLQ1 optical interface
6 board
SSN4 4 x STM-64 line N N Y Y N Y

SLQ6 interface board
4

Table 5-99 Boards for the interface area unit

e Subrack
TN16 interface board of N N N N N Y

ATE alarm & timing &
expanding
TN51 Y Y Y Y N N
ATE
TN16 EMI filter N N N N N Y

EFI interface board
TN51 Y Y Y Y N N
EFI1
TN51 Y Y Y Y N N
EFI2
TN18 N N N N Y N
EFI
TNL1 synchronous Y Y Y Y N N
STI timing interface
board
TN52 Y Y Y Y N N
STI
TN51 power interface Y Y Y Y N N

PIU unit
TN16 Y Y Y Y N Y
PIU
TN18 N N N N Y N
PIU
Table 5-100 Boards for Fan

e Subrack
TN51 Fan Y Y Y Y N N
FAN
TN16 Fan N N N N N Y
FAN


e Subrack
TN18 Fan N N N N Y N
FAN
Table 5-101 Boards for ROPA subsystem unita

e Subrack
TN11 gain flatness unit Y Y Y Y Y Y

GFU
TN11 ROPA gain unit Y Y Y Y Y Y

RGU
TN11 ROPA pumping Y Y Y Y Y Y

ROP unit
a: For details of the ROPA subsystem unit refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide.
5.8.4 Optical Transponder Board

An OTU (Optical Transponder Unit) board converts client-side services into standard optical
signals after performing mapping, convergence, and other procedures. The board also performs
the reverse process.
Positions of OTU Boards in a WDM System

Figure 5-61 shows the positions of OTU boards in a WDM system.
Figure 5-61 Positions of OTU boards in a WDM system

Client-side WDM-side
services services
OTU
OM
OA
Client-side equipment
WDM-side ODF
OTU
FIU
SC1
OTU
OA
OD
OTU

Types of OTU Boards

OTU boards are classified into the following types according to the WDM-side rates and
functions:
l 2.5G OTU boards: For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 5-102.
l 10G OTU boards: For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 5-103.
l Ethernet over WDM (EoW) boards: These OTU boards support Layer 2 processing of
Ethernet services. For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 5-106.
l Transparent transmission OTU boards: These OTU boards do not support OTN processing.
They only convert client services into ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals. For the main
functions of these OTU boards, see Table 5-107.
Table 5-102 Main functions of 2.5G OTU boards
Boar Type Client-Side Service Pluggable Optical WDM

d Module Specificatio
ns
Type Max. Client WDM DW CW

Num Side Side DM DM
ber
TN12 Conver STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FICON, 2 Y Y Y Y

LDM gence FC100, GE, FE, DVB-ASI, ESCON,
FDDI
OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, 1

FICON Express,
TN11 Conver STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FICON, 2 Y N Y N

D FDDI
OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, 1

FICON Express,
TN11 Conver STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FICON, 2 Y N Y N

S FDDI
OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, 1

FICON Express,
TN13 Conver STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, 4 Y Y Y Y

LQM gence ESCON, DVB-ASI, FDDI
GE, FC100, FICON, 2
FC200, FICON Express, STM-16, 1

OC-48, OTU1


ns

Num Side Side DM DM
ber
TN12 Conver STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, 4 Y N Y N

D
GE, FC100, FICON, 2

OC-48, OTU1
TN12 Conver STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, 4 Y N Y N

S
GE, FC100, FICON, 2

OC-48, OTU1
Table 5-103 Main functions of 10G OTU boards

ns

Num Side Side DM DM
ber
TN1 Non- STM-64, OC-192, FC1200, 10GE 1 Y N Y N

2LS converg LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2
X ence
TN1 Non- STM-64, OC-192, FC1200, 10GE 1 Y Y Y N

3LS converg LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e
X ence
TN1 Non- STM-64, OC-192, FC1200, 10GE 1 Y N Y N

4LS converg LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e
X ence
TN1 Non- 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, 2 Y Y Y N

2LD converg OC-192, OTU2, OTU2e
X ence
TN1 Converg FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, 8 Y Y Y N

1LO ence OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI,
A ESCON, SDI


ns

Num Side Side DM DM
ber
HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, STM–16, 4

OC-48, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1
3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR, FC400, 2

FICON4G
FC800, FICON8G, FC1200, 1

FICON10G, 10GE LAN, Infiniband
2.5G, Infiniband 5G
TN1 Converg GE 8 Y N Y N
1LO ence
G
TN1 Converg GE 8 Y Y Y N
2LO ence
G
TN1 Converg GE, FC100, FICON, ISC 1G 8 Y N Y N

1LO ence
M FC200, FICON EXPRESS, ISC 2G 4
FC400, FICON4G 2
TN1 Converg GE, FC100, FICON, ISC 1G 8 Y Y Y N

2LO ence
M FC200, FICON EXPRESS, ISC 2G 4
FC400, FICON4G, 3G-SDI 2
TN1 Relay N/A 1 N N Y N

1LS
XR
TN1 Converg STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 4 Y N Y N

1TM ence
X
TN1 Converg STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 4 Y Y Y N

2TM ence
X

Board Type Client-Side Service Pluggable Optical WDM

Module Specificati
ons

Number Side Side DM DM
TN11LSQ Non- STM-256, OC-768, 1 N N Y N

convergence OTU3
TN12LSXL Non- STM-256, OC-768, 1 N N Y N

convergence OTU3
TN15LSXL Non- STM-256, OC-768, 1 N N Y N

convergence OTU3
TN12LSXLRa Relay N/A N/A N N Y N
a: Only TN12LSXLR supports OTU3e.
Board Type Client-Side Service Pluggable WDM Specifications

Optical Module
Type Max. Client WDM DWDM CWDM

Number Side Side
TN12 Non- 100GE,OTU4 1 Y N Y N

LSC convergence

LSC convergence

LSC convergence
TN11 Convergenc 10GE LAN, 10GE 10 Y N Y N

LTX e WAN, STM-64,
OC-192
TN12 Convergenc 10GE LAN, 10GE 10 Y N Y N

LTX e WAN, STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2/OTU2e

Table 5-106 Main functions of EoW boards

Module Specifications

Number Side Side
TN11 Convergenc FE, GE 22 Y Y Y N

LEM2 e, L2 service
4 processing 10GE-LAN, 10GE- 2
WAN
TN11 Convergenc 10GE-LAN, 10GE- 4 Y Y Y N

LEX4 e, L2 service WAN
processing
Table 5-107 Main functions of transparent transmission OTU boards

Module Specifications

Number Side Side
TN11 Transparent STM-16, STM-4, 2 N N Y Y

LWX2 transmissio STM-1, OC-48, OC-12,
n OC-3, FC200, FC100,
GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON,
DVB-ASI, SDI, FICON,
FICON Express, HD-
SDI
TN12 Transparent STM-16, STM-4, 1 N N Y Y

LWXS transmissio STM-1, OC-48, OC-12,
n OC-3, FC200, FC100,
GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON,
DVB-ASI, SDI, FICON,
FICON Express, HD-
SDI, ISC 1G, ISC 2G,
ETR, CLO
5.8.5 OTN Tributary Board

Huawei OTN product series support the use of separate tributary and line boards. Tributary and
line boards work with cross-connect boards. A tributary board plus a line board together performs
the functions of an OTU board. Different from an OTU board, the tributary and line boards
achieve more flexible and fine-grained grooming of electrical services and offers a higher
bandwidth utilization by working with a cross-connect board.

Positions of OTN Tributary in a WDM System

A OTN tributary board receives client-side services, performs O-E conversion, maps the services
into ODUk containers, and lastly sends the ODUk electrical signals to cross-connect board for
centralized cross-connection.
Figure 5-62 shows the positions of OTN tributary boards in a WDM system.
Figure 5-62 Positions of OTN tributary boards in a WDM system

services ODUk ODUk services
OTN Tributary Line

board Board
OM
OA
Line
WDM-side ODF
OTN Tributary
board Board
FIU
SC1
OTN Tributary Line
board Board
OA
OD
OTN Tributary Line

board Board
Types of OTN Tributary Boards

The differences between different types of OTN tributary boards lie in the type and number of
client-side signals, and the type and number of electrical signals sent to the cross-connect board.
Table 5-108 provides the main functions of the OTN tributary boards. The THA, TOA, and
TOM tributary boards can apply to multiple scenarios. For details on these scenarios, see THA,
TOA, and TOM. The TEM28 tributary board supports Layer 2 processing of Ethernet services.
Table 5-108 Main functions of OTN tributary boards
Board Client-Side Service Backplane-Side Signal Pluggable Optical

Module
Type Max. Type Max. Number
Number
TN52TDX 10GE LAN, 2 ODU2, ODU2e 2 Y

10GE WAN,
STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2,
OTU2e


Module
Number
TN53TDX 10GE LAN, 2 ODU2, ODU2e 2 Y

10GE WAN,
STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2,
OTU2e, FC800,
FC1200
FC800 2 ODUflex 2 Y
TN54THA FE, FDDI, GE, See ODU0 See Application Y

STM-1, STM-4, Applicati Overview.
OC-3, OC-12, on
FC100, FICON, Overview
DVB-ASI, .
ESCON, OTU1
FE, GE, OTU1, ODU1

STM-1, OC-3,
STM-4, OC-12,
STM-16, OC-48,
FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON
Express, DVB-
ASI, ESCON,
FDDI
TN54TOA FE, FDDI, GE, See ODU0 See Application Y

STM-1, STM-4, Applicati Overview.
OC-3, OC-12, on
FC100, FICON, Overview
DVB-ASI, .
ESCON, SDI,
OTU1
FE, FDDI, ODU1

STM-1, OC-3,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, STM-4,
OC-12, GE,
FC100, FICON,
STM-16, FC200,
FICON Express,
HD-SDI, HD-
SDIRBR, OTU1
3G-SDI, 3G- ODUflex

SDIRBR, FC400,
FICON4G


Module
Number
TN52TOG GE 8 ODU0 8 Y
ODU1 4
TN52TOM FE, FDDI, DVB- See ODU0 See Application Y

ASI, SDI, Applicati Scenario
ESCON, GE, on Overview of
FC100, FICON, Scenario TN52TOM.
OTU1 Overview
of
FE, FDDI, TN52TO ODU1
STM-1, OC-3, M.
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, STM-4,
OC-12, GE,
FC100, FICON,
STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FICON
Express, HD-
SDI, OTU1
TN55TOX STM-64, 8 ODU2, ODU2e 8 Y

OC-192, 10GE
LAN, 10GE
WAN, OTU2,
OTU2e,
TN52TQX STM-64, 4 ODU2, ODU2e 4 Y

OC-192, 10GE
LAN, 10GE
WAN, OTU2,
OTU2e,

OC-192, 10GE
LAN, 10GE
WAN, OTU2,
OTU2e, FC800,
FC1200

OC-192, 10GE
LAN, 10GE
WAN, OTU2,
OTU2e, FC800,
FC1200
FC800 4 ODUflex 4


Module
Number
TN54TSC 100GE, OTU4 1 ODU4 1 Y
TN53TSX STM-256, 1 ODU3 1 N

L OC-768, OTU3
TN54TSX 40GE 1 ODU3 1 Y

L
TN54TTX 10GE LAN, 10 ODU2, ODU2e 10 Y

10GE WAN,
STM-64, OC-192
TN54TEM FE, GE 24 16 x ODU0, 8 x ODU1, 2 x ODU2, 8 x Y

28 ODUflex. The total bandwidth is 20G
10GE LAN, 4 bit/s.
10GE WAN
5.8.6 OTN Line Board

A tributary board receives client-side services, performs O-E conversion, maps the services into
ODUk containers, and lastly sends the ODUk electrical signals to cross-connect board for
centralized cross-connection. A line board multiplexes and maps ODUk electrical signals cross-
connected from cross-connect board and performs conversion between OTUk optical signals
and standard wavelengths.
Positions of Line Boards in a WDM System

A line board multiplexes and maps ODUk electrical signals cross-connected from cross-connect
board and performs conversion between OTUk optical signals and standard wavelengths.
Figure 5-63 shows the positions of line boards in a WDM system.

Figure 5-63 Positions of line boards in a WDM system
services ODUk ODUk services
Tributary Line
board Board
OM
OA
Tributary Line
WDM-side ODF
board Board
FIU
SC1
Tributary Line
board Board
OA
OD
Tributary Line
board Board
Line Boards
The differences between different types of line boards lie in the rate and number of line-side
signals and the type and number of electrical signals from the cross-connect board. Table
5-109 provides the main functions of line boards.
Table 5-109 Main functions of line boards
Board Backplane-Side Signal WDM-Side Signal Pluggabl WDM Specifications

e Optical
Type Max. Type Max. Module DWDM CWDM
Number Number
TN52ND2 ODU0 16 OTU2 2 N Y N
ODU1 8 OTU2
ODU2, ODU2e 2 OTU2,

OTU2e
ODUflex 4 OTU2
TN53ND2 ODU0 16 OTU2 2 Y Y N
ODU1 8 OTU2
ODU2, ODU2e 2 OTU2,

OTU2e
ODUflex 4 OTU2
TN55NO2 ODU0 64 OTU2 8 Y Y N


e Optical
Number Number
ODU1 32 OTU2
ODU2, ODU2e 8 OTU2,

OTU2e
TN52NQ2 ODU0 32 OTU2 4 Y Y N

TN54NQ2
ODU1 16 OTU2
ODU2, ODU2e 4 OTU2,

OTU2e
TN53NQ2 ODU0 32 OTU2 4 Y Y N
ODU1 16 OTU2
ODU2, ODU2e 4 OTU2,

OTU2e
ODUflex 8 OTU2
TN52NS2 ODU0 8 OTU2 1 N Y N
ODU1 4 OTU2
ODU2, ODU2e 1 OTU2,

OTU2e
ODUflex 2 OTU2
TN53NS2 ODU0 8 OTU2 1 Y Y N
ODU1 4 OTU2
ODU2, ODU2e 1 OTU2,

OTU2e
ODUflex 2 OTU2
TN52NS3 ODU0 32 OTU3, 1 N Y N

OTU3e
ODU1 16
ODU2 4
ODU2e 4 OTU3e

TN55NS3 OTU3e
ODU1 16
ODU2, 4
ODU2e 4 OTU3e


e Optical
Number Number
ODU3 1 OTU3,
OTU3e

OTU3e
ODUflex 32
ODU1 16
ODU2 4
ODU2e 4 OTU3e
ODU3 1 OTU3
VC-4 256 OTU3,

OTU3e

TN56NS4
ODUflex 80
TN57NS4
ODU1 40
ODU2, ODU2e 10
ODU3 2
ODU4 1

M
ODUflex 80
ODU1 40
ODU2, ODU2e 10
ODU3 2
ODU4 1
5.8.7 Universal Line Board

A universal line board supports hybrid transmission of OTN, SDH, and packet services.
Compared to a common line board, a universal line board additionally supports SDH and packet
services. In other words, a universal line board grooms a wider range of electrical signals and
offers higher bandwidth utilization.

Positions of Universal Line Boards in a WDM System

A universal line board receives and processes ODUk signals, packets, or VC-4 signals from the
cross-connect board. When receiving packets or VC-4 signals, the board maps the them into
ODUk signals, performs multiplexing and E/O conversion, and sends out an OTUk optical signal
carried over an ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelength. When receiving ODUk signals,
the board directly performs multiplexing and E/O conversion.
Figure 5-64 illustrates the position of a universal line board in a WDM system.
Figure 5-64 Position of a universal line board in a WDM system

services ODUk/VC-4/Packets services
Tributary Universal
board line board
OM
OA
TDM board
Packet Universal
WDM-side ODF
service board line board
FIU
SC1
Tributary Universal
board line board
OA
TDM board
OD
Packet Universal
service board line board
Main Functions
The main difference between universal line boards lies in the number of line-side signals and
their rates as well as the type and number of signals from the cross-connect board. Table
5-110 provides the main functions of universal line boards.
Table 5-110 Main functions of universal line boards
Board Backplane-Side Signal WDM-Side Pluggab Layer 2 Function

Signal le
Optical
Type Max. Type Max. Module
Number Num
ber
TN54HU ODU0 32 OTU3, 1 Not l Supports E-Line and E-LAN

NS3 OTU3e supporte services based on MPLS,
ODUflex 32 d QinQ, and physical ports.
ODU1 16 l Supports ETH-OAM and
MPLS-TP OAM.
ODU2 4

Board Backplane-Side Signal WDM-Side Pluggab Layer 2 Function

Signal le
Optical
Type Max. Type Max. Module
Number Num
ber
ODU2e 4 OTU3e l Supports Tunnel APS, PW

APS, LAG, MC-LAG, and
ODU3 1 OTU3 MSTP.
Packets 40Gbit/s OTU3, l Supports QoS.
OTU3e
VC-4 256
TN54HU ODU0 32 OTU2 4 Supporte

NQ2 d
ODUflex 32
ODU1 16
ODU2 4
ODU2e 4 OTU2e
Packets 40 Gbit/s OTU2
VC-4 256
TN56NS ODU0 32 OTU3, 1 Not Not supported

3a OTU3e supporte
ODUflex 32 d
ODU1 16
ODU2 4
ODU2e 4 OTU3e
ODU3 1 OTU3
VC-4 256 OTU3,

OTU3e
a: The TN56NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of OTN and SDH services. To maintain consistency in board
classification between the TN56NS3 board and NS3 boards of other versions, the TN56NS3 board is still classified
as an OTN line board in the product documentation. For details, see NS3.
5.8.8 Packet Service Board

Packet service boards process received data packets based on MPLS switching and provide
flexible LSP transmission pipes. They provide carrier-class protection for services using MPLS-
TP APS, support MPLS-TP OAM and ETH-OAM, and manage bandwidth using the QoS
function.

Positions of Packet Service Boards in a WDM System

The packet service board receives and processes the ethernet services at Layer 2. The processed
services are transmitted as packets to centralized cross-connect boards for grooming. Then a
universal line board or packet service board can be used to direct packet services to the WDM
network for transmission.
Figure 5-65 shows the positions of packet service boards in a WDM system.
Figure 5-65 Positions of packet service boards in a WDM system

Client- side
Packets OTU2/OTU3
services
EG16
PND2/
OM
OA
Cli ent-side e qui p ment
Universal
line board
W D M-si de O D F
EX 2
SC 1
FI U
EG16
PND2/
Universal
OA
OD
line board
EX 2
Main Functions
Table 5-111 lists the main functions of packet service boards.
Table 5-111 Main functions of packet service boards
Board Client-Side Service/ Backplane-Side Signal Layer 2 Function

WDM-Side Signal
Type Max. Type Maximum

Numbe Bandwidt
r of h
Service
s
EG16 l Client-side 16 Packets 20 Gbit/s l Supports E-Line and E-LAN

service: GE/ services based on MPLS, QinQ, and
FE physical ports.
l WDM-side
signal: N/A

Board Client-Side Service/ Backplane-Side Signal Layer 2 Function

WDM-Side Signal
Type Max. Type Maximum

Numbe Bandwidt
r of h
Service
s
EX2 l Client-side 2 Packets 20 Gbit/s l Supports ETH-OAM and MPLS-TP

service: OAM.
10GE LAN l Supports MPLS-TP Tunnel APS,
l WDM-side MPLS-TP PW APS, LAG, MC-
signal: N/A LAG, and MSTP.
l Supports QoS.
PND2 l Client-side 2 Packets 20 Gbit/s
service: N/A
l WDM-side
signal:
OTU2
5.8.9 PID Board

PID boards integrate the functions of traditional optical transponder boards and multiplexer/
demultiplexer boards. OTN processing and output of multiplexed optical signals are
implemented on one PID board, featuring large capacity, high integration, high reliability, and
flexible access of various services.
Positions of PID Boards in a WDM System

Figure 5-66 shows the positions of PID boards in a WDM system.

Figure 5-66 Positions of PID boards in a WDM system

Max.: 20 x multiplexed
OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals
ODUk ODUk
Client-side Tributary
services board
WDM-side ODF
ODUk
ODUk TN54 ODUk
TN55
ENQ2
Client-side Tributary NPO2E
services board +
TN54
PQ2
ODUk TN55
OTUk optical ODUk NPO2 OTUk
Line
signals in +
/PID
other TN54
board
directions PQ2
200G PID group
TN54
PQ2 : subboard
l NPO2E: receives ODUk electrical signals from the backplane, OTU2/OTU2e electrical
signals from the ENQ2 board, and OTU2/OTU2e optical signals from the NPO2 board,
and finally outputs 20 channels of multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
l NPO2: receives ODUk electrical signals from the backplane, OTU2/OTU2e electrical
signals from the ENQ2 board, and outputs 12 channels of multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e
optical signals. Or outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals to the NPO2E
board which outputs 20 channels of multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
l ENQ2: receives ODUk electrical signals from the backplane, converts the signals into four
channels of OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, and finally outputs the signals to the NPO2
or NPO2E board for processing.
l PQ2 subboard: processes ODUk signals on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board after
being installed on the board.
Main Functions of PID Boards

Table 5-112 lists the main functions of PID boards.
Table 5-112 Main functions of PID boards
Board Signal Input Signal Output
TN55NPO2Ea 64 x ODU0, 32 x ODU1, or 8 x ODU2/ODU2e 20 x multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical

electrical signals from other tributary, line, or PID signals
boards

Board Signal Input Signal Output
4 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from the

ENQ2 board
8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals from the NPO2

board
TN54NPO2/ 64 x ODU0, 32 x ODU1, or 8 x ODU2/ODU2e 12 x multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical

TN55NPO2a electrical signals from other tributary, line, or PID signals
boards
4 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from the

ENQ2 board
TN54ENQ2 32 x ODU0, 16 x ODU1, or 4 x ODU2/ODU2e 4 x OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals to

electrical signals from other tributary, line, or PID the NPO2E or NPO2 board
boards
a: The access capability listed in the table is for the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board equipped with the TN54PQ2
subboard. The TN54PQ2 subboard helps the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board to provide an extra capability of
conversion between 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2 and 4 x OTU2, and conversion between 4 x ODU2e and
4 x OTU2e. Without the TN54PQ2 subboard, the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board can process only 32 x ODU0,
16 x ODU1, or 4 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
NOTE
The TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board supports a maximum of 80 km DCM-free transmission while the TN54NPO2 board must
be equipped with the DCM.
5.8.10 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

Optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards multiplex/demultiplex optical signals over different
wavelengths.
Positions of Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Boards in a WDM System

Optical multiplexer boards multiplex multiple optical signals into one ITU-T G.694-compliant
optical signal. Optical demultiplexer boards demultiplex one multiplexed optical signal into
individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals.
Figure 5-67 shows the positions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards in a WDM system.

Figure 5-67 Positions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards in a WDM system

services services
OTU
OTU
OM
(C-ODD)
OTU
OTU
OTU
OM
(C-EVEN) OA
WDM-side ODF
OTU
ITL FIU/
OSC SFIU
OTU
OTU OD OA
(C-ODD)
OTU
OTU
OTU
OD
(C-EVEN)
OTU
Main Functions
Table 5-113 lists the main functions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards.
Table 5-113 Main functions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards
Board Function
TN11M40 Multiplexes a maximum of 40 C-band wavelength signals into one multi-wavelength signal.
TN12M40
TN11M40V Multiplexes a maximum of 40 C-band wavelength signals into one multi-wavelength signal
TN12M40V and adjusts the optical power for each wavelength.
TN11D40 Demultiplexes one C-band multi-wavelength signal into a maximum of 40 wavelength

TN12D40 signals.

Board Function
TN11D40V Demultiplexes one C-band multi-wavelength signal into a maximum of 40 wavelength

signals and adjusts the optical power for each wavelength.
TN11ITL Multiplexes and demultiplexes C-band optical signals with 100 GHz channel spacing and C-
TN12ITL band optical signals with 50 GHz channel spacing.
TN12FIU Multiplexes the main channel signal and the OSC signal onto a single communications
TN13FIU channel in one optical direction, and performs the reverse process.
TN14FIU
TN11SFIU Multiplexes the main channel signal and the OSC signal onto a single communications
channel in one optical direction, and performs the reverse process.
This board applies to IEEE 1588v2 scenarios.
5.8.11 Fixed Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Board

Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM) boards drop individual ITU-T G.694-compliant
optical signals from a multiplexed signal and send these optical signals to associated OTU
boards. In addition, FOADM boards also add and multiplex individual ITU-T G.694-compliant
optical signals into one multiplexed signal.
Positions of FOADM Boards in a WDM System

Figure 5-68 shows the positions of FOADM boards in a WDM system.
Figure 5-68 Positions of FOADM boards in a WDM system
SC2
F OA OA F
West I I East
U FOADM FOADM U
line-side line-side
ODF OA OA ODF
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
West client-side East client-side
West signal East signal Pass-through signal

Main Functions
The function differences between different FOADM boards lie in the WDM specifications and
number of add/drop signals. Table 5-114 lists the functions of FOADM boards. The DMR1 and
SBM2 boards support applications different from other FOADM boards. For details, see DMR1
and SBM2.
Table 5-114 Main functions of FOADM boards
Board WDM Specifications Function
TN11CMR2 CWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes two signals to/from

a multiplexed signal.
TN11CMR4 CWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes four signals to/from

TN11DMR1 CWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes one channel of 1310

nm wavelength in east direction and one in west
direction.
TN11MR2 DWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes two signals to/from

TN11MR4 DWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes four signals to/from

TN11MR8 DWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/

from a multiplexed signal.
TN11MR8V DWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/

from a multiplexed signal. Adjusts the
multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side
signal and the input optical power of cascade
ports for pass-through wavelengths.
TN11SBM2 CWDM Adds/Drops two wavelengths to/from one

multiplexed signal and multiplexes the other two
wavelengths into another multiplexed signal. The
optical signals that are added or dropped, and the
optical signals that are multiplexed must be
carried over different wavelengths. The SBM2
unit is applied to single-fiber bidirectional
system.
5.8.12 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Board

Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) boards add/drop any single or multi-
wavelength signals to/from a multiplexed signal, and route the signals to any port in any order,
achieving flexible wavelength grooming in multiple directions. These boards apply to DWDM
systems.

Positions of ROADM Boards in a WDM System

Figure 5-69 shows the position of RAODM boards in a WDM system by using the WSMD4
board as an example.
Figure 5-69 Positions of ROADM boards in a WDM system

Client services Client services Client services Client services
Tributary Tributary Tributary Tributary

Units Units Units Units
Line units Line units Line units Line units
OD OM OD OM OD OM OD OM
C-ODD C-ODD C-EVEN C-EVEN C-ODD C-ODD C-EVEN C-EVEN
ITL ITL
OA OA
OA OA
F OA OA
WSMD4 WSMD4 F
North I (north) (south) I South
U OA OA U
OA OA
F WSMD4 WSMD4 F
West I I East
(west) (east)
U OA OA U
OA OA
OA OA
ITL ITL
OM OD OM OD OM OD OM OD
C-EVEN C-EVEN C-ODD C-ODD C-EVEN C-EVEN C-ODD C-ODD
Line units Line units Line units Line units
Tributary Tributary Tributary Tributary

Units Units Units Units
Client services Client services Client services Client services
West signal North signal East signal South signal
Pass-through signal

Main Functions
Table 5-115 lists the main functions of ROADM boards.
Table 5-115 Main functions of ROADM boards

Board Function Number of
Wavelengths
TN11RDU9 Broadcasts service signals to nine directions. 80
TN11RMU9 Adds eight optical signals. Each add port on the board can connect to 80
a tunable wavelength OTU board to flexibly receive eight optical
signals.
TN11ROAM Flexibly adds/drops, passes, and blocks 40 services to achieve dynamic 40

grooming of wavelengths on a WDM ring.
TN12TD20 Broadcasts 20 coherent service signals in one multiplexed signal to 20 80

directions.
TN11TM20 Adds 20 coherent optical signals carried over different wavelengths and 80
multiplexes the signals into one multi-wavelength signal.
TN12WSD9 Demultiplexes wavelengths and routes any wavelength to any port. l TN12WSD9: 40
TN13WSD9 l TN13WSD9 and
TN16WSD9 TN16WSD9: 80
TN12WSM9 Multiplexes wavelengths and routes any wavelength to any port. l TN12WSM9: 40
TN13WSM9 l TN13WSM9 and
TN16WSM9 TN16WSM9: 80
TN11WSMD2 Broadcasts the main channel signal to two directions and adds any 40
wavelengths.
TN11WSMD4 Broadcasts the main channel signal to four directions and adds any l TN11WSMD4:
TN12WSMD4 wavelengths. 40
TN13WSMD4 l TN12WSMD4
and
TN13WSMD9:
80
TN11WSMD9 Broadcasts the main channel signal to nine directions and adds any TN11WSMD9 and
TN12WSMD9 wavelengths. TN12WSMD9: 80
TN15WSMD9: 80 or
TN15WSMD9 Flexible Grid
wavelength signals
5.8.13 Optical Amplifier Board

The optical amplifier board amplifies the power of the multiplexed optical signals to extend the
transmission distance.

Positions of Optical Amplifier Boards in a WDM System

Optical amplifier boards are used to compensate for power loss caused by long haul transmission
in fiber communication systems. They are classified into erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)
boards and Raman boards. Figure 5-70 shows the positions of optical amplifier boards at an
OTM site in a WDM system.
Figure 5-70 Positions of EDFA and Raman boards in a WDM system
OTU
EDFA
OM
OTU
FIU
SC1
OTU
Raman
EDFA
OD
OTU
The RAU board integrates the functions of both EDFA and Raman boards. Figure 5-71 shows
the positions of RAU boards in a WDM system.

Figure 5-71 Positions of RAU boards in a WDM system
OTU
EDFA
OM
OTU
FIU
SC1
OTU
Raman
EDFA
OD
OTU
RAU
In Figure 5-70 and Figure 5-71:

l EDFA: HBA/OAU1/OBU1/OBU2
l Raman: CRPC01, CRPC03, RAU1, or RAU2. The WDM system in Figure 5-70 is a
backward Raman system where the CRPC01 board is used.
l RAU: RAU1/RAU2
NOTE
Different from the DAS1 board shown in Figure 5-70, the DAS1 board is mainly used at ROADM sites in a
WDM system. For the typical application scenario of the DAS1 board, see Application.
Main Functions
Table 5-116 lists the main functions of optical amplifier boards. For the detailed specifications
of each board, see the relevant specification pages.
Table 5-116 Main functions of optical amplifier Boards
Board Function Gain
N4BPA One-input booster amplifier and one-input pre-amplifier See BPA Specifications.
board. It is used in an OCS system to increase the transmit
power of a line board to a value within the range of +13 dBm
to +15 dBm, extending the transmission distance to more than
120 km. (when the G.652 optical fiber with a loss of 0.275
dB/km is used.)
TN11CR Case-shape Raman pump amplifier board for C band. It See CRPC Specifications.
PC generates multi-channel pump light of high power and must
be used with EDFA boards.

Board Function Gain
TN11D Double optical amplifier board with supervisory channel. It See DAS1 Specifications.
AS1 amplifies optical signals using an EDFA optical module,
multiplexes and demultiplexes the optical supervisory
channel (OSC) signal and the main optical path signal, and
processes one OSC signal.
The board is equipped with VOAs to adjust the power of input
optical signals.
TN11HB High-power booster amplifier board. It amplifies optical See HBA Specifications.
A signals in the C band using an EDFA optical module. The
board provides a high gain and is generally configured at the
transmit end of a long-span system.
TN11O Optical amplifier board. It amplifies optical signals in the C See OAU1 Specifications.
AU1 band using an EDFA optical module. The board is equipped
TN12O with VOAs to adjust the power of input optical signals.
AU1 The OAU1 board provides two amplifiers for power
TN13O amplification and a DCM module can be installed in between
AU1 for dispersion compensation.
TN11OB Optical amplifier board. It amplifies optical signals in the C See OBU1 Specifications.
U1 band using an EDFA optical module. The board is equipped
TN12OB with VOAs to adjust the power of input optical signals.
U1
TN11OB Optical amplifier board. It amplifies optical signals in the C See OBU2 Specifications.
U2 band using an EDFA optical module. The board is equipped
TN12OB with VOAs to adjust the power of input optical signals.
U2
TN11RA Raman and EDFA hybrid optical amplifier board. It is used See RAU1 Specifications.
U1 at the receive end to generate multi-channel pump light of
high power.
TN11RA Raman and EDFA hybrid optical amplifier board. It is used See RAU2 Specifications.
U2 at the receive end to generate multi-channel pump light of
high power.
The board is equipped with VOAs to adjust the power of input
optical signals.
5.8.14 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit

A cross-connect board establishes physical channels for electrical signals on service boards
inside a subrack, and grooms electrical signals by working with the service boards. The system
control and communication board is the control center for the equipment. It helps the NM system
to manage the boards of the equipment and enables the equipment to communicate with each
other.

Positions of Cross-Connect Boards in a WDM System

Figure 5-72 shows the positions of cross-connect boards in a WDM system.
Figure 5-72 Positions of cross-connect boards in a WDM system

Cross-connect board
OTN
OTN/Universal
Clientside Tributary
line board
board
WDM
ODUk OTN/Universal side
line board
Packet
Packet/Universal
service
line board
board
Clientside WDM
Packet Packet
Packet/Universal side
service
line board
board
OCS
board OCS/Universal
line board
Clientside Line
VC-n
side
OCS/Universal
line board
Client service add/dropped from the

WDM/line-side
Pass-through WDM service
Pass-through client service
Mapping Between Cross-Connect Boards and Subrack Types

Subrack Type Cross-Connect Board Cross-Connect Capacity
General 8800 TNK4SXH, TNK2SXH, OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Cross-

T64 Subrack TNK4SXM, TNK2SXM, Connect Capacities
TNK4XCT, and TNK2XCT
Enhanced 8800 TNK2USXH, TNK2UXCT,

T64 Subrack TNK4SXH, TNK4SXM, and
TNK4XCT
General 8800 TN52UXCH, TN52UXCM, OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Cross-

T32 Subrack TN52XCH, and TN52XCM Connect Capacities
Enhanced 8800
T32 Subrack

Subrack Type Cross-Connect Board Cross-Connect Capacity
8800 T16 TN16XCHa, and TN16UXCMa OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Cross-
Subrack Connect Capacities
a: The TN16UXCM/TN16XCH has integrated with the functions of a cross-connect board,

system control board, and clock board.
Mapping Between System Control and Communication Board and Subrack Types
Product Board
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack TNK2SCC
General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack TNK2SCC
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack TN52SCC
General OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack TN51SCC and TN52SCC
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack TN16SCC
OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack TN52SCC
Mapping Between System Auxiliary Interface Board and Subrack Types

Product Board
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack TN51AUX/TN52AUX
General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack TN51AUX/TN52AUX
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack TN51AUX/TN52AUX
General OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack TN51AUX/TN52AUX
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack TN16AUX
5.8.15 Optical Supervisory Channel Board

OSC boards transmit optical supervisory information between two NEs. OSC boards provide
high reliability of network monitoring because OSC boards transmit an OSC signal using a
wavelength different service wavelengths.
Positions of OSC Boards in a WDM System

Figure 5-73 shows the positions of OSC boards in a WDM system.

Figure 5-73 Positions of OSC boards in a WDM system
OA S S S S
OA OA
F F F F
I I I I
U OSC board
OSC U U U OSC
SCC SCC
board / / / / board
F SCC
F F F
I I I I
OA U U OA U U OA
NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
NOTE
Among all the OSC boards, only the ST2 board can work with the SFIU board.
In the preceding figure, the SCC board on NE1 sends the local NMS monitored data to the OSC
board. Then the OSC board converts the NMS monitored data into an OSC signal and sends the
signal to the SFIU/FIU board. Lastly, the SFIU/FIU board multiplexes the signal with the main
channel signal onto the line for transmission. On NE2, the FIU/SFIU board extracts the OSC
signal from the line and sends it to the OSC board. Then the OSC board restores the monitoring
information from the OSC signal and sends the information to the SCC board for processing.
Main Functions
Board Dimen Span Center Wavelength Signal Bandwidth
sion Distance
TN11 1 53 dB TN11HSC1: 1510 nm TN11HSC1: 4.096 Mbit/s

HSC1 48 dB TN12HSC1: 1511 nm TN12HSC1: 155.52 Mbit/s
TN12
HSC1
TN12S 1 48 dB 1510 nm 4.096 Mbit/s

C1 16.896 Mbit/s
TN12S 2 48 dB 1510nm 4.096 Mbit/s

C2 16.896 Mbit/s
TN11S 2 40 dB 1491 nm 155.52 Mbit/s

T2a 1511 nm
a: The ST2 board also supports clock signals and FE electrical signals.
5.8.16 Optical Protection Board

Optical protection boards provide 1+1 protection for services using their dual-fed and selective
receiving function.

Positions of Optical Protection Boards in a WDM System

Different optical protection boards support different types of protection. Figure 5-74 shows the
position of DCP boards in a WDM system when it offers client 1+1 protection. For the positions
of the DCP, OLP, and SCS boards in other protection scenarios, see DCP, OLP, and SCS.
Figure 5-74 Position of DCP boards in a WDM system (client 1+1 protection)
MUX MUX
OTU FIU OTU
FIU
(W) (W)
DMUX DMUX
DCP DCP
MUX MUX
OTU OTU
FIU FIU
(P) (P)
DMUX DMUX
Working signal Protection signal
Main Functions
Table 5-117 lists the main functions of optical protection boards.
Table 5-117 Main functions of optical protection boards
Board Function Supported Protection Type
TN11DC l Protects two optical signals. l Intra-board 1+1 protection

P l For each protected signal, selects the better l Client 1+1 protection
TN12DC signal from the working and protection l Optical wavelength shared protection
P channels using its optical switch.
TN11OL l Protects one signal. l Optical line protection

P l Selects the better signal from the working and l Intra-board 1+1 protection
TN12OL protection channels using its optical switch. l Client 1+1 protection
P
TN11SC l Protects two signals. l Client 1+1 protection

S l For each protected signal, selects the better
signal from the working and protection
channels based on instructions sent by the
SCC board. The board receives and couples
the signals from both the working and
protection channels when it does not work
with an SCC board.

5.8.17 Spectrum Analyzer Board

Spectrum analyzer boards support centralized monitoring of optical signals without impacting
the signal performance.
Positions of Spectrum Analyzer Boards in a WDM System

Figure 5-75 illustrates the position of spectrum analyzer boards in a WDM system by using the
OPM8 board as an example.
Figure 5-75 Positions of spectrum analyzer boards in a WDM system
OTU OTU
OM OAU OAU OD
OTU OTU
OPM8
OPM8
OTU OTU
OD OAU OAU OM
OTU OTU
OPM8
Spectral
IN1 information can be
queried using the
MON U2000
OUT OAU IN
Main Functions
Board Number of Monitoring Capabilitya Remarks
Ports
Number of Optical Center OSNRb
Wavelength Power Wavelength
s
TN11MC 4 Y Y Y Y It is
A4 recommended
that these
TN11MC 8 Y Y Y Y boards be
A8 configured at
the receive
end.

Board Number of Monitoring Capabilitya Remarks

Ports
Number of Optical Center OSNRb
Wavelength Power Wavelength
s
TN11OP 8 Y Y N Yc
M8
TN12OP
M8
TN11WM 2 Y Y Y N This board

U must be
configured at
the transmit
end.
a: "Y" indicates that the board supports the function. "N" indicates that the board does not support the function.
b:
l Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR detection when the Port OSNR detection license
(OD V1) or Optical Doctor management system license is used and the OD functions are configured.
l When neither the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) nor the Optical Doctor management system
license is used, there are the following restrictions if 40 Gbit/s or higher rate wavelengths are deployed in the
system:
– OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz channel spacing spacing.
– OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100
GHz.
l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or lower, regardless of whether the
Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) /Optical Doctor management system license is used.
c: Only the TN12OPM8 can monitor OSNR.
5.8.18 Variable Optical Attenuator Board

Electrical variable optical attenuator (EVOA) boards are mainly configured at input ports on
optical amplifier (OA) boards, or wavelength-adding and pass-through ports on optical add/drop
multiplexer (OADM) boards to adjust optical power.
Application of EVOAs
EVOA boards adjust the optical power of optical signals as required by system control boards
in the following scenarios:
l EVOA boards are configured before the input ports of OA boards to adjust the input optical
power of OA boards to the OA nominal power or the target power specified in network
design. See Figure 5-76.

Figure 5-76 EVOA configured at the input port of an OA board
EVOA
OA
FIU
OA
l EVOA boards are configured at the wavelength-adding ports and pass-through ports of
OADM boards to adjust the optical power of added signals and pass-through signals so that
the optical spectrum is flat at an OADM site. See Figure 5-77.
Figure 5-77 EVOAs configured at the wavelength-adding ports and pass-through ports of
an OADM board
OTU OTU OTU OTU
EVOA EVOA EVOA EVOA

EVOA
OA OA
MRx MRx
EVOA
OA OA
Main Functions of EVOA Boards

The VA1 and VA4 boards provide the following functions:
l The VA1 board adjusts the optical power for one channel of optical signals and the VA4
board adjusts the optical power for four channels of optical signals.
l Supports power-off protection to avoid damage to the corresponding optical receiver caused
by too-high optical power when the power supply recovers.
l Supports the variable attenuation range of 1.5 dB to 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB.
l Supports optical-layer ASON.

5.8.19 Dispersion Equalizing Board

Dispersion compensation boards compensate for dispersion accumulated during fiber
transmission of optical signals and compress the pulses of the propagated optical signals. This
enables the propagated optical signals to be restored at the output end.
Main Functions
Table 5-118 lists the main functions of dispersion compensation boards.
Table 5-118 Main functions of dispersion compensation boards
Device Type Description Function Application
M D DCM Uses a dispersion Provides span-based l Works with optical

o C (DCF) compensation fiber dispersion amplifier boards at
d M (DCF) and provides compensation, the transmit and
ul fixed dispersion. enabling long-haul receive ends of a
e optical transmission. transmission line.
l Supports G.652,
G.653, and G.655
fiber applications.
DCM Uses fiber Bragg l Works with optical

(FBG) grating (FBG) and amplifier boards at
provides fixed the transmit and
compensation. receive ends of a
transmission line.
l Supports G.652
and G.655 fiber
applications.
B TN11DCU Uses a DCF and l Works with optical

o provides fixed amplifier boards at
ar dispersion. the transmit and
d receive ends of a
transmission line.
l Supports G.652
and G.655 fiber
applications.

Device Type Description Function Application
B TN11TDC Provides tunable Precisely l Works with an

o dispersion to precisely compensates for OTU board at the
ar compensate for residual dispersion receive end of a
d dispersion inside a inside an OTU transmission line.
channel. channel that cannot be The TDC board
compensated by DCM must precede the
modules. OTU board.
l Applies to
scenarios that
allow for relatively
small dispersion,
such as, 40 Gbit/s
communication
systems.
NOTE
For details on the DCM, see 5.7.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module.
5.8.20 Clock Board

The clock board is used to provide the system clock and time to ensure the synchronization of
the clocks and time on the NEs.
The clock unit is as follows:

l STG: system clock board
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports the board integrates the functions of the cross-connect board,
system control and communication board, and clock board. For details, see Cross-Connect Unit
and System and Communication Unit.

Table 5-119 Functions of the system control and communication unit
Board Function
TN12STG/TN52STG/TNK2STG l Provides the intra-NE system clock and system

frame. The service boards on the NE use the system
clock and frame header to synchronize the intra-NE
services.
l Selects the time recovered from the service signals
or the TOD port of the synchronous timing interface
board STI to synchronize the time of the entire
system.
l Synchronize the time and clocks between the NEs.
NOTE
TN12STG is used in OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform
subrack.
TN52STG is used in OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
TNK2STG is used in OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
5.8.21 TDM Board

The TDM boards include the following boards:
l EGSH, which is a 16 x GE switching board

l EAS2, which is a 2 x 10 GE switching board
l SF64A, which is a 1 x STM-64 optical interface board with the FEC module
l SF64, which is a 1 x STM-64 optical interface board with the FEC module
l SFD64, which is a 2 x STM-64 optical interface board with the FEC module
l SL64, which is a 1 x STM-64 optical interface board
l SLD64, which is a 2 x STM-64 optical interface board
l SLH41, which is a 16 x STM-1/STM-4 optical line interface board with variable rate
l SLO16, which is an 8 x STM-16 optical interface board
l SLQ16, which is a 4 x STM-16 optical interface board
l SLQ64, which is a 4 x STM-64 line interface board
The TDM boards have the following functions:
l N1EGSH: The N1EGSH transmits and receives 16 x GE optical signals, and provides
functions such as O/E conversion, Ethernet frame processing, mapping, Layer 2 (L2)
switching, and overhead and pointer processing of the service signals.
l N3EAS2: The N3EAS2 transmits and receives 2 x 10 GE optical signals, and provides
functions such as O/E conversion, Ethernet frame processing, mapping, Layer 2 (L2)
switching, and overhead and pointer processing of the service signals.
l N1SF64A: The N1SF64A transmits and receives 1 x STM-64 optical signals, and processes
overhead.

l N4SF64: The N4SF64 transmits and receives 1 x STM-64 optical signals, and processes
overhead.
l N4SFD64: The N4SFD64 transmits and receives 2 x STM-64 optical signals, and processes
overhead.
l N3SLH41: The SLH41 transmits and receives 16 x STM-1/STM-4 optical signals,
performs O/E conversion for STM-1/STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead
bytes, and reports alarms generated on the line.
l N4SL64: The N4SL64 transmits and receives 1 x STM-64 optical signals, processes
overhead and provides the MSP protection.
l N4SLD64: The N4SLD64 transmits and receives 2 x STM-64 optical signals, processes
l N4SLO16: The N4SLO16 transmits and receives 8 x STM-16 optical signals, processes
overhead, and provides the MSP protection.
l N4SLQ16: The N4SLQ16 transmits and receives 4 x STM-16 optical signals, processes
l N4SLQ64: The N4SLQ64 transmits and receives 4 x STM-64 optical signals, processes
overhead, and provides the MSP protection.
5.8.22 Interface Board

The interface boards provide functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack
communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.
The interface boards includes:

l ATE: Interface Board of Alarm & Timing & Expanding
l EFI: EMI Filter Interface Board
l EFI1: EMI Filter Interface Board
l EFI2: EMI Filter Interface Board
l STI: Synchronous Timing Interface Board
Table 5-120 lists the mappings between the interface board and equipment.
Table 5-120 Mappings Between the Interface Board and Equipment
Board 8800 T16 8800 T32 8800 T64 8800 For details
Subrack Subrack Subrack Universal refer to...
Platform
Subrack
TN16EFI Supported - - - 5.4.3

Manageme
nt
Interfaces
TN18EFI - - - Supported 5.5.3

Manageme
nt
Interfaces

Board 8800 T16 8800 T32 8800 T64 8800 For details
Subrack Subrack Subrack Universal refer to...
Platform
Subrack
TN51EFI1 - Supported Supported - 5.2.3

Manageme
TN51EFI2 - Supported Supported - nt
TN52STI - Supported Supported - Interfaces
TNL1STI
TN51ATE - Supported Supported -
5.9 Optical Attenuator

Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical
attenuators (VOAs).
5.9.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator

A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The
common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10
dB, and 15 dB.
Figure 5-78 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator.
Figure 5-78 Fixed optical attenuator
5.9.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator

A mechanical variable optical attenuator (MVOA) can adjust the optical power on an optical
path within a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of an MVOA is 2 dB to 30 dB.
Figure 5-79 shows the appearance of a common MVOA.

Figure 5-79 Appearance of an MVOA
NOTE
The attenuation increases when the VOA is adjusted clockwise while decreases when adjusted counterclockwise.
When adjusting the VOA counterclockwise, observe the optical power closely. When the attenuation stops
decreasing, stop the adjustment immediately to avoid damages to the VOA.
5.10 Pluggable Optical Modules

The eSFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP is a hot-swappable, protocol-independent optical transceiver used in
optical communications for both telecommunication and data communications applications.
Table 5-121 Types of pluggable optical modules
M Descrip Appearance Connector Type

od tion
ul
e
Ty
pe
eS Enhance LC
FP d Small
Form
Pluggabl
e
Module

M Descrip Appearance Connector Type

od tion
ul
e
Ty
pe
SF Enhance LC
P+ d 8.5 and
10
Gigabit
Small
Form
Factor
Pluggabl
e
Module
X 10 LC
FP Gigabit
Small
Form
Factor
Pluggabl
e
Module
CF 40/100 40GBASE-LR4-10km-CFP LC
P Gbit/s
form-
factor
Pluggabl
e
Module
100GBASE-LR4-10km-CFP, LC
100GBASE-10×10G-10km-CFP,
(100GBASE-4×25G)/(OTU4-4×28G)-10km-
CFP

Table 5-122 Functional block diagram of pluggable optical modules
Modul Functional Block Diagram

e Type
eSFP Client-side
optical interface
Electrical ROSA
interface for 125Mbit/s -5Gbit/s
connecting to the Driver Laser
board
SFP+ SFP+ without the retimer module

Client-side
optical interface
Electrical ROSA
interface for
5Gbit/s -11Gbit/s
connecting to the
Driver Laser
board
SFP+ with the retimer module

5Gbit/s to 11Gbit/s Client-side
<->5Gbit/s to 11Gbit/s optical interface
Electrical
interface for ROSA
connecting to the 2xRetimer 5Gbit/s to 11Gbit/s
board Driver Laser
XFP 8Gbit/s to11Gbit/s

<->8Gbit/s to11Gbit/s
Client-side
optical interface
Electrical ROSA
interface for 2xRetimer 8Gbit/s to11Gbit/s
connecting to the
Driver Laser
board
CFP 40GBASE-LR4-10km-CFP
Client-side
Electrical 4x10 Gbit/s<->4x10 Gbit/s
?1 10Gbit/s optical interface
interface for ROSA
connecting to the 4 4 4 DMUX
board ROSA ?4 10Gbit/s
1310nm
8xRetimer 4x10Gbit/s
?1 10Gbit/s
Driver Laser
4 4 4 MUX
?4 10Gbit/s
Driver Laser

Modul Functional Block Diagram

e Type
100GBASE-LR4-10km-CFP
Electrical Client-side
10x10Gbit/s<->4x25Gbit/s
interface for optical interface
?1 25Gbit/s
connecting to the ROSA
board 4 4 4 DMUX
ROSA ?4 25Gbit/s
1310nm
2xGearbox 4x25Gbit/s
?1 25Gbit/s
Driver Laser
4 4 4 MUX
?4 25Gbit/s
Driver Laser
100GBASE-10×10G-10km-CFP
Electrical 10x10 Gbit/s<->10x10 Gbit/s Client-side
?1 10Gbit/s
interface for ROSA optical interface
connecting to the 10 10 10 DMUX
board ROSA ?10 10Gbit/s
1550nm
20xRetimer 10x10Gbit/s
?1 10Gbit/s
Driver Laser
10 10 10 MUX
?10 10Gbit/s
Driver Laser
(100GBASE-4×25G)/(OTU4-4×28G)-10km-CFP
Electrical Client-side
10x10Gbit/s<->4x25 / 28Gbit/s
interface for ?1 25 or 28 Gbit/s optical interface
connecting to the ROSA
board 4 4 4 DMUX
ROSA ?4 25 or 28 Gbit/s
1310nm
2xGearbox 25 or 28 4x25
?1 Gbit/s or 4x28 Gbit/s
Driver Laser
4 4 4 MUX
25 or 28
?4 Gbit/s
Driver Laser
Components of the optical module:

l Gearbox module: performs conversion between 10 x 10 Gbit/s and 4 x 25 Gbit/s or 4 x 28 Gbit/s services.
l Retimer module: recovers the clock and data.
l ROSA: the optical receiver, corresponding to point R in the optical module specifications.
l Driver: the laser driver.
l Laser: the transmitter, corresponding to point S in the optical module specifications.
: electrical signals
: optical signals
5.11 Housekeeping Alarm Interfaces

OptiX OSN 8800 provides alarm input and output interfaces. The alarm input interfaces are
designed for remotely monitoring alarms of external systems, such as an environmental
monitoring system. The alarm output interfaces are designed to output alarms to a centralized
management system for management.

OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32

The TN51ATE provides 8 alarm inputs and remote monitoring of alarm signals of the external
systems, such as the environmental monitoring system. Users can configure the names and
severity of the 8 alarm inputs so that the equipment can work with external systems to remotely
monitor the external alarms. The alarm signals are forwarded to the EFI1 after the ATE
processing is complete.
The TN51ATE board provides eight alarm output interfaces, sending alarms to a centralized
alarm management system.
Figure 5-80 Interfaces in the TN51ATE

ATE
Alarm Input
Interfaces
ALMI2
ALMI1
Alarm Output
Interfaces
ALMO1
ALMO3
Pin No.
ALMO4
ALMO2
Table 5-123 Alarm Input/Output Interfaces
Interf PIN Definit Functio Interfa PIN Definitio Function

ace No. ion n ce No. n
ALMI 1 SWITC Alarm ALMO 1 CRIT_SW Outputs the

1 HI_IN1 input 1 1/ ITCH_OU critical alarm
ALMO TP signal positive
2
2 GND Ground 2 CRIT_SW Outputs the
ITCH_OU critical alarm
TN signal negative
3 SWITC Alarm 3 MAJ_SWI Outputs the major

HI_IN2 input 2 TCH_OUT alarm signal
P positive
4 SWITC Alarm 4 MIN_SWI Outputs the minor

HI_IN3 input 3 TCH_OUT alarm signal
P positive
5 GND Ground 5 MIN_SWI Outputs the minor

TCH_OUT alarm signal
N negative
6 GND Ground 6 MAJ_SWI Outputs the major

TCH_OUT alarm signal
N negative

Interf PIN Definit Functio Interfa PIN Definitio Function

ace No. ion n ce No. n
7 SWITC Alarm 7 ALM_SWI alarm signal

HI_IN4 input 4 TCH_OUT output 1 positive
1P
8 GND Ground 8 ALM_SWI alarm signal

TCH_OUT output 1 negative
1N
ALMI 1 SWITC Alarm ALMO 1 ALM_SWI alarm signal

2 HI_IN5 input 5 3/ TCH_OUT output 2 positive
ALMO 2P
4
2N

3P

4P

4N

3N

5P

5N
There are four alarm output interfaces: ALMO1, ALMO2, ALMO3, and ALMO4. Any of
them can be used for alarm output or subrack cascading. Currently, only the ALMO1 and
ALMO2 interfaces are available; the ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces are reserved for future
use.
OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Alarm Input/Output Interfaces
The TN16ATE provides 8 alarm inputs and remote monitoring of alarm signals of the external
systems, such as the environmental monitoring system. Users can configure the names and

severity of the 8 alarm inputs so that the equipment can work with external systems to remotely
monitor the external alarms. The alarm signals are forwarded to the EFI after the ATE processing
is complete.
The TN16ATE board provides eight alarm output interfaces, sending alarms to a centralized
alarm management system.
Figure 5-81 Interfaces in the TN16ATE
Interf PIN Definit Function Interfa PIN Definitio Function

ace No. ion ce No. n

2
TN signal negative

HI_IN2 input 2 TCH_OU alarm signal
TP positive

TP positive

TCH_OU alarm signal
TN negative

TCH_OU alarm signal
TN negative


7 SWITC Alarm 7 ALM_SW alarm signal

HI_IN4 input 4 ITCH_OU output 1 positive
T1P
8 GND Ground 8 ALM_SW alarm signal

ITCH_OU output 1 negative
T1N
ALMI 1 SWITC Alarm ALMO 1 ALM_SW alarm signal

2 HI_IN5 input 5 3/ ITCH_OU output 2 positive
ALMO T2P
4
T2N

T3P

T4P

T4N

T3N

T5P

T5N
use.
OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack

Alarm Input/Output Interfaces
The TN18EFI provides four alarm inputs and remote monitoring of alarm signals of the external
systems, such as the environmental monitoring system.

The TN18EFI board provides four alarm output interfaces, sending alarms to a centralized alarm
management system.
Figure 5-82 Interfaces in the TN18EFI
Alarm Input Alarm Output

Interfaces Interfaces
SubRACK_ID NM_ETH1 ALMI1 ALMO1 ALMO2


2
TN signal negative

TP positive

TP positive

TCH_OU alarm signal
TN negative

TCH_OU alarm signal
TN negative



T1P

T1N
use.

Product Description 6 Node Configurations
6 Node Configurations
About This Chapter
6.1 Configuration Principles for Optical Attenuators

This topic describes configuration principles of fixed optical attenuators (FOAs) and electrical
variable optical attenuators (EVOA) (including VA1 and VA4 boards and built-in EVOAs for
OA boards).
6.2 OTN Typical Configuration

This section uses an 80-wavelength system as an example to describe the typical configurations
of an optical transmission network (OTN). Compared with an 80-wavelength system, a 40-
wavelength system does not use ITL boards. A 40-wavelength system is configured in a similar
way as an 80-wavelength system.
6.3 OCS Typical Configuration

6.1 Configuration Principles for Optical Attenuators

This topic describes configuration principles of fixed optical attenuators (FOAs) and electrical
variable optical attenuators (EVOA) (including VA1 and VA4 boards and built-in EVOAs for
OA boards).
6.1.1 Planning Fixed Optical Attenuators

Fixed optical attenuators (FOAs) are LC/PC inline optical attenuators. FOAs are usually inserted
into the receive optical interfaces of OTU, tributary-line, or OSC boards, to adjust the input
optical power. This topic describes the configuration principles for FOAs.
6.1.1.1 FOA Configuration Principles for the Client Side of OTU and Tributary
Boards
Fixed optical attenuators (FOAs) are inserted into the RX optical interfaces on the client side of
OTU and tributary boards, to adjust the input optical power on the client side.
Table 6-1 describes the FOA configuration principles for the client side of OTU and tributary
boards.
Table 6-1 FOA configuration principles for the client side of OTU and tributary boards
Receive Optical Module Type Recommended FOA
Multi-mode -
Single-mode PIN 40G Transponder 3 dB
CFP 2 dB
Others 7 dB
Single-mode APD 15 dB
NOTE
The preceding configuration principles assume that the client equipment uses the same optical modules as
the OTU board and the OptiX OSN 8800 is connected to the client equipment over a short distance. If the
preceding assumption is not true, change or remove FOAs according to the receive optical power
requirements.
6.1.1.2 FOA Configuration Principles for the WDM Side of OTU and Line Boards
For OTU and line boards, fixed optical attenuators (FOAs) are inserted into the IN optical
interfaces on the WDM side of the boards, to adjust the input optical power on the WDM side.
FOA configuration principles for the WDM side of OTU and line boards depend on the following
factors:

l Type of optical demultiplexing units or optical add/drop multiplexing units

l Type of optical amplifier boards on the receive end
l Type of receive optical interfaces on the WDM side of OTU boards
NOTE
l FOA configuration principles for regeneration boards are the same as those for the WDM side of OTU
boards.
l An FOA must be connected to the receive end on the WDM side of an OTU board and cannot be placed
in the main optical path.
FOA Configuration Principles for OTM Sites

Table 6-2 and Table 6-3 describe the FOA configuration principles for the WDM side of the
OTU and line boards on an OTM site that uses D40 boards.
Table 6-2 FOA configuration principles for an OTM site that uses D40 boards (40-wavelength)
Type of OA Boards on Type of Receive Optical Recommended FOA

the Receive End Interfaces on the WDM Side of
OTU or Line Boards
OAU101, OAU103, PIN 10 dB

OAU106, OBU103,
RAU106, RAU201, APD 15 dB
DAS1
OBU101, OBU104 PIN 5 dB
APD 10 dB
Table 6-3 FOA configuration principles for an OTM site that uses D40 boards (80-wavelength)
Type of OA Boards on Type of Receive Optical Recommended FOA

the Receive End Interfaces on the WDM Side of
OTU or Line Boards
OAU101, OAU103, PIN 5 dB

OAU106, OBU103,
RAU106, RAU201, APD 10 dB
DAS1
OBU101, OBU104 PIN -
APD 7dB
FOA Configuration Principles for Back-to-Back OTM Sites

FOA configuration principles for the OTU and line boards on a back-to-back OTM site are as
follows:

l In the receive direction on the WDM side, the same FOA configuration principles as those
for OTM sites equipped with D40 boards are used, as listed in Table 6-2 and Table 6-3.
l In the transmit direction on the WDM side of a 40-wavelength system, no FOAs are required
between the OTU board and the M40/M40V board.
l In the transmit direction on the WDM side of a 80-wavelength system, if the M40V board
is used on the WDM side of the OTU board, no FOAs are required; if the M40 board is
used, add an FOA to the receive optical interface of the M40 board. Table 6-4 describes
the configuration principles.
Table 6-4 FOA configuration principles for a back-to-back OTM site that uses M40 boards (80-
wavelength)
Type of Transmit Optical Modules on the Recommended FOA

WDM Side of OTU or Line Boards
l 10G fixed optical module 5 dB

l RZ module
l 40G optical module
l 100G optical module
l 10G XFP 7 dB
l NRZ wavelength tunable optical module
FOA Configuration Principles for FOADM Sites

OTU and line boards on an FOADM site.
Table 6-5 FOA configuration principles for an FOADM site (40-wavelength)
Type of OADM Type of OA Boards Type of Receive Recommended

Board on the Receive End Optical FOA
Interfaces on
the WDM Side
of OTU or Line
Boards
MR2 cascading OAU101, OAU103, PIN 10 dB

MR4 cascading OAU106, OBU103,
RAU106, RAU201, APD 15 dB + 5 dB
MR8 cascading
DAS1
APD 15 dB

Table 6-6 FOA configuration principles for an FOADM site (80-wavelength)
Type of OADM Type of OA Type of Receive Recommended

Board Boards on the Optical Interfaces FOA
Receive End on the WDM Side
of OTU or Line
Boards
MR2 cascading OAU101, OAU103, PIN 7 dB

MR4 cascading OAU106, OBU103,
RAU106, RAU201, APD 15 dB + 5 dB
MR8 cascading
DAS1
APD 10 dB
NOTE
15 dB + 5 dB: Add a 15 dB FOA to the receive optical interface on the OTU or line board and determine
whether to add a 5 dB FOA to the transmit optical interface on the FOADM board based on the actual
optical power.
FOA Configuration Principles for ROADM Sites

OTU and line boards on an ROADM site.
Table 6-7 FOA configuration principles for an ROADM site (40-wavelength)
Site Type Tributary OA OA Type Recommended FOA

Required
WSM9+WSD9 - - -
RMU9+WSD9 - - -
WSM9+RDU9 Not required - PIN: -

WSMD9 APD: 10 dB
WSMD4
Required OAU101, OAU103, PIN: 10 dB
WSMD2 OAU106, OBU103, APD: 15 dB
RAU106, RAU201,
DAS1
Required OBU101, OBU104 PIN: 7 dB

APD: 15 dB

Table 6-8 FOA configuration principles for an ROADM site (80-wavelength)
Site Type Tributary OA OA Type Recommended FOA

Required
WSM9+WSD9 - - -
RMU9+WSD9 - - -
WSM9+RDU9 Not required - PIN: -

WSMD9 APD: 5 dB
WSMD4
Required OAU101, OAU103, PIN: 5 dB
WSMD2 OAU106, OBU103, APD: 10 dB
RAU106, RAU201,
DAS1
Required OBU101, OBU104 PIN: -

APD: 10 dB
FOA Configuration Principles for Sites Without OAs on the Receive End of the
Line Side
Table 6-9 describes the FOA configuration principles for the WDM side of the OTU and line
boards on a site that is not equipped with OAs on the receive end of the line side.
Table 6-9 FOA configuration principles for a site without OAs on the receive end of the line
side
Type of Receive Optical Interfaces on the Recommended FOA

WDM Side of OTU or Line Boards
PIN -
APD 10 dB
6.1.1.3 FOA Configuration Principles for OSC Boards

Fixed optical attenuators (FOAs) are connected to the RM interfaces on the OSC boards to adjust
the receive optical power.
A 15 dB FOA is required if the SC2, SC1, ST2, and HSC1 boards need to connect to each other
directly.
6.1.1.4 FOA Configuration Principles for CWDM Systems

For a CWDM system, fixed optical attenuators (FOAs) are inserted into the IN optical interfaces
on the OTU or line boards to adjust the input optical power on the client side.
FOA Configuration Principles for the WDM Side of OTU and Line Boards

l If the WDM-side receive optical interfaces use PIN optical modules, no FOAs are required.
l If the WDM-side receive optical interfaces use APD optical modules,
– Add a 10 dB FOA to the IN optical interface on the OTU board when the line loss is
smaller than or equal to 15 dB.
– If the total line loss is greater than 15 dB, no FOAs are required.
6.1.2 Planning Variable Optical Attenuators

Variable optical attenuators (VOAs) are used to adjust the input optical power and optical power
flatness of optical amplifier (OA) boards. Electrical variable optical attenuators (EVOAs) are
mainly used and can be remotely adjusted using the network management system (NMS). This
topic describes configuration principles of VA boards (VA1 and VA4) and built-in EVOAs for
OA boards.
The following boards can use built-in EVOAs to adjust the optical power of a single wavelength
or the multiplexed wavelength:
l Optical multiplexing boards: M40V
l ROADM boards: WSMD2, WSMD4, WSMD9, WSD9, WSM9, RMU9, ROAM
l FOADM boards: MR8V
l OA boards: TN12OAU1, TN13OAU1, TN12OBU1, TN12OBU2, TN11DAS1
Connections to the built-in EVOAs of OA boards (except DAS1) must be configured manually.
Configuration Principles of Built-in EVOAs for OA Boards

Configuration principles of built-in EVOAs for OA boards are as follows:
l Standard incident optical power system: Configure a built-in EVOA before the IN interface
on an OA board to adjust the input optical power of the OA board. Signals reach the VI
interface on the built-in EVOA and traverse the V0 interface to the IN interface on the OA
board.
l Non-standard incident optical power system:
– Receive OA board: Configuration principles of built-in EVOAs for receive OA boards
are the same as those for standard incident optical power systems.
– Transmit OA board: Configure a built-in EVOA behind the OUT interface on the OA
board and a variable optical attenuator board (VA board, such as VA1, VA4) is required
before the IN interface on the OA board.
l For a pure coherent 40G/100G system, configure a built-in EVOA behind the OUT interface
on the OA board for both the standard incident optical power and non-standard incident
optical power scenarios.
l If no EVOA is connected to the IN interface on the OA board and the input optical power
is within the permitted optical power range of the OA board, there is no need to add any
built-in EVOAs.

Figure 6-1 Configuration principles of built-in EVOAs for line-side OA boards
OA OA
TC IN OUT IN IN OUT IN IN
F TC IN
Line side
Line side
F
I I
U U
OA OA
RC OUT IN OUT OUT RC OUT IN OUT OUT
Standard incident Non-standard incident

optical power system optical power system
Built-in EVOA of an OA board VA board
OA OA
Receive OA board Transmit OA board
For details about standard incident optical power systems and non-standard incident optical
power systems, see Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission
System.
6.1.2.1 EVOA Configuration Principles for OTM Sites

On an OTM site, a built-in EVOA can be added to an OA board or an additional VA board can
be added to adjust the input optical power of the OA board and the downstream OA board.
EVOA configuration principles for 40-wavelength OTM sites are the same as those for 80-
wavelength OTM sites.
EVOA configuration principles for OTM sites are as follows:
l Wavelength adding direction: No EVOAs are required for the output optical interface on
the WDM side of OTU boards.
l Wavelength dropping direction: No EVOAs are required for the input optical interface on
the WDM side of OTU boards. Configure fixed optical attenuators instead.
Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3 show the configuration of EVOAs for OTM sites that use M40V and
D40 boards.

Figure 6-2 EVOA configuration for an OTM site (standard incident optical power system)
OTU
OUT IN
OTU D
OA
4
TC IN
0
OTU
F
I
OTU U
OTU M IN OUT
4 OA
0 OUT
RC
V
OTU
Fixed optical attenuator

Built-in EVOA of an OA board
Figure 6-3 EVOA configuration for an OTM site (non-standard incident optical power system)
OTU
OUT IN
OTU D
OA
4
TC IN
0
OTU
F
I
OTU U
OTU M IN OUT
4 OA
0 OUT
RC
V
OTU

6.1.2.2 EVOA Configuration Principles for FOADM Sites

On an FOADM site, a built-in EVOA can be added to an OA board or an additional VA board
can be added to adjust the optical power of the OA board and the optical power flatness of the
added wavelengths.

EVOA configuration principles for 40-wavelength FOADM sites are as follows:
l Wavelength adding direction: Configure an EVOA for the output optical interface on the
WDM side of each OTU board.
l Pass-through direction: Configure an EVOA for each single wavelength in the west and
east pass-through directions.
l Wavelength dropping direction: No EVOAs are required. Configure fixed optical
attenuators instead.
For an 80-wavelength FOADM site, configure an EVOA for each direction between the RO
interface and TO interface on the ITL board. Configure other EVOAs by adhering to the same
configuration principles for 40-wavelength FOADM sites.
Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5 show the configuration of EVOAs for FOADM sites that use MRx
boards.
Figure 6-4 EVOA configuration for an FOADM site (standard incident optical power system,
40-wavelength)
MO
OA OA
OUT
IN TC IN OUT IN MI OUT IN OUT RC
F F
MRx MRx I
I
U MI
U
OA OA
OUT MO IN OUT IN
OUT RC OUT IN TC
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

Figure 6-5 EVOA configuration for an FOADM site (non-standard incident optical power
system, 40-wavelength)
MO
OA OA
OUT
IN TC IN OUT IN MI OUT IN OUT RC
F F
MRx MRx I
I
U MI
U
OA OA
OUT MO IN OUT IN
OUT RC OUT IN TC
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
Figure 6-6 EVOA configuration for an FOADM site (standard incident optical power system,
80-wavelength)
OA RO TO OA
IN TC IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT RC OUT
I TO RO I F
F MO
T T I
I
L TE IN MRx MI MRx OUT RE L U
U MI
OA OA
OUT RC OUT RE OUT MO IN TE IN TC IN
IN OUT OUT IN
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U


Figure 6-7 EVOA configuration for an FOADM site (non-standard incident optical power
system, 80-wavelength)
OA RO TO OA
IN TC IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT RC OUT
I TO RO I F
F MO
T T I
I
L TE IN MRx MI MRx OUT RE L U
U MI
OA OA
OUT RC OUT RE OUT MO IN TE IN OUT TC IN
IN OUT IN
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

6.1.2.3 EVOA Configuration Principles for ROADM Sites

On an ROADM site, a built-in EVOA can be added to an OA board or an additional VA board
can be added to adjust the input optical power of the OA board and the input optical power of
the downstream OA board.
The following types of ROADM sites are available:
l An ROADM site consisting of WSD9 and WSM9 boards

l An ROADM site consisting of WSD9 and RMU9 boards
l An ROADM site consisting of ROAM boards
l An ROADM site consisting of RDU9 and WSM9 boards
l An ROADM site consisting of WSMD9, WSMD4, and WSMD2 boards
EVOA configuration principles for the preceding ROADM site types are similar. This topic
describes EVOA configuration principles for an ROADM site consisting of WSMD4 and an
ROADM site consisting of RDU9 and WSM9 boards as examples.
EVOA Configuration Principles for ROADM Sites (Colored & Directioned)

EVOA configuration principles for a 40-wavelength ROADM site consisting of WSMDx boards
are the same as those for an 80-wavelength ROADM site consisting of WSMDx boards.
EVOA configuration principles for an ROADM site (colored & directioned) consisting of
WSMDx boards are as follows:
l Wavelength adding direction: No EVOAs are required on the WDM side of the OTU board.
l Wavelength dropping direction: No EVOAs are required on the WDM side of the OTU
board. Configure FOAs instead.
l Pass-through direction: No EVOAs are required between the WSMD4 boards.
Figure 6-8 and Figure 6-9 show the EVOA configuration for an ROADM site consisting of the
WSMD4, D40, and M40 boards.

Figure 6-8 EVOA configuration for an ROADM site consisting of WSMD4 boards (colored &
directioned, standard incident optical power system)
DM2
OA OA
IN OUT IN AM2 OUT IN OUT
F F
WSMD4 WSMD4
I I
U AM2 IN U
OA DM2 OA
OUT IN OUT DM1 AM1 AM1 DM1
OUT IN
OA OA
D40 M40 M40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

Figure 6-9 EVOA configuration for an ROADM site consisting of WSMD4 boards (colored &
directioned, non-standard incident optical power system)
DM2
OA OA
IN OUT IN AM2 OUT IN OUT
F F
WSMD4 WSMD4
I I
U AM2 IN U
OA DM2 OA
OUT IN OUT DM1 AM1 AM1 DM1
OUT IN
OA OA
D40 M40 M40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U


EVOA Configuration Principles for ROADM Sites (Colored & Directionless)

EVOA configuration principles for an ROADM site (colored & directionless) consisting of
RDU9 and WSM9 boards are as follows:
l Wavelength adding direction: No EVOAs are required on the WDM side of the OTU board.
l Wavelength dropping direction: No EVOAs are required on the WDM side of the OTU
board. Configure FOAs instead.
l Pass-through direction: No EVOAs are required between the RDU9 and WSM9 boards.
Figure 6-10 EVOA configuration for an ROADM site consisting of RDU9 and WSM9 boards
(colored & directionless, standard incident optical power system)
OTU
M40V OA RDU9 WSM9 OA

IN OUT IN DM AM OUT IN OUT F
OTU
I
U
OTU
OA WSM9 RDU9 OA
D40 AM DM IN OUT
OTU OUT IN OUT IN

Figure 6-11 EVOA configuration for an ROADM site consisting of RDU9 and WSM9 boards
(colored & directionless, non-standard incident optical power system)
OTU
M40V OA RDU9 WSM9 OA

IN OUT IN DM AM OUT IN OUT F
OTU
I
U
OTU
OA WSM9 RDU9 OA
D40 AM DM IN OUT
OTU OUT IN OUT IN

6.1.2.4 EVOA Configuration Principles for OLA Sites

On an OLA site, a built-in EVOA can be added to an OA board or an additional VA board can
be added to adjust the input optical power of the OA board and the input optical power of the
downstream OA board.

EVOA configuration principles for OLA sites are as follows:
l Add a built-in EVOA to each OA board that connects to the west and east FIU boards.
l If the input optical power is within the permitted optical power range of the OA board
before an EVOA is added, there is not need to connect to the built-in EVOA on the OA
board during deployment.
l Figure 6-13 shows the EVOA configuration for an OLA site that uses two OA boards in
each direction.
Figure 6-12 EVOA configuration for an OLA site using only one OA board in each direction
OA
F TC IN OUT RC F
G.652 I I G.652
U U
OA
RC OUT IN TC
Standard incident
optical power system
OA
F TC IN OUT RC F
I I
G.653 G.653
U U
OA
RC OUT IN TC
Non-standard incident
optical power system 1
OA
F TC IN OUT RC F
I
TWC I TWC
U U
OA
RC OUT IN TC

Figure 6-13 EVOA configuration for an OLA site using two OA boards in each direction
OBU1 DCM OBU1

F TC IN OUT IN OUT RC F
G.652 I I G.652
U U
OBU1 DCM OBU1
RC OUT IN OUT IN TC
Standard incident
optical power system
OBU1 DCM OBU1

G.653 I I G.653
U U
OBU1 DCM OBU1
RC OUT IN OUT IN TC
OBU1 DCM OBU1

TWC I I TWC
U U
OBU1 DCM OBU1
RC OUT IN OUT IN TC
6.2 OTN Typical Configuration

This section uses an 80-wavelength system as an example to describe the typical configurations
of an optical transmission network (OTN). Compared with an 80-wavelength system, a 40-
wavelength system does not use ITL boards. A 40-wavelength system is configured in a similar
way as an 80-wavelength system.

6.2.1 OTM/Back to Back OTM

A back-to-back optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) site consists of two OTMs arranged back
to back.
6.2.1.1 Signal Flow

The OTM node is used at the terminal station. The back-to-back OTM node is usually used at
central sites.
In the receive direction:

l The optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals are separated from the
line signals received from west. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical
supervisory unit for processing, and the main-path optical signals are sent to the
demultiplexer after amplification.
l Certain wavelengths are dropped and enter the OTU before being sent to the local client
equipment. The other wavelengths are not demultiplexed locally. They pass through and
are multiplexed with the locally added wavelengths before the optical amplification.
l Finally, the signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line
transmission.
The signal flow of the transmit direction is the reverse of this process.
Figure 6-14 shows the signal flow of an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node.
Figure 6-14 Signal flow of an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node

6.2.1.2 Subrack Layout

This section describes the typical configurations for the optical layer of a back-to-back OTM
node.
Configuration Principle
Optical multiplexer unit and demultiplexer unit:
l For an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node, ITL boards must be configured if the
M40V/M40/D40 boards are used for adding/dropping wavelengths.
Optical amplifier unit:

l Optical amplifier boards must be configured according to the power budget for actual
situations.
Spectrum analyzer unit:

l When WMU and MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OTM node, configure
WMU boards prior to MCA/MC8/OPM8 boards.
l When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OTM node, the MCA4 boards
are most preferred.
l It is preferred to connect an MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board to the MON port on an optical
amplifier board or the MON port on an FIU board.
Optical supervisory channel unit:

l For an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node, two SC1 or one SC2 can be configured.
Typical Configuration
This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 as an example to illustrate the typical configurations
for the optical layer of a back-to-back OTM node.
As shown in Figure 6-15, two subracks are required.

Figure 6-15 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a back-to-back OTM node
6.2.1.3 Subrack Connections

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an 80-wavelength back-to-
back OTM node.
Figure 6-16 uses a westbound 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node as an example to

illustrate how fibers are connected.

Figure 6-16 Subrack fiber connections for an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node
Shelf1-IU20 Shelf1-IU21 Shelf1-IU23 Shelf1-IU25 Shelf1-IU26 Shelf1-IU35

FIU SC2 OAU101 OAU103 ITL MCA4
OUT MON MON MON IN1
IN IN2
TC TM1 OUT OUT OUT IN3

RC IN IN IN IN4
RM1
TM VO VO TO
TM2
RM VI VI RO
RM2
TE
RE
Shelf1-IU1 Shelf1-IU4 Shelf1-IU14 Shelf1-IU17

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40
Receive Transmit Optical Optical

direction direction supervisory monitoring
signal signal signal signal
6.2.2 1 Degree ROADM

This section uses the WSMD4 board as an example to illustrate how to configure a 1-degree 80-
wavelength ROADM node.

6.2.2.1 Signal Flow

A 1-degree ROADM node provides only one optical direction and can be upgraded to multi-
degree ROADM nodes without interrupting services to provide multiple optical directions.
The 1-degree ROADM node consists of one WSMD4.
supervisory unit for processing, and the main-path optical signals are sent to the WSMD4
board after being amplified.
l The main-path optical signal from the west WSMD4 board is sent to the ITL board and is
then split into two multiplexed wavelength signals (odd wavelength and even wavelength)
in the C-band with frequency spacing of 100 GHz. Then the two optical signals are locally
dropped through two demultiplexer boards.
Figure 6-17 shows the signal flow of 1-degree ROADM.
Figure 6-17 Signal flow of a 1-degree ROADM in an 80-wavelength system


This section describes the typical configurations for the optical layer of a 1-degree 80-
wavelength ROADM node that uses one WSMD4 board.
Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit:
l One WSMD2 board, or WSMD4 board, or one combination of WSD9+WSM9 board, or
one combination of RDU9+WSM9 board, or one WSMD9 board must be used.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to a 2-, 3-, or 4-degree node, the WSMD4 boards are
recommended.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to more than four degrees, the combinations of RDU9
+WSM9 boards or combinations of WSD9+WSM9 boards or the WSMD9 boards are
recommended.

l For an 80-wavelength ROADM node, ITL boards must be configured if the M40V/M40/
D40 boards are used for adding/dropping wavelengths.

situations.
l When WSDM4/WSMD9 boards are used, it is recommended that optical amplifier boards
be configured in wavelength-dropping directions.
l If optical amplifier boards need to be used in wavelength-adding directions, low-power
optical amplifiers are recommended.

l When WMU and MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an ROADM node,
configure WMU boards prior to MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards.
l When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an ROADM node, the MCA4
boards are most preferred.

l The optical supervisory unit is required in each direction of an ROADM node. For a 1-
degree ROADM node, one SC1 board can be configured.
for the optical layer of a 1-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node that uses one WSMD4 board.
As shown in Figure 6-18, one subrack is required.

Figure 6-18 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a 1-degree 80-wavelength ROADM
node
E A S S
EFI2 FI PIU PIU U T T PIU PIU STI ATE
1 X G G
37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48
O O O O
W
A A B B M
F S S S I
U U U U C
I C M C T
1 1 1 1 A
U 1 D C L
0 0 0 0 4
4
1 3 1 4
1
2021222324 2526 27 9 2829 3031323334 3536
0
M M D D
S
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of a 1-degree 80-wavelength
ROADM node.
Figure 6-19 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of a 1-degree 80-

Figure 6-19 Subrack fiber connections for a 1-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node
Shelf1-IU20 Shelf1-IU21 Shelf1-IU23 Shelf1-IU25 Shelf1-IU26 Shelf1-IU29 Shelf1-IU30 Shelf1-IU31 Shelf1-IU35

FIU SC1 OAU101 OAU103 WSMD4 OBU101 OBU104 ITL MCA4
OUT MON MON MONO MON MON MON IN1
IN MONI IN2
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
TC TM IN3
IN IN IN IN IN IN
RC RM IN4
DM1
TM VO VO VO VO TO
AM1
RM VI VI DM2 VI VI RO
AM2 TE
DM3 RE
AM3
DM4
AM4

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40


6.2.3.1 Signal Flow

A 2-degree ROADM node provides two optical directions and can be upgraded to multi-degree
ROADM nodes without interrupting services to provide multiple optical directions.

The 2-degree ROADM node consists of two WSMD4 boards (west, east) with the same signal
grooming. The signal grooming of the west WSMD4 board is used as an example.

l The optical supervisory signals and the main-path optical signals are separated from the
supervisory unit for processing, and the main-path optical signals are sent to the WSMD4
board after being amplified.
l The west WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into two equal optical signals.
– One optical signal is sent to the ITL board and split into two multiplexed wavelength
signals (odd wavelength and even wavelength) with frequency spacing of 100 GHz.
Then the two optical signals are locally dropped through two demultiplexer boards.
– The other optical signal passes through the east WSMD4 board.
Figure 6-20 shows the signal flow of a 2-degree ROADM.
Figure 6-20 Signal flow of a 2-degree ROADM in an 80-Wavelength system


This section describes the principles for configuring a 2-degree 80-channel ROADM node and
the typical configurations of the equipment.
l Two WSMD2 board, or two WSMD4 board, or two combinations of WSD9+WSM9
boards, or two combinations of RDU9+WSM9 boards, or two WSMD9 boards must be
used.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to a 3- or 4-degree node, the WSMD4 boards are
recommended.
recommended.


situations.
l When WSDM4/WSMD9 boards are used, it is recommended that you configure optical
amplifier boards in wavelength-dropping directions.


degree ROADM node, two SC1 or one SC2 boards can be configured.
for the optical layer of a 2-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node that uses two WSMD4 boards.

Figure 6-21 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a 2-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node
West East
E A S S E A S S
EFI2 FI PIU PIU U T T PIU PIU STI ATE EFI2 FI PIU PIU U T T PIU PIU STI ATE
1 X G G 1 X G G
37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48 37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48
O O O O O O O O
W W
A A B B M A A B B
F S S S I F S S S I
U U U U C U U U U
I C M C T I C M C T
1 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 1
U 2 D C L U 1 D C L
0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0
4 4
1 3 1 4 1 3 1 4
1 1
2021222324 2526 27 9 2829 3031323334 3536 2021222324 2526 27 9 2829 3031323334 3536
0 0
M M D D M M D D
S S
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
C C
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C C
E O E O E O E O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

ROADM node.
Figure 6-22 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of a westbound 2-degree
80-wavelength ROADM subrack.


IN MONI IN2
TC TM1 IN3
IN IN IN IN IN IN
RC RM1 IN4
DM1
TM VO VO VO VO TO
TM2 AM1
RM VI VI DM2 VI VI RO
RM2
AM2 TE
DM3 RE
AM3
DM4
AM4

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40


6.2.4.1 Signal Flow

A 3-degree ROADM node provides three optical direction and can be upgraded to multi-degree
ROADM nodes without interrupting services to provide multiple optical directions.

The 3-degree ROADM node consists of three WSMD4 boards (west, east, south) with the same
signal grooming. The signal grooming of the west WSMD4 board is used as an example.

supervisory unit for processing, and the main path optical signals are sent to the west
WSMD4 board after being amplified.
l The west WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into three equal optical signals.
signals (one odd and one even wavelength) with frequency spacing of 100 GHz. Then
the two optical signals are locally dropped through two demultiplexer boards.
– The other two optical signals each pass through the east and south WSMD4 boards each.
Figure 6-23 shows the signal flow of 3-degree ROADM.



This section describes the principles for configuring a 3-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node
and the typical configurations of the equipment.
l Three WSMD4 boards, or three combinations of WSD9+WSM9 boards, or three
combinations of RDU9+WSM9 boards, or three WSMD9 boards must be used.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to four degrees, the WSMD4 boards are recommended.
recommended.


situations.
l When WSDM4/WSMD9 boards are used, it is recommended that you configure optical
amplifier boards in wavelength-dropping directions.

l When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an ROADM node, the MCA8/
OPM8 boards are most preferred.

degree ROADM node, three SC1 or one SC2 plus one SC1 board can be configured.
for the optical layer of a 3-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node that uses three WSMD4 boards.
As shown in Figure 6-24, three subracks are required.

West East/South
E A S S E A S S
1 X G G 1 X G G
37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48 37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48
O O O O O O O O
W W
A A B B M A A B B
F S S S I F S S S I
U U U U C U U U U
I C M C T I C M C T
1 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 1
U 2 D C L U 1 D C L
0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0
4 4
1 3 1 4 1 3 1 4
1 1
2021222324 2526 27 9 2829 3031323334 3536 2021222324 2526 27 9 2829 3031323334 3536
0 0
M M D D M M D D
S S
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
C C
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C C
E O E O E O E O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

ROADM node.
Figure 6-25 uses a westbound 3-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node as an example to illustrate
how fibers are connected.


IN MONI IN2
TC TM1 IN3
IN IN IN IN IN IN
RC RM1 IN4
DM1
TM VO VO VO VO TO IN5
TM2 AM1
RM VI VI DM2 VI VI RO IN6
RM2
AM2 TE IN7
DM3 RE IN8
AM3
DM4
AM4

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40


6.2.5.1 Signal Flow

A 4-degree ROADM node provides four optical directions and can be upgraded to a multi-degree
ROADM node without interrupting services to provide four optical directions.
The 4-degree ROADM node consists of four WSMD4 boards (north, south, east, west) with the
same signal grooming. The signal grooming of the west WSMD4 board is used as an example.


supervisory unit for processing, and the main path optical signals are sent to the west
WSMD4 board after being amplified.
l The west WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into four equal optical signals.
signals (one odd and one even wavelength) with frequency spacing of 100 GHz. Then
the two optical signals are locally dropped through two demultiplexer boards.
– The other three optical signals pass through the east, south, and north WSMD4 boards
each.
Figure 6-26 shows the signal flow of a 4-degree ROADM.



This section describes the typical configurations for the optical layer of a 4-degree 80-
wavelength ROADM node that uses four WSMD4 boards.
l Four WSMD4 board, or four combinations of WSD9+WSM9 boards, or four combinations
of RDU9+WSM9 boards, or four WSMD9 board must be used.
recommended.


situations.
l When WSDM4/WSMD9 boards are used, it is recommended that optical amplifier boards
be configured in wavelength-dropping directions.


degree ROADM node, four SC1 or two SC2 can be configured.
for the optical layer of a 4-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node that uses four WSMD4 boards.
As shown in Figure 6-27, four subracks are required.

West East/South/North
E A S S E A S S
1 X G G 1 X G G
37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48 37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48
O O O O O O O O
W W
A A B B M A A B B
F S S S I F S S S I
U U U U C U U U U
I C M C T I C M C T
1 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 1
U 2 D C L U 1
2 D C L
0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0
4 4
1 3 1 4 1 3 1 4
1 1
2021222324 2526 27 9 2829 3031323334 3536 2021222324 2526 27 9 2829 3031323334 3536
0 0
M M D D M M D D
S S
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
C C
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C C
E O E O E O E O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

ROADM node.
Figure 6-28 uses a westbound 4-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node as an example to illustrate
how fibers are connected.


IN MONI IN2
TC TM1 IN3
IN IN IN IN IN IN
RC RM1 IN4
DM1
TM VO VO VO VO TO IN5
TM2 AM1
RM VI VI DM2 VI VI RO IN6
RM2
AM2 TE IN7
DM3 RE IN8
AM3
DM4
AM4

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40

6.2.6 OLA
6.2.6.1 Signal Flow

The DWDM OLA equipment is used for amplification of optical signals from two transmission
directions
The FIU board separates the optical supervisory signal from the main path optical signals and
sends the former to the OSC unit for processing. The main path optical signals are amplified by
the amplifier unit and multiplexed with the OSC that has already been processed, and then sent
to the line fiber for transmission.

Figure 6-29 shows the signal flow of a DWDM OLA node.
Figure 6-29 Signal flow of a DWDM OLA node
OA
West East
F F
I SC2 I
U U
OA

This section describes the typical configurations for the optical layer of an OLA node.
situations.

l When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OLA node, the MCA4 boards
are most preferred.

l For an OLA node, two SC1 or one SC2 or one ST2 or two HSC1 can be configured.
This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack as an example to illustrate
the typical configurations for the optical layer of an OLA node.

Figure 6-30 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an OLA node
17
P
O O I
A A M
S S F S F U
U U C
C C I C I
1 1 A
C C U 2 U
0 0 4
1 3 P
I
U
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an OLA node.
Figure 6-31 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of an OLA node.
Figure 6-31 Subrack fiber connections for an OLA node

FIU SC2 OAU101 OAU103 MCA4 FIU
OUT MON MON IN1 OUT
IN IN2 IN
TC TM1 OUT OUT IN3 TC

RC RM1 IN IN IN4 RC
TM VO VO TM
TM2
RM VI VI RM
RM2


6.2.7 Regenerator
6.2.7.1 Signal Flow

We have already discussed that the OLA can extend the optical transmission distance without
regeneration. However, when the distance is longer, such factors as dispersion, optical noise,
non-linear effect, or PMD will affect the transmission performance. In this case, we need to
regenerate the original signals. An REG implements the 3R function: reshaping, re-timing and
regenerating. This is to improve the signal quality and to extend the transmission distance.
The signal flow of the REG is similar to that of back-to-back OTMs, except that no signal is
added or dropped. Signals are regenerated through the OTU or line unit.

l It separates the optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals from the
received line signals. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the OSC unit for processing.
l The main path signals are sent to the demultiplexer after being amplified. The
demultiplexed signals enter the OTU or line unit and are reshaped, re-timed, and
regenerated. Then the wavelengths are multiplexed by the multiplexer before the optical
amplification. Finally, the signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory
signals for line transmission.
Figure 6-32 shows the signal flow of 80-wavelength REG node. OTU, TOM, and line boards
can be used as regeneration units. OTU boards are classified into two types: OTU with the
regeneration function (LSXLR and LSXR) and OTU without the regeneration function (for
example, LOM and TMX). Two OTU boards that do not have the regeneration function can be
cascaded to provide the regeneration function. Similarly, line boards are also classified into two
types: line board with the regeneration function and line board without the regeneration function.
Two line boards that do not have the regeneration function can be cascaded to provide the
regeneration function.

Figure 6-32 Signal flow of an 80-wavelength REG node

l 01
OD OM
C-EVEN C-EVEN
ln
OA l 01 OA
West OM OD East
C-EVEN C-EVEN
ln
F I I F
I T l 01 T I
U L L U
OD OM
C-ODD C-ODD
ln
OA OA
l 01
OM OD
C-ODD C-ODD
ln
Pass-through signal Regeneration unit

This section describes the principles for configuring an 80-wavelength REG node and the typical
configurations of the equipment.
l For an 80-wavelength REG node, ITL boards must be configured if the M40V/M40/D40
boards are used for adding/dropping wavelengths.

situations.

l When WMU and MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OTM node, configure
WMU boards prior to MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards.
l When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an REG node, the MCA4 boards
are most preferred.

l For an 80-wavelength REG node, two SC1 boards or one SC2 board can be configured.

This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 as an example to illustrate the typical configuration.
Figure 6-33 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an 80-wavelength REG node
West East
E A S S E A S S
1 X G G 1 X G G
37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48 37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48
O O O O
A A M A A
F S I S F S I S
U U C U U
I C T C I C T C
1 1 A 1 1
U 2 L C U 1 L C
0 0 4 0 0
1 3 1 3
1 1
2021222324 2526 27 9 2829 3031323334 3536 2021222324 2526 27 9 2829 3031323334 3536
0 0
M M D D M M D D
S S
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
C C
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C C
E O E O E O E O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an 80-wavelength REG node.
Figure 6-34 uses a westbound 80-wavelength REG node as an example to illustrate how fibers
are connected.

Figure 6-34 Subrack fiber connections for an 80-wavelength REG node

FIU SC2 OAU101 OAU103 ITL MCA4
OUT MON MON MON IN1
IN IN2
TC TM1 OUT OUT OUT IN3

RC IN IN IN IN4
RM1
TM VO VO TO
TM2
RM VI VI RO
RM2
TE
RE

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40

6.2.8 FOADM

6.2.8.1 Signal Flow

The DWDM FOADM node is responsible for processing the optical signals in two transmission
directions.
An FOADM node consists of two MR4s.

l The FIU board separates the optical supervisory signal from the main path optical signals
and sends the former to the SC2 board for processing.
l Main path signals are sent to the MR4 after amplification. Certain wavelengths are dropped
to the local station.
l The other wavelengths pass through and are multiplexed with the locally added
wavelengths before the optical amplification.
l Finally, the signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line
transmission.
Figure 6-35 shows the signal flow of an FOADM node.
Figure 6-35 Signal flow of an FOADM node

This section describes the principles for configuring a FOADM node and the typical
configurations for the optical layer of a FOADM node.
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit:

l If a DMR1 board is used, and the transmission distance is short, the FIU board cannot be
used.

l If a DMR1 board is used, optical amplifier units cannot be used on the line.
l If DMR1 board is not used, the optical amplifier boards must be configured according to
the power budget for actual situations.
This section uses the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 as an example to illustrate the typical configuration.
Figure 6-36 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an FOADM node
West East
E A S S E A S S
1 X G G 1 X G G
37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48 37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48
O O O O
A A A A
F S M S F S M
U U U U
I C R C I C R
1 1 1 1
U 2 4 C U 1 4
0 0 0 0
1 3 1 3
1 1
2021222324 2526 27 9 2829 3031323334 3536 2021222324 2526 27 9 2829 3031323334 3536
0 0
O O O O
M A MA D D M A MA D D
F S M S F M S
4 U 4U 4 4 4 U 4U 4 4
I C R C I R C
0 1 01 0 0 0 1 01 0 0
U 2 4 C U 4 C
E 0 O0 E O E 0 O0 E O
1 3 1 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of a FOADM node.
Figure 6-37 uses a westbound FOADM node as an example to illustrate how fibers are
connected.

Figure 6-37 Subrack fiber connections for a FOADM node
Shelf1-IU1 Shelf1-IU2 Shelf1-IU4 Shelf1-IU6 Shelf1-IU6

FIU SC2 OAU101 OAU103 MR4
OUT MON MON OUT
IN IN
TC OUT OUT MO
TM1
IN MI
RC RM1 MR4 IN
D1
TM OUT VO VO
TM2 A1
IN VI VI
RM RM2 D2
MO
A2
MI
D3
D1
A3
A1
D4
D2
A4
A2
D3
A3
D4
Receive Transmit Optical
A4
direction direction supervisory
signal signal signal
6.2.9 CWDM
6.2.9.1 Signal Flow

An 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node is used to process the optical signals in two
transmission directions.
It receives line signals and sends the signals to the CMR4 board, where some wavelengths are
dropped to the OTUs and then to the client side equipment. Other wavelengths pass through the
CMR4 board and are multiplexed with the wavelengths added locally. Then, the multiplexed
wavelengths are sent to the line for transmission.
Figure 6-38 shows the signal flow of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node.

Figure 6-38 Signal flow of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node

This section describes the typical configurations of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node.
of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node.

Figure 6-39 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM
node
E A S S
EFI2 FI PIU PIU U T T PIU PIU STI ATE
1 X G G
37 38 39 40 41424344 45 46 47 48
F S
I C
U C
1
2021222324 2526 27 9 2829 3031323334 3536
0
CM C M
S
M 4M C
C
R 0R A
C
4 E4 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an 8-wavelength CWDM
FOADM node.
Figure 6-40 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of an 8-wavelength
CWDM FOADM node.

Figure 6-40 Subrack fiber connections for an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node
Shelf1-IU1 Shelf1-IU2
CMR4 CMR4
OUT OUT
IN IN
MO MO
MI MI
D1 D1
A1 A1
D2 D2
A2 A2
D3 D3
A3 A3
D4 D4
A4 A4
Receive Transmit
direction direction
signal signal
6.3 OCS Typical Configuration
ADM
The architecture of the add-drop multiplexer (ADM) is similar to the combination of two back-
to-back TMs, as shown in Figure 6-41.
Figure 6-41 Functional block diagram of an ADM used in the OptiX OSN 8800
STM-16/64 STM-16/64
low-rate SDH
signals

MADM
The multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM) is a core unit required for building a complex
network. Figure 6-42 shows the functional block diagram of an MADM. The OptiX OSN 8800
can be configured as an MADM combined with ADMs at a rate ranging from STM-1 to STM-64.
Figure 6-42 Functional block diagram of the OptiX OSN 8800 configured as an MADM
...
STM-16/64
low-rate SDH
signals

Product Description 7 Network Management
7 Network Management
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the network management system, as well as inter-NE and intra-NE
communication management.
Figure 7-1 shows a sample network management structure with Huawei equipment deployed.
Figure 7-1 Network management structure
Primary Secondary
U2000 U2000
External DCN
Site D Site E
Site A Site C
Master
Site F
U2000
Slave Slave Site B Web LCT
GNE NON-GNE Switch Router
Subrack Fiber Network cable
Network management involves the following aspects:

l Network management system: U2000 and U2000 Web LCT

l Inter-NE communication:
– The NEs between sites A and F are interconnected with fibers and exchange information
over ESC/OSC channels using the HWECC, IP over DCC or OSI over DCC protocol.
– Some NEs between sites A and F (for example, NEs at site B) are interconnected with
network cables (generally where optical and electrical NEs are separate), and exchange
information over Ethernet channels (at NM_ETH ports on the related boards) using the
HWECC, IP over DCC or OSI over DCC protocol.
– The NEs at sites A and C are used as gateway NEs (GNEs) and are connected to the
external DCN through a switch or router, communicating with the network management
system (NMS). All the other NEs are used as non-GNE, communicating with the NMS
through the GNEs.
l Intra-NE communication: For each NE at sites A-F, the master and slave subracks
implement intra-NE communication. In the figure above, one NE at site A has three
subracks (one master connected to two slaves).
7.1 Network Management System

The iManager series transmission network management system (NMS) uniformly manages the
OptiX series products.
7.2 Inter-NE Communication Management Based on DCN

This section describes the implementation scheme and network application of inter-NE
communication management based on DCN.
7.3 Intra-NE Communication Management based on Master-Slave Subrack

This section describes the planning principles and capabilities, and cascading scheme of intra-
NE communication management based on master-slave subrack.
7.4 Management Connections and Interfaces

This section describes the management connections and interfaces for each product.
7.5 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs

The time synchronization function maintains consistency between the NE time and the U2000/
Web LCT server time and enables the U2000/Web LCT to record the correct time at which
alarms and abnormal events occur.
7.6 Interfaces Between the NMS and OSS

The U2000 provides multiple types of northbound interfaces (NBIs) for connecting to different
types of operations support systems (OSSs).

7.1 Network Management System

The iManager series transmission network management system (NMS) uniformly manages the
OptiX series products.
Functionality of the Network Management Software

The NMS maintains all NEs in a network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, it
integrates a standard management information model as well as an object-oriented management
technology.
The NMS runs on a workstation or PC and manages OptiX equipment using a GUI interface.
The GUI interface complies with a Huawei proprietary management protocol exclusively for
OptiX equipment.
Users can use the NMS to operate, maintain, and manage transmission equipment. The NMS
has the following management functions:
l Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, displays, acknowledges, checks, clears, and
counts alarms in real time; and provides alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis, and
fault diagnosis.
l Performance management: monitors performance; displays, analyzes, and prints
performance data; forecasts medium- and long-term performance; and resets the
performance register.
l Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services, trails,
subnets, and time.
l Security management: provides NMS user management, NE user management, NE login
management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout, and local craft terminal (LCT) access
control.
l Maintenance management: provides functions such as loopback, board resetting, automatic
laser shutdown (ALS), and optical fiber power detection; and collects equipment data to
assist maintenance personnel during troubleshooting.
Network Management Software

The NMS has two different network management software products: iManager U2000 (U2000)
and iManager U2000 Web LCT (Web LCT).
l U2000
The U2000 is Huawei's future-proof network management product and solution.
The U2000 is an integrated management platform that centrally manages transport
equipment, access equipment, and IP equipment (including routers, security equipment,
and Metro Ethernet equipment). It also provides powerful management functions at the NE
and network layers.
In the TMN, the U2000 is located on the element management layer and network
management layer. It supports all functions of the NE and network layers.
The U2000 is generally installed at a network management center (NMC) for remote
equipment management.

l Web LCT
The Web LCT uniformly manages Huawei OptiX series, such as WDM equipment. In
addition to providing individual NE configuration and maintenance, the Web LCT provides
the ability to manage alarms, configuration, performance, and security.
The Web LCT is generally installed on a PC for onsite equipment management.
7.2 Inter-NE Communication Management Based on DCN

This section describes the implementation scheme and network application of inter-NE
communication management based on DCN.
7.2.1 DCN Implementation Scheme

A data communication network (DCN) provides channels for transmitting OAM information
between the U2000 and NEs and between NEs to achieve centralized management of these NEs
on the U2000.
DCN Composition
A data communication network (DCN) consists of network management systems (NMSs),
gateway NEs (GNEs), non-GNEs, and the connections between them. Both The NMSs and NEs
are nodes of the DCN. The DCN between the NMSs and GNEs is called the external DCN, and
the DCN between the NEs is called the internal DCN.
l External DCN
In general, an external DCN is a local area network (LAN) or a wide area network (WAN)
and uses the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol for
communication. It mainly provides communication between NMSs and between the NMS
server and GNEs.
l Internal DCN
An internal DCN provides communication between NEs using the HWECC, TCP/IP or
OSI protocol. The protocol packets are transmitted over optical supervisory channels
(OSCs) or electric supervisory channels (ESCs), Ethernet channels or inband channels.
DCN Communication Protocols

DCN communication can be implemented using the HWECC, IP over DCC or OSI over DCC
protocol.
l HWECC
HWECC is a Huawei proprietary protocol stack. It is the most applicable and advanced
ECC communication solution for Huawei transmission devices. The HWECC protocol
stack distinguishes NEs by ID and creates routes automatically. Because of this feature,
the HWECC protocol is easy to use. However, the HWECC protocol cannot interwork with
a network-level protocol on third-party devices. In general, it is used when only Huawei
devices are used on a network.
l IP over DCC
Huawei's IP over DCC uses DCC or GCC channels to transmit TCP/IP protocol packets.
Like the HWECC protocol, IP over DCC is used to implement communication between

NEs. The difference between them is that IP over DCC transmits IP protocol packets using
DCC or GCC bytes but the HWECC protocol transmits Huawei-developed protocol packets
using DCC or GCC bytes. Because IP over DCC uses the standard TCP/IP protocol, it can
interwork with a network-level protocol on third-party devices, facilitating network
management.
l OSI over DCC
Huawei's OSI over DCC uses DCC or GCC channels to transmit OSI protocol packets
between Huawei transmission devices and third-party devices that support OSI over DCC.
Compared with HWECC and IP over DCC, OSI over DCC is more complex and difficult
to configure.
DCN Communication Channels

NG WDM equipment uses two types of physical channels for communication: Outband DCN
and Inband DCN.
l Outband DCN
The outband DCN refers to a DCN networking mode whose data communication channel
does not use service bandwidth. It can be implemented using OSC, ESC, or Ethernet.
– OSC
The OSC board provides private optical supervisory channels for the WDM equipment
to transmit supervisory information of the NEs, for example: D1~D3, D4~D12, OSC_18
and FE_DCN in OSC boards.
– ESC
The ESC transfers NE supervisory information using the overhead bytes (DCCs/GCCs)
in the fixed frame structure of the service. In this case, the communication between NEs
can be achieved directly through the interconnection of the OTU units, tributary units
or line units.
– Ethernet
The NE provides the Ethernet physical channel through the Ethernet NM (NM_ETH
port) port.
l Inband DCN
The inband DCN refers to a DCN networking mode that uses partial service bandwidth as
a data communication channel. In this mode, management information is encapsulated into
Ethernet frames and transmitted with services over service channels. A unified and fixed
VLAN ID is used to distinguish management data from service data.
7.2.2 DCN Network Application

The DCN supports various networking modes. NEs can be connected through optical interfaces
or Ethernet ports for inter-NE communication. In certain situations, inter-NE communication
supports transparent transmission of OAM information from third-party equipment.
The DCN has the following typical applications.
Networking with Only Huawei Equipment

Figure 7-2 shows the typical networking with only Huawei equipment.

Figure 7-2 Networking with only Huawei equipment
Primary Secondary
NMS NMS
External DCN
H I
B E
A C G F
D
A-1
A-2 A-3 Huawei
Switch Router
equipment
Fiber Network cable
Networking in Which Third-Party Equipment Transparently Transmits OAM

Information from Huawei Equipment
Figure 7-3 shows a network in which third-party equipment transparently transmits OAM
information from Huawei equipment. During transmission, the third-party equipment does not
parse the OAM information or terminate GCC bytes for ODUk signals.
Figure 7-3 Networking with third-party equipment
External Network with

DCN third-party
Huawei equipment only
Huawei
Huawei NMS equipment equipment
In this scenario, the third-party equipment must transparently transmit OAM information from
Huawei equipment. During information transmission, the third-party equipment must not parse
the OAM information. In addition, the third-party equipment must not terminate GCC bytes for
ODUk signals.

7.3 Intra-NE Communication Management based on

Master-Slave Subrack
This section describes the planning principles and capabilities, and cascading scheme of intra-
NE communication management based on master-slave subrack.
7.3.1 Master-Slave Subrack Planning Principles and Capabilities

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports master-slave subrack management. When multiple subracks are
required on one NE, the master-slave subrack mode should be used for unified management of
these subracks. In this manner, the IP resources can be saved. In addition, when optical-layer
ASON and optical-layer services are configured on the NE, the optical subracks on the NE should
be taken out to form a new NE for management. This facilitates the maintenance and reduces
the management cost.
In master-slave subrack mode, the multiple subracks are displayed as one NE on the U2000.
Planning Principles
For the OptiX OSN 8800 subrack:
l It is recommended to configure the master subrack with 1+1 protection for the UXCM/
XCH/SCC boards.
l The software version of the UXCM/XCH/SCC board in the master subrack must be the
same as that of the UXCM/XCH/SCC board in each slave subrack.
l In OptiX OSN 8800 T16, because the AUX board on a slave subrack provides the system
control and communication function, you do not need to configure the UXCM/XCH board
for an optical slave subrack, and you can configure service boards on IU9 and IU10.
l The HUB mode (one subrack functions as an NE) cannot be upgraded to the master-slave
mode without service interruption.
l The slave subrack cannot be upgraded to the master subrack without service interruption.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack:

l It is recommended to configure the master subrack with 1+1 protection for the SCC boards.
l When the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack is used as a slave subrack, the SCC
board cannot be configured.
l The HUB mode (one subrack functions as an NE) cannot be upgraded to the master-slave
mode without service interruption.
l The slave subrack cannot be upgraded to the master subrack without service interruption.
Total Number of Subracks Supported on an NE

The total number of the master and slave subracks supported on an NE varies with the subrack
types and the SCC boards installed in the subracks. If the number of subracks on an NE is beyond
the management capability of this NE, the NE can be divided into two NEs to enable subrack
management.

Table 7-1 Total number of subracks (without the ASON function)

Master SCC Type Total Number Total Number Total
Subrack (with Only (with Only Number
Type Optical Electrical (with Both
Subracks) Subracks) Optical and
Electrical
Subracks)
OptiX OSN TN16UXCM 32 (Number of 8 20 (Number of

8800 T16 regeneration electrical
TN16XCH subracks ≤ 20) subracks ≤ 4)
TN16SCC
OptiX OSN TN51SCC 8 4 8 (Number of

8800 T32 electrical
subracks ≤ 4)
TN52SCC 32 (Number of 8 20 (Number of

regeneration electrical
subracks ≤ 20) subracks ≤ 4)
OptiX OSN TNK2SCC 32 (Number of 8 20 (Number of

8800 T64 regeneration electrical
subracks ≤ 20) subracks ≤ 4)
OptiX OSN TN52SCC 32 (Number of 8 20 (Number of

8800 regeneration electrical
universal subracks ≤ 20) subracks ≤ 4)
platform
subrack
Table 7-2 Total number of subracks (with the ASON function)

Master SCC Total Total Total Number Total Number
Subrack Type Number Number (with Both (with Both
Type (with Only (with Optical and Optical and
Optical Only Electrical Electrical
Subracks) Electrical Subracks, Subracks,
Subracks optical optical
) subracks with subracks
the ASON without the
function and ASON
electrical function and
subracks electrical
without the subracks with
ASON the ASON
function) function)
OptiX TN16UXC 32 (Number 4 20 (Number of 8 (Number of

OSN 8800 M of electrical electrical
T16 subracks ≤ 4) subracks ≤ 4)

Master SCC Total Total Total Number Total Number

Subrack Type Number Number (with Both (with Both
Type (with Only (with Optical and Optical and
Optical Only Electrical Electrical
Subracks) Electrical Subracks, Subracks,
Subracks optical optical
) subracks with subracks
the ASON without the
function and ASON
electrical function and
subracks electrical
without the subracks with
ASON the ASON
function) function)
TN16XCH regeneration
subracks ≤
TN16SCC 20)
OptiX TN52SCC 32 (Number 4 20 (Number of 8 (Number of

OSN 8800 of electrical electrical
T32 regeneration subracks ≤ 4) subracks ≤ 4)
subracks ≤
20)
OptiX TNK2SCC 32 (Number 4 20 (Number of 8 (Number of

T64 regeneration subracks ≤ 4) subracks ≤ 4)
subracks ≤
20)
OptiX TN52SCC 32 (Number 4 20 (Number of 8 (Number of

universal regeneration subracks ≤ 4) subracks ≤ 4)
platform subracks ≤
subrack 20)
NOTE
l The word "subrack" in this table means an equivalent subrack. An equivalent subrack takes the OptiX OSN
6800 subrack as the unit. One OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is an equivalent subrack. Therefore, one OptiX
OSN 8800 T16 subrack is taken as one equivalent subrack. One OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is taken as
two equivalent subracks. One OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack is taken as four equivalent subracks. One OptiX
OSN 8800 universal platform subrack is taken as one equivalent subrack.
l An electrical subrack houses the cross-connect boards, OTU boards, tributary boards, line boards, or
protection boards.
l An optical subrack houses the OADM boards, multiplexer boards, demultiplexer boards, optical amplifier
boards, OSC boards, optical spectrum analyzing boards, regeneration boards, or OLP boards (used in optical
line protection).
l A regeneration subrack is a subrack where the boards inserted are all regeneration boards or both regeneration
boards and optical-layer boards.

Subrack Support for Boards

There are restrictions on subracks for holding boards that support packet/SDH services. The
following table lists the subrack support for boards.
Board Standalone Subrack Master or Slave Subrack
Packet service boards, Y N

universal line boards, and
TDM boards
TN56NS3 board Y Y (in the case of OTN services)

N (in the case of SDH services)
Other boards Y Y
7.3.2 Master-slave Cascading Scheme

Two cascading modes are available in master-slave subrack mode. In the first mode, subracks
are cascaded in tree-like structure, and in the other mode subracks are cascaded in ring-like
structure. By default, subracks are cascaded in tree-like structure. When subracks are cascaded
in tree-like structure, the master and slave subracks are not under protection so that the subracks
can be managed in the same way.
Figure 7-4 shows the tree-like subrack cascading scheme. Figure 7-5 shows the ring-like
subrack cascading scheme.
Figure 7-4 Tree-like subrack cascading scheme
Master Subrack 0 Master Subrack 0

NM_ETH1
从子架ETH22NM_ETH2
ETH1
NM_ETH1
ETH2
ETH1
从子架ETH22NM_ETH2
ETH2 ETH1 ETH2

Slave Slave Slave
从子架
Subrack 1 2
ETH1
从子架 2
ETH2 Subrack 4 ETH1 Subrack 2
从子架 1
ETH2 ETH1 ETH2

Slave Slave Slave
从子架
Subrack 2 2 从子架 2 从子架Subrack 2
ETH1 ETH2 Subrack 5 ETH1 2
ETH2 ETH1 ETH2

Slave Slave Slave
从子架
Subrack 3 2
ETH1
从子架 2
ETH2 Subrack 6 ETH1 Subrack 2
从子架 3
ETH1
Slave
Subrack27
从子架
ETH2
NE1 NE2

Figure 7-5 Ring-like subrack cascading scheme

Master
NM_ETH1 Subrack 0 NM_ETH2
2
ETH1 ETH2
Slave ETH1 ETH2 Slave

从子架
Subrack 1 2 Subrack 32
从子架3
ETH2 ETH1
Normal State
ETH1 ETH2
Slave
从子架 2
Subrack 2
Protection switching Failure recovery
Master
Subrack 0 NM_ETH2
NM_ETH1 从子架 2
ETH1 ETH2
Slave ETH1 ETH2 Slave

Subrack从子架
1 2 Subrack 3 2
从子架3
ETH2 ETH1
ETH1 ETH2 Protection State

Slave
从子架 2
Subrack 2
7.4 Management Connections and Interfaces

This section describes the management connections and interfaces for each product.
7.4.1 Introduction to Network Cables

Network cables are classified into crossover cables and straight-through cables. The intra-NE
connections (excluding the connections between subracks and CRPC/ROP boards) and inter-
NE connections (including the connections between the NEs and NMS) can be established using
either straight-through or crossover cables. However, the connections between subracks and
CRPC/ROP boards must be established using crossover cables.

Wiring
Figure 7-6 shows the wiring of straight-through and crossover cables. The Line sequence is
different.
Figure 7-6 Wiring of network cables
Pin8 Pin8
Pin1 Pin1
X1 X2
Straight-through cable
Pin8 Pin8
Pin1 Pin1
X1 X2
Crossover cable
Pinout
Table 7-3 lists the straight-through cable pinout.
Table 7-3 Straight-through cable pinout
Connector X1 Connector X2 Wire Color Relationship
X1.pin1 X2.pin1 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.pin2 X2.pin2 Orange
X1.pin3 X2.pin3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.pin6 X2.pin6 Green
X1.pin4 X2.pin4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.pin5 X2.pin5 White/Blue
X1.pin7 X2.pin7 White/Brown Twisted pair

X1.pin8 X2.pin8 Brown
Table 7-4 lists the crossover cable pinout.
Table 7-4 Crossover cable pinout
X1.pin1 X2.pin3 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.pin2 X2.pin6 Orange
X1.pin3 X2.pin1 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.pin6 X2.pin2 Green
X1.pin4 X2.pin7 Blue Twisted pair
X1.pin5 X2.pin8 White/Blue
X1.pin7 X2.pin4 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.pin8 X2.pin5 Brown
Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the network cable are listed in Table 7-5.
Table 7-5 Technical parameters of the network cable
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8 PIN-8 bit-

Crystal model connector
Type of the cable Communication cable-8-core category-5

twisted pair-24AWG
Number of cores 8
Core diameter 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
7.4.2 Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800

T16
On a network where only OptiX OSN 8800 T16 NEs are used, intra-NE and inter-NE
communication are achieved through fiber connections and network cable connections.

NE Connections
Figure 7-7 shows the NE connection scheme. The figure presents connections between two
NEs: NE1 and NE2. Each NE consists of three subracks, one of which is the master subrack and
the other two are slave subracks. The master and slave subracks are connected using fibers and
network cables.
Figure 7-7 NE connection scheme

NMS
NE1 NE2
Master Subrack (1) EFI EFI Master Subrack (1)
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

ETH1 ETH2
ETH1 ETH2
SCC SCC
SERIAL
SERIAL
EFI
EFI
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
NM_ETH2
NM_ETH2
ETH3
ETH3
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
Slave Subrack (2) EFI EFI Slave Subrack (2)
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1
ETH1 ETH2
ETH1 ETH2
SCC SCC
SERIAL
SERIAL
Other Other
EFI
EFI
NE NE
FIU SC2 SC2 FIU
NM_ETH2
NM_ETH2
ETH3
ETH3
OADM/OA/O Other OADM/OA/O

FIU
FIU
M/OD M/OD
NE
Slave Subrack (3) EFI EFI Slave Subrack (3)
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1
ETH1 ETH2
ETH1 ETH2
SCC SCC
SERIAL
SERIAL
Other Other
EFI
EFI
NE NE
FIU SC2 SC2 FIU
NM_ETH2
NM_ETH2
ETH3
ETH3

FIU
FIU
M/OD NE M/OD
Fiber Network Cable
Inter-NE communication:
l As shown in the figure above, NE1 connects to the NMS through the NM_ETH1 interface
on the EFI board in the master subrack using a network cable, enabling the NMS to manage
the two NEs.
l Inside each NE, OTU, OADM/OA/OM/OD, OSC, and FIU boards are properly connected
through fibers and the FIU boards are also connected to other NEs. ESC or OSC channels
are used to achieve inter-NE communication.
l The NM_ETH2 interface on the EFI board in the master subrack of one NE is connected
to the NM_ETH1 interface on the EFI board inside the master subrack of the other NE
using a network cable, achieving inter-NE communication over Ethernet channels.
Intra-NE communication:
For each NE, the ETH1 interface on the EFI board inside the one subrack are connected to the
ETH2 interfaces on the EFI board in the other subrack to achieve communication between the
subracks.

Network Cable Interfaces

For OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces on TN16EFI board are used
for achieving inter-NE communication and the ETH1, ETH2, and ETH3 interfaces on the
TN16EFI boards are used to achieve intra-NE communication. Table 7-6 provides correct
connections of these network interfaces.
Table 7-6 Network Cable Interfaces
Boar Front Panel Interfac Type Function

d e
Nam
e
TN16 LAMP1- RJ45 Controls the PWR indicators

EFI
EFI LAMP2 and alarm indicators of the
cabinet that holds the subrack.
LAMP1
ETH1
SERIAL
LAMP2
ETH1- RJ45 l Connects a network cable

ETH2
ETH3 from the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3

NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
interface on one subrack to

ETH3
corresponding interfaces on
the other subracks to achieve
the communication between
the master subrack and slave
subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection
is configured, the ETH3
interface cannot be used for the
communication between the
master and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to
a CRPC or ROP board to
achieve communication with
the CRPC or ROP board.
NM_ET RJ45 l Connects the network

H1- interface on the equipment
NM_ET through a network cable to
H2a that on an NM server so that
the NM can manage the
equipment.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2 network
interface on one NE through
a network cable to that on
another NE to achieve
NEs.

Boar Front Panel Interfac Type Function

d e
Nam
e
SERIAL DB9 The interface provides serial

a NM and supports X.25 protocol.
NOTE
Authentication is required before this port is connected. To be specific, you must log in to the NE using
the NE administrator account for authentication.
7.4.3 Management Connections and Interfaces of OptiX OSN 8800

T32/T64
On a network where only OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T64 NEs are used, intra-NE and inter-NE
communication are achieved through fiber connections and network cable connections.
NE Connections
Figure 7-8 shows the NE connection scheme. The figure presents connections between two
NEs: NE1 and NE2. Each NE consists of three subracks, one of which is the master subrack and
the other two are slave subracks. The master and slave subracks are connected using fibers and
network cables.

NMS
NE1 NE2
Master Subrack (1) EFI2 EFI2
EFI1 Master Subrack (1)
NM_ETH2
LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1
LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1
SCC SCC
ETH1 ETH2
EFI1/EFI2
ETH1 ETH2
EFI2
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
SERIAL
ETH3
ETH3
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
EFI2
Slave Subrack (2) EFI2 Slave Subrack (2)
LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1
LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1
ETH1 ETH2
SCC SCC
ETH1 ETH2
Other
EFI2
EFI2
Other
NE NE
FIU SC2 SC2 FIU
ETH3
ETH3

FIU
FIU
M/OD M/OD
NE
EFI2
Slave Subrack (3) EFI2 Slave Subrack (3)
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1
LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1
SCC SCC
ETH1 ETH2
ETH1 ETH2
Other Other
EFI2
EFI2
NE NE
FIU SC2 SC2 FIU
ETH3
ETH3

FIU
FIU
M/OD NE M/OD
Fiber Network Cable

on the EFI2 board in the master subrack using a network cable, enabling the NMS to manage
the two NEs.
l Inside each NE, OTU, OADM/OA/OM/OD, OSC, and FIU boards are properly connected
through fibers and the FIU boards are also connected to other NEs. ESC or OSC channels
are used to achieve inter-NE communication.
l The NM_ETH2 interface on the EFI1 board in the master subrack of one NE is connected
to the NM_ETH1 interface on the EFI2 board inside the master subrack of the other NE
using a network cable, achieving inter-NE communication over Ethernet channels.
For each NE, the ETH1 interface on the EFI2 board inside the one subrack are connected to the
ETH2 interfaces on the EFI2 board in the other subrack to achieve communication between the
subracks.
Network Cable Interfaces

For OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T64, the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces on TN51ETH1/
TN51ETH2 boards are used for achieving inter-NE communication and the ETH1, ETH2, and
ETH3 interfaces on the TN51ETH2 boards are used to achieve intra-NE communication. Table
7-7 provides correct connections of these network interfaces.
Table 7-7 Network Cable Interfaces
Boar Front Panel Interfa Ty Function

d ce pe
Nam
e
TN5 EFI1 NM_ET RJ l Connects an NMS computer

1EFI H2a 45 through a network cable so
1 that the NMS can manage the
equipment where the
NM_ETH2
TN51EFI1 board is located.

l Connects the TN51EFI1
board inside one NE to the
SERIAL
NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2
interface on the TN51EFI1/
TN51EFI2 boards inside
another NE to achieve
NEs.


d ce pe
Nam
e
SERIAL DB Functions as a serial network

a 9 interface and supports X.25
protocol and TL1 management.
The default rate of this serial
interface is 19200.
TN5 EFI2 LAMP1 RJ Controls the PWR and alarm

1EFI / 45 indicators of the cabinet that
2 LAMP2 holds the subrack with the
TN51EFI2 board.
LAMP1
ETH1
NOTICE
The LAMP interfaces on the
LAMP2
ETH2
TN51EFI2 board provide 5 V

power, and it is only used for the
indicators on a cabinet. It cannot
NM_ETH1
connect to an RJ45 cable intended

ETH3
for an NM_ETH or ETH interface;

otherwise, the TN51EFI2 board, the
connected test instrument, or the
NM_ET RJ l Connects to an NMS

H1a 45 computer using a network
cable so that the NMS can
manage the equipment where
the TN51EFI2 board is
located.
board inside one NE to the
NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2
interface on the TN51EFI2
board inside another NE to
achieve communication
between the NEs.
NOTE
NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the
same function.


d ce pe
Nam
e
ETH1/ RJ l Connect the TN51EFI2 board

ETH2/ 45 inside one subrack to the
ETH3 ETH1/ETH2/ETH3
interfaces on the EFI2 boards
inside other subracks using
network cables to achieve
communication between all
the subracks.
board to a CRPC or ROP
board using a network cable
to achieve communication
with the CRPC or ROP board.
NOTE
Authentication is required before this port is connected. To be specific, you must log in to the NE using
the NE administrator account for authentication.
7.4.4 Management Connections among OptiX OSN

8800&6800&3800
On a hybrid network where OptiX OSN 8800, 6800, and 3800 NEs are used, the inter-NE
communication and intra-NE communication are achieved through fiber connections and
network cable connections.
NE Connections
Figure 7-9 shows the NE connection scheme. The figure illustrates how three NEs (namely
NE1, NE2, and NE3) of different types are connected. As shown in the figure, NE1 consists of
a master subrack (OptiX OSN 8800) and two slave subracks (OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800); NE2
and NE3 are two OptiX OSN 3800 NEs.


NMS
NE1 NE2
8800 T32/T64 STAT
Master Subrack (1) EFI2 EFI1

PROG 3800
NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2
NM_ETH2
SCC SCC
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

EFI1/EFI2
ETH1 ETH2
AUX
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
SERIAL
ETH3
OTU OTU
EXT
OTU OTU
8800 T16 AUX
Slave Subrack (2)

EFI
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

ETH1 ETH2
SCC NE3 3800
SERIAL
Other
EFI
STAT
PROG
NE
NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2
FIU SC2 SCC
NM_ETH2
AUX
Other
ETH3
OADM/OA/ Other NE
SC2 FIU
FIU
OM/OD NE
NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 ETH1
6800 Slave FIU OADM/OA
EXT
Subrack (3)
SCC
Other AUX
AUX
NE
ETH2
FIU SC2
Other NE
STAT
PROG
OADM/OA/ Other
FIU
AUX
OM/OD NE
Fiber Network Cable
on the EFI2 board in the master subrack using a network cable, enabling the NMS to manage
all the NEs.
l The OTU, OADM/OA/OM/OD, OSC, and FIU boards inside NE1 are connected through
fibers. The FIU boards are also connected to other NEs. ESC or OSC channels are used to
achieve inter-NE communication.
l NE2 and NE3 are connected through their OTU, OADM/OA, OSC, and FIU boards using
fibers. The FIU boards of the two NEs are also connected to other NEs. ESC or OSC
channels are used to achieve inter-NE communication.
l The NM_ETH2 interface on the EFI1 board of the master subrack inside NE1 connects to
the NM_ETH1 interface on the AUX board inside NE2 through a network cable. The
NM_ETH2 interface on the AUX board inside NE2 also uses a network cable to connect
to the NM_ETH1 interface on the AUX board inside NE3. In this manner, all the NEs
communicate with each other using Ethernet channels.

For NE1, the ETH1 interface on the EFI2/EFI board inside the one subrack are connected to the
ETH2 interfaces on the EFI/AUX board in the other subrack to achieve communication between
the subracks.
7.5 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs

The time synchronization function maintains consistency between the NE time and the U2000/
Web LCT server time and enables the U2000/Web LCT to record the correct time at which
alarms and abnormal events occur.
When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the U2000/Web LCT, the time at which the
alarms and events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect when the alarm or
event is generated, the U2000/Web LCT and NE security logs record incorrect time. Recording
an incorrect time may affect fault location. To ensure the accuracy of NE time, the U2000/Web
LCT provides a time synchronization scheme with the following servers: the U2000/Web LCT
server and standard NTP server.
NOTE
The Web LCT improves the accuracy of NE time by synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time.
l If synchronization with the U2000/Web LCT server is used, all NEs use the U2000/Web
LCT server time as the standard time, and can be synchronized with the U2000/Web LCT
server manually or automatically. The U2000/Web LCT server time refers to the time of
the computer system on which the U2000/Web LCT server resides. This scheme is easy to
use, and applies to networks that require relatively low time accuracy.
l If synchronization with the standard NTP server is used, all NEs and the U2000 are
synchronized with the standard NTP server automatically. The NTP server can be the
U2000 server or a specific time server. This scheme applies to networks that require
relatively high time accuracy.
NTP Network Application

Figure 7-10 shows a network that uses NTP to ensure networkwide synchronization.

Figure 7-10 Network using NTP to ensure synchronization
The highest level

time server
Other time server
The middle level

time server
NM server
Clients
NE 2
NE 1
NE 3
NE 5 NE 4
The equipment in the network shown in Figure 7-10can be classified into three categories:
l The highest-level time server: the 0-level time server
l The middle-level time server: the 1- or 2-level time server that obtains time information
from a higher-level time server and provides time information for a lower-level time server
l Clients: devices that only obtain time information
In actual applications, the server and clients can be configured as follows:
l Choose the NMS server as the time server for NEs. The NMS server can be set as either
the highest-level time server or a device that obtains time information from other time
servers.
l NEs can only be set as clients, which obtain time information from a specific time server.
7.6 Interfaces Between the NMS and OSS

The U2000 provides multiple types of northbound interfaces (NBIs) for connecting to different
types of operations support systems (OSSs).
OSSs are software systems that provide the following management functions to carriers:
performance management, inventory management, service management, and fault management.
The OSS resides on a higher layer in the network architecture than the U2000. The OSS manages
equipment through U2000s, which communicate with the OSS through NBIs. The U2000
supports various NBIs such as XML, CORBA, Performance Text, and SNMP to implement fast
interworking with the OSS provided by the carrier.

Introduction to OSS
OSSs are independent software systems that improve the work efficiency of equipment
maintenance engineers and reduce maintenance costs. According to the functions, OSSs are
classified into:
l Service assurance system
l Service provisioning system
l Inventory management system
l Service diagnosis system
Table 7-8 lists the features of each type of OSS.
Table 7-8 Features of each type of OSS
OSS Feature Description
Service Monitoring and Provides a unified port for collecting

assurance assurance of system performance statistics and performance
system performance statistics reports for various services.
Reports equipment alarms in real time, and
filters and clears equipment alarms.
Service Fast service Provides a unified provisioning flow for

provisioning provisioning various services and screens the differences
system between equipment provided by different
vendors.
Inventory Unified resource Supports the inventory query for networkwide

management management resources and provides a notification upon a
system resource change.
NBI Type
The U2000 provides various NBIs to the network management layer so that it can connect to
different OSSs. Table 7-9 lists the NBIs that the U2000 provides to the network management
layer.
Table 7-9 U2000 NBIs
NBI Type Function
XML NBI Through the XML NBI, the U2000 provides a unified
management interface for alarms, performance, inventory, and
service provisioning to the OSS. This NBI supports router,
Metro, transport, and access domain equipment.

NBI Type Function
CORBA NBI Through the CORBA NBI, the U2000 provides a unified
management interface for alarms to the OSS. This NBI supports
router, Metro, transport, and access domain equipment.
Through the CORBA NBI, the U2000 provides management for
performance, inventory, and service provisioning for Metro and
transport domain equipment.
SNMP alarm NBI Through the SNMP alarm NBI, the U2000 provides a
management interface for alarms to the OSS. This NBI supports
router, Metro, transport, and access domain equipment.
Performance Text NBI Through the Performance Text NBI, the U2000 provides the
ability to export performance data to a specific FTP server for
analysis by the OSS.

Product Description 8 ASON Feature
8 ASON Feature
About This Chapter
The automatically switched optical network (ASON) is a new generation of the optical
transmission network. The ASON software provided by Huawei can be applied to the OptiX
OSN 8800 to support the evolution from a traditional network to an ASON network. Such
evolution complies with the ITU and IETF ASON/GMPLS-related standards.
As shown in the Figure 8-1,ASON technology involves signaling switching and a control plane
to enhance its network connection management and recovery capability. ASON technology
provides wavelength-level ASON services at the optical layer and ODUk level ASON services
at the electrical layer. It also supports end-to-end service configuration and the service level
agreement (SLA).

Figure 8-1 ASON feature
The ASON has the following features:

l For OTN network, supports the automatic adjustment of wavelengths during rerouting or
optimization, which solves the wavelength conflict problem.
l Wavelengths can be automatically allocated for newly created services.
l Automatically configures end-to-end services.
l Automatically discovers the topology.
l Provides mesh networking that enhances the survivability of the network.
l Supports different services which are provided with different levels of protection.
l Provides traffic engineering and dynamically adjusts the network logic topology in real
time to optimize the configuration of network resources.
8.1 Overview
The ASON software provided by Huawei can be applied to the OptiX OSN series products to
support the evolution from traditional network to ASON network. It complies with the ITU and
IETF ASON/GMPLS-related standards.
8.2 ASON Software and ASON Functions

Huawei provides the software on the ASON control plane, which implements the functions such
as network callings and connections and dynamic control of the transport plane through signaling
switching.
8.3 Creation and Deletion of the ASON Trail

The RSVP-TE signaling is needed during the process of creation, deletion, change and rerouting
of the ASON trail.
8.4 Specifications of ASON Services

This section describes the related specifications of ASON services.
8.5 Conditions for Configuring ASON Services

Certain configuration conditions must be met to ensure successful creation of ASON services.
8.6 OTN ASON Feature

The OptiX OSN WDM series products of Huawei can provide the OTN ASON function after
the ASON software is loaded.
8.7 OCS ASON Feature

The OptiX OSN 8800 series products of Huawei can provide the OCS ASON function after the
ASON software is loaded.

8.1 Overview
The ASON software provided by Huawei can be applied to the OptiX OSN series products to
support the evolution from traditional network to ASON network. It complies with the ITU and
IETF ASON/GMPLS-related standards.
The following WDM product series support the ASON function:

l OptiX OSN 8800
l OptiX OSN 6800
l OptiX OSN 3800
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 3800 supports optical-layer ASON only when it is used as an OLA site.
8.1.1 Background and Advantages

Compared with the WDM network, the transmission network that applies the new ASON
technology shows advantages in service configuration, bandwidth utilization and protection
schemes.
In the traditional transmission network, the WDM transmission equipment functions as fibers.
Currently, the WDM transmission equipment also carries services. As a result, more
requirements are for the operability of the WDM equipment. The traditional network has the
following problems:
l The service configuration is complex and capacity expansion or service provision takes a
long period.
l The bandwidth utilization is of a low rate and low efficiency. In a ring network, half of the
bandwidth should be reserved.
l Just a few protection schemes are available and the performance of self-healing protection
is poor.
The ASON has been developed to solve these problems. This technology involves signaling
switching and a control plane to enhance its network connection management and recovery
capability. It supports end-to-end service configuration and the service level agreement (SLA).
Service Configuration
Traditional WDM networks are generally chains and rings. The trails and timeslots of their
services are manually configured ring by ring and point by point, which consumes a lot of time
and effort. As networks become increasingly large and complicated, this service configuration
mode cannot meet the rapidly increasing user demands.
The ASON successfully solves this problem by end-to-end service configuration. To configure
a service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidth requirement and
protection type; the network automatically performs the required operations.
Bandwidth Utilization
Traditional WDM optical transmission networks have a large amount of resources reserved and
lack advanced service protection, and the restore and routing functions. In contrast, with the

routing function the ASON can provide protection by reserving fewer resources, thus increasing
network resource utilization.
Protection and Restoration

Chain and ring are the main topologies used in a traditional WDM network. Optical line
protection or board-level protection are the main protection schemes for the services. In ASON,
mesh is the main topology. Besides protections, the dynamic restoring function is available to
restore the services dynamically. In addition, when there are multiple failures in a network, the
services can be restored as many as possible.
According to the difference in the service restoration time, multiple service types are defined in
ASON networks to meet different customer requirements.
8.1.2 Features of the ASON

As a new technology on the transmission network, the ASON has its own features.
Compared with the traditional network, the ASON has the following features:
l Supports the automatic adjustment of wavelengths during rerouting or optimization, which

solves the wavelength conflict problem. (For OTN network)
l Wavelengths can be automatically allocated for newly created services.
l Configures end-to-end services automatically.
l Discovers the topology automatically.
l Provides mesh networking that enhances the survivability of the network.
l Supports different services which are provided with different levels of protection.
l Provides traffic engineering and dynamically adjusts the network logic topology in real
time to optimize the configuration of network resources.
8.1.3 Huawei OTN ASON Solution

Huawei provides detailed OTN ASON solutions for different layers.
The OTN ASON solution provided by Huawei involves the following products:
l Control plane software

l Network management software
l Equipment on the transport plane
NOTE
The OTN ASON solution provided by Huawei includes optical-layer (OTN_O) and electrical-layer
(OTN_E) ASON services. The optical-layer ASON service achieves OCh-level service grooming and the
electrical-layer ASON service achieves ODUk-level service grooming. Users can determine whether to
choose optical-layer or electrical-layer ASON based on the network situations and service requirements.
Figure 8-2 illustrates the relation among them.

Figure 8-2 Huawei ASON model

Network management
system
Contol plane supported by

OptiX GCP/GSP software
ASON composed
of OSN series
equipment
Currently, Huawei can provide the integral ASON metropolitan transport solution formed by
the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800, as shown in the Figure 8-3. The mesh network can
be used in the short long-haul to perform the flexible service grooming. For the ASON products
for different layers, refer to the Table 8-1.

Figure 8-3 ASON metropolitan solution (OTN networking)
Area
backbones
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Short long-hual
OptiX OSN 8800 T16

OptiX OSN 6800
Local networks and
metropolitan core layers
ASON NE
Internet data center
Multi-tenant building
Enterprise
Banks and financial institutions
Intelligent residential community
Table 8-1 ASON WDM NE in the OptiX OSN series products
ASON NE Remarks
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and ASON NE in short long-haul

OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 and ASON NE in local network and metropolitan core layers
OptiX OSN 6800
NOTE
In the actual networking of the ASON WDM series products, the reconfigurable optical add/drop
multiplexer board (such as ROAM, WSMD2, RMU9, WSD9, WSM9, WSMD9 and WSMD4) needs to
be configured to implement the automatic rerouting and restoration of WDM ASON OCh trail.
8.1.4 Huawei OCS ASON Solution

Huawei provides detailed ASON solutions for different layers.
The ASON solution provided by Huawei involves the following products:

l Control plane software

l Network management software
l Equipment on the transport plane
Figure 8-4 illustrates the relationship among the preceding products.
Figure 8-4 Huawei ASON solution

U2000 Planning and simulation
Network management system
system
Control plane supported by

the OptiX GSP software
loaded on the OptiX OSN
equipment
ASON network
composed of
the OptiX OSN
equipment
With the increasingly large network scale and capacity, however, the access and convergence
layer will evolve into ASON. Huawei provides ASON products for each layer, as shown in
Figure 8-5. Table 8-2 lists the ASON products in each layer.
Table 8-2 OptiX OSN series products
ASON NE Applied at
OptiX OSN 8800 Backbone layer
OptiX OSN 3500 Convergence layer
OptiX OSN 3500 II Convergence layer
OptiX OSN 2500 Access layer
OptiX OSN 1500 Access layer

Figure 8-5 Network solution

OptiX OSN 9500 OptiX OSN 8800 OptiX OSN 9500
Backbone layer
Convergence layer
Access layer
GSM/CDMA/
PSTN Ethernet ... ATM DDN
WCDMA
NOTICE
When a network consists of only OptiX OSN 8800 NEs, each ASON domain supports a
maximum of 150 NEs, and the number of network-wide STM-N optical ports cannot exceed
15,000. If a network contains more than 150 NEs, the network must be divided into ASON
domains for management.
8.1.5 Introduction and Development of the OTN ASON

The concepts and standards of the ASON appear on the premise that the traditional SDH
transmission system is widely used. The reasonable introduction schemes are necessary.
Introduction Scheme
Two basic introduction schemes are described as follows.
l To create an ASON network:

When the backbone network and MAN need to expand the capacity, you can consider
creating the ASON network.
l To upgrade a traditional WDM network to an ASON network:
If Huawei OptiX OSN series products are deployed in existing network, new software can
be loaded to upgrade the network to an ASON network. If NEs on the existing network can
be used to deploy ASON features, this scheme does not require new equipment and the
network can be smoothly upgraded. If NEs on the existing network cannot be used to deploy
ASON features, the network needs to be reconstructed and then upgraded.

Interconnection between ASON and WDM networks

A great number of WDM networks are currently in service. Hence, for the development of the
ASON, the interconnection between ASON and WDM networks becomes a key factor.
The ASON and WDM networks share the same service granularities, such as ODU2, and ODU1.
Hence, the interconnection between ASON and WDM networks is not a problem from the
viewpoint of service.
The ASON and WDM networks can be uniformly managed only if the equipment in the network
is the Huawei OptiX series equipment.
8.1.6 Introduction and Development of the OCS ASON

The concepts and standards of the ASON appears on the premise that the SDH fiber transmission
system is widely used. The reasonable introduction schemes and development schemes are
necessary. As the ASON concepts and standards continue to develop, and as considerable SDH
fiber transmission systems already exist, the introduction schemes and development schemes
become very important.
Introduction Scheme
Two basic introduction schemes are described as follows.
l To create an ASON network:

When the backbone network and MAN need to expand the capacity, you can consider
creating the ASON network .
l To upgrade a traditional SDH network to an ASON network:
If Huawei OptiX OSN series products are deployed in the MAN and backbone network,
new software can be loaded to upgrade the network to an ASON network. This scheme
does not require new equipment and the network can be smoothly upgraded.
Interconnection between ASON and SDH

A great number of SDH networks are currently in service. Hence, for the development of the
ASON, the interconnection between ASON and SDH networks becomes a key factor.
The ASON and SDH networks share the same service granularities such as VC-4, VC-3 and
VC-12. Hence, the interconnection between ASON and SDH networks is not a problem from
the viewpoint of service.
The ASON and SDH networks can be uniformly managed only if the equipment in the network
is the Huawei OptiX series equipment.
8.2 ASON Software and ASON Functions

Huawei provides the software on the ASON control plane, which implements the functions such
as network callings and connections and dynamic control of the transport plane through signaling
switching.

8.2.1 Basic Concepts of ASON

The basic concepts related to the ASON are the label switched path (LSP) and rerouting.
ASON
ASON is a new generation optical network that has the following features:
l Customers launch a service request dynamically.
l Routes are selected automatically.
l Signaling controls the creation and removal of connections.
l Network connections are automatically and dynamically completed.
l Switching and transmission are integrated into one system.
LSP
Label switched path (LSP) is the path ASON services pass through. In an ASON, to create ASON
services is to create LSPs. On U2000, LSP is also called ASON Trail.
WDM ASON Trail

WDM ASON Trail is classified into WDM ASON OCh Trail and WDM ASON ODUk Trail.
See Figure 8-6.
l The WDM ASON OCh trail can be created when there are sufficient OCh TE link resources.
l The WDM ASON ODUk trail can be created when there are sufficient TE link resources
where the payload type is ODUk.
Figure 8-6 WDM ASON Trail
ODUk trail
OCh trail
OTU OM OA OA OD OTU
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 does not support the WDM ASON client route.
Rerouting
Rerouting is a means of resuming services. For a non-revertive service, when an LSP is
disconnected, the source node queries and finds the best route to resume services. Then, the

initial node creates a new LSP to transmit the service. After creating a new LSP, the source node
deletes the original LSP.
NOTE
After a revertive service is rerouted, the original LSP is not deleted.

NOTE
For more information on service restoration, refer to 8.2.11 ASON Network Protection and
Restoration.
Rerouting Lockout
In some cases, rerouting is not required after failure of LSP. Then you need to set rerouting
lockout.
Rerouting Policy
Diamond and silver services all support the several rerouting polices. You can flexibly choose
a rerouting policy and properly use network resources according to different network conditions.
l Overlapping policy
During rerouting, the route of the new LSP overlaps the original route whenever possible.
This policy helps save network resources. When bandwidth resources are insufficient, the
service gets more chances to reroute successfully.
l Separating policy
During rerouting, the route of the new LSP is separated from the original route whenever
possible. This policy is applicable to a network with sufficient link resources.
l Best route policy
During rerouting, the best route is computed for the new LSP. Whether the new or old route
resources are utilized again is not considered. This policy chooses a route with the minimum
cost as the new route after rerouting according to network conditions.
l Simulated span restoration policy
During rerouting, the services must reuse the original routes without involving faulty spans.
End-to-end rerouting is enabled only when rerouting on the faulty spans fails, and thus
service route can be controlled and managed more easily.
NOTE
The rerouting policy can be set on the U2000 according to actual conditions.
8.2.2 Structure of the ASON Transmission Network

the ASON has three planes: the control plane, the transport plane, and the management plane.
The most outstanding feature of the ASON compared with the traditional optical network lies
in the introduction of an independent control plane to the transport network. The control plane
brings the revolutionary change to the entire optical network and enables the latter to have the
ability to automatically implement network bandwidth allocation and dynamically configure
trails.
Functions of the three planes of the ASON are as follows:

l Control plane

The control plane mainly controls callings and connections of the network and dynamically
controls the transport plane through signaling exchange (involving setup, release,
monitoring, and maintenance of connections, and provision of protection restoration in case
of a connection failure).
l Transport plane
The traditional WDM network is the transport plane. It transmits optical signals, configures
cross-connection and protection switching for optical signals, and guarantees the reliability
of all optical signals. The switching operations on the transport plane are performed under
the control of the management plane and control plane.
l Management plane
The management plane is a complement to the control plane. It maintains the transport
plane, the control plane and the entire system. On this plane, the end-to-end configuration
can be supported. Its functions include performance management, fault management,
configuration management and security management. The functions of the management
plane are coordinated with the functions of the control plane and transport plane.
As shown in Figure 8-7, the three planes are independent but they interact with each other
through interfaces and defined functions. The management plane communicates with the control
plane and the transport plane through network management interfaces (NMIs). The control plane
communicates with the transport plane through connection control interfaces (CCIs).
Figure 8-7 Three planes of the ASON
NMI
Control plane
Management
CCI plane
NMI
Transmission plane
8.2.3 Location of ASON Software

The ASON software is included in the NE software.
Figure 8-8 shows where ASON software is located in the whole product software system. The
ASON software and NE software run on the SCC board, whereas the board software and network
management (NM) software run on the boards and NM computer respectively, to implement
corresponding functions. The structure of the software for all the OptiX OSN series products is

the same. You can upgrade traditional versions to ASON by loading the NE software that
contains ASON software. Some boards should be upgraded.
Figure 8-8 Software structure of the OptiX OSN series
NM software
NE software ASON software
Board software
8.2.4 Structure of ASON Software

The ASON software is formed by several modules. Each module implements different functions.
According to ITU-T recommendations, ASON has three planes: a control plane, a management
plane, and a transport plane. The management plane refers to the NM layer, and the transport
plane refers to the WDM network. ASON software is used in the control plane, using LMP,
OSPF-TE, and RSVP-TE.
Table 8-3 Acronyms and abbreviations
Acronym Full Spelling
RSVP-TE Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering
OSPF-TE Open Shortest Path First-Traffic Engineering
LMP Link Management Protocol
CSPF Constrained Shortest Path First
Figure 8-9 shows the structure of the ASON software, which consists of a signaling module, a
routing module and a cross-connection management module.

Figure 8-9 Structure of ASON software
ASON software
NMS Signaling
module NE
Cross-connection software
management
module
Routing module
Link management module
Link Management Module

The link management module uses the LMP protocol to perform the following functions.
l Creates and maintains the control channels

l Checks component links and TE links
Signaling Module
The signaling module uses the RSVP-TE protocol to create or remove services according to the
requests from users, and synchronizes and restores services as needed.
Routing Module
The routing module uses the OSPF-TE protocol to perform the following functions.
l Collects and floods TE link information.

l Collects and floods control link information.
l Calculates control route.
The routing module mainly uses the CSPF protocol to perform the following function:
Compute service routes based on information about network-wide TE links
Cross-connection Management Module

The cross-connection management module performs the following functions.
l Creates/Deletes cross-connections.
l Reports link state and alarms.

8.2.5 ASON Standards

Huawei implements the functions of ASON, which comply with the recommendations of ITU-
T and IETF.
ITU-T Standards
International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T) is
an authoritative organization in the telecommunication standardization field. Its standardization
work covers all the telecommunication domains. Regarding the ASON optical network domain,
ITU-T presents the automatically switched transmission network (ASTN) and automatically
switched optical network (ASON) concepts.
Currently, the ASTN and ASON indicate the ASON optical network. Different from other
standardization organizations, ITU-T applies the traditional top-to-down design scheme. ITU-
T attaches much importance to the system structure and defines the specific protocols and
regulations on the basis of the overall structure. ITU-T G.8080 defines the overall structure of
the GCP/ASON network. ITU-T presents a series standards related to the ASON optical network
on the basis of ITU-T G.8080. The series standards include G.7713 for call and connection
management, G.7714 for auto-discovery technology, G.7712 for DCN, G.7715 for routing and
G.7716 for link management.
Figure 8-10 shows the ITU-T standards related to the ASON optical network and relations
among them.
Figure 8-10 ITU-T standards related to the ASON optical network
NOTE
Huawei ASON/GMPLS Solution adopt the recommendatory signaling protocol: RSVP-TE. So the Huawei
does not use CR-LDP.
IETF Standards
Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) is an open international standardization organization
set up jointly by Internet designers, operators, equipment vendors and researchers. IETF is
devoted to the definition of standards related to Internet and attaches much importance to
protocols and technologies. The multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) protocol is widely
accepted as the basis of the standards for the next-generation data transmission.

IETF features in work openness. All protocols and standards it released are fully open and thus
IETF draws the attention of the vendors and research institutions. At present, IETF focuses on
the study of improving the existing protocols in the field of ASON and thus further extends to
the optical transmission networks. IETF takes the lead in launching the GCP architecture and
defines the signaling and routing protocols of ASON related to GCP. Part or all of these protocols
have been adopted by ITU-T.
The protocols of ASON IETF studies include:

l Signaling protocol(GMPLS-RSVP-TE/CR-LDP)
l Routing protocol (GMPLS-OSPF-TE/IS-IS)
l Link management protocol(LMP)
For the detailed IETF recommendations, refer to Table 8-4.
Table 8-4 IETF standards related to the ASON optical network
Standard Description
RFC 3945 Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching (GMPLS)

Architecture

Signaling Functional Description

Signaling Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic
Engineering (RSVP-TE) Extensions
RFC 4204 Link Management Protocol (LMP)
RFC 4258 Requirements for Generalized Multi-Protocol Label

Switching (GMPLS) Routing for the Automatically Switched
Optical Network (ASON)
RFC 4203 OSPF Extensions in Support of Generalized Multi-Protocol

Label Switching (GMPLS)
RFC 4257 Framework for Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching

(GMPLS)-based Control of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy/
Synchronous Optical Networking (SDH/SONET) Networks
RFC 4426 Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching

(GMPLS).Recovery Functional Specification
8.2.6 ASON Protocol

Huawei ASON applies the link management protocol (LMP) as the link management protocol,
OSPF-TE as the routing protocol, and RSVP-TE as the signaling protocol.
The following sections describe the functions of these protocols in an ASON network.

LMP
The LMP performs the following functions in an ASON network.
l Creating and maintaining the control channels between adjacent nodes.

The following is the procedure of creating control channels.
– See Figure 8-11. When two adjacent ASON NEs start up, the LMP uses the OTN
overheads (for Electrical-Layer ASON) or the DCC channels of the OSC (for Optical-
Layer ASON) to transmit messages. Node 1 transmits messages to Node 2, which
performs the check to the received messages. If the messages pass the check, Node 2
returns messages to Node 1. If the messages do not pass the check, Node 2 returns a
message to Node 1, indicating that the messages fail to pass the check. In this way, Node
2 waits for another check. Hence, a control channel between the two adjacent nodes is
created.
– After the control channel is created, the two nodes store the information about the control
channel and identify the control channel according to the ID.
Figure 8-11 Creating control channels

LMP LMP
Message
Node 1 Node 2
Message
l Verifying component links and TE links.

The following is the procedure of verifying component links and TE Links.
– After the control channels are configured, an attribute consistency check is performed
to the TE links to see if the information is identical at both ends of dynamically
discovered or manually configured TE links. If the check succeeds, the OSPF protocol
is used to flood the information of the TE links to the entire network.
– As shown in Figure 8-12, Node 1 transmits messages and the content to be checked to
Node 2, which checks if it has the same information and returns the check result to Node
1.
– On the OCS network, after a logical board is created for an ASON NE, the ASON
software creates component links for the optical interfaces of the board. Then, the
attributes of component links are configured according to the attributes of the optical
interface. The attributes include slot number, optical interface number, bandwidth and
node ID.
– On the OCS network, after component links are created, the ASON software creates
corresponding TE links. In this case, the LMP starts to verify the component links and
TE links. The LMP performs the verification to verify the consistency of information
at both ends of a link. As shown in Figure 8-12, Node 1 transmits messages and the

content to be checked to Node 2, which checks if it has the same information and returns
the check result to Node 1. If the verification shows consistency, the OSPF-TE can then
flood the information about the TE links to the entire network.
Figure 8-12 Verifying component links and TE links

LMP LMP
Message
Node 1 Node 2
Message
OSPF-TE
The control plane of Huawei ASON applies the OSPF-TE, which is an extended protocol for
OSPF, and performs the following functions.
l Creates and maintains control links.
l Creates neighbor relations.
l Floods and collects the information about the control links on the control plane. According
to the information, the protocol then generates the information about the routes that are
required for forwarding messages on the control plane.
l Floods and collects the information about the TE links on the transport plane. The protocol
then generates the information about the network service topologies for service trail
computation.
RSVP-TE
The RSVP-TE is a protocol for resource reservation. It is a type of signaling. In terms of traffic
engineering, the RSVP is extended to RSVP-TE. The RSVP-TE mainly supports the following
functions:
l LSP creation
l LSP deletion
l LSP attribute modification
l LSP rerouting
l LSP trail optimization
Protocol Authentication
An external entity may modify the OSPF-TE protocol packets of the network, counterfeit a node
of this network and transmit packets, or receive the packets transmitted by nodes in the network
and repeat the attack. To prevent these network insecurities, the ASON provides the function to

authentication protocols. In an ASON domain, the RSVP and OSPF-TE protocols are
authenticated.
The RSVP authentication is configured for nodes and the OSPF-TE authentication for
interconnected interfaces (slots and optical interfaces).
The authentication can be non-authentication, plain text authentication or MD5 authentication.

l Non-authentication: No authentication is required in this mode.
l Plain text authentication: To verify the preset password. The authentication code must be
a character string with no more than eight characters.
l MD5 authentication: To verify the information that is encrypted by the MD5 algorithm.
The authentication code must be a character string with no more than 64 characters.
NOTE
The RSVP does not support plain text authentication.
The check succeeds only when the authentication modes and passwords of adjacent nodes are
the same.
8.2.7 OTN ASON Links

OTN ASON Links include control tunnels, control links and TE links.
Control Channels
The LMP creates and maintains the control channel between NEs. The control channel then
provides a physical channel for the LMP packets. The control channels are classified into in-
fiber and out-fiber control channels. The in-fiber control channels automatically find and use
OTN overhead or the D4-D12 bytes of DCC. The out-fiber control channel uses the Ethernet
links, which should be manually configured.
The verification of TE links can be performed if the control channels are available between two
adjacent nodes.
At least one control channel should be present between two adjacent nodes. If several fibers
exist between adjacent nodes, several control channels can be created.
Control Links
Control links are the communication links created for the communication between the protocol
entities of NEs.
The OSPF control links are created and maintained by the OSPF protocol between two nodes.
The information of the OSPF control links is flooded to the entire network. In this way, each
NE can attain the information and then can form the control topology. The OSPF protocol of
each NE computes the shortest control routes to each NE according to the control topology. The
routes are then recorded in the forward table. The signaling RSVP then uses the routes to transmit
message packets.
By default, control links are created in fibers. Control links can also be created outside fibers on
the condition that the OSPF protocol of the Ethernet ports is enabled.

NOTE
Although the control links and control channels are created in the OTN overheads or DCC channels (D4-
D12), they differ in terms of functions and are independent of each other. The OSPF protocol floods the
information about the control links to the entire network. Each ASON NE stores the information about the
network-wide control links. The ASON NEs do not flood the information about the control channels to the
entire network. Each NE manages and stores the information only about its own control channels.
The OSPF and RSVP protocols transmit messages through the GCC or RES bytes of the OTN.
The gray part in Figure 8-13 indicates the RES byte of OTN overhead.
Figure 8-13 ASON protocol information uses the OTN overhead
3824
3825
4080
14
15
16
17
1
7
8
OTUk[V]
1 Alignm
OH
2
OPUk OH
Client Signal OTUk

3 ODUk OH FEC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 FAS SM RES
MFAS GCC0 RES JC
2 TCM TCM6 TCM5 TCM4

RES FTFL RES JC
ACT
3 TCM3 TCM2 TCM1 PM EXP RES JC
GCC1 GCC2 APS/PCC RES PSI NJO

4
TE Links
TE link is a traffic engineering link. An ASON NE transmits its bandwidth information to other
ASON NEs on the network in the format of a TE link through the LSA, so as to provide data
for route computation. The TE link is a concept of resources. Different boards generate different
TE links. TE links can be classified into the following types:
l OMS TE link
l OTUk TE link k = 1, 2, 3, 4
l ODUk TE link k = 1, 2, 3, 4
Figure 8-14 shows the layered model of TE links.

Figure 8-14 Layered model of TE links
FIU OMS TE Link FIU
Line Unit Line Unit

OTUk TE Link
ODUk
OTUk
ODUk
OTUk
Tributary Unit ODUk TE Link Tributary Unit
ODUk
ODUk
The corresponding relation between each layer of TE link and its payload type is as follows:
l OMS TE link: bears the OCh.

l OTU4 TE link: bears the ODU4.
l ODU4 TE link: bears the ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU3
l ODU3 TE link: bears the ODU0/ODU1/ODU2
l ODU2 TE link: bears the ODU0/ODU1
l ODU1 TE link: bears the ODU0
Certain types of boards are taken as examples to describe the creation process of TE links at
various layers.
See Figure 8-17. After the wavelength trail is created between the FIU boards at two ASON
NEs, the OMS TE link is generated automatically.
See Figure 8-15. After the wavelength trail is created between the NS4 boards at two ASON
NEs, the OTU4 TE link and ODU4 TE link are generated automatically. The payload type of
the OTU4 TE link is ODU4. The payload type of the ODU4 TE link is ODU3.

Figure 8-15 OTU4 TE link and ODU4 TE link

NE1 NE2
NS4 NS4
ODU3
O O O O ODU3
F F
D T T D
I I
U U U U
U U
ODU3 4 4 4 4 ODU3
O O
S S
C C
OMS TE link
OTU4 TE link
ODU4 TE link
the OTU3 TE link is ODU3. The payload type of the ODU3 TE link is ODU2.


NE1 NE2
NS3 NS3
ODU2 O O O O ODU2
F F
ODU2 D T T D ODU2
I I
ODU2 U U
U U
U U ODU2
3 3 3 3
ODU2 ODU2
O O
S S
C C
OMS TE link
OTU3 TE link
ODU3 TE link
the OTU2 TE link is ODU2. The payload type of the ODU2 TE link is ODU1. See Figure
8-17.


NE1 NE2
NS2 NS2
ODU1 O O O O ODU1
F F
ODU1 D T T D ODU1
I I
ODU1 U U
U U
U U ODU1
2 2 2 2
ODU1 ODU1
O O
S S
C C
OMS TE link
OTU2 TE link
ODU2 TE link
See Figure 8-18. The ODU1 TE link will be automatically created only after the ODU2 TE link
generates, and the cross-connection between the TOM and NS2 boards is created. The payload
type of the ODU1 TE link is ODU0.
Figure 8-18 ODU1 TE link

NE1 NE2
TOM XCS NS2 NS2 XCS TOM

LP1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 LP1
O O O O O O O
O D
D D T T D D
D U
U U U U U U
U 0
0 2 2 2 2 1
1
ODU2 TE link
ODU1 TE link

8.2.8 OCS ASON Links

Automatically switched optical network (ASON) links include control channels, control links,
traffic engineering (TE) links, and component links.
As listed in Table 8-5, four types of ASON links are available.
Table 8-5 ASON links
ASON Definition Characteristics

Link
Type
Control The LMP creates and maintains the l The verification of component links
Channe control channel between NEs. The and TE links can be performed if the
ls control channel then provides a physical control channels are available
channel for the LMP packets. The between two adjacent nodes.
control channels are classified into in- l At least one control channel should
fiber and out-fiber control channels. be present between two adjacent
The in-fiber control channels nodes. If several fibers exist
automatically find and use the D4-D12 between adjacent nodes, several
bytes of DCC. The out-fiber control control channels can be created.
channel uses the Ethernet links, which
should be manually configured.
Control Control links are the communication By default, control links are created in
Links links created for the communication fibers. Control links can also be created
between the protocol entities of NEs. outside fibers on the condition that the
The open shortest path first (OSPF) OSPF protocol of the Ethernet ports is
control links are created and maintained enabled.
by the OSPF protocol between two NOTE
nodes. The information of the OSPF Although the control links and control
channels are created in the DCC channels
control links is flooded to the entire
(D4-D12), they differ in terms of functions
network. In this way, each NE can attain and are independent of each other. The
the information and then can form the OSPF-TE protocol floods the information
control topology. The OSPF protocol of about the control links to the entire network.
each NE computes the shortest control Each ASON NE stores the information
routes to each NE according to the about the network-wide control links. The
ASON NEs do not flood the information
control topology. The routes are then
about the control channels to the entire
recorded in the forward table. The network. Each NE only manages and stores
signaling RSVP then uses the routes to the information about its own control
transmit message packets. channels.

ASON Definition Characteristics

Link
Type
TE TE link is a traffic engineering link. The l If the multiplex section protection

Links ASON NE sends its bandwidth (MSP) is configured on some
information to other ASON NEs channels of a fiber, there are three
through the TE link to provide data for types of resources. For example, if a
route computation. As a kind of 10 Gbit/s (64 VC4s) optical
resources, TE links can be regarded as interface is configured with a 2.5
fibers that have bandwidth information Gbit/s MSP, the TE links are
and protection attributes. However, the allocated as follows:
TE link does not correspond to a fiber – 1-8 VC4s are the working
respectively, because each fiber may resources of the TE link.
correspond to many TE links.
Currently, a fiber can be configured – 33-40 VC4s are the protection
with one TE link. resources of the TE link.
The resources of a TE link can be – The rest VC4s are non-

classified into three types: non- protection resources of the TE
protection resources, working link.
resources, and protection resources. l If the MSP is configured completely
in a fiber, there are only working and
protection resources in this fiber.
l If the MSP is not configured in a
fiber, there are only non-protection
resources in this fiber.
Compo Component link is a bandwidth unit NOTE

nent smaller than a TE link. One TE link Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to
the whole network through OSPF-TE. Each
Links consists of only one component link in
NE obtains the network-wide TE links.
the actual ASON software. ASON NEs do not flood their own
component links to the whole network.
They only manage and store their own
component links.
8.2.9 Function Structure of the OTN ASON

An OTN ASON network consists of ASON NEs, TE links, domains and SPC (soft permanent
connections).
See Figure 8-19.

Figure 8-19 Function structure of the WDM/OTN ASON
ASON NE TE link
R1 R4
SPC
R2
R3
ASON domain : ASON NE

: User equipment
ASON NE
An ASON NE is one of the topology components in the ASON. An ASON NE has the following
functions in relation to a traditional NE. See Figure 8-20.
Figure 8-20 ASON NE (OTN networking)

ASON NE
Signaling Routing
( RSVP-TE ) ( OSPF-TE )
Link management protocol ( LMP )
Communication and control Traditional NE
WDM-side/Client- Wavelength WDM-side/Client-

side interface grooming side interface
Node ID is the unique identification of the ASON NE in the control plane. The format of the
node ID is the same as that of the IP address. But the node ID and the IP address of the NE must
be at different network sections.
As a unique identification for NEs on the transport plane, the node ID has the same meaning
regarding an ASON NE and a traditional NE.
The node ID, the NE ID, and the NE IP address are independent of one another.

TE Link
TE link is a traffic engineering link. The ASON NE sends its bandwidth information to other
ASON NEs through the TE link to provide data for route computation. One inter-station fiber
between two FIU boards can be configured with one TE link.
If the ODUk SPRing is configured in an ASON network, the TE links within the ODUk SPRing
can generate working resources and protection resources, which are corresponding to the
working unit and protection unit of the protection group. The TE links without ODUk SPRing
protection are non-protection resources.
ASON Domain
An ASON domain is a subset of a network, which is classified by function for the purpose of
route selection and management. An ASON domain consists of several ASON NEs and TE links.
One ASON NE belongs to one ASON domain.
SPC
In the case of soft permanent connection (SPC), the connection between the user and the
transmission network is configured directly by the NM. The connection within the transmission
network, however, is requested by the NM and then created by the NE's control plane through
signaling. When ASON service is mentioned, it usually refers to SPC.
Permanent connection (PC) is a service connection calculated beforehand and then created
through the NM by issuing a command to NE. A traditional OTN service is a PC.
Switched connection (SC) is a service connection requested by a terminal user (for example, a
router) and is then created in the ASON control plane through signaling.
NOTICE
ASON software only supports SPC. SC is not supported at present.
8.2.10 Function Structure of the OCS ASON

The ASON software is formed by several modules. Each module realizes different functions.
According to ITU-T recommendations, ASON has three planes: a control plane, a management
plane, and a transport plane. The management plane refers to the NM layer, and the transport
plane refers to the SDH network. ASON software is used in the control plane, using LMP, OSPF-
TE, and RSVP-TE.
Table 8-6 Acronyms and abbreviations
RSVP-TE Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering
OSPF-TE Open Shortest Path First-Traffic Engineering

LMP Link Management Protocol
Figure 8-21 shows the structure of the ASON software, which consists of a signaling module,
a routing module and a cross-connection management module.
Figure 8-21 Structure of ASON software

ASON software
Signaling
NMS
module
Cross-connection NE
management software
module
Routing
module
Link management module
Link Management Module

The link management module uses the LMP protocol to perform the following functions.
l Creates and maintains the control channels

l Checks component links and TE links
Signaling Module
The signaling module uses the RSVP-TE protocol to create or remove services according to the
requests from users, and synchronizes and restores services as needed.
Routing Module
The routing module uses the OSPF-TE protocol to perform the following functions.
l Collects and floods TE link information.

l Collects and floods control link information.
l Calculates service route and control route.
Cross-connection Management Module

The cross-connection management module performs the following functions.

l Creates/Deletes cross-connections.
l Reports link state and alarms.
8.2.11 ASON Network Protection and Restoration

As the transmission network develops, the survivability of the network becomes a key factor in
the design, operation and maintenance of the network. An ASON network must have effective
and flexible protection and restoration schemes.
Difference between Protection and Restoration

Generally, protection involves the capacity pre-allocated among NEs. Simple protection
schemes such as the intra-board 1+1 protection and complex protection schemes such as the
ODUk SPRing protection can be configured. Protection only involves NEs and does not involve
the management system. The protection switching time is short and is generally not more than
50ms. The backup resources, however, cannot be shared in the network.
Generally, restoration involves the usage of any usable capacity among NEs. Even the extra
capacity of low priority can be used for restoration. When a service trail fails, the network
automatically searches for a new route and switches the services from the faulty route. The
algorithm that restores is the same as the algorithm that selects the trail. Restoration requires
spare resources in the network for service rerouting. Service rerouting involves the computation
of routes. Service rerouting involves the computation of routes, route switching, and re-creation
of cross-connections and routes. The service restoration takes a relatively long time.
Protection in an ASON Network

The traditional protection schemes can still be applied in an ASON network. When a fault occurs,
the protection switching is performed by the transport plane. In this case, the protection switching
does not involve the control plane.
Restoration in an ASON Network

In the case of an ASON network, the rerouting scheme is applied to restore services. When an
LSP fails, the source node computes the best trail for service restoration and then uses signaling
to create an LSP. Then, the new trail carries the services. For the non-revertive services, the
original LSP is deleted after the new LSP is created, however, for the revertive services, the
original LSP would not be deleted.
The advantages of rerouting are listed as follows.

l The services can be restored in a fast and automatic manner.
l After the technology for service restoration is applied in an ASON network, less spare
capacity is required when such an ASON network is restored in real time. The bandwidth
utilization is increased considerably. Generally, if a network involves more nodes, the
routes are more complicated and less spare resources are required.
l For OCS network, after the technology for service restoration is applied in an ASON
network, only 30% to 60% of spare capacity is required when such an ASON network is
restored in real time compared with the APS protection or a self-healing ring network. The
bandwidth utilization is increased considerably. Generally, if a network involves more
nodes, the routes are more complicated and less spare resources are required.

Service Restoration
The network restoring schemes can be classified into the centralized restoring scheme and
distributed restoring scheme according to the control mechanism. Huawei ASON applies the
distributed restoring scheme.
If the centralized restoring scheme is applied, a central control system is required to control the
entire network in a comprehensive manner. The central control system contains a very large
network database, which stores all the information about all nodes, links and spare resources.
When a link or a node fails, the fault information is reported to the central control system along
other routes. The central control system then computes a route to replace the faulty route
according to the information stored in the database. The central control system then issues control
commands to each node. A route is created to restore the services.
The distributed restoring scheme does not require any central control system. When a link fails,
the nodes at both ends of the faulty link detect the fault and flood this information to the entire
network. When a node fails, the adjacent nodes detect the fault and flood this information to the
entire network. All LSPs that are involved with the faulty link or node then reroute and new
LSPs are created to restore services.
In OTN ASON network, when a fiber cut occurs, the WDM ASON OCh trail and WDM ASON
ODUk trail can restore separately. You can set the delay time for the trail recovery. There is,
however, no delay by default.
8.3 Creation and Deletion of the ASON Trail

The RSVP-TE signaling is needed during the process of creation, deletion, change and rerouting
of the ASON trail.
8.3.1 Creation of an LSP

The creation of an ASON trail is the creation of an LSP.
Configuration Trait
The service configuration of the ASON WDM products has the following traits:
l Support the end-to-end bidirectional services of wavelength level based on the OCh trail.
The source and sink of the services must be the WDM-side optical interfaces of the OTU
board.
l Supports the end-to-end bidirectional services on the level of ODUk. That is, after you
specify the source/sink node, source/sink slot, source/sink port, source/sink channel ID,
service level, rate, and protection attributes, a sub-wavelength LSP is created automatically.
l Only notice the source and sink of the services but not the intermediate trail in the
configuration of the end-to-end wavelength services.
l Users can set the explicit node, link, the excluded node and link to restrict the service route.
l During route calculation, the ASON software considers the fiber distance, number of node
hops and available bandwidth according to the weights and user cost set by the users to
choose the best route.

As shown in the Figure 8-22, create a bidirectional based on the wavelength services from NE1
to NE3.
Figure 8-22 Creation of an LSP
1 A bi-directional service is to
be created from NE1 to NE3
NE 2
7 4
3
NE 1
5 R2
6
R1 NE 3
2 Compute the route

from NE1 to NE3
The process of LSP creation is as follows:
1. Select the basic information such as service level on the NM, and click the source and sink
nodes that are NE1 and NE3. Respectively select the WDM-side optical interfaces of the
corresponding OTU boards and set the constraint condition of the route according to the
actual use. After confirming the information, the NM issues a command for service creation
to source node NE1.
2. NE1 invokes the CSPF algorithm to compute the most suitable service route according to
the control topology and service topology, which are obtained by the OSPF-TE through
convergence. For example, such a service route is NE1-NE2-NE3.
3. NE1 uses the RSVP-TE signaling protocol to transmit a message to NE2 according to the
service route. NE1 requests NE2 to reserve resources and create a cross-connection.
4. NE2 uses the RSVP-TE signaling protocol to transmit a message to NE3. NE2 requests
NE3 to reserve resources and create a cross-connection.
5. After NE3 creates the cross-connection, NE3 provides feedback message to NE2.
6. NE2 provides a feedback message to NE1.
7. NE1 receives the feedback message and stores the related information. NE2 then reports
the successful creation of the LSP to the management system.
8.3.2 Deletion of an LSP

The deletion of an LSP is the deletion of an ASON trail.
As shown in the Figure 8-23, the bidirectional service from NE1 to NE3 is deleted.

Figure 8-23 Deletion of an LSP
1 Delete a service
from NE1 to NE3
NE 2
6 3
2
NE 1
4 R2
5
R1 NE 3
The process for deleting an LSP is described as follows.
1. The management system issues a command to NE1. The requirement is that a bidirectional
service from NE1 to NE3 has to be deleted.
2. NE1 deletes the resources used by the LSP and uses the RSVP-TE signaling to transmit a
message to NE2.
3. After receiving the message from NE1, NE2 deletes the resources used by the LSP and
uses the RSVP-TE signaling to transmit a message to NE3.
4. After receiving the message from NE2, NE3 deletes the resources used by the LSP and
provides feedback message to NE2.
5. NE2 provides a feedback message to NE1.
6. NE1 receives the feedback message and stores the related information. NE2 then reports
the successful deletion of the LSP to the management system.
8.3.3 Rerouting of an LSP

After the trigger conditions of rerouting is detected, for the non-revertive services, a new LSP
is created and the original LSP is deleted, while for the revertive services, the original LSP would
be reserved.
Rerouting Process
When an LSP fails, the faulty LSP sends a rerouting request to the control plane to create a new
LSP. After receiving the request, the source node re-computes the route and allocates resources
for the new LSP. Then, the source node starts the creation of the new LSP. For details on the
process of creating the LSP, refer to 8.3.1 Creation of an LSP.
For a non-revertive service, after the new LSP is created, the original LSP is deleted. For details
on the process of deleting the LSP, refer to 8.3.2 Deletion of an LSP.

Optical-Layer Rerouting Triggered by Channel Alarms

l After receiving a channel alarm in a service, the control plane initiates a 30-second delay.
l The service is rerouted if the channel alarm persists after the 30-second delay elapses.
NOTE
l If a preset restoration LSP is configured for the service, the system checks whether the preset
restoration LSP is available. If it is available, the system directly reroutes the service to the preset
restoration LSP. (If two preset restoration LSPs are configured and one of them is found
unavailable, the system will verify the availability of the other LSP and reroute the service to the
other LSP.)
l If no preset restoration LSP is configured or the preset restoration LSP is unavailable, the system
automatically computes routes and tries the best-effort to create a route separate from the original
LSP.
l After the service is rerouted to a new path, the system starts the hysteresis period. The
system does not process any channel alarms generated during this period. In other words,
channel alarms generated during this period no longer trigger service rerouting.
l If the channel alarm is terminated during the hysteresis period, then the LSP of the service
has been created successfully. If the channel alarm in the service is not terminated during
the 6 minutes after the new LSP is created, then LSP creation is considered as a failure and
the service is switched back to the original LSP.
NOTICE
l Because rerouting is triggered only 30 seconds after a channel alarm is generated, the service
interruption time is relatively long.
l The control plane cannot determine the specific fault point, so it is possible that the service
remains interrupted after it is rerouted to a new LSP.
l After the service is rerouted, there is a hysteresis period of 90 seconds. If the channel alarm
persists after the 90 seconds, the system starts another hysteresis period and repeats the
process until the accumulated hysteresis time reaches 6 minutes.
Electrical-Layer Rerouting Triggered by Channel Alarms

l After receiving a channel alarm in a service, the control plane initiates a five-second delay.
l Five seconds later, the control plane begins identifying the channel alarm and then initiates
rerouting.
NOTE
l If a preset restoration LSP is configured for the service, the system checks whether the preset
restoration LSP is available. If it is available, the system directly reroutes the service to the preset
restoration LSP. (If two preset restoration LSPs are configured and one of them is found
unavailable, the system will verify the availability of the other LSP and reroute the service to the
other LSP.)
l If no preset restoration LSP is configured or the preset restoration LSP is unavailable, the system
automatically computes routes and selects the best route based on the user-defined routing
policies.

8.3.4 Change of an LSP

The change of an LSP is to improve an ASON trail.
The process for the change of an LSP is as follows.
1. The management system issues the command to the source node to change the LSP. After
receiving the request, the source node starts creating a new LSP. Refer to 8.3.1 Creation
of an LSP.
2. After the new LSP is created, the source node and the destination node start to switch the
cross-connection from the original LSP to the new LSP.
3. After the switching, the source node starts the process for the deletion of the original LSP.
Refer to 8.3.2 Deletion of an LSP.
8.4 Specifications of ASON Services

This section describes the related specifications of ASON services.
Table 8-7 lists specifications and functions of ASON.
Table 8-7 ASON specifications
Item Optical-Layer Electrical-Layer SDH ASON

ASON ASON
Control channel D4-D12 bytes of the RES or GCC bytes D4-D12 bytes of SDH
optical supervisory of the OTN multiplex section
channel (OSC) in overhead. overheads
outband manner. The system uses
RES bytes by
default.
Supported service Services of OCh Services of ODUk VC4-level services,

type wavelength level wavelength level including STM-4,
(Supports grooming (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, STM-16, and STM-64
of wavelengths at FLEX).
the rate of 10 Gbit/s,
40 Gbit/s, and 100
Gbit/s).
Supported SLA Dual-Homing Diamond, silver, Diamond, gold, silver,

diamond, Silver and and copper. copper, and iron
copper.
Hardware FIU board, SC1/2 Cross-connect Cross-connect boards

configuration board, WSS board, boards and relevant and relevant tributary/
requirements and OTU board. tributary boards. line boards

Item Optical-Layer Electrical-Layer SDH ASON

ASON ASON
Rerouting After a service is After a service is If a service is interrupted,

mechanism interrupted, interrupted, a new a new service is created
rerouting is initiated service is created by using the cross-
on the source node, through cross- connect board or the
and a new trail is connections on the cross-connection on the
created through centralized cross- tributary/line board.
ROADM cross- connect board.
connections.
Special technology Wavelength tunable - -

rerouting, which
solves the
wavelength
blocking problem in
rerouting.
Rerouting trigger For detailed information refer to Table 8-8.

conditions
For the WDM service of the OTN networking, Table 8-8 lists the trigger conditions of LSP
rerouting.

Table 8-8 Trigger conditions of rerouting
Event Alarms That Trigger Rerouting

Type
SF The trigger conditions of optical-layer service rerouting include the following

alarms of the FIU and OTU board:
FIU: BD_STATUS, MUT_LOS
OTU: R_LOS, OTUk_LOF, OTUk_LOM
NOTE
l For optical-layer ASON services, the preceding alarms of an FIU board can be used
as SF conditions to trigger rerouting. This function is enabled by default. Users do not
need to enable it using the NMS.
l For optical-layer ASON services, the preceding channel alarms of an OTU board can
be used as SF conditions to trigger rerouting. This function is disabled by default. Users
need to enable it at the source ASON NE using the NMS. For details, see Setting
Rerouting Triggered by Optical-Layer Channel Alarms.
The trigger conditions of electrical-layer service rerouting include the following
alarms of the OTU board:
ODUk_PM_AIS, ODUk_PM_OCI, ODUk_PM_LCK, ODUk_PM_SSF
OTUk_AIS, OTUk_LOF, OTUk_LOM.
NOTE
For electrical-layer ASON services, the preceding alarms of an OTU board can be used as
SF conditions to trigger rerouting. This function is enabled by default. Users do not need
to enable it using the NMS.
For the SDH service of the OCS networking the following alarms trigger the
LSP rerouting:
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, BD_STATUS, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,
AU_AIS, and AU_LOP

Event Alarms That Trigger Rerouting

Type
SD The trigger conditions of optical-layer service rerouting include the following

electrical-layer service alarms of the OTU board:
OTUk_DEG, OTUk_EXC
The trigger conditions of electrical-layer service rerouting include the following
electrical-layer service alarms of the OTU board:
ODUk_PM_DEG, ODUk_PM_EXC
OTUk_DEG, OTUk_EXC
For the SDH service of the OCS networking the following alarms trigger the
LSP rerouting:
B3_EXC and B3_SD
NOTE
For an optical-layer ASON network, the thresholds for the alarms in the PM section and
the thresholds for the alarms in the SM section of OTN overhead must be set to the same.
When BIP8 Detection Mode is Bursty, DEG Threshold, DEG Detection Time, and
DEG Detection Time Window (ms) for the PM section must be set to the same as those
for the SM section. When BIP8 Detection Mode is Poisson, Threshold-Crossing
Threshold and Degrade Threshold for the PM section must be the same as those for the
SM section.
NOTE
When the BIP detection is of the burst mode, the ODUk_PM_DEG or OTUk_DEG alarm
is reported. When the BIP detection is of the Poisson mode, the ODUk_PM_DEG,
OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_EXC or OTUk_EXC alarm is reported.
NOTE
Electrical-layer alarms of an OTU board can be used as SD conditions to trigger rerouting.
This function, however, is disabled by default. Users need to enable the function for the
desired ASON services using the NMS. For details, see Setting the SD Alarm to Trigger
Rerouting.
Alarms in ASON services can be used as SD conditions to trigger rerouting when the following
configurations are provided:
l For optical-layer ASON services, rerouting triggered by SD is enabled for the services and
rerouting triggered by SF is enabled for the related NE.
l For electrical-layer ASON services, rerouting triggered by SD is enabled.
Table 8-9 lists the functions of optical-layer ASON services of different SLAs.
Table 8-9 Functions of optical-layer ASON services of different SLAs
Item Dual-Homing Silver Service Copper Service

Diamond Service
Protection and Protection and Restoration No protection

restoration policy restoration No restoration

Item Dual-Homing Silver Service Copper Service

Diamond Service
Technologies for Client 1+1 Rerouting -

implementation protection and
rerouting
Technical Protection always Real-time -

implementation provided when the computation without
network bandwidth presetting protection
is available channels
Bandwidth utilization Low High Excessively high
Support Route pre- Supported Supported Supported

ed computatio
function n
s
Route Supported Supported Supported
optimizati
on and
service
reversion
Conversio Supported Supported Supported

n between
traditional
and ASON
services
Switching Supported Supported Supported

between
services of
different
SLAs
Pre-set Supported Supported -

restoration
trail
Service - Supported Supported

association
Wavelengt Supported Supported -

h tunable
rerouting
Optical Supported Supported Supported

parameters
Table 8-10 lists the functions of electrical-layer ASON services of different SLAs.

Table 8-10 Functions of electrical-layer ASON services of different SLAs
Item Diamond Service Silver Service Copper Service
Protection and Protection and Restoration No protection

restoration policy restoration No restoration
Technologies for ODUk SNCP and Rerouting -

implementation rerouting
Technical Protection always Real-time -

implementation provided when the computation without
network bandwidth presetting protection
is available channels
Bandwidth utilization Low High Excessively high
Support Routing Supported Supported Supported

ed pre-
function computatio
s n
Route Supported Supported Route optimization

optimizatio supported, service
n and reversion not
service supported
reversion
Conversio Supported Supported Supported

n between
traditional
and ASON
services
Switching Supported Supported Supported

between
services of
different
SLAs
Pre-set Supported Supported -

restoration
trail
Service - Supported Supported

association
Wavelengt - - -
h tunable
rerouting
Table 8-11 shows the functions of SDH ASON services of different SLAs.

Table 8-11 Functions of SDH ASON services of different SLAs
Item Diamond Gold Silver Copper Iron

Service Service Service Service Service
Protection Protection Protection Restoration No No

and and and protection, protection,
restoration restoration restoration no no
policy restoration restoration,
allowing for
pre-emption
Technologies SNCP MSP Rerouting - -

for protection protection
implementati and and
on rerouting rerouting
Technical SNCP MSP Trails need - -

implementati protection is protection to be restored
on automaticall needs to be through
y configured configured dynamic trail
by the beforehand. computation.
control Trails need No
plane. An to be restored protection
interrupted through trails need to
trail, either dynamic trail be
working or computation. configured
protection, beforehand.
can be
restored
through
dynamic
trail
computation
. 1+1 SNCP
protection is
available as
long as
sufficient
bandwidth is
available.
Bandwidth Low High High Excessively Excessively

utilization high high
Sup Routin Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

port g pre-
ed compu
func tation
tion
s


Route Supported Supported Supported Route Route

optimi optimization optimization
zation supported, supported,
and service service
servic reversion not reversion not
e supported supported
reversi
on
Conve Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

rsion
betwe
en
traditi
onal
and
ASON
servic
es
Switc Supported Supported Supported Supported -

hing
betwe
en
servic
es of
differe
nt
SLAs
Pre- Supported Supported Supported - -

set
restora
tion
trail
Servic - - Supported Supported -

e
associ
ation
8.5 Conditions for Configuring ASON Services

Certain configuration conditions must be met to ensure successful creation of ASON services.

NOTE
The optical power of each channel of an ASON NE must be controlled by the software, and thus an EVOA
must be configured inside an ASON NE.
NOTE
If required, both optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON can be enabled for an ASON NE. However,
electrical-layer ASON services and optical-layer ASON services must be separate from each other.
The hardware prerequisites for enabling ASON features are as follows:
l It is required to configure two SCC boards in the master subrack.

l For optical-layer ASON, configure WSS, OSC, FIU, and MCA/OPM boards.
l For electrical-layer ASON and SDH ASON, configure centralized cross-connect boards
and tributary/line boards.
The software prerequisites for enabling ASON features are as follows:
l The NE software version must support the ASON features. Contact Huawei engineers to
determine whether the current NE software version supports the ASON features.
l The version of the mapping NMS that is delivered must support the ASON features.
l The ASON features are controlled by the license on the NMS. The ASON features can be
enabled for only users who apply for and purchase this license or obtain a special permission
from Huawei.
NOTE
There are two types of license: the license for basic ASON features and the license for enabling services.
The first type of license is used to control the ASON features of a single station. The second type of license
is specific for the services on the entire network and is used to control the number of services of different
rates on an ASON network.
Configuring Optical-Layer ASON Services

The process of configuring the optical-layer ASON services is more complex than the process
of configuring the electrical-layer ASON services. Their restoration routes are not fixed.
Therefore, the reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) board should be
configured.
l One pair of WSS boards should be configured for each dimension.

l In the case of silver services, one pair of WSS boards should be configured at each
wavelength add/drop node.
The ASON protocol is embedded in the OSC overheads. Hence, the OSC board must be
configured.
Figure 8-24, which is the diagram for configuring the optical-layer ASON services, shows the
number of WSS boards required by the sliver services.

Figure 8-24 Configuring optical-layer ASON services
Does not
support
OTU reroute
M40/D40
RDU9 WSM9
W FIU FIU E
WSM9 RDU9
OSC RDU9 WSM9 OSC
M40/D40 Protection
trail Support
Working reroute
trail
OTU
Configuring Electrical-Layer ASON Services

In the case of electrical-layer ASON services, a centralized cross-connect board must be used
to groom sub-wavelength services. In the case of a site where the main and slave subracks are
configured, electrical-layer cross-connections cannot be groomed between subracks (between
the master and slave subracks and between slave subracks). Hence, the working trail and
protection trail (or restoration trail) of the electrical-layer services must be led out from the site
through the same subrack. See Figure 8-25.

Figure 8-25 Configuring electrical-layer ASON services

Tributary Working Cross-Connect Protection Retrieve
board board board board board
T N N N
Q S S S
X 2 2 2
Configuring SDH ASON Services

In the case of SDH ASON services, a cross-connect board must be used to groom STM services.
In the case of an NE that comprises master and slave subracks, SDH tributary/line boards and
cross-connect boards can only be installed on the master subrack. Therefore, the working trail,
protection trail, and restoration trail of the SDH ASON services must be configured on the master
subrack.
8.6 OTN ASON Feature

The OptiX OSN WDM series products of Huawei can provide the OTN ASON function after
the ASON software is loaded.
8.6.1 End-to-End Service Configuration

The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.
The ASON supports both WDM permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services. To
configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, and protection
level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all automatically
completed by the network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit link and
excluded link to constrain the service routing.
For example, consider the configuration of an ASON service between A and I in Figure 8-26.
The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-connection at nodes A,
D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I, the network calculates the best
route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route.
The service is created as follows:
l Choose the bandwidth granularity.

l Choose the server level.

l Choose the source node.

l Choose the sink node.
l According to the service bandwidth and existing network resources, the ASON software
computes a proper service trail through the routing protocol.
l The ASON software sets up end-to-end service connections between sites through the
RSVP-TE signaling protocol.
Figure 8-26 End-to-end service configuration
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
:ASON NE
:User Equipment
The system support optical-layer ASON services that cross electrical regeneration NEs,
including:
l Creation, reroute, and optimization of SLA services, and wavelength-tunable ASON
services crossing electrical regeneration NEs.
l Conversion of crossing electrical regenerator service from static wavelength services to
ASON wavelength services and the vice versa.
l Pre-calculation of the optical-layer ASON services when the services cross electrical
regeneration NEs, including the creation, optimization, and restoration trail preset of SLA
services.
NOTE
The regeneration mode of the electrical regeneration NEs that the ASON services cross must be in the
transparent transmission mode and cannot be in the electrical cross-connect back-to-back mode.
8.6.2 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration

The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network
security.
As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability. Compared
with the traditional WDM network, this networking mode also provides more than one recovery

route for each services so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network
security.
On a mesh network, to make the interrupted services available, you can immediately restore the
services through the rerouting mechanism in addition to the traditional protection scheme such
as 1+1 protection and shared protection scheme such as ODUk SPRing. That is, the mesh
network can support traditional protection schemes, the services that can be dynamically
restored, and service restoration mechanisms in case of protection failures. In this manner,
services are not interrupted only if the resources are available.
As shown in Figure 8-27, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network calculates
another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.
Figure 8-27 Trail restoration
Recovery route
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
:ASON NE
:User Equipment
NOTE
In the case of the optical-layer ASON, a wavelength service must be in a channel from end to end. Hence,
the restoration trail with the same channel as that of the original trail may not be found during rerouting.
In this case, the ASON software supports the wavelength tunable function during rerouting. If an end-to-
end restoration trail with the same channel as that of the original trail cannot be found (for example, the
channel in a span is used), the ASON software will try to find another end-to-end restoration trail with
another channel so that the services can be restored to the greatest extent. Note that this function is available
only when the OTU board supports the wavelength tunable function.
8.6.3 Automatic Discovery of Topologies and Resources

Management
On an ASON network, link resources, network topologies, and fibers between sites can be
automatically discovered, and then a network map is automatically generated. The ASON
software dynamically obtains the resource status of the wavelength/sub-wavelength services in
real time, including the occupied and idle resources, providing a quick approach to know the
current network capacity.

For any change to network resources and topologies, such as adding/deleting links, changing
link parameters, adding/deleting network nodes, the ASON software may refresh the relevant
information in real time and inform the network management plane. This facilitates the network
expansion and network reconstruction.
8.6.3.1 Auto-Discovery of ASON NEs

In the ASON network, the OSPF protocol discovers ASON NEs automatically by sending the
protocol packets.
After discovering the neighbor NEs, the OSPF protocol floods the information about the
neighbor NEs to other NEs. In the end, every ASON NE in the domain has the information about
all ASON NEs in the entire ASON domain.
l When an ASON NE is added to an ASON network, other NEs are able to automatically
discover the new NE by using the OSPF protocol.
l When an ASON NE is removed from an ASON network (for example, power off the NE,
remove the SCC board, or shut down the physical channel), other NEs are able to
automatically detect the missing of this NE.
As shown in Figure 8-28, if two ASON NEs are added, the source topology on the U2000 is
automatically updated in real time.
Figure 8-28 TE link automatic discovery
R1 R4
New NE
R2
R3
:ASON NE
:User equipment
8.6.3.2 Auto-Discovery of Control Links

The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.
When the fiber connection (including the inter-station fiber automatically discovered and the
intra-station fiber manually configured) is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses
the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own

control links to the entire network. See Figure 8-29. As a result, each NE obtains the information
of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-
wide control topology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes
the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which
is used for the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets.
Figure 8-29 Auto-discovery of control links
ASON Domain
When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically discover
the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the management
system. See Figure 8-30.

Figure 8-30 Management of control topology
R1 R4
R2
R3
:ASON NE
: User equipment
8.6.3.3 Auto-Discovery of TE Links

The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TE
link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire network
through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wide
resource topology.
ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion and
addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to U2000,
which performs a real-time refresh.
As shown in Figure 8-31, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayed
on the NM in real time.

Figure 8-31 TE link auto-discovery
R1 R4
R2
R3
:ASON NE
:User Equipment
8.6.3.4 Monitoring Link Loss Status

The ASON software accurately detects loss status of optical-layer links. Accurate link loss status
ensures accurate trail calculation and a higher success rate of optical-layer ASON rerouting,
which means higher reliability and security of optical-layer ASON services.
The ASON software uses the following functions regarding link loss status monitoring to resolve
link-related issues that are likely to happen during deployment, expansion, routine operation,
and maintenance.
Initializing Link Loss Status

The system cannot detect link loss status immediately after a TE link is created or restored, and
the link OSNR performance may be unstable. At this time, provisioning services on this link is
risky.
Link loss status is unknown when a TE link is in any of the following states and the ASON
software will downgrade the TE link to exclude it from trail calculation. In this manner, services
will not be affected by the unstable link loss status.
l The link was just created but has not been commissioned.
l The link was restored from outages like interruption (instead of link loss outages).
l The link was restored after a restart.
Detecting Link Loss Status

Link loss outages may result when components are aged, fibers are bent or repeatedly spliced.
When link loss increases, the system OSNR performance will deteriorate. If the link loss is not

restored in time, services that are carried over the link will deteriorate. The ASON software is
capable of detecting link loss status in real time. When detecting a link loss outage, it may reports
a CPW_OMS_SEGMENT_DEG alarm, and adjusts system power using the automatic level
control (ALC) function.
NOTE
You are advised to configure and enable the ALC function; if the function is not configured and enabled,
the ASON software will not automatically adjust the link optical power of an OMS section when detecting
a link loss outage. The performance deterioration caused by deteriorated optical cables cannot be optimized
using the ALC function. In this case, you are advised to configure electrical-layer protection based on the
practical network conditions.
NOTICE
Services on new wavelengths may be affected if links with abnormal OMS attenuation are used
to carry services. Therefore, these links need to be optimized before being used. You can also
set whether to use links with abnormal OMS attenuation on the U2000. For details about the
setting operations, see Setting the Enable Status of Links with Abnormal OMS Attenuation.
Calculating Link OSNR

If link loss changes and so does link OSNR performance when link loss status is under detection,
OSNR will be re-calculated to ensure correct optical parameter calculation for the rerouting
purpose. The ASON software implements the process as follows:
l Calculates per-channel input power based on the detected link loss and then calculates
OSNR and incident power based on the current OA gain and noise index.
l The system floods the calculated OSNR and incident power.
Monitoring Unloaded Links

For unloaded links on an ASON network, the ASON software detects link loss status by enabling
a laser to emit colorless light.
Specifically, if detecting no service cross-connection at the transmit and receive ROADM sites,
the ASON software enables a laser to emit colorless light to check the trails without cross-
connections.
When detecting the following conditions, the ASON software automatically disables the laser
from emitting colorless light, without affecting service creation or restoration:
l ASON services or traditional optical-layer services are created on the link.

l An ASON node is restarted.
l The ASON feature or optical-layer ASON feature is disabled.
l The maintenance channel in the OMS section is deleted because of an outage.
NOTE
The ASON software can monitor service performance and boards can report performance events related
to bit errors only after the performance monitoring function is enabled on the NE.

8.6.3.5 Wavelength Range Configuration and Management

As services are continuously expanded, 10G/40G hybrid transmission and coherent and non-
coherent hybrid transmission become more common. However, hybrid transmission affects
service transmission performance to some extent. Based on network environments or planning
requirements, available wavelength range can be set for each service type so that each type of
service is transmitted within the specified range and not affected by another type of service.
The following precautions need to be taken when you configure the wavelength range:
l The wavelength range can be set for only three types of services: 10G services, 40G DQPSK
services, and coherent services.
l Different service types can have completely different wavelength ranges or share some
wavelengths. For example, for hybrid transmission of coherent and 10G services, a guard
band needs to be set to prevent service performance from being affected. The available
wavelength range can be set to 1-59 for coherent services and 65-80 for 10G services, so
that the two types of services are isolated from each other. For another example, when
coherent services and 40G DQPSK services are transmitted together, the available
wavelength range can be set to 1-60 for coherent service and 40-80 for 40G DQPSK
services. With such configuration, the two types of services share some wavelengths.
l When different types of services are provisioned, the default available wavelength range
for each type is 1-80. If the available wavelength range is set for only one service type, no
wavelength will be available for other types of services and therefore related optical-layer
services cannot be created.
NOTE
For principles of setting the guard band, see Dependencies and Limitations. Different networks have
different requirements on the guard band. For details on the guard band requirement, contact Huawei
engineers who will design the guard band based on the actual scenario.
The wavelength range for a service type can be set on the NMS. For details, see Setting Optical
Parameters.
8.6.4 SLA Classification of Services

The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection,
as listed in Table 8-12.
Table 8-12 Service level (WDM Service)
Service Protection Implement Switchi Rerouting Bandwidth

and ation ng Time Time Utilization
Restoratio Means
n Scheme
Diamond Protection intra-board 1 Less than The rerouting 33% (1+1

service and +1 50 ms time varies with protection. One
restoration protection, the network restoration trail
ODUk size, capacity is reserved.)
SNCP and and service
rerouting types.

Service Protection Implement Switchi Rerouting Bandwidth

and ation ng Time Time Utilization
Restoratio Means
n Scheme
Silver Restoration Rerouting - 75% (Shared

service mesh protection,
resulting in high
utilization of
resources.
Consider a four-
dimensional
node as an
example. The
resource
utilization is
75% in the case
of a single fiber
break.)
Copper No - - - 100% (No

service protection protection.
No Theoretically,
restoration the resources
can be fully
occupied.)
8.6.4.1 Diamond WDM ASON Trail

Diamond WDM ASON trails have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources
on the network, diamond WDM ASON trails provide a permanent 1+1 protection for the WDM
ASON diamond OCh trail, ODUk trail. Diamond services are applicable to voice and data
services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation.
A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It is
also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available between
the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. One is the
working LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the working
LSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is proper, the sink node receives
the service from the working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP.

NOTICE
Before provisioning optical-layer diamond ASON services (currently supports the OTU+OLP
configuration only), evaluate the target network because optical-layer diamond ASON services
have requirements on network configurations.
l For a network where dispersion compensation is performed (for example a network carrying
40G services), the residual dispersion on the working LSP may be greatly different from that
on the protection LSP. As a result, when services are switched from the working LSP to the
protection LSP, service connection restoration may take long time and even service
interruption may persist. Therefore, optical-layer diamond ASON services do not apply to
such a network, but apply to a pure coherent network where dispersion compensation is not
conducted.
l As the wavelength remains the same after the OLP board performs optical split, two local
dimensions need to be configured at the ROADM site for adding and dropping wavelengths
when optical-layer diamond ASON service protection is implemented using the OTU+OLP
configuration.
l Rerouting of optical-layer diamond ASON services cannot be achieved by changing
wavelengths.
l The working and protection channels must use the same drop wavelength mode: a
multiplexed wavelength is dropped using the TD20 or RDU9 board, or single wavelengths
are dropped.
l The OTU and OLP boards must be located on the same NE.
Figure 8-32 shows a diamond service.
Figure 8-32 Diamond Services
Working LSP
R1 R4
E I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
Protection LSP : ASON NE
: User equipment

NOTE
In the creation of diamond services, two LSPs are generated, which have the feature of 1+1 protection for
traditional WDM services. The working trail corresponds to the working LSP, and the protection trail
corresponds to the protection LSP. When the working trail fails, the protection switching is performed
through the traditional WDM 1+1 protection and then a new LSP is created through rerouting.
The following rerouting policies apply to diamond services:

l Permanent 1+1: Rerouting triggered by the active or standby trail interruption.
l Rerouting 1+1: Rerouting triggered by interruption of both active and standby trails.
l Flex P&R: When the P budget is not exhausted, rerouting will always be triggered if either
LSP fails. After the P budget is exhausted, rerouting will be triggered only when both LSPs
fail. After the R budget is exhausted, rerouting will be stopped (P refers to protection times
and R to rerouting times).
l Non-rerouting 1+1: No rerouting triggered by the active or standby trail interruption.
Table 8-13 lists the attributes of the diamond services.
Table 8-13 Attributes of the diamond services
Attribu Permanent 1 Rerouting 1+1 Flex P&R Non-rerouting

te +1 1+1
Require Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the
ments sink node.
for
creation
Protecti During creation, diamond services generate the services that have the traditional
on type WDM 1+1 protection attribute at the same time. Different ASON trails support
different protection schemes.
For WDM ASON OCh trail: supports intra-board 1+1 protection. (The protection
scheme is OTU+OLP dual-feed.)
For WDM ASON ODUk trail: supports ODUk SNCP.


te +1 1+1
Protecti l If the l When the When resources l When the

on and resources are standby LSP are sufficient, active LSP
restorati sufficient, fails, services ASON services can fails, services
on two LSPs are are not be protected for P are switched
always switched. times and rerouted to the standby
available for Rerouting is not for R times to get LSP for
a permanent triggered. restored. transmission.
1+1 diamond l When the active Rerouting is
service. One LSP fails, not triggered.
is the active services are l When the
LSP and the switched to the standby LSP
other is the standby LSP for fails, services
standby LSP. transmission. are not
l If the Rerouting is not switched.
resources are triggered. Rerouting is
not l When both the not triggered.
sufficient, active and the l When both
one valid standby LSPs the active and
LSP can still fail, rerouting is the standby
be reserved triggered to LSPs fail,
for a create a new rerouting is
permanent 1 LSP to restore not triggered.
+1 diamond services.
service to
ensure the
service
survivability
. The other
LSP is also
available but
may be
invalid.
Reroutin l Supports rerouting lockout. -

g l Supports rerouting priority.
l Supports several rerouting policies:
– Use existing trails whenever possible
– Do not use existing trails whenever possible
– Best route
– Simulated span restoration policy
Revertiv Supports reverting to the previous route. -

e


te +1 1+1
Preset Supports setting the preset restoring trail. -

restoring
trail
Service l Supports conversion between diamond services and traditional 1+1 services.
conversi l Supports conversion between diamond WDM ASON trails and silver WDM
on ASON trails.
l Supports conversion between diamond WDM ASON trails and copper WDM
ASON trails.
NOTE
In the case of the WDM ASON OCh trails, the conversion between the diamond and silver
or copper levels is not supported.
Service Supports manual switching.

switchin
g
Service Supports manual service optimization.

optimiza
tion
NOTE
When diamond ODUk ASON WDM trails are created, setting the SNC/N(PM) and SNC/S(TCM) modes
is supported.
When k is 0 or FLEX, only the non-intrusive monitoring (SNC/N(PM)) is supported. When k is 1, 2, 3 or
4, the sub-layer monitoring (SNC/S(TCM)) and non-intrusive monitoring (SNC/N(PM)) are supported.
When the SNCP type is set as sub-layer monitoring, the U2000 supports setting TCM layers (TCM=1–6).
Traditional services in SNC/I, SNC/N, and SNC/S protection modes can be upgraded into diamond ASON
services with the protection modes unchanged. After rerouting, SNC protection for services in the SNC/I
and SNC/S(TCM) protection modes changes into SNC/N(PM).
Traditional ODU0 or ODUFLEX services support the SNC/S mode. After the traditional ODU0 or
ODUFLEX services in the SNC/S mode are upgraded to diamond ASON services and rerouted or
optimized, the SNC mode of the services is changed to SNC/N(PM).
8.6.4.2 Dual-Homing Diamond ASON Trails

Dual-homing diamond ASON trails are used to carry the same service from two different access
points on the same node, providing client 1+1 protection for the service. The dual-homing
diamond ASON trails are managed as one ASON service, to facilitate operation and
maintenance. Dual-homing diamond ASON trails are applicable only to optical-layer OCh trails
and they have the same protection capability and application as common diamond ASON trails.
Dual-homing diamond ASON trails provide permanent 1+1 protection for services if sufficient
resources are available.
Figure 8-33 shows typical application of dual-homing diamond ASON trails, where the source
and destination nodes use dual-homing service access.

Figure 8-33 Application of dual-homing diamond ASON trails
ASON Network Working LSP
E I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
Protection LSP
NOTE
In the creation of dual-homing diamond services, two LSPs are generated, which have the feature of 1+1
protection for traditional WDM services. The working trail corresponds to the working LSP, and the
protection trail to the protection LSP. When the working trail fails, protection switching is performed
through the traditional WDM 1+1 protection and then a new LSP is created through rerouting.
Dual-homing diamond ASON services must be created on both the source and destination nodes.
Dual-homing diamond ASON trails have the same rerouting policy and features as common
diamond services. See 8.6.4.1 Diamond WDM ASON Trail for details.
8.6.4.3 Silver WDM ASON Trail

Silver WDM ASON services, including WDM ASON OCh trails, ODUk trails. The silver level
service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.
Silver services refer to the service connections from the source node to the destination node with
the rerouting protection attribute. They are also called rerouting services. If the LSP of the silver
services fails, rerouting is repeatedly initiated to restore the services until the rerouting is
successful. The silver services compute the restoration tail in real time, and thus no resource
needs to be reserved in advance. Hence, the bandwidth utilization is high. If there are not enough
resources, the services may be interrupted.
As shown in Figure 8-34, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is
cut, the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber.
Hence, services are protected.

Figure 8-34 A silver service
R1 R4
E
LSP after rerouting
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
Original LSP R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 8-14 lists the attributes of silver services.
Table 8-14 Attributes of silver services
Attribute Silver Services
Requirements for creation Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the
source node and the sink node.
Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a
new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout.

l Supports rerouting priority.
l Supports several rerouting policies:
– Best route
– Simulated span restoration policy
Revertive Services in the WDM ASON ODUk, OCh trail support reverting
to the previous route manually or automatically.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.

Service migration l Supports migration between silver services and traditional

unprotected services without affecting them.
l Supports migration between silver services and diamond
services.
l Supports migration between silver services and copper
services.
NOTE
In the case of the WDM ASON OCh trails, only migration between the
copper services and silver services is supported.
Service optimization Supports manual service optimization.
Service association Supports service association.
8.6.4.4 Copper WDM ASON Trail

The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services
in holidays, are configured as copper services. The copper WDM ASON trails are classified into
OCh trail and ODUk trail.
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not reroute
and are interrupted. Table 8-15 lists the attributes of copper services.
Table 8-15 Attributes of copper services
Attribute Silver Service
Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source
creation node and the sink node.
Service restoration Does not support rerouting.
Service migration l Supports migration between copper services and traditional

services.
l Supports migration between copper services and diamond services.
l Supports migration between copper services and silver services.
NOTE
In the case of the WDM ASON OCh trails, only migration between the copper
services and silver services is supported.
Service Supports manual service optimization.

optimization

8.6.5 Rerouting Trigger Policy

When setting route attributes for ASON trails, the user can choose a proper rerouting trigger
policy based on the actual network demands.
Rerouting restroation trigger policy consists the following types:
l Rerouting triggered by the active or standby trail interruption

l Rerouting triggered by interruption of both active and standby trails
l No rerouting triggered by the active or standby trail interruption
l Rerouting triggered by Flex Protection and Restoration (Flex P&R; the protection and
restoration times can be set)
Rerouting triggered by the active or standby trail interruption

This policy is supported by diamond services, dual-homing diamond services and associated
silver services. Rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP when either of the two LSPs (active
and standby) between the source node and the sink node is interrupted. This ensures two LSPs
(active and standby) are configured to protect services in resources sufficient conditions.
Rerouting triggered by interruption of both active and standby trails

This policy is supported by diamond services, dual-homing diamond services and associated
silver services. Rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP when both active and standby trails
between the source node and the sink node are interrupted.
No rerouting triggered by the active or standby trail interruption

This policy is supported by diamond servicesand dual-homing diamond services. No rerouting
is triggered whether the active or standby trail between the source node and the sink node is
interrupted.
Rerouting triggered by Flex P&R

Flex P&R stands for Flexible Protection and Restoration Mechanism. As an innovative ASON
protection strategy, Flex P&R allows for protection switchovers whose count is P and rerouting
whose count is R. Diamond services and associated silver services support settings of protection
and restoration times. Silver services support the setting of rerouting times.
Flex P&R has the following advantages:
l After several failures of an ASON network, limited bandwidth can be fully utilized for
service restoration.
l The user can specify the values of P and R on the NMS.
The following describes "P" and "R" for flex P&R:
l "P" stands for the times of protection switchovers. For diamond services, dual-homing
diamond services, and associated silver services originated from the same sources, "P"
represents the times of protection switching but not the times of rerouting triggered by
single-LSP failures. Each time an LSP is cut, 1+1 protection switching will be triggered
one time and one more new route is calculated for the service. The "P" value is decreased

by 1 until it is decreased to 0. When the last supported LSP cut occurs (P = 1 then), 1+1
protection switching is implemented but no new route is calculated. In other words, flex
P&R actually supports "P - 1" times of rerouting triggered by single-LSP failures. If the
originally cut LSP is restored to normal after the "P" value reaches 0, one time of 1+1
protection switching is supported but the "P" value retains 0.
l "R" stands for the times of restoration. For diamond services, dual-homing diamond
services, and associated silver services (originated from the same sources) whose "P" value
reaches 0, and silver services, "R" represents the times of rerouting triggered by dual-LSP
failures.
As shown in Table 8-16, only certain services provide Flex P&R, and the value range of P and
R differs depending on service types. The user can specify P and R according to this table.
Table 8-16 Relationship between Flex P&R and various service types
Item Diamond Service Silver Service Copper Service

(Including Dual-
Homing Diamond
Service)
Whether the service Yes Yes No

provides Flex P&R
Value range of P 1 to 10 l Non-associated -

Default value: 2 silver services: 0
l Associated silver
services: 1 to 10
Default value: 2
Value range of R 0 to 100, and l Non-associated -

Permanent silver services: 1
Restoration to 100 Default
Default value: value: 100
Permanent l Associated silver
Restoration services: 0 to 100,
and Permanent
Restoration
Default value:
Permanent
Restoration
NOTE
l Only revertive services support rerouting triggered by Flex P&R.

l The diamond services support permanent protection. If network resources are sufficient, permanent 1
+1 protection is allowed for diamond services.
l If a service supports permanent restoration and network resources are sufficient, rerouting occurs upon
service interruption.
l The Flex P&R is supported only if the two silver services that share the same source node are associated.
Figure 8-35 shows the rerouting procedure triggered by Flex P&R.

Figure 8-35 Rerouting triggered by Flex P&R

L5 L5
L3 Interruption L3
L1 of L1 L1
L2 L2
L4 L4
L6 L6
A B A B
Scenario 1: Scenario 2:
Interruption
P = 2, R = 2 RRT_P = 1, RRT_R = 0
of L3
Working trail: L1 Working trail: L2
Protection trail: L2 Protection trail: L3
L5 L5
L3 Interruption L3
L1 of L2 L1
L2 L2
L4 L4
L6 L6
A B A B
Interruption RRT_P = 2, RRT_R = 1 RRT_P = 2, RRT_R = 0
of L4 Working trail: L4 Working trail: L2
Protection trail: L3 (interrupted) Protection trail: L3 (interrupted)
L5 L5
L3 Interruption L3
L1 of L5 L1
L2 L2
L4 L4
L6 L6
A B A B
RRT_P = 2, RRT_R = 2 RRT_P = 2, RRT_R = 2
Working trail: L5 Working trail: L5 (interrupted)
Trail
Interrupted trail
ASON NE
As shown in Figure 8-35, there are six trails that can be used between ASON NE A and B (L1
to L6). Initially, L1 is the working trail, and L2 is the protection trail. Items in the figure are
described as follows:
l P: Indicates the protection times, which can be set in the main interface of the NMS. In this
example, assume P=2.
l R: Indicates the restoration times, which can be set in the main interface of the NMS. In
this example, assume R=2.
l RRT_P: Indicates the statistic of protection times provided in current time. RRT_P≤P.
RRT_P is a non-setting value, which is only used to describe the implement of Flex P&R
policy.
l RRT_R: Indicates the statistic of restoration times provided in current time. RRT_R≤R.
RRT_R is a non-setting value, which is only used to describe the implement procedure of
rerouting triggered by Flex P&R policy.
For details about the implement procedure of rerouting triggered by Flex P&R, see Figure
8-35.
l Scenario 1: Initially, L1 is the working trail, and L2 is the protection trail. The link state is
normal. RRT_P = 0, and RRT_R = 0.

l Scenario 2: L1 is interrupted. The service on L1 is switched to L2, and a new protection

trail L3 is calculated. RRT_P = P-1 = 1, and RRT_R = 0.
l Scenario 3: L3 is interrupted. The working channel remains L2. No new protection channel
is calculated because RRT_P = P - 1 in scenario 2 and only one link is interrupted on L2
and L3. RRT_P = P = 2, and RRT_R = 0.
l Scenario 4: L2 is interrupted. Because RRT_P = P in scenario 3 and both L2 and L3 are
interrupted, the service on L2 is rerouted to L4. RRT_P = 2, and RRT_R = 1.
l Scenario 5: L4 is interrupted. The service on L4 is rerouted to L5. RRT_P = 2, and RRT_R
= R = 2.
l Scenario 6: L5 is interrupted. Although idle network resources exist, rerouting no longer
occurs because the actual rerouting count (RRT_R) has reached the preset value (R).
RRT_P = 2, and RRT_R = 2.
The "P" and "R" values can be reset conditionally after they are decreased to 0:
l After the trail failure is removed, the service can be automatically or manually returned to
the original trail. Only in the condition that both the working and protection trails are
returned to the original tralis, the two values are automatically reset and the service is again
provided for "P" times of protection switching and "R" times of restoration. As shown in
Scenario 6 of Figure 8-35, if the fault in L4 is rectified, the service is returned from L5 to
L4, but the values of RRT_P and RRT_R remain the same. The values of RRT_P and
RRT_R are reset to 0 only after the original working trail (L1) and protection trail (L2)
work properly, and the service is reverted to L1. In this manner, service protection and
rerouting capability is restored.
l If the trail failure persists, the service cannot be reverted back to its original trail. Then you
can manually reset the values to continue protection for the service. For details, see
Restoring Flex P&R Protection Capability Manually.
8.6.6 Crankback Mechanism

The Crankback mechanism helps automatically evade faulty points during service creation,
optimization, and rerouting of the wavelength/sub-wavelength LSP. A maximum of three
Crankback times is supported with one Crankback time as the default.
It takes a certain time to spread network routing information. When rerouting is performed, the
source node may use the outdated network status information to calculate the trail. Therefore,
the selected route may be unavailable, resulting in a rerouting failure.
The ASON software supports the Crankback rerouting mechanism. When setting up connections
according to the calculated trail, the ASON software informs the source node of the information
related to the faulty network nodes or links if the connection setup process is baffled due to
insufficient network resources or network faults. In this case, the source node recalculates a trail
that meets the constraint conditions but does not traverse the obstacle node and then establishes
the connections for the calculated trail. This effectively restores a service by means of rerouting.
It is recommended that you set this parameter to a default value.

l When the link resources of the network are sufficient, set this parameter to a greater value,
which helps to increase the success rate of service creation and rerouting.
l When the link resources of the network are insufficient, set this parameter to a smaller
value. Hence, continuous attempts can be prevented and the CPU resource can be
optimized.

l When the system is busy (for example, a large number of services are rerouted because of
a network disaster), set this parameter to a smaller value.
When the configured Crankback times are used up:

l For service creation or optimization, a service creation or optimization failure is reported
with the cause being the last attempt failure.
l For service rerouting, no rerouting is triggered in the current alarm period. After the next
alarm period (1 minute) starts, rerouting is triggered by the reported alarm.
l Crankback is not supported when the service source node fails to compute a route because
there is no idle resource on the network.
8.6.7 Network Traffic Engineering

An ASON network has one network traffic engineering policies, that is, network traffic
equilibrium, so as to make network resources distributed in the best state. In addition, various
restraint conditions for route selection are developed. In this manner, network resources are
properly used.
Network Traffic Equilibrium

Due to manual planning of services on a traditional network, it is difficult for the traditional
network to achieve traffic equilibrium on the entire network. The introduction of ASON features
makes the network resources automatically adjusted. With the traffic engineering algorithm, the
resources of the entire network can be automatically and evenly allocated, which avoids
congestion and improves network security and operability.
On an ASON network, the traffic of each trail is equalized, and thus the situation where the
traffic of certain trails is large but certain trails are idle can be avoided.
The ASON computes a best route according to the CSPF algorithm. If there are many services
between two nodes, there may be several services sharing a same route. The traffic equilibrium
function is used to avoid this situation. As shown in Figure 8-36, there are many silver services
between R2 and R4. To make the network more safe and reliable, the ASON allocates them to
different routes such as A-D-E-I, A-B-C-F-I and A-B-G-H-I as evenly as possible. In this
manner, network security and stability are enhanced.

Figure 8-36 Traffic equilibrium
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Route Selection Policy

With traffic engineering, Huawei ASON equipment develops various constraint conditions on
the control plane for route selection based on the WDM/OTN ASON network. The constraint
conditions for route selection are as follows:
l Constraint conditions for network resources (explicit node, explicit link, explicit
wavelength, and explicit channel)
l Constraint conditions for exclusion of network resources (excluded node and excluded link)
l Strict route and number of nodes (hops) that a service traverses
l Fiber length of a service, load balancing, SRLG, and associated services
l Combination of the preceding constraint conditions
The constraint conditions for the ASON wavelength or sub-wavelength services are mainly
reflected in the trail cost. The trail cost includes the following factors:
l Link bandwidth occupancy
l Link length
l Number of nodes (hops) that a service traverses
During service route computation, you should consider the preceding factors of the trail cost
(the function of setting the weight of each factor is provided), and thus you can select the route
with the minimum trail cost. In this manner, the traffic is equalized and the network resources
are properly used.
Customized Link Cost

The ASON software supports the customized link cost. Hence, users can adjust the link cost and
select the expected link according to actual situations. After the customized link cost is

introduced, the trail with the lowest cost is selected according to the integrated cost of a link
during service creation or rerouting.
The customized link cost is used to describe the customized link attributes. By using the
customized link cost, users can assign different meanings to a link. The examples are as follows:
l Link age
The cost of a link ascends with the age of the link. When computing a trail, the ASON
software is more likely to select a new trail.
l Link price
The cost of a link ascends with the price of the link. When computing a trail, the ASON
software is more likely to select a cheap trail.
l Link interruption rate
The cost of a link ascends with the link interruption rate. When computing a trail, the ASON
software is more likely to select a trail with a low link interruption rate.
The customized link cost can be queried, and a change of the customized link cost on a node
can be flooded to all nodes on the entire network. In this manner, all nodes on the network
acknowledge the customized link cost information, which can be used as a basis of computing.
Shared Risk Link Group

On an ASON network, a shared risk link group (SRLG) needs to be set when a group of optical
fibers are in one cable.
SRLG represents the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risk.
That is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be rerouted
to another link that has the same risk.
Hence, an SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk on a network so as
to avoid the situation where an LSP after rerouting of ASON services traverses a link that has
the same risk as that of the faulty link. In this manner, the service restoration time during ASON
service rerouting is shortened. You can change the SRLG attribute.
When an electrical-layer service selects its trail, the electrical-layer link inherits the SRLG
information of the links involved in its electrical server layer and the SRLG information of the
links involved in its optical server layer. As a result, during rerouting, the electrical-layer service
follows the principle of separating SRLGs as possible.
8.6.8 Service Association

Service association can only be used to associate the same services accessed from different points
into an ASON network.
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. During
rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of its associated
service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed from two points.
As shown in Figure 8-37, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber between
B and G is cut, rerouting of A-B-G-H LSP avoids D-E-I LSP.

Figure 8-37 Service association
R1 R4
E
1+1protection
I 1+1protection
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 8-17 lists the attributes of service association.
Table 8-17 Attributes of service association
Attribute Service Association
Service creation The ASON software supports the following operations:

l Creating two associated WDM ASON trails at one time.
l Associating two created WDM ASON trails.
Service Supports optimization of associated services.

optimization
Rerouting When a service is rerouted, it avoids the route of its associated service.
Service type l Supports association of two silver services.

l Supports association of two copper services.
l Supports association of a silver service and a copper service.
NOTE
In the case of the associated optical-layer or electrical-layer services that have the same source, you can
set a rerouting condition on the U2000. The rerouting condition can be either of the following:
l Rerouting is triggered when one service is interrupted (default condition).
l Rerouting is triggered only when both services are interrupted.

NOTE
The product supports the pre-computation function of optical-layer or electrical-layer associated services
with different source nodes. On the NMS, after a user selects two pairs of service source and sink nodes
and route constraint, the system can precalculate or directly create associated services.
It is recommended that you configure two services that originate from the same node as associated services.
The following problems may occur if two associated services originate from different nodes.
l If two associated services originate from different nodes and travel along the same LSP, they will be
also switched to the same LSP after rerouting.
l If two associated services (for example, services A and B) originate from different nodes and travel
along different LSPs, the current LSP of service A may overlap with the original LSP of service B after
rerouting. If service B is switched back to the original LSP subsequently, it will travel along the current
LSP of service A.
8.6.9 Service Optimization

After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and
therefore requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating an LSP,
switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and
optimize the service. The service route can be restricted during the service optimization.
NOTICE
The LSP must be changed in wavelength trail optimization, which will cause switching between
WSS components. As a result, services may be interrupted during service optimization.
Especially, optical-layer services will be interrupted for seconds. Be cautious to use the function.
LSP optimization has the following features.

l Only manual optimization is supported.
l The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.
l During optimization, rerouting, degrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not allowed.
l During creation, rerouting, degrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations,
optimization is not allowed.
l The following service types support optimization: diamond, silver, copper, iron and
tunnel services.
l Services can be directly optimized from a WDM ASON trail to a preset restoration trail.
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 V100R005 is used as a WDM or an OTN device, resources on the original
trail will be reserved during revertive service optimization. When a fault occurs on the optimized trail, the
service can be rerouted back to the original trail if the original trail has no fault.
l During maintenance, lock the revertive function of an optimized revertive service. After performing
the maintenance, unlock the revertive function to manually reroute the service back to the original trail.
l In typical scenarios, it is recommended to set the new trail for an optimized revertive service as the
service's original trail.
8.6.10 Service Migration

The ASON software supports the migration between ASON services and traditional services.
The ASON software also supports migration of the ASON services with different SLAs.

Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections

Currently, Huawei ASON software supports the following migration between the traditional
WDM services and ASON services:
l Migration between static 1+1 services and diamond services
NOTE
For ODUk trail, the 1+1 service denotes the ODUk SNCP.
l Migration between static unprotected services and silver services
l Migration between static unprotected services and copper services
Service Migration between ASON Trails

The ASON software supports the following migration between the traditional WDM services
and ASON services:
l Migration between diamond WDM ASON ODUk trails and silver WDM ASON ODUk
trails.
l Migration between diamond WDM ASON ODUk trails and copper WDM ASON ODUk
trails.
l Migration between silver WDM ASON ODUk trails and copper WDM ASON ODUk trails.
l Migration between associated silver WDM ASON Och trails and dual-homing diamond
WDM ASON trails.
l Migration between silver WDM ASON Och trails and copper WDM ASON Och trails.
8.6.11 Preset Restoration Trail

Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To
this end, the ASON software provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This
function helps increase the controllability of service routing. The preset restoration trail
information is stored only on the control plane and requires no physical resource.
The ASON software supports setting a preset restoration trail for a diamond/silver/gold ASON
trail. When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset restoration trail first.
NOTE
If the resources are sufficient, the system currently supports two preset restoration trails for one ASON
service.
In the case of an optical-layer silver trail, if a wavelength the same as the original wavelength
is not available, the ASON software presets a restoration trail to set up a wavelength-tunable
trail.
ASON Software Supports Pre-set Restoration Trail in the Case of Multiple Fiber
Cuts
l Pre-set restoration trail in the case of multiple fiber cuts
To ensure the route after rerouting in the case of multiple fiber cuts, the ASON software
configures multiple pre-set restoration trails for an end-to-end reroutable service (optical-
layer or electrical-layer service). Users can configure a maximum of two pre-set restoration
trails for a service or an LSP, and specify the priorities of the two trails.

NOTE
Users can configure two pre-set restoration trails for the working and protection LSPs of a diamond
service.
To ensure that services can be restored after multiple fiber cuts, when planning pre-set
trails, users need to separate the routes between multiple pre-set restoration trails as
possible.
l Change of the priority of a pre-set restoration trail in the case of multiple fiber cuts
The ASON software can configure, delete, or query multiple pre-set restoration trails. In
addition, the ASON software can change the priority of a pre-set restoration trail in the case
of multiple fiber cuts. After the pre-set restoration trail in the case of multiple fiber cuts is
configured, if the network condition changes, users can change the priority of the configured
pre-set restoration trail. The change does not immediately trigger rerouting, because the
change is valid only in the next rerouting.
l Route selection policy of the pre-set restoration trail during rerouting in the case of multiple
fiber cuts
The route selection policies of the pre-set restoration trail during rerouting in the case of
multiple fiber cuts are as follows:
– Select the pre-set restoration trail with the highest priority.
– When multiple pre-set restoration trails with the same priority are available, take priority
to select the trail with a small number.
– If services are rerouted to a pre-set restoration trail with a low priority, rerouting is not
triggered after the fault on the pre-set restoration trail with a high priority is rectified.
l Principle of service protection level conversion in the case of multiple pre-set restoration
trails
The protection level conversion principle in the case of multiple pre-set restoration trails
is as follows:
– If a service that has the rerouting capability is converted to a service of another type
that also has the rerouting capability, the pre-set restoration trail in the case of multiple
fiber cuts is retained.
– If a service that has the rerouting capability is converted to a service of another type
that does not have the rerouting capability, the pre-set restoration trail in the case of
multiple fiber cuts is cleared.
– When a diamond service is converted to a silver service, the ASON software determines
whether to retain the pre-set restoration trail of the working LSP or protection LSP
according to the parameters of the working and protection trails set by users.
– When a silver service is converted to a diamond service, the ASON software determines
whether the pre-set restoration trail is used as the pre-set restoration trail of the working
LSP or protection LSP according to the parameters of the working and protection trails
set by users.
Preset Restoration Trail Creation over Interrupted or Occupied Trails

A restoration trail can be set to traverse interrupted or occupied trails.
As shown in Figure 8-38, the actual service trail is L3. The restoration trail can be set to traverse
L2, which is interrupted or occupied.

Figure 8-38 Preset restoration trail traversing an interrupted trail
L1 L2
A C
L3
L4 L5
D Preset restoration trail

Actual service trail
ASON NE
Availability of Preset Restoration Trails During Rerouting

If the interrupted or occupied trail that a restoration trail traverses is faulty, the restoration trail
cannot be used for service restoration. Services must be rerouted to other trails.
Figure 8-39 Restoration scenario during trail failure

The service cannot be
B
rerouted to the preset
restoration trail.
L1 L2
A C
L3
L4 L5
The service can be rerouted

to another preset restoration
trail that is available.
D Preset restoration trail 1
Preset restoration trail 2
ASON NE
As shown in Figure 8-39, when L3 is faulty, the service on L3 is not rerouted to the preset
restoration trail NEA->NEB->NEC (through L1 and L2) due to the interruption of L2. The
service must be rerouted to the trail NEA->NED->NEC (through L4 and L5).

8.6.12 Trail Pre-Computation and Adjustment

When optimizing the routes of new ASON wavelength/sub-wavelength services or original
wavelength/sub-wavelength services, users can issue the route pre-computation command
through the U2000. In this manner, users can acknowledge the service routes to be created, routes
after optimization, specific routes involving service restoration trails in advance. In addition,
users can properly adjust the pre-computed trail according to service trail requirements.
8.6.13 Service Reversion Mechanism

The ASON software supports service reversion. After a fault is rectified, services are reverted
to the previous trail.
ASON services can be classified into revertive services and non-revertive services.
l For revertive services, the previous trail is retained after rerouting. After the fault is
rectified, the services are reverted to the previous trail.
l For non-revertive services, the previous trail is not retained after rerouting. After the fault
is rectified, the services are not reverted to the previous trail.
The reversion mechanisms of revertive services include manual reversion, scheduled reversion,
and automatic reversion.
l Scheduled reversion
Services are rerouted because of a fault on the previous trail. After the fault is rectified and
the manually set reversion time elapses, the services are reverted to the previous trail.
l Automatic reversion
Services are rerouted because of a fault on the previous trail. The system periodically checks
the link status. After the fault on the previous trail is rectified and the service alarm ends,
the services are automatically reverted to the previous trail when the wait to revert time is
due.
l Manual reversion
After services are rerouted or optimized to another trail, the information about the previous
trail is retained. When the press-to-revert command is issued, the services are reverted to
the previous trail. If the previous trail is normal and no resource is occupied, the services
are successfully reverted to the previous trail. Otherwise, the reversion fails.
Users can set whether services can be reverted during service creation or change the revertive
attribute of the services without service interruption.
NOTE
A service can be forcibly reverted to its original route no matter whether the route has recovered.
NOTE
The previous trail refers to the trail before rerouting, and the previous route may not be the route initially
set up for ASON services.
NOTE
After several topology changes on an ASON network, the actual service routes may be different from the
original routes. The ASON software provides the function of reverting the services on the entire network
to the original trails. Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON
service. After services are rerouted or optimized to another trail, the information about the original trail is
retained. If the original route recovers, the services can be adjusted to the original route manually.

NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002 and later supports the automatic reversion function of optical-layer ASON
services.
Adhere to the following principles for changing the service reversion mode:
l For a non-revertive service,

– It can be modified as revertive when the current trail is consistent with the original trail.
– It cannot be modified as revertive when the current trail is inconsistent with the original
trail.
l For a revertive service,
– It can be modified as non-revertive when the current trail is consistent with the original
trail.
– It cannot be modified as non-revertive when the current trail is inconsistent with the
original trail.
Adhere to the following principles for changing the original trail:
l For a non-revertive service,

– The current trail can be set as the original trail regardless whether the current trail is
consistent with the oringinal trail or not.
l For a revertive service,
– The current trail can be set as the original trail if the current trail is consistent with the
original trail.
– The current trail can be set as the original trail if the current trail is inconsistent with
the original trail, but the previous original trail needs to be deleted and the revertive
mode of the current service needs to be set as revertive.
NOTE
The features of automatic reversion of optical-layer ASON services are as follows:

l If no port alarm is detected on the link between the FIU boards at two stations, optical-layer services
are automatically reverted to the trail before rerouting. If a wavelength channel alarm is detected, the
services are reverted to the trail before reversion in the case that the trail before reversion has no alarm.
That is, when the optical-layer services are reverted, system does not delete the rerouted trail. If no
service alarm is detected two minutes after the services are reverted to the trail before rerouting, the
system deletes the rerouted trail. Two minutes later, if a service alarm persists, the services are reverted
to the rerouted trail and a reversion failure event is reported. No automatic reversion operation is
performed later, and the service enters the "stopping automatic reversion" state until users manually
revert the services (or in timed manner). In this case, the "stopping automatic reversion" state changes.
l Within the two minutes when the services are automatically reverted but the rerouted trail is not deleted,
if a port on the FIU of the rerouted trail reports an alarm, the two-minute wait is stopped. In this case,
the rerouted trail is directly deleted and the reversion operation is complete.
l If a port on the FIU of the trail before rerouting reports an alarm, the two-minute wait is stopped and
the services are directly reverted to the rerouted trail.

NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 V100R005 is used as a WDM or an OTN device, resources on the original
trail will be reserved during revertive service optimization. When a fault occurs on the optimized trail, the
service can be rerouted back to the original trail if the original trail has no fault.
l During maintenance, lock the revertive function of an optimized revertive service. After performing
the maintenance, unlock the revertive function to manually reroute the service back to the original trail.
l In typical scenarios, it is recommended to set the new trail for an optimized revertive service as the
service's original trail.
8.6.14 Dynamic Rerouting Based on Optical Parameters

For an optical-layer ASON wavelength service, dynamic rerouting must depend on the physical
damage to service transmission caused by optical parameters such as optical signal-to-noise ratio
(OSNR), chromatic dispersion (CD), and polarization mode dispersion (PMD). These optical
parameters must be specified as service routing constraints to ensure quality service
transmission.
Huawei ASON software has a special design on specifying optical parameters as routing
constraints. If the calculated wavelength trails disagree with the optical parameter requirements,
another trail will be calculated based on the optical parameters.
Currently, dynamic rerouting based on optical parameters applies to the following scenarios:
l G.652 fiber networks provisioned with DCMs and 40G coherent services, in which 40G
boards are equipped with BPSK optical modules.
l G.652, LEAF, G.653 or G.652+LEAF+G.653 fiber networks provisioned with DCM-free
and 40G coherent services, in which 40G boards are equipped with BPSK optical modules.
l G.652 fiber networks provisioned with DCMs and 100G coherent services, in which 100G
boards uses HFEC.
l G.652, LEAF, or G.652+LEAF fiber networks provisioned with DCM-free and 100G
coherent services, in which 100G boards uses HFEC.
l G.652, LEAF, or G.652+LEAF fiber networks provisioned with DCMs and 100G coherent
services, in which 100G boards uses SDFEC.
l G.652, LEAF, G.653 or G.652+LEAF+G.653 fiber networks provisioned with DCM-free
and 100G coherent services, in which 100G boards uses SDFEC.
l G.652, LEAF, or G.652+LEAF fiber networks provisioned with DCM-free and 100G
coherent services, in which 100G boards uses SDFEC2.
NOTE
Route computation based on optical parameters can also be performed for service creation and optimization.
Optical parameters must be set using the U2000 with reference to Setting Optical Parameters to
implement dynamic rerouting based on optical parameters.
8.6.15 Resource Sharing of Trails

In the case of optical-layer or electrical-layer permanent 1+1 diamond services, rerouting 1+1
diamond services, and associated services with the same source (wavelengths of the associated
silver services are the same), the ASON software supports the function of resource sharing of
the working and protection trails or resource sharing of the associated service trails.

l Resource sharing of the working and protection trails

Resource sharing of the working and protection trails can provide restoration resources as
many as possible. Figure 8-40 shows the main application scenario of tangent rings. The
blue and red continuous lines indicate the working and protection trails. The working and
protection trails are invalid when fibers at points 1 and 2 are cut. In this case, if resources
of the working and protection trails cannot be shared, services cannot get resources for
restoration. If resources can be shared, you can combine part of the working trail and part
of the protection trail together to form a restoration trail, which is the green dashed line in
the figure. Similarly, if the fiber at point 3 is cut, the trail (purple dashed line) can be used
for service restoration.
Figure 8-40 Application of resource sharing of the working and protection trails
NOTE
When both trails for 1+1 diamond ASON services are interrupted, the system by default allows
resources sharing on the working and protection trails during service rerouting. Resource sharing of
the working and protection trails provides a possible solution to protect services in the case of multiple
fiber cuts on a network other than a mesh network.

NOTE
l When both the working and protection trails for a permanent 1+1 diamond ASON service are
interrupted, the system allows resources sharing on the working and protection resources only
when no diverse route is available for service restoration.
l When the "using original trail resources as possible" rerouting policy is used for a rerouting 1+1
diamond service, the system shares the resources on the working and protection trails with
precedence to restore the service.
l In the case of creating a new ASON service or optimizing an ASON service, resource sharing of
the working and protection trails is not allowed. Optimization, pre-computation, and
configuration of a preset restoration trail can still be performed on a service with resource sharing
of the working and protection trails enabled.
l A static service with resource sharing of the working and protection trails enabled cannot be
upgraded to a 1+1 diamond service, and an ASON service where resource sharing of the working
and protection trails is performed cannot be downgraded but can be deleted.
l For optical-layer ASON services, if resource sharing of the working and protection trails is
performed on the original trail of a revertive service, automatic reversion is not initiated, but the
service can be reverted in a manual or timed manner.
l During rerouting of a diamond service, if the routing policy of the service is section restoration,
you need to take priority to follow this policy.
l The trail of a service where resource sharing of the working and protection trails is performed
cannot be set as the original trail.
l During sharing, directions of services must be the same. A forward trail and a reverse trail cannot
share resources of each other. Figure 8-41 shows application of resource sharing of a forward
and reverse tail.
l An ASON service with the same working and protection trail cannot be enabled with resource
sharing of the working and protection trails.
l If the working and protection trails already share resources, the working and protection trails are
separated to the most when one or all trails are optimized. If resources are insufficient, the
optimized trails can still share resources. (Only the currently shared resources can be shared.)
l When the system choose to share the resources on the working and protection trails for an optical-
layer ASON service, the service will be transmitted over the original wavelength. Resource
sharing and wavelength adjustment are not allowed at the same time.
Figure 8-41 Resource sharing of a forward and reverse tail
A service is added at point A and dropped at point D. The original trail is A->B->C->D
(blue lines). When the fibers between A and B and between C and D are cut, the service

can be rerouted to trail A->C->B->D (red lines). Hence, between B and C, the forward trail
and reverse trail share resources.
l Resource sharing of associated trails
The ASON software provides the trail sharing function to associated ASON services with
the same source. Figure 8-40 shows the main application scenarios of a tangent ring
network. The blue lines and red lines indicate two associated trails with the same source.
When fibers at 1 and 2 are cut, the two trails fail. If resources of the associated trails cannot
be shared, the services cannot be restored. If the resources can be shared, you can combine
the associated trails to make a restoration trail, which is the trail in green as shown in the
figure. Similarly, if the fiber at 3 is cut, you can still use the trail in purple to restore the
services.
NOTE
When both trails that have the same source for two associated optical-layer wavelength services are
interrupted, the system by default allows resources sharing on the associated trails for the associated
services to reroute if there are no other resources available. On the U2000, users can specify whether
to share resources on the associated trails as required.
NOTE
l During rerouting of associated services that come from the same source, the system will take
precedence to share the resources on the two trails for the services if the two trails are configured
with a policy to use resources on the original trail.
l In the case of creating a new service or optimizing a service, resource sharing of associated trails
is not allowed.
l After associated trails share resources, do not cancel the association.
l If associated services are of different types, resource sharing of associated trails is not supported.
For example, the associated OTN services must have the same granularity and rate. The protection
level, however, is not restricted. For example, sharing is allowed when a silver service and a
copper service are associated.
l If resource sharing of associated trails is performed on the original trail of a revertive service,
automatic reversion is not initiated, but the service can be reverted in a manual or timed manner.
l During rerouting of associated services with the same source, if the routing policy of the services
is restoration by section, you need to take priority to follow this policy.
l The trail of a service where resource sharing of associated trails is performed cannot be set as
the original trail. Before canceling association of associated services, you can delete the services
and clear the association information.
l If the trails of associated services already share resources, the trails of the associated services are
separated to the most when one or all trails are optimized. If resources are insufficient, the
optimized trails can still share resources. (Only the currently shared resources can be shared.)
l During sharing, directions of services must be the same. A forward trail and a reverse trail cannot
share resources of each other. Figure 8-41 shows application of resource sharing of a forward
and reverse tail.
l An ASON service with the same associated trail cannot be enabled with resource sharing of
associated trails.
8.6.16 ASON Features Based on the Split of Optical and Electrical

NEs
For ASON network, users need to split the NE into different NEs. The splitting rule is that all
optical boards and regeneration boards are allocated to one or more optical NEs and all electrical
boards are allocated to one or more electrical NEs. Based on the split of optical and electrical
NEs, the ASON software supports resource locating and creation of ASON services.

Figure 8-42 shows the schematic diagram of separate optical and electrical NEs (Colored). In
the figure, NE1 is an optical NE taking the M40 and D40 boards as the edge points. NE2 is the
electrical NE taking the OTU board as the edge points.
Figure 8-43 shows the schematic diagram of separate optical and electrical NEs (Colorless). In
the figure, NE1 is an optical NE taking the WSM9 and WSD9 boards as the edge points. NE2
is the electrical NE taking the OTU board as the edge points.
Figure 8-42 Schematic diagram of the split of optical and electrical NEs (Colored)
R W NE1
D S
U M
F 9 9 F
I I
W R
U U
S D
M U
9 9
WSM9 RDU9
OCh
D40 M40 OCh
NE2
OCh OTU OTU OCh

Figure 8-43 Schematic diagram of the split of optical and electrical NEs (Colorless)
R W NE1
D S
U M
F 9 9 F
I I
U W R U
S D
M U
9 9
WSM9 RDU9
OA
OA
DM1~DM 9 AM1~AM 9
WSD9 WSM9
Drop 73~80 Drop 1~9 Add 1~9 Add 73~80
WSD9 WSD9 WSM9 WSM9
OCh OCh
NE2
OCh OTU OTU OCh
NOTE
When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be used to
achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE takes the auto-extended ECC
communication. When more than eight Huawei devices need to use the extended ECC communication, the
manually extended ECC communication must be used instead. See the "Setting Manually Extended ECC
Communication" of the Commissioning Guide of the OptiX OSN 8800 for details.
In the case that optical and electrical NEs are not split, ASON NEs can only take the OTU or
FIU board as the edge points and the matching TE link is generated when a board is added. In
the case that optical and electrical NEs are split, the multiplexer and demultiplexer boards or
another optical-layer board can be considered as the edge points of the optical NE. In this case,
when an intra-NE fiber connection is created between the optical port on the multiplexer and

demultiplexer boards and the optical port on the OTU board of the electrical NE, an intra-NE
link that carries OCh signals can be generated.
The ASON software processes stations where optical and electrical NEs are split and not split
in different modes. In the case of a station where optical and electrical NEs are split, the
connections between the optical NE and the electrical NE are described as intra-NE links. In
this case, a complete TE link is formed by the OMS TE links between upstream and downstream
stations and the intra-NE links at one station.
NOTE
The multiplexer and demultiplexer board and OTU board at the NE edges configure each other as the link
far end to form an abstract OMS TE link. The link is then used for creating optical-layer services.
After optical and electrical NEs are split at a station, bidirectional fiber connections and link far ends of
the optical and electrical NEs must be configured correctly according to the planning.
After optical and electrical NEs are split at a station, perform configurations on the U2000 to ensure proper
communication between optical NEs and electrical NEs and successful creation of TE links. For details on
how to perform the configurations, see Configuring a Station with Separate Optical and Electrical NEs.
The U2000 can create and manage optical-layer ASON services based on the split of optical and
electrical NEs, including creation, reroute, optimization, deletion, and pre-calculation of various
SLA services, and the conversion between static ASON and dynamic services. The operation
methods are the same as those of the services not based on the split of optical and electrical NEs.
NOTE
The electrical regeneration boards and the optical-layer boards must be installed on the same optical NE.
The total number of subracks of an optical NE cannot exceed 24 and the total number of wavelengths that
traverse electrical regeneration boards cannot exceed 64.
For separate optical and electrical NEs, active and standby system control boards must be used in the master
subracks of the optical and electrical NEs.
8.6.17 ASON Services Traversing Third-Party Equipment

The ASON software enables ASON services to traverse third-party equipment between Huawei
ASON nodes, and therefore enables end-to-end service management and monitoring.
Figure 8-44 shows interconnection between OptiX OSN 8800 equipment and third-party
equipment on the client side.
Figure 8-44 Client-side interconnection between OptiX OSN 8800 equipment and third-party
equipment
OptiX OSN 8800

Third-party OptiX OSN 8800
network
network network
ASON NE
Third-party NE

On a network, third-party equipment terminates the OTUk layer and ASON nodes cannot detect
OTUk-layer alarms but only ODUk-layer alarms. Then link status cannot be accurately detected.
When the service boards on third-party equipment does not support rate adaptation, the ASON
service rate cannot be adjusted in an end-to-end mode. To resolve these issues, Huawei ASON
software enables ASON services to traverse third-party equipment.
l The ASON nodes with third-party equipment in between detect status of the links between
themselves according to the TCM-layer alarms, and trigger service rerouting if required.
l The OTUk rate for the ports connected to third-party equipment cannot be adjusted. This
prevents service interruption in case of an end-to-end rate adjustment failure.
ASON services can traverse third-party equipment on the following conditions:
l The third-party equipment supports access of OTUk signals.

l The third-party equipment transparently transmits the complete ODUk-layer signals from
the WDM-side ports on the OTU boards of OptiX OSN 8800 equipment.
l OptiX OSN 8800 devices must use the same TCM layer.
l The third-party equipment processes TCM-layer signals in line with the standard.
l Regeneration but not ODUk cross-connections are recommended on the service paths on
third-party equipment.
l The third-party equipment does not use the TCM layer that has already been used by Huawei
ASON nodes.
l The TCM layer used by third-party equipment does not repeat the TCM layers in other
configurations.
8.6.18 ASON Service Creation on Faulty Trails

ASON services can be created on faulty trails. Therefore, services can be deployed according
to the original network plan despite trail interruption.
If an ASON network does not support service creation on a faulty trail and fiber cuts occur
frequently, services cannot be deployed according to the original network plan. Services can be
manually reverted to the original trails only after route recovery. To facilitate network
maintenance, the OSN equipment supports the creation of ASON services on faulty trails. The
user can deploy services according to the original network plan.
Generally, upon creation of an ASON service on an faulty trail, rerouting occurs for service
restoration. After the fault is rectified, the service is automatically or manually reverted to the
original trail. If the service needs to stay on the faulty trail as planned, the trail needs to be locked.
For details on how to lock a faulty trail, see Setting an ASON Trail to the Locked State.

NOTE
l When the ASON services created on faulty trails, the services need to assign the strict route, configure
the explicit link based on the interruption link.
l ASON services at all levels can be created on faulty trails. However, only the ASON services that
support the rerouting function can be rerouted upon service creation on faulty trails. For example,
copper services, which do not support the rerouting function, are provisioned only after the original
trails are restored to normal.
l The OSN equipment supports the upgrade of traditional faulty trails to ASON trails.
l The trails passed the continuity test before being interrupted.
As shown in Figure 8-45, the original service trail through L1 and L2 (NEA->NEB->NEC). If
there are sufficient network resources, the service can be created despite the interruption of L2.
Upon service creation, the service is rerouted to L3. After the fault in L2 is rectified, the service
is reverted to the original trail (NEA->NEB->NEC), either automatically or manually.
Figure 8-45 Application scenario

B B B
Revert to the
Reroute original trail
L1 L2
L1 L2 L1 L2
L3 L3 L3
A C A C A C
Service trail
Creation of ASON services on faulty trails has the following advantages:

l The user can create and provision services despite trail interruption.
l Despite frequency fiber cuts, the user can create and provision services according to the
original network plan, which makes network management easier.
l After trail failure is removed, the service can be reverted the original path in the specified
mode, which facilitates network maintenance.
8.6.19 Auto-Separation of the Working and Protection Trails

If an ASON network has insufficient network resources because of a fiber cut, the working and
protection trails may be completely or partially overlapped, weakening the protection capability
of the service. This issue does not happen for dual-homed diamond services. After auto-
separation of the working and protection trails is enabled for an optical-layer ASON service, the
NE software can detect whether the working and protection trails of the optical-layer ASON
service are overlapped. If they are, the NE software automatically separate them to ensure proper
protection of the service.
Auto-separation of the working and protection trails has the following features:
l It applies only to optical-layer ASON services, including diamond services (supports the
OTU+OLP configuration only), dual-homed diamond services and associated services with

the same source, and is disabled by default. If auto-separation is required, enable it using
the U2000 with reference to Configuring Auto-Separation of the Working and Protection
Trails.
l If the working and protection trails share a link (or SRLG) and there are other trails
available, the auto-separation function, if enabled, will completely separate the working
and protection trails.
l When the cut fiber is repaired section by section, the separation of the working and
protection trails will be adjusted automatically. Specifically, the working and protection
trials with better separation will always be selected until the working and protection trails
are completely separated (better separation means fewer shared links).
NOTE
For a faulty fiber section during fiber restoration, auto-separation of the working and protection trails
is implemented only when resource sharing of the working and protection trails or resource sharing
of associate trails is not enabled.
l If a ASON service is created with its working and protection trails sharing a link, a
CPW_OCH_SER_SLADEG alarm (service SLA downgrade) will be reported after it is
created. Then the system does not separate the working and protection trails even when
there are trails with better separation.
8.7 OCS ASON Feature

The OptiX OSN 8800 series products of Huawei can provide the OCS ASON function after the
ASON software is loaded.
8.7.1 End-to-End Service Configuration

The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.
The ASON supports both traditonal SDH services and end-to-end ASON services. To configure
an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidth requirement,
and protection level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all
automatically completed by the network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit
link and excluded link to constrain the service routing.
Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing and
signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure services.
For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and I in
Figure 8-46. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-
connection at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I, the network
calculates the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the
best route.
The service is created as follows:
l Choose the bandwidth granularity.

l Choose the server level.
l Choose the source node.
l Choose the sink node.

l Create the service.
Figure 8-46 End-to-end service configuration
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H R3
G
R2
: ASON NE
: User equipment
8.7.2 Protection and Restoration in an ASON Network

As the transmission network develops, the survivability of the network becomes a key factor in
the design, operation and maintenance of the network. An ASON network must have effective
and flexible protection and restoration schemes.
Difference between Protection and Restoration

Generally, protection involves the capacity pre-allocated among NEs. For example, 1+1
protection is a simple protection scheme, whereas MSP is a complicated protection scheme.
Protection only involves NEs and does not involve the management system. The protection
switching time is short and is not more than 50 ms. The backup resources, however, cannot be
shared in the network.
Generally, restoration involves the usage of any usable capacity among NEs. Even the extra
capacity of low priority can be used for restoration. When a service trail fails, the network
automatically searches for a new route and switches the services from the faulty route. The
algorithm that restores is the same as the algorithm that selects the trail. Restoration requires
spare resources in the network for service rerouting. Service rerouting involves the computation
of routes. The service restoration takes a relatively long time, which is always in seconds.
Protection in an ASON Network

The traditional protection schemes such as MSP and SNCP can still be applied in an ASON
network.
Restoration in an ASON Network

In the case of an ASON network, the rerouting scheme is applied to restore services. When an
LSP fails, the source node computes the best trail for service restoration and then uses signaling
to create an LSP. Then, the new trail carries the services. For the non-revertive services, the
original LSP is deleted after the new LSP is created, however, for the revertive services, the
original LSP would not be deleted.

The advantages of rerouting are listed as follows:

l The services can be restored in a fast and automatic manner.
l After the technology for service restoration is applied in an ASON network, only 30% to
60% of spare capacity is required when such an ASON network is restored in real time
compared with the APS protection or a self-healing ring network. The bandwidth utilization
is increased considerably. Generally, if a network involves more nodes, the routes are more
complicated and less spare resources are required.
Service Restoration
The network restoring schemes can be classified into the centralized restoring scheme and
distributed restoring scheme according to the control mechanism. The ASON applies the
distributed restoring scheme.
If the centralized restoring scheme is applied, a central control system is required to control the
entire network in a comprehensive manner. The central control system contains a large network
database, which stores all the information about all nodes, links and spare resources. When a
link or a node fails, the fault information is reported to the central control system along other
routes. The central control system then computes a route to replace the faulty route according
to the information stored in the database. The central control system then issues control
commands to each node. A route is created to restore the services.
The distributed restoring scheme does not require any central control system. When a link fails,
the nodes at both ends of the faulty link detect the fault and flood this information to the entire
network. When a node fails, the adjacent nodes detect the fault and flood this information to the
entire network. All LSPs that are involved with the faulty link or node then reroute and new
LSPs are created to restore services.
8.7.3 Automatic Discovery of Topologies and Resources

Management
On an ASON network, link resources, network topologies, and fibers between sites can be
automatically discovered, and then a network map is automatically generated. The ASON
software dynamically obtains the resource status of the wavelength/sub-wavelength services in
real time, including the occupied and idle resources, providing a quick approach to know the
current network capacity.
For any change to network resources and topologies, such as adding/deleting links, changing
link parameters, adding/deleting network nodes, the ASON software may refresh the relevant
information in real time and inform the network management plane. This facilitates the network
expansion and network reconstruction.
8.7.3.1 Auto-Discovery of ASON Nes

In the ASON network, the OSPF protocol discovers ASON NEs automatically by sending the
protocol packets.
After discovering the neighbor NEs, the OSPF protocol floods the information about the
neighbor NEs to other NEs. In the end, every ASON NE in the domain has the information about
all ASON NEs in the entire ASON domain.

l When an ASON NE is added to an ASON network, other NEs are able to automatically
discover the new NE by using the OSPF protocol.
l When an ASON NE is removed from an ASON network (for example, power off the NE,
remove the SCC board, or shut down the physical channel), other NEs are able to
automatically detect the missing of this NE.
As shown in Figure 8-47, if two ASON NEs are added, the source topology on the U2000 is
automatically updated in real time.
Figure 8-47 TE link automatic discovery
R1 R4
New NE
R2
R3
:ASON NE
:User equipment
8.7.3.2 Auto-Discovery of Control Links

The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.
When the fiber connection (including the inter-station fiber automatically discovered and the
intra-station fiber manually configured) is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses
the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own
control links to the entire network. See Figure 8-48. As a result, each NE obtains the information
of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-
wide control topology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes
the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which
is used for the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets.

Figure 8-48 Auto-discovery of control links
ASON Domain
When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically discover
the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the management
system. See Figure 8-49.
Figure 8-49 Management of control topology
R1 R4
R2
R3
:ASON NE
: User equipment

8.7.3.3 Auto-Discovery of TE Links

The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TE
link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire network
through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wide
resource topology.
ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion and
addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to U2000,
which performs a real-time refresh.
As shown in Figure 8-50, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayed
on the NM in real time.
Figure 8-50 TE link auto-discovery
R1 R4
R2
R3
:ASON NE
:User Equipment
8.7.4 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection,
as listed in Table 8-18. The rerouting time depends on the equipment type, the number of
interrupted services, the network resources, the network settings, and other factors. Hence, the
following data is for reference only.

Table 8-18 Service level
Serv Diamond Gold service Silver Copper Iron service

ice service service service
Prote Supports the Supports the Supports the Does not Supports the
ction protection and protection and restoration. support the preemption.
and restoration. restoration. The trail is protection. The After the trail
Resto Permanent The event is computed in interrupted is preempted,
ratio protection is protection in real time. The service cannot the service is
n provided only most cases, protection trail be restored. interrupted
Sche if the network but is does not need until the
me bandwidth is restoration to be set in preemption is
available. For sometimes. advance. released.
the non-
rerouting
diamond
service, the
interrupted
service cannot
be restored
even when the
bandwidth is
available.
Impl SNCP, MSP, Rerouting and Non-protection Non-

emen rerouting, and rerouting, and Flex P&R protection
tation Flex P&R Flex P&R protection
Mean protection protection NOTE
s NOTE A silver
A gold service service
configured configured
with Flex with Flex P&R
P&R protection can
protection can be rerouted
be rerouted (rerouting
(rerouting count = R), but
count = R), cannot be
but cannot be protected.
protected.

Serv Diamond Gold service Silver Copper Iron service

ice service service service
Switc l Switching l Switching The rerouting - -

hing time < 50 time < 50 time ranges
and ms ms from hundreds
Rero l The l The of
uting rerouting rerouting milliseconds
Time time time to several
ranges ranges seconds.
from from
hundreds hundreds
of of
millisecon millisecon
ds to ds to
several several
seconds. seconds.
Band Low Medium High Very high Very high

width
utiliz
ation
Cost Very high High Medium Low Very low
Appli Private lines PSTN, GSM IP data private Temporary Temporary

cable for banks, voice services lines for service service
servi securities, and (in the case of common requirements requirements
ce important a ring customers,
type government network) community
departments, broadband
voice services services
NOTE
l The rerouting time of services differs in different network conditions. The major factors that affect the
rerouting time are as follows:
l Number of services.
When more services need to be rerouted at the same time, the workload of the network becomes
heavier, so the rerouting time is longer.
l Type of node equipment.
The greater processing capabilities of the node equipment, the shorter rerouting time.
l Number of hops after service rerouting.
In the service creation process, services are processed in serial mode along the trail. Therefore, if
a service travels along more hops after rerouting, the service needs to recover in a longer time.
l The associated service also supports Flex P&R protection. For details, see the Flex P&R Protection
section in 8.7.2 Protection and Restoration in an ASON Network.
Table 8-19 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.

Table 8-19 TE links used by ASON services

Service Level Working Protection Non-Protection
Resource of TE Resource of TE Resource of TE Link
Link Link
Diam Service Not used Not used Used

ond creation
servic
e Service Not used Used when the Used with the priority
rerouting resource is not
enough
Service Not used Not used Used

optimization
Gold Service Used with the Not used Used when the
servic creation priority resource is not enough
e
Service Used with the Used when the Used when the
rerouting priority resource is not resource is not enough
enough
Service Used with the Not used Used when the

optimization priority resource is not enough
Silver Service Not used Not used Used

servic creation
e
Service Not used Used when the Used with the priority
rerouting resource is not
enough
Service Not used Not used Used

optimization
Copp Service Not used Not used Used

er creation
servic
e Service Not used Not used Used
optimization
Iron Service Not used Used with the Used when the
servic creation priority resource is not enough
e
Service Not used Used with the Used when the
optimization priority resource is not enough
8.7.4.1 Diamond Services

Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the
network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicable
to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security aviation.
A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It is
also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available between

the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. One is the
working LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the working
LSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receives
the service from the working LSP; otherwise, the sink node receives the service from the
protection LSP. A diamond service supports sharing of the working and protection LSPs.
Figure 8-51 shows a diamond service.
Figure 8-51 Diamond services
Working LSP
R1 R4
E I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
Protection LSP : ASON NE

: User equipment
There are three types of diamond services.

l Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails.
Table 8-20 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.
l Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail.
Table 8-21 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
l Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 8-22 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting diamond service.
Table 8-20 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services
Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the

creation source node and the sink node.

Protection and l If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available
restoration for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the working LSP
and the other is the protection LSP.
l If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be reserved
for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the service
survivability.
l Whenever a fiber cut occurs and no free resources are available,
the shared LSP can be used for a permanent 1+1 diamond
service to reroute the service successfully.

l Supports four rerouting policies:
– No rerouting constraint
– Use simulated section restoration
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and

Scheduled revertive.
l After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted,
the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the
fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, the
user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a
specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the
NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service
is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Preset restoration trail Supports the preset restoration trail.
Service migration l Supports migration between diamond services and permanent

SNCP connections.
l Supports migration between diamond services and gold
services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver
services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and copper
services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
Service association Does not support service association.

Alarms to trigger R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS,

rerouting AU_LOP, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
Table 8-21 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node
creation and the sink node
Protection and l When the protection LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting
restoration is not triggered.
l When the working LSP fails, services are switched to the protection
LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When both the working and protection LSPs fail, rerouting is triggered
to create a new LSP to restore services.
l When both the working and protection LSPs fail and no resources are
available, the shared LSP can be used for a rerouting 1+1 diamond
service to reroute the service successfully.

Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and Scheduled

revertive.
l After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted, the
service is automatically reverted to the original path if the fault in the
original path is rectified.
l After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, the user can
set the service to be reverted to the original path at a specific future
time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in
the original path is rectified.
l After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service is not
reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Preset restoration Supports the preset restoration trail.

trail

Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Service l Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP

migration connections.
l Supports migration between diamond services and gold services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.

switching
Service Supports service optimization.

optimization
Service Does not support service association.

association
Alarms to trigger R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS,

rerouting AU_LOP, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
Table 8-22 Attributes of the non-rerouting diamond service
Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node
creation and the sink node
Protection and l When the working LSP fails, services are switched to the protection
restoration LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When the protection LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting
is not triggered.
l When both the working and protection LSPs fail, rerouting is not
triggered.
Service l Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP

migration connections.
l Supports migration between diamond services and gold services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.

switching
Service Supports service optimization.

optimization
Service Does not support service association.

association

8.7.4.2 Gold Services

Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond
services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links or non-
protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is cut, the ASON
triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex section protection fails,
the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service.
As shown in Figure 8-52, a gold service can be configured from A to I.
Figure 8-52 Gold services
R1 R4
E MSP
I
D
F
MSP
A C
B MSP
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 8-23 lists the attributes of gold services.
Table 8-23 Attributes of gold services
Attribute Gold Service
Requirements for creation Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources are

available between the source node and the sink node.

Multiplex section l Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear multiplex
protection section protection chain to create gold services.
l Supports using the working resources of a 1+1 linear
multiplex section protection chain to create gold services.
l Supports using the working resources of a 1:N linear
multiplex section protection chain to create gold services.
l Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber
bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold
services.
l Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber
bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold
services.
Protection and restoration When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is performed
to protect services. When MS switching fails, rerouting is then
triggered to restore services.


l After the automatically revertive gold service is rerouted, the
service is automatically reverted to the original path if the
l After the scheduled revertive gold service is rerouted, the user
can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a
specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on
the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the non-revertive gold service is rerouted, the service

Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections and gold

services.
l Supports migration between gold services and diamond
services.
l Supports migration between gold services and silver services.
l Supports migration between gold services and copper
services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service association Does not support service association.
ASON server trail Supports gold ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,

rerouting AU_AIS, AU_LOP, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
8.7.4.3 Silver Services

Silver services, the revertive time is hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds. The silver level
service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.
Silver services are also called rerouting services. When an LSP failure, the ASON triggers
rerouting to restore the service. If there are not enough resources, service may be interrupted.
As shown in Figure 8-53, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is
cut, the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber.
Hence, services are protected.
Figure 8-53 Silver services
E
R1 R4
LSP after rerouting
I
D
F
A C
B
H
G
R2
R3
Original LSP : ASON NE
: User equipment

Table 8-24 lists the attributes of silver services.
Table 8-24 Attributes of silver services
Requirements for creation Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the
source node and the sink node.
Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a
new LSP to restore services.


l After the automatically revertive silver service is rerouted,
the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the
l After the scheduled revertive silver service is rerouted, the
user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at
a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days)
on the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the non-revertive silver service is rerouted, the service
Shared mesh restoration Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for revertive
trail silver trials.
Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections and

silver services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver
services.
l Supports migration between gold services and silver
services.
l Supports migration between silver services and copper
services.

ASON server trail Supports silver ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger rerouting R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,

AU_AIS, AU_LOP, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
8.7.4.4 Copper Services

The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services
in holidays, are configured as copper services.
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not reroute
and are interrupted. Table 8-25 lists the attributes of copper services.
Table 8-25 Attributes of copper services
Attribute Silver Service
Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source
creation node and the sink node.
Service migration l Supports migration between copper services and traditional

services.
l Supports migration between copper services and diamond
services.
l Supports migration between copper services and gold services.
l Supports migration between copper services and silver services.
ASON server trail Supports copper ASON server trails.
8.7.4.5 Iron Services

The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron
services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be
configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply non-protection resources
or protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs. When an LSP fails, services are interrupted
and rerouting is not triggered.
l When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS switching
occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted. After the MS is

recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption, preemption and restoration of the
iron service are all reported to the NMS.
l When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network resources are
insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted silver service or diamond
service. Thus, the service is interrupted.
Table 8-26 lists the attributes of iron service.
Table 8-26 Attributes of iron services
Attribute Iron Service
Requirements for Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are

creation available between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex section To create iron services, the following resources can be used:
protection l Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP
l Protection resources of 1:N linear MSP
l Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP
l Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Service migration Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent
connections.
8.7.5 Rerouting Trigger Policy

When setting route attributes for ASON trails, the user can choose a proper rerouting trigger
policy based on the actual network demands.
Rerouting restroation trigger policy consists the following types:
l Rerouting triggered by the active or standby trail interruption

l Rerouting triggered by interruption of both active and standby trails
l No rerouting triggered by the active or standby trail interruption
l Rerouting triggered by Flex Protection and Restoration (Flex P&R; the protection and
restoration times can be set)
Rerouting triggered by the active or standby trail interruption

This policy is supported by diamond services and associated silver services. Rerouting is
triggered to create a new LSP when either of the two LSPs (active and standby) between the
source node and the sink node is interrupted. This ensures two LSPs (active and standby) are
configured to protect services in resources sufficient conditions.

Rerouting triggered by interruption of both active and standby trails

This policy is supported by diamond services and associated silver services. Rerouting is
triggered to create a new LSP when both active and standby trails between the source node and
the sink node are interrupted.
No rerouting triggered by the active or standby trail interruption

This policy is supported by diamond services. No rerouting is triggered whether the active or
standby trail between the source node and the sink node is interrupted.
Rerouting triggered by Flex P&R

Flex P&R stands for Flexible Protection and Restoration Mechanism. As an innovative ASON
protection strategy, Flex P&R allows for protection switchovers whose count is P and rerouting
whose count is R. Diamond services and associated silver services support settings of protection
and restoration times. Gold services and silver services support the setting of rerouting times.
Flex P&R has the following advantages:
l After several failures of an ASON network, limited bandwidth can be fully utilized for
service restoration.
l The user can specify the values of P and R on the NMS.
Figure 8-54 shows the rerouting procedure triggered by Flex P&R.
Figure 8-54 Rerouting triggered by Flex P&R

L5 L5
L3 Interruption L3
L1 of L1 L1
L2 L2
L4 L4
L6 L6
A B A B
Interruption
P = 2, R = 2 RRT_P = 1, RRT_R = 0
of L3
Working trail: L1 Working trail: L2
Protection trail: L2 Protection trail: L3
L5 L5
L3 Interruption L3
L1 of L2 L1
L2 L2
L4 L4
L6 L6
A B A B
Interruption RRT_P = 2, RRT_R = 1 RRT_P = 2, RRT_R = 0
of L4 Working trail: L4 Working trail: L2
L5 L5
L3 Interruption L3
L1 of L5 L1
L2 L2
L4 L4
L6 L6
A B A B
RRT_P = 2, RRT_R = 2 RRT_P = 2, RRT_R = 2
Working trail: L5 Working trail: L5 (interrupted)
Trail
Interrupted trail
ASON NE

As shown in Figure 8-54, there are six trails that can be used between ASON NE A and B.
Initially, L1 is the working trail, and L2 is the protection trail. Items in the figure are described
as follows:
l P: Indicates the protection times, which can be set in the main interface of the NMS. In this
example, assume P=2
l R: Indicates the restoration times, which can be set in the main interface of the NMS. In
this example, assume R = 2
l RRT_P: Indicates the statistic of protection times provided in current time. RRT_P≤P.
RRT_P is a non-setting value, which is only used to describe the implement of Flex P&R
policy.
l RRT_R: Indicates the statistic of restoration times provided in current time. RRT_R≤R.
RRT_R is a non-setting value, which is only used to describe the implement procedure of
rerouting triggered by Flex P&R policy.
For details about the implement procedure of rerouting triggered by Flex P&R, see Figure
8-54.
l Scenario 1: Initially, L1 is the working trail, and L2 is the protection trail. The link state is
normal. RRT_P = 0, and RRT_R = 0.
l Scenario 2: L1 is interrupted. The service on L1 is switched to L2, and a new protection
trail L3 is calculated. RRT_P = P-1 = 1, and RRT_R = 0.
l Scenario 3: L3 is interrupted. The working channel remains L2. No new protection channel
is calculated because RRT_P = P - 1 in scenario 2 and only one link is interrupted on L2
and L3. RRT_P = P = 2, and RRT_R = 0.
l Scenario 4: L2 is interrupted. Because RRT_P = P in scenario 3 and both L2 and L3 are
interrupted, the service on L2 is rerouted to L4. RRT_P = 2, and RRT_R = 1.
l Scenario 5: L4 is interrupted. The service on L4 is rerouted to L5. RRT_P = 2, and RRT_R
= R = 2.
l Scenario 6: L5 is interrupted. Although idle network resources exist, rerouting no longer
occurs because the actual rerouting count (RRT_R) has reached the preset value (R).
RRT_P = 2, and RRT_R = 2.
After trail failure is removed, the service can be automatically or manually reverted to the original
trail. Even if the trail failure persists and the service cannot be reverted to the original trail, the
user can manually restore the Flex P&R protection by change the RRT_P and RRT_R values to
zero to ensure services protection and restoration. For details, see Restoring Flex P&R Protection
Capability Manually.
l Only in the condition that both the working and protection trails are returned to the original
tralis, services can be protected P times and restored R times. As shown in Scenario 6 of
Figure 8-54, if the fault in L4 is rectified, the service is reverted from L5 to L4, but the
values of RRT_P and RRT_R remain the same. The values of RRT_P and RRT_R are reset
to 0 only after the original working trail (L1) and protection trail (L2) work properly, and
the service is reverted to L1. In this manner, service protection and rerouting capability is
restored.
l The user need to manually enable an NMS to revert services to the original trail. For details,
see Reverting ASON Trails.

As shown in Table 8-27, only certain services provide Flex P&R, and the value range of P and
R differs depending on service types. The user can specify P and R according to this table.
Table 8-27 Relationship between Flex P&R protection and various service types

Whether the Yes Yes Yes No No

service
provides
Flex P&R
protection
Value range 1 to 10 P=0 l Non- - -

of P Default associate
value: 2 d silver
services:
0
l Associate
d silver
services:
1 to 10
Default
value: 2
Value range 0 to 100, and 1 to 100 l Non- - -

of R Permanent Default associate
Restoration value: 100 d silver
Default services:
value: 1 to 100
Permanent Default
Restoration value:
100
l Associate
d silver
services:
0 to 100,
and
Permane
nt
Restorati
on
Default
value:
Permane
nt
Restorati
on

NOTE
l Only revertive services support rerouting triggered by Flex P&R.

l The diamond services support permanent protection. If network resources are sufficient, permanent 1
+1 protection is allowed for diamond services.
l If a service supports permanent restoration and network resources are sufficient, rerouting occurs upon
l The Flex P&R is supported only if the two silver services that share the same source node are associated.
8.7.6 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, the
silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a shared
mesh restoration trail.
When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service uses the
resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable,
these resources are used for service restoration. If only partial resources on the shared mesh
restoration trail are usable, these resources are used with priority for computation of a restoration
trail. The other resources may be faulty or used by other services that share the trail.
As shown in Figure 8-55, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver services share
the TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver service 1 (A-B-C) reroutes,
the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When the revertive
silver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail
2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver services reroute, only one of them can reroute to the shared mesh
restoration trail, for the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots between G and H.
Figure 8-55 Shared mesh restoration trail

Revertive silver service 1
A B C
Share MESH
restoration trail 1
G H
Share MESH
restoration trail 2
D E F
Revertive silver service 2
Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.
l Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh restoration trail.

l A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at different levels.
l The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected resources of
TE links.
l For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set the preset
restoration trail.
Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following differences.
l For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no resources
are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration trail may be used
by other services. When the service reroutes, the preset restoration trail cannot be used.
l For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The reserved resources
cannot be used by other services. In this way, services can be restored with the best effort.
In addition, to increase the resource utilization, the shared mesh restoration trails for
different services can share some resources.
8.7.7 Crankback Mechanism

The Crankback mechanism helps automatically evade faulty points during service creation,
optimization, and rerouting of the wavelength/sub-wavelength LSP. A maximum of three
Crankback times is supported with one Crankback time as the default.
It takes a certain time to spread network routing information. When rerouting is performed, the
source node may use the outdated network status information to calculate the trail. Therefore,
the selected route may be unavailable, resulting in a rerouting failure.
The ASON software supports the Crankback rerouting mechanism. When setting up connections
according to the calculated trail, the ASON software informs the source node of the information
related to the faulty network nodes or links if the connection setup process is baffled due to
insufficient network resources or network faults. In this case, the source node recalculates a trail
that meets the constraint conditions but does not traverse the obstacle node and then establishes
the connections for the calculated trail. This effectively restores a service by means of rerouting.
It is recommended that you set this parameter to a default value.

l When the link resources of the network are sufficient, set this parameter to a greater value,
which helps to increase the success rate of service creation and rerouting.
l When the link resources of the network are insufficient, set this parameter to a smaller
value. Hence, continuous attempts can be prevented and the CPU resource can be
optimized.
l When the system is busy (for example, a large number of services are rerouted because of
a network disaster), set this parameter to a smaller value.
When the configured Crankback times are used up:

l For service creation or optimization, a service creation or optimization failure is reported
with the cause being the last attempt failure.
l For service rerouting, no rerouting is triggered in the current alarm period. After the next
alarm period (1 minute) starts, rerouting is triggered by the reported alarm.
l Crankback is not supported when the service source node fails to compute a route because
there is no idle resource on the network.

8.7.8 Network Traffic Engineering

An ASON network has one network traffic engineering policies, that is, network traffic
equilibrium, so as to make network resources distributed in the best state. In addition, various
restraint conditions for route selection are developed. In this manner, network resources are
properly used.
Network Traffic Equilibrium

Due to manual planning of services on a traditional network, it is difficult for the traditional
network to achieve traffic equilibrium on the entire network. The introduction of ASON features
makes the network resources automatically adjusted. With the traffic engineering algorithm, the
resources of the entire network can be automatically and evenly allocated, which avoids
congestion and improves network security and operability.
On an ASON network, the traffic of each trail is equalized, and thus the situation where the
traffic of certain trails is large but certain trails are idle can be avoided.
The ASON computes a best route according to the CSPF algorithm. If there are many services
between two nodes, there may be several services sharing a same route. The traffic equilibrium
function is used to avoid this situation. As shown in Figure 8-56, there are many silver services
between R2 and R4. To make the network more safe and reliable, the ASON allocates them to
different routes such as A-D-E-I, A-B-C-F-I and A-B-G-H-I as evenly as possible. In this
manner, network security and stability are enhanced.
Figure 8-56 Traffic equilibrium
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Route Selection Policy

With traffic engineering, Huawei ASON equipment develops various constraint conditions on
the control plane for route selection based on the WDM/OTN ASON network. The constraint
conditions for route selection are as follows:

l Constraint conditions for network resources (explicit node, explicit link, explicit
wavelength, and explicit channel)
l Constraint conditions for exclusion of network resources (excluded node and excluded link)
l Strict route and number of nodes (hops) that a service traverses
l Fiber length of a service, load balancing, SRLG, and associated services
l Combination of the preceding constraint conditions
The constraint conditions for the ASON wavelength or sub-wavelength services are mainly
reflected in the trail cost. The trail cost includes the following factors:
l Link bandwidth occupancy
l Link length
l Number of nodes (hops) that a service traverses
During service route computation, you should consider the preceding factors of the trail cost
(the function of setting the weight of each factor is provided), and thus you can select the route
with the minimum trail cost. In this manner, the traffic is equalized and the network resources
are properly used.
Customized Link Cost

The ASON software supports the customized link cost. Hence, users can adjust the link cost and
select the expected link according to actual situations. After the customized link cost is
introduced, the trail with the lowest cost is selected according to the integrated cost of a link
during service creation or rerouting.
The customized link cost is used to describe the customized link attributes. By using the
customized link cost, users can assign different meanings to a link. The examples are as follows:
l Link age
The cost of a link ascends with the age of the link. When computing a trail, the ASON
software is more likely to select a new trail.
l Link price
The cost of a link ascends with the price of the link. When computing a trail, the ASON
software is more likely to select a cheap trail.
l Link interruption rate
The cost of a link ascends with the link interruption rate. When computing a trail, the ASON
software is more likely to select a trail with a low link interruption rate.
The customized link cost can be queried, and a change of the customized link cost on a node
can be flooded to all nodes on the entire network. In this manner, all nodes on the network
acknowledge the customized link cost information, which can be used as a basis of computing.
Shared Risk Link Group

On an ASON network, a shared risk link group (SRLG) needs to be set when a group of optical
fibers are in one cable.
SRLG represents the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risk.
That is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be rerouted
to another link that has the same risk.

Hence, an SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk on a network so as
to avoid the situation where an LSP after rerouting of ASON services traverses a link that has
the same risk as that of the faulty link. In this manner, the service restoration time during ASON
service rerouting is shortened. You can change the SRLG attribute.
When an electrical-layer service selects its trail, the electrical-layer link inherits the SRLG
information of the links involved in its electrical server layer and the SRLG information of the
links involved in its optical server layer. As a result, during rerouting, the electrical-layer service
follows the principle of separating SRLGs as possible.
8.7.9 Service Association

Service association can be used to associate the same services accessed from different points
into an ASON network.
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. During
rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of its associated
service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed from two points.
As shown in Figure 8-57, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber between
B and G is cut, rerouting of A-B-G-H LSP avoids D-E-I LSP.
Figure 8-57 Service association
R1 R4
E
1+1protection
I 1+1protection
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 8-28 lists the attributes of service association.
Table 8-28 Attributes of service association
Service creation Supports the creation of the associated services with the same source
node.
Service Supports optimization of associated services.

optimization

Rerouting When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated service.
Service type l Supports the association of two silver services.

l Supports association of two copper services.
l Supports the association of a silver service and a copper service.
8.7.10 Service Optimization

After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus
requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the
optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the
service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the
service optimization.
LSP optimization has the following features.
l Only manual optimization is supported.

l The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.
l During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not allowed.
l During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations,
optimization is not allowed.
l The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper and iron
services.
8.7.11 Service Migration

The ASON software supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON
services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would
not interrupt the services.
Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections

Currently, ASON software supports:
l Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections

l Migration between gold services and permanent connections
l Migration between silver services and permanent connections
l Migration between copper services and permanent connections
l Migration between iron services and permanent connections
Service Migration between ASON Trails

Currently, Huawei's ASON software supports:
l Migration between a diamond, gold, silver, copper service

8.7.12 Presetting the Restoration Trail

To optimize the network planning, the ASON provides the restoration trail presetting function
so that the rerouting can be performed according to the requirement of the user when the current
service trail fails. In this manner, the controllability of service rerouting is improved.
The ASON supports presetting of the restoration trail for the diamond, gold, and silver ASON
services. When an ASON service is rerouted, it is switched to the preset trail if the preset trail
is available.
The ASON periodically checks whether the restoration trail is available and the check interval
is 60 minutes by default. If the restoration trail is not available, the ASON automatically
computes a new restoration trail to replace the current restoration trail.
l After the replacement, the ASON reports the performance event related to the change of
the preset restoration trail.
l When the original restoration trail is not available and there is no substitute for it, the ASON
reports the performance event related to the unavailability of the preset restoration trail.
The user can specify explicit nodes, explicit links, excluded nodes, and excluded links when
presetting a restoration trail. The user can query the permanent exclusion attribute of nodes or
links when specifying excluded nodes or links. Excluded nodes and links are not counted during
rerouting.
Preset Restoration Trail Creation over Interrupted or Occupied Trails

A restoration trail can be set to traverse interrupted or occupied trails.
As shown in Figure 8-58, the actual service trail is L3. The restoration trail can be set to traverse
L2, which is interrupted or occupied.
Figure 8-58 Preset restoration trail traversing an interrupted trail

B
L1 L2
A C
L3
L4 L5

ASON NE
Availability of Preset Restoration Trails During Rerouting

If the interrupted or occupied trail that a restoration trail traverses is faulty, the restoration trail
cannot be used for service restoration. Services must be rerouted to other trails.

Figure 8-59 Restoration scenario during trail failure

The service cannot be
B
rerouted to the preset
restoration trail.
L1 L2
A C
L3
L4 L5
The service can be rerouted

to another preset restoration
trail that is available.
Preset restoration trail
ASON NE
As shown in Figure 8-59, when L3 is faulty, the service on L3 is not rerouted to the preset
restoration trail NEA->NEB->NEC (through L1 and L2) due to the interruption of L2. The
service must be rerouted to the trail NEA->NED->NEC (through L4 and L5).
8.7.13 Trail Pre-Computation and Adjustment

When optimizing the routes of new ASON services or original services, users can issue the route
pre-computation command through the U2000. In this manner, users can acknowledge the
service routes to be created, routes after optimization, specific routes involving service
restoration trails in advance. In addition, users can properly adjust the pre-computed trail
according to service trail requirements.
8.7.14 Reverting Services to Original Routes

After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes.
You can revert all service to the original routes.
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON service. If
the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the services can be adjusted to
the original route automatically or manually.
8.7.15 Merging an ASON Network with a Traditional SDH

Network
An ASON network can be used with an SDH network to form a hybrid network. In this case, an
end-to-end service can be managed and created in a centralized manner.
NOTE
The protection in the ASON domain is realized through the association.

A Traditional SDH Network Connected to an ASON Network in 1+1 or 1:1 MSP

Mode
A traditional SDH network is connected to an ASON network in 1+1 or 1:1 MSP mode. The
connection between the SDH network and the ASON network is protected in linear MSP mode.
The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. In addition, the ASON
network can access a diamond service, a gold service, or a silver service, as shown in Figure
8-60.
Figure 8-60 A traditional SDH network connected to an ASON network in 1+1 or 1:1 MSP
mode
1+1 or 1:1 MSP
MSP Ring ASON
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
A Traditional SDH Network Connected to an ASON Network in SNCP Mode

A traditional SDH network is connected to an ASON network in SNCP mode. In this case, a
service can be protected in SNCP mode. The SDH network adopts the traditional SNCP mode.
The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. As shown in Figure
8-61, the service can also be protected if two fiber cuts occur.
NOTE
The ASON services at all levels support the access of the intelligent SNCP.
Figure 8-61 A traditional SDH network connected to an ASON network in SNCP mode
SNCP access SNCP access
Dual-fed Dual-fed
selective selective
receiving SDH ASON SDH receiving
SNCP SNCP
: ASON NE
: SDH NE

Traditional SDH MSP Ring Tangent with the ASON Network

When the traditional SDH MSP Ring is tangent with the ASON Network, as shown in Figure
8-62. The features are as follows:
l The ASON network is responsible for scheduling services.
l The border ASON nodes function on both the SDH network and ASON network. In the
ASON network, the border ASON nodes form a ring network with other SDH nodes.
l On the ASON network, a service can be a diamond service, a gold service, a silver service,
a copper service, or the other service.
l On the SDH network, services are protected by the conventional ring protection schemes.
On the ASON network, services are protected by the ASON protection schemes.
Figure 8-62 Traditional SDH MSP ring tangent with the ASON network
Ring Ring ASON
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
Traditional SDH MSP Ring Intersecting with the ASON Network

The border ASON NEs can compose an MSP ring with the SDH NEs. In addition, the NEs can
share certain links, as shown in Figure 8-63.
Figure 8-63 Traditional SDH MSP ring intersecting with the ASON network
Service 1
Ring ASON
Service 2 : ASON NE
: SDH NE

In Figure 8-63, there are two example services.

l Service 1 is transmitted when the MSP ring is intersecting with the ASON network. For
details, see sectionTraditional SDH MSP Ring Tangent with the ASON Network.
l Assume that service 2 is a gold service that uses a link section of the MSP ring. When the
link section breaks, the MSP ring switching occurs, but service 2 is not rerouted. In this
case, if another link section breaks, the service can be rerouted by detecting the alarm on
the trail.
VC-4 Services Between SDH NEs That Cross the ASON Network
As shown in Figure 8-64, a VC-4 service is created between SDH NEs 5 and 6 and crosses the
ASON network. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The
SDH network is not protected.
Figure 8-64 VC-4 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network
NE1 NE4
NE6 NE5
VC4 VC4
NE2 NE3
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
VC-12 Services Between SDH NEs That Cross the ASON Network
As shown in Figure 8-65, a VC-12 service is created between SDH NEs 5 and 6 and crosses the
ASON network. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The
SDH network is not protected.

Figure 8-65 VC-12 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network
NE1 NE4
NE6 NE5
VC12
VC12
NE2 NE3
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
1+1 VC-4 Services Between Traditional NEs That Cross the ASON Network
As shown in Figure 8-66, a 1+1 VC-4 service is created between SDH NEs 5 and 6 and crosses
the ASON network. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode.
The SDH network adopts the SNCP protection mode.
Figure 8-66 1+1 VC-4 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network
NE1 NE4
NE6
NE5
VC4 VC4
NE2 NE3
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
1+1 VC-12 Services Between SDH NEs That Cross the ASON Network
As shown in Figure 8-67, a 1+1 VC-12 service is created between SDH NEs 5 and 6 and crosses
the ASON network. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode.
The SDH network adopts the SNCP protection mode.

Figure 8-67 1+1 VC-12 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network
NE1 NE4
NE6
NE5
VC12 VC12
NE2 NE3
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
VC-4 Services Between ASON NEs and Traditional NEs

As shown in Figure 8-68, a VC-4 service is created between traditional NE5 and ASON NE1.
The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The SDH network is
not protected.
Figure 8-68 VC-4 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs
NE1 NE4
VC4
NE6 NE5
VC4
NE2 NE3
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
1+1 VC-4 Services Between ASON NEs and SDH NEs

As shown in Figure 8-69, a 1+1 VC-4 service is created between SDH NE5 and ASON NE1.
The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The SDH network
adopts the SNCP protection mode.

Figure 8-69 1+1 VC-4 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs
NE1 NE4
VC4
NE6 NE5
VC4
NE2 NE3
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
8.7.16 ASON Service Creation on Interrupted Trails

ASON services can be created on interrupted trails. Therefore, services can be deployed
according to the original network plan despite trail interruption. Upon creation of an ASON
service on an interrupted trail, rerouting occurs for service restoration. After the fault is rectified,
the service is automatically or manually reverted to the original trail.
If an ASON network does not support service creation on interrupted trail and fiber cuts occur
frequently, services cannot be deployed according to the original network plan. Services can be
manually reverted to the original trails only after route recovery. To facilitate network
maintenance, the OSN equipment supports the creation of ASON services on interrupted trails.
The user can deploy services according to the original network plan.
NOTE
l When services need to be created on interrupted trails, strict routes must be specified for the services
and the interrupted trails must be set as explicit links of the services.
l ASON services at all levels can be created on interrupted trails. However, only the ASON services that
support the rerouting function can be rerouted upon service creation on interrupted trails. For example,
copper and iron services, which do not support the rerouting function, are provisioned only after the
original trails are restored to normal.
l The OSN equipment supports the upgrade of traditional interrupted trails to ASON trails.
l The trails should pass the connectivity test successful before, and then interrupted.
As shown in Figure 8-70, the original service trail through L1 and L2 (NEA->NEB->NEC). If
there are sufficient network resources, the service can be created despite the interruption of L2.
Upon service creation, the service is rerouted to L3. After the fault in L2 is rectified, the service
is reverted to the original trail (NEA->NEB->NEC), either automatically or manually.

Figure 8-70 Application scenario

B B B
Revert to the
Reroute original trail
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
L3 L3 L3
A C A C A C
Service trail
Creation of ASON services on interrupted trails has the following advantages:
l The user can create and provision services despite trail interruption.
l Despite frequency fiber cuts, the user can create and provision services according to the
original network plan, which makes network management easier.
l After trail failure is removed, the service can be reverted the original path in the specified
mode, which facilitates network maintenance.

Product Description 9 Operation and Maintenance
9 Operation and Maintenance
About This Chapter
This section describes the operation and maintenance items applicable to the product.
9.1 End-to-End Service Configuration

The system provides end-to-end service configurations management function, which helps
simplify the configuration process. This function helps shorten the network deployment time
and implement automatic management of a network.
9.2 Alarm and Performance Event Management
The system uses the alarm and performance event monitoring function for administration and
maintenance.
9.3 Online Monitoring
This section describes OptiX OSN 8800's capability of monitoring performance of WDM-side
and client-side signals.
9.4 ETH-OAM
ETH-OAM provides various operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) approaches for
Ethernet services and links on WDM and OTN networks, achieving convenient and efficient
deployment commissioning and routine OAM.
9.5 MPLS-TP OAM
MPLS-TP operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) can effectively detect, identify,
and locate faults on packet switched networks and notify related NEs of the faults, so the NEs
perform immediate protection switching. MPLS-TP OAM functionality helps improve network
reliability. MPLS-TP is the acronym for multiprotocol label switching transport profile.
9.6 Optical Doctor
The Optical Doctor (OD) system supports one-click configuration for monitoring optical-layer
performance. Specifically, it performs online OSNR monitoring, performance monitoring, and
performance optimization for 10G, 40G, and 100G wavelengths.
9.7 TP-Assist Solution of Packet Services
Like the SDH equipment, Huawei OptiX OTN product series supports a hierarchical operating
& maintenance (O&M) system by using the TP-Assist solution, so packet services can be
configured, commissioned, or maintained in an end-to-end manner.

9.8 Loopback
Loopbacks provide an effective means of troubleshooting a network, by verifying a service on
a segment-by-segment basis.
9.9 PRBS Test

If no commissioning instruments are available in the network maintenance phase or on a new
network where no services are deployed, you can perform a self-transmit and self-receive test
using the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS) function to check whether links on each section
are normal by performing loopbacks section by section.
9.10 Tunable Wavelengths
9.11 Jitter Suppression Function
9.12 Hot Patch

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports hot patches.
9.13 Software Package Loading and Software Package Diffusion

The system supports software package loading, which is an upgrade scheme that simplifies
software upgrade operations. The user can load, activate, and manage NE-level software in a
centralized manner. In addition, the system supports software package diffusion mode, which
provides for high package loading efficiency.
9.14 OAMS
OptiX OSN 8800 must works with OptiX BWS 1600G to provide the Optical fiber line
Automatic Monitoring System (OAMS), which implements functions such as preliminary fault
location and link fiber alarm reporting.
9.15 Orderwire Function

The orderwire provides voice communication for the operation engineers or maintenance
engineers at different stations.
9.16 One-Click Data Collection

One-click data collection is generally used in the event of equipment failure to collect the fault
and performance data of the equipment.
9.17 License Control

A license granted by Huawei permits a customer to use the licensed product within a specific
use scope and for a specific duration. The customer can also obtain the services committed by
Huawei. The licenses include: feature license, cross-connect type and cross-connect capacity
license.

9.1 End-to-End Service Configuration

The system provides end-to-end service configurations management function, which helps
simplify the configuration process. This function helps shorten the network deployment time
and implement automatic management of a network.
When configuring an end-to-end service, you can create a service trail that traverses different
layers and directly create a client service trail. You do not need to know how the service grooming
between the OTN/SDH/Packets layers is implemented or create an ODUk/VC-3/VC-4/VC-12/
Packets server trail at each layer. After you create a client service, the client service trails at
different OTN/SDH/Packets layers are generated automatically. This simplifies the service
configuration process.
The end-to-end service configuration includes creating, querying, deleting, and modifying an
end-to-end service and optimizing an end-to-end service. The latter is also known as service
defragmentation.
9.2 Alarm and Performance Event Management

The system uses the alarm and performance event monitoring function for administration and
maintenance.
System Alarm Function

The system supports the alarm management function. This enables the set and query of alarm
level, automatic reporting of alarms, and deletion of history alarms. These help the user to
monitor and maintain the system in real time.
The system monitors alarm status of equipment in real time, analyzes alarms according to the
alarm relativity, and displays the analysis result on the client. A user can view the analysis result
on the client. The NMS enables a user to set the maximum alarm storage capacity and storage
period. If the history alarm data exceeds the capacity or the storage period of the history alarm
data expires, the NMS automatically saves the data in the history alarm database to files.
System Performance Monitoring Function

The performance event is a key parameter that reflects the working performance.
Knowledge about the causes that lead to the performance events, the relevant boards and alarms
helps locate the faults during routine maintenance and analyze faults when they occur.
At the end of each performance monitoring period, the SCC board reports performance events
to the NMS. The NMS enables a user to set the maximum performance storage capacity and
storage period. If the history performance data exceeds the capacity or the storage period the
history performance data expires, the NMS automatically saves the data in the history
performance database to files.
Performance events are related to the alarms. If the performance event value exceeds the preset
threshold value, the relevant alarm will be generated.When a performance event occurs, check
whether the relevant alarm is generated.

System Monitoring Items

The system provides the following system monitoring information.
l Temperature of the running board

l In-position status of the physical board
l Management function of the boards in different functional units
l Management function of the fan module
l Management function of the power module
l Input/Output optical power of the OTU
l Input/Output optical power of the OA
l Current status of the laser in the amplifier
l Temperature of the laser in the amplifier
l Temperature of the transmitting laser
9.3 Online Monitoring

This section describes OptiX OSN 8800's capability of monitoring performance of WDM-side
and client-side signals.
Performance Monitoring Period and History Register Count

The following table provides the performance monitoring periods and the number of monitoring
periods for which monitored data is stored on equipment (the latter is known as History Register
Count on the U2000).
Table 9-1 Performance monitoring period and history register count
Performan Monitoring Period History Register Count

ce
Monitorin
g Item
Ethernet 30 seconds 1-50 (configurable on the U2000.

RMON Default: 16, namely, 8 minutes)
performanc
e 30 minutes 1-50 (configurable on the U2000.
Default: 16, namely, 8 hours)
Variable period 1 (configurable on 1-50 (configurable on the U2000.

the U2000. Default: 15 minutes) Default: 16, namely, 4 hours)
Variable period 2 (configurable on 1-50 (configurable on the U2000.

the U2000. Default: 24 hours) Default: 6, namely, 6 days)
Others 15 minutes 16, namely, 4 hours
24 hours 6, namely, 6 days

Performance Monitoring for Client-Side Signals

Table 9-2 lists the performance monitoring of access services provided by OptiX OSN 8800.
Table 9-2 Performance monitoring of received services
Service Monitored Item Service Type

Category
Data Ethernet RMON FE

services performance GE
10GE LAN
40GE/100GE
SDH/ B1 bit parity error STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64/STM-256

SONET B2 bit parity error OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-192/OC-768
B3 bit parity error
V5-BIP2 bit parity error
OTN SM-BIP8 bit parity error OTU1/OTU2/OTU2e/OTU3/OTU4

TCM-BIP8 bit parity
error
PM-BIP8 bit parity error
SAN 8B/10B code violation ESCON

services FC100/FC200/FC400/FC800/FC1200
FICON/FICON Express/FICON 4G/FICON8G
ISC 1G/ISC 2G/ETR/CLO
InfiniBand 2.5G/InfiniBand 5G
Video 8B/10B code violation DVB-ASI/SDI/HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR/3G-SDI/

services 3G-SDIRBR
NOTE
Only the SDH boards support B3 bit errors and V5-BIP2 bit errors, which are supported only in the OCS
system.
Performance Monitoring for WDM-Side Signals

OptiX OSN 8800 monitors the WDM-side optical power, monitors the optical power of a single
channel or multiplexed channels of signals, and monitors the bias current of the lasers.
Table 9-3 provides the performance monitoring of the OptiX OSN 8800.

Table 9-3 The performance monitoring of the WDM side
Type Monitored Item Implementation Board
OTSa/ Optical power Fiber amplifier units, optical multiplexer/

OMSb demultiplexer units, ROADM, case-shaped Raman
optical amplifier units, optical protection unit and variable
signal optical attenuator (VOA)c provide real-time detection.
perform
ance
monitor
ing
OTS/ Wavelength value, Fiber amplifier units, optical multiplexer/

OMS optical power of each demultiplexer units, ROADMf, and Raman amplifier
signal wavelength, OSNRd units provide MON port. The spectrum analyzer unit
in- can be connected to this port to monitor the spectrum
service of the main path.
spectru
m
analysis
OChe Input/output optical WDM-side optical interfaces of all OTUs provide real-
optical power, laser temperature, time detection.
signal bias current
perform
ance
monitor
ing
OTN SM-BIP8 bit error OTUs with OTN line interfaces provide real-time
electric TCM-BIP 8bit error detection.
al layer
signal PM-BIP8 bit error
detectio
n
a: Optical Transmission Section

b: Optical Multiplex Section
c: The VOA supports optical power detection but is not necessarily adopted in OTS/OMS.
d: Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio
e: Optical Channel
f: The ROAM can detect the optical power of locally input wavelengths but cannot detect
OSNR or wavelength value.
On the equipment, there are power monitoring points. For example, the MON interfaces on the
front panels of certain boards monitor the optical power. These boards are as follows:
l The optical amplifier boards: OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, DAS1, RAU1, RAU2

l The multiplexer and demultiplexer units: M40, M40V, D40, D40V, ITL, FIU
l The reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing units: RMU9, WSD9, WSM9,
WSMD4, RDU9, WSMD2, WSMD9
9.4 ETH-OAM
ETH-OAM provides various operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) approaches for
Ethernet services and links on WDM and OTN networks, achieving convenient and efficient
deployment commissioning and routine OAM.
On traditional WDM and OTN networks, Ethernet links are maintained based on the optical
layer or OTN channels. As networks develop, the volume of traffic on WDM and OTN networks
increase and networking modes become more complex. This poses higher requirements on
Ethernet link maintainability, and brings an urgent demand for Ethernet service and link
maintenance in addition to link maintenance on the optical layer or OTN channels, to enhance
maintenance and administration on WDM and OTN networks.
Huawei WDM and OTN equipment uses Ethernet port OAM and Ethernet service OAM to
provide complete ETH-OAM solutions, addressing OAM requirements of Ethernet services and
links. Figure 9-1 shows application scopes of Ethernet port OAM and Ethernet service OAM
on OTN networks.
Figure 9-1 Application scopes of Ethernet port OAM and Ethernet service OAM on OTN
networks
Ethernet port Ethernet port
Ethernet service OAM
OAM OAM
Router 3
Router 1
OTN OTN
OTN
Router 2
Access layer Access layer

Core layer
Client layer Client layer
OptiX NE
ETH-OAM Functionality
Table 9-4 lists detailed functions of Ethernet port OAM and Ethernet service OAM.

Table 9-4 ETH-OAM functionality
ETH Applicat Stand Function Purpose

- ion ard
OA Scope Compl
M iance
Ether Point-to- IEEE Link fault detection Detects Ethernet link faults.
net point 802.3a (critical link
port Ethernet h events)
OA link
M between Link performance Monitors bit errors and performance
two monitoring events on Ethernet links.
directly- (common link
connecte events)
d devices OAM remote Checks performance and detects faults
loopback on the bidirectional links between the
loopback-initiating and loopback-
replying ends.
Port selfloop Automatically detects port selfloops

detection and disables self-looped ports.
Ether End-to- IEEE Continuity check Detects service link connectivity

net end 802.1a (CC) unidirectionally.
servi Ethernet g
ce services Loopback test Detects service link connectivity
OA bidirectionally.
M Link trace test Locates faults on links.
OAM_Ping test Detects the packet loss and delay that

result from bit errors in services
between the local end and data
communication equipment (DCE) that
supports the Internet Control Messages
Protocol (ICMP).
ITU-T Ethernet loss Monitor Ethernet service performance

Y.1731 measurement (LM) by measuring frame loss,frame loss
and Ethernet delay ratio (FLR), frame delay, and frame
measurement delay variation (FDV) between two
(DM) maintenance end points (MEPs) on an
Ethernet link.
NOTE
As Ethernet port OAM applies to point-to-point Ethernet links, it can also be referred to as Ethernet link
OAM. Standards compliance also refers to Ethernet port OAM as IEEE 802.3ah OAM or ETH-OAM (IEEE
802.3ah), and Ethernet service OAM as IEEE 802.1ag OAM or ETH-OAM (IEEE 802.1ag).

Position in the OSI Reference Model

Figure 9-2 shows the position of ETH-OAM in the open system interconnection (OSI) reference
model. ETH-OAM belongs to the data link layer that is between the LLC sub-layer and MAC
control layer.
Figure 9-2 Position of ETH-OAM in the OSI reference model
OSI reference
model layers
Application
Presentation
LAN
Session CSMA/CD layers
Transport LLC-logical link control or

other MAC clients
Network (Optional)
OAM
(Optional)
Physical MAC control
Media access control (MAC)
9.5 MPLS-TP OAM

MPLS-TP operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) can effectively detect, identify,
and locate faults on packet switched networks and notify related NEs of the faults, so the NEs
perform immediate protection switching. MPLS-TP OAM functionality helps improve network
reliability. MPLS-TP is the acronym for multiprotocol label switching transport profile.
Definition
The Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and International Telecommunication Union-
Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T) have standardized MPLS-TP for how
MPLS applies to transmission of packet services on transport networks. MPLS-TP complies
with existing MPLS standards and focuses on the particularity of transport networks.
MPLS-TP enables the following features:
l MPLS can be deployed on live transport networks and maintained using current transport
network maintenance methods.
l Paths for transmitting packet services can be predicted.
Purpose
A variety of data communication products and transport products have already supported MPLS-
TP OAM. Wide support for MPLS-TP OAM facilitates provision of end-to-end OAM on packet

switched networks consisting of packet transport equipment and data communication

equipment.
Equipment with MPLS-TP OAM functionality can meet carrier-class data transport needs.
The MPLS-TP OAM and ETH-OAM together provide hierarchical OAMs for tunnel, PW, and
ETH layers, achieving fast and hierarchical fault detection and locating, and therefore improving
network reliability.
9.6 Optical Doctor

The Optical Doctor (OD) system supports one-click configuration for monitoring optical-layer
performance. Specifically, it performs online OSNR monitoring, performance monitoring, and
performance optimization for 10G, 40G, and 100G wavelengths.
9.6.1 System Overview

Huawei OTN equipment supports the Optical Doctor (OD) system. The OD system provides for
intelligent end-to-end, refined, and digital management of the optical layer on a WDM network.
Through centralized configuration for optical-layer parameters, the OD system supports
automatic monitoring, analysis, commissioning, and optimization of network performance.
Challenges for WDM Network O&M

As WDM networks adopt higher transmission rates and become meshed, reliable network
maintenance plays a more important role. An easier-to-use and more professional operation and
maintenance (O&M) tool is required.
Currently, WDM networks are facing the following difficulties in the deployment,
commissioning, configuration, and network maintenance phases:
l Lack of quick and accurate OSNR monitoring methods:

After the network rate increases to 40 Gbit/s or higher, the original spectrum monitoring
method cannot quickly and accurately monitor the OSNR of a system. It is a great challenge
and a trend to develop an online OSNR monitoring tool for network maintenance.
l Lack of reliable and quick optical-layer O&M methods:
On meshed networks, WDM services become more flexible, and frequent service creation
and deletion make network commissioning and maintenance more complex. Traditional
manual OSNR monitoring cannot address WDM network development requirements from
the following aspects:
– Configuration is complex.
When network optical-layer performance needs to be monitored or optimized,
configuration needs to be performed for each site on the network, which is time-
consuming and costly. In addition, some configuration items are widely dispersed and
therefore are easily neglected. As a result, commissioning engineers have to perform a
network-wide check site by site, leading to low efficiency.
– Network performance deterioration cannot be detected in a timely manner.
Optical power fluctuation caused by fiber aging, component aging, wavelength adding
or dropping, or external environment cannot be discovered by manual monitoring in a

timely manner. Network-wide data collection and analysis require a long time and high
costs.
– Manual optimization is inefficient.
When optical-layer performance needs to be optimized, fault points and optimization
points have to be manually identified and optimization has to be manually performed
span by span. On a meshed network, optimization of one link may cause power
fluctuation on other links and as a result the other links have to be also optimized. The
optimization is time-consuming and complex.
With the development of WDM technologies and the change of network topology, an
effective network O&M tool is required.
Functions of the OD System

The OD system supports online OSNR monitoring for 40G and 100G wavelengths, making the
OSNR monitoring of 40G and 100G wavelengths as convenient as that of 10G wavelengths.
This greatly facilitates routine maintenance and makes it easy to upgrade 10G networks to 40G/
100G networks.
Figure 9-3 Online OSNR monitoring using the OD system
The online OSNR monitoring provided by the OD system has the following features:
l Simple operations
The OSNR monitoring function is integrated into the U2000. It can be performed by directly
operating the U2000. The virtual meter provides graphical display of the monitored OSNR
information, without using other auxiliary devices or complex operations.
l High detection precision
The detection error is less than ±1 dB, which is less than the detection error of traditional
OSNR monitoring for 10G wavelengths.
l Wide range of monitored wavelengths

Online OSNR monitoring is applicable to 10G, 40G, and 100G wavelengths at any type of
site.
In addition, the OD system can be used to perform O&M of the optical layer on a WDM network,
as described below.
Figure 9-4 O&M of the optical layer on a WDM network
l Centralized configuration for network-wide monitoring

The OD system supports centralized configuration for optical-layer performance
monitoring parameters, greatly saving labor costs.
l Automatic monitoring of optical-layer performance
The OD system can automatically monitor network-wide optical-layer performance
without using any meters. It can automatically detect the channels with abnormal
performance.
l Automatic optimization of optical-layer performance
Based on the performance data of each channel, the OD system can automatically adjust
the optical power of each channel so that the channel works in the optimal state.
l End-to-end (E2E) graphical display of optical-layer performance data
The OD system graphically displays link performance, facilitating status query and fault
isolation.
To sum up, the OD system can achieve OSNR monitoring of high-rate WDM networks, quick
monitoring deployment, monitoring, optimization, and analysis of E2E optical-layer
performance. It improves wavelength-level optical-layer O&M capabilities and provides
services along the lifecycle of WDM networks, simplifying the network O&M and saving the
operating expense (OPEX).
System Composition
The OD system requires the interoperation between the hardware and software.
The hardware monitors and reports optical-layer performance in real time, performs
corresponding adjustments, and is uniformly scheduled by the software. The software provides
user-friendly GUIs, supports network-wide configuration, provides visualized reports, and
achieves centralized control and uniform scheduling.

l Hardware
The hardware required by the OD system includes the following boards installed on the
NE:
– Spectrum analysis boards and optical amplifier (OA) boards: They are used to obtain
optical-layer performance data, monitor all optical signals in a centralized way without
interrupting services, and report the monitored optical-layer performance data to the
OD system.
– Electrical variable optical attenuators (EVOAs) and gain-adjustable OA boards: They
are used to adjust optical signal performance parameters.
l Software
The OD system is integrated in the U2000. Users can deliver network-wide performance
monitoring configuration commands using the U2000. After obtaining the optical-layer
performance data reported by each NE, the OD system analyzes the performance data and
graphically displays the analysis result. Based on the configuration policy, the OD system
instructs the EVOAs and OA boards to perform adjustments and optimize optical-layer
performance.
The following figure shows the interoperation between the hardware and software of the OD
system.
Figure 9-5 Interoperation between the hardware and software of the OD system
The user checks for

6 abnormal events and
performance data.
7 Optimization
is started.
1 The user configures
the OD function.
8 The OD system triggers

optimization of channels with 5 The OD system obtains
abnormal performance. optical performance data
from the equipment and 2 The OD system delivers
graphically displays it. configuration commands to
4 the equipment.
The equipment reports abnormal
events and performance data to the
OD system.
The OD system accurately
3
detects OSNR and other
performance data through
the interoperation between
hardware and software.
The hardware of the NE in

each OMS is involved in the
optical performance query
MCA MCA and adjustment.

9.6.2 Glance at OD Functions

The Optical Doctor (OD) system achieves centralized management and simple configuration,
and graphically displays monitoring results using the U2000.
NOTE
OD V1 supports only the function of monitoring single-NE optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) while OD V2
supports more functions.
Detecting and Reporting Single-NE Optical Parameters

The OD can detect and report the single-wavelength optical power and OSNR at each site of a
10G, 40G, or 100G network, and enable users to view the receive- and transmit-end single-
wavelength optical power and OSNR on the MCA board at the receive or transmit end.
Figure 9-6 Detecting and reporting single-NE optical parameters
ROADM ROADM
MCA OLA OLA MCA
WSS WSS
OSNR detection point
Performing Centralized Configuration and Delivering for the Monitoring Function

The centralized configuration includes setting monitoring parameters and configuring automatic
monitoring of network changes and historical data backup.
l The OD enables users to set monitoring parameters in a centralized way. Users do not need
to concern for configuration details and the configuration data is automatically delivered.
This feature greatly saves labor costs and improves configuration efficiency.
l The OD automatically monitors network changes and periodically delivers the configured
monitoring parameters to new services.
l The OD periodically backs up historical data.

Figure 9-7 Centralized setting of monitoring parameters

Sets monitoring parameters
in a centralized way. Automatically monitors
network changes.
Periodically backs up
historical data.
Detecting and Reporting Optical Parameters in E2E Mode Without Using Any
Meter
The OD visually displays OCh signal flows, and the optical power and OSNR of the current
E2E OCh trails.
Figure 9-8 Graphically display of optical parameters in E2E mode

: OLA : OADM
Automatically Optimizing Network Performance

The OD considers abnormal OCh trails as to-be-optimized OCh trails and records the abnormal
alarm information. When Optimization Mode is set to Auto, the OD automatically starts
optimization and commissioning on the OCh trails.
Figure 9-9 Automatically optimizing network performance

Abnormal
Automatic optimization
After optimization
9.7 TP-Assist Solution of Packet Services

Like the SDH equipment, Huawei OptiX OTN product series supports a hierarchical operating
& maintenance (O&M) system by using the TP-Assist solution, so packet services can be
configured, commissioned, or maintained in an end-to-end manner.
Unlike an SDH/OTN network, a packet network brings the following challenges:
l More types of network topologies and more complex and time-consuming configurations,
which impose higher requirements on O&M personnel

l Lack of overheads that indicate the physical status of a network to real-time monitor
services or form a complete alarm system. Once a network is faulty, it is hard to locate the
fault.
The TP-Assist solution addresses these challenges. It searches the Huawei intelligent expert
database, facilitating O&M operations such as service configuration, installation and
commissioning, and fault locating. Table 9-5 provides the functions of the TP-Assist solution.
Table 9-5 Functions of the TP-Assist O&M system
Function Description License Purpose

Control
End-to-end service deployment Deploys PW-carried E-Line, E- None Quick service

LAN, and hybrid services in an end- configuration
to-end manner. Improves
configuration
accuracy.
Automatic deployment of alarm Deploying ETH-OAM or MPLS-TP None Avoids extra

management with service OAM when deploying Ethernet OAM
deployment services and MPLS tunnels in an deployment
end-to-end manner. operations.
Allows the NE
to automatically
report alarms
when a service
fault occurs.
One-click service connectivity test Supports one-click service None Quick

connectivity test for Ethernet commissioning
services and MPLS tunnels that are Lowers project
deployed in an end-to-end manner. acceptance
costs.
One-click service performance test Supports one-click packet loss, None
delay, and delay jitter tests for
Ethernet services and MPLS tunnels
that are deployed in an end-to-end
manner.
Automatic tests with no need for any Testing Ethernet Service Latency, None Quick
instrument Throughput, and Short-Term/Long- commissioning
term Packet Loss Ratio Using TP- Lowers project
Assist acceptance
costs.


Control
Performance Network-level The performance management None Optimized

monitoring and performance system (PMS) embedded in the monitoring
measurement monitoring and U2000 supports unified monitoring points, rich
measurement and measurement of any service
system measurement object and monitoring
performance indicator in the methods
network.
It supports 24-hour service status
pre-warning and monitoring, and
provides equipment performance
threshold-crossing alarms and
network performance threshold-
crossing alarms.
Visualized Queries and For E-Line services, allows users to Yes Service
O&M display of find the service working path and visualization
service paths protection path views based
based on VLANs.
VLANs For E-LAN services, allows users to
find the VLAN domain views based
on VLANs.
Queries and For E-LAN services, allows users to Yes

display of find the actual MAC address
service paths forwarding path views based on
based on MAC MAC addresses.
addresses
Intelligent fault diagnosis Performs automatic fault diagnosis Yes Intelligent fault
for Ethernet services by layer diagnosis
(service/PW/tunnel/port) and by Cross-product
level (connectivity/performance/ fault diagnosis
configuration).
Quickly outputs fault diagnosis
reports on a one-click operation
GUI.
IP ping Responds to IP ping packets sent None

from client equipment and then
quickly narrows down the fault
location to the client equipment or
the transport network.
Support near-end or far-end IP ping
responding and initiation.


Control
Service loop detection Checks whether an E-LAN service None

on an NE forms a loop.
Automatically shuts down a looped
service.
9.8 Loopback
Loopbacks provide an effective means of troubleshooting a network, by verifying a service on
a segment-by-segment basis.
9.8.1 Hardware Loopback

A hardware loopback is performed on a physical port (optical port) using a fiber. It must be
performed at the site.
NOTICE
A loopback will interrupt services. It is most often used during deployment or fault location for
When you perform a hardware loopback, add an optical attenuator according to the range of the
optical power received by different boards. For details on the receive optical power, see
Specification of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards and Packet Service Boards.
Table 9-6 Hardware Loopback
Loopback Diagram Description

Type
Client-side l OTU board: Determines whether a

loopback Client side WDM side board is faulty.
OTU board
RX OUT

TX IN
l Tributary board:
Tributary board Line board
RX OUT
Signal Signal
processing processing
module module
TX IN


Type
WDM-side l OTU board:

loopback Client side WDM side
OTU board
RX OUT

TX IN
l Line board:
RX OUT
Signal Signal
module module
TX IN
9.8.2 Software Loopback

You can configure a software loopback using the NMS.
The ALS function has no impact on the loopback function.
NOTICE
A loopback will interrupt services. It is most often during deployment or fault location for service
interruption.
NOTICE
After a software loopback is configured, changing service configurations of a board may release
the software loopback. When this occurs, check the loopback status and configure a new
loopback.
l Inloop

Table 9-7 Inloops
Loopback Type Diagram Description
Client side inloop l OTU board: Determines whether a

board can correctly
OTU board
RX OUT
process received
Signal processing module signals.
TX IN
l Tributary board:
RX OUT
Signal Signal
module module
TX IN
WDM side inloop l OTU board:

OTU board
RX OUT

TX IN
l Line board:

RX OUT
Signal Signal
module module
TX IN
Channel inloop l Line board: Loops back an

Client side WDM side individual ODUk
RX ODU(k-n)
signal instead of all
O OUT
Signal
processing
D
U
signals of a board.
module
TX ODU(k-n)
ODU(k-1)
k
IN This type of loopback
can prevent impact on
other services on the
board. It determines
whether an ODUk
signal from a
tributary board is
normal and whether a
line board can process
an ODUk signal.
l Outloop

Table 9-8 Outloops
Loopback Type Diagram Description
Client-side l OTU board: Determines whether

outloop Client side WDM side
the fiber line and
OTU board
RX OUT
connectors are
Signal processing module functioning properly.
TX IN
l Tributary board:
RX OUT
Signal Signal
module module
TX IN
WDM-side l OTU board:

Outloop Client side WDM side
OTU board
RX OUT

TX IN
l Line board:
RX OUT
Signal Signal
module module
TX IN
Channel Outloop l Line board: Loops back an

individual ODUk
RX ODU(k-n)
signal instead of all
O OUT
Signal
processing
D
U
signals of a board.
module
TX ODU(k-n)
ODU(k-1)
k
IN This type of loopback
can prevent impact on
other services on the
board. It determines
whether an individual
ODUk signal
received and
demultiplexed on the
WDM side is in the
normal state.
9.8.3 Software Loopback (with L2 Function)

This section describes how to perform software loopbacks on boards with the Layer 2 switching
function using the NMS.

NOTICE
l Inloop
Table 9-9 Inloop

Type
PHY inloop l LEM24/LEX4 board: Determines whether

equipment runs
OTU board properly by creating a
RX OUT
looped path at the PHY
PHY layer MAC layer layer and then sending
IN
TX
and receiving signals
L2 switch module
over the path.
MAC inloop l LEM24/LEX4 board: Determines whether

equipment runs
RX OUT looped path at the
PHY layer MAC layer MAC layer and then
IN
TX
L2 switch module
sending and receiving
signals over the path.
NOTE
The loopback types supported by the LEM24/LEX4/TEM28 boards vary according to the service types of the boards.
l Outloop

Table 9-10 Outloops

Type
PHY l LEM24/LEX4 board: Determines whether

outloop Client side WDM side equipment runs
RX OUT looped path at the PHY
PHY layer MAC layer layer and then sending
IN
TX
and receiving signals
L2 switch module
over the path.
l TEM28 board:

RX OUT
PHY MAC Signal
layer layer processing
TX module
L2 switch module IN
MAC l LEM24/LEX4 board: Determines whether

outloop Client side WDM side equipment runs
RX OUT looped path at the
PHY layer MAC layer MAC layer and then
TX IN
L2 switch module
sending and receiving
signals over the path.
l TEM28 board:

RX OUT
PHY MAC Signal
layer layer processing
TX module
L2 switch module IN
NOTE
The loopback types supported by the LEM24/LEX4/TEM28 boards vary according to the service types of the boards.
9.8.4 Software Loopback For TN52TOM

This section describes how to perform software loopbacks for the TN52TOM board using the
NMS.
NOTICE

l Inloop
Table 9-11 Inloop
Scenario Diagram Description
Scenario 1 ODU0 Client side WDM side

l 1 : Inloop for the RX/TX
mode (Any- TOM
Line board
port determines whether the
RX OUT
>ODU0[- 1
20xClientLPx-1
2
16xODU1LPx-1
2
Signal
processing board can correctly process
ODU0 ODU1
>ODU1]) in TX
module
IN received signals.
cascading mode
l 2 : Inloop for an internal LP
Scenario 5: ODU0 NOTE port determines whether the
mode (Any- l When used in the OptiX OSN 8800, the board supports the board can process the signals
>ODU0[- loopback at the RX/TX port and 20xClientLPx-1 port. inside the board.
>ODU1]) in non-
cascading mode
Scenario 3: ODU1 Client side WDM side
mode (OTU1/Any- TOM Line board

>ODU1) in RX Signal processing module
OUT
cascading mode 20xClientLPx-1 2

Signal
1 processing
ODU1 module
Scenario 7: ODU1 TX IN
mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1) in non-
NOTE
cascading mode When the client service type is OTU1, the ODU1 inloop is
performed toward the backplane.
Scenario 8: Client side WDM side

TOM Line board
ODU1_ANY_OD Signal processing module
RX OUT
U0_ODU1 re- 20xClientL
237 to
244(AnyLP5
16x(ODU0L Signal
Px-1 Px)-1 processing
encapsulation
1 2 2 2
to12)-1 module
ODU1 ODU1
Any
TX IN
mode (OTU1-
>ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1)
in non-cascading
mode

TOM Line board
ODU1_ODU0 Signal processing module
RX OUT
mode (OTU1- 20xClientLPx-1
Signal
1 2 processing
>ODU1->ODU0) TX
ODU1
module
IN
in non-cascading
mode


TOM Line board
ODU1_ANY_OD RX Signal processing module
OUT
U0 re- 1 20xClientLPx-1 2
237 to 244(AnyLP5
to12)-1 2
Signal
processing
ODU1 ODU0 module
encapsulation TX IN
mode (OTU1-
>ODU1->Any-
>ODU0) in non-
cascading mode

tributary-line mode TOM
(Any->ODU0-
RX Signal processing module
>ODU1->OTU1) TX
in cascading mode 1 5xODU0LPx-1 2 1

ODU1
TX RX

(OTU1/Any- Signal processing module
RX TX
>ODU1->OTU1)
20xClientLPx-1
in cascading mode 1
ODU1
2 1
TX RX

(Any->ODU0- Signal processing module
RX TX
>ODU1->OTU1)
5xODU0LPx-1
in non-cascading 1
ODU1
2 1
mode TX RX

ODU1_ANY_OD TOM
U0_ODU1 re- Signal processing module TX
RX
encapsulation 20xClientLPx-1 5xODU0LPx-1
tributary-line mode 1 ODU1 2 ODU1 2 1
(OTU1->ODU1- TX RX
>Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1)
in non-cascading
mode


RX TX
>ODU1->OTU1)
20xClientLPx-1
in non-cascading 1
ODU1
2 1
mode TX RX
NOTE
When the client service type is OTU1, the ODU1 inloop is
performed toward the backplane.
l Outloop
Table 9-12 Outloop
Scenario 1 ODU0 Client side WDM side

l 1 : Outloop for the RX/TX
TOM
mode (Any- RX Signal processing module
Line board
OUT
port determines whether the
>ODU0[- 1 20xClientLPx-1
2
16xODU1LPx-1
2
Signal
processing fiber line and connectors are
ODU0 ODU1
>ODU1]) in TX
module
IN normal.
cascading mode
l 2 : Outloop for an internal
NOTE
Scenario 5: ODU0 LP port determines whether
mode (Any- l When used in the OptiX OSN 8800, the board supports the the board can process the
loopback at the RX/TX port and 20xClientLPx-1 port.
>ODU0[- signals inside the board.
l When used in the OptiX OSN 6800 or OptiX OSN 3800,
>ODU1]) in non-
the board supports the loopback at the RX/TX port and
cascading mode 16xODU1LPx-1 port.
mode (OTU1/Any- TOM Line board

>ODU1) in RX Signal processing module
OUT
cascading mode 20xClientLPx-1

Signal
1 2 processing
ODU1 module
Scenario 7: ODU1 TX IN
mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1) in non-
NOTE
cascading mode
When the client service type is OTU1, the ODU1 outloop is
performed toward the client side.


TOM
ODU1_ANY_OD Signal processing module
Line board
RX
U0_ODU1 re-
OUT
237 to
20xClientL 16x(ODU0 Signal
244(AnyLP5
1 Px-1 2 2 LPx)-1 2 processing
encapsulation ODU1
to12)-1
Any
ODU1 module
TX
mode (OTU1-
IN
>ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1)
in non-cascading
mode

TOM Line board
ODU1_ODU0 Signal processing module
RX OUT
mode (OTU1- 20xClientLPx-1 2
Signal
1 processing
>ODU1->ODU0) TX
ODU1
module
IN
in non-cascading
mode

TOM Line board
ODU1_ANY_OD RX Signal processing module OUT
U0 re- 1 20xClientLPx-1 2
ODU1
237 to 244(AnyLP5
to12)-1 2
Signal
processing
ODU0 module
encapsulation TX IN
mode (OTU1-
>ODU1->Any-
>ODU0) in non-
cascading mode

tributary-line mode
TOM
(Any->ODU0-
RX Signal processing module
>ODU1->OTU1) TX
in cascading mode 1
5xODU0LPx-1
2 1
ODU1
TX RX

RX TX
TX
>ODU1->OTU1)
20xClientLPx-1
in cascading mode 1
ODU1
2 1
TX RX
RX


(Any->ODU0- Signal processing module
RX TX
>ODU1->OTU1)
5xODU0LPx-1
in non-cascading 1
ODU1
2 1
mode TX RX

ODU1_ANY_OD TOM
U0_ODU1 re- Signal processing module
RX TX
encapsulation
20xClientLPx-1 2 5xODU0LPx-1 2
tributary-line mode 1
ODU1 ODU1
1
(OTU1->ODU1- TX RX
>Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1)
in non-cascading
mode

(OTU1/Any-
>ODU1->OTU1) RX TX
in non-cascading 1 20xClientLPx-1 2 1
mode ODU1
TX RX
NOTE
When the client service type is OTU1, the ODU1 outloop is
performed toward the client side.
9.8.5 Software Loopbacks for TN11LOA

This section describes how to perform software loopbacks for the TN11LOA board using the
NMS.
NOTICE
A loopback will interrupt services. Therefore, it is generally used during deployment or fault
location for service interruption.
l Inloop

Table 9-13 Inloop
Scenario 1: Client side WDM side l 1 : Inloop for the RX/TX port is
ODU0 non- LOA used to determine whether the
convergence board can correctly process
mode (Any- RX OUT
received signals.
>ODU0[- ODUk
>ODU1]-
1 2 l 2 : Inloop for an internal ODUk
>ODU2- TX IN
channel is used to determine
>OTU2) whether the board can process the
signals inside the board.
Scenario 2:
ODU1 non- NOTE
For ODUk channel loopbacks in different scenarios, k in
convergence
"ODUk" represents different rates:
mode (Any-
l scenario 1 and scenario 2: ODU0
>ODU1-
>ODU2- l scenario 3: ODU1
>OTU2) l scenario 4: ODUflex
Scenario 3:
ODU1_ODU0
mode (OTU1-
>ODU1-
>ODU0[-
>ODU1]-
>ODU2-
>OTU2)
Scenario 4:
ODUflex non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODUflex-
>ODU2-
>OTU2)
NOTE
The TN11LOA board does not support inloops when it is used in scenario 5 ODU2 non-convergence mode
(Any->ODU2->OTU2).
The TN11LOA board does not support inloops when it is used in scenario 4 ODUflex non-convergence
mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) and when it receives FC800/FICON8G services on the client
side.
l Outloop

Table 9-14 Outloop
Scenario 1: Client side WDM side l : Outloop for the RX/TX port is
1
ODU0 non- used to determine whether the fiber

LOA
convergence line and connectors are normal.
mode (Any- RX
OUT
>ODU0[- l : Outloop for an internal ODUk
2
>ODU1]- 1 ODUk 2 channel is used to determine

>ODU2- whether the board can process the
>OTU2)
TX IN signals inside the board.
Scenario 2:
ODU1 non-
NOTE
convergence
For ODUk channel loopbacks in different scenarios, k in
mode (Any- "ODUk" represents different rates:
>ODU1-
l scenario 1 and scenario 2: ODU0
>ODU2-
l scenario 3: ODU1
>OTU2)
l scenario 4: ODUflex
Scenario 3:
ODU1_ODU
0 mode
(OTU1-
>ODU1-
>ODU0[-
>ODU1]-
>ODU2-
>OTU2)
Scenario 4:
ODUflex
non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODUflex-
>ODU2-
>OTU2)
Scenario 5: Client side WDM side A outloop for the RX/TX or IN/OUT
ODU2 non- port is used to determine whether the
LOA
convergence fiber line and connectors are normal.
mode (Any- RX OUT
>ODU2-
>OTU2) Signal processing module
TX IN

9.8.6 Software Loopbacks for TN54TOA

This section describes how to perform software loopbacks for the TN54TOA board using the
NMS.
NOTICE
l Inloop
Table 9-15 Inloop
Scenario 1: Client side WDM side An inloop for the RX/TX

ODU0 non- TOA Line board port is used to determine
convergence RX OUT
whether the board can
mode (Any- Signal correctly process received
Signal processing module processing
>ODU0) module signals.
TX IN
Scenario 2:
ODU1 non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODU1)
Scenario 3:
ODU1
convergence
mode (n*Any-
>ODU1)
Scenario 5:
ODUflex non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODUflex)

Scenario 4: Client side WDM side An inloop for an internal

ODU1_ODU0 TOA Line board ODUk channel is used to
mode (OTU1- RX
Signal processing
module OUT
determine whether the
>ODU1- ClientLP
ODU0LP
ODU0
Signal
processi
board can process the
>ODU0) ODU1 ODU0LP
ODU0
ng
module
signals inside the board.
TX IN
NOTE
l A client-side outloop is performed on the RX/TX port using the
NMS and the signal is looped back at the ODU0 loopback point.
l A channel outloop is performed on an ODU0LP port using the NMS
and the signal is looped back at the ODU0 loopback point.
l Outloop
Table 9-16 Outloop
Scenario 1: Client side WDM side An outloop for the RX/TX

ODU0 non- TOA Line board or IN/OUT port is used to
convergence RX OUT
determine whether the fiber
mode (Any- Signal line and connectors are
>ODU0) module normal.
TX IN
Scenario 2:
ODU1 non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODU1)
Scenario 3:
ODU1
convergence
mode (n*Any-
>ODU1)
Scenario 5:
ODUflex non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODUflex)

Scenario 4: Client side WDM side An outloop for an internal

ODU1_ODU0 TOA Line board ODUk channel is used to
mode (OTU1- RX
Signal processing
OUT
determine whether the
module
>ODU1- ClientLP
ODU0LP
ODU0
Signal board can process the
processing
>ODU0) ODU1 ODU0LP
ODU0 module signals inside the board.
TX IN
NOTE
9.8.7 Software Loopbacks for TN54THA

This section describes how to perform software loopbacks for the TN54THA board using the
NMS.
NOTICE
l Inloop
Used to loop back a signal processed by a board from the receiving port of the board to the
transmitting port of the board.
Table 9-17 Inloop
Scenario 1: Client side WDM side l A inloop for the RX/TX

ODU0 non- THA Line board port is used to determine
convergence RX OUT
whether the board can
mode (Any- Signal correctly process
>ODU0) module received signals.
TX IN
l A inloop for an internal
Scenario 2:
ODUk channel is used
ODU1 non-
to determine whether
convergence
the board can process
mode (Any-
the signals inside the
>ODU1)
board.

Scenario 3:
ODU1
convergence
mode (n*Any-
>ODU1)
ODU1_ODU0 THA Line board

mode (OTU1- RX
Signal processing
module OUT
>ODU1- ClientLP
ODU0LP
ODU0
Signal
processing
>ODU0) ODU1 ODU0LP
ODU0
module
TX IN
NOTE
l Outloop
Used to loop back signals from the receiving port to the transmitting port of the board.
Table 9-18 Outloop
Scenario 1: Client side WDM side l A outloop for the RX/

ODU0 non- THA Line board TX or IN/OUT port is
convergence RX OUT
used to determine
mode (Any- Signal whether the fiber line
>ODU0) module and connectors are
TX IN normal.
Scenario 2:
l A outloop for an internal
ODU1 non-
ODUk channel is used
convergence
to determine whether
mode (Any-
the board can process
>ODU1)
the signals inside the
Scenario 3: board.
ODU1
convergence
mode (n*Any-
>ODU1)

ODU1_ODU0 THA Line board

mode (OTU1- RX
Signal processing
OUT
module
>ODU1- ClientLP
ODU0LP
ODU0
Signal
processing
>ODU0) ODU1 ODU0LP
ODU0 module
TX IN
NOTE
9.9 PRBS Test

If no commissioning instruments are available in the network maintenance phase or on a new
network where no services are deployed, you can perform a self-transmit and self-receive test
using the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS) function to check whether links on each section
are normal by performing loopbacks section by section.
Figure 9-10 shows a PRBS application. A local board with the PRBS test function sends PRBS
codes and analyzes the PRBS codes looped back from the peer end. By comparing the
loopbacked PRBS codes with the PRBS codes that should be received according to the
theoretical calculation, the local board determines whether equipment and the transmission line
are normal.
Figure 9-10 PRBS application

PRBS is enabled on the auxiliary boards
Sends PRBS codes
WDM
network
Tester Near-end Far-end

board auxiliary auxiliary
board Inloop on Outloop on board Inloop on
WDM side WDM side client side
Site A Site B

NOTICE
l When a PRBS test is in progress, only query operations can be performed, no configurations
can be delivered to involved boards, the involved boards cannot carry any services, and the
original services on the boards will be interrupted.
l The LTX board does not support a PRBS test on multiple optical ports at the same time.
NOTE
l The PRBS test function is targeted for use during deployment and fault location. After deployment and
fault location, users must set PRBS Test Status to Disabled.
l PRBS codes vary according to the client-side service types. Therefore, to perform a client-side PRBS
test, users must ensure that the client-side service types for the tester board and auxiliary board are the
same.
The PRBS test is applicable to two networking modes, as provided in Table 9-19.
For a network, a client-side PRBS test covers a larger area than a WDM-side PRBS test, as
illustrated in Table 9-19. If a board on which a PRBS test has been started does not receive the
PRBS test signals that the board has sent, the board reports a PRBS_LSS alarm.
For information about how to complete PRBS configurations, see Configuring PRBS Test on
the Meter Board in Commissioning Guide.
For the boards that support the PRBS function, refer to Basic Functions of OTUs, OTN Tributary
Boards, OTN Line Boards ,Packet Service Boards and Universal Line Boards in Hardware
Description.
Table 9-19 PRBS applications
Test Mode Service Type Networking Diagram
Client-side OTN signals/SDH TX RX OUT IN TX

1
PRBS test services Tester Near 2
Remote
WDM network 3 auxiliary 4
board auxiliary board
RX TX board IN OUT
RX
Client Client WDM WDM Client

side side side side side
1 Start PRBS test

2
Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback
3
4 Loopback on the client side/fiber loopback
WDM-side N/A OUT IN

1
PRBS test
Remote
Tester 2
WDM network auxiliary
board IN
OUT board
WDM WDM
side side
1 Start PRBS test

2 Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback

Test Mode Service Type Networking Diagram
Tester board: generates PRBS test signals and monitors the loopbacked PRBS test signals
from the remote board. By comparing the transmitted and received PRBS test signals, the
board determines whether the current link and equipment are normal.
Auxiliary board: connects a tester board and the network under test and transparently transmits
the PRBS test signals. On the auxiliary boards at the near end, PRBS Test Status need to be
set to Enabled, only when client-side services are other than OTN services.
When a tributary or line board is used as a tester or auxiliary board, cross-connections need
to be configured to form a service path.
9.10 Tunable Wavelengths

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports tunable wavelengths. It adopts 100Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s OTUs that support tunable wavelengths.
l The 100Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s OTUs support tunable wavelengths in up to 80
channels with 50 GHz spacing in C band.
l The 2.5 Gbit/s OTUs support tunable wavelengths in up to 40 channels with 100 GHz
spacing in C band.
In addition, the tunable wavelength OTUs can also function as spare parts to substitute OTUs
of different wavelengths. This reduces the number of OTUs and lowers the cost. When the
wavelength-tunable OTUs work with dynamic optical add/drop multiplexing units, the dynamic
wavelength grooming is realized.
9.11 Jitter Suppression Function

For a wavelength conversion unit of the OptiX OSN 8800, jitter suppression can be configured
between the optical receiver and transmitter to effectively suppress service signal jitter.
9.12 Hot Patch

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports hot patches.
Hot patches fix a known defect or apply a new requirement without shutting down and restarting
the OptiX OSN 8800. After a hot patch is loaded, the old codes are replaced with new codes.
Hot patches have the following features:
l Solve most software problems without affecting services.

l Effectively decrease the number of software versions and avoid frequent software version
upgrade.
l Support local or remote installation that is non-service affecting. They also support
rollback. This helps effectively reduce upgrade costs and avoid upgrade risks.
l Functions as an effective way to rectify faults.

9.13 Software Package Loading and Software Package

Diffusion
The system supports software package loading, which is an upgrade scheme that simplifies
software upgrade operations. The user can load, activate, and manage NE-level software in a
centralized manner. In addition, the system supports software package diffusion mode, which
provides for high package loading efficiency.
Software Package Loading

The system checks the software version of a board when the board goes online and updates the
board software if it does not match the system.
Software package loading has the following features:
l Software for an NE is loaded in a uniform operation interface.

l After package loading, the complete software package is stored on the system control board.
The NE software is directly placed in the target directory and the board software is buffered
in the CF. The system can therefore update board software when the board goes online. In
addition, if the software files of a board are missing, the system can restore these files from
the system control board.
l Software for a newly-inserted board is automatically updated if the board does not match
the software of the NE.
l Software package loading is incremental and loads only the required files.
l Software package loading supports automatic and manual rollback. If the loading fails
because the software or hardware of the system is faulty, the system automatically restores
the original NE software. If an error occurs during the software loading process, a manual
rollback can be performed to restore the original NE software.
Software package loading applies to the following scenarios:
l Upgrading NE software
l Replacing service boards
l Replacing the system control board
Software Package Diffusion

Software upgrade can also be performed in package diffusion mode. In this mode, a software
package is diffused among NEs using the diffusion protocol so that subtending NEs do not need
to obtain the package from the NMS. This mode helps improve software package loading
efficiency while making user operations easier.
Figure 9-11 shows how a software package is loaded in non-diffusion mode and in diffusion
mode.
l In non-diffusion mode, NE1 dispenses four copies of the same software package.
l In diffusion mode, the NMS interacts only with NE1. After NE1 receives a software
package from the NMS, it diffuses the software package to NE2 and NE4. Then NE2 or

NE4 diffuses the software package to NE3. In this manner, only one software package is
transmitted on the same trail.
Therefore, in diffusion mode the package loading efficiency is improved greatly because the
data volume between NEs is small.
Figure 9-11 Package loading in diffusion and non-diffusion mode
Application Scenario
Huawei WDM equipment can be upgraded in software package loading mode or software
package diffusion mode. The two modes apply to different networking scenarios. Use the
appropriate upgrade mode to ensure optimal upgrade performance.
Upgrad Description Application Scenario

e Mode
Software The NMS loads the target software This upgrade mode is used to upgrade
package package specified in an upgrade task to a single NE or multiple gateway NEs
loading each NE. (GNEs) in batches.
Software The NMS computes the topological This mode is used to upgrade one GNE
package relationship between NEs specified in and its subtending NEs in batches.
diffusion an upgrade task. The NMS first loads
the target software package to the NE
that is directly reachable through a
DCN. Then the NE saves the software
package and diffuses the package to the
downstream NEs. This process is
repeated until the software package
reaches the last NE on the link.
9.14 OAMS
OptiX OSN 8800 must works with OptiX BWS 1600G to provide the Optical fiber line
Automatic Monitoring System (OAMS), which implements functions such as preliminary fault
location and link fiber alarm reporting.

Application
After locating the span where a fault is located, maintenance personnel can start an OAMS fiber
test in the span and further locate the faulty point.
As shown in Figure 9-12, OAMS uses an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) module
to inject optical pulses at specific frequency into the fiber and receive weak signals generated
by the backscattering and reflection of the optical pulses in the fiber. By doing so, OAMS can
calculate the change in fiber insertion loss and distance, locating the faulty point correctly.
Figure 9-12 Application of the OAMS
Fault
OTDR
Service signal Test signal
Implementation Scheme
An OptiX OSN 8800 NE contains boards, such as OTU, OA, multiplexer/demultiplexer, and
OSC boards; an OptiX BWS 1600G NE contains only SCC, FMU, MWA, and MWF boards.
Figure 9-13 shows the OAMS implementation scheme for an OLA site.
To enable the OAMS function on OptiX OSN 8800 NEs, Enable OAMS Power Monitoring
must be set to Enable for detection boards.
l If a fiber cut or line fault occurs, the OA board, OSC board, and demultiplexer board on
NE1 detect that the optical power is lower than the preset threshold. Then NE1 reports an
abnormal status monitored event to the U2000. After receiving the event, the U2000 issues
a command to NE2, requiring NE2 to start the OAMS function.
For OptiX BWS 1600G NEs:

l NE2 starts the OAMS function.
– The OTDR module built in the FMU board sends test pulses, and receives, collects, and
processes the signals generated by the reflection of the test pulses. Then the OTDR
module reports information about the signals and monitors the operating status of the
active fiber in real time.
– The MWA board combines service signals and test signals for transmission over the
same fiber.
l The MWF board on NE3 filters test signals at the receive end and eliminates the impact of
the test signals on the system.
Table 9-20 lists the boards required for implementing the OAMS function.

Figure 9-13 OAMS implementation scheme

NE1-8800/6800 NE3-1600G NE4-8800/6800
OAU OAU
F F MWF F F
I SC2 I I SC2 I
U U U U
OAU OAU
MWA
FMU
NE2-1600G
Table 9-20 Boards required by OAMS
Board Name Function Applicable NE Type
TN11D40, Detection Detects the line optical OptiX OSN 8800

TN12D40, board power. If the optical
TN11DAS1, power is lower than the
TN11HBA, lower threshold, the
TN12OAU1, board reports an
TN13OAU1, abnormal status
TN12OBU1, monitored event to the
TN11RAU1, U2000. Then the U2000
TN12SC2, starts the OAMS
TN12SC1, function.
TN11ST2
E1FMU Fiber It is the core of the OptiX BWS 1600G

Monitoring OAMS to implement
Unit Board the time-domain
reflection measurement
of fibers.
It can be used to
measure four separate
fibers.
E2MWA Monitoring In the in-service OptiX BWS 1600G

Wavelength monitoring mode, it is
Access Board used to multiplex the
service signal of the
DWDM system with the
test signal.

Board Name Function Applicable NE Type
E2MWF Monitoring In the in-service OptiX BWS 1600G

Wavelength monitoring mode, it is
Filter Board used to filter the
wavelength of test
signals, to eliminate the
effect on the
transmission system.
The board is used only
when the service signal
and the test signal flow
in the same direction.
NOTE
For details on the FMU, MWA, and MWF boards, see OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description.
For detailed information and configuration procedures for the OAMS function, see OptiX BWS 1600G
Feature Description.
Monitoring Modes
The OAMS supports two monitoring modes.
l In-service (lit fiber) monitoring: In this mode, a working optical fiber (cable) is monitored
and tested. In this case, the wavelength of the test signal is 1310 nm.
l Standby fiber (dark fiber) monitoring: In this mode, a standby optical fiber (cable) is
monitored and tested. In this case, the wavelength of the test signal is 1550 nm.
Figure 9-14 Embedded OAMS architecture (in-service monitoring)
MWF
MWA
MWF
FMU

Figure 9-15 Embedded OAMS architecture (standby fiber monitoring)
F
Standby Standby
M
fiber fiber
U
Service signal Test signal
Testing Modes
OAMS provides two test methods.
l Unidirectional test: Only the signals of a span in one direction are monitored and tested.
l Bidirectional test: In the case of one span, signals need be tested bidirectionally to monitor
the span.
Configuration Plan
The Raman amplification and optical fiber attenuation will affect the embedded OAMS. Table
9-21 lists the OAMS applications with and without Raman amplification.
Table 9-21 Applications of embedded OAMS
System Type Fiber Attenuation Supported Monitoring
With Raman - Standby fiber monitoring

amplification
Without Raman ≤45dB Standby fiber monitoring and online

amplification monitoring
>45dB Standby fiber monitoringa
a: The 1310 nm test signal is of great attenuation in fiber, resulting in limited monitoring
distance, so the spans more than 45 dB are only provided with standby fiber monitoring.
Table 9-22 list the configuration of OAMS in various system specifications.

Table 9-22 OAMS configuration specification
Monitor OTDR
ing Span Monitorin Dynamic
Modes System Attenu g Signal Test Optical
Specific ation Wavelengt Range Fiber
ation (dB) h (nm) (dB) Lengtha Test Mode
In- Long 22 1310 42 80 km (50 Unidirection

service distance mi.) al test
monitori transmiss
ng ion 28 42 100 km Time-shared
(62 mi.) bidirectional
test
33 42 120 km Time-shared
test
LHP 38-45 42 138-163 Time-shared

km bidirectional
(86-101 test
mi.)
Standby Long 22 1550 40 80 km (50 Unidirection

fiber distance mi.) al test
monitori transmiss
ng ion 28 40 100 km Unidirection
(62 mi.) al test
33 40 120 km Time-shared
test
LHP 38-45 40 138-163 Time-shared

km bidirectional
(86-101 test
mi.)
45-56 40 163-200 Time-shared

km bidirectional
(101-124 test
mi.)
a: The optical fiber length is calculated on condition that the attenuation coefficient is 0.275
dB/km.
9.15 Orderwire Function

The orderwire provides voice communication for the operation engineers or maintenance
engineers at different stations.
The orderwire provides the following functions:

l Addressing call: Addressing call, that is, point-to-point call, is the basic function of the
orderwire. In this case, the calling party dials the number of the called party.
l Subnet conference call: The subnet conference call realizes a group call among the stations
on a subnet. A subnet refers to the physical subnetwork. It is a collection of the NEs that
have the same subnet ID and are connected by optical fibers.
NOTE
If the subnet contains only the OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800, and OptiX OSN 8800 equipment, the
subnet conference call is supported. In any other scenarios, the subnet conference call is not supported.
Only a master subrack supports the orderwire function. A subrack supports only one orderwire and on the
U2000 the orderwire must be configured in Settings for the First Orderwire Phone.
9.16 One-Click Data Collection

One-click data collection is generally used in the event of equipment failure to collect the fault
and performance data of the equipment.
For any problems that prove complex for technicians to identify or resolve, contact Huawei
technical support and report the relevant equipment data. The equipment data to be collected
includes the version information, electronic labels, basic configurations, service configurations,
current and historical alarm and performance event data, equipment running logs, operation logs,
security logs, and equipment running status.
For data collection configurations, refer to Collecting Fault Data.
9.17 License Control

A license granted by Huawei permits a customer to use the licensed product within a specific
use scope and for a specific duration. The customer can also obtain the services committed by
Huawei. The licenses include: feature license, cross-connect type and cross-connect capacity
license.
9.17.1 Feature License

Feature licenses determine the availability of features. When features such as IEEE 1588v2 and
ASON are required, valid feature licenses must be obtained.
Huawei provides feature licenses that control the use of features based on subracks. When a
feature is configured for a subrack using the NMS, the NMS automatically decreases the number
of licensed subracks by 1. When the number of licensed subracks becomes 0, the feature cannot
be configured for new subracks.
NOTE
l A license physically refers to a license file.

l The number of feature licensed subracks refers to the total number of OptiX OSN 8800 subracks that
are allowed to use the licensed features on the entire OTN network. The number of feature licensed
subracks is written in the license files.
l License files are updated, loaded, and activated using the NMS.
l License files must be obtained from Huawei engineers. Huawei engineers are responsible for loading
and updating the license files.
Table 9-23 lists main feature licenses.

Table 9-23 License information table
License Function
ASON license Allows the use of the ASON function on subracks.
Packet function license Allows the use of the packet service function on subracks.
IEEE 1588v2 function Allows the use of the IEEE 1588v2 clock and time functions on
license subracks.
SDH lower-order cross- Allows configuration of SDH lower-order cross-connections

connection license (VC12/VC3) on subracks.
TP-Assist basic function Allows the use of the following TP-Assist basic functions on
license subracks:
l Display of service paths based on VLANs
l Query of MAC addresses
l Intelligent fault diagnosis
TP-Assist enhanced Allows the use of the following TP-Assist enhanced functions
function license on subracks:
l Display of service paths based on VLANs
l Layer 2 protocol detection
l Browsing of service performance data
l Loopback detection
Port OSNR detection Allows the TN11MCA402 and TN11MCA802 boards to detect
license (OD V1) and report 40G and 100G signal OSNR data.
Optical Doctor Allows the use of the Optical Doctor V2 functions on system.
management system
license
SDH/packet service l Allows the TN54HUNQ2 board to receive packet services.

license for universal line l Allows the TN56NS3 board to receive SDH services.
boards
100G line board license Allows the TN56NS4 board to work in line mode when it is used
for general OptiX OSN in a general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
8800 T32 subracks
WSS Flexible Grid Allows the TN15WSMD9 board to support the flexible
Tunable Funciton Fee (Per ROADM function.
Board)
9.17.2 Service Type and Cross-Connect Capacity License

Capacity licenses determine the capacity of OptiX OSN 8800 subracks. When an OptiX OSN
8800 subrack is configured using the NMS, users need to specify a service type and cross-connect
capacity for the subrack.

License and Service Capacity Management

If the specified capacity exceeds that allowed in the license, the NMS restricts the capacity and
configures the subrack only with the capacity allowed in the license. After a licensed subrack is
configured, the number of licensed subracks decreases by 1. When the number of licensed
subracks becomes 0, the service type and cross-connect capacity cannot be configured for new
subracks.
NOTE
The number of capacity licensed subracks is written in license files, which includes:
l The total number of OptiX OSN 8800 subracks that are allowed to support the licensed service type
on the entire OTN network.
l The total number of OptiX OSN 8800 subracks that are allowed to support the licensed cross-connect
capacity on the entire OTN network.
For more information, refer to Table 9-24.
Table 9-24 License information table
Subrack Type Service Cross-Connect Cross-Connect

Type Capacity Granularity
OptiX OSN 8800 OTN 360G, 720G, 1.28T, 2.56T, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2,
T64 3.2T, 6.4Ta ODU2e, ODU3, ODU4c,
ODUflex
SDH 360G, 720G, 1.28T VC4
80G VC3, VC12
SDH+OTN 360G, 720G, 1.28T, 2.56T, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2,

3.2T, 6.4Ta ODU2e, ODU3, ODU4c,
VC4, VC3, VC12
None 0G -
OptiX OSN 8800 OTN or 360G, 720G, 1.28T, 2.56T, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2,
T32 OTN 3.2Tb ODU2e, ODU3, ODU4c,
+PACKET ODUflex
SDH or 360G, 720G, 1.28T VC4

SDH
+PACKET 80G VC3, VC12
SDH+OTN 360G, 720G, 1.28T, 2.56T, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2,

or SDH 3.2Tb ODU2e, ODU3, ODU4c,
+PACKET VC4, VC3, VC12
+OTN
PACKETd - -
None 0G -

Subrack Type Service Cross-Connect Cross-Connect

Type Capacity Granularity
OptiX OSN 8800 OTN or 360G, 640G, 1.6T ODU0, ODU1, ODU2,
T16 OTN ODU2e, ODU3, ODU4,
+PACKET ODUflex
SDH or 360G, 640G VC4

SDH
+PACKET 20G VC3, VC12
SDH+OTN 360G, 640G, 1.6T ODU0, ODU1, ODU2,

or SDH ODU2e, ODU3, ODU4,
+PACKET VC4, VC3, VC12
+OTN
PACKETd - -
None 0G -
a: Only the Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 supports a maximum of 6.4 Tbit/s ODUk cross-
connections.
b: Only the Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 supports a maximum of 3.2 Tbit/s ODUk cross-
connections.
c: Only the Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64, OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN 8800
T16 support ODU4 cross-connection.
d: When the Service Type is set to PACKET, the Cross-Connect Capacity does not need
to set.
If the subrack has no electrical cross-connections, set the Service Type to None and the Cross-
Connect Capacity to 0G.
When the cross-connection of ODUk is required, set the Service Type to OTN. When the cross-
connection of VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 is required, set the Service Type to SDH. When the cross-
connection of PACKET is required, set the Service Type to PACKET. When the Service
Type is SDH+OTN, SDH+OTN+PACKET, OTN+PACKET, OTN+PACKET or SDH
+PACKET, the cross-connections of the OTN/SDH/PACKET service can be realized. Set the
Cross-Connect Capacity according to the service planning and the electrical cross-connection
service for each subrack.

Product Description 10 Security Management
10 Security Management
The product provides security mechanisms in software and hardware. These mechanisms protect
the system and data against security risks or ensure system and data stability and reliability in
case of attacks.
Overview of Hardware Security

The system reliability of the product reaches up to 99.999%, with the use of high-reliability
hardware design and redundancy design. This ensures that the system is immune to security
threats, and that the hardware system still runs smoothly and reliably under security threats.
Overview of Software Security

The product processes three categories of data: O&M data, control plane data, and service data.
The preceding data is transmitted over independent logical and physical paths and does not affect
each other. Therefore, services on devices of the product are processed in three planes:
l Management plane
The management plane provides access to the required equipment and management
functions, such as managing accounts and passwords, communication protocols, and alarm
reporting.
The security feature of the management plane enables secure device access, concentrated
management, and thorough security audit.
l Control plane
The control plane automatically calculates services paths, and creates and manages
services.
The control plan passes the MD5 authentication mechanism and ensures security for control
plane protocols.
l Data plane
The data plane processes service data that enters the devices and forwards service data
packets according to hardware forwarding entries.
On one hand, the data plane prevents user service packets from being intercepted, modified,
or deleted, which endangers the confidentiality and completeness of user data. On the other
hand, the data plane ensures the control of hardware forwarding actions, preventing

forwarding entries from being attacked or modified. In this manner, the forwarding plane
of the devices can function stably and reliably.
The product provides the security functions as listed in Table 10-1.
Table 10-1 Security functions of the three planes
Plane Function Description
Account and password Manages and saves device maintenance

management accounts.
Local authentication and Checks account validity and performs

authorization authorization.
Checks account validity and remotely

RADIUS authorization and performs authorization in the concentrated
authentication mode, reducing the maintenance cost.
Security log Records actions about account management.
Operation log Records non-query operations.
Functions as a standard solution for saving

logs offline, effectively resolving the
SYSLOG Management deficient saving space problem.
Provides basic TCP/IP attack prevention

TCP/IP protocol stack attack capability, such as attacks from incorrect IP
prevention packets, ICMP ping/jolt, and DoS.
Provides ACL based on IP addresses and

Access Control List (ACL) port numbers.
Supports SSL3.0/TLS1.0 and provides

SSL/TLS encryption secure encrypted tunnels based on security
communication certifications.
Provides OSPFv2, capable of standard MD5

OSPF route protocol authentication.
Provides NTPv3, capable of MD5

NTP protocol authentication and authorization control.
Provides SNMPv3, capable of security

Management authentication and data encryption
plane SNMP management protocol functions.
Provides standard MD5 authentication

method, effectively ensuring packet
OSPF route protocol completeness.
Provides standard MD5 authentication

RSVP resource calculating method, effectively ensuring packet
Control plane protocol completeness.

Plane Function Description
Monitors port traffic. Suppresses multicast

packets, discards unknown unicast/multicast
packets, and uses QoS to control service
Flow control traffic.
Discards invalid error packets. For example,

Discarding of error packets a packet whose size is smaller than 46 bytes.
Detects loopback at services ports, blocks

loopback, and supports service loopback
Loop avoidance detection of Ethernet ports.
Provides the access control capabilities:

filtering of static MAC addresses, blacklist,
learning and forbidding of MAC addresses,
Layer 2 service access and filtering based on complex traffic
control classification.
Provides three isolation methods: Layer 2

logical isolation, horizontal isolation, and
Service isolation physical isolation.
Strictly isolates MPLS services within the

Strict isolation of user carrier networks and from client-side
Data plane services services.

Product Description 11 Technical Specifications
11 Technical Specifications
About This Chapter
11.1 Transmission Distance and Optical Spans

11.2 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the DWDM System
11.3 Nominal Central Wavelengths of the CWDM System
11.4 Laser Class
11.5 General Specifications
11.6 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications
11.7 OTN Tributary Unit Specifications
11.8 OTN Line Board Specifications
11.9 Universal Line Board Specifications
11.10 Packet Service Board Specifications
11.11 PID Unit Specifications
11.12 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Demultiplexer Unit Specifications
11.13 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Unit Specifications
11.14 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit Specifications
11.15 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications
11.16 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit Specifications
11.17 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Specifications
11.18 Optical Protection Unit Specifications
11.19 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications
11.20 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications

11.21 Dispersion Equalizing Board Specifications
11.22 Clock Unit Specifications
11.23 TDM Board Specifications
11.24 DCM Specifications

11.1 Transmission Distance and Optical Spans

The OptiX OSN 8800 can be configured as either a DWDM or a CWDM system.
DWDM System
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports different link/span designs to address the requirements of
different rates, fiber types, and modulation schemes. Table 11-1 provides the transmission
system specifications for multi-span systems and Table 11-2 provides the transmission system
specifications for ultra-long single-span systems.
Table 11-1 System specifications (for multi-span transmissions)
System Fiber Type Modulation Span Span Transmission

Rate Scheme Transmission Distance (50 GHz
Distance (100 GHz Channel Spacing)
Channel Spacing)
10 Gbit/s SMF (D)RZa 32 x 22 dB 26 x 22 dB
NRZ 27 x 22 dB 22 x 22 dB
LEAF (D)RZ 31 x 22 dB 25 x 22 dB
NRZ 25 x 22 dB 20 x 22 dB
TWC NRZ 14 x 22 dB 12 x 22 dB
(D)RZ 18 x 22 dB 16 x 22 dB
DSF (D)RZ 10 x 22 dB 6 x 22 dB
NRZ 6 x 22 dB 4 x 22 dB
TWRS (D)RZ 20 x 22 dB 18 x 22 dB
NRZ 16 x 22 dB 14 x 22 dB
TW+ (D)RZ 20 x 22 dB 20 x 22 dB
NRZ 13 x 22 dB 13 x 22 dB
SMF-LS (D)RZ 12 x 22 dB 14 x 22 dB
NRZ 12 x 22 dB 14 x 22 dB
40 Gbit/s SMF DQPSK 20 x 22 dB 18 x 22 dB

(non-
coherent ODB 12 x 22 dB 8 x 22 dB
) LEAF DQPSK 18 x 22 dB 17 x 22 dB
ODB 10 x 22 dB 8 x 22 dB

System Fiber Type Modulation Span Span Transmission

Rate Scheme Transmission Distance (50 GHz
Distance (100 GHz Channel Spacing)
Channel Spacing)
TWC DQPSK 17 x 22 dB 16 x 22 dB
ODB 10 x 22 dB 9 x 22 dB
DSF DQPSK 8 x 22 dB 7 x 22 dB
TWR DQPSK 16 x 22 dB 14 x 22 dB
TW+ DQPSK 16 x 22 dB 12 x 22 dB
SMF-LS DQPSK 12 x 22 dB 10 x 22 dB
40 Gbit/s SMF ePDM-BPSK 25 x 22 dB 25 x 22 dB

(coheren
t) LEAF ePDM-BPSK 20 x 22 dB 20 x 22 dB
TWC ePDM-BPSK 17×22 dB 17×22 dB
DSF ePDM-BPSK 8×22 dB 8×22 dB
TWRS ePDM-BPSK 17×22 dB 17×22 dB
100 SMF ePDM-QPSK 15×22 dB (HFEC) 15×22 dB (HFEC)

Gbit/s 20×22 dB(SDFEC) 20×22 dB(SDFEC)
(coheren
t) 26×22 dB(SDFEC2) 26×22 dB(SDFEC2)
LEAF ePDM-QPSK 10×22 dB (HFEC) 10×22 dB (HFEC)

14×22 dB(SDFEC) 14×22 dB(SDFEC)
20×22 dB(SDFEC2) 20×22 dB(SDFEC2)
TWC ePDM-QPSK 7×22 dB(HFEC) 7×22 dB(HFEC)

DSF ePDM-QPSK 2×22 dB(HFEC) 2×22 dB(HFEC)

TWRS ePDM-QPSK 7×22 dB(HFEC) 7×22 dB(HFEC)

TW+ ePDM-QPSK 10×22 dB(SDFEC) 10×22 dB(SDFEC)
SMF-LS ePDM-QPSK 10×22 dB(SDFEC) 10×22 dB(SDFEC)
a: (D)RZ modules include DRZ and RZ optical modules. Both module types have the same
optical performance and can connect the same type of modules. This table lists all optical
modules. The manufacture of some optical modules may be discontinued. A Product Change
Notice (PCN) is released when the manufacture of an optical module type is discontinued.
For details about the availability of an optical module, contact the product manager of the
local Huawei office.

Table 11-2 System specifications (for ultra-long single-span transmissions)
System Fiber Type Modulation Maximum Transmission

Rate Scheme Distance
10 Gbit/s SMF (D)RZa 1 x 81 dB
G.654B (D)RZ 1 x 81 dB
LEAF (D)RZ 1 x 71 dB
40 Gbit/s SMF DQPSK 1 x 71 dB
G.654B DQPSK 1 x 70 dB
LEAF DQPSK 1 x 57 dB
DSF DQPSK 1 x 65.5 dB
a: (D)RZ modules include DRZ and RZ optical modules. Both module types have the same
optical performance and can connect the same type of modules. This table lists all optical
modules. The manufacture of some optical modules may be discontinued. A Product Change
Notice (PCN) is released when the manufacture of an optical module type is discontinued.
For details about the availability of an optical module, contact the product manager of the
CWDM System
CWDM systems support a maximum transmission distance of 80 km.
11.2 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the

DWDM System
NOTE
C-band 80-wavelength systems consist of even and odd wavelengths. The information about odd and even
wavelengths is provided below:
l C_EVEN: indicates even-numbered wavelengths. In total there are 40 even wavelengths. The center
frequency of the even wavelengths is within the range of 192.100 THz to 196.000 THz (center
wavelength is within the range of 1529.55 nm to 1560.61 nm) and the frequency spacing is 100 GHz.
l C_ODD: indicates odd-numbered wavelengths. In total there are 40 odd wavelengths. The center
frequency of the odd wavelengths is within the range of 192.150 THz to 196.050 THz (center
wavelength is within the range of 1529.16 nm to 1560.20 nm) and the frequency spacing is 100 GHz.

Table 11-3 Wavelengths and frequencies of a C-band 80-channel (spacing of 50 GHz) system
Wavele Central Central Wavele Central Central

ngth Frequency Wavelength ngth Frequency Wavelength
No. (THz) (nm) No. (THz) (nm)
1 196.05 1529.16 41 194.05 1544.92
2 196.00 1529.55 42 194.00 1545.32
3 195.95 1529.94 43 193.95 1545.72
4 195.90 1530.33 44 193.90 1546.12
5 195.85 1530.72 45 193.85 1546.52
6 195.80 1531.12 46 193.80 1546.92
7 195.75 1531.51 47 193.75 1547.32
8 195.70 1531.90 48 193.70 1547.72
9 195.65 1532.29 49 193.65 1548.11
10 195.60 1532.68 50 193.60 1548.51
11 195.55 1533.07 51 193.55 1548.91
12 195.50 1533.47 52 193.50 1549.32
13 195.45 1533.86 53 193.45 1549.72
14 195.40 1534.25 54 193.40 1550.12
15 195.35 1534.64 55 193.35 1550.52
16 195.30 1535.04 56 193.30 1550.92
17 195.25 1535.43 57 193.25 1551.32
18 195.20 1535.82 58 193.20 1551.72
19 195.15 1536.22 59 193.15 1552.12
20 195.10 1536.61 60 193.10 1552.52
21 195.05 1537.00 61 193.05 1552.93
22 195.00 1537.40 62 193.00 1553.33
23 194.95 1537.79 63 192.95 1553.73
24 194.90 1538.19 64 192.90 1554.13
25 194.85 1538.58 65 192.85 1554.54
26 194.80 1538.98 66 192.80 1554.94
27 194.75 1539.37 67 192.75 1555.34

Wavele Central Central Wavele Central Central

ngth Frequency Wavelength ngth Frequency Wavelength
No. (THz) (nm) No. (THz) (nm)
28 194.70 1539.77 68 192.70 1555.75
29 194.65 1540.16 69 192.65 1556.15
30 194.60 1540.56 70 192.60 1556.55
31 194.55 1540.95 71 192.55 1556.96
32 194.50 1541.35 72 192.50 1557.36
33 194.45 1541.75 73 192.45 1557.77
34 194.40 1542.14 74 192.40 1558.17
35 194.35 1542.54 75 192.35 1558.58
36 194.30 1542.94 76 192.30 1558.98
37 194.25 1543.33 77 192.25 1559.39
38 194.20 1543.73 78 192.20 1559.79
39 194.15 1544.13 79 192.15 1560.20
40 194.10 1544.53 80 192.10 1560.61
11.3 Nominal Central Wavelengths of the CWDM System
Table 11-4 Nominal central wavelengths of the CWDM system
Wavelengt Wavelength (nm) Wavelength Wavelength (nm)

h No. No.
11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611
11.4 Laser Class

Each type of boards of the product has a different laser class.

NOTE
The power shown in Table 11-5 refers to the reference output power of the laser. It is achieved when the
mode-field diameter of fiber is 10 um at the 1550 nm wavelength.
The laser class complies with IEC 60825-2 laser safety standards.
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the laser level of the equipment is HAZARD LEVEL 1M.
Table 11-5 Laser class
Reference Optical
Power Range Laser Class Board Type
Under 10 dBm HAZARD HUNQ2, HUNS3LDM, LDMD, LDMS, LDX,

LEVEL 1 LEM24, LEX4, LOA, LOG, LOM, LQM, LQMD,
LQMS, LSC, LSQ, LSX, LSXL, LSXLR, LSXR,
LTX, LWXS, TMX, ND2, NO2, NQ2, NS2, NS3,
NS4, NS4M, TEM28, TDX, THA, TOA, TOG,
TOM, TOX, TQX, TSC, TSXL, TTX, D40, D40V,
M40, M40V, RMU9, WSM9(TN11, TN12), HSC1,
SC1, SC2, ST2, DCP, SCS, DCU, TDC, EG16,
EX2, PND2, TD20, TM20
10 - 21.3 dBma HAZARD NPO2, NPO2E, SFIU, TN12FIU, ITL, CMR2,

LEVEL 1M CMR4, DMR1, MR2, MR4, MR8, MR8V, SBM2,
RDU9, ROAM, WSMD2, WSD9, WSM9(TN13,
TN16), WSMD4, OAU100, OAU101, OAU102,
OAU103, OAU106, OBU1, OLP, VA1, VA4,
GFU, HBA, OAU105, OBU2, TN13FIU01,
TN13FIU02, TN14FIU, CRPC, DAS1, WSMD9,
RAU2
Under 10 dBm Class 1 DCU, EGSH, SF64A, SF64, SFD64, SL64, SLD64,
SLH41, SLO16, SLQ16, SLQ64, EAS2
10 - 21.3 dBm Class 1M BPA
a: For the HBA, OAU105, OBU2, TN13FIU02, CRPC, RAU2 boards, after the IPA function
is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that
the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3
dBm (136 mW).
11.5 General Specifications
11.5.1 Cabinet Specifications
Table 11-6 lists the technical specifications of the N63B cabinet.

Table 11-6 Technical specifications of the N63B cabinet
Item Specification
Not equipped with a Equipped with a height

height extension frame extension frame
Dimensions (H x W x D) 2200 mm (86.6 in.) x 600 mm 2600 mm (102.4 in.) x 600

(23.6 in.) x 300 mm (11.8 in.) mm (23.6 in.) x 300 mm (11.8
in.)
Weight (kg) 60 kg (132.3 lb) 66 kg (145.5 lb)
Standard working voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC
Working voltage range -48V DC: -40V to -57.6V

-60V DC: -48V to -72V
Table 11-7 lists the technical specifications of the N66B cabinet.
Table 11-7 Technical specifications of the N66B cabinet
Item Specification
Not equipped with a Equipped with a height

height extension frame extension frame
Dimensions (H x W x D) 2200 mm (86.6 in.) x 600 mm 2600 mm (102.4 in.) x 600

(23.6 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) mm (23.6 in.) x 600 mm (23.6
in.)
Weight (kg) 120 kg (264.6 lb.) 130 kg (286.6 lb.)
Standard working voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC
Working voltage range -48V DC: -40V to -57.6V

-60V DC: -48V to -72V
11.5.2 Subrack Specifications
Table 11-8 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 subrack
Item Requirement

working
voltage

Item Requirement

range
Rated 8800 T64: 200 A (Independent power supplies to four sections of each subrack,
working with 50 A for each section)
current 8800 T32: 100 A (Independent power supplies to two sections of each subrack,
(-48 V) with 50A for each section)
8800 T16: 50 A
8800 universal platform subrack: 50 A
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Item Specification

(19.6 in. (W) × 22.8 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H))
Weight (empty subracka) 65 kg (143 lb.)

consumptiona

consumption (OTN)

consumption (OCS)
subrack.
NOTE


Consumption Power
(W)a Consumption
(W)a
OTU subrack 1804.6 2827.9 32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x

1 AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
OTU subrack 1119.98 2011.14 4 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU,

2 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x
ATE, 4 x fan tray assembly
OTU 2172.7 2822.9 2 x XCT, 2 x SXH, 8 x NS3, 2 x SCC,

electrical 2 x STG, 8 x PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA,
cross- 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x
connect ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly
subrack 1
(general
subrack)
OTU 1839.1 2776.7 2 x XCT, 2 x SXM, 20 x NQ2, 1 x

electrical SCC, 8 x PIU, 5 x TOA, 5 x TQX, 2
subrack 2
(general
subrack)
OTU 5384.9 6754.8 2 x UXCT, 2 x USXH, 16 x NS4

electrical (SDFEC2), 8 x TSC, 4 x TTX, 5 x
cross- TOX, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1
connect x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, 4 x fan
subrack tray assembly
(enhanced
subrack)
OTM 963.78 1860.3 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x

subrack 1 OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 1 x SC2,
OTM 1168.98 2077.14 1 x M40V, 1 x D40+1 x OAU1+1 x

subrack 2 OBU1, 4 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC,
1 x ATE, 4 x fan tray assembly
OCS subrack 1748 2636 2 x SXM, 20 x SLD64, 8 x SLO16, 4

(general x SLQ16, 4 x SLH41, 4 x EGSH, 2 x
subrack) STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x
AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,


Consumption Power
(W)a Consumption
(W)a
OCS subrack 2135 3076 2 x USXH, 20 x SLD64, 8 x SLO16,

(enhanced 4 x SLQ16, 4 x SLH41, 4 x EGSH, 2
subrack) x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2
x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
Table 11-12 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 equipment predicted reliability
System Availability Mean Time to Repair Mean Time Between

(MTTR) Failures (MTBF)
0.9999922 4 hours 58.68 years
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Item Specification

(19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H))

consumptiona


configuration power
consumption (OTN)

configuration power
consumption (OCS)
subrack.
NOTE
distribution capability. On the U2000, the default power consumption threshold of the OptiX OSN 8800
T32 is 4800 W. If a 30 A power supply is used, change the NE Power Consumption Threshold (W)
value to 2400 W.
Table 11-15 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 8800
T32

Consumption Power
(W)a Consumption
(W)a
OTU 1633.4 2254.6 32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x

subrack 1 AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
OTU 927.58 1412.54 4 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 4 x

subrack 2 PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1
x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly
OTU 1641.6 2166.5 2 x XCH, 20 x NQ2, 1 x SCC, 4 x

electrical PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1
cross- x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x
connect fan tray assembly
subrack 1
(general
subrack)
OTU 1670.3 2182.5 2 x XCH, 8 x NS3, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU,

electrical 2 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 2 x STG, 1 x
cross- AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
subrack 2
(general
subrack)


Consumption Power
(W)a Consumption
(W)a
OTU 3255.7 3981.1 2 x UXCH, 10 x NS4(SDFEC2), 2 x

electrical TSC, 8 x TTX, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1
subrack
(enhanced
subrack)
OTM 792.5 1287.1 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x

subrack 1 OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU,
1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x
ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly
OTM 976.58 1478.54 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x

subrack 2 OBU1, 4 x LSC (SDFEC2), 2 x SCC,
OLA 290.3 706 4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 1 x

subrack SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1
x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray
assembly
OADM 974 1497.2 2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 16 x LDX, 1

subrack x SC2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
fan tray assembly
378.2 811 2 x M40V, 2 x D40, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2,

2 x RMU9, 2 x WSM9, 2 x OAU1, 2
x OBU1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
fan tray assembly
373.1 306.6 2 x M40, 2 x D40, 2 x WSMD9, 2 x

DAS1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
fan tray assembly
OCS subrack 1282 1755 2 x XCM, 10 x SLQ64, 8 x SLO16,

(general 2 x SLH41, 2 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x
tray assembly


Consumption Power
(W)a Consumption
(W)a
OCS subrack 1791 2321 2 x UXCM, 10 x SLQ64, 8 x SLO16,

(enhanced 2 x SLH41, 2 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x
tray assembly

0.99999244 4 hours 60.40 years
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Item Specification

(19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 17.7 in. (H))
Item Specification
Maximum subrack power consumptiona 2400 W

(OTN)

Item Specification

(OCS)
subrack.
NOTE

Power Power
n (W)a n (W)a
OTU subrack 1 509.2 615.6 8 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX,

1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
assembly
OTU subrack 2 846.18 1103.64 4 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 2 x PIU,

2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x
fan tray assembly
OTU electrical 501 808 5 x NQ2, 2 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x TQX,

cross-connect 2 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE,
subrack 1 and 1 x fan tray assembly
OTU electrical 779.9 1021 2 x XCH, 4 x NS3, 2 x PIU, 1 x TTX,

cross-connect 1 x TQX, 2 x TOA, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
subrack 2 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly
OTU electrical 1267.5 1578.6 2 x UXCM, 4 x NS4(SDFEC2), 2 x

cross-connect TSC, 2 x TTX, 2 x AUX, 2 x PIU, 1 x
subrack 3 EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
assembly

OBU1, 6 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1
x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan
tray assembly

OBU1, 2 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 2
x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and
1 x fan tray assembly


Power Power
n (W)a n (W)a
OLA subrack 228.1 294.3 4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 2 x FIU,

1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
OADM subrack 449.5 561.5 2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 2 x FIU, 8 x

LSX, 1 x SC2, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x
AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan
tray assembly
221 269.2 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 1 x WSMD9, 1 x

DAS1, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1
x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
assembly
OCS subrack 821 1109 2 x UXCM, 4 x NS3, 2×PIU, 5 x

SLQ64, 4 x SLO16, 1 x SLH41, 1 x
EGSH, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE,

0.9999927 4 hours 62.80 years
Table 11-21 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack
Dimensions 442 mm (W) × 295 mm (D) × 397mm (H)

(17.4 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 15.6 in. (H))
Weight (empty subrack) 19 kg (41.89 lb.)

is installed.
Table 11-22 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack.
Item Value
Maximum subrack power consumption 2400 W

NOTE
distribution capability. The default power consumption threshold of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal
platform subrack is 1200 W and maps to a 30 A power supply. If a 60 A power supply is used, change the
NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value on the U2000 to 2400 W.
Table 11-23 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 8800
universal platform subrack

Power m Power
Consumpt Consump
iona tiona
Electr Subrack 790 1003 8 x NO2, 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, and

ical 1 fan tray assembly
relay
subra Subrack 1343 1654 7 x NS4 (SDFEC2), 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x
ck 2 SCC, and fan tray assembly
OTM Subrack 931 1207 3 x LTX (SDFEC), 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x

subra 1 SCC, and fan tray assembly
ck
Subrack 1241 1497 7 x LSC (SDFEC2), 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x
2 SCC, and fan tray assembly
Subrack 389 661 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU101, 1 x

3 OBU103, 1 x FIU, 1 x SC1, 2 x PIU, 1 x
EFI, 2 x SCC, and fan tray assembly
OLA subrack 158 352 2 x OAU101, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x PIU, 1

x EFI, 2 x SCC, fan tray assembly


Power m Power
Consumpt Consump
iona tiona
ROA Subrack 129 326 1 x WSMD4, 1 x DAS1, 1 x M40, 1 x D40,

DM 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, and fan tray assembly
subra
ck (4
x
dime
nsion
s)b
OTM cabinet 2561 3365 OTM subrack1, OTM subrack2, and OTM
subrack3
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis
and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module. The maximum
power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the
b: At the ROADM site, it is recommended to deploy one subrack per direction. This table
assumes that the four directions are configured identically and provides only the reference
configurations for one direction.
Table 11-24 OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack predicted reliability

0.99999098 4 hours 51.64 years
NOTE
The predicted reliability specifications vary according to system configurations.
11.5.3 DCM Frame Specifications

Table 11-25 Technical specifications of the DCM frame
Item Specification
Dimensions 48 mm (H) x 484 mm (W) x 270.5 mm (D) or

1.9 in. (H) x 19.1 in. (W) x 10.6 in. (D)
H = Height; W = Width; D = Depth

11.5.4 CRPC Frame Specification
Table 11-26 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame
Parameter Value
Dimensions (H x W x D) 86 mm (3.4 in.) x 535 mm (21.1 in.) x 257 mm (10.1

in.)
Weight 3 kg (6.6 lb)
11.5.5 Fan-Tray Assembly Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Item Specification

l High Speed: 270W
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W)
x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H))

Item Specification
Power Consumptiona l Low Speed: 42.7 W

l Medium-Low Speed: 74.8 W
l Medium Speed: 106.8 W
l Medium-High Speed: 165.5 W
l High Speed: 215 W
Item Specification
Dimensions 442 mm (W) x 279 mm (D) x 47 mm (H) (17.40 in. (W) x 10.98 in.
(D) x 1.85 in. (H))
Weight 3.4 kg (7.5 lb)

l Medium-High Speed: 134 W
l High Speed: 190 W
11.6 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications
11.6.1 LDM Board Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Bo Client-Side Client-Side WDM-Side WDM-Side

ard Fixed Pluggable Optical Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical
Optical Module Module Module
Module
TN N/A I-16-2 km-eSFP N/A 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate

12L S-16.1-15 km-eSFP (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
DM 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate
L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-
L-16.2-80 km-eSFP eSFP
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
NOTE
Margins exist between the default input power low threshold and the receiver sensitivity and between the
default input power high threshold and the overload point. These margins ensure that the system can report
an input power low or high alarm before the actual input power reaches the receiver sensitivity or overload
point.
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module

NOTE
I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used
to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
Only S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10-
eSFP optical module.

Table 11-30 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (SDH services)
Parameter Unit Value
Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Module eSFP km-eSFP km-eSFP km-eSFP
Type
Line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

format
Optical - SLM SLM SLM SLM

source type
Target - 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

transmission mi.) mi.) mi.)
distance
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -3 0 3 3
mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -10 -5 -2 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
Maximum nm N/A 1 1 1
-20 dB
spectral
width
Minimum dB N/A 30 30 30
side mode
suppression
ratio
Eye pattern - G.957-compliant

mask G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver - PIN PIN APD APD

type

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -3 0 -9 -9
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals.
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.
Table 11-31 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (GE services)
Optical 2.125 Gbit/s 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE-

Module Multirate-0. LX-10 km- LX-40 km- ZX-80 km-
Type 5 km-eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP

format
Optical - MLM SLM SLM SLM

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

transmission mi.) mi.) mi.) mi.)
distance

wavelength
range


Maximum dBm -2.5 -3 0 5

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z-compliant

mask
Receiver - PIN PIN PIN PIN

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -3 -3 -3
receiver
overload
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1,
FE, DVB-ASI signals.
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 11-32 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (CWDM colored wavelengths)
Optical Module Type 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate

(CWDM)-40 km- (CWDM)-80 km-
eSFP eSFP
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Optical source type - SLM SLM
Target transmission - 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)

distance
Operating wavelength nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611

range
Maximum mean dBm 5 5

launched power
Minimum mean launched dBm 0 0

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength nm ±6.5 ±6.5

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 1.0 1.0

spectral width
Minimum side mode dB 30 30

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant

G.959.1-compliant
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver type - PIN APD

range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver dBm -3 -9

overload
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 11-33 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored wavelengths)
Optical Module Type 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-

eSFP
Line code format - NRZ
Optical source type - SLM
Target transmission - 120 km (74.6 mi.)

distance
Center frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Center frequency deviation GHz ±12.5
Maximum mean launched dBm 4

power
Minimum mean launched dBm 0

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 1

width
Minimum side mode dB 30

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 2400
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (a 5% margin is required for

the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
G.959.1-compliant (a 5% margin is required
for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
Receiver type - APD
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module
Table 11-34 CWDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)
Optical Module Type 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate

(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
Target transmission distance - 80 km (49.7 mi.)

power

power
Operating wavelength range nm 1471 to 1611
Central wavelength nm ±6.5

deviation

width

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver type - APD

Table 11-35 DWDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)

(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

power

power
Center frequency deviation nm ±12.5

width

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin

are required for the eye pattern
of STM-16 services and
Receiver type - APD
l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)

Power Consumption
TN12LDM 22.6 24.8
11.6.2 LDMD Board Specifications

Bo Client-Side Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side

ard Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable
Module Module Optical
Module
TN N/A I-16-2 km-eSFP 12800 ps/nm-C Band- N/A

11L S-16.1-15 km-eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
DM NRZ-APD
D L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
L-16.2-80 km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength-
2.125 Gbit/s NRZ-APD
Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 6400 ps/nm-C Band-
1000 BASE-LX-10 km- Tunable Wavelength-
eSFP NRZ-APD (Four
1000 BASE-LX-40 km- Channels-Tunable)
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.


NOTE
Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10
optical module.
Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE
signals.
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP optical
module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.


format

source type


Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range


eSFP eSFP

overload
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200,

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio


eSFP

Receiver type - APD
WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module
Table 11-40 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications
Optical Module 12800 ps/nm- 12800 ps/nm- 6400 ps/nm-C

Type C Band-Fixed C Band- Band-
Wavelength- Tunable Tunable
NRZ-APD Wavelength- Wavelength-
NRZ-APD NRZ-APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Maximum mean dBm -4 0 0

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -8 -5 -5

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 10 10 8.2

ratio


NRZ-APD NRZ-APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Center frequency GHz ±10

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 0.2 0.2 0.5

spectral width
Minimum side mode dB 35 35 35

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6400
Receiver type - APD APD APD

range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28 -28 -28
Minimum receiver dBm -9 -9 -9

overload
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11LDMD 26.9 29.6

11.6.3 LDMS Board Specifications


ard Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable
Module Module Optical
Module

DM NRZ-APD
S L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
eSFP NRZ-APD (Four
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.

NOTE
Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10-

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
signals.
module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.


format

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range



mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200,


eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200,

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

Table 11-45 WDM-side fixed optical module specificaitons


NRZ-APD NRZ-APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Maximum mean dBm -1 3 3

launched power

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 10 10 8.2

ratio

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 0.2 0.2 0.5

spectral width

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6400
Receiver type - APD APD APD

range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28 -28 -28
Minimum receiver dBm -9 -9 -9

overload

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11LDMS 26.9 29.6
11.6.4 LDX Board Specifications


ard Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Fixed Pluggable Optical
Module Module Optical Module
Module
TN N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band

12L km-XFP (Odd & Even
DX 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 Wavelengths)-Fixed
km-XFP Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Multirate-80
km-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
10 Gbit/s Single Rate NRZ-PIN-XFP
-0.3 km-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd
& Even Wavelengths)-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Multirate-
TX1330/
RX1270nm-10km-XFP
TX1270/
RX1330nm-10km-XFP

NOTE
point.

NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP, 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP, and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP
optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, and OTU2/OTU2e
signals.
The 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals.
Table 11-46 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10 Gbit/s services)
Optical 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s

Module Multirate-10 Multirate-40 Multirate-80 Single-
Type km-XFP km-XFP km-XFP Rate-0.3 km-
XFP

format
Optical - SLM SLM SLM MLM

source type
Target - 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7 0.3 km (0.2

transmissio mi.) mi.) mi.)
n distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4 -1.3

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9 3
extinction
ratio


XFP
Minimum dB 30 30 30 30
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask
Receiver - PIN PIN APD PIN

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate)a
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
Minimum dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)a
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance
a: The sensitivity and overload in the table complies with ITU-T G.691. The actual sensitivity
of 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP modules is -14.4 dBm, and the actual overlod is 0.5 dBm,
which can be used as the reference during deployment commissioning.

Table 11-47 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored wavelengths,
fixed wavelength)
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd

Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -3

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9
Operating frequency range THz 192.10 to 196.05
Center frequency deviation GHz ±10
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 0.3

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity, EOL dBm -16

(FEC on)
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0

(FEC on)

Table 11-48 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored wavelengths,
tunable wavelengths)
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band-

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)
The 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/RX1270nm-10km-XFP and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/

RX1330nm-10km-XFP optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2, and OTU2e signals.

Table 11-49 Client-side pluggable 10G optical module specifications (single-fiber bidirectional
transmissions)
Optical Module Type 10 Gbit/s Multirate- 10 Gbit/s Multirate-

TX1330/ TX1270/
RX1270nm-10km- RX1330nm-10km-
XFP XFP
Target transmission km 10 10
distance

range

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -5 -5

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 3.5 3.5

ratio
Receiver type - PIN PIN

range
Minimum receiver dBm 0.5 0.5

overload

Table 11-50 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)

PIN-XFP

power

power
Eye pattern mask - G.959.1-compliant

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Table 11-51 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths)

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
Bo WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power Maximum Power
ard Consumption (W) Consumptiona (W)
LD 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 44.5 51.2

X Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 45.5 52.2

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
11.6.5 LEM24 Board Specifications


Module
TN N/A 1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km- N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band

11L eSFP (I-850-LC) (Odd & Even
EM 1000 BASE-LX-10 km- Wavelengths)-Fixed
24 eSFP (I-1310-LC) Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-
SFP+ 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
10G BASE-LR-10 km- NRZ-PIN-XFP
SFP+
km-XFP
km-XFP
km-XFP
NOTE
point.

Optical Module 1000 BASE-SX-0.5 1000 BASE-LX-10

Type km-eSFP (I-850- km-eSFP (I-1310-
LC) LC)
Optical source type - MLM SLM
Target transmission - 0.5 km (0.3 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.)

distance
Operating nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -2.5 -3

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -9.5 -9.5

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 9 9
ratio
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z –compliant

wavelength range
Minimum receiver dBm 0 -3

overload
NOTE
The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.

Table 11-53 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10GE services)
Optical Module 10G BASE-SR-0.3 10G BASE-LR-10

Type km-SFP+ km-SFP+
Optical interface Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125

service rate

distance

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -1 0.5

launched power

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 3 3.5

ratio
Output optical power dBm ≤-30 ≤-30

in case of laser
shutdown
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z–compliant

wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -11.1 (OMA) -12.6 (OMA)
Minimum receiver dBm -1 0.5

overload
Maximum dB -12 -12

reflectance


PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Table 11-56 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (gray light)
Optical 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s

Module Type Multirate-10 km- Multirate-40 km- Multirate-80 km-
XFP XFP XFP
Line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ

format
Optical source - SLM SLM SLM

type
Target - 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)

transmission
distance
Operating nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0

mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
Minimum side dB 30 30 30
mode
suppression
ratio
Eye pattern - G.959.1-compliant

mask
Receiver type - PIN PIN APD

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24

sensitivity


XFP XFP XFP
Minimum dBm -1 -1 -7
receiver
overload
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11LEM24 81 83
11.6.6 LEX4 Board Specifications



Module
TN N/A 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km- N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band

11L SFP+ (Odd & Even
EX 10G BASE-LR-10 km- Wavelengths)-Fixed
4 SFP+ Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
km-XFP
km-XFP
km-XFP
NOTE
point.


service rate

distance

wavelength range



launched power

launched power

ratio

in case of laser
shutdown

wavelength range

overload
Maximum dB -12 -12

reflectance

PIN-XFP

power


PIN-XFP

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

XFP XFP XFP

format

type

transmission
distance


XFP XFP XFP

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power

mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
TN11LEX4 64 67
11.6.7 LOA Board Specifications


Bo Client-Side Client-Side Pluggable WDM-Side WDM-Side

ard Fixed Optical Optical Module Fixed Pluggable Optical
Module Optical Module
Module
TN N/A I-16-2 km-eSFP N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band

11L S-16.1-15 km-eSFP (Odd & Even
OA Wavelengths)-Fixed
L-16.1-40 km-eSFP Wavelength-NRZ-
L-16.2-80 km-eSFP PIN-XFP
1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-
1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP
PIN-XFP
1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP
10 Gbit/s
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 Multirate-10 km-
km-eSFP XFP
1000 BASE-LX-10 km- 10 Gbit/s
eSFP Multirate-40 km-
1000 BASE-LX-40 km- XFP
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s
multirate-10 km-Video
eSFP
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3
km-eSFP
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10
km-eSFP
800-M5E-SA-I-0.3 km-
SFP+
800-SM-LC-L-10 km-SFP
+
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
Infiniband 5G-0.3km-SFP+
Infiniband 5G-10km-SFP+
10G BASE-SR-0.3km-SFP
+
10G BASE-LR-10km-SFP
+

Bo Client-Side Client-Side Pluggable WDM-Side WDM-Side

ard Fixed Optical Optical Module Fixed Pluggable Optical
Module Optical Module
Module
10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-

SFP+
10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-
SFP+
NOTE
point.

NOTE
I-16-2 km-eSFP module, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP module, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP module and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP
module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE,
STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10-
Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

format

source type

distance

wavelength
range

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

NOTE
1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP module, and
1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP module can be used to access GE signals.
Table 11-62 Client-side pluggable GE optical module specifications (single-fiber bidirectional

transmissions)
Optical 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE-

Module Type BX10-U- BX10-D- BX-U-eSFP BX-D-eSFP
eSFP eSFP

format
Optical source - SLM SLM SLM SLM

type
Target km 10 10 40 40
transmission
distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -3 -3 3 3
mean launched
power
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 6 6 6
extinction ratio
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3ah-compliant

mask
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN PIN

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

sensitivity


eSFP eSFP
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -12

reflectance
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate-eSFP module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express,
and FE signals.
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP
module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and
DVB-ASI signals.
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std
802.3.


format

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power



mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
SDI module can be used to access DVB-ASI, SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, and 3G-SDIRBR signals.
Table 11-64 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (SDI services)
Optical Module Type 0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s

Multirate 10 km-Video
eSFP
Service rate Gbit/s 0.1 to 3


eSFP

power

power

width
Receiver type - PIN
NOTE
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km-eSFP, 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP module can be used to access Infiniband
2.5G, FC400, and FICON4G signals.
Table 11-65 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FC services)
Optical Module Type 4.25 Gbit/s 4.25 Gbit/s

Multirate-0.3 km- Multirate-10 km-
eSFP eSFP

distance


eSFP eSFP
Transmitter parameter nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355

specifications at point S

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -9 -8.4

launched power
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface

(FC-PI-2) parameter template

range
Minimum receiver dBm 0 0

overload
NOTE
Infiniband 5G-0.3km-SFP+, Infiniband 5G-10km-SFP+ module can be used to access Infiniband 5G signals.
Table 11-66 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (Infiniband 5G services)
Optical Module Infiniband Infiniband

Type 5G-0.3km-SFP+ 5G-10km-SFP+

service rate
Target transmission km 0.3 10

distance

Optical Module Infiniband Infiniband

Type 5G-0.3km-SFP+ 5G-10km-SFP+

wavelength range

launched power

launched power
Minimum extinction dB N/A 3.5

ratio

in case of laser
shutdown
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant

wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -11.5 -13.8

overload
Maximum dB -12 -12

reflectance
NOTE
800-M5E-SA-I-0.3 km-SFP+ and 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-SFP+ module can be used to access FC800 and
FICON8G signals.
Table 11-67 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FC800/FICON8G services)
Optical Module 800-M5E-SA-I-0.3 800-SM-LC-L-10


service rate

Optical Module 800-M5E-SA-I-0.3 800-SM-LC-L-10


distance

wavelength range

launched power

launched power

ratio

wavelength range

overload
Maximum dB -12 -12

reflectance
NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals.
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200,
FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE
signals.


eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200,
FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE
signals.

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

NOTE
10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+ and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+ module can be used to access 10GE LAN,
FC1200, and FICON10G signals.
Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40

Optical interface Gbit/s 8.5 to 11.1 9.956 to 11.1

service rate

distance

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -1 2

launched power

launched power

ratio

wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -14.4 -14 (11.1G)

-15.8 (10.3125G)
Minimum receiver dBm 0.5 -1

overload
reflectance dB -12 -27

NOTE
10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+ and 10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+ module can be used to access 10GE LAN signals


service rate

distance

wavelength range

launched power

launched power

ratio

in case of laser
shutdown

wavelength range

overload
Maximum dB -12 -12

reflectance


PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Type km-XFP km-XFP


Type km-XFP km-XFP

distance

wavelength range

launched power

launched power

ratio

suppression ratio

wavelength range

overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.19 kg (2.64b.)

Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Typical Power Maximum Power
Optical Module Consumption (W) Consumptiona
(W)
TN11LOA 800 ps/nm-C Band 31.8 36

(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km-
XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band- 32.8 37

Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
11.6.8 LOG Board Specifications



ard Fixed Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable
Optical Module Optical Module
Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band N/A

11L Multirate-0.5 km- (odd & even
OG eSFP wavelengths)-Fixed
1000 BASE-LX-10 Wavelength-NRZ-
km-eSFP PIN
1000 BASE-LX-40 800 ps/nm-C Band-

km-eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km-eSFP 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ-PIN
(CWDM)-40 km-
eSFP 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ-APD
(CWDM)-80 km-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN


Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band

12L Multirate-0.5 km- Tunable Wavelength- (Odd & Even
OG eSFP (D)RZ-PIN Wavelengths)-
1000 BASE-LX-10 800 ps/nm-C Band- Fixed Wavelength-
km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength- NRZ-PIN-XFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-

km-eSFP Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
1000 BASE-ZX-80 PIN-XFP
km-eSFP
10 Gbit/s
1000 BASE-BX10- Multirate-10 km-
U-eSFP XFP
1000 BASE-BX10- 10 Gbit/s
D-eSFP Multirate-40 km-
1000 BASE-BX-U- XFP
eSFP 10 Gbit/s
1000 BASE-BX-D- Multirate-80 km-
eSFP XFP
(CWDM)-40 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-
eSFP
NOTE
(D)RZ means DRZ or RZ. These two types of optical modules have the same optical performance and can be
interconnected. The availability of the two type of optical module is subject to PCNs. For PCN information,
consult with the product manager at the local representative office.
NOTE
point.

NOTE
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE
Std 802.3.



format

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

NOTE
1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP, 1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP, 1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP, and 1000 BASE-BX-D-

eSFP optical module can be used to access GE signals.

transmissions)

eSFP eSFP

format

type
Target km 10 10 40 40
transmission
distance

wavelength
range
mean launched
power
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 6 6 6
extinction ratio

mask

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

sensitivity


eSFP eSFP
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -12

reflectance

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant


eSFP eSFP

range

overload
Table 11-78 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band 800 ps/nm-C Band-

(odd & even Fixed Wavelength-
wavelengths)-Fixed NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
Maximum mean launched dBm 2 2

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -3 -3

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10
Center frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05
Center frequency deviation GHz ±10 ±5
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 0.3 0.3

width

suppression ratio


Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800 800
Receiver sensitivity, EOL dBm -16 -16

(FEC on)
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 0
Table 11-79 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths)
Optical 1200 ps/ 1200 ps/ 4800 ps/ 800 ps/ 800 ps/
Module Type nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C
Band- Band- Band- Band- Band-
Tunable Tunable Tunable Tunable Tunable
Wavelen Wavele Wavelen Waveleng Waveleng
gth- ngth- gth- th-(D)RZ- th-NRZ-
NRZ- NRZ- ODB- PIN PIN
PIN APD APD
Line code - NRZ NRZ ODB (D)RZ NRZ

format
Maximum dBm 2 2 2 2 2
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 10 10 N/Aa 10 10
extinction ratio

PIN APD APD
Center THz 192.10 to 196.05

frequency
Center GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
Minimum side dB 35 35 35 35 35
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN PIN
Operating nm 1200 to 1650

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
Minimum dBm 0 -9 -9 0 0
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.


PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


XFP XFP XFP

format

type

transmission
distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power

mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity


XFP XFP XFP
receiver
overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11LOG: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN12LOG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power Maximum Power
d Consumption Consumptiona
(W) (W)
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even 40 45

1LO wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
G PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 43 48

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-APD

Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN

Wavelength-ODB-APD
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 37.0 41.44

2LO Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
G PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP


d Consumption Consumptiona
(W) (W)


Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

11.6.9 LOM Board Specifications



Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band N/A

11L Multirate-0.5 km- (odd & even
OM eSFP wavelengths)-Fixed
1000 BASE-LX-10 Wavelength-NRZ-
km-eSFP PIN
1000 BASE-LX-40 800 ps/nm-C Band-

km-eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km-eSFP 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
FC400/FICON4G NRZ-PIN
Module-0.3 km
(Multimode)-eSFP 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
FC400/FICON4G NRZ-APD
Module-10 km
(Single mode)-eSFP 4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
FC100/FC200/ ODB-APD
FICON/FICON
Express Module-0.5 800 ps/nm-C Band-
km (Multimode)- Tunable Wavelength-
eSFP (D)RZ-PIN
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module-2 km
(Single mode)-eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-
eSFP


Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band

12L Multirate-0.5 km- Tunable Wavelength- (Odd & Even
OM eSFP (D)RZ-PIN Wavelengths)-
1000 BASE-LX-10 800 ps/nm-C Band- Fixed Wavelength-
km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength- NRZ-PIN-XFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-

km-eSFP Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
1000 BASE-ZX-80 PIN-XFP
km-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX10-
U-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX10-
D-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-U-
eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-D-
eSFP
FC400/FICON4G
Module-0.3 km
(Multimode)-eSFP
FC400/FICON4G
Module-10 km
(Single mode)-eSFP
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module-0.5
km (Multimode)-
eSFP
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module-2 km
(Single mode)-eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-
eSFP

NOTE
NOTE
point.

NOTE
Std 802.3.


format

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio



mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE


transmissions)

eSFP eSFP

format

type
Target km 10 10 40 40
transmission
distance


eSFP eSFP

wavelength
range
mean launched
power
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 6 6 6
extinction ratio

mask

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -12

reflectance

Optical FC400/ FC400/ FC100/ FC100/

Module FICON4G FICON4G FC200/ FC200/
Type Module-0.3 Module-10 FICON/ FICON/
km (Multi km (Single FICON FICON
mode)-eSFP mode)-eSFP Express Express
Module-0.5 Module-2
km km (Single
(Multimode) mode)-eSFP
-eSFP

format
Optical source - MLM SLM MLM SLM

type
Target - 0.3 km (0.2 10 km (6.2 0.5 km (0.3 2 km (1.2 mi.)

distance
Transmitter nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 830 to 860 1266 to 1360

parameter
specifications
at point S
Maximum dBm -1.1 -1 -2.5 -3

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9 -8.4 -9.5 -10

mean
launched
power
Eye pattern - Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface (FC-PI-2)

mask parameter template

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -15 -18 -17 -18

sensitivity

Optical FC400/ FC400/ FC100/ FC100/

Module FICON4G FICON4G FC200/ FC200/
Type Module-0.3 Module-10 FICON/ FICON/
km (Multi km (Single FICON FICON
mode)-eSFP mode)-eSFP Express Express
Module-0.5 Module-2
km km (Single
(Multimode) mode)-eSFP
-eSFP
Minimum dBm 0 0 0 0
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -27

reflectance

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width


eSFP eSFP

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power


Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

width

suppression ratio

(FEC on)
PIN APD APD

format
mean launched
power

PIN APD APD
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
extinction ratio

frequency
Center GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

PIN APD APD

PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN


PIN-XFP

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

(FEC on)

(FEC on)
TN11LOM:
(8.7 in.)
TN12LOM:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
d Consumption (W) Consumptiona
(W)
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even 92.7 101.7

1LO wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
M NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD


Wavelength-ODB-APD


(W)

2LO Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
M NRZ-PIN-XFP


Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

NOTE
When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board
increases by another 2 W.
11.6.10 LQM Board Specifications



ard Fixed Pluggable Optical Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical
Optical Module Module Module
Module

13L S-16.1-15 km-eSFP (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
QM 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate
L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-
2.125 Gbit/s
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.

NOTE
The I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be
used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON Express, FDDI, GE, STM-4, OC-12,
optical module.

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
signals.
module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals.


format

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range



mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD


(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

power

power

deviation

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - APD


(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
TN13LQM 32.6 35.9
11.6.11 LQMD Board Specifications


Optical Module Optical
Module Module

QM NRZ-PIN
D L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
L-16.2-80 km-eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
1000 BASE-LX-10 km- Fixed Wavelength-
eSFP NRZ-PIN
1000 BASE-LX-40 km- 3200 ps/nm-C Band-
eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km- NRZ-APD
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate Tunable Wavelength-
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP NRZ-APD
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate 6400 ps/nm-C Band-
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD


Module Module

QM NRZ-APD
D L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
eSFP NRZ-APD (Four
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.

NOTE
The I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be
used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12,
optical module.

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
signals.


format

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range



mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 11-100 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored

wavelengths)

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

Optical Module 12800 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6500 ps/ 3200 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6400 ps/
Type nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C
Band- Band- Band- Band- Band- Band-
Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Tunable Tunable
Wavelen Wavelen Wavelen Wavelen Wavelen Wavelen
gth-NRZ- gth-NRZ- gth-NRZ- gth-NRZ- gth-NRZ- gth-NRZ-
PIN APD PIN APD APD APD
(Four
Channels
-
Tunable)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Maximum mean dBm -4 -4 0 0 0 0

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -8 -8 -5 -5 -5 -5

launched power
Minimum dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2

extinction ratio

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5

spectral width
Minimum side dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
mode suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400

tolerance
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN APD APD APD

Optical Module 12800 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6500 ps/ 3200 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6400 ps/
Type nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C
Wavelen Wavelen Wavelen Wavelen Wavelen Wavelen
gth-NRZ- gth-NRZ- gth-NRZ- gth-NRZ- gth-NRZ- gth-NRZ-
(Four
Channels
-
Tunable)
Operating nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to

wavelength range 1575
Receiver dBm -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28

sensitivity
Minimum receiver dBm 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9

overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-CWDM

Band-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD

power
Minimum mean launched dBm –0.5

power
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm ≤ ±6.5

width

Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-CWDM

Band-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD

suppression ratio
Receiver type - APD
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power Maximum
Consumption Power
(W) Consumptiona
(W)
TN12 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed 31.1 34.3

LQM Wavelength-NRZ-APD
D 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)

11.6.12 LQMS Board Specifications


Module Module

QM NRZ-PIN
S L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
1000 BASE-LX-10 km- Fixed Wavelength-
eSFP NRZ-PIN
1000 BASE-LX-40 km- 3200 ps/nm-C Band-
eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km- NRZ-APD
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate Tunable Wavelength-
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP NRZ-APD
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD


Module Module

QM NRZ-APD
S L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
eSFP NRZ-APD (Four
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.

NOTE
TheI-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be
used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON Express, FDDI, GE, STM-4, OC-12,
optical module.

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
signals.


format

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range



mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

Table 11-105 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (CWDM colored

wavelengths)

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

wavelengths)

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

Optical 12800 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6500 ps/ 3200 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6400 ps/
Module Type nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C
Waveleng Waveleng Waveleng Waveleng Waveleng Waveleng
th-NRZ- th-NRZ- th-NRZ- th-NRZ- th-NRZ- th-NRZ-
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Maximum mean dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3

launched power

launched power
Minimum dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2

extinction ratio

frequency
Center GHz ±10

frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5

dB spectral
width
Minimum side dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
mode
suppression ratio
Dispersion ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400

tolerance

Waveleng Waveleng Waveleng Waveleng Waveleng Waveleng
th-NRZ- th-NRZ- th-NRZ- th-NRZ- th-NRZ- th-NRZ-
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)

wavelength 1575
range
Receiver dBm -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed

Wavelength-NRZ-APD

power
Minimum mean launched dBm 2.5

power
Central wavelength nm ≤±6.5

deviation

width


Wavelength-NRZ-APD

suppression ratio
Receiver type - APD
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
(W)
TN1 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed 29 32.3

2LQ Wavelength-NRZ-APD
MS 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
11.6.13 LSC Board Specifications


Boar Client-Side Client-Side Pluggable WDM-Side Fixed Optical WDM-Side

d Fixed Optical Optical Module Module Pluggable
Module Optical
Module
TN1 N/A 100G BASE-10×10G-10 40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable N/A

2LS km-CFP Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK
C 100G BASE-LR4-10 km- (HFEC, RZ)-PIN
CFP 55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
(100G BASE-4×25G)/ Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK
(OTU4-4×28G)-10km- (SDFEC, NRZ)-PIN
CFP
TN1 N/A 100G BASE-LR4-10 km- 40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable N/A

3LS CFP Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK
C 100G BASE-10×10G-10 (HFEC, RZ)-PIN
km-CFP 55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
(100G BASE-4×25G)/ Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK
(OTU4-4×28G)-10km- (SDFEC, NRZ)-PIN
CFP
TN1 N/A 100G BASE-LR4-10 km- 40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable N/A

5LS CFP Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK
C 100G BASE-10×10G-10 (HFEC, NRZ)
km-CFP 150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
(100G BASE-4×25G)/ Wavelength-ePDM-DQPSK
(OTU4-4×28G)-10km- (SDFEC2, RZ)-PIN
CFP 150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK
(SDFEC2, NRZ)-PIN
(SDFEC2, NRZ)-PIN
(SDFEC2, NRZ)-PIN
NOTE
point.

Optical Module Type 100G BASE-LR4-10 km-

CFP
Signaling Speed per Lane Gbit/s 25.78125
Signaling Speed Accuracy ppm -100 to 100
Minimum Lane Center nm 1294.53

Wavelength
1299.02
1303.54
1308.09
Maximum Lane Center nm 1296.59

Wavelength
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19
Total Average Launch Power dBm 1.7

(Min)

(Max)
Transmit OMA per Lane dBm -1.3

(Min)
Transmit OMA per Lane dBm 4.5

(Max)
Average Launch Power per dBm -4.3

Lane (Min)
Average Launch Power per dBm 4.5

Lane (Max)
Optical Extinction Ratio dB 4

(Min)


CFP
Side Mode Suppression dB 30

Ratio (Min)
Receiver type - PIN

Wavelength
1299.02
1303.54
1308.09

Wavelength
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19
Average Receiver Power per dBm -10.6

Lane (Min)
Average Receiver Power per dBm 4.5

Lane (Max)
Minimum receiver overload dBm 4.5

(OMA) per Lane
Receiver Sensitivity (OMA) dBm -8.6

per Lane

NOTE
The OMA values are designed to ensure normal equipment operation. They are not provided for equipment
commissioning. In practical, equipment commissioning is performed based on the average receiver power
per lane and total average launched power. It is recommended that the total average launched power be
used as the reference for equipment commissioning.

Optical Module Type 100G BASE-10×10G-10

km-CFP
Minimum Lane Center nm 1521

Wavelength
1529
1537
1545
1553
1561
1569
1577
1585
1593
Maximum Lane Center nm 1525

Wavelength
1533
1541
1549
1557
1565
1573
1581
1589
1597


km-CFP

(Min)

(Max)

Lane (Min)

Lane (Max)

(Min)

(Typ)

(Max)
Optical Extinction Ratio dB 2.5

(Min)

Ratio (Min)
Receiver type - PIN

Wavelength
1529
1537
1545
1553
1561
1569
1577
1585


km-CFP
1593

Wavelength
1533
1541
1549
1557
1565
1573
1581
1589
1597
Receiver Power per Lane dBm -10.8

(Min)
Receiver Power per Lane dBm 3.5

(Max)

(OMA) per Lane

per Lane

NOTE
Table 11-111 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (100GE/OTU4 services)
Optical Module Type (100G BASE-4×25G)/

(OTU4-4×28G)-10 km-
CFP


(OTU4-4×28G)-10 km-
CFP
Signaling Speed per Lane Gbit/s 100GE: 25.78125

OTU4: 27.952493
Signaling Speed Accuracy ppm 100GE: -100 to 100

OTU4: -20 to 20

Wavelength
1299.02
1303.54
1308.09

Wavelength
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19
Total Average Launch Power dBm 100GE: 1.7

(Min) OTU4: 3.5

(Max) OTU4: 8.9
Average Launch Power per dBm 100GE: -4.3

Lane (Min) OTU4: -2.5
Average Launch Power per dBm 100GE: 4.5

Lane (Max) OTU4: 2.9
Transmit OMA per Lane dBm -1.3 (Only for 100GE)

(Min)
Transmit OMA per Lane dBm 4.5 (Only for 100GE)

(Max)


(OTU4-4×28G)-10 km-
CFP
Eye pattern mask - 100GE: IEEE 802.3ba -

compliant
OTU4: ITU-T G.959 -
compliant
Optical Extinction Ratio dB 100GE: 4

(Min) OTU4: 7

Ratio (Min)
Receiver type - PIN

OTU4: 27.952493

OTU4: -20 to 20

Wavelength
1299.02
1303.54
1308.09

Wavelength
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19
Receiver Power per Lane dBm 100GE: -10.6

(Min) OTU4: -8.8
Receiver Power per Lane dBm 100GE: 4.5

(Max) OTU4: 2.9
Minimum receiver overload dBm 4.5 (Only for 100GE)

(OMA) per Lane
Receiver sensitivity (OMA) dBm -8.6 (Only for 100GE)

per Lane


(OTU4-4×28G)-10 km-
CFP
Receiver equivalent dBm -10.3 (Only for OTU4)

sensitivity per Lane
Minimum receiver overload dBm 2.9 (Only for OTU4)

per Lane

NOTE
Table 11-112 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, HFEC, RZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)

power

power

width
Dispersion tolerance (back- ps/nm 40000

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
Table 11-113 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, HFEC,
NRZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, NRZ)

power

power

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
Table 11-114 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, SDFEC,
NRZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,

NRZ)

power

power

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN

Table 11-115 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, SDFEC2,
RZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-DQPSK(SDFEC2,
RZ)-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-DQPSK(SDFEC2,

RZ)

power

power

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
NRZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,
NRZ)-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,

NRZ)


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,
NRZ)-PIN

power

power

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
NRZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,
NRZ)-PIN

NRZ)


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,
NRZ)-PIN

power

power

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
NRZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,
NRZ)-PIN

NRZ)

power


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,
NRZ)-PIN

power

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
TN12LSC
l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) x 220
mm (8.7 in.)
TN13LSC
(8.7 in.)
TN15LSC
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Maximum Power
TN12LSC 40000 ps/nm-C Band- 240 265

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
55000 ps/nm-C Band- 255 285

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
TN13LSC 40000 ps/nm-C Band- 150 160

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
55000 ps/nm-C Band- 160 170

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
TN15LSC 40000 ps/nm-C Band- 145.2 158.5

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
NRZ)
150000 ps/nm-C Band- 174.6 192.6

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-DQPSK
(SDFEC2,RZ)-PIN
150000 ps/nm-C Band- 174.6 192.6

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK
(SDFEC2,NRZ)-PIN
55000 ps/nm-C Band- 174.6 192.6

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK
(SDFEC2,NRZ)-PIN
40000 ps/nm-C Band- 174.6 192.6

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK
(SDFEC2,NRZ)-PIN
a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the

11.6.14 LSQ Board Specifications

Bo Client-Side Fixed Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side

ard Optical Module Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable
Module Optical
Module
TN 40 Gbit/s N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band- N/A

11L Multirate-2 km Tunable Wavelength-
SQ ODB-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
NOTE
point.
Client-Side Fixed Optical Module
Table 11-119 Client-side fixed optical module specifications
Optical Module Type 40 Gbit/s Multirate-2 km
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35
Receiver type - PIN

Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band-

Type Tunable Wavelength- Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN
Line code format - ODB DQPSK
Operating frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05

range

launched power

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 N/A

ratio
Center frequency GHz ±2.5 ±2.5

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 0.6 N/A

spectral width
Maximum -3 dB nm N/A 0.3

spectral width

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm -800 to 800 -800 to 800


ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN

wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity, dBm -16 -16

EOL (FEC on)

overload (FEC on)
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power Maximum Power
TN11LS 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 75.0 82.0

Q Wavelength-ODB-PIN

Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN
11.6.15 LSX Board Specifications


Bo Client- Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side

ard Side Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable Optical
Fixed Module Module
Optical
Module
TN N/A 10 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd N/A

11L Multirate-10 km- & even wavelengths)-
SX XFP Fixed Wavelength-
10 Gbit/s NRZ-PIN
Multirate-40 km- 800 ps/nm-C Band-
XFP Fixed Wavelength-
10 Gbit/s NRZ-PIN
XFP Tunable Wavelength-
10 Gbit/s Single Rate NRZ-PIN
-0.3 km-XFP 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN

10 Gbit/s NRZ-PIN
XFP Fixed Wavelength-
10 Gbit/s NRZ-PIN
-0.3 km-XFP 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
10 Gbit/s Multirate- Tunable Wavelength-
TX1330/ NRZ-APD
RX1270nm-10km- 4800 ps/nm-C Band-
10 Gbit/s Multirate- ODB-APD
TX1270/ 800 ps/nm-C Band-
RX1330nm-10km- Tunable Wavelength-
XFP (D)RZ-PIN

Bo Client- Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side

ard Side Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable Optical
Fixed Module Module
Optical
Module
TN N/A 10 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band

13L Multirate-10 km- Tunable Wavelength- (Odd & Even
SX XFP (D)RZ-PIN Wavelengths)-Fixed
10 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band- Wavelength-NRZ-
Multirate-40 km- Tunable Wavelength- PIN-XFP
XFP NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-
10 Gbit/s Tunable
Multirate-80 km- Wavelength-NRZ-
XFP PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Single Rate

-0.3 km-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP

10 Gbit/s NRZ-PIN
10 Gbit/s (D)RZ-PIN
-0.3 km-XFP
TX1330/
RX1270nm-10km-
XFP
TX1270/
RX1330nm-10km-
XFP
NOTE

NOTE
point.

NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km-XFP module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km-XFP module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate
80 km-XFP module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/
OTU2e signals.
The 10 Gbit/s single-rate 0.3 km-XFP module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals.

XFP

format

source type

n distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio


XFP
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate)a
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)a
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance


wavelengths, fixed wavelength)

PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

OC-192, OTU2, OTU2e, and FC1200 signals.

Table 11-123 Client-side pluggable 10G optical module specifications (single-fiber

bidirectional transmissions)

TX1330/ TX1270/
XFP XFP
distance

range

launched power

launched power

ratio

range

overload


Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

width

suppression ratio

(FEC on)

PIN APD APD

format
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
extinction ratio

frequency
Center GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm

wavelength
range

PIN APD APD
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

PIN-XFP

power

power


PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11LSX: 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)
TN12LSX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN13LSX: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
TN14LSX: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
Power Consumption
(W)

1LS wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
X NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN


(W)

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD


Wavelength-ODB-APD

X NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 32.5 39


Wavelength-ODB-APD
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 29.4 32.8

3LS Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
X
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 27 30.4

Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 28 31.4

TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even 27 30

X NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN


(W)
11.6.16 LSXL Board Specifications


ard Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Module Pluggable
Module Optical Optical
Module Module

SX ODB-PIN
L 400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-(D)
RZ-PIN

SX DQPSK-PIN
L 500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN

SX ePDM-BPSK-PIN
L
NOTE
NOTE
point.

Receiver type - PIN
Optical Module 500 ps/nm-C 500 ps/nm-C 400 ps/nm-C

Type Band-Tunable Band-Tunable Band-Tunable
Wavelength- Wavelength- Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN ODB-PIN (D)RZ-PIN
Line code format - DQPSK ODB (D)RZ


Operating frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.00

range
Maximum mean dBm 0 0 0

launched power

launched power
Minimum extinction dB N/A 8.2 8.2

ratio
Center frequency GHz ±2.5 ±2.5 ±5

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm N/A 0.6 1

spectral width
Maximum -3 dB nm 0.3 N/A N/A

spectral width

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm ±500 ±500 ±400
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN

wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity, dBm -16 -16 -16

EOL (FEC on)
Minimum receiver dBm 0 0 0

overload (FEC on)
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27

reflectance


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-BPSK

power

power

width

suppression ratio

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
TN11LSXL
mm (8.7 in.)
TN12LSXL
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 3.75 kg (8.27 lb.)

TN15LSXL
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Consumption Power
(W) Consumptiona
(W)

XL Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN

Wavelength-ODB-PIN

XL Wavelength-ODB-PIN


XL Wavelength-ePDM-BPSK-PIN
11.6.17 LSXLR Board Specifications

Board WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable

Optical Module
TN11LS 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB- N/A

XLR PIN
400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-
PIN
TN12LS 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- N/A

XLR DQPSK-PIN
500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-
PIN

NOTE
NOTE
point.

Line code format - DQPSK ODB (D)RZ
Operating frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.00

range
Maximum mean dBm 0 0 0

launched power

launched power
Minimum extinction dB N/A 8.2 8.2

ratio
Center frequency GHz ±2.5 ±2.5 ±5

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm N/A 0.6 1

spectral width
Maximum -3 dB nm 0.3 N/A N/A

spectral width

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm ±500 ±500 ±400



wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity, dBm -16 -16 -16

EOL (FEC on)
Minimum receiver dBm 0 0 0

overload (FEC on)

reflectance
TN12LSXLR
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Consumption (W) Consumptiona
(W)

LSXL Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN
R
Wavelength-ODB-PIN

LSXL Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN
R
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
11.6.18 LSXR Board Specifications


Board WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable Optical

Module
TN11L 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even N/A

SXR wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
NRZ-APD
ODB-APD
(D)RZ-PIN
NOTE
NOTE
point.

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power


Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

width

suppression ratio

(FEC on)
Optical Module 1200 ps/ 1200 ps/ 4800 ps/nm- 800 ps/nm-C
Type nm-C nm-C C Band- Band-
Band- Band- Tunable Tunable
Tunable Tunable Wavelengt Wavelength-
Wavelengt Wavelengt h-ODB- (D)RZ-PIN
h-NRZ- h-NRZ- APD
PIN APD
Line code format - NRZ NRZ ODB (D)RZ
Maximum mean dBm 2 2 2 2

launched power

Optical Module 1200 ps/ 1200 ps/ 4800 ps/nm- 800 ps/nm-C
Type nm-C nm-C C Band- Band-
Band- Band- Tunable Tunable
Tunable Tunable Wavelengt Wavelength-
Wavelengt Wavelengt h-ODB- (D)RZ-PIN
h-NRZ- h-NRZ- APD
PIN APD
Minimum mean dBm -3 -3 -3 -3

launched power
Minimum dB 10 10 N/Aa 10
extinction ratio
Center frequency GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

spectral width
Minimum side dB 35 35 35 35
mode suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/nm 1200 1200 4800 800

tolerance
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN

wavelength range
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16

sensitivity, EOL
(FEC on)
Minimum receiver dBm 0 -9 -9 0

overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
(8.7 in.)

l Weight: 1.2 kg. (2.6 lb)
Power Consumption
d Consumption (W) Consumptiona (W)

XR NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD


Wavelength-ODB-APD
11.6.19 LTX Board Specifications

Board Client- Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-

Side Pluggable Optical Optical Module Side
Fixed Module Pluggable
Optical Optical
Module Module
TN11LTX/ N/A 10 Gbit/s 40000 ps/nm-C N/A

TN12LTX Multirate-10 km- Band-Tunable
XFP Wavelength-ePDM-
10 Gbit/s QPSK(HFEC, RZ)-
Multirate-40 km- PIN
XFP 55000 ps/nm-C
10 Gbit/s Band-Tunable
Multirate-80 km- Wavelength-ePDM-
XFP QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate-0.3 km-XFP

NOTE
point.
Specifications of optical modules on the client side

NOTE
optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, OTU2/OTU2e and 10GE WAN
signals.
The 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals.

XFP

format

source type

n distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio


XFP
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate)a
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)a
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance

Specifications of optical modules on the DWDM side

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN

power

power

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN

NRZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN

NRZ)

power

power

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
mm (8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11LTX/TN12LTX: 5.8 kg (12.8 lb.)

Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Typical Power Maximum Power
Module Consumption (W) Consumptiona
(W)
TN11LTX (OTU 40000 ps/nm-C 248 273

mode) Band-Tunable
Wavelength-ePDM-
TN11LTX QPSK(HFEC, RZ)- 235 247
(regeneration mode) PIN
TN11LTX (OTU 55000 ps/nm-C 270 300

mode) Band-Tunable
Wavelength-ePDM-
TN11LTX QPSK(SDFEC, 250 275
(regeneration mode) NRZ)-PIN
TN12LTX (OTU 40000 ps/nm-C 248 273

mode) Band-Tunable
Wavelength-ePDM-
TN12LTX QPSK(HFEC, RZ)- 235 247
(regeneration mode) PIN
TN12LTX (OTU 55000 ps/nm-C 270 300

mode) Band-Tunable
Wavelength-ePDM-
TN12LTX QPSK(SDFEC, 250 275
(regeneration mode) NRZ)-PIN
11.6.20 LWXS Board Specifications



Module Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 12800 ps/nm-C Band- N/A

11L Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
WX I-16-2 km-eSFP NRZ-PIN
S 12800 ps/nm-C Band-
S-16.1-15 km-eSFP
TN Fixed Wavelength-
12L L-16.2-80 km-eSFP NRZ-APD
WX 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate 6500 ps/nm-C Band-
S (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ-PIN
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP 3200 ps/nm-C Band-
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate Fixed Wavelength-
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NOTE
point.

NOTE
The I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access ETR,
CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
Only the S-16.1-15 km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical
module.
The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals.

Table 11-137 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications
Optical 2.125 Gbit/s I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.2-80

Module Multirate-0. eSFP km-eSFP km-eSFP
Type 5 km-eSFP

format

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -10 -5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
Maximum nm N/A N/A 1 1

-20 dB
spectral
width
Minimum dB N/A N/A 30 30

side mode
suppression
ratio
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z- G.957-compliant

mask compliant
Receiver - PIN PIN PIN APD

type

Optical 2.125 Gbit/s I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.2-80

Module Multirate-0. eSFP km-eSFP km-eSFP
Type 5 km-eSFP

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -18 -18 -28

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -3 0 -9
receiver
overload
Maximum dB N/A -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access ETR, CLO, GE, FC100,
STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16,
OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

wavelengths)

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power


eSFP eSFP

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

wavelengths)

eSFP

distance


eSFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

Waveleng Waveleng Wavelen Waveleng Wavelen Waveleng
th-NRZ- th-NRZ- gth-NRZ- th-NRZ- gth-NRZ- th-NRZ-
PINa APDa PIN APD APD APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

format
Maximum dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3
mean launched
power

launched power
Minimum dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2

extinction ratio

frequency
Center GHz ±10

frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5

dB spectral
width
Minimum side dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400

tolerance

mask

Waveleng Waveleng Wavelen Waveleng Wavelen Waveleng
th-NRZ- th-NRZ- gth-NRZ- th-NRZ- gth-NRZ- th-NRZ-
PINa APDa PIN APD APD APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)

wavelength 1575
range
Receiver dBm -18 -28 -18 -26 -28 -28

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -9 0 -10 -9 -9

receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.

Wavelength-NRZ-APD

power
Minimum mean launched dBm 2.5

power


Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Central wavelength nm ≤±6.5

deviation

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - APD
NOTE
l When SDH or OTN services are provisioned on the WDM side, the line code on the WDM side must
be NRZ.
l When SDH or OTN services are provisioned on the WDM side, the eye pattern on the WDM side
complies with the template defined in ITU-T G.957.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
LWXS 33.9 37.3

11.6.21 TMX Board Specifications


Module
TN N/A I-16-2 km-eSFP 800 ps/nm-C Band N/A

11T S-16.1-15 km-eSFP (odd & even
MX wavelengths)-Fixed
L-16.1-40 km-eSFP Wavelength-NRZ-
L-16.2-80 km-eSFP PIN
(CWDM)-80 km- Fixed Wavelength-
eSFP NRZ-PIN
(DWDM)-120 km- Tunable Wavelength-
eSFP NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
TN N/A I-16-2 km-eSFP 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band

12T S-16.1-15 km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength- (Odd & Even
MX (D)RZ-PIN Wavelengths)-
800 ps/nm-C Band-
L-16.2-80 km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength- NRZ-PIN-XFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-
(CWDM)-80 km- Tunable
eSFP Wavelength-NRZ-
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate PIN-XFP
(DWDM)-120 km- 10 Gbit/s
eSFP Multirate-10 km-
XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km-
XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km-
XFP

NOTE
NOTE
point.
Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

wavelengths)

(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP


(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
Central wavelength deviation nm ±6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1.0
Minimum side mode suppression dB 30

ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant

G.959.1-compliant
Receiver type - APD

wavelengths)

eSFP

distance

power

power


eSFP

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power


Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

width

suppression ratio

(FEC on)
PIN APD APD

format

PIN APD APD
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
extinction ratio

frequency
Center GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)

PIN APD APD
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

PIN-XFP

power

power

width


PIN-XFP

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

XFP XFP XFP

format

type

transmission
distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power

mean launched
power


XFP XFP XFP
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11TMX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN12TMX: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
(W)

1TM wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
X NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN


(W)

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD


Wavelength-ODB-APD

2TM Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
X NRZ-PIN-XFP



Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
11.6.22 Jitter Transfer Characteristics

Specifications include jitter transfer characteristics specifications of OTUs. These specifications
comply with ITU-T G.8251.
The OTU has the jitter transfer characteristics. Its jitter transfer function should be under the
curve. See Figure 11-1. For its specifications, refer to Table 11-150.
Table 11-150 Jitter transfer characteristics specifications
STM Level fc (kHz) P (dB)
STM-1(A) 130 0.1
STM-4(A) 500 0.1
STM-16(A)/OTU1 2000 0.1

STM Level fc (kHz) P (dB)
STM-64(A)/OTU2 1000 0.1
STM-256(A)/OTU3 4000 0.1
Figure 11-1 Jitter transfer characteristics

Jitter gain
P
-20dB/10 octave
f
0 fc Jitter frequency
11.6.23 Input Jitter Tolerance

Specifications include input jitter tolerance specifications of the OTU. These specifications
comply with ITU-T G.8251.
The OTU is able to tolerate the input jitter pattern shown in Figure 11-2. The specifications are
provided in Table 11-151.
Table 11-151 Input jitter tolerance specifications
STM Level f0 (kHz) f1 (kHz) A1 (UIp-p) A2 (UIp-p)
STM-1(A) 6.5 65 0.15 1.5
STM-4(A) 25 250 0.15 1.5
STM-16(A)/ 100 1000 0.15 1.5

OTU1
STM-64(A)/ 400 4000 0.15 1.5

OTU2
STM-256(A) 1920 16000 0.18 1.5
OTU3 480 16000 0.18 6.0

Figure 11-2 Input jitter tolerance

Input jitter amplitude
A
A2
-20dB/10 octave
A1
f
f0 f1 Frequency
11.6.24 Output Jitter

Specifications include output jitter specifications of OTU. These specifications comply with
ITU-T G.8251.
The specifications of OTU output jitter are provided in Table 11-152.
Table 11-152 Output jitter specifications
Interface Measurement Band

Peak-Peak
STM Level High-Pass (kHz) Low-Pass (MHz) Amplitude (UI)
STM-1 0.5 1.3 0.3
65 1.3 0.1
STM-4 1 5 0.3
250 5 0.1
STM-16/OTU1 5 20 0.3
1000 20 0.1
STM-64/OTU2 20 80 0.3
4000 80 0.1
STM-256 80 320 0.3
16000 320 0.14
OTU3 20 320 1.2
16000 320 0.14

11.7 OTN Tributary Unit Specifications
11.7.1 TDX Board Specifications

Board Client-Side Fixed Client-Side Pluggable Optical

Optical Module Module
TN11TDX/ N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP

TN12TDX/ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP
TN52TDX
10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km-XFP
TN53TDX N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP

800-SM-LC-L-10 km-XFP
NOTE
point.
NOTE
optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals.

XFP

format


XFP

source type

n distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate)a


XFP
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)a
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance
NOTE
The 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-XFP optical module can be used to access FC800 signals.
Optical Module Type 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-XFP
Optical interface service rate Gbit/s 8.5

Maximum mean launched dBm -1

power

power
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity dBm -14.4
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– TN11TDX: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.)
– TN12TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
– TN52TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
– TN53TDX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
Power Consumption
TN11TDX 78.0 80.0
TN12TDX 37.4 40.7
TN52TDX 57.3 63.0
TN53TDX 25.0 27.5

11.7.2 TEM28 Board Specifications

Board Client-Side Fixed Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Optical Module
TN54TE N/A 1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km-eSFP (I-850-LC)

M28 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP (I-1310-LC)
10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+
10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+
10G BASE-ZR-80 km-SFP+
NOTE
point.

LC) LC)

distance

wavelength range

launched power

launched power
ratio


LC) LC)

wavelength range
Minimum receiver dBm 0 -3

overload
NOTE
The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.
Optical 10G BASE- 10G BASE- 10G BASE-

Module Type SR-0.3 km- LR-10 km-SFP ZR-80 km-SFP
SFP+ + +
Optical Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125

interface service
rate
Optical source - MLM SLM SLM

type

format
Target - 0.3 km (0.2 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)

transmission
distance

wavelength
range
Maximum mean dBm -1 0.5 4

launched power


Module Type SR-0.3 km- LR-10 km-SFP ZR-80 km-SFP
SFP+ + +
Minimum mean dBm -7.3 -8.2 0

launched power
Minimum dB 3 3.5 9
extinction ratio
Output optical dBm ≤-30 ≤-30 ≤-30

power in case of
laser shutdown
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z–compliant

mask

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11.1 (OMA) -12.6 (OMA) -24

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -1 0.5 -7

receiver
overload

reflectance
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN54TEM28 105 113

11.7.3 THA Board Specifications


Optical Module
TN54TH N/A S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

A 1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1310/RX1490 nm-15 km-
eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1490/RX1310 nm-15 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP (I-1310-LC)
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.

NOTE
S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FICON,
FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FDDI and FE signals.
Optical Module Type S-16.1

-15 km-eSFP

Optical Module Type S-16.1

-15 km-eSFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.959.1–compliant
Receiver type - PIN
NOTE


transmissions)

eSFP eSFP

format

type


eSFP eSFP
Target km 10 10 40 40
transmission
distance

wavelength
range
mean launched
power
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 6 6 6
extinction ratio

mask

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -12

reflectance
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1310/RX1490 nm-15 km-eSFP and 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1490/RX1310 nm-15 km-
eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM–1, OC–4, STM–4, OC–12, STM–16, OC–48, FC200,
FC100, GE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FE, FDDI, FICON, and FICON Express signals.

Table 11-159 Client-side pluggable 2.5G optical module specifications (single-fiber

Optical Module Type 2.67 Gbit/s 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-

Multirate-TX1310/ TX1490/RX1310
RX1490 nm-15 km- nm-15 km-eSFP
eSFP
distance

range

launched power

launched power

ratio

range

overload
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, FICON, FDDI, STM-4, OC-48, ESCON,
STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.

Optical Module Type 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-

eSFP (I-1310-LC)

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -9.5

power
Receiver type - PIN
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP module can be used to access GE, FC100, FC200, FE signals.
Table 11-161 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (2.125 Gbit/s services)
Optical Module Type 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-

eSFP
Optical source type - MLM
Target transmission distance - 0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

Optical Module Type 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-

eSFP
Maximum mean launched dBm -2.5

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -9.5

power
Receiver type - PIN
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN54THA 35 40
11.7.4 TOA Board Specifications



Optical Module
TN54TO N/A I-16-2 km-eSFP

A S-16.1-15 km-eSFP
L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
L-16.2-80 km-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate 10 km-Video eSFP
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.

NOTE
to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON Express, FDDI, GE, STM-4, OC-12,
optical module.

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE


transmissions)

eSFP eSFP

format

type
Target km 10 10 40 40
transmission
distance

wavelength
range
mean launched
power


eSFP eSFP
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 6 6 6
extinction ratio

mask

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -12

reflectance
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON,
FICON Express, and FE signals.
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP optical module
can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE and DVB-ASI
signals.
NOTE
802.3.



format

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and
FE signals.

wavelengths)

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant


eSFP eSFP

range

overload
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and
FE signals.

wavelengths)

eSFP

distance

power

power

width


eSFP

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD
NOTE
SDI module can be used to access DVB-ASI, SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, and 3G-SDIRBR signals.

eSFP

power


eSFP

power

width
Receiver type - PIN
NOTE
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km-eSFP and 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access
FC400, and FICON4G signals.

eSFP eSFP

distance
Transmitter parameter nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355

specifications at point S

launched power


eSFP eSFP

launched power
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface

(FC-PI-2) parameter template

range

overload
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN54TOA 23 25
11.7.5 TOG Board Specifications



Optical Module
TN52TO N/A 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP

G 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.


format

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power



mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
Std 802.3.

wavelengths)

eSFP eSFP


eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 0.85 kg (1.87 lb.)

Power Consumption
TN52TOG 41.8 46.0
11.7.6 TOM Board Specifications


ard Fixed Pluggable Optical Fixed Pluggable Optical
Module Module

11T S-16.1-15 km-eSFP (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
OM 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate
L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-
2.125 Gbit/s I-16-2 km-eSFP
S-16.1-15 km-eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-
eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 km- L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP


ard Fixed Pluggable Optical Fixed Pluggable Optical
Module Module

52T S-16.1-15 km-eSFP (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
OM 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate
L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-
1000 BASE-BX10-U- I-16-2 km-eSFP
eSFP
S-16.1-15 km-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX10-D-
eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-U- L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-D-
eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-
TX1310/RX1490 nm-15
km-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-
TX1490/RX1310 nm-15
km-eSFP
2.125 Gbit/s
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s
eSFP

NOTE
point.

NOTE
I-16-2 km-eSFP module, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP module, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP module and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP
module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON Express, FDDI, GE,
STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
optical module.
Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP module, and
1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP module can be used to access GE signals.


transmissions)

eSFP eSFP

format

type
Target km 10 10 40 40
transmission
distance

wavelength
range
mean launched
power
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 6 6 6
extinction ratio

mask

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -12

reflectance

NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1310/RX1490 nm-15 km-eSFP and 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1490/RX1310 nm-15 km-
eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM–1, OC–4, STM–4, OC–12, STM–16, OC–48, FC200,
FC100, GE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FE, FDDI, FICON, and FICON Express signals.
Table 11-173 Client-side pluggable 2.5G optical module specifications (single-fiber

Optical Module Type 2.67 Gbit/s 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-

Multirate-TX1310/ TX1490/RX1310
RX1490 nm-15 km- nm-15 km-eSFP
eSFP
distance

range

launched power

launched power

ratio

range

overload

NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate-eSFP module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals.
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP
802.3.


format

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type



wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1,
OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.

wavelengths)

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power


eSFP eSFP

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.

wavelengths)

eSFP

distance


eSFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD
NOTE
0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate 10 km-Video eSFP module can be used to access DVB-ASI, SDI, and HD-SDI
signals.


eSFP

power

power

width
Receiver type - PIN

(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP


(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

power

power

deviation

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - APD

(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

power


(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD
Table 11-180 WDM-side pluggable optical specifications (SDH services)
Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

format

source type

distance

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload

Optical I-16-2 km- S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Type
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11TOM: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN52TOM: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11TOM 55 60
TN52TOM 81 89.1
11.7.7 TOX Board Specifications


Optical Module
TN55TO N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+

X 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+
10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km-SFP+

NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board
and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board
are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
NOTE
10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+ and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access
OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, OTU2, and OTU2e signals.


service rate

distance

wavelength range

launched power

launched power

ratio

wavelength range

-15.8 (10.3125G)

overload


NOTE
10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+, 10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+, 10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km-SFP+, and 10G BASE-
ZR-80 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN signals.
Optical 10G BASE- 10G BASE- 10G BASE- 10G BASE-

Module SR-0.3 km- LR-10 km- ER/EW-40 ZR-80 km-
Type SFP+ SFP+ km-SFP+ SFP+
Optical Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125

interface
service rate

source type

format
Target - 0.3 km (0.2 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.8 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 0.5 4 4

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -7.3 -8.2 -4.7 0

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio


Output dBm ≤-30 ≤-30 ≤-30 ≤-30

optical
power in
case of laser
shutdown
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z –compliant

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11.1 (OMA) -12.6 (OMA) -14.1 (OMA) -24

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -1 0.5 -1 -7

receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -26 -27

reflectance
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.42 kg (3.13 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN55TOX 75.3 80.6

11.7.8 TQX Board Specifications


Optical Module
TN11TQX/ N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP

TN52TQX 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP
TN53TQX N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP

TN55TQX N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP

10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/RX1270nm-10km-
XFP
10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/RX1330nm-10km-
XFP
NOTE
point.
NOTE
optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals.


XFP

format

source type

n distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type


XFP

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate)a
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)a
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance
NOTE
The 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-XFP module can be used to access FC800 signals.
Optical interface service rate Gbit/s 8.5


power

power
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity dBm -14.4

OC-192, OTU2, OTU2e, and FC1200 signals.
Table 11-185 Client-side pluggable 10G optical module specifications (single-fiber


TX1330/ TX1270/
XFP XFP
distance


TX1330/ TX1270/
XFP XFP

range

launched power

launched power

ratio

range

overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11TQX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
TN52TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN53TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN55TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11TQX 65.0 71.2
TN52TQX 91.5 100
TN53TQX 45 50


TN55TQX 45 50
11.7.9 TSC Board Specifications


Optical Module
TN54TS N/A 100GBASE-LR4-10 km-CFP

C 100GBASE-10×10G-10 km-CFP
(100GBASE-4×25G)/(OTU4-4×28G)-10 km-CFP
NOTE
point.

CFP

Wavelength
1299.02


CFP
1303.54
1308.09

Wavelength
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19

(Min)

(Max)

(Min)

(Max)

Lane (Min)

Lane (Max)
Optical Extinction Ratio dB 4

(Min)

Ratio (Min)
Receiver type - PIN

Wavelength
1299.02
1303.54
1308.09


CFP

Wavelength
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19

Lane (Min)

Lane (Max)

(OMA) per Lane

per Lane

NOTE

km-CFP

Wavelength
1529


km-CFP
1537
1545
1553
1561
1569
1577
1585
1593

Wavelength
1533
1541
1549
1557
1565
1573
1581
1589
1597

(Min)

(Max)

Lane (Min)

Lane (Max)

(Min)

(Typ)


km-CFP

(Max)

(Min)

Ratio (Min)
Receiver type - PIN

Wavelength
1529
1537
1545
1553
1561
1569
1577
1585
1593

Wavelength
1533
1541
1549
1557
1565
1573
1581
1589


km-CFP
1597
Receiver Power per Lane dBm -10.8

(Min)
Receiver Power per Lane dBm 3.5

(Max)

(OMA) per Lane

per Lane

NOTE
Table 11-188 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (100GE/OTU4 services)

(OTU4-4×28G)-10 km-
CFP

OTU4: 27.952493

OTU4: -20 to 20

Wavelength
1299.02
1303.54


(OTU4-4×28G)-10 km-
CFP
1308.09

Wavelength
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19

(Min) OTU4: 3.5

(Max) OTU4: 8.9
Average Launch Power per dBm 100GE: -4.3

Lane (Min) OTU4: -2.5
Average Launch Power per dBm 100GE: 4.5

Lane (Max) OTU4: 2.9
Transmit OMA per Lane dBm -1.3 (Only for 100GE)

(Min)
Transmit OMA per Lane dBm 4.5 (Only for 100GE)

(Max)
Eye pattern mask - 100GE: IEEE 802.3ba -

compliant
OTU4: ITU-T G.959 -
compliant
Optical Extinction Ratio dB 100GE: 4

(Min) OTU4: 7

Ratio (Min)
Receiver type - PIN

OTU4: 27.952493

OTU4: -20 to 20


(OTU4-4×28G)-10 km-
CFP

Wavelength
1299.02
1303.54
1308.09

Wavelength
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19
Receiver Power per Lane dBm 100GE: -10.6

(Min) OTU4: -8.8
Receiver Power per Lane dBm 100GE: 4.5

(Max) OTU4: 2.9
Minimum receiver overload dBm 4.5 (Only for 100GE)

(OMA) per Lane
Receiver sensitivity (OMA) dBm -8.6 (Only for 100GE)

per Lane
Receiver equivalent dBm -10.3 (Only for OTU4)

sensitivity per Lane
Minimum receiver overload dBm 2.9 (Only for OTU4)

per Lane

NOTE
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
TN54TSC 65.0 80.0
11.7.10 TSXL Board Specifications

Board Client-Side Fixed Optical Client-Side Pluggable Optical

Module Module
TN11TS 40 Gbit/s Multirate-2 km N/A

XL/
TN53TS
XL
TN54TS N/A 40G BASE-LR4-10km-CFP

XL
NOTE
point.

Receiver type - PIN
Table 11-190 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications
Optical Module Type 40G BASE-LR4-10km-

CFP
Signaling speed per Lane Gbit/s 10.3125
Signaling speed accuracy ppm -100 to 100

Wavelength
1284.5
1304.5
1324.5

Wavelength
1297.5


CFP
1317.5
1337.5

(Max)
Total Average Launch Power dBm -1

(Min)
Transmit OMA per Lane dBm -4

(Min)

(Max)
Average Launch Power per dBm -7

Lane (Min)

Lane (Max)

(Min)

Ratio (Min)
Receiver type - PIN

Wavelength
1284.5
1304.5
1324.5

Wavelength
1297.5
1317.5
1337.5


CFP

Lane (Min)

Lane (Max)

(OMA) per Lane

per Lane

NOTE
TN11TSXL:
(8.7 in.)
TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11TSXL 90.2 96
TN53TSXL 75 83
TN54TSXL 58 64

11.7.11 TTX Board Specifications


Optical Module
TN54TT N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+

X 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+
NOTE
point.
NOTE
10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+ and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access
OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, or 10GE LANsignals.


service rate

distance

wavelength range

launched power



launched power

ratio

wavelength range

-15.8 (10.3125G)

overload
NOTE
10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+, 10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+, 10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km-SFP+, and 10G BASE-
ZR-80 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN signals.

Optical Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125

interface
service rate

source type

format
Target - 0.3 km (0.2 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.8 80 km (49.7

distance



wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 0.5 4 4

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -7.3 -8.2 -4.7 0

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio
Output dBm ≤-30 ≤-30 ≤-30 ≤-30

optical
power in
case of laser
shutdown
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z –compliant

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11.1 (OMA) -12.6 (OMA) -14.1 (OMA) -24

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -1 0.5 -1 -7

receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -26 -27

reflectance

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN54TTX 63.0 68.0
11.8 OTN Line Board Specifications
11.8.1 ND2 Board Specifications


Module
TN11ND 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even N/A

2 Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN12ND 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
2 Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable NRZ-PIN-XFP
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP
TN52ND 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable N/A

2 Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN


Module
TN53ND N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

2 Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
NOTE
NOTE
point.
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

width

Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

PIN

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band-

Tunable Tunable Wavelength-
Wavelength-NRZ- (D)RZ-PIN
PIN
Line code format - NRZ (D)RZ

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band-

Tunable Tunable Wavelength-
Wavelength-NRZ- (D)RZ-PIN
PIN
Operating wavelength nm 1200 to 1650

range

(FEC on)

overload

PIN-XFP

power

power


PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

XFP XFP XFP

format

type

transmission
distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power


XFP XFP XFP

mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb. )
TN52ND2: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN53ND2: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)

Power Consumption
Boar WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power Maximum
d Consumption Power
(W) Consumptiona
(W)

1ND Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
2 PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 62.7 70.2

NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 68.4 76.6

(D)RZ-PIN
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 57.2 64

2ND NRZ-PIN
2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 62 69
(D)RZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 46 52

PIN-XFP
TN5 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 70.5 77.5

2ND NRZ-PIN
2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- TN52ND2T01: TN52ND2T01:
(D)RZ-PIN 67.8 74.6
TN52ND2T04: 35 TN52ND2T04: 37
TN5 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 25 28

3ND Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
2 PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 27 30

NRZ-PIN-XFP

11.8.2 NO2 Board Specifications

Board WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Optical Module
TN55NO N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed

2 Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
NOTE
point.

PIN-XFP

power

power

width


PIN-XFP

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Type km-XFP km-XFP

distance

wavelength range

launched power

launched power

ratio

suppression ratio


Type km-XFP km-XFP

wavelength range

overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.66 kg (3.66 lb.)
Power Consumption
d Consumption Power
(W) Consumptiona
(W)
TN55 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 83.6 87

NO2 Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP
11.8.3 NQ2 Board Specifications



Optical Module
TN51NQ2 N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-

Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
TN52NQ2/ N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-

TN53NQ2/ Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
TN54NQ2 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
NOTE
point.

PIN-XFP

power

power


PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

XFP XFP XFP

format

type

transmission
distance

wavelength
range


XFP XFP XFP
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power

mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– TN51NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
– TN52NQ2: 2.0 kg (4.4 lb.)
– TN53NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
– TN54NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)

Power Consumption
d Consumption Power
(W) Consumptiona
(W)

NQ2 Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP

PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP

PIN-XFP
TN53 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 49 54

NQ2 NRZ-PIN-XFP
TN54 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 53 58.3

PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP
11.8.4 NS2 Board Specifications



Module
TN11NS 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even N/A

PIN
NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-ODB-APD
TN12NS 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
2 Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ- Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
PIN NRZ-PIN-XFP
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-ODB-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN52NS 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable N/A

2 Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
TN53NS N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

NRZ-PIN-XFP

NOTE
NOTE
point.

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

width

suppression ratio

(FEC on)


Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
PIN APD APD

format
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
extinction ratio

frequency
Center GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width

PIN APD APD
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

PIN-XFP


PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Type km-XFP km-XFP

distance


Type km-XFP km-XFP

wavelength range

launched power

launched power

ratio

suppression ratio

wavelength range

overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11NS2/TN12NS2: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb)
TN52NS2: 1.3 kg (2.86 lb.)
TN53NS2: 1 kg (2.2 lb.)

Power Consumption
Consumption Power
(W) Consumptiona
(W)
TN11NS 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 38.0 41.8

PIN
NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD


Wavelength-ODB-APD
TN12NS 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 38.8 43.40

PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD


Wavelength-ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 30.32 34

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 25.35 28.39

Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
TN52NS 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable TN52NS2T02: TN52NS2T02:

2 Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 51.3 56.4
TN52NS2T06: 28 TN52NS2T06: 31


Consumption Power
(W) Consumptiona
(W)
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable TN52NS2T03: TN52NS2T03:

Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN 49.1 54.0
TN52NS2T04: 26 TN52NS2T04: 28
TN52NS2T05: 28 TN52NS2T05: 31
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 28 31

Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
TN53NS 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 20 24

NRZ-PIN-XFP



Module

3 Wavelength-ODB-PIN



Module

40 Gbit/s Multirate-2 km

3 Wavelength-ePDM-BPSK-PIN

3 Wavelength-ePDM-BPSK-PIN
NOTE
point.

ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN

range

launched power

launched power

ratio

deviation


ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN

spectral width

spectral width

suppression ratio

wavelength range

EOL (FEC on)

overload (FEC on)
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance

ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN

range

launched power

launched power


ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN

ratio

deviation

spectral width

spectral width

suppression ratio

wavelength range

EOL (FEC on)

overload (FEC on)
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN

power

power

width

suppression ratio

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
Table 11-212 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (gray light)

Receiver type - PIN
TN11NS3:
(8.7 in.)
TN52NS3:
(8.7 in.)
TN54NS3:
(8.7 in.)
TN55NS3:
(8.7 in.)
TN56NS3:
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Optical Typical Power Maximum
Module Consumption Power
(W) Consumptiona
(W)
TN11NS3 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 92 101.2


Wavelength-ODB-PIN
TN52NS3 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 118 130


Wavelength-ODB-PIN

TN54NS3 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 73 80


Wavelength-ODB-PIN
40 Gbit/s Multirate-2 km 62 69
TN55NS3 60000ps/nm-C Band- 135 150

Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-
BPSK-PIN
TN56NS3 60000ps/nm-C Band- 99 103

Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-
BPSK-PIN



Module

4 Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)-
PIN
Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN

4 Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN

4 Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
Wavelength-ePDM-DQPSK(SDFEC2,
RZ)-PIN
Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,
NRZ)-PIN
NRZ)-PIN
NRZ)-PIN
NOTE
point.

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN

power

power

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
Table 11-214 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, HFEC,
NRZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, NRZ)

power


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
NRZ)-PIN

power

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
NRZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN

NRZ)

power

power


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
RZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-DQPSK(SDFEC2,
RZ)-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-DQPSK(SDFEC2,

RZ)

power

power

width


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-DQPSK(SDFEC2,
RZ)-PIN

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
NRZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,
NRZ)-PIN

NRZ)

power

power

width

to-back)


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,
NRZ)-PIN
Receiver type - PIN
NRZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,
NRZ)-PIN

NRZ)

power

power

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,
NRZ)-PIN
NRZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,
NRZ)-PIN

NRZ)

power

power

width

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN54NS4: 2.5 kg (5.5 lb.)
TN56NS4: 2.43 kg (5.36 lb.)
TN57NS4: 2.6 kg (5.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN54NS4 (line 40000 ps/nm-C Band- 168 182

application) Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
55000 ps/nm-C Band- 180 200

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
TN54NS4 40000 ps/nm-C Band- 155 167

(regeneration Tunable Wavelength-
application) ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
55000 ps/nm-C Band- 167 185

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
TN56NS4 (line 55000 ps/nm-C Band- 160 170

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
TN56NS4 55000 ps/nm-C Band- 160 170

application) ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
TN57NS4 (line 40000 ps/nm-C Band- 163.0 177.9

ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
NRZ)-PIN


150000 ps/nm-C Band- 171.7 188.9

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-DQPSK
(SDFEC2, RZ)-PIN
150000 ps/nm-C Band- 171.7 188.9

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK
(SDFEC2, NRZ)-PIN
55000 ps/nm-C Band- 171.7 188.9

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK
(SDFEC2, NRZ)-PIN
40000 ps/nm-C Band- 171.7 188.9

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
TN57NS4 40000 ps/nm-C Band- 155.0 167.0

application) ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
NRZ)-PIN
150000 ps/nm-C Band- 171.7 188.9

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-DQPSK
(SDFEC2, RZ)-PIN
150000 ps/nm-C Band- 171.7 188.9

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK
(SDFEC2, NRZ)-PIN
55000 ps/nm-C Band- 171.7 188.9

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK
(SDFEC2, NRZ)-PIN
40000 ps/nm-C Band- 171.7 188.9

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK
(SDFEC2, NRZ)-PIN

11.8.7 NS4M Board Specifications


Module
TN54NS 700ps/nm-C Band-4 Wavelengths NRZ- N/A

4M PIN
NOTE
point.
Optical Module Type 700ps/nm-C Band-4

Wavelengths NRZ-PIN
Line code format - NRZ, HFEC
Center frequency THz 192.1 to 196.05a

power

power

width

suppression ratio

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN

Optical Module Type 700ps/nm-C Band-4

Wavelengths NRZ-PIN
Receiver sensitivity (FEC dBm -14

enabled)

(FEC enabled)
The specifications of optical ports "IN1/OUT1" to "IN4/OUT4" are the same. This table lists
the specifications of only one optical port.
The wavelengths of optical ports "IN1/OUT1", "IN2/OUT2", "IN3/OUT3", and "IN4/OUT4"
are consecutive with a 100 GHz spacing. Each board (with a unique characteristic code)
supports only odd wavelengths or even wavelengths, which can be specified on the U2000.
a: The module support 192.10 THz, 192.15 THz, 192.20 THz, 192.25 THz, 192.30 THz,
192.35 THz, 192.40 THz, 192.45 THz, 192.50 THz, 192.55 THz, 192.60 THz, 192.65 THz,
193.40 THz, 193.45 THz, 193.50 THz, 193.55 THz, 193.60 THz and 193.65 THz.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN54NS4M 97.0 106.7
11.9 Universal Line Board Specifications
11.9.1 HUNQ2 Board Specifications

Specifications include optical module specifications, mechanical specifications, and power
consumption.
The following table shows the optical module types that the HUNQ2 board supports.

Board WDM-Side Fixed Optical WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Module
TN54HU N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP
NOTE
point.
Optical Module Specifications

PIN-XFP

power

power

width


PIN-XFP

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

XFP

format

source type

n distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power


XFP
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
receiver
overload
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
Consumption Consumptiona
(W) (W)
TN54H 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 118.8 130.5

UNQ2 Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP
11.9.2 HUNS3 Board Specifications

Specifications include optical module specifications, mechanical specifications, and power
consumption.
The following table shows the optical module type that the HUNS3 board supports.

Module
TN54HU 60000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable N/A

NS3 Wavelength-ePDM-BPSK-PIN
NOTE
point.

Optical Module Specifications

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN

power

power

width

suppression ratio

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Optical Typical Power Maximum Power
Module Consumption (W) Consumptiona (W)
TN54HUNS3 60000ps/nm-C Band- 172.1 182.5

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN
11.10 Packet Service Board Specifications
11.10.1 EG16 Board Specifications

Board Client-Side Fixed Optical Module Client-Side Pluggable Optical

Module
TN54EG N/A 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP

16 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-
eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-
eSFP
NOTE

NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP
module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP module can be used to access GE and FE signals.



format

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

NOTE
Std 802.3.
NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP and 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical modules
can be used to access GE and FE signals.

wavelengths)

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant


eSFP eSFP

range

overload
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN54EG16 93 101
11.10.2 EX2 Board Specifications

Board Client-Side Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Fixed Optical
Module
TN54EX N/A 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+

2 10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+

NOTE

Module Type SR-0.3 km- LR-10 km-SFP ER/EW-40
SFP+ + km-SFP+
Optical Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125

interface service
rate
Optical source - MLM SLM SLM

type

format
Target - 0.3 km (0.2 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.)

transmission
distance

wavelength
range
Maximum mean dBm -1 0.5 4

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -7.3 -8.2 -4.7

launched power
Minimum dB 3 3.5 3
extinction ratio
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z–compliant

mask

wavelength
range


Module Type SR-0.3 km- LR-10 km-SFP ER/EW-40
SFP+ + km-SFP+
Receiver dBm -11.1 (OMA) -12.6 (OMA) -14.1 (OMA)

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -1 0.5 -1

receiver
overload

reflectance
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN54EX2 84 91
11.10.3 PND2 Board Specifications


Optical Module
TN54PN N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-

D2 Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP

NOTE

PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


XFP XFP XFP

format

type

transmission
distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power

mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity


XFP XFP XFP
receiver
overload
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption Maximum Power
(W) Consumptiona (W)
TN54PND2 100 108
11.11 PID Unit Specifications
11.11.1 ENQ2 Board Specifications

The specifications include the dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN54ENQ2 40 44


11.11.2 NPO2 Board Specifications

The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.

Optical Module
TN54NP 200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN N/A

O2
TN55NP 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (40 km) N/A

O2 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (80 km)
NOTE
point.
Table 11-231 PID optical module specifications
Optical 800 ps/nm-PID- 1500 ps/nm-PID- 200 ps/nm-PID-

Module Type NRZ-PIN (40 km) NRZ-PIN (80 km) NRZ-PIN

format
Center THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05

frequency
Maximum dBm +2 +2 +2
mean launched
power (single
wavelength)

Optical 800 ps/nm-PID- 1500 ps/nm-PID- 200 ps/nm-PID-

Module Type NRZ-PIN (40 km) NRZ-PIN (80 km) NRZ-PIN
Minimum dBm -4 -6.5 -6.5

mean launched
power (single
wavelength)
Minimum dB 6 6 6.5
extinction ratio
Center GHz ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.8 0.8 0.8

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/nm 800 1500 200

tolerance

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm TN55NPO2S01 to -12 -12

sensitivity TN55NPO2S04:
(FEC enabled) -13.5
EOL TN55NPO2S06,
TN55NPO2S08:
-15
TN55NPO2S0A,
TN55NPO2S0B:
-15
Minimum dBm 3 3 0
receiver
overload

reflectance

TN54NPO2:
(8.7 in.)
TN55NPO2:
(8.7 in.)
TN54PQ2:
l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 57 mm (2.24 in.) x 24.5 mm (0.96 in.) x 68 mm
(2.69 in.)
Power Consumption
TN54NPO2 134 147
TN55NPO2 143 157.3
TN54PQ2 1.1 1.2
11.11.3 NPO2E Board Specifications

The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.

Optical Module
TN55NP 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (40 km) N/A

O2E 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (80 km)
NOTE
point.

Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side
Table 11-232 PID optical module specifications
Optical Module 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ- 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-

Type PIN (40 km) PIN (80 km)
Maximum mean dBm +2 +2

launched power
(single wavelength)

launched power
(single wavelength)
ratio
Center frequency GHz ±5 ±5

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

wavelength range

(FEC enabled) EOL

overload
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance

Table 11-233 Specifications of the red and blue band filters on the TN55NPO2E board
Item Unit Value
Working wavelength in the C nm 1528 to 1561

band
Working wavelength in the blue THz 196.0 to 193.8

band (T01/R01)
Working wavelength in the red THz 193.6 to 191.4

band (T02/R02)
Demultiplexing loss (RI->T01, dB ≤1

RI->T02)
Multiplexing loss (R01–>T0, dB ≤1

R02->T0)
Isolation between red and blue dB ≥ 13

bands
TN55NPO2E:
(8.7 in.)
TN54PQ2:
l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 57 mm (2.24 in.) x 24.5 mm (0.96 in.) x 68 mm
(2.69 in.)
Power Consumption
TN55NPO2E 143 157.3
TN54PQ2 1.1 1.2
11.12 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Demultiplexer Unit

Specifications

11.12.1 D40 Board Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 11-234 lists the optical specifications of the D40.
Table 11-234 Optical specifications of the D40
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
Insertion loss dB ≤ 6.5
Reflectance dB < -40
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤ 0.5
Temperature characteristics nm/°C < 0.002
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ≤3
-1 dB bandwidth nm ≥ 0.2
-20 dB bandwidth nm < 1.4
l Dimensions of front panel:
– TN11D40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (10.4 in.)
– TN12D40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (10.4 in.)
l Weight:
– TN11D40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.)
– TN12D40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11D40 10.0 13.0
TN12D40 10.0 13.0


11.12.2 D40V Board Specifications

Table 11-235 lists the optical specifications of the D40V board.
Table 11-235 Optical specifications of the D40V board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss dB ≤ 8a
Attenuation range dB 0-15
Loss accuracy dB ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)
≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ≤ 3a

NOTE
a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB. It includes the inherent
insertion loss of the DMUX board and VOA unit.
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
TN11D40V 20 25
11.12.3 FIU Board Specifications

Table 11-236 Optical specifications of the FIU board
Interface Item Unit Value
- Operating wavelength nm 1529-1561

range
- Operating wavelength nm TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU/

range of optical TN21FIU: 1500-1520
supervisory channel TN14FIU: 1480-1520
- Optical return loss dB > 40
IN-TM Insertion loss dB ≤ 1.5

RM-OUT
IN-TC Insertion loss dB ≤1

RC-OUT
IN-TM Isolation dB > 40
IN-TC Isolation dB > 12
- Polarization dependent dB < 0.2

loss
TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU/TN14FIU:
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
TN11FIU/TN12FIU/ 4.2 4.6

TN14FIU
TN13FIU/TN21FIU 0.2 0.3
11.12.4 ITL Board Specifications

Table 11-237 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL01/TN11ITL06
Item Unit Value
Input channel spacinga GHz 100
Output channel spacinga GHz 50
Insertion loss RE-OUT dB < 4.5

RO-OUT
IN-TE dB < 2.5

IN-TO
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB <1
Isolation IN-TE dB > 25

IN-TO
Directivity dB > 45
PMD ps < 0.5
Polarization dependent loss dB < 0.5
Input optical power range dBm ≤ 26
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.

Table 11-238 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL04
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss RE-OUT dB <3

RO-OUT
IN-TE dB <3
IN-TO

IN-TO
Directivity dB > 45
PMD ps < 0.5
Table 11-239 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss RE-OUT dB < 4.5

RO-OUT
IN-TE dB < 3.5

IN-TO

IN-TO
Directivity dB > 45

Item Unit Value
PMD ps < 0.5
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical power Maximum power
consumption (W) consumptiona (W)
TN11ITL 0.2 0.3
TN12ITL 10.0 11.5
11.12.5 M40 Board Specifications

Table 11-240 lists the optical specifications of the M40 board.
Table 11-240 Optical specifications of the M40 board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss dB ≤ 6.5

Item Unit Value
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤ 0.5
Temperature characteristics nm/°C ≤ 0.002
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ≤3
– TN11M40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
– TN12M40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– TN11M40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.)
– TN12M40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11M40 10.0 13.0
TN12M40 10.0 13.0
11.12.6 M40V Board Specifications

Table 11-241 lists the optical specifications of the M40V board.
Table 11-241 Optical specifications of the M40V board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss dB ≤ 8a

Item Unit Value
Loss accuracy dB ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)
≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ≤ 3a

NOTE
a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB. It includes the inherent
insertion loss of the MUX board and VOA unit.
– TN11M40V (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
– TN12M40V (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– TN11M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
– TN12M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11M40V 20.0 25.0
TN12M40V 16.0 26.0
11.12.7 SFIU Board Specifications


Table 11-242 Optical specifications of the SFIU board
Interface Item Uni Value

t
- Operating wavelength range (C band) nm 1528-1561
- Operating wavelength range of optical nm 1480 to 1520

supervisory channel
LINE1- Insertion loss dB ≤ 1.0

SYS1
LINE2-
SYS2
LINE1- Insertion loss dB ≤ 1.5

OSC1
LINE1-
OSC2
LINE1- Isolation dB ≥ 65
OSC1 @λc
LINE1- Isolation dB ≥ 40
OSC2 @λc
OSC1- Directivity dB ≥ 45
SYS1
SYS1-
OSC1
OSC1- Directivity dB ≥ 55
OSC2
OSC2-
OSC1
- Optical return loss dB > 40
- Polarization C band dB < 0.1

dependent loss
OSC channel dB < 0.15
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
TN11SFIU 0.2 0.3
11.13 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Unit

Specifications
11.13.1 CMR2 Board Specifications

Table 11-243 lists the optical specifications of the CMR2 board.
Table 11-243 Optical specifications of the CMR2 board
Correspondin Item Unit Value

g interfaces

range
- Adjacent channel spacing nm 20
IN-D1 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ ±6.5

IN-D2
Drop channel insertion dB ≤ 1.5
loss
Adjacent channel dB > 25

isolation
Non-adjacent channel dB > 35

isolation
A1-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ ±6.5

A2-OUT
Add channel insertion dB ≤ 1.5
loss
IN-MO Insertion loss dB ≤ 1.0

MI-OUT
Isolation dB ≥ 13


g interfaces
- Maximum reflectance dB -40
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1271 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR2 board to corresponding
third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1271 nm OTU board and line board.
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.
The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR2 are as follows.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2 0.2 0.3
11.13.2 CMR4 Board Specifications

Table 11-244 lists the optical specifications of the CMR4 board.
Table 11-244 Optical specifications of the CMR4 board

g interfaces
- Operating wavelength nm 1271-1611 (1371 nm excluded)

range


g interfaces
- Adjacent channel spacing nm 20
IN-D1 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ ±6.5

IN-D2
Drop channel insertion dB ≤2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
isolation

isolation
A1-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ ±6.5

A2-OUT
Add channel insertion dB ≤2
A3-OUT loss
A4-OUT

MI-OUT
Isolation dB ≥ 13
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1291 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR4 board to corresponding
third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1291 nm OTU board and line board.
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are four wavelength groups.
Table 11-245 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths on the CMR4 board
Group Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
1 1291 1311 1331 1351
2 1391 1411 1431 1451
3 1471 1491 1591 1611
4 1511 1531 1551 1571

Power Consumption
TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4 0.2 0.3
11.13.3 DMR1 Board Specifications

Table 11-246 Optical specifications of the DMR1 board

g interfaces
EA/ED/WA/ Operating wavelength nm 1260-1360

WD range
EIN-ED Drop channel insertion dB ≤1

WIN-WD loss
Isolation dB ≥40
EA-EOUT Add channel insertion dB ≤1

WA-WOUT loss
Isolation dB ≥40
EIN-EMO Insertion loss dB ≤ 0.8

WIN-WMO
Isolation dB ≥ 25
EMI-EOUT Insertion loss dB ≤ 0.8

WMI-WOUT
Isolation dB ≥ 15

The DMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west
directions from the multiplexed signals.

Mechanical specifications of the TN11DMR1 board:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11DMR1/TN21DMR1 0.2 0.3
11.13.4 MR2 Board Specifications

Table 11-247 lists the optical specifications of the MR2 board.
Table 11-247 Optical specifications of the MR2 board

g interfaces

range
- Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
IN-D1 -1dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

IN-D2
loss

isolation

isolation
A1-OUT -1dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

A2-OUT
loss


g interfaces

MI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13
- Polarization dependence dB < 0.2

loss

The MR2 adds/drops and multiplexes random two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping wavelengths.
The mechanical specifications of TN11MR2 are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11MR2/TN21MR2 0.2 0.3



range

IN-D2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
isolation

isolation

A2-OUT
A3-OUT loss
A4-OUT

MI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

The MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/from the
multiplexed signals. There are ten groups of wavelengths.
Table 11-249 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths of the MR4 board
Gr Ch A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4

ou ar
p act Wav Wavel Freq W Wave Freq Wa Wave Frequ Wa Wavel Freque
eri elen ength uenc av lengt uenc vel lengt ency vel ength ncy
sti gth (nm) y ele h y eng h (THz) en (nm) (THz)
c No. (THz ng (nm) (TH th (nm) gth
Co ) th z) No. No
de No .
.
1 92 80 1560.6 192.1 78 1559. 192. 76 1558. 192.3 74 1558.17 192.40

10 1 0 79 20 98 0
92
40

Gr Ch A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4

ou ar
p act Wav Wavel Freq W Wave Freq Wa Wave Frequ Wa Wavel Freque
eri elen ength uenc av lengt uenc vel lengt ency vel ength ncy
sti gth (nm) y ele h y eng h (THz) en (nm) (THz)
c No. (THz ng (nm) (TH th (nm) gth
Co ) th z) No. No
de No .
.
2 92 72 1557.3 192.5 70 1556. 192. 68 1555. 192.7 66 1554.94 192.80

50 6 0 55 60 75 0
92
80
3 92 64 1554.1 192.9 62 1553. 193. 60 1552. 193.1 58 1551.72 193.20

90 3 0 33 00 52 0
93
20
4 93 56 1550.9 193.3 54 1550. 193. 52 1549. 193.5 50 1548.51 193.60

30 2 0 12 40 32 0
93
60
5 93 48 1547.7 193.7 46 1546. 193. 44 1546. 193.9 42 1545.32 194.00

70 2 0 92 80 12 0
94
00
6 94 40 1544.5 194.1 38 1543. 194. 36 1542. 194.3 34 1542.14 194.40

10 3 0 73 20 94 0
94
40
7 94 32 1541.3 194.5 30 1540. 194. 28 1539. 194.7 26 1538.98 194.80

50 5 0 56 60 77 0
94
80
8 94 24 1538.1 194.9 22 1537. 195. 20 1536. 195.1 18 1535.82 195.20

90 9 0 40 00 61 0
95
20
9 95 16 1535.0 195.3 14 1534. 195. 12 1533. 195.5 10 1532.68 195.60

30 4 0 25 40 47 0
95
60
10 95 8 1531.9 195.7 6 1531. 195. 4 1530. 195.9 2 1529.55 196.00

70 0 0 12 80 33 0
96
00

Mechanical specifications of TN11MR4 board are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11MR4/TN21MR4 0.2 0.3


range

IN-D2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
IN-D5
isolation
IN-D6
IN-D7 Non-adjacent channel dB > 35
isolation
IN-D8

A2-OUT

A3-OUT Add channel insertion dB ≤4

A4-OUT loss
A5-OUT
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
IN-MRO Insertion loss dB ≤ 3.5

MRI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13

The MR8 adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are five groups of wavelengths.
Table 11-251 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8
Group 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Code 92109280 92909360 93709440 94509520 95309600
A1/D1 Waveleng 80 64 48 32 16
th No.
Waveleng 1560.61 1554.13 1547.72 1541.35 1535.04

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.10 192.90 193.70 194.50 195.30

y (THz)
A2/D2 Waveleng 78 62 46 30 14
th No.
Waveleng 1559.79 1553.33 1546.92 1540.56 1534.25

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.20 193.00 193.80 194.60 195.40

y (THz)
A3/D3 Waveleng 76 60 44 28 12
th No.
Waveleng 1558.98 1552.52 1546.12 1539.77 1533.47

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.30 193.10 193.90 194.70 195.50

y (THz)

Group 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Code 92109280 92909360 93709440 94509520 95309600
A4/D4 Waveleng 74 58 42 26 10
th No.
Waveleng 1558.17 1551.72 1545.32 1538.98 1532.68

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.40 193.20 194.00 194.80 195.60

y (THz)
A5/D5 Waveleng 72 56 40 24 8
th No.
Waveleng 1557.36 1550.92 1544.53 1538.19 1531.90

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.50 193.30 194.10 194.90 195.70

y (THz)
A6/D6 Waveleng 70 54 38 22 6
th No.
Waveleng 1556.55 1550.12 1543.73 1537.40 1531.12

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.60 193.40 194.20 195.00 195.80

y (THz)
A7/D7 Waveleng 68 52 36 20 4
th No.
Waveleng 1555.75 1549.32 1542.94 1536.61 1530.33

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.70 193.50 194.30 195.10 195.90

y (THz)
A8/D8 Waveleng 66 50 34 18 2
th No.
Waveleng 1554.94 1548.51 1542.14 1535.82 1529.55

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.80 193.60 194.40 195.20 196.00

y (THz)
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
TN11MR8 0.2 0.3
11.13.7 MR8V Board Specifications

Table 11-252 lists the optical specifications of the MR8V board.
Table 11-252 Optical specifications of the MR8V board

g interfaces

range
IN-D1 –1 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

IN-D2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
IN-D5
isolation
IN-D6
IN-D7 Non-adjacent channel dB > 35
isolation
IN-D8
A1-OUT –1 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

A2-OUT
Add channel insertion dB ≤6
A3-OUT loss
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT Adjustment accuracy dB 1 (attenuation ≤ 10 dB)
A7-OUT 1.5 (attenuation ≤ 15 dB)
A8-OUT 1.8 (attenuation >15 dB)
VI-VO


g interfaces
IN-MRO Insertion loss dB ≤ 3.5

MRI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13

The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are five groups of wavelengths.
Table 11-253 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8V
Group 1 2 3 4 5
A1/D1 Waveleng 80 64 48 32 16
th No.
Waveleng 1560.61 1554.13 1547.72 1541.35 1535.04

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.10 192.90 193.70 194.50 195.30

y (THz)
A2/D2 Waveleng 78 62 46 30 14
th No.
Waveleng 1559.79 1553.33 1546.92 1540.56 1534.25

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.20 193.00 193.80 194.60 195.40

y (THz)
A3/D3 Waveleng 76 60 44 28 12
th No.
Waveleng 1558.98 1552.52 1546.12 1539.77 1533.47

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.30 193.10 193.90 194.70 195.50

y (THz)
A4/D4 Waveleng 74 58 42 26 10
th No.
Waveleng 1558.17 1551.72 1545.32 1538.98 1532.68

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.40 193.20 194.00 194.80 195.60

y (THz)

Group 1 2 3 4 5
A5/D5 Waveleng 72 56 40 24 8
th No.
Waveleng 1557.36 1550.92 1544.53 1538.19 1531.90

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.50 193.30 194.10 194.90 195.70

y (THz)
A6/D6 Waveleng 70 54 38 22 6
th No.
Waveleng 1556.55 1550.12 1543.73 1537.40 1531.12

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.60 193.40 194.20 195.00 195.80

y (THz)
A7/D7 Waveleng 68 52 36 20 4
th No.
Waveleng 1555.75 1549.32 1542.94 1536.61 1530.33

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.70 193.50 194.30 195.10 195.90

y (THz)
A8/D8 Waveleng 66 50 34 18 2
th No.
Waveleng 1554.94 1548.51 1542.14 1535.82 1529.55

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.80 193.60 194.40 195.20 196.00

y (THz)
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11MR8V 7.7 8.6

11.13.8 SBM2 Board Specifications

Table 11-254 lists the optical specifications of the SBM2 board.
Table 11-254 Optical specifications of the SBM2 board
- Operating wavelength CWDM nm 1271 to 1611

range
LINE-D1 Drop channel insertion loss dB ≤3

LINE-D2
Isolation dB ≥ 30
A1-LINE Add channel insertion loss dB ≤3

A2-LINE
Isolation dB ≥ 30
Optical return loss dB > 40
Pass-through loss dB ≤ 1.5
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11SBM2 0.2 0.3
11.14 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing

Unit Specifications

11.14.1 RDU9 Board Specifications

Table 11-255 Optical specifications of the RDU9 board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss IN-Drop (DM1-DM8) dB ≤ 12.5
ROA-Drop (DM1-DM8) dB ≤ 11.5
IN-EXPO dB ≤ 12.5
IN-TOA dB ≤1
Consistency of the insertion loss of each dB ≤ 1.2

channel
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11RDU9 7.7 8.6
11.14.2 RMU9 Board Specifications

Table 11-256 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9 board.

Table 11-256 Optical specifications of the RMU9 board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss EXPI-OUT dB ≤ 8.5
AMxa-TOA dB ≤ 12.5b
ROA-OUT dB ≤ 1.5
Attenuation precision dB < 1 (0 to 10 dB)

< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
VOA attenuation under channel blocking dB > 42

functionc

NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
b: This value is obtained when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
c: Only the TN11RMU902 supports the channel blocking function.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11RMU901 7.7 8.6
TN11RMU902 8.2 9.0
11.14.3 ROAM Board Specifications


Table 11-257 lists the optical specifications of the ROAM board.
Table 11-257 Optical specifications of the ROAM board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss Mxa-OUT dB ≤ 9b
IN-DM dB ≤7
EXPI-OUT dB ≤ 14b
IN-EXPO dB ≤3
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 - 1561
Attenuation range dB 0 to 20
Attenuation precision dB < 1 (0 to 10 dB)
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Module switch time ms ≤ 50
Extinction ratio dB ≥ 30
-0.5 dB bandwidth of adding wavelength nm > 0.3
-0.5 dB bandwidth of pass-through nm > 0.2

wavelength
NOTE
a: Mx represents the M01-M40 interface.
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
TN11ROAM 66 72.6
11.14.4 TD20 Board Specifications

Table 11-258 Optical specifications of the TD20 board
Item Unit Value
Total input power range of IN port dBm -17.5 to 17
Input power range per channel of IN port dBm -17.5 to 4
Inherent insertion loss of internal VOA dB ≤1.5
Dynamic attenuation range of internal VOA dB 20
Adjustment accuracy of internal VOA dB 1
Nominal input power range of internal OA dBm -19 to -3
Input power range per channel of internal OA dBm -19 to -16
Nominal gain of internal OA dB 23
Noise figure (NF) of internal OA dB ≤6.0
Maximum total output optical power of dBm 20

internal OA
Total output power range of DMxa ports dBm -13 to 9
Single output power range of DMxa ports dBm -13 to -4
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 3

(IN-DMxa)
Maximum reflectance tolerance at input dB <-40
Maximum reflectance tolerance at output dB <-40

Item Unit Value
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤0.5
a: DMx represents the DM01-DM20 interface.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN12TD20 13.0 15.0
11.14.5 TM20 Board Specifications

Table 11-259 Optical specifications of the TM20 board
Item Unit Value
Optical channels - 80
Insertion loss-AMxa-OUT dB ≤8
Maximum channel insertion loss dB 1.5

difference
-1 dB spectral width nm >0.16
Port isolation dB ≥20
Extinction ratio dB ≥30
Reconfiguration time s ≤3

Item Unit Value
Maximum reflectance dB –40
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤1
a: AMx represents the AM01 to AM20 interface.
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 3.51 kg (7.74 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11TM20 30.0 45.0
11.14.6 WSD9 Board Specifications

Table 11-260 Optical specifications of the WSD9 board
Item Uni Value

t
Type - TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9 TN16WSD9
Optical channels - 40 80 80
Adjacent channel GHz 100 50 50

spacing
Insertion IN-DMxa dB ≤ 8b ≤ 8b ≤ 8b
loss
IN-EXPO
Maximum channel dB 1.5 1.5 1.5

insertion loss difference

Item Uni Value

t
Type - TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9 TN16WSD9
Operating wavelength nm 1529-1561 1529-1561 1529-1561

range
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.32 > 0.16 > 0.20
Port isolation dB > 25 > 25 > 25
Adjacent channel dB > 25 > 25 > 25

isolation
Non-adjacent channel dB > 30 > 30 > 30

isolation
Extinction ratio dB ≥ 35 ≥ 35 ≥ 35
Reconfiguration time s ≤3 ≤3 ≤3
Directivity dB 35 35 35
Polarization dependence dB ≤1 ≤1 ≤1
loss
Attenuation range of dB 0-15 0-15 0-15

each of dropping
wavelengths
Attenuation precision of dB ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB) ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB) ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)

each of dropping ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)
wavelengths
NOTE
a: DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface.
l TN12WSD9/TN16WSD9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm
(8.7 in.)
l TN13WSD9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
Weight:
l TN12WSD9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)
l TN13WSD9/TN16WSD9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)

Power Consumption
TN11WSD9 17.0 18.7
TN12WSD9 25.4 28.5
TN13WSD9 25.4 28.5
TN16WSD9 25.0 27.5
11.14.7 WSM9 Board Specifications

Table 11-261 Optical specifications of the WSM9 board
Item Uni Value

t
Type - TN12WSM9 TN13WSM9 TN16WSM9
Adjacent channel GH 100 50 50

spacing z
Insertio AMxa-OUT dB ≤ 8b ≤ 8b ≤ 8b
n loss
EXPI-OUT


range
-1 dB spectral width nm > 0.32 > 0.16 > 0.20
Adjacent channel dB > 25 > 25 > 25

isolation
Non-adjacent channel dB > 30 > 30 > 30

isolation

Item Uni Value

t
Type - TN12WSM9 TN13WSM9 TN16WSM9
loss

each of adding
wavelengths

each of adding ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)
wavelengths
NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
l TN12WSM9/TN16WSM9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220
mm (8.7 in.)
l TN13WSM9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
Weight:
l TN12WSM9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)
l TN13WSM9/TN16WSM9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11WSM9 17.0 18.7
TN12WSM9 25.4 28.5
TN13WSM9 25.4 28.5
TN16WSM9 25.0 27.5


11.14.8 WSMD2 Board Specifications

Table 11-262 lists the optical specifications of the WSMD2 board.
Table 11-262 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD2 board

Item Unit Value
-1 dB spectral width nm > 0.32
Insertion loss AM-OUT dB ≤ 8a

EXPI-OUT
IN-DM ≤ 4.5a
IN-EXPO
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 1.5
Port isolation dB > 25
Directivity dB 35
Attenuation range of each of adding dB 0-15

wavelength
Attenuation precision of each of adding dB ≤ 1 (0 dB to 10 dB)

wavelength ≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB)
a: This value is obtained when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11WSMD2 17.0 18.7

Table 11-263 Optical specifications of the WSMD4 board
Item Uni Value

t
TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4 TN13WSMD4
Adjacent channel GH 100 50 50

spacing z

range
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.32 > 0.16 > 0.20
Insertion AMxa- dB ≤ 8b ≤ 8b ≤ 8b
loss OUT
IN-DMxa ≤8 ≤8 ≤8


Item Uni Value

t
TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4 TN13WSMD4
loss

each of adding
wavelength

each of adding ≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB)
wavelength
Dimension - 4 4 4
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11WSMD4 17 18.7
TN12WSMD4 12 15
TN13WSMD4 25 27.5


Item Unit Value
Insertion loss AMxa/EXPI-OUT dB ≤ 8b
IN-DMxa/EXPO ≤ 12
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.16
Directivity dB 35
Attenuation range of each of adding dB 0 to 15

wavelength
Attenuation precision of each of adding dB ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)

Dimension - 9
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss AMxa/EXPI-OUT dB ≤ 8b
IN-DMxa/EXPO ≤ 12

Item Unit Value
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.2
Directivity dB 35

wavelength
Attenuation precision of each of adding dB ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)

Dimension - 9
Item Unit Value
Slice width GHz 12.5
Total slice number (m) - 322
Centre frequency of every slice THz 192.05625+(m-1)*0.0125; m=1 to

322
Slice number per slot (n) - 3 to 32
Slot width GHz n*12.5; n=3 to 32
Insertion loss AMxa/EXPI-OUT dB ≤8b
IN-DMxa/EXPO ≤12
-1dB spectral width GHz >2*(6.25n-12.5); n=3 to 32
Port isolation dB >25

Item Unit Value
Extinction ratio dB ≥35
Reconfiguration time second ≤3
Directivity dB 35

wavelength
Attenuation precision of each of adding dB ≤1 (0dB to 10dB)

wavelength
≤1.5 (>10dB)
Dimension - 9
(8.7 in.)
l Weight
TN11WSMD9: 3.1 kg (6.8 lb.)
TN12WSMD9: 3.2 kg (7.05 lb.)
TN15WSMD9: 3.2 kg (7.05 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11WSMD9 25 30
TN12WSMD9 25 27.5
TN15WSMD9 25 27.5
11.15 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications

11.15.1 BPA Board Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and
power consumption.
Table 11-267 lists the optical specifications of the BPA board.
Table 11-267 Optical specifications of the BPA board
Item Value
Nominal bit rate 2488320 kbit/s or 9953280 kbit/s
Application code V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, and U-64.2
Line code pattern NRZ
Input wavelength (nm) BA: 1530 to 1565

PA: 1550.12
Input optical power BA: -6 to +3

(dBm) PA: -28 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at
the rate of 10 Gbit/s)
PA: -38 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at
the rate less than 10 Gbit/s)
Output optical power 13 to 15 (BA)

(dBm) -16 to 14 (PA)
Sensitivity (dBm) PA: -37
Noise figure (dB) BA: < 6.5

PA: < 6
Minimum signal gain +22

(dB)
NOTE
When you perform a loopback on the PA module of the BPA board, prevent the damage caused by high
input optical power to the optical module.
Laser Safety Class

The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1M, indicating that the maximum output
optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW).
The mechanical specifications of the BPA board are as follows:

mm (8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
N4BPA 11 12
11.15.2 CRPC Board Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption.
Table 11-268 Optical specifications of the CRPC board
Item Un Value
it
CRPC01 CRPC03
Pump wavelength range nm 1400-1500 1400-1500
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561
Maximum pump power dB 28.5 29.5

m
Channel gain on G.652 fiber dB > 10 > 10
Channel gain on G.653 fiber dB N/A > 16
Channel gain on LEAF fiber dB > 12 N/A
Channel gain on TWRS fiber dB > 13 N/A
Effective noise figure on G.652 dB ≤0 N/A

fiber
Effective noise figure on G.653 dB N/A N/A

fiber
Effective noise figure on LEAF dB ≤ -1 N/A

fiber
Effective noise figure on dB ≤ -1.5 N/A

TWRS fiber

Item Un Value
it
CRPC01 CRPC03
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5
Output connector type - LSH/APC, LC/PC LSH/APC, LC/PC
l Dimensions of board (H x W x D): 345.0 mm (13.8 in.) x 76.0 mm (3.0 in.) x 218.5 mm
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– CRPC01: 4.0 kg (8.8 1b.)
– CRPC03: 4.2 kg (9.2 1b.)
Power Consumption
TN11CRPC01 110.0 121.0
TN11CRPC03 70.0 77.0
11.15.3 DAS1 Board Specifications

Table 11-269 Optical specifications of the TN11DAS1 board
Item Uni Value

t
Specifica Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561 1529-1561

tions of
OA Nominal gain dB 20 26 31
Nominal input power range dB -32 to 0 -32 to -6 -32 to -11

m
Input power range 40 dB -32 to -16 -32 to -22 -32 to -27

per channel channels m

Item Uni Value

t
80 dB -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30

channels m
Nominal single- 40 dB -16 -22 -27

wavelength input channels m
optical power
80 dB -19 -25 -30
channels m
Nominal single- 40 dB 4 4 4
wavelength input channels m
optical power
80 dB 1 1 1
channels m
Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤ 8.5 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 5.5
Gain response time on adding/ ms < 10 < 10 < 10

dropping of channels
Channel gain dB 20 to 31
Gain flatness dB ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0
Multi-channel gain slope dB/ ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0

dB
Input reflectance dB < -40 < -40 < -40
Output reflectance dB < -40 < -40 < -40
Pump leakage at input dB < -30 < -30 < -30

m
Maximum reflectance tolerance dB -27 -27 -27

at input
Maximum reflectance tolerance dB -27 -27 -27

at output
Maximum total output optical dB 20 20 20

power m
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5
Input VOA inherent insertion dB ≤ 1.5

loss
Input VOA dynamic attenuation dB 20

range
Input VOA adjustment accuracy dB 1

Item Uni Value

t
Specifica Operating wavelength range of nm 1480 to 1520

tions of optical supervisory channel
demultipl
exer and Optical return loss dB > 40
multiplex Insert loss of optical LIN-TM dB ≤ 1.5
er supervisory
channel RM-
LOUT
Insert loss of C-band dB ≤1
Specifica Operating wavelength range nm 1504.5 to 1517.5

tions of
OSC Signal rate Mbi 155.52
optical t/s
module Launched optical power dB 0.5 to 5
m
Receiver sensitivity dB ≤ -41

m
Receiver overload dB -10

m
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise
figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
NOTE
The board supports a ±2.5 dB extended gain. The extended gain is only for the temporary use because it affects the gain flatness.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11DAS1 22 28.6

11.15.4 HBA Board Specifications

Table 11-270 Optical specifications of the HBA board
Item Unit Value
Type - TN11HBA
Channel allocation nm 1529 - 1561
Nominal input power range dBm -25 to -3
Typical input power of a single dBm 80-channel system: -22

wavelength 40-channel system: -19
10-channel system: -13
Noise figure (NF) dB <8
Input reflectance dB < -45
Output reflectance dB < -45
Maximum total output power dBm 26
Gain response time on adding/dropping of ms < 10

channels
Channel gain dB 29±1
Gain flatness dB ≤ 2.5
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11HBA 47 75

11.15.5 OAU1 Board Specifications

Table 11-271 Optical specifications of the TN12OAU100 board
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561 1529-1561
Nominal gain dB 16 22 25.5
Nominal input power range dBm -20 to 2 -26 to -4 -32 to -7.5
Input power range per 40 channels dBm -32 to -14 -32 to -20 -32 to -23.5
channel
80 channels dBm -32 to -17 -32 to -23 -32 to -26.5
Nominal single- 40 channels dBm -14 -20 -23.5

wavelength input
optical power 80 channels dBm -17 -23 -26.5
Nominal single- 40 channels dBm 2 2 2

wavelength output
optical power 80 channels dBm -1 -1 -1
Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤8 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 5.5

Channel gain dB 16 to 25.5
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0
Pump leakage at input dBm < -30 < -30 < -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at dB -27 -27 -27

input

output
Maximum total output optical power dBm 18 18 18

Item Unit Value
VI-VO Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
Adjustment accuracy dB 1
NOTE
Table 11-272 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/TN13OAU101 board
Item Unit Value
Nominal gain dB 20 26 31
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to 0 -32 to -6 -32 to -11
Input power range per 40 channels dBm -32 to -16 -32 to -22 -32 to -27
channel
80 channels dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30
Nominal single- 40 channels dBm -16 -22 -27

wavelength input

wavelength output
optical power 80 channels dBm 1 1 1

(TN11OAU101,
TN12OAU101)
≤ 7.5
(TN13OAU101)

Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0

Item Unit Value

input

output
VI-VOb Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
Adjustment accuracyb dB 1
b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.

NOTE
Table 11-273 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 board
Item Unit Value
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to -3 -32 to -9 -32 to -14
Input power range per 40 channels dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30
channel
80 channels dBm -32 to -22 -32 to -28 -32
Nominal single- 40 channels dBm -19 -25 -30

wavelength input

Item Unit Value

wavelength output
Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤ 7.5 ≤5.5 ≤5.5

Gain flatness dB ≤2 ≤2 ≤2
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤2 ≤2 ≤2

input

output

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1.

NOTE
Item Unit Value

Item Unit Value
Input power range 40 dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -25 -32

per channel channels
80 dBm -32 to -23 -32 to -28 -32

channels
Nominal single- 40 dBm -20 -25 -32

wavelength input channels
optical power
80 dBm -23 -28 -32
channels
Nominal single- 40 dBm 4 4 4

wavelength output channels
optical power
80 dBm 1 1 1
channels

(TN11OAU103,
TN12OAU103)
≤ 6.5
(TN13OAU103)


input

output
Maximum total output optical dBm 20 20 20

power

Item Unit Value

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
NOTE
Item Unit Value
Input power range 40 dBm -32 to -16 -32 to -23 -32 to -27
80 dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -26 -32 to -30

channels

optical power
80 dBm -19 -26 -30
channels

optical power
80 dBm 4 4 4
channels
Noise figure (NF)a dB < 8.5 <6 <6


Item Unit Value
Output reflectance dB < -40 < -40 <-40

input

output

power

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
NOTE
Table 11-276 Optical specifications of the TN13OAU106 board
Item Unit Value
Nominal input power range dBm -24 to 4 -24 to 1 -24 to -3
80 dBm -24 to -15 -24 to -18 -24 to -22

channels

Item Unit Value

optical power
80 dBm -15 -18 -22
channels

optical power
80 dBm 1 1 1
channels
Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤7 ≤6 ≤5


input

output

power

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
NOTE

Table 11-277 Optical specifications of the TN13OAU107 board (Maximum total output optical power 23dBm)
Item Unit Value
80 dBm -25 to -15 -25 to -18 -25 to -23

channels

optical power
80 dBm -15 -18 -23
channels

optical power
80 dBm 4 4 4
channels
Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤ 7.5 ≤6 ≤ 5.5


input

output

power

Item Unit Value

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
NOTE
Item Unit Value
80 dBm -25 to -16 -25 to -19 -25 to -24

channels

optical power
80 dBm -16 -19 -24
channels

optical power
80 dBm 3 3 3
channels


Item Unit Value

input

output

power

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
NOTE
Item Unit Value
80 dBm -25 to -17 -25 to -20 -25

channels

Item Unit Value

optical power
80 dBm -17 -20 -25
channels

optical power
80 dBm 2 2 2
channels


input

output

power

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
NOTE

– TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220
mm (8.7 in.)
– TN13OAU1 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 1.8 kg (4.0 lb.)
– TN13OAU1: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11OAU101 18.0 24.0
TN11OAU102 14.0 18.0
TN11OAU103 18.0 24.0
TN11OAU105 22.0 29.0
TN12OAU100 11.0 14.0
TN12OAU101 12.0 15.0
TN12OAU102 10.0 13.0
TN12OAU103 12.0 15.0
TN12OAU105 15.0 21.0
TN13OAU101 12.0 15.0
TN13OAU103 12.0 15.0
TN13OAU105 15.0 21.0
TN13OAU106 12.0 15.0
TN13OAU107 15.0 21.0
11.15.6 OBU1 Board Specifications


Table 11-280 Optical specifications of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board
Item Unit Value
OBU101 OBU103 OBU104
Input power 40 dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -19 -32 to -17

range per channels
channel
80 -32 to -23 -32 to -22 -32 to -20
channels

wavelength channels
input optical
power 80 -23 -22 -20
channels

wavelength channels
output optical
power 80 -3 1 -3
channels
Noise figure (NF) dB ≤ 5.5 ≤ 6.0 ≤ 5.5

Channel gain dB 20±1.5 23±1.5 17±1.5

tolerance at input

tolerance at output

power

Item Unit Value
OBU101 OBU103 OBU104
Multi-channel gain slope dB/ ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0

dB
VI-VOa Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuatio
n range
Adjustment accuracya dB 1
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU1.

NOTE
The board supports a ±2.5 dB extended gain. The extended gain is only for the temporary use because it
affects the gain flatness.
Table 11-281 Optical specifications of the OBU1P1 board
Item Unit Value
Total input power range at dBm -30 to 7

the VI optical port
Pump leakage at input dBm < -30

tolerance at input

tolerance at output
Maximum total output dBm 7

optical power
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤ 2.0

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– TN11OBU1: 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)
– TN12OBU1: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11OBU101 11.0 13.0
TN11OBU103 13.0 15.0
TN11OBU104 12.0 14.0
TN12OBU101 10.0 11.0
TN12OBU103 11.0 12.0
TN12OBU104 10.0 12.0
TN12OBU1P1 10.0 11.0
11.15.7 OBU2 Board Specifications

Table 11-282 Optical specifications of the OBU2 board
Item Unit Value
OBU205
Nominal input power range dBm -24 to 0
Input power range per 40 dBm -24 to -16

channel Channels
80 -24 to -19
Channels

Item Unit Value
OBU205
Nominal single- 40 dBm -16

wavelength input Channels
optical power
80 -19
Channels
Nominal single- 40 dBm 7

wavelength output Channels
optical power
80 4
Channels
Noise figure (NF) dB ≤ 7.0
Nominal gain dB 23
Gain response time on adding/ ms < 10

Channel gain dB 23±1.5
Gain flatness dB ≤ 2.0
Pump leakage at input dBm < -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at dB -27

input
Maximum reflectance tolerance at dB -27

output
Maximum total output optical dBm 23

power
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤ 2.0
VI-VOa Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuatio
n range
Adjustment accuracya dB 1

Item Unit Value
OBU205
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU2.

NOTE
The board supports a ±2.5 dB extended gain. The extended gain is only for the temporary use because it
affects the gain flatness.
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– TN11OBU2: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.)
– TN12OBU2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11OBU205 17 24
TN12OBU205 14 19
11.15.8 RAU1 Board Specifications

Table 11-283 Optical specifications of the TN11RAU1 board
Item Unit Value
RAU1 Operating nm 1529 to 1561

board wavelength
specific range
ations
Gain range dB G.652 fibers 19 to 33
LEAF fibers 19 to 35
G.653 fibers 19 to 35

Item Unit Value
TWRS fibers 19 to 35
TW-C fibers 19 to 35
TWPLUS fibers 19 to 35
SMFLS fibers 19 to 35
G.654A fibers 19 to 33
TERA_LIGHT fibers 19 to 35
G.654B fibers 19 to 29
Equivalent dB G.652 fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

noise figurea < 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.5 (26 dB gain)
< 1.0 (30 dB gain)
LEAF fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
G.653 fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
TWRS fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
TW-C fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
TWPLUS fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)

Item Unit Value
SMFLS fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
G.654A fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
TERA_LIGHT fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
G.654B fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
Gain flatness dB G.652 fibers < 3.0

(LINE port to
OUT port) LEAF fibers < 3.0
G.653 fibers < 3.0
TWRS fibers < 3.0
TW-C fibers < 3.0
TWPLUS fibers < 3.0
SMFLS fibers < 3.0
G.656 fibers < 3.0
G.654A fibers < 3.0
TERA_LIGHT fibers < 3.0
G.654B fibers < 3.0

Item Unit Value
LINE port dBm -40 to 1

input optical
power
Max. OUT dBm 20

port optical
power
Pump nm 1400 to 1500

wavelength
for the LINE
port
Pump optical mW ≥700

power of the
LINE port
PDG dB ≤ 0.7
PMD ps ≤ 0.7
Raman Operating nm 1529 to 1561

module wavelength
specific range
ations
Input optical dBm ≤1
power
Valid gainb dB G.652 fibers 5 to 10
LEAF fibers 5 to 12
TWRS fibers 5 to 12
TW-C fibers 5 to 12
SYS port dB < -40

reflectance
LINE port dB < -40

reflectance

Item Unit Value
PDG dB ≤ 0.5
PMD ps ≤ 0.5

wavelength
Max. pump mW ≥700

optical power
EDFA Operating nm 1529 to 1561

specific wavelength
ations range
Input optical dBm -30 to 6

power
Output dBm -7 to 20
optical power
Nominal dBm 40 channels: -10

single- 80 channels: -13
wavelength
input optical
power
Nominal dBm 40 channels: 4

single- 80 channels: 1
wavelength
output optical
power
Nominal gain dB 14
Gain flatness dB < 2.0
Multi- dB/dB < 2.0

channel gain
slope
PDG dB ≤ 0.5
PMD ps ≤ 0.5
Input dB < -40

reflectance
Output dB < -40

reflectance

Item Unit Value
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies according to the gain. The previous table lists
the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
b: The gain of the Raman module can be set to the maximum value. The actual gain of the board is a variable and
depends on the fiber type and status.
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 2.5 kg (5.5 Ib.)
Power Consumption
TN11RAU1 55 70
11.15.9 RAU2 Board Specifications

Table 11-284 Optical specifications of the TN11RAU2 board
Item Unit Value
RAU2 Operating nm 1529 to 1561

board wavelength
specific range
ations
Gain range dB G.652 fibers 30 to 41
LEAF fibers 32 to 43
TWRS fibers 32 to 43
TW-C fibers 32 to 43

Item Unit Value
Equivalent dB G.652 fibers < 1.5 (30 dB gain)

noise figurea
LEAF fibers < 1.0 (32 dB gain)
TWRS fibers < 1.0 (32 dB gain)
TW-C fibers < 1.0 (32 dB gain)
TWPLUS fibers < 1.0 (32 dB gain)
SMFLS fibers < 1.0 (32 dB gain)
G.654A fibers < 1.5 (30 dB gain)
TERA_LIGHT fibers < 1.0 (32 dB gain)
G.654B fibers < 4.0 (27 dB gain)
Gain flatness dB G.652 fibers < 3.0

(LINE port to
OUT port) LEAF fibers < 3.0
G.653 fibers < 3.0
TWRS fibers < 3.0
TW-C fibers < 3.0
TWPLUS fibers < 3.0
SMFLS fibers < 3.0
G.656 fibers < 3.0
G.654A fibers < 3.0
TERA_LIGHT fibers < 3.0
G.654B fibers < 3.0
LINE port dBm -42 to -2

input optical
power

Item Unit Value
Max. OUT dBm 20

port optical
power

wavelength
for the LINE
port
Pump optical nW ≥700

power of the
LINE port
PDG dB ≤ 0.7
PMD ps ≤ 0.7
Raman Operating nm 1529 to 1561

module wavelength
specific range
ations
Input optical dBm ≤2
power
Valid gainb dB G.652 fibers 5 to 10
LEAF fibers 5 to 12
TWRS fibers 5 to 12
TW-C fibers 5 to 12
SYS port dB < -40

reflectance
LINE port dB < -40

reflectance
PDG dB ≤ 0.5
PMD ps ≤ 0.5

Item Unit Value

wavelength
Max. pump mW ≥700

optical power
EDFA Operating nm 1529 to 1561

specific wavelength
ations range
Input optical dBm -32 to 0

power
Output dBm -1 to 20
optical power
Nominal dBm 40 channels: -16

single- 80 channels: -19
wavelength
input optical
power
Nominal dBm 40 channels: 4

single- 80 channels: 1
wavelength
output optical
power
Nominal gain dB 20
Gain flatness dB < 2.0
Multi- dB/dB < 1.0 ± 0.5

channel gain
slope
VI-VO dB ≤ 1.5
Inherent
insertion loss
VI-VO dB 15
Dynamic
attenuation
range
VI-VO dB 1
Adjustment
accuracy
PDG dB ≤ 0.5
PMD ps ≤ 0.5

Item Unit Value
Input dB < -40

reflectance
Output dB < -40

reflectance
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies according to the gain. The previous table lists
the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
b: The gain of the Raman module can be set to the maximum value. The actual gain of the board is a variable and
depends on the fiber type and status.
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 2.58 kg (5.69 Ib.)
Power Consumption
TN11RAU2 55 70
11.16 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication

Unit Specifications
11.16.1 TN52XCH Board Specifications

Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
l Dimensions of the front panel: 27.9 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)
l Weight: 3.40 kg (7.49 lb.)

Power Consumption
Board Power Power Typical Power Maximum
Consumption Consumption Consumption Power
at Warm at Warm at Room Consumption
Backup Backup (High Temperature a (W)
(Room Temperature) (W)
Temperature) a (W)
(W)
TN52XCH01 65 72 243 - 3.6 x (32 - 267.3 - 3.6 x (32

n) - n)
TN52XCH02 43 47.3 101 - 1.12 x (32 111 - 1.12 x (32

- n) - n)
NOTE
"n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
11.16.2 TN16XCH Board Specifications

l Dimensions of the front panel: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Temperature) a (W)
(W)
TN16XCH 40 48 73–1.4 x (16–n) 88.8–1.4 x (16–

n)
NOTE

11.16.3 SXH Board Specifications

TNK2SXH:
l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
l Weight: 3.74 kg (8.1lb.)
TNK4SXH:
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
l Weight: 2.68 kg (5.8Ib.)
Power Consumption
Temperature) a (W)
(W)
TNK2SXH 130 143 470–3.6 x (64– 517–3.6 x (64–

+TNK2XCT n) n)
TNK4SXH 95 105 169–1.2 x (64– 186–1.32 x (64–

+TNK4XCT n) n)
TNK2SXH 113 124 318–2.5 x (64- 350–2.5 x (64-

+TNK4XCT n) n)
TNK4SXH 112 123 321–2.5 x (64- 353–2.5 x (64-

+TNK2XCT n) n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXH
and XCT must be configured.
11.16.4 SXM Board Specifications


TNK2SXM:
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
TNK4SXM:
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
l Weight: 3.00 kg (6.59 lb.)
Power Consumption
Temperature) a (W)
(W)
TNK2SXM 190 209 530–3.6 x (64– 583–3.6 x (64–

+TNK2XCT n) n)
TNK4SXM 97 107 188–1.2 x (64– 207–1.32 x (64–

+TNK4XCT n) n)
TNK2SXM 173 190 378–2.5 x (64– 416–2.5 x (64–

+TNK4XCT n) n)
TNK4SXM 114 125 324–2.5 x (64– 356–2.5 x (64–

+TNK2XCT n) n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM
and XCT must be configured.
11.16.5 USXH Board Specifications

8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)

Power Consumption
Temperature) a (W)
(W)
TNK2USXH 169 186 630–7.4 x (64– 693–8.1 x (64–

+TNK2UXCT n) n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the USXH
and UXCT must be configured.
11.16.6 UXCH Board Specifications

x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)
Power Consumption
Temperature) a (W)
(W)
TN52UXCH 87 96 340 - 7.4 x (32 - 374 - 8.1 x (32 -

n) n)
NOTE

11.16.7 TN16UXCM Board Specifications

l Dimensions of the front panel: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Temperature) a (W)
(W)
TN16UXCM 84–1.7 x (16– 92–1.8 x (16– 178–7.2 x (16– 195–7.9 x (16–

n)–2 x m n)–2.2 x m n) n)
NOTE
"n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack, and it is within 0-16
range.
l "m" represents the subrack lower-order cross-connection flag. It is either 0 or 1.
l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is 0.
l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is 1.
11.16.8 TN52UXCM Board Specifications

l Dimensions of the front panel: 27.2 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)

Power Consumption
Temperature) a (W)
(W)
TN52UXCM 119 131 372 - 7.4 x (32 - 409 - 8.1 x (32 -

n) -24 x m n) -26.4 x m
NOTE
l "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 0.
l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 1.
11.16.9 UXCT Board Specifications

8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
Power Consumption
Temperature) a (W)
(W)
TNK2USXH 169 186 630–7.4 x (64– 693–8.1 x (64–

+TNK2UXCT n) n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the USXH
and UXCT must be configured.

11.16.10 XCM Board Specifications

x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)
l Weight: 3.84 kg (8.45 lb.)
Power Consumption
Temperature) a (W)
(W)
TN52XCM01 125 138 339 - 3.6 x (32 - 368 - 3.6 x (32 -

n) -80 x m n) -80 x m
TN52XCM02 67 73.7 124 - 1.12 x (32 136.4 - 1.12 x

- n) -80 x m (32 - n) -80 x m
NOTE
l "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
11.16.11 XCT Board Specifications

TNK2XCT:
l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H))
TNK4XCT:
l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H))

Power Consumption
Temperature) a (W)
(W)
TNK2SXM 190 209 530–3.6 x (64– 583–3.6 x (64–

+TNK2XCT n) n)
TNK2SXH 130 143 470–3.6 x (64– 517–3.6 x (64–

+TNK2XCT n) n)
TNK4SXM 97 107 188–1.2 x (64– 207–1.32 x (64–

+TNK4XCT n) n)
TNK4SXH 95 105 169–1.2 x (64– 186–1.32 x (64–

+TNK4XCT n) n)
TNK2SXM 173 190 378–2.5 x (64– 416–2.5 x (64–

+TNK4XCT n) n)
TNK4SXM 114 125 324–2.5 x (64– 356–2.5 x (64–

+TNK2XCT n) n)
TNK2SXH 113 124 318–2.5 x (64- 350–2.5 x (64-

+TNK4XCT n) n)
TNK4SXH 112 123 321–2.5 x (64- 353–2.5 x (64-

+TNK2XCT n) n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the
SXM/SXH and XCT must be configured.
11.16.12 SCC Board Specifications

l TN11SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4
in. (H)

l TN16SCC: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 350.3 mm (H) or 2.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8
in. (H)
l TN22SCC/TN23SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) ox 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)
in. (H)
in. (H)
l TNK2SCC: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 110.0 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.4
in. (H)
Weight:
l TN11SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)

l TN16SCC: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.)
l TN22SCC/TN23SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
l TN51SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
l TN52SCC: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
l TNK2SCC: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11SCC 27.0 30.0
TN16SCC 32.0 35.0
TN22SCC 10.0 13.0
TN23SCC 10.0 13.0
TN51SCC 18.0 20.0
TN52SCC 23.0 25.1
TNK2SCC 26.7 29.3
11.16.13 AUX Board Specifications

l Dimensions of the front panel:

– TN11AUX/TN12AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H))
– TN16AUX: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1
in. (H))
– TN51AUX/TN52AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H))
– TN21AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
4.7 in. (H))
– TN22AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
4.7 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN11AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
– TN12AUX: 0.5 kg (1.01 lb.)
– TN16AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.)
– TN51AUX: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb.)
– TN52AUX: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb.)
– TN21AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.)
– TN22AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11AUX 12.0 17.0
TN12AUX 9.0 13.0
TN16AUX 16.5 19.2
TN21AUX 11.7 13.0
TN22AUX 15.0 17.0
TN51AUX 17.5 19.0
TN52AUX 15.0 20.0
11.17 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Specifications
11.17.1 HSC1 Board Specifications


NOTE
Table 11-285 lists the optical specifications of the TN11HSC1 board.
Table 11-286 lists the optical specifications of the TN12HSC1 board.
Table 11-285 Optical specifications of the TN11HSC1 board
Item Unit Value
Signal rate Mbit/s 4.096
Signal coding - CMI
Launched optical power dBm 5 to 10
Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤ -48
Receiver overload dBm -3
Table 11-286 Optical specifications of the TN12HSC1 board
Item Unit Value
Signal rate Mbit/s 155.52
Launched optical power dBm 13 to 14
Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤ -42
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
TN11HSC1 8.0 8.8
TN12HSC1 13 15
11.17.2 SC1 Board Specifications

Table 11-287 lists the optical specifications of the SC1 board.
Table 11-287 Optical specifications of the SC1 board
Item Unit Value
Signal ratea Mbit/s 16.896 4.096
Signal coding - CMI
Launched optical power dBm -4 to 0
Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤ -46 ≤ -48
a: The SC1 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC
channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of
the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
TN11SC1/TN12SC1 11.0 14.9
11.17.3 SC2 Board Specifications

Table 11-288 lists the optical specifications of the SC2.
Table 11-288 Optical specifications of the SC2 board
Item Unit Value
Signal ratea Mbit/s 16.896 4.096
Signal coding - CMI
Launched optical power dBm -4 to 0
a: The SC2 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC
channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of
the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11SC2/TN12SC2 12.5 14.9


11.17.4 ST2 Board Specifications

Table 11-289 lists the optical specifications of the ST2.
Table 11-289 Optical specifications of the ST2 board
Item Unit Value
150 km OSC 80 km OSC

Module Module
Signal rate Mbit/s 155.52 155.52
Target distance - 150 km (62 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
Operating wavelength range nm 1504.5 to 1517.5 1504.5 to 1517.5

1484.5 to 1497.5 1484.5 to 1497.5
Launched optical power dBm 0.5 to 5 -4 to 1
Receiver overload dBm -10 -10
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 0.95 kg (2.09 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11ST2 17.5 19.5

11.18 Optical Protection Unit Specifications
11.18.1 DCP Board Specifications

NOTE
point.
Table 11-290 Optical specifications of the DCP board
TN11DC TN11DC TN12DC

P01 P02 P01
TI1-TO11 Insertion Single- dB ≤4 - ≤4

TI1-TO12 loss at the mode
transmit
TI2-TO21 Multi- dB - ≤4.5 -
end
TI2-TO22 mode
RI11-RO1 Insertion Single- dB ≤1.5 - ≤1.5

RI12-RO1 loss at the mode
receive
RI21-RO2 Multi- dB - ≤2 -
end
RI22-RO2 mode
Range of the input Single- dBm -35 to 7 - -35 to 7

optical power mode
Multi- dBm - -35 to 0 -

mode
Operating wavelength Single- nm 1270 to - 1270 to

range mode 1350, 1350,
1528 to 1528 to
1567 1567
Multi- nm - 830 to 870 -

mode
Switching threshold of optical power dB 5 5 5

difference
Range of the alarm threshold for the dB 3 to 8 3 to 8 3 to 8

optical power difference

TN11DC TN11DC TN12DC

P01 P02 P01
NOTE
l The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports TN11DCP02 and TN12DCP01.
l The OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800 supports TN11DCP01, TN11DCP02, and TN12DCP01.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11DCP/TN12DCP 6.8 7.5
11.18.2 OLP Board Specifications

NOTE
point.
Table 11-291 Optical specifications of the OLP board
Inte Item Uni Value

rfac t
e TN11O TN11O TN12OL TN12OL TN12OL
LP01 LP02 P01a P03a P04a
TI- Inser singl dB ≤4 - ≤4 ≤4 ≤4

TO1 tion e
TI- loss mode
TO2 at the

Inte Item Uni Value

rfac t
e TN11O TN11O TN12OL TN12OL TN12OL
LP01 LP02 P01a P03a P04a
trans multi dB - ≤4.5 - - -

mit mode
end
RI1- Inser singl dB ≤1.5 - ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.5

RO tion e
RI2- loss mode
RO at the
recei multi dB - ≤2 - - -
ve mode
end
Range of the singl dB -35 to 7 - -35 to 7 -30 to 23 -32 to 23

input optical e m
power mode
multi dB - -35 to 0 - - -
mode m
Operating singl nm 1270 to - 1270 to 1270 to 1528 to

wavelength e 1350, 1350, 1350, 1567
range mode 1528 to 1528 to 1528 to
1567 1567 1567
multi nm - 830 to - - -
mode 870
Switching threshold dB 5 5 5 5 5
of optical power
difference
Range of the alarm dB 3 to 8 3 to 8 3 to 8 3 to 8 3 to 8

threshold for the
optical power
difference
NOTE
l OptiX OSN 8800 supports TN11OLP02, TN12OLP01, TN12OLP03 and TN12OLP04.
l OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800 supports TN11OLP01, TN11OLP02, TN12OLP01, TN12OLP03
and TN12OLP04.
l a: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.
(8.7 in.)
Weight

l TN11OLP: 0.9 kg (1.98 lb.)

l TN12OLP: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11OLP 6.0 6.6
TN12OLP 4.0 4.5
11.18.3 SCS Board Specifications

Table 11-292 lists the optical specifications of the SCS board.
Table 11-292 Optical specifications of the SCS board
TI1-TO11 Splitting Single-mode dB ≤4

TI1-TO12 insertion loss
Multi-mode dB ≤4.5
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
RI11-RO1 Coupling Single-mode dB ≤4

RI12-RO1 insertion loss
Multi-mode dB ≤4.5
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Operating wavelength range Single-mode nm 1270 to 1350, 1528 to

1567
Multi-mode nm 830 to 870
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
TN11SCS 0.2 0.3
11.19 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications
11.19.1 MCA4 Board Specifications

Table 11-293 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4 board.
Table 11-293 Optical specifications of the MCA4 board
Item Unit Value
Detect accuracy for central wavelength nm ±0.1
Channel spacing GHz 50/100
Detect range for single channel optical power dBm -30 to -10
Detect accuracy for optical power dB ±1.5
OSNR detection accuracy A (The OSNR of dB ±1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)

10 Gbit/s signals can be detected.) ±2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
OSNR detection accuracy Ba (The OSNR of dB ±1.5 (OSNR detection range:

10, 40, and 100 Gbit/s signals can be 13-23)
detected.)
Numbers of optical interface pcs 4
a: The OSNR detection function is available only when the Port OSNR detection license
(OD V1) or Optical Doctor management system license is used and the OD functions are
configured.

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
MCA4 8.0 8.5
11.19.2 MCA8 Board Specifications

Table 11-294 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8 board.
Table 11-294 Optical specifications of the MCA8 board
Item Unit Value
Detect accuracy for central wavelength nm ±0.1
Detect accuracy for optical power dB ±1.5
OSNR detection accuracy A (The OSNR of dB ±1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)

10 Gbit/s signals can be detected.) ±2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
OSNR detection accuracy Ba (The OSNR of dB ±1.5 (OSNR detection range:

10, 40, and 100 Gbit/s signals can be 13-23)
detected.)
a: The OSNR detection function is available only when the Port OSNR detection license
(OD V1) or Optical Doctor management system license is used and the OD functions are
configured.

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
MCA8 12.0 13.0
11.19.3 OPM8 Board Specifications

Table 11-295 lists the optical specifications of the OPM8 board.
Table 11-295 Optical specifications of the OPM8 board
Item Unit Value
Detected accuracy for optical power dB ±1.5
Detect accuracy for OSNRa dB ±1.5 (OSNR detection range:

13-23)
NOTE
This item is valid only for TN12OPM8.
a: The OSNR detection function is available when the the OD functions are configured (OD
V1). The OSNR detection function is available when the Optical Doctor management
system license is used and the OD functions are configured (OD V2).

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11OPM8/TN12OPM8 12 15
11.19.4 WMU Board Specifications

Table 11-296 Optical specifications of the WMU board
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 50/100
Per-channel input optical power range dBm -36 to -16
Detect accuracy for central wavelength GHz <2.5
Detect accuracy for single channel optical dB <2

power
Detect range for Central wavelength offset GHz -10 to 10
(8.7 in.)

Power Consumption
TN11WMU 12 15
11.20 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications
11.20.1 VA1 Board Specifications

TN11VA1 Optical Specifications

Table 11-297 lists the optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board.
Table 11-297 Optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board
Item Unit Value
IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss dB ≤1.5
Dynamic attenuation dB 20
range

Item Unit Value
range
Adjustment accuracy dB 1 (attenuation≤10dB)

1.5 (attenuation≤15dB)
1.8 (attenuation>15dB)

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
TN11VA1/TN12VA1 6.5 7.2
11.20.2 VA4 Board Specifications


Item Unit Value
range

Item Unit Value
IN-OUT Inherent insertion dB ≤1.5

loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation range

Item Unit Value
Adjustment accuracy dB 1 (attenuation≤10 dB)

1.5 (attenuation≤15 dB)
1.8 (attenuation>15 dB)
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
VA4 8.5 9.4
11.21 Dispersion Equalizing Board Specifications
11.21.1 DCU Board Specifications

Table 11-301 Optical specifications of the DCU board (1)
Item Unit Value
DC DC DC DC DC DC D DCU0
U0 U0 U0 U0 U0 U06 CU 8
1 2 3 4 5 07
Typical dispersion km 20 40 60 80 100 120 5 10

compensation distance
Maximum insertion loss dB 3.3 4.7 6.4 8 9 9.8 2.3 2.8
Dispersion compensation - 90%-110%

slope

Item Unit Value
DC DC DC DC DC DC D DCU0
U0 U0 U0 U0 U0 U06 CU 8
1 2 3 4 5 07
Polarization mode ps 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.3 0.3
dispersion
Polarization-dependent dB 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1

loss
Maximum input power a dBm 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Operating wavelength nm 1528-1568

range
Dispersion compensating - G.652 fiber

fiber type
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the
optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.
Table 11-302 Optical specifications of the DCU board (2)

Item Unit Value
DCU DCU DCU DCU DCU1 DCU1

11 12 13 14 5 6
Typical dispersion km 20 40 60 80 100 120

compensation distance
Maximum insertion loss dB 4 5 5.9 6.9 7.8 8.8
Dispersion compensation - 90%-110%

slope
Polarization mode ps 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

dispersion
Polarization-dependent dB 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

loss
Maximum input power a dBm 20 20 20 20 20 20
Operating wavelength nm 1528-1568

range
Dispersion compensating - G.655 fiber

fiber type
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the
optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.

(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
Power Consumption
TN11DCU 0.2 0.3
11.21.2 TDC Board Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical specifications and
power consumption.
Table 11-303 lists the optical specifications of the TDC board.
Table 11-303 Optical specifications of the TDC board
Dispersion tuning range ps/nm ±400
Dispersion tuning speed sec <15
Input power range dBm -13 to 0
Dispersion accuracy ps/nm ±10
Output optical power dBm The output optical power should

be close to the input power, with
an error range of ±1.5 dB.
The mechanical specifications of the board are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.14 kg (2.51 lb.)

Power Consumption
TN11TDC 13 15
11.22 Clock Unit Specifications
11.22.1 STG Board Specifications

l Dimensions of the front panel:
– TNK2STG(H x W x D): 107.5 mm (4.2 in.) x 50.3mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
– TN52STG(H x W x D): 107.5 mm (4.2 in.) x 28.8 mm (1.1 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
– TN11STG/TN12STG(H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– TN52STG/TNK2STG: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
– TN11STG/TN12STG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
TNK2STG 14.0 16.0
TN52STG 13.0 14.1
TN11STG 8.7 9.57
TN12STG 8.7 9.57
11.23 TDM Board Specifications

11.23.1 EAS2 Board Specifications

The technical specifications of the EAS2 include the parameters specified for optical interfaces,
dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces

Table 11-304 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2.
Table 11-304 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2
Parameter Value
Transmission rate 10.3125 Gbit/s or 9.953 Gbit/s
Processing capability 2x10GE signals
Type of optical interface 10GBASE-LR/LW
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Operating wavelength 1290 to 1330

range (nm)
Transmission distance (km) 10
Maximum mean launched 0.5

power (dBm)
Minimum mean launched -8.2

power (dBm)
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -12.6
Minimum extinction ratio 3.5

(dB)
Connector type LC
Laser Safety Class

The safety class of the laser on the board is Class 1. The maximum launched optical power of
the optical interfaces is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
Ethernet Performance Specifications

Figure 11-3 shows the connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in
the case of overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EAS2.

Figure 11-3 Connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in the case
of overloading and latency specifications
Tested Tested
equipment 1 equipment 2
Port 1 Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Table 11-305 lists the throughput specifications of the EAS2. Table 11-306 lists the packet loss
ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2. Table 11-307 lists the latency specifications of the
EAS2.
NOTE
l The specifications vary according to the configuration and networking of the test environment and
the VC services bound on the VCG side. The specifications that are obtained in the actual environment
are used.
l The specifications in the following tables are obtained in the following scenario: EPL services are
configured and 64 VC-4s are bound on the 10xGE port.
l The data network performance is measured by using the SmartBits. The specification values in the
following tables are obtained by using the SmartFlow software of the SmartBits analyzer.
l The specific test results depend on the settings on the SmartFlow. The values listed in the following
tables are the values displayed on the SmartBits analyzer.
l In the following tables, the value such as (01,01,01) indicates the equipment No., slot No., and port
No. "(01,01,01) to (01,01,02)" and "(01,01,02) to (01,01,01)", however, indicate the forward and
reverse tests values, respectively.
Table 11-305 Throughput specifications of the EAS2
Frame Size Passed Rate Tx Frames (pks/ Rx Frames (pks/ Total (%)
(byte) (%) sec) sec)
64 100.00000 14880952 14880952 100.00000
128 98.00000 8278145 8278145 100.00000
256 98.00000 4432624 4432624 100.00000
512 98.00000 2302025 2286453 99.32000
1024 97.00000 1161710 1156436 99.55000
1280 97.00000 932835 927296 99.41000
1518 97.00000 788146 783050 99.35000

Table 11-306 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2
Frame Size Rate Tested Tx Frames (pks/ Rx Frames (pks/ Total (%)
(byte) (%) sec) sec)
64 100.00000 14880952 14880952 0.00
128 100.00000 8445945 8445945 0.00
256 99.00000 4480286 4470526 0.21
512 98.00000 2302025 2286453 0.67
1024 97.00000 1161710 1156469 0.45
1280 97.00000 932835 927323 0.59
1518 97.00000 788146 783073 0.64
Table 11-307 Latency specifications of the EAS2
Frame Rate Tx Rx Frames Min Ave Max

Size Tested Frames (pks/sec) Latency Latency Latency
(byte) (%) (pks/sec) (us) (us) (us)
64 96.00000 14204544 14204544 24.4 25.681 27.9
128 96.00000 8116883 8116883 24.6 25.944 28.1
256 96.00000 4340277 4340277 25 26.322 28.5
512 96.00000 2256317 2256317 25.9 27.176 29.3
1024 96.00000 1148897 1148897 27.7 28.949 31.2
1280 96.00000 923190 923190 28.6 29.802 32
1518 96.00000 780274 780274 29.4 30.562 32.8
The mechanical specifications of the EAS2 board are as follows:
l Dimensions : 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 254.1 mm (H)

l Weight : 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption: 83 W
Maximum power consumption: 93 W

NOTE
The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest
11.23.2 EGSH Board Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, electrical specifications, laser safety class,
mechanical specifications, and power consumption.
Table 11-308 lists the optical specifications of the EGSH board.
Table 11-308 Optical specifications of the EGSH board
Item Value
Type of optical 1000BASE-LX (10 km) 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)

interface
Type of fiber Single-mode LC Multi-mode LC
Operating 1270 to 1355 770 to 860

wavelength range
(nm)
Launched optical –9 to –3 –9.5 to –3.5

power range (dBm)
Receiver sensitivity –20 –18

(dBm)
Minimum overload –3 0
(dBm)
Minimum extinction 9 9
ratio (dB)
Electrical Specifications
Table 11-309 lists the electrical specifications of the EGSH board.
Table 11-309 Electrical specifications of the EGSH board
Type of Interface Code Pattern
1000BASE-T, RJ45 4D-PAM5
NOTE
Only port 6 and port 8 of the EGSH board can work as the GE electrical interface.

Laser Safety Class

The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1, indicating that the maximum output
optical power of each optical interface is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
The mechanical specifications of the EGSH board are as follows:
l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H)

Power Consumption
Maximum power consumption: 85 W
NOTE
11.23.3 SF64 Board Specifications

power consumption.
Table 11-310 lists the optical specifications of the SF64 board.
Table 11-310 Optical specifications of the SF64 board
Item Value
Nominal bit 10.709 Gbit/s

rate
Application Ue-64.2c Ue-64.2d Ue-64.2e

codea
OBU101 (-28 OBU101 (-31 OBU101 (-34 OBU101 (-37
dBm to -31 dBm to -34 dBm) dBm to -37 dBm) dBm to -40 dBm)
dBm)+ + CRPC + + CRPC + + CRPC +
OAU103b + OAU103 + OAU103 + OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) + DCU03 (60) + DCU03 (60) + DCU03 (60) +
MR2 DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) + MR2 DCU08 (10) +
MR2 MR2
Operating 1550.12
wavelength
range (nm)

Item Value
Launched –1 to +2
optical
power range
(dBm)c
Receiver -19
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 10.5
extinction
ratio (dB)
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example,
"OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the OBU101
is -28 dBm to -31 dBm.
b: "OBU101 + OAU103" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured
when the OBU101 and OAU103 are used.
c: The parameters are only for the optical modules. The parameters of the amplifier are not
provided.
Table 11-311 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board.
Table 11-311 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board
Item Value
Type of optical 1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable

module
Line code format NRZ - 80 channels tunable
Maximum mean 3
launched power
(dBm)
Minimum mean -1
launched power
(dBm)
Minimum extinction 9
ratio (dB)

Item Value
Central wavelength 192.10 to 196.05

(THz)
Central wavelength ±5
deviation (GHz)
Maximum -20 dB 0.3

spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode 35

suppression ratio
(dB)
Dispersion tolerance 1600

(ps/nm)
Receiver type APD
Operating 1260 to 1600

wavelength range
(nm)
Receiver sensitivity -24

(FEC on) EOL
(dBm)
Minimum overload -7
(dBm)
Maximum -27
reflectance (dB)
Table 11-312 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64 board.
Table 11-312 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692
Item Value
Nominal bit rate 10.709 Gbit/s
Dispersion limit (km) 40
Mean launched optical power (dBm) -1 to 2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -19
Minimum overload (dBm) 0
Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/nm) 800

Item Value
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 10
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SF64 board are as follows:

Power Consumption
Maximum power consumption: 27.3 W
NOTE
11.23.4 SF64A Board Specifications

power consumption.
Table 11-313 lists the optical specifications of the SF64A board.
Table 11-313 Optical specifications of the SF64A board
Item Value
Nominal bit 10.709 Gbit/s

rate

codea

Item Value
OBU101 (-29 OBU103 (-28 OBU101 (-34.6 OBU101 (-37.9

dBm to -26 dBm to -25 dBm) dBm to -32 dBm) dBm to -34.9
dBm) + + OAU103 + + CRPC + dBm) + CRPC +
OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + OAU103 + OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) +
DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) +
MR2 MR2 MR2 DCU08 (10) +
MR2
Operating 1550.12
wavelength
range (nm)
Launched –1 to +2
optical
power range
(dBm)c
Receiver -19
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 10.5
extinction
ratio (dB)
provided.
Table 11-314 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64A board.
Item Value

Item Value
Mean launched optical power (dBm) –3 to 2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) –19
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 13.5
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SF64A board are as follows:

Power Consumption
NOTE
11.23.5 SFD64 Board Specifications

power consumption.
Table 11-315 lists the optical specifications of the SFD64 board.
Table 11-315 Optical specifications of the SFD64 board
Item Value
Nominal bit 10.709Gbit/s

rate

codea

Item Value
OBU101 (-28 OBU101 (-31 OBU101 (-34 OBU101 (-37

dBm to -31 dBm to -34 dBm) dBm to -37 dBm) dBm to -40 dBm)
dBm)+ + CRPC + + CRPC + + CRPC +
OAU103b + OAU103 + OAU103 + OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) + DCU03 (60) + DCU03 (60) + DCU03 (60) +
MR2 DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) + MR2 DCU08 (10) +
MR2 MR2
Operating 1550.12
wavelength
range (nm)
Launched –1 to +2
optical
power range
(dBm)c
Receiver -19
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 10.5
extinction
ratio (dB)
provided.
Table 11-316 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board.
Table 11-316 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board
Item Value
Type of optical 1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable

module

Item Value
Line code format NRZ - 80 channels tunable
Maximum mean 3
launched power
(dBm)
Minimum mean -1
launched power
(dBm)
Minimum extinction 9
ratio (dB)
Central wavelength 192.10 to 196.05

(THz)
Central wavelength ±5
deviation (GHz)
Maximum -20 dB 0.3

spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode 35

suppression ratio
(dB)
Dispersion tolerance 1600

(ps/nm)
Receiver type APD
Operating 1260 to 1600

wavelength range
(nm)
Receiver sensitivity -24

(FEC on) EOL
(dBm)
Minimum overload -7
(dBm)
Maximum -27
reflectance (dB)
Table 11-317 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SFD64 board.

Item Value
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 10
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SFD64 board are as follows:

Power Consumption
Typical power consumption: 36.4 W
NOTE
11.23.6 SL64 Board Specifications

power consumption.
Table 11-318 lists the optical specifications of the SL64 board.

Table 11-318 Optical specifications of the SL64 board
Item Value
Nominal bit 9953280 kbit/s

rate
Application I-64.1 S-64.2b P1L1-2D2 Le-64.2 V-64.2b

code (OBU101 +
OBU101 +
DCU +
MR2)a
Transmissio 0 to 2 2 to 40 40 to 80 35 to 60 80 to 120
n distance
(km)
Type of fiber Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

LC LC LC LC LC
Operating 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 1550.12
wavelength
range (nm)
Mean -6 to -1 -1 to +2 0 to +4 +2 to +4 -1 to 2
launched (without the
optical OBU, DCU,
power (dBm) or MR2)
16 (with the
OBU, DCU,
or MR2)
Receiver -11 -14 -24 -21 -17 (without

sensitivity the OBU,
(dBm) DCU, or
MR2)
-26 (with the
OBU, DCU,
or MR2)
Minimum -1 -1 -7 -8 -1
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 6 8.2 9 8.2 10.5

extinction
ratio (dB)
a: "OBU101 + OBU101 + DCU + MR2" indicates that the specifications of the V-64.2b optical
interface are measured when the OBU, DCU, and MR2 are used.
Table 11-319 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SL64 board.

Item Value
Nominal bit rate 9953280 kbit/s
Minimum overload (dBm) -1
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SL64 board are as follows:

Power Consumption
NOTE
11.23.7 SLD64 Board Specifications

power consumption.
Table 11-320 lists the optical specifications of the SLD64 board.

Table 11-320 Optical specifications of the SLD64 board
Item Value
Nominal bit 9953280 kbit/s

rate
Application I-64.1 S-64.2b

code
Transmission 0 to 2 2 to 40
distance (km)
Type of fiber Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Operating 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565

wavelength
range (nm)
Mean -6 to -1 -1 to +2
launched
optical power
(dBm)
Receiver -11 -14

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -1 -1
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 6 8.2
extinction
ratio (dB)
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLD64 board are as follows:

Power Consumption

NOTE
11.23.8 SLH41 Board Specifications

power consumption.
Table 11-321 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module
is used.
Table 11-321 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is
used
Item Value
Application code S-1.1
Transmission distance (km) 0 to 15
Operating wavelength range (nm) 1261 to 1360
Launched optical power range (dBm) –15 to –8
Overload optical power (dBm) –8
Table 11-322 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module
is used.
Table 11-322 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is
used
Item Value
Application code S-4.1
Transmission distance (km) 0 to 15

Item Value
Operating wavelength range (nm) 1274 to 1356
Launched optical power range (dBm) –15 to –8
Minimum overload (dBm) –8
Table 11-323 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the CWDM colored
wavelengths optical module is used.

wavelengths)

(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

ratio

G.959.1-compliant
Receiver type - APD


(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
Table 11-324 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the DWDM colored

wavelengths)

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio


eSFP

Receiver type - APD
Electrical Specifications
Table 11-325 lists the electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical
module is used.
Table 11-325 Electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical module
is used
Item Value
Type of interface 139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s
Code pattern CMI
Bit rate of the output signal Compliant with G.703
Permitted frequency deviation on the input

interface
Permitted attenuation on the input interface
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLH41 board are as follows:


Power Consumption
NOTE
11.23.9 SLO16 Board Specifications

power consumption.
Table 11-326 lists the optical specifications of the SLO16 board.
Table 11-326 Optical specifications of the SLO16 board
Item Value
Application code I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Transmission 0 to 2 2 to 15 25 to 40 50 to 80
distance (km)
Type of fiber Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode LC Single-mode

LC LC LC
Operating 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580

wavelength range
(nm)
Launched optical –10 to –3 –5 to 0 –2 to +3 –2 to +3

power range (dBm)
Receiver sensitivity –18 –18 –27 –28

(dBm)
Minimum overload –3 0 –9 –9
(dBm)
Minimum extinction 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

ratio (dB)

Table 11-327 lists the optical specifications of the SLO16 board when the CWDM colored

wavelengths)

(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

ratio

G.959.1-compliant
Receiver type - APD
Table 11-328 lists the optical specifications of the SLO16 board when the DWDM colored


wavelengths)

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLO16 board are as follows:

Power Consumption
NOTE
11.23.10 SLQ16 Board Specifications

power consumption.
Table 11-329 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ16 board.
Table 11-329 Optical specifications of the SLQ16 board
Item Value
Application code I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Transmission 0 to 2 2 to 15 25 to 40 50 to 80
distance (km)
Type of fiber Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode LC Single-mode

LC LC LC
Operating 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580

wavelength range
(nm)
Launched optical -10 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to +3 -2 to +3

power range (dBm)
Receiver sensitivity -18 -18 -27 -28

(dBm)

Item Value
Minimum overload -3 0 -9 -9
(dBm)
Minimum extinction 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

ratio (dB)
Table 11-330 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ16 board when the CWDM colored

wavelengths)

(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

ratio

G.959.1-compliant
Receiver type - APD


(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
Table 11-331 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ16 board when the DWDM colored

wavelengths)

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio



eSFP
Receiver type - APD
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLQ16 board are as follows:

Power Consumption
NOTE
11.23.11 SLQ64 Board Specifications

power consumption.
Table 11-332 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ64 board.
Table 11-332 Optical specifications of the SLQ64 board
Item Value

Item Value
Application code I-64.1 S-64.2b
Transmission distance 0 to 10 10 to 40
(km)
Type of fiber Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Operating wavelength 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565

range (nm)
Launched optical –6 to –1 –1 to +2
power range (dBm)
Receiver sensitivity –11 –14

(dBm)
Minimum overload –1 –1
(dBm)
Minimum extinction 6 8.2

ratio (dB)
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLQ64 board are as follows:

Power Consumption
NOTE
11.24 DCM Specifications


(dBm)
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2.3 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(T) 6.2/10 2.8 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 8 0.7 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 9 0.8 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 9.8 0.8 0.1 20
FBG-DCM(80) 49.7/80 4 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(100) 62.1/100 4 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(120) 74.5/120 4 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(160) 99.4/160 8 1.6 0.4 23
FBG-DCM(200) 124.2/200 8 1.6 0.4 23
FBG-DCM(240) 149.1/240 8 1.6 0.4 23
Table 11-334 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (G.655 LEAF fibers)

(dBm)
DCM(A) 12.4/20 4 0.4 0.3 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 5 0.5 0.3 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 5.9 0.7 0.3 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 6.9 0.8 0.3 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 7.8 0.9 0.3 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 8.8 1.0 0.3 20


(dBm)
FBG-DCM(120) 74.5/120 3.7 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(160) 99.4/160 3.7 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(200) 124.2/200 3.7 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(240) 149.1/240 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(dBm)
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2 0.2 0.1 20
DCM(T) 6.2/10 3 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 5 0.5 0.1 20
Table 11-336 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (TW-RS fibers)

(dBm)
DCM(A) 12.4/20 2.3 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 2.8 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 3.8 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 4.2 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 4.7 0.5 0.1 20


(dBm)

Product Description 12 Energy Saving and Environment Protection
12 Energy Saving and Environment

Protection
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 8800 complies with the standards of 2002/95/EC(RoHS), 2002/96/EC(WEEE)
and REGULATION(EC) No 1907/2006(REACH).
12.1 Energy Saving
12.2 Environment Protection

The OptiX OSN 8800 equipment is designed according to the requirement of sustainable
development. All parts and packages of the equipment are identified in standard for recycle.

12.1 Energy Saving
12.1.1 Static Energy Conservation
The following measures for energy conservation are taken during designing of the OptiX OSN
8800:
l Power consumption is reduced by improving the process for manufacturing chips.
l Efficient secondary power modules are used.
l 10G optical modules are normalized to XFP modules.
12.1.2 Dynamic Energy Conservation
Network power saving (or energy conservation) can be configured using the U2000 for precise
management on power consumption. There are three power saving modes: Normal mode,
Power-Saving mode, and Enhanced power-saving mode. Table 12-1 lists the power saving
measures specified to power saving modes.
Table 12-1 Power saving measures specific to power saving modes
Power- Power Saving Measure

Saving
Mode Idle Cross- Idle Boards Idle Ports Standby Idle Lower
Connect Cross- Order
Bus Connect Cross-
Board Connect
Board
Normal Y N N N N
mode
Power- Y Y Y N N
saving mode
Enhanced Y Y Y Y Y
power-
saving mode
Power saving measures are as follows:

l Idle Cross-Connect Bus:
– After a cross-connect board is powered on, the cross-connect bus is disabled by default
(in power saving state).
– When the logical board is created for a physical service board, the SCC board determines
the number of required buses on each cross-connect board according to the capacity of

the service board, and instructs the cross-connect board to enable their buses
accordingly.
– When the logical board is deleted for a physical service board, the SCC board determines
the number of idle buses on each cross-connect board according to the capacity of the
service board, and instructs the cross-connect board to disable their buses accordingly.
l Idle Boards: When the logical board is not created for a physical service board or cross-
connect board, the physical board works in standby mode for saving power.
l Idle Ports: When port status is set to Unused or the optical module is offline, the optical
module and service processing chip enters the power saving state.
l Standby cross-connect board: When the active cross-connect board is functioning properly,
the standby cross-connect board works in warm backup state for the power saving purpose.
When the active cross-connect board is malfunctioning, the standby cross-connect board
enters the hot backup state and then takes over as the active cross-connect board.
l Idle Lower Order Cross-Connect Board: By default, the lower order cross-connect module
works in power-off state for the power saving purpose. When the first lower order service
is configured, the lower order cross-connect board terminates the power-off state and
restores itself to normal.
Heat dissipation design: The OptiX OSN 8800 provides two modes of fan speed adjustment:
Adjustable Speed Mode and Auto Speed Mode. In Auto Speed Mode, the speeds of the fans
in different partitions are adjusted separately and steplessly according to the board temperatures
of the partitions. The speed of the fans in the low-temperature partition is automatically adjusted
to a low level for energy conservation. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fan speed can be set to
five levels: Low Speed, Mid-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Mid-High Speed, and High
Speed. For details about the fan speed adjustment scheme, see the "Fan Area" in the Hardware
Description.
12.1.3 Control and Monitoring of Energy Conservation
The U2000 controls and monitors the status of energy conservation.

l The Nominal Power Consumption(W) of an NE, Current Power Consumption(W) of
an NE, Nominal Power Consumption(W) of a board, and Current Power Consumption
(W) of a board can be queried.
l The power consumption of each NE on the network can be queried. That is, the Nominal
Power Consumption(W), Current Power Consumption(W), Mean Power Saved(W),
and Power Saved In a Year(kWh) of each NE can be queried.
12.2 Environment Protection

The OptiX OSN 8800 equipment is designed according to the requirement of sustainable
development. All parts and packages of the equipment are identified in standard for recycle.
l In the aspect of packaging design, the OptiX OSN 8800 not only provides the necessary
packaging, but also guarantees that the volume of the package containing the equipment
and the accessories is at most three times the size of the net equipment.
l The product is also designed for convenient unpacking. All hazardous substances contained
in packaging decompose easily.

l Every single mechanical plastic part of over 25 g is labeled according to the standards of
ISO 11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4. All components and packages of the equipment
are provided with standard labels for recycling.
l Plugs and connectors are easily found, and can be operated with ordinary tools.
l The stickers on the equipment like labels can be removed easily. Some identifying
information like silkscreen is printed on the front panels or subracks.

Product Description 13 Environment Requirement
13 Environment Requirement
About This Chapter
Environment requirement includes the requirement on storage, transport, and operation, which
refer to the standards below:
l ETSI (European Telecommunication Standards Institute) EN 300 019

l IEC 60068-2
l ETSI (European Telecommunication Standards Institute) EN 300 753
l NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements:
Physical Protection
13.1 Storage Environment
13.2 Transport Environment
13.3 Operation Environment

The product must be installed indoors with an ambient temperature of around 25°C.

13.1 Storage Environment

The storage environment must comply with ETSI EN 300 019-1-1.
Climate Requirements
Table 13-1 Requirements on climate
Item Range
Atmospheric pressure70 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature -40°C (-104°F) to +70°C (+158°F)
Temperature change rate ≤ 1°C /min
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Solar radiation ≤1120 W/m2
Heat radiation ≤600 W/m2
Waterproof Requirements
l The equipment must be protected from water ingress. It should be stored indoors on a dry
floor away from fire-fighting and heating facilities and places where water leaks may occur.
l If storing the equipment outdoors, ensure that the following conditions are met:
– The packing boxes are intact.
– Appropriate measures are taken to prevent the ingress of rainwater.
– The ground where the packing boxes are stored is dry.
– The packing boxes are protected from direct sunlight.
Biological Requirements
l The environment must be free of mold and mildew.
l The environment must be free of rodents (such as mice).
Air Quality Requirements

l The environment must be free of explosive, conductive, magnetic conductive, and corrosive
dust.
l The density of mechanically active substances must meet the requirements listed in Table
13-2.
l The density of chemically active substances must meet the requirements listed in Table
13-3.

Table 13-2 Requirements on the density of mechanically active substances
Mechanically Active Substance Density
Suspended dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Deposited dust ≤ 20.0 mg/(m2 •h)
Sand ≤ 300 mg/m3
Table 13-3 Requirements on the density of chemically active substances
Chemically Active Substance Density
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
CI2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCI ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress Requirements
Table 13-4 Requirements on mechanical stress
Item Subitem Range
Random Acceleration - 0.02m2/s3 -

vibration spectral density
Frequency range 5–10 Hz 10–50 Hz 50–100 Hz
dB/oct 12 - -12
13.2 Transport Environment

The transport environment must comply with ETSI EN 300 019-1-2.

Item Range
Atmospheric pressure 55 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature -40°C (-104°F) to +70°C (+158°F)
Temperature change rate ≤ 1°C /min
Relative humidity 5% to 95%
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/m2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m2
Waterproof Requirements
During transportation, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l The packing boxes are intact.
l Appropriate measures are taken to prevent the ingress of rainwater.
l The transportation facilities are dry.

dust.
13-6.
13-7.
Mechanically Active Substance Density
Suspended dust No requirement
Deposited dust ≤ 3.0 mg/(m2•h)
Sand ≤ 100 mg/m3

Chemically Active Substance Density
SO2 ≤1.00 mg/m3
H2S ≤0.50 mg/m3
NO2 ≤1.00 mg/m3
HCl ≤0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤3.00 mg/m3
HF ≤0.03 mg/m3
O3 ≤0.10 mg/m3
Cl2 -
Item Subitem Range
Random Acceleration 1 m2/s3 –3 dB/oct

vibration spectral
density
Frequency 5–20 Hz 20–200 Hz

range
Unsteady state response 100 m/s2, 11ms, 100 in each direction

impulse spectrum I
(mass > 50 kg)
response 180 m/s2, 6ms, 100 in each direction

spectrum II
(mass ≤ 50
kg)
Collision 6
direction
NOTE
Impulse response spectrum refers to the maximum response curve of the acceleration generated by the
equipment under the specified impulse motivation. Impulse response spectrum II indicates that the duration
of half-sine impulse response spectrum is 6 ms.

Packaging Materials
Boards must be packed with the original packaging materials during transportation. If the
original packaging materials are lost, contact Huawei.
13.3 Operation Environment

The product must be installed indoors with an ambient temperature of around 25°C.
The operation environment must comply with ETSI EN 300 019-1-3.
Table 13-9 Requirements on subrack temperature and humidity
Cabinet Subrack Temperature Relative Humidity

Temperature
- Long-Term Short-Term Long-Term Short-Term

Operation Operation Operation Operation
-5°C (23 °F) to 5°C (41 °F) to -5°C (23 °F) to 5% to 85% 5% to 95%
45°C (113 °F) 45°C (113 °F) 55°C (131 °F)
NOTE
The point where temperature and humidity values are taken is 1.5 meters above floor level and 0.4 meters
in front of the cabinet when there is no protection board in either the front or back of the cabinet.
For product reliability, equipment rooms must be equipped with dedicated precise air
conditioners, and the temperature and humidity of equipment rooms must be controlled to 15–
30°C and 40%–75% respectively.
To meet the requirements above, take the following measures:

l Equip the equipment room with temperature-control devices throughout the year,
regardless of the weather conditions.
l In dry areas, use a humidifier or regularly clean the floor with a wet mop to meet the
requirements for relative humidity.
l Use a dehumidifier in areas of high moisture.
Item Range
Altitude -60 m to 4000 m
Temperature change rate ≤0.5 °C/min
Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/m2

Item Range
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m2
Wind speed ≤5 m/s

NOTE
In areas with an altitude in the range of 1800 to 4000 meters, the equipment operating temperature decreases
by 1 °C when the altitude increases by 220 meters.

dust.
13-11.
13-12.
Mechanical Active Content

Substance
Suspended dust ≤0.4 mg/m3
Deposited dust ≤15 mg/(m2·h)
Sand ≤300 mg/m3
Chemical Active Substance Density
SO2 ≤0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤0.10 mg/m3
NOx ≤0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤0.10 mg/m3

Chemical Active Substance Density
HCl ≤0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤0.05 mg/m3
Item Subitem Range
Sinusoidal vibration Displacement ≤5 mm/s -
Acceleration - ≤2 m/s2
Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Unsteady state Impulse response Half-sine wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, and three
impulse spectrum II times on each face
Static load 0 kPa

NOTE
Impulse response spectrum refers to the maximum response curve of the acceleration generated by the
equipment under the specified impulse motivation. Impulse response spectrum II indicates that the duration
of half-sine impulse response spectrum is 11 ms.
Static load refers to the pressure that the equipment can endure when the equipment is piled with packaging
and in compliance with the applicable stipulation.

Product Description A Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards
A Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid

Slots of Boards
This chapter describes the power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards used in the
OptiX OSN 8800
The power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 system
are shown in Table A-1. The values listed in the following table indicate the power consumption
of the boards when they normally work.
The power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the cross-connect boards for the OptiX OSN
8800 system are shown in Table A-2.
Table A-1 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 boards
Board Modul Typical Maxim Weight Numbe Valid Valid Valid Valid
e Type Power um (kg/lb.) r of Slots of Slots of Slots of Slots of
Consu Power Occupi 8800 8800 8800 8800
mption Consu ed Slots T16 Univer T32 T64
(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN16A - 0.2 0.3 0.5/1.1 1 IU24 - - -

TE
TN51A - 0.3 0.3 0.2/0.4 1 - - IU48 IU87

TE
TN16A - 16.5 19.2 0.6/1.32 2 IU21, - - -

UX IU22
TN51A - 17.5 19.0 0.4/0.88 1 - - IU41 IU72,

UX IU83

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN52A - 15.0 20.0 0.9/2.0 1 - - General: General:

UX IU41 IU72,
Enhance IU83
d: IU41, Enhance
IU43 d: IU72,
IU73,
IU83,
IU84
TN11C - 0.2 0.3 0.8/1.8 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

MR2 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11C - 0.2 0.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

MR4 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11C - 110.0 121.0 4.0/8.8 - Installed Installed Installed Installed

RPC01 outside outside outside outside
TN11C - 70.0 77.0 4.2/9.2 - Installed Installed Installed Installed

RPC03 outside outside outside outside

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11D4 - 10.0 13.0 2.2/4.8 3 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

0 IU6, IU14 IU6, IU6,
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU16 IU17, IU16,
IU20- IU19-
IU25, IU24,
IU29- IU27-
IU34 IU32,
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66
TN12D4 - 10.0 13.0 2.0/4.4 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

0 IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11D4 - 20 25 2.3/5.1 3 - - IU1- IU1-

0V IU6, IU6,
IU11- IU11-
IU17, IU16,
IU20- IU19-
IU25, IU24,
IU29- IU27-
IU34 IU32,
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66
TN11D - 22 28.6 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- IU3- IU1- IU1-

AS1 IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11D - 6.8 7.5 1.0/2.2 1 - IU1- IU1- IU1-

CP IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12D - 6.8 7.5 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

CP IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11D - 0.2 0.3 1.5/3.3 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

CU IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11D - 0.2 0.3 0.7/1.5 1 - - IU1- IU1-

MR1 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN16EF - 2.0 2.5 0.5/1.1 1 IU19 - - -

I
TN18EF - 12.0 13.0 1.17/2.5 1 - IU21 - -

I 8
TN51EF - 5.0 7.0 0.2/0.4 1 - - IU38 IU76

I1
TN51EF - 13.0 15.0 0.3/0.7 1 - - IU37 IU71

I2
TN54E - 93.0 101.0 2.5/5.5 2 IU1- - IU1- -

G16 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU12-
IU17 IU18,
IU20-
IU26,
IU29-
IU35

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN54E - 40.0 44.0 0.9/2.0 1 IU1, - IU1, IU1,

NQ2 IU5, IU5, IU5,
IU11, IU12, IU11,
IU15 IU16, IU15,
IU20, IU19,
IU24, IU23,
IU29, IU27,
IU33 IU31,
IU35,
IU39,
IU45,
IU49,
IU53,
IU57,
IU61,
IU65
TN54E - 84.0 91.0 1.2/2.7 1 IU1- - IU1- -

X2 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12-
IU18 IU27,
IU29-
IU36
TN12FI - 4.2 4.6 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

U IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN13FI - 0.2 0.3 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN14FI - 0.2 0.3 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11G - 0.2 0.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

FU IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11H - 47.0 75.0 3/6.6 3 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

BA IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU12- IU12- IU12-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU21- IU20-
IU26, IU25,
IU30- IU28-
IU35 IU33,
IU36-
IU41,
IU46-
IU51,
IU54-
IU59,
IU62-
IU67
TN11H - 8 8.8 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

SC1 IU7, IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17IU IU27, IU42,
1-IU18 IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12H - 13 15 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

SC1 IU7, IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17IU IU27, IU42,
1-IU18 IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN54H 800 ps/ 118.8 130.5 1.8/3.97 2 IU2- - IU1- -

UNQ2 nm-C IU7, IU7,
Band IU12- IU12-
(Odd & IU17 IU18,
Even IU20-
Wavelen IU26,
gths)- IU29-
Fixed IU35
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10 Gbit/
s
Multirat
e-10 km
10 Gbit/
s
Multirat
e-40 km

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
10 Gbit/
s
Multirat
e-80 km
TN54H 60000 172.1 182.5 3.3/7.28 2 IU1- - IU1- -

UNS3 ps/nm-C IU7, IU7,
Band- IU11- IU12-
Tunable IU17 IU18,
Wavelen IU20-
gth- IU26,
ePDM- IU29-
BPSK- IU35
PIN
TN11IT - 0.2 0.3 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

L IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12IT - 10 11.5 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

L IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12L - 22.6 24.8 1.1/2.4 1 - IU1- IU1- IU1-

DM IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11L - 26.9 29.6 1.2/2.6 1 - - IU1- IU1-

DMD IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11L - 26.9 29.6 1.1/2.4 1 - - IU1- IU1-

DMS IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12L 800 ps/ 44.5 51.2 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-
DX nm-C IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
Band IU12- IU11-
(Odd & IU27, IU42,
Even IU29- IU45-
Wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 45.5 52.2

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11LE - 81.0 83.0 1.0/2.2 2 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

M24 IU7, IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11LE - 64.0 67.0 0.7/1.5 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

X4 IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11L 800 ps/ 31.8 36 1.19/2.6 1 IU1- IU3– IU1- IU1-

OA nm-C 4 IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
Band IU11- IU12- IU11-
(Odd & IU18 IU27, IU42,
Even IU29- IU45-
Wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
800 ps/ 32.8 37

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/s 31.8 36
Multirat
e - 10km
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 40km
TN11L 800 ps/ 40.0 45.0 1.6/3.5 1 - - IU1- IU1-

OG nm-C IU8, IU8,
Band IU12- IU11-
(odd & IU27, IU42,
even IU29- IU45-
wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
1200 ps/ 43.0 48.0

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
APD
800 ps/ 43.5 48.5

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-(D)
RZ-PIN
4800 ps/ 55.0 60.5

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12L 800 ps/ 37.0 41.44 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU3- IU1- IU1-
OG nm-C IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
(Odd & IU18 IU27, IU42,
Even IU29- IU45-
Wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 38.0 42.44

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 41.61 46.6

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 43.04 48.0

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-(D)
RZ-PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
10Gbit/s 37.0 41.44

Multirat
e - 10km
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 40km
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 80km
TN11L 800 ps/ 92.7 101.7 2.3/5.1 2 - - IU1- IU1-

OM nm-C IU7, IU7,
Band IU12- IU11-
(odd & IU18, IU17,
even IU20- IU19-
wavelen IU26, IU25,
gths)- IU29- IU27-
Fixed IU35 IU33,
Wavelen IU36-
gth- IU41,
NRZ- IU45-
PIN IU51,
800 ps/ IU53-
nm-C IU59,
Band- IU61-
Fixed IU67
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
1200 ps/ 92.9 101.9

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
APD
800 ps/ 93.4 102.7

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-(D)
RZ-PIN
4800 ps/ 98.2 108.0

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12L 800 ps/ 61.8 69.2 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-
OMa nm-C IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
Band IU12- IU11-
(Odd & IU27, IU42,
Even IU29- IU45-
Wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 62.8 70.2

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 64.8 72.6

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 66.7 75.0

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-(D)
RZ-PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN13L - 32.6 35.9 1.1/2.4 1 - IU3- IU1- IU1-

QM IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12L - 31.1 34.3 1.4/3.1 1 - - IU1- IU1-

QMD IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12L - 29.0 32.3 1.3/2.9 1 - - IU1- IU1-

QMS IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12LS 40000 240 265 5/11 4 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

C ps/nm-C IU5, IU13 IU5, IU5,
Band- IU11- IU12- IU11-
Tunable IU15 IU16, IU15,
Wavelen IU20- IU19-
gth- IU24, IU23,
ePDM- IU29- IU27-
QPSK IU33 IU31,
(HFEC, IU35-
RZ)-PIN IU39,
IU45-
IU49,
IU53-
IU57,
IU61-
IU65

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
55000ps 255 285

/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
QPSK
(SDFEC
, NRZ)-
PIN
TN13LS 55000ps 160 170 3/6.61 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

C /nm-C IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
Wavelen IU20- IU19-
gth- IU26, IU25,
ePDM- IU29- IU27-
QPSK IU35 IU33,
(SDFEC IU35-
, NRZ)- IU41,
PIN IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
15LSC 40000 145.2 158.5 3.1/6.83 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

ps/nm-C IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
Wavelen IU20- IU19-
gth- IU26, IU25,
ePDM- IU29- IU27-
QPSK IU35 IU33,
(HFEC, IU35-
NRZ) IU41,
IU45-
IU51,

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
150000 174.6 192.6 IU53-

ps/nm-C IU59,
Band- IU61-
Tunable IU67
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
DQPSK
(SDFEC
2,RZ)-
PIN
150000 174.6 192.6

ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
QPSK
(SDFEC
2,NRZ)-
PIN
55000 174.6 192.6

ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
QPSK
(SDFEC
2,NRZ)-
PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
40000 174.6 192.6

ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
QPSK
(SDFEC
2,NRZ)-
PIN
TN11LS 800 ps/ 75 82 2.5/5.5 2 IU2- IU1- IU2- IU2-

Q nm-C IU8, IU15 IU8, IU8,
Wavelen IU21- IU20-
gth- IU27, IU26,
ODB- IU30- IU28-
PIN IU36 IU34,
IU36-
800 ps/ 82 89 IU42,
nm-C IU46-
Band- IU52,
Tunable IU54-
Wavelen IU60,
gth- IU62-
DQPSK IU68
-PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12LS 800 ps/ 30.5 36.6 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-
X nm-C IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
Band IU12- IU11-
(odd & IU27, IU42,
even IU29- IU45-
wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/ 30.7 36.8

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
APD

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
800 ps/ 32.5 39

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-(D)
RZ-PIN
4800 ps/ 35.5 42.6

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
TN13LS 800 ps/ 29.4 32.8 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-
Band- IU12- IU11-
Tunable IU27, IU42,
Wavelen IU29- IU45-
gth- IU36 IU68
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 29.5 33.9

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-(D)
RZ-PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
800 ps/ 27.0 30.4

nm-C
Band
(Odd &
Even
Wavelen
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 28.0 31.4

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN14LS 800 ps/ 27.0 30.0 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-
Band IU12- IU11-
(odd & IU27, IU42,
even IU29- IU45-
wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-(D)
RZ-PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
TN12LS 500 ps/ 74.0 81.0 3.75/8.2 3 - IU3- IU3- IU3-

XL nm-C 7 IU16 IU8, IU8,
Band- IU13- IU13-
Tunable IU19, IU18,
Wavelen IU22- IU21-
gth- IU27, IU26,
ODB- IU31- IU29-
PIN IU36 IU34,
IU38-
IU42,
IU47-
IU52,

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
500 ps/ 84.0 94.0 IU55-

nm-C IU60,
Band- IU63-
Tunable IU68
Wavelen
gth-
DQPSK
-PIN
TN15LS 60000ps 140 155 3.8/8.4 3 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

XL /nm-C IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
Wavelen IU21- IU20-
gth- IU26, IU25,
ePDM- IU30- IU28-
BPSK- IU35 IU33,
PIN IU36-
IU41,
IU46-
IU51,
IU54-
IU59,
IU62-
IU67
TN12LS 500 ps/ 75.0 79.0 2.5/5.5 2 - IU2- IU2- IU2-

XLR nm-C IU16 IU8, IU8,
Band- IU13- IU12-
Tunable IU19, IU18,
Wavelen IU21- IU20-
gth- IU27, IU26,
DQPSK IU30- IU28-
-PIN IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
500 ps/ 67.0 70.0 IU62-

nm-C IU68
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
PIN
TN11LS 800 ps/ 34.8 37.8 1.2/2.6 1 - IU1- IU1- IU1-

XR nm-C IU16 IU8, IU8,
Band IU12- IU11-
(odd & IU27, IU42,
even IU29- IU45-
wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
1200 ps/ 35.0 38.0

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
APD
800 ps/ 36.8 39.8

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-(D)
RZ-PIN
4800 ps/ 39.8 42.8

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
TN11LT 40000ps 248 273 5.8/12.8 4 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

X(OTU /nm-C IU6, IU14 IU6, IU6,
mode) Band- IU12- IU12- IU12-
Wavelen IU21- IU20-
gth- IU25, IU24,
ePDM- IU30- IU28-
QPSK IU34 IU32,

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11LT (HFEC, 235 247 IU36-

X RZ)-PIN IU40,
(regener IU46-
ation IU50,
mode) IU54-
IU58,
IU62-
IU66
TN11LT 55000ps 270 300 5.8/12.8 4 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

TN11LT Wavelen 250 275 IU21- IU20-
X gth- IU25, IU24,
(regener ePDM- IU30- IU28-
ation QPSK IU34 IU32,
mode) (SDFEC IU36-
, NRZ)- IU40,
PIN IU46-
IU50,
IU54-
IU58,
IU62-
IU66
TN12LT 40000ps 248 273 5.8/12.8 4 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

Wavelen IU21- IU20-
gth- IU25, IU24,
ePDM- IU30- IU28-
QPSK IU34 IU32,
(HFEC, IU36-
RZ)-PIN IU40,
IU46-
IU50,
IU54-
IU58,

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12LT 235 247 IU62-

X IU66
(regener
ation
mode)
TN12LT 55000ps 270 300 5.8/12.8 4 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

TN12LT Wavelen 250 275 IU21- IU20-
X gth- IU25, IU24,
(regener ePDM- IU30- IU28-
ation QPSK IU34 IU32,
mode) (SDFEC IU36-
, NRZ)- IU40,
PIN IU46-
IU50,
IU54-
IU58,
IU62-
IU66
TN11L - 33.9 37.3 1.1/2.4 1 - IU1- - -

WXS IU16
TN12L - 33.9 37.3 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

WXS IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11M - 10.0 13.0 2.2/4.8 3 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

40 IU6, IU14 IU6, IU6,
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU16 IU17, IU16,
IU20- IU19-
IU25, IU24,
IU29- IU27-
IU34 IU32,
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66
TN12M - 10.0 13.0 2.0/4.4 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

40 IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11M - 20.0 25.0 2.3/5.1 3 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

40V IU6, IU14 IU6, IU6,
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU16 IU17, IU16,
IU20- IU19-
IU25, IU24,
IU29- IU27-
IU34 IU32,
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66
TN12M - 16.0 26.0 2.3/5.1 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

40V IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11M - 8.0 8.5 1.9/4.2 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

CA4 IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11M - 12.0 13.0 1.9/4.2 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

CA8 IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11M - 0.2 0.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

R2 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11M - 0.2 0.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

R4 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11M - 0.2 0.3 1.0/2.2 2 - IU1- IU1- IU1-

R8 IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU11-
IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11M - 7.7 8.6 1.0/2.2 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

R8V IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN52N 800 ps/ TN52N TN52N 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- IU3- IU1- IU1-
D2 nm-C D2T02: D2T02: IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
Band- 67.8 74.6 IU11- IU12- IU11-
Tunable TN52N TN52N IU18 IU27, IU42,
Wavelen D2T04: D2T04: IU29- IU45-
gth-(D) 35 37 IU36 IU68
RZ-PIN
800 ps/ 70.5 77.5

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
TN53N 800 ps/ 27 30 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- IU3- IU1- IU1-

D2 nm-C IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
Wavelen IU29- IU45-
gth- IU36 IU68
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 25 28
nm-C
Band
(Odd &
Even
Wavelen
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 10km
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 40km
TN55N - 83.6 87 1.66/3.6 1 - IU3- IU1- IU1-

O2 6 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN54N - 134.0 147.0 1.9/4.2 2 IU3, - IU3, IU3,

PO2 IU7, IU7, IU7,
IU13, IU14, IU13,
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU22, IU21,
IU26, IU25,
IU31, IU29,
IU35 IU33,
IU37,
IU41,
IU47,
IU51,
IU55,
IU59,
IU63,
IU67

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN55N - 143.0 157.3 1.7/3.6 2 IU3, - IU3, IU3,

PO2E IU7, IU7, IU7,
IU13, IU14, IU13,
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU22, IU21,
IU26, IU25,
IU31, IU29,
IU35 IU33,
IU37,
IU41,
IU47,
IU51,
IU55,
IU59,
IU63,
IU67
TN52N 800 ps/ 88.0 97.0 2.0/4.4 1 - - IU1- IU1-

Q2 nm-C IU8, IU8,
Band IU12- IU11-
(Odd & IU27, IU42,
Even IU29- IU45-
Wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 10km
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 40km

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
TN53N 800 ps/ 45 50 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU3- IU1- IU1-

Q2 nm-C IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
(Odd & IU18 IU27, IU42,
Even IU29- IU45-
Wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 10km
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 40km
800 ps/ 49 54
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN54N 800 ps/ 53 58.3 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

Q2 nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8,
(Odd & IU18 IU27, IU42,
Even IU29- IU45-
Wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 10km
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 40km
TN52N 800 ps/ TN52N TN52N 1.3/2.86 1 - - IU1- IU1-

S2 nm-C S2T02: S2T02: IU8, IU8,
Band- 51.3 56.4 IU12- IU11-
Tunable TN52N TN52N IU27, IU42,
Wavelen S2T06: S2T06: IU29- IU45-
gth- 28 31 IU36 IU68
NRZ-
PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
800 ps/ TN52N TN52N

nm-C S2T03: S2T03:
Band- 49.1 54.0
Tunable TN52N TN52N
Wavelen S2T04: S2T04:
gth-(D) 26 28
RZ-PIN TN52N TN52N
S2T05: S2T05:
28 31
800 ps/ 28 31
nm-C
Band
(Odd &
Even
Wavelen
gth)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
TN53N 800 ps/ 20 24 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

S2 nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8,
(Odd & IU18 IU27, IU42,
Even IU29- IU45-
Wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
800 ps/ 21 25
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/s 20 24
Multirat
e - 10km
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 40km
TN52N 500 ps/ 118.0 130.0 2.4/5.2 2 - - IU2- IU2-

S3 nm-C IU8, IU8,
Band- IU13- IU12-
Tunable IU19, IU18,
Wavelen IU21- IU20-
gth- IU27, IU26,
DQPSK IU30- IU28-
-PIN IU36 IU34,
IU36-
500 ps/ 110.0 118.0 IU42,
nm-C IU46-
Band- IU52,
Tunable IU54-
Wavelen IU60,
gth- IU62-
ODB- IU68
PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
800 ps/ 118.0 130.0

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
DQPSK
-PIN
TN54N 800 ps/ 73.0 80.0 1.8/3.96 1 IU1- IU3- IU1- IU1-
S3 nm-C IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
Wavelen IU29- IU45-
gth- IU36 IU68
DQPSK
-PIN
800 ps/ 60.0 65.0

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
PIN
40G 62.0 69.0

Transpo
nder

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN55N 60000ps 135 150 2.6/5.73 2 IU2- IU4- IU2- IU2-

S3 /nm-C IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
Wavelen IU21- IU20-
gth- IU27, IU26,
ePDM- IU30- IU28-
BPSK- IU36 IU34,
PIN IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN56N 60000ps 99 103 2.5/5.5 1 IU1- IU3- IU1- IU1-

S3 /nm-C IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
Wavelen IU29- IU45-
gth- IU36 IU68
ePDM-
BPSK-
PIN
TN54N 40000 170 190 2.5/5.51 2 IU2- IU4- IU2- IU2-

S4 (line ps/nm-C IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
applicati Band- IU12- IU13- IU12-
on) Tunable IU18 IU19, IU18,
Wavelen IU21- IU20-
gth- IU27, IU26,
ePDM- IU30- IU28-
QPSK IU36 IU34,
(HFEC, IU36-
RZ)-PIN IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
55000ps 180 200 IU62-

/nm-C IU68
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
QPSK
(SDFEC
, NRZ)-
PIN
TN54N 40000 155 167 2.5/5.51 2 IU2- IU4- IU2- IU2-

S4 ps/nm-C IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
(regener Band- IU12- IU13- IU12-
ation Tunable IU18 IU19, IU18,
applicati Wavelen IU21- IU20-
on) gth- IU27, IU26,
ePDM- IU30- IU28-
QPSK IU36 IU34,
(HFEC, IU36-
RZ)-PIN IU42,
IU46-
55000ps 167 185 IU52,
/nm-C IU54-
Band- IU60,
Tunable IU62-
Wavelen IU68
gth-
ePDM-
QPSK
(SDFEC
, NRZ)-
PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN56N 55000ps 160 170 2.43/5.3 2 IU2- IU4- IU2- IU2-

S4 (line /nm-C 6 IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
Wavelen IU21- IU20-
gth- IU27, IU26,
ePDM- IU30- IU28-
QPSK IU36 IU34,
(SDFEC IU36-
, NRZ)- IU42,
PIN IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN56N 55000ps 160 170 2.43/5.3 2 IU2- IU4- IU2- IU2-

S4 /nm-C 6 IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
ePDM- IU30- IU28-
QPSK IU36 IU34,
(SDFEC IU36-
, NRZ)- IU42,
PIN IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN57N 40000 163.0 177.9 2.6/5.7 2 IU2- IU4- IU2- IU2-

S4 (line ps/nm-C IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
Wavelen IU21- IU20-
gth- IU27, IU26,
ePDM- IU30- IU28-
QPSK IU36 IU34,
(HFEC, IU36-
NRZ)- IU42,
PIN IU46-
IU52,
150000 171.7 188.9 IU54-
ps/nm-C IU60,
Band- IU62-
Tunable IU68
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
DQPSK
(SDFEC
2, RZ)-
PIN
150000 171.7 188.9

ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
QPSK
(SDFEC
2,
NRZ)-
PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
55000 171.7 188.9

ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
QPSK
(SDFEC
2,
NRZ)-
PIN
40000 171.7 188.9

ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
QPSK
(SDFEC
, NRZ)-
PIN
TN57N 40000 155.0 167.0 2.6/5.7 2 IU2- IU4- IU2- IU2-

S4 ps/nm-C IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
ePDM- IU30- IU28-
QPSK IU36 IU34,
(HFEC, IU36-
NRZ)- IU42,
PIN IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
150000 171.7 188.9

ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
DQPSK
(SDFEC
2, RZ)-
PIN
150000 171.7 188.9

ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
QPSK
(SDFEC
2,
NRZ)-
PIN
55000 171.7 188.9

ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
QPSK
(SDFEC
2,
NRZ)-
PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
40000 171.7 188.9

ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ePDM-
QPSK
(SDFEC
, NRZ)-
PIN
TN54N 700ps/ 97.0 106.7 1.7/3.7 2 IU2- - IU2- IU2-

S4M nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8,
Band-4 IU12- IU13- IU12-
Wavelen IU18 IU19, IU18,
gths IU21- IU20-
NRZ- IU27, IU26,
PIN IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11O - 18.0 24.0 1.8/4.0 2 - - IU2- IU2-

AU101 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU12-
IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN11O - 14.0 18.0 1.8/4.0 2 - - IU2- IU2-

AU102 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU12-
IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11O - 18.0 24.0 1.8/4.0 2 - - IU2- IU2-

AU103 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU12-
IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN11O - 22.0 29.0 1.8/4.0 2 - - IU2- IU2-

AU105 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU12-
IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12O - 11.0 14.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

AU100 IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU12- IU12-
IU18 IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN12O - 12.0 15.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

IU12- IU12- IU12-
IU18 IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12O - 10.0 13.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

IU12- IU12- IU12-
IU18 IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN12O - 12.0 15.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

IU12- IU12- IU12-
IU18 IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12O - 15.0 21.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

IU12- IU12- IU12-
IU18 IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN13O - 12.0 15.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

AU101 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN13O - 12.0 15.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN13O - 15.0 21.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN13O - 12.0 15.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN13O - 15.0 21.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11O - 11.0 13.0 1.3/2.9 1 - - IU1- IU1-

BU101 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11O - 13.0 15.0 1.3/2.9 1 - - IU1- IU1-

BU103 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11O - 12.0 14.0 1.3/2.9 1 - - IU1- IU1-

BU104 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12O - 10.0 11.0 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

BU101 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12O - 10.0 11.0 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

BU1P1 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12O - 11.0 12.0 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12O - 10.0 12.0 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11O - 17.0 24.0 1.9/4.2 2 - - IU2- IU2-

BU205 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU12-
IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12O - 14.0 19.0 1.6/3.5 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

BU205 IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU12- IU12-
IU18 IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN11O - 6.0 6.6 0.9/2.0 1 - IU1- IU1- IU1-

LP IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12O - 4.0 4.5 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

LP IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11O - 12.0 15.0 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

PM8 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12O - 12.0 15.0 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

PM8 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN16PI - 3.0 3.6 0.65/1.4 1 IU20, - IU39, IU69,

U 3 IU23 IU40, IU70,
IU45, IU78,
IU46 IU79,
IU80,
IU81,
IU88,
IU89
TN51PI - 1.8 1.8 0.5/1.1 1 - - IU39, IU69-

U IU40, IU70,
IU45, IU78-
IU46 IU81,
IU88-
IU89
TN18PI - 7.5 8 0.45/0.9 1 - IU17, - -

U 9 IU18
TN54P - 100 108 2.5/5.5 2 IU1- - IU1- -

ND2 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU12-
IU17 IU18,
IU20-
IU26,
IU29-
IU35

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11R - 55 70 2.5/5.51 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

IU12- IU12- IU12-
IU18 IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN11R - 55 70 2.8/6.1 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

IU12- IU12- IU12-
IU18 IU19, IU18,
IU21- IU20-
IU27, IU26,
IU30- IU28-
IU36 IU34,
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN11R - 6 6.6 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

DU9 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11R - 7.7 8.6 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

MU901 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11R - 8.2 9.0 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

MU902 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11R - 66.0 72.6 3.2/7.0 3 - - IU1- IU1-

OAM IU6, IU6,
IU11- IU11-
IU17, IU16,
IU20- IU19-
IU25, IU24,
IU29- IU27-
IU34 IU32,
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66
TN12SC - 11.0 14.9 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

1 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12SC - 13.5 14.5 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

2 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN16SC - 32 35 1.3/2.8 1 IU9, - - -

C IU10
TN51SC - 18.0 20.0 1.2/2.6 1 - - IU11, -

C IU28
TN52SC - 23.0 25.1 1.0/2.2 1 - IU1, IU2 IU11, -

C IU28
TNK2S - 26.7 29.3 0.9/2.0 1 - - - IU74,

CC IU85
TN11SC - 0.2 0.3 0.8/1.8 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

S IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11SF - 0.2 0.3 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11ST - 17.5 19.5 0.95/2.0 1 IU1- IU3- IU1- IU1-

2 9 IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12ST - 8.7 9.57 1.1/2.4 1 - IU3, IU4 - -

G

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN52ST - 13.0 14.1 0.5/1.1 1 - - IU42, -

G IU44
TNK2S - 14.0 16.0 0.5/1.1 1 - - - IU75,

TG IU86
TN52ST - 1.5 1.5 0.3/0.7 1 - - IU47 IU82

I
TN12T - 13.0 15.0 1.6/3.5 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

D20 IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11T - 13.0 15.0 1.14/2.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

DC 1 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN52T - 57.3 63.0 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

DX IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN53T - 25 27.5 1.5/3.3 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

DX IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN54TE - 105 113 2.5 2 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

M28 IU7, IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN54T - 35.0 40.0 1.5/3.3 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

HA IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11T - 30.0 45.0 3.51/7.7 3 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

M20 4 IU6, IU14 IU6, IU6,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU16 IU17, IU16,
IU20- IU19-
IU25, IU24,
IU29- IU27-
IU34 IU32,
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66
TN11T 800 ps/ 40.3 44.3 1.4/3.1 1 - - IU1- IU1-

MX nm-C IU8, IU8,
Band IU12- IU11-
(odd & IU27, IU42,
even IU29- IU45-
wavelen IU36 IU68
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
1200 ps/ 42.1 46.4

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
APD
800 ps/ 44.5 51.2

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-(D)
RZ-PIN
4800 ps/ 48.4 55.7

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12T 800 ps/ 32.4 37.1 1.2/2.7 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-
MX nm-C IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
Band- IU12- IU11-
Tunable IU27, IU42,
Wavelen IU29- IU45-
gth- IU36 IU68
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 41.0 45.5

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-(D)
RZ-PIN
800 ps/ 39.0 43.7

nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 31.4 36.1

nm-C
Band
(Odd &
Even
Wavelen
gths)-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
10Gbit/s 31.4 36.1

Multirat
e - 10km
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 40km
10Gbit/s
Multirat
e - 80km
TN54T - 23.0 25.0 0.7/1.6 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

OA IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN52T - 41.8 46.0 0.85/1.8 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

OG 7 IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN52T - 81.0 89.1 1.5/3.3 1 IU1- IU3- IU1- IU1-

OM IU8, IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN55T - 75.3 80.6 1.42/3.1 1 - - IU1- IU1-

OX 3 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN52T - 91.5 100.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

QX IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN53T - 45.0 50.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

QX IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN55T - 45.0 50.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

QX IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN54TS - 65.0 80.0 1.5/3.3 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

C IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN53TS - 75.0 83.0 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

XL IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN54TS - 58 64 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

XL IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN54TT - 63 68 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

X IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12V - 6.5 7.2 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

A1 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN12V - 8.5 9.4 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

A4 IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
TN11W - 12.0 15.0 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

MU IU18 IU16 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU11-
IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12W - 25.4 28.5 2.7/6.0 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

SD9 IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN16W - 25 27.5 2.9/6.4 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN13W - 25.4 28.5 2.9/6.4 3 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU16 IU17, IU16,
IU20- IU19-
IU25, IU24,
IU29- IU27-
IU34 IU32,
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66
TN12W - 25.4 28.5 2.7/6.0 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

SM9 IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN13W - 25.4 28.5 2.9/6.4 3 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU16 IU17, IU16,
IU20- IU19-
IU25, IU24,
IU29- IU27-
IU34 IU32,
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66
TN16W - 25 27.5 2.9/6.4 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11W - 17.0 18.7 3.2/7.0 2 - IU1- IU1- IU1-

SMD2 IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU121- IU11-
IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11W - 17.0 18.7 3.2/7.0 2 - IU1- IU1- IU1-

SMD4 IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU121- IU11-
IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN12W - 12.0 15.0 2.6/5.7 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

SMD4 IU7, IU15 IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN13W - 25.0 27.5 2.6/5.7 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN11W - 25 30 3.1/6.8 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU121- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU36-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN12W - 25 27.5 3.2/9.0 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU121- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU36-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
TN15W - 25 27.5 3.2/9.0 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1-

IU11- IU121- IU11-
IU17 IU18, IU17,
IU20- IU19-
IU26, IU25,
IU29- IU27-
IU35 IU33,
IU36-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
N4BPA - 11 12 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
and IU45-
IU29- IU68
IU36
N3EAS - 83 93 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- - IU1- -

2 IU18 IU8,
IU12-
IU27,
IU29-
IU36
N1EGS - 82 85 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

H IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
N4SF64 - 26 27.3 0.7/1.5 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
N1SF64 - 34 35.7 0.9/2.0 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

A IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
N4SFD6 - 36.4 38.2 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

4 IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
N4SL64 - 14.5 15.2 0.6/1.3 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
N4SLD - 19.3 20.3 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

64 IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
N3SLH - 46.2 48.5 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

41 IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68

(W) mption sal
* (W) Platfor
m
Subrac
k
N4SLO - 20.5 21.5 0.8/1.8 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

16 IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
N4SLQ - 12.2 12.8 0.7/1.5 1 IU1- - IU1- IU1-

16 IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU18 IU27, IU42,
IU29- IU45-
IU36 IU68
N4SLQ - 35.4 37.2 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- - IU1- -

64 IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12-
IU18 IU27,
IU29-
IU36
a: When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board increases
by another 2 W.
(D)RZ modules include DRZ and RZ optical modules. Both module types have the same optical performance and
can connect to modules of both the same type. This table lists all optical modules. Manufacture of some optical
modules may be discontinued. A Product Change Notice (PCN) is released when manufacture of an optical module
type is discontinued. For details about the availability of an optical module, contact the product manager of the
*: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the

Table A-2 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 cross-connect boards
Board Power Power Power Power Weight Numbe Valid Valid Valid
Consu Consum Consu Consu (kg/lb.) r of Slots of Slots of Slots of
mption ption at mption mption Occupi 8800 8800 8800
at High at at ed Slots T16 T32 T64
Room Temper Warm Warm
Tempe ature* Backup Backup
rature (W) (Room (High
(W) Temper Tempe
ature) rature)*
(W) (W)
TNK2S 470-3.6 517-3.6 x 130 143 3.74 1+1 - - TNK2S

XH x (64-n) (64-n) (7.9) XH :
+TNK2 +3.6 IU10,
XCT (7.9) IU44
TNK2X
CT :
IU9,
IU43
TNK2S 318-2.5 350-2.5 x 113 124 3.74 1+1 - - TNK2S

XH x (64-n) (64-n) (7.9) XH :
+TNK4 +2.9 IU10,
XCT (6.3) IU44
TNK4X
CT :
IU9,
IU43
TNK4S 321-2.5 353-2.5 x 112 123 2.68 1+1 - - TNK4S

XH x (64-n) (64-n) (5.9) XH :
+TNK2 +3.6 IU10,
XCT (7.9) IU44
TNK2X
CT :
IU9,
IU43
TNK4S 169-1.2 186-1.32 95 105 2.68 1+1 - - TNK4S

XH x (64-n) x (64-n) (5.9) XH :
+TNK4 +2.9 IU10,
XCT (6.3) IU44
TNK4X
CT :
IU9,
IU43

(W) Temper Tempe
ature) rature)*
(W) (W)
TNK2S 530-3.6 583-3.6 x 190 210 3.74 1+1 - - TNK2S

XM x (64-n) (64-n) (8.1) XM :
+TNK2 +3.6 IU10,
XCT (7.9) IU44
TNK2X
CT :
IU9,
IU43
TNK2S 378-2.5 416-2.5 x 173 190 3.74 1+1 - - TNK2S

XM x (64-n) (64-n) (8.1) XM :
+TNK4 +2.9 IU10,
XCT (6.3) IU44
TNK4X
CT :
IU9,
IU43
TNK4S 324-2.5 356-2.5 x 114 125 3.0(6.6) 1+1 - - TNK4S

XM x (64-n) (64-n) +3.6 XM :
+TNK2 (7.9) IU10,
XCT IU44
TNK2X
CT :
IU9,
IU43
TNK4S 188-1.2 207-1.32 97 107 3.0(6.6) 1+1 - - TNK4S

XM x (64-n) x (64-n) +2.9 XM :
+TNK4 (6.3) IU10,
XCT IU44
TNK4X
CT :
IU9,
IU43

(W) Temper Tempe
ature) rature)*
(W) (W)
TNK2U 630-7.4 693-8.1 x - - 3.7(8.1) 1+1 - - TNK2U

SXH x (64-n) (64-n) +3.8 SXH:
+TNK2 (8.4) IU10,
UXCT IU44
TNK2U
XCT:
IU9,
IU43
TN52U 340 - 7.4 374 - 8.1 87 96 3.9(8.6) 1 - IU9, -

XCH x (32 - n) x (32 - n) IU10
TN16U 178–7.2 195–7.9 84–1.7 x 92–1.8 x 3.0(6.6) 1 IU9, - -

XCM x (16–n) x (16–n) (16–n)– (16–n)– IU10
2xm 2.2 x m
TN52U 372 - 7.4 409 - 8.1 119 131 4.0(8.8) 1 - IU9, -

XCM x (32 - n) x (32 - n) IU10
-24 x m -26.4 x m
TN16X 73 - 1.4 88.8 - 1.4 40 48 1.8(4.0) 1 IU9, - -

CH x (16 - n) x (16 - n) IU10
TN52X 243 - 3.6 267.3 - 65 72 3.4(7.5) 1 - IU9, -

CH01 x (32 - n) 3.6 x (32 IU10
- n)
TN52X 101 - 111 - 43 47.3 3.4(7.5) 1 - IU9, -

CH02 1.12 x 1.12 x IU10
(32 - n) (32 - n)
TN52X 339 - 3.6 368 - 3.6 125 138 3.8(8.4) 1 - IU9, -

CM01 x (32 - n) x (32 - n) IU10
-80 x m -80 x m
TN52X 124 - 136.4 - 67 73.7 3.8(8.4) 1 - IU9, -

CM02 1.12 x 1.12 x IU10
(32 - n) (32 - n)
-23 x m -23 x m

(W) Temper Tempe
ature) rature)*
(W) (W)
*: The power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient
temperature.
NOTE

Product Description B Complied Standards
B Complied Standards
B.1 ANSI Standards
B.2 IEEE Standards
B.3 IETF Standards
B.4 ITU-T Recommendations
B.5 MEF Standards
B.6 International Standards
B.7 EMC Standards
B.8 Environment Related Standards
B.9 Grounding Standards
B.10 Laser Security Standards
B.11 Security Standards
B.12 Noise Standards
B.13 Fireproofing Standards

B.1 ANSI Standards

Number Title
ANSI T1.105 Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) - Basic Description

including Multiplex Structure, Rates, and Formats
ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) -

Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC)
ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) -

Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY)
ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI)

Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PMD)
ANSI X3.296 SBCON (ESCON): FICON
ANSI X3.230 Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)
ANSI X3.303 Fibre Channel 3rd Generation Physical Interface (FC-PH3)
B.2 IEEE Standards

Number Title
IEEE 802.1ad Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 4: Provider Bridges,
QinQ
IEEE 802.1ag Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks - Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault
Management
IEEE 802.1ax Link Aggregation
IEEE 802.1d Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.1p LAN Layer 2 QoS/CoS Protocol for Traffic Prioritization
IEEE 802.1q Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Trees
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) access
method and physical layer specifications

B.3 IETF Standards

Number Title
RFC0826 Ethernet address resolution protocol
RFC2212 Specification of guaranteed quality of service
Definition of the Differentiated Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and
RFC2474
IPv6 Headers
RFC2475 An architecture for differentiated services
RFC2597 Assured forwarding PHB group
RFC2697 A single rate three color marker
RFC2698 A Two Rate Three Color Marker
RFC2702 Requirements for traffic engineering over MPLS
RFC3031 MPLS architecture
RFC3032 MPLS label stack encoding
RFC3140 Per hop behavior identification codes
RFC3246 An expedited forwarding PHB (Per-hop behavior)
RFC3270 Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) support of differentiated services
Time to live (TTL) processing in multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)

RFC3443
networks
RFC3644 Policy quality of service (QoS) Information model
RFC3670 Information model for describing network device QoS datapath mechanisms
RFC3916 Requirements for pseudo-wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)
RFC3985 Pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) architecture
A Differentiated Service Two-Rate, Three-Color Marker with Efficient

RFC4115
Handling of in-Profile Traffic
Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control word for use over an

RFC4385
MPLS PSN
RFC4446 IANA allocations for pseudowire edge to edge emulation (PWE3)
RFC4448 Encapsulation methods for transport of Ethernet over MPLS networks
Considerations for Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) and

RFC4541
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Snooping Switches
RFC4664 Framework for layer 2 virtual private networks (L2VPNs)

Number Title
Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) frame check sequence

RFC4720
retention
Requirements for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge

RFC5254
(PWE3)
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Stack Entry: "EXP" Field

RFC5462
Renamed to "Traffic Class" Field
RFC5586 MPLS Generic Associated Channel
RFC5659 An Architecture for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge
RFC5860 Requirements for OAM in MPLS Transport Networks
RFC5921 A Framework for MPLS in Transport Networks
RFC5950 Network Management Framework for MPLS-based Transport Networks
RFC5951 Network Management Requirements for MPLS-based Transport Networks
RFC5960 MPLS Transport Profile Data Plane Architecture
MPLS Transport Profile User-to-Network and Network-to-Network

RFC6215
Interfaces
RFC6291 Guidelines for the Use of the "OAM" Acronym in the IETF
RFC6370 MPLS Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) Identifiers
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Framework for MPLS-Based

RFC6371
Transport Networks
RFC6372 MPLS Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) Survivability Framework
RFC6423 Using the Generic Associated Channel Label for Pseudowire in the MPLS
Allocation of a Generic Associated Channel Type for ITU-T MPLS

RFC6671 Transport Profile Operation, Maintenance, and Administration (MPLS-TP
OAM)
RFC6723 Update of the Pseudowire Control-Word Negotiation Mechanism
B.4 ITU-T Recommendations

Recommendations on Architectures
Number Title
ITU-T G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous

Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

Number Title
ITU-T G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.842 Interworking of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.871 Framework for optical transport network Recommendations
ITU-T G.872 Architecture of optical transport networks
Recommendations on Physical-Layer Features

Number Title
ITU-T G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
ITU-T G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
ITU-T G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM frequency grid
ITU-T G.696.1 Intra-Domain DWDM applications
ITU-T G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces
ITU-T G.957 Optical interfaces of equipment and systems relating to the

synchronous digital hierarchy
ITU-T G.691 Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH
systems with optical amplifiers
ITU-T G.693 Optical interfaces for intra-office systems
ITU-T G.697 Optical monitoring for DWDM systems
ITU-T G.698.2 Amplified multichannel DWDM applications with single channel

optical interfaces
ITU-T G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and

subsystems
ITU-T G.959.1 Optical transport network physical layer interfaces
ITU-T G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of
optical amplifier devices and subsystems
ITU-T G.662 Generic characteristics of optical amplifier devices and subsystems
ITU-T G.663 Application related aspects of optical amplifier devices and sub-
systems
ITU-T G.664 Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport
systems
ITU-T G.665 Generic Characteristics of Raman Amplifiers and Raman

Amplified Subsystems

Recommendations on Structures and Mappings

Number Title
ITU-T G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
ITU-T G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544,6312,2048,8448 and

44736 kbit/s hierarchical levels
ITU-T G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy
(SDH)
ITU-T G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
ITU-T G.7041/Y.1303 Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)
Recommendations on Equipment Functions and Features

Number Title
ITU-T G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.798 Characteristics of optical transport network hierarchy equipment

functional blocks
ITU-T G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
ITU-T G.975 Forward error correction for submarine systems
ITU-T G.975.1 Forward error correction for high bit rate DWDM submarine
systems
ITU-T G.781 Synchronization layer functions
ITU-T G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
ITU-T Q.812 Protocol profile for electronic communications interactive agent
ITU-T M.2120 International multi-operator paths,sections and transmission

systems fault detection and localization procedures
Recommendations on Network Protection

Number Title
ITU-T G.808.1 Generic protection switching–Linear trail and subnetwork

protection
ITU-T G.873.1 Optical Transport Network (OTN): Linear protection

Recommendations on Jitter and Performance

Number Title
ITU-T G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are
based on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy
based on the 1544 kbit/s hierarchy
based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for

international,constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary
rate
ITU-T M.2401 Error performance limits and procedures for bringing-into-service

and maintenance of multi operator international paths and sections
within an optical transport network
ITU-T G.8201 Error performance parameters and objectives for multi-operator

international paths within the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
ITU-T G.8261/Y.1361 Timing and synchronization aspects in Packet Networks
ITU-T G.8262/Y.1362 Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave

clock
ITU-T G.828 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

constant bit rate synchronous digital paths
ITU-T G.829 Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator
sections
ITU-T G.8251 The control of jitter and wander within the optical transport
network (OTN)
Recommendations on Equipment Management

Number Title
ITU-T G.7710 Equipment Management Function (EMF) requirements that are

common to multiple transport technologies
ITU-T G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission

systems
ITU-T G.774.1 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Bidirectional performance

monitoring for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.2 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Configuration of the payload

structure for the network element view

Number Title
ITU-T G.774.3 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of multiplex-

section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.4 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of the

subnetwork connection protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.5 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of connection

supervision functionality (HCS/LCS) for the network element
view
ITU-T G.775 Loss of Signal (LOS),Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Remote
Defect Indication (RDI) defect detection and clearance criteria for
PDH signals
ITU-T G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
ITU-T G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.870/Y.1352 Terms and definitions for Optical Transport Networks (OTN)
ITU-T G.874 Management aspects of the optical transport network element
ITU-T G.875 Optical transport network (OTN) management information model

for the network element view
ITU-T M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network
ITU-T Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3 and X interfaces
ITU-T X.721 Information Technology - Open Systems Interconnection -

Structure of Management Information: Definition of Management
Information
Recommendations on Packet Features

Number Title
ITU-T G.8010 Architecture of Ethernet layer networks
ITU-T G.8011 Ethernet over Transport - Ethernet services framework
ITU-T G.8011.1 Ethernet private line service
ITU-T G.8011.2 Ethernet virtual private line service
ITU-T G.8011.3 Ethernet Virtual Private LAN Service
ITU-T G.8011.4 Ethernet virtual private rooted multipoint service
ITU-T G.8011.5 Ethernet private LAN service
ITU-T G.8012 Ethernet UNI and Ethernet over transport NNI

Number Title
ITU-T G.8021 Characteristics of Ethernet transport network equipment functional

blocks
ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet ring protection switching
ITU-T Y.1730 Requirements for OAM functions in Ethernet based networks and
Ethernet services
ITU-T Y.1731/ITU-T OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks
G.8013
ITU-T G.8110 MPLS layer network architecture
ITU-T Y.1710 Requirements for Operation & Maintenance functionality in

MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.Sup4 Supplement on transport requirements for T-MPLS OAM and

considerations for the application of IETF MPLS technology
ITU-T G.8101 Terms and definitions for MPLS transport profile
ITU-T G.8110.1 Architecture of the Multi-Protocol Label Switching transport

profile layer network
ITU-T G.8121 Characteristics of Transport MPLS equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.8112 Interfaces for the MPLS Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) layer
network
ITU-T G.8151 Management aspects of the MPLS-TP network element
ITU-T Y.1291 An architectural framework for support of quality of service (QoS)

in packet networks
ITU-T G.8261 Timing and synchronization aspects in packet networks
ITU-T G.8262 Timing characteristics of synchronous ethernet equipment slave

clock (EEC)
ITU-T G.8264 Timing distribution through packet networks
B.5 MEF Standards

Number Title
Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 1: Generic

MEF 4
Framework
MEF 6 Ethernet Services Definitions - Phase I
MEF 9 Abstract Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI

Number Title
MEF 10 Ethernet Services Attributes Phase 1
MEF 11 User Network Interface (UNI) Requirements and Framework
Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 2: Ethernet Services

MEF 12
Layer
MEF 13 User Network Interface (UNI) Type 1 Implementation Agreement
MEF 14 Abstract Test Suite for Traffic Management Phase 1
B.6 International Standards

Number Title
GR-253- Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common

CORE generic criteria
GR-1377- SONET OC-192 Systems Generic Requirements

CORE
IEC 61291-1 Optical amplifiers – Part 4: Multichannel Applications Performance

specification Template
SMPTE Television — SDTV1 Digital Signal/Data — Serial Digital Interface

259M
SMPTE Television — 3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface

424M
SMPTE Television — Bit-Serial Digital Interface forHigh-Definition Television

292M Systems
CENELEC Cable networks for television signals, sound signals and interactive services
EN 50083-9 - Part 9: Interfaces for CATV/SMATV headends and similar professional
equipment for DVB/MPEG-2 transport streams
ISO 9314 Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)
B.7 EMC Standards
Number Title
2004/108/EC EMC Directive
Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance characteristics-

EN 55022 Limits and methods of measurement

Number Title
EN 55024 Information technology equipment-Immunity characteristics-Limits

and methods of measurement
IEC/EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Generic standards -

Immunity for industrial environments
IEC/EN 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4: Generic standards -

Emission standard for industrial environments
ETSI EN 300 386 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters(ERM);

Telecommunication network equipment; Electro Magnetic
Compatibility (EMC) requirements
ETSI ES 201 468 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Additional ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements for
telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service in
specific applications
GR-1089-CORE Electromagnetic compatibility and electrical safety - generic criteria

for network telecommunications equipment
CISPR 22 INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION
CISPR 24 Information technology equipment - Immunity characteristics - Limits

and methods of measurement
VCCI V-3 Voluntary Control Council for Interference from Information

Technology Equipment, TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
CAN/CSA-CISPR INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION

22
AS/NZS CISPR 22 Information technology equipment— Radio disturbance

characteristics— Limits and methods of measurement
ICES-003 Information Technology Equipment (ITE) - Limits and methods of

measurement
FCC CFR47 Part 15 RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES

Subpart B

B.8 Environment Related Standards

Number Title
ETSI EN 300 Environmental Engineering (EE);

019-1-1 Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunica-
tions equipment;
Part 1-1: Classification of environmental conditions;
Storage
Class 1.1: Weatherprotected, partly temperature-controlled storage
locations
Class 1.2: Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage
locations

tions equipment;
Transportation
Class 2.1: Very careful transportation
Class 2.2: Careful transportation

tions equipment;
Stationary use at weatherprotected locations
Class 3.1: Temperature-controlled locations
Class 3.2: Partly temperature-controlled location
IEC 60068-2 Basic Environmental Testing Procedures
IEC 60529 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake vibration
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of

groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 1:
Storage
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of

groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3:
Stationary use at weatherprotected locations
NEBS GR-63- Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical

CORE Protection

Number Title
2006/1907/EC REACH Directive
2002/95/EC, RoHS Directive

2011/65/EU
2002/96/EC, WEEE Directive

2012/19/EU
ETS 300 119 Equipment Engineering (EE);

European telecommunications standard for equipment practice
The equipment complies with ROHS standards and the materials used for each component are
listed as follows.
Table B-1 Main materials used in OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Percentage (Based on RoHS

Part Material Weight (kg) Product Weight) Substance
Cabinet Fe 56 28.1% No
AL 3 1.50% No
Cu 2 1.00% No
ABS 3 1.50% No
Other material 2 1.00% No
Subrack Fe 26.0 13.0% No
ABS 0.3 0.15% No
Zn 0.15 0.08% No
Cable Typical 7.0 3.51% No

configuration
(power cable,
ground cable,
alarm cable,
management cable
and clock cable)
Other 1.5kg/m - No
configuration
(Weight for each
meter)
Fiber Typical 30.0 15.04% No

configuration (10-
meter fiber x 58)


Boards Fully 70.0 35.10% Pb (in solder)

configuration (50
boards,
components
included)
Total Typical 199.45 100% -

configuration

AL 6 1.52% No
Cu 4 1.01% No
ABS 6 1.52% No
ABS 0.6 0.15% No
Zn 0.3 0.08% No
Cable Typical 14.0 3.55% No

configuration
(power cable,
ground cable,
alarm cable,
management cable
and clock cable)
Other 0.101kg/m - No
configuration
(Weight for each
meter)
Fiber Typical 60 15.19% No

configuration (10-
meter fiber x 58)



configuration (50
boards,
components
included)

configuration

AL 3 2.1% No
Cu 2 1.3% No
ABS 3 2.1% Deca-BDE
ABS 0.4 0.26% Deca-BDE
AL 0.3 0.21% No
Zn 0.2 0.13% No
Cable Typical 15 10.3% No

configuration
(power cable,
ground cable,
alarm cable,
management cable
and clock cable)
Other 1.5kg/m - No
configuration
(Weight for each
meter)
Fiber Typical 6.5 4.4% No

configuration (10-
meter fiber x 58)



configuration (25
boards,
components
included)

configuration
B.9 Grounding Standards

Number Title
ETSI EN 300 253 Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in

telecommunication centers
GR 1089 CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety - Generic Criteria

for Network Telecommunications Equipment
B.10 Laser Security Standards

Number Title
IEC/EN- Safety of laser products-Part 1: Equipment classification, requirements and

60825-1 user's guide
IEC/EN- Safety of laser products-Part2: Safety of optical fiber communication systems

60825-2
FDA 21 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS FOR LIGHT-EMITTING PRODUCTS

CFR Sec. 1040.11 Specific purpose laser products
1040.11
B.11 Security Standards

Number Title
2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive
CAN/CSA-C22.2 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical

No 60950-1 Business Equipment

Number Title
EN 41003 Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected to

IEC 41003 telecommunications networks and/or a cable distribution system
EN 60825-1 Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification and

IEC60825-1 requirements
EN 60825-2 Safety of laser products - Part 2: Safety of optical fibre communication

IEC60825-2 systems
IEC/EN 60950-1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment. Including Electrical

Business Equipment
IEC/EN 60950-1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment. Including Electrical

Business Equipment
IEC Publication Guide on the effects of current passing through the human body
479-1
IS 8437 Guide on the effects of current passing through the human body
IS 13252 Safety of information technology equipment including electrical

business equipment
UL 60950-1 3:rd edition Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including

Electrical Business Equipment
NEBS GR-63- Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical

CORE Protection
B.12 Noise Standards

Number Title
ETSI EN 300 753 Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment
The equipment complies with the ETSI 300 753 class3.2, and the nominal acoustic power of the
equipment is lower than or equal to 7.2 bels in an attended telecommunication equipment room.
B.13 Fireproofing Standards

Number Title
EN 60950 (Europe) Safety of information technology equipment
ANSI/UL 60950 Safety of information technology equipment

Number Title
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. Audio, video and similar electronic equipment

950-95 (North America)
IEC 60950 Safety of information technology equipment

(International)

Product Description C Technology Reference
C Technology Reference
C.1 FEC Function

Certain OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards have forward error correction (FEC) function,
the high performance forward error correction (HFEC) function, the soft-decision forward error
correction (SDFEC) function, SDFEC2, the advanced forward error correction (AFEC) function
and AFEC-2 function.
C.2 Coherent Receiver Technology
To ensure transmission performance equivalent to 10G systems, Huawei's coherent systems use
coherent receiver technology to leverage the chromatic dispersion (CD), polarization mode
dispersion (PMD), OSNR tolerance, and system transmission capacity.
C.3 Chromatic Dispersion Compensation
The system provides different dispersion compensation solutions to different applications.
C.4 Delay
Delay refers to the time it takes for original data to go through a series of processing operations
such as coding on transmit-end transmission equipment, transmission over channels, and
decoding on receive-end transmission equipment.
C.5 SBS Suppresses
The spectral width of signals borne on the laser bias in the OptiX OTN product series is increased
to suppress stimulated Brillouin scattering (SBS).
C.6 GFP Technology
C.7 ODB Technology
C.8 DQPSK Technology
C.9 ePDM-QPSK Technology
Polarization-multiplexed quadrature phase-shift keying (ePDM-QPSK) is developed based on
the differential quadrature phase shift keying (DQPSK) technology. It uses the orthogonal
polarization characteristics of light and separately performs QPSK modulation along the X and
Y axis polarization modes.
C.10 ePDM-BPSK Technology
Polarization-multiplexed binary phase shift keying (ePDM-BPSK) is developed based on
ePDM-QPSK. ePDM-QPSK uses four phases, which are 0, π/2, π, and 3π/2, but ePDM-BPSK
uses only two of them, 0 and π.

C.11 EDFA Technology

The OptiX OTN product series use advanced Erbium-Doped Fibre Amplifier (EDFA)
technology, with varying optical power output and gain to suit different applications related to
long haul transmission, reducing the need for regeneration.
C.12 Raman Amplification

The combination of Raman amplifier and Erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) realizes
wideband flat gain. The interference of system noise and non-linear effect on the system is
effectively decreased and the transmission distance is increased.

C.1 FEC Function

Certain OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards have forward error correction (FEC) function,
the high performance forward error correction (HFEC) function, the soft-decision forward error
correction (SDFEC) function, SDFEC2, the advanced forward error correction (AFEC) function
and AFEC-2 function.
With the FEC, HFEC, SDFEC, SDFEC2, AFEC and AFEC-2 functions, the OSNR requirements
of the system are less at the receive end. This extends the transmission distance between the
optical amplifier section and the regenerator section.
In addition, the FEC, HFEC, SDFEC, SDFEC2, AFEC and AFEC-2 help to reduce bit error rate
during the transmission. It also enhances the transmission quality of DWDM networks.
NOTE
Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
C.2 Coherent Receiver Technology

To ensure transmission performance equivalent to 10G systems, Huawei's coherent systems use
coherent receiver technology to leverage the chromatic dispersion (CD), polarization mode
dispersion (PMD), OSNR tolerance, and system transmission capacity.
Coherent receiver technology uses a local oscillator (LO) laser that has the same frequency as
the received signal and implements interference between the LO laser signal and the received
signal to restore the amplitude, phase, and polarization state information from the received
signal. In addition, the technology uses high-speed analog-to-digital converter (ADC) and digital
signal processing (DSP) techniques to compensate for CD and PMD on the line.
By using coherent receiver technology, a 40G/100G coherent system does not have to use a fixed
dispersion compensation module (DCM) or a tunable DCM (TDCM), which is intended for fine-
tuning the dispersion of a single wavelength in a traditional 40G system. A 40G/100G coherent
system that uses this technology requires fewer optical amplifiers, does not require accurate
measurement of fiber length and dispersion, reduces system configuration costs and labor, and
improves fiber transmission network performance.
A coherent system has a higher CD and PMD tolerance than a traditional 10G/40G non-coherent
system and extends the transmission reach to several thousand kilometers without dispersion
compensation. This technology reduces the fiber transmission delay and enables large-capacity
transmission with low delay. In a traditional non-coherent system, a TDCM module takes several
minutes to implement dispersion compensation. In a coherent system, however, the high-speed
digital signal processing (DSP) mechanism takes only milliseconds to implement dispersion
compensation, which ensures fast wavelength rerouting in a dynamic optical network and
therefore implements fully dynamic wavelength grooming.
A 40G/100G coherent system can transmit both coherent 40G/100G wavelengths and non-
coherent 10G/40G wavelengths. This makes an upgrade from a traditional network with DCM
modules to a coherent 40G/100G network possible.

C.3 Chromatic Dispersion Compensation

The system provides different dispersion compensation solutions to different applications.
For the system that transmits 2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signals over G.652,
G.653 and G.655 fibers, the fixed dispersion compensation fibers, such as DCM module and
DCU board, can be used to realize whole spectrum compensation with full dispersion slope
match.
For the 40 Gbit/s system, the tunable dispersion compensation module embedded in the receive
unit can control residual dispersion compensation automatically.
C.4 Delay
Delay refers to the time it takes for original data to go through a series of processing operations
such as coding on transmit-end transmission equipment, transmission over channels, and
decoding on receive-end transmission equipment.
Delay is inevitably generated when client service signals are transmitted over an OTN network.
In the OTN network, delay is mainly caused by devices and physical links.
Among the delay caused by physical links, the delay introduced by line fibers and dispersion
compensation fibers (DCFs) should be focused on.
l The delay introduced by line fibers refers to the time it takes for optical signals to transmit
over fibers. Such delay can be shortened by optimizing routes and reducing fiber length.
l The delay introduced by DCFs refers to the time it takes for optical signals to transmit over
DCFs. To shorten the delay for low-rate signals (such as 2.5 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s signals),
the user can use boards that use fiber Bragg grating (FBG) components (such as TDC
boards) but not DCMs that use DCFs to compensate for dispersion. For high-rate signals
(such as 40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s signals), the use can use coherent technology to shorten
the delay. The coherent technology compensates for dispersion during circuit processing
and requires no physical DCFs.
Among the delay caused by devices, the delay introduced by electrical- and optical-layer units
should be focused on.
l The delay introduced by optical-layer units can be ignored, because pigtails inside the
optical-layer units are very short and cause an excessively short delay.
l After O/E conversion is performed on client service signals at the receive end, the electrical
signals will undergo a series of operations on the board, such as mapping and forward error
correction (FEC) encoding and decoding. During this process, delay is generated and such
delay is considered introduced by electrical-layer units. Methods for shortening the delay
introduced by electrical-layer units are as follows:
– Electrical-layer boards provide multiple mapping paths for services. The user can
choose a mapping path with a short delay for delay sensitive services. For example,
when the LSX board accepts 10GE LAN services, GFP-T and GFP-F mapping paths
are available. The user can choose the GFP-T mapping path for the services because
the delay of the GFP-T mapping path is 20 us shorter than that of the GFP-F mapping
path.

– FEC is a key technology that ensures good long-haul transmission performance but
causes delay. If the transmission distance is short, the user can disable the FEC function
to reduce the delay. Alternatively, the user can configure different AFEC encoding and
decoding levels based on network design requirements to obtain an optimal delay.
Specifically, a larger AFEC parameter value (that is, a higher AFEC encoding and
decoding level) ensures a satisfactory error correction result but causes a longer delay;
a smaller AFEC parameter value (that is, a lower AFEC encoding and decoding level)
causes a shorter delay but provides a less satisfactory error correction result.
C.5 SBS Suppresses

The spectral width of signals borne on the laser bias in the OptiX OTN product series is increased
to suppress stimulated Brillouin scattering (SBS).
The 2.5 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s signals have the same SBS threshold, which is 18 dBm. Namely,
in the case of the 2.5 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s signals, the per-channel maximum launched optical
power is 18 dBm.
C.6 GFP Technology

The Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) is the most widely applied general encapsulation and
mapping protocol. It provides a general mechanism to adapt higher-layer client signal flows into
the transport network and can map the variable-length payload into the byte-synchronized
transport path. client signals can be protocol data units (PDU-oriented, such as IP/PPP and
Ethernet), block code data (block-code oriented, such as Fiber Channel and ESCON), or common
bit data streams. GFP protocol complies with ITU-T G.7041.
GFP defines the following modes to adapt client signals:
l Frame-mapped GFP (GFP-F)

The GFP-F is a PDU-oriented processing mode. It encapsulates the entire PDU into the
GFP payload area and makes no modification on the encapsulated data. It determines
whether to add a detection area for the payload area, depending on requirements.
l Transparent GFP (GFP-T)
The GFP-T is a block-code (8B/10B code block) oriented processing mode. It extracts a
single character from the received data block and maps the character into the fixed-length
GFP frame.
C.7 ODB Technology

The OTU adopting the optical duobinary (ODB) coding has a narrow optical spectrum, and it
can be used in the system with 50 GHz channel spacing.
The input signals are provided with pre-coding, and the three status code (-1, 0, 1) sequence is
output. The code sequence drive modulator is used to convert electrical signals to optical signals.
On the receive side, a common light intensity detector is used to receive the signals.

The 3 dB bandwidth of ODB is about 25% of the 3 dB bandwidth of NRZ. The spectral efficiency
of ODB is higher than that of NRZ. Therefore, it is suitable for WDM transmission with high
density.
C.8 DQPSK Technology

DQPSK is used to transport 40 Gbit/s signals.
DQPSK is a new modulation format. On the transmit side, the input electrical signals are
differentially encoded. The modulator performs quadrature phase shift keying modulation and
outputs the optical signals in four phases: 0, π/2, π, and 3π/2. On the receive side, the modem
differentially decodes the optical signals (the signals are received in an equalized manner). The
receiver sensitivity of the DQPSK modulation format is 3 dB higher than that of the amplitude
modulation format.
DQPSK is a multilevel modulation format in which the bit rate is two times the baud rate and,
therefore, is highly suitable for 40G transmission systems. In the DQPSK modulation format,
the spectrum width is narrow and the output spectrum is smooth. As a result, the DQPSK
modulation format can effectively suppress various nonlinear effects of a fiber. The phase shift
helps reduce any phase-related nonlinear effects (such as SPM, XPM, and FWM) and enhance
the tolerance to chromatic dispersion (CD) and polarization mode dispersion (PMD). DQPSK
is a critical modulation format for long-haul, high-speed, and large-capacity optical transmission.
Enhanced DQPSK further elevates the nonlinearity tolerance of a system and is currently the
best coding technology for 40G ultra long-haul transmission.
C.9 ePDM-QPSK Technology

Polarization-multiplexed quadrature phase-shift keying (ePDM-QPSK) is developed based on
the differential quadrature phase shift keying (DQPSK) technology. It uses the orthogonal
polarization characteristics of light and separately performs QPSK modulation along the X and
Y axis polarization modes.
Compared with the existing 40G DQPSK technology, the ePDM-QPSK technology transmits
twofold data over the same wavelength. If the baud rate is increased by 1.25 times, the rate will
increase to 2 x 1.25 x 40 = 100 Gbit/s. This eventually increases the optical transmission
bandwidth of a WDM system by 2.5 times.
ePDM-QPSK is a preferred solution for 100G WDM transmission.
C.10 ePDM-BPSK Technology

Polarization-multiplexed binary phase shift keying (ePDM-BPSK) is developed based on
ePDM-QPSK. ePDM-QPSK uses four phases, which are 0, π/2, π, and 3π/2, but ePDM-BPSK
uses only two of them, 0 and π.
Compared with ePDM-QPSK, ePDM-BPSK provides a stronger interference-proof capability

and higher OSNR tolerance because it uses only two phases to transmit data, enabling longer
transmission distance.
ePDM-BPSK is intended for 40G ultra long-haul transmission.

C.11 EDFA Technology

The OptiX OTN product series use advanced Erbium-Doped Fibre Amplifier (EDFA)
technology, with varying optical power output and gain to suit different applications related to
long haul transmission, reducing the need for regeneration.
EDFA adopts gain locking technology and transient control technology to make the gain of each
channel independent of the number of channels. Adding or dropping channels does not cause
burst bit error in the existing channels.
The optical amplifiers adopted by the system are capable of amplifying the signals that are spaced
at 100 GHz and 50 GHz in the C band and comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
C.12 Raman Amplification

The combination of Raman amplifier and Erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) realizes
wideband flat gain. The interference of system noise and non-linear effect on the system is
effectively decreased and the transmission distance is increased.
Raman amplifier works 20 to 30 km away from Raman pump laser. If there is optical power loss
higher than 7 dB within a 20-kilometer distance from Raman pump laser, the optical power gain
realized by Raman amplifier decreases and Raman amplifier cannot work normally. If there is
optical power loss higher than 7 dB beyond a 30-kilometer distance from Raman pump laser,
the optical power gain realized by Raman amplifier remains unaffected.
The LSH/APC (E2000/APC) connectors for the RAMAN amplifier are recommended.
The Raman amplification technology supports back ward pump and forward pump.
Backward pump:
l When the Raman amplifier is located at the front-most end of the receive station in the
DWDM system, the Raman amplifier uses the distributed amplification of the reverse pump
to amplify the optical signals during transmission. In this case, the Raman amplifier sends
the pump light to the transmission fiber and synchronously separates the amplified optical
signals, and then outputs the amplified optical signals to the subsequent EDFA. Figure
C-1 show the implementation method.
l The transmission distance of the pump light and signal light are different. The reverse pump
mode leads to a big phase difference of the signal light and pump light. The power
fluctuation of the Raman pump is averaged in the reverse transmission. As a result, the
noise generated by the pump can be effectively suppressed.
Figure C-1 Functional block diagram of backward pump Raman amplifier

Raman amplifier
Signal light
EDFA
EDFA Pump light
Fiber Pump light
Laser
Transmitting end Coupler Receiving end

Forward pump:
l The forward pump is used behind the transmitter and is directly connected to an ODF
(without any board or attenuator in between). The directions of the pump light and signal
light are the same, as shown in Figure C-2.
l When the Raman amplifier is implemented in a system with ultra-long single span, the
main purpose is to decrease the nonlinear effects on the transmit end. In the case of few
wavelengths, the Raman amplifier works in the signal gain range. Note that the power of
the signals input to the Raman amplifier cannot be too high. Otherwise, error codes are
generated in the system. In the case of many wavelengths, the Raman amplifier gain is in
full saturation mode, the Raman effects between signals are obvious, and power pre-
equalize need to be performed on the transmit end.
l To fix the gain unflatness of the forward Raman amplifier and the Raman effects between
signals of the fiber transmission, both the booster amplifier and the V40 board must be
configured before the forward Raman amplifier to adjust the power allocation of each
channel, thus making the transmission distance of each channel equal.
l As the input power is high, the forward Raman amplifier works in the gain saturation range
generally. The higher the input power, the lower the gain. Without control, in the process
of adding and dropping wavelengths, the receive power of the remaining wavelengths
changes. In actual application, to ensure normal adding and dropping wavelength and to
ease the commissioning, dummy light must be configured to fill the empty channel, thus
making the input power unchanged or change little.
Figure C-2 Functional block diagram of forward pump Raman amplifier

Raman amplifier
Signal light
EDFA
Pump light EDFA
Pump light Fiber
Laser
Transmitting end Coupler Receiving end

Product Description D Glossary
D Glossary
Numerics
3G See 3rd Generation.
3R reshaping, retiming, regenerating
3rd Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver
data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to
19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
802.1Q in 802.1Q A VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame. The
(QinQ) implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN
tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service
provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2
VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over private
VLANs.
A
A/D analog/digit
AA authentication authorization
AAA See Authentication, Authorization and Accounting.
AC alternating current
ACH associated channel header
ACK See acknowledgement.
ACL See access control list.
ACR allowed cell rate
ACS See Application Control Server.
ADC analog to digital converter
ADM add/drop multiplexer
ADSL See asymmetric digital subscriber line.

AF See assured forwarding.

AG See Access Gateway.
AGC automatic gain control
AH See Authentication Header.
AIN advanced intelligent network
AIS alarm indication signal
AK See access key ID.
ALC See automatic level control.
ALC link A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (single
station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfills optical
power control on the line that contains the link.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.
ANSI See American National Standards Institute.
APD See avalanche photodiode.
APE See automatic power equilibrium.
API See application programming interface.
APID access point identifier
APS automatic protection switching
APS 1+1 protection A protection architecture that comprises one protection facility and one working facility
and performs switchover by using the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) protocol.
Normally, signals are sent only over the working facility. If an APS switchover event is
detected by the working facility, services are switched over to the protection facility.
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol.
AS See autonomous system.
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASE amplified spontaneous emission
ASIC See application-specific integrated circuit.
ATAE See Advanced Telecommunications Application Environment.
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
AU adaptation unit
AUG See administrative unit group.
AWG arrayed waveguide grating
Access Gateway (AG) A type of gateway that provides a user-network interface (UNI) such as ISDN. An access
gateway is located at the edge access layer of the NGN structure, and provides various
methods for connecting users to the NGN.

Address Resolution An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. The ARP protocol
Protocol (ARP) enables hosts and routers to determine link layer addresses through ARP requests and
responses. The address resolution is a process by which the host converts the target IP
address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of
ARP is to use the target equipment's IP address to query its MAC address.
Advanced A carrier-class processing platform that is designed to meet the service application
Telecommunications requirement of high performance, high specialization, and high integration.
Application
Environment (ATAE)
American National An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry.
Standards Institute
(ANSI)
Application Control A subsystem of the Media Entertainment Middleware (MEM), used for providing a
Server (ACS) service control interface for the Electronic Program Guide (EPG) server.
Authentication Header A protocol that provides connectionless integrity, data origin authentication, and anti-
(AH) replay protection for IP data.
Authentication, A mechanism for configuring authentication, authorization, and accounting security
Authorization and services. Authentication refers to the verification of user identities and the related
Accounting (AAA) network services; authorization refers to the granting of network services to users
according to authentication results; and accounting refers to the tracking of the
consumption of network services by users.
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a
(ACL) resource.
access key ID (AK) An ID that confirms the identity of a user accessing the object-based storage system.
One access key ID belongs to only one user, but one user can have multiple access key
IDs. The object-based storage system recognizes the users accessing the system by their
access key IDs.
acknowledgement A response sent by a receiver to indicate reception of information. Acknowledgements
(ACK) may be implemented at any level, including the physical level (using voltage on one or
more wires to coordinate a transfer), link level (indicating transmission across a single
hardware link), or higher levels.
administrative unit One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload.
group (AUG) An AUG consists of AU-4s.
aging time The time to live before an object becomes invalid.
alarm cascading The method of cascading alarm signals from several subracks or cabinets.
alarm indication A mechanism to indicate the alarm status of equipment. On the cabinet of an NE, four
differently-colored indicators specify the current status of the NE. When the green
indicator is on, the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, a critical alarm has
been generated. When the orange indicator is on, a major alarm has been generated.
When the yellow indicator is on, a minor alarm has been generated. The ALM alarm
indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.
application An application programming interface is a particular set of rules and specifications that
programming interface are used for communication between software programs.
(API)

application-specific A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in
integrated circuit the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.
(ASIC) By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for
many needs.
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
(AF) It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.
asymmetric digital A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone
subscriber line (ADSL) lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides
continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most
of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive
information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice)
information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from
512 kbit/s to about 6 Mbit/s.
automatic laser A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters
shutdown (ALS) and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control A function that keeps output power of components in a system essentially constant, even
(ALC) when line attenuation in a section of the system increases.
automatic power A function to automatically equalize channel optical power at the transmitter end,
equilibrium (APE) ensuring a required optical power flatness and OSNR at the receiver end.
autonomous system A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same technology
(AS) administration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an integer ranging
from 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be divided into areas.
avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.
(APD) Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an
avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages
than other semiconductor electronics.
B
B/S browser/server
BA booster amplifier
BBC See battery backup cabinet.
BBER background block error ratio
BC boundary clock
BDI See backward defect indication.
BE See best effort.
BEI backward error indication
BER bit error rate
BFD See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol

BIAE backward incoming alignment error

BIOS See basic input/output system.
BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity-8.
BITS See building integrated timing supply.
BMC best master clock
BOM bill of materials
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.
BPS board protection switching
BPSK See binary phase shift keying.
BRA See basic rate access.
BRAS See broadband remote access server.
BTS base transceiver station
Bidirectional A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
Forwarding Detection detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established between
(BFD) neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to each other. If
one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated period, the system regards
that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper layer protocol to take actions to
recover the faulty link.
backplane An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional
electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backward defect A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the
indication (BDI) upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies a transmission line or channel can carry in a network.
In fact, the bandwidth is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies in
the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer
rate.
basic input/output Firmware stored on the computer motherboard that contains basic input/output control
system (BIOS) programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
basic rate access (BRA) An ISDN interface typically used by smaller sites and customers. This interface consists
of a single 16 kbit/s data (or "D") channel plus two bearer (or "B") channels for voice
and/or data. Also known as Basic Rate Access, or BRI.
battery backup cabinet A cabinet that contains a built-in battery group to back up -48 V DC power and to supply
(BBC) power to the base station when there is no power input. It is a component of a base station.
best effort (BE) A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.

binary phase shift 2-phase modulation for carrier based on binary baseband signal. In this modulation mode,
keying (BPSK) the binary character 0 represents phase 0 of the carrier, and character 1 represents the
phase 180. The phase of character 0 is 0, and the phase of character 1 needs to be
specified. This is an absolute phase shift mode that uses different phases to represent
digital information.
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding
bit in the received digital signal.
bit interleaved parity-8 Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a
(BIP-8) transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)
in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" or "0"
over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is
odd, otherwise fill a 0.
bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges
operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because bridges store
and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges
differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP
addresses.
bridge protocol data Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning
unit (BPDU) tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses,
priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended destination. BPDU
messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. These
loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge interfaces and placing
redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadband remote A new type of access gateway for broadband networks. As a bridge between backbone
access server (BRAS) networks and broadband access networks, BRAS provides methods for fundamental
access and manages the broadband access network. It is deployed at the edge of network
to provide broadband access services, convergence, and forwarding of multiple services,
meeting the demands for transmission capacity and bandwidth utilization of different
users. BRAS is a core device for the broadband users' access to a broadband network.
broadcast domain A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any device
within the group. The broadcast domain also refers to the set of ports between which a
device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or unknown destination frame.
building integrated In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
timing supply (BITS) a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
burst A process of forming data into a block of the proper size, uninterruptedly sending the
block in a fast operation, waiting for a long time, and preparing for the next fast sending.
byte A unit of computer information equal to eight bits.
C
CAPEX capital expenditure
CAR committed access rate
CBR See constant bit rate.

CBS See committed burst size.

CC See continuity check.
CCM continuity check message
CD chromatic dispersion
CDR See call detail record.
CE See customer edge.
CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
CES See circuit emulation service.
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR committed information rate
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLI command-line interface
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CMEP connection monitoring end point
CMI coded mark inversion
CNP connection-not-possible signal
CORBA See Common Object Request Broker Architecture.
COS chip operating system
CP cyclic prefix
CPLD complex programmable logical device
CPRI See common public radio interface.
CPU See central processing unit.
CR carriage return
CR-LDP Constraint-based Routed Label Distribution Protocol
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.
CS class selector
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSF Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CST See common spanning tree.
CSV See comma separated values.
CV connectivity verification
CW control word

CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.

CoS class of service
Common Object A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of
Request Broker programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two
Architecture (CORBA) programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different
platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or
ORB, and therefore does not need to know the structure of the program from which the
object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments.
Common and Internal The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity
Spanning Tree (CIST) using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the
bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
cabinet A physical entity for containing one or more shelves, providing the cooling, power, and
security functions.
call detail record A record unit used to create billing records. A CDR contains details such as the called
(CDR) and calling parties, originating switch, terminating switch, call length, and time of day.
carrier sense multiple Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
access with collision networking access method in which:
detection (CSMA/CD)
l A carrier sensing scheme is used.
l A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame,
stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random
time interval before trying to send that frame again.
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
(CPU) and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
channel spacing The center-to-center difference in frequencies or wavelengths between adjacent channels
in a WDM device.
circuit emulation A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
service (CES) transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
circulation The number of copies of a newspaper or magazine per issue that are circulated in the
market
clock synchronization A process of synchronizing clocks, in which the signal frequency traces the reference
frequency, but the start points do not need to be consistent. This process is (also known
as frequency synchronization).
coarse wavelength A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
division multiplexing the same fiber. CWDM spaces wavelengths at a distance of several nm. CWDM does
(CWDM) not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
comma separated A CSV file is a text file that stores data, generally used as an electronic table or by the
values (CSV) database software.

committed burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst
(CBS) IP packet size when information is transferred at the committed information rate. This
parameter must be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an
IP packet to be forwarded.
common public radio A common standard of the key internal interface between the REC and the RE of the
interface (CPRI) wireless base station. This standard was established by Huawei, Ericsson, NEC, Siemens,
and Nortel in June 2003. It aims at standardizing the baseband and RF interface. The
CPRI has a set of mature standards, which advance the standard and equipment. The
major feature of the CPRI is that baseband is separated from RF to reduce the cost of
engineering, equipment room, and equipment.
common spanning tree A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST region
(CST) is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as their spanning tree
generated with STP/RSTP.
composite service An aggregation of a series of services relevant to each other.
configuration data A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can
collaborate with other NEs in a network. Therefore, configuration data is the key factor
that determines the operation of an entire network.
consistency check A function that is used to check the consistency of service data and resource data between
two softswitches that have the dual homing relation. This ensures the consistency of
service data and resource data between the softswitches.
constant bit rate (CBR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check (CC) An Ethernet connectivity fault management (CFM) method used to detect the
connectivity between MEPs by having each MEP periodically transmit a Continuity
Check Message (CCM).
control VLAN A VLAN that transmits only protocol packets.
crossover cable A twisted pair patch cable wired in such a way as to route the transmit signals from one
piece of equipment to the receive signals of another piece of equipment, and vice versa.
customer edge (CE) A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly connecting
to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
cyclic redundancy A procedure used to check for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a
check (CRC) complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before performing the transmission and includes the
generated number in the packet it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device
then repeats the same calculation. If both devices obtain the same result, the transmission
is considered to be error free. This procedure is known as a redundancy check because
each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
DAPI destination access point identifier
DB database
DBMS Database Management System

DBPS distributed board protect system

DC direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
(with ground) (DC-C) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
ground) (DC-I) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel.
DCE See data circuit-terminating equipment.
DCF See dispersion compensation fiber.
DCM See dispersion compensation module.
DCN See data communication network.
DDF digital distribution frame
DEI device emulation interrupt
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DIP switch dual in-line package switch
DLAG See distributed link aggregation group.
DM See delay measurement.
DMUX demultiplexer
DPSK differential phase shift keying
DRDB dynamic random database
DRZ differential phase return to zero
DS See Data Source.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP See differentiated services code point.
DSCR dispersion slope compensation rate
DSE dispersion slope equalizer
DSF See Distributed Service Framework.
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DSP See digital signal processor.
DSS door status switch
DTE See data terminal equipment.
DTMF See dual tone multiple frequency.

DVB digital video broadcasting

DVB-ASI digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
Data Source (DS) A system, database, or file that can make BOs persistent. A data source can be a database
instance or a database user.
DiffServ See Differentiated Services.
Differentiated Services An IETF standard that defines a mechanism for controlling and forwarding traffic in a
(DiffServ) differentiated manner based on CoS settings to handle network congestion.
Distance Vector An Internet gateway protocol based primarily on the RIP. The DVMRP protocol
Multicast Routing implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution and uses IGMP to exchange
Protocol (DVMRP) routing datagrams with its neighbors.
Distributed Service A distributed service development and running framework, in which services comply
Framework (DSF) with standard specifications, and can be loaded and run by containers. This framework
provides a range of services including registration, detection, routing, and distributed
access.
DoS denial of service
Dynamic Host A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters
Configuration Protocol specific to the DHCP client host requesting information the host requires to participate
(DHCP) on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocating IP addresses
to hosts.
data circuit- The equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal
terminating equipment equipment (DTE) and the line. A DCE is located at a data station. The DCE may be
(DCE) separate equipment, or an integral part of the DTE or intermediate equipment. The DCE
may perform other functions that are normally performed at the network end of the line.
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data
network (DCN) communication function.
data communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
channel (DCC) transmit information on the operation, management, maintenance, and provisioning
(OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channel composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as
the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel composed of bytes D4-D12 is
referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
data terminal A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the DCE
equipment (DTE) equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced by DCE.
delay measurement The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source
(DM) node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source node,
when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.
dense wavelength The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation
division multiplexing of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency
(DWDM) spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same
fiber.
designated switch A designated switch of a device is a switch that is directly connected to the device and
forwards BPDUs to the device.

detection sensitivity The capability for a detector to respond to an exception.

differentiated services According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service (Diff-Serv),
code point (DSCP) the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most significant bits and
two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for priority marking.
Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most important bits in the ToS. It is
the combination of IP precedence and types of service. The DSCP value is used to ensure
that routers supporting only IP precedence can be used because the DSCP value is
compatible with IP precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB). Therefore,
terminal devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value.
digital signal processor A microprocessor designed specifically for digital signal processing, generally in real
(DSP) time.
digital subscriber line A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company, that
access multiplexer receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and
(DSLAM) uses multiplexing techniques to put these signals on a high-speed backbone line.
dispersion A type of fiber that uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion
compensation fiber of the transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
(DCF)
dispersion A type of module that contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the
compensation module dispersion of the transmitting fiber.
(DCM)
distributed link A board-level port protection technology that detects unidirectional fiber cuts and
aggregation group negotiates with the opposite port. In the case of a link down failure on a port or hardware
(DLAG) failure on a board, services are automatically switched to the slave board, thereby
achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
dotted decimal notation A format of IP address. IP addresses in this format are separated into four parts by a dot
"." with each part is in the decimal numeral.
downlink traffic The network traffic transferred into an internal carrier network. Noticeably, downlink
refers to sending traffic to user-end link nodes.
downstream In an access network, the direction of transmission toward the subscriber end of the link.
dual feed and selective A channel used to transmit monitoring data on an optical transmission network. The
receiving monitoring data is transmitted on the data communications channel as part of the
overhead of the service signal.
dual tone multiple Multi-frequency signaling technology for telephone systems. According to this
frequency (DTMF) technology, standard set combinations of two specific voice band frequencies, one from
a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four high frequencies, are
used.
dual-ended switching A protection method in which switching is performed at both ends of a protected entity,
such as a connection or path, even if a unidirectional failure occurs.
E
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.

E1 An European standard for high-speed data transmission at 2.048 Mbit/s. It provides

thirty-two 64 kbit/s channels. A time division multiplexing frame is divided in to 32
timeslots numbered from 0 to 31. Timeslot 0 is reserved for frame synchronization, and
timeslot 16 is reserved for signaling transmission. The rest 30 timeslots are use as speech
channels. Each timeslot sends or receives an 8-bit data per second. Each frame sends or
receives 256-bit data per second. 8000 frames will be sent or received per second.
Therefore the line data rate is 2.048 Mbit/s.
E2E end to end
EAPE enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium
EBS See excess burst size.
ECC See embedded control channel.
EDFA See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
EEC Ethernet Electric Interface PMC Card
EEPROM See electrically erasable programable read-only memory.
EF See expedited forwarding.
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
EIR See excess information rate.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility.
EMF element management framework
EPL See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
EPLD See erasable programmable logical device.
EPON See Ethernet passive optical network.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ESC See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON See enterprise system connection.
ESD electrostatic discharge
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVC Ethernet virtual connection
EVOA electrical variable optical attenuator
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
EXP See experimental bits.
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).

Ethernet local area A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
network (E-LAN) virtual connection).
Ethernet passive A passive optical network based on Ethernet. It is a new generation broadband access
optical network technology that uses a point-to-multipoint structure and passive fiber transmission. It
(EPON) supports upstream/downstream symmetrical rates of 1.25 Gbit/s and a reach distance of
up to 20 km. In the downstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on encrypted
broadcast transmission for different users. In the upstream direction, the bandwidth is
shared based on TDM. EPON meets the requirements for high bandwidth.
Ethernet private LAN A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
service (EPLAN) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
(EPL) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private LAN service networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-to-
(EVPLAN) multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private line (EVPL) networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
eDQPSK enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying
eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable
egress The egress LER. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs
after the group is labeled.
electric supervisory A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission of
channel (ESC) monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electrically erasable A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable
programable read-only storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming. EEPROMs
memory (EEPROM) contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be reprogramed only
a limited number of times before wearing out.
electromagnetic A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its
compatibility (EMC) individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without
causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic
interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
embedded control A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer
channel (ECC) to enable the transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.

encapsulation A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message
from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame.
Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B
as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by
the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside
IP.
enterprise system A path protocol that connects the host to various control units in a storage system.
connection (ESCON) Enterprise system connection is a serial bit stream transmission protocol that operates a
rate of 200 Mbit/s.
erasable A logical array device which can be used to implement the required functions by
programmable logical programming the array. In addition, a user can modify and program the array repeatedly
device (EPLD) until the program meets the requirement.
erbium-doped fiber An optical device that amplifies optical signals. This device uses a short optical fiber
amplifier (EDFA) doped with the rare-earth element, Erbium. The signal to be amplified and a pump laser
are multiplexed into the doped fiber, and the signal is amplified by interacting with
doping ions. When the amplifier passes an external light source pump, it amplifies the
optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
excess burst size (EBS) A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, traffic
control is achieved by token buckets C and E. The excess burst size parameter defines
the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the
information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be
greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an IP packet to be
forwarded.
excess information rate The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result of the
(EIR) actual transmission rate without the safety rate.
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
(EF) demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
experimental bits A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to identify
(EXP) the CoS of the MPLS packet.
eye pattern An oscilloscope display in which a digital data signal from a receiver is repetitively
sampled and applied to the vertical input, while the data rate is used to trigger the
horizontal sweep. It is so called because, for several types of coding, the pattern looks
like a series of eyes between a pair of rails.
F
FBG fiber Bragg grating
FC See Fibre Channel.
FDB flash database
FDD See frequency division duplex.
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.
FDI See forward defect indication.

FDV See frame delay variation.

FE fast Ethernet
FEC See forward error correction.
FICON See Fiber Connect.
FIFO See first in first out.
FLR See frame loss ratio.
FMC See fixed mobile convergence.
FMT See fiber management tray.
FOA fixed optical attenuator
FOADM fixed optical add/drop multiplexer
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FR See frame relay.
FRR See fast reroute.
FTP File Transfer Protocol
Fiber Connect A new generation connection protocol that connects the host to various control units. It
(FICON) carries a single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and
provides a higher transmission rate and better performance than ESCON.
Fibre Channel (FC) A high-speed transport technology used to build SANs. FC is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays, but it can also be used on networks
carrying ATM and IP traffic. FC supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber
connections, and can run on twisted-pair copper wires and coaxial cables. FC provides
both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
fast reroute (FRR) A technology which provides a temporary protection of link availability when part of a
network fails. The protocol enables the creation of a standby route or path for an active
route or path. When the active route is unavailable, the traffic on the active route can be
switched to the standby route. When the active route is recovered, the traffic can be
switched back to the active route. FRR is categorized into IP FRR, VPN FRR, and TE
FRR.
fiber distributed data A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
interface (FDDI) speed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100
megabits per second on token ring networks.
fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers.
(FMT)
field programmable A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (FPGA) (ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies many
of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate arrays.
first in first out (FIFO) A stack management method in which data that is stored first in a queue is also read and
invoked first.

fixed mobile Communication service provided based on the combination of fixed-line and wireless
convergence (FMC) technologies. Service providing, access technologies, and terminal devices on an FMC
network are independent from each other. The same service can be obtained from various
access networks. Subscribers from different access networks can obtain and use the same
service.
flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On boards, it is a group of
packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation.
forced switching The action of switching traffic signals between a working channel and protection
channel. The switching occurs even if the channel to which traffic is being switched is
faulty or an equal or higher priority switching command is in effect.
forward defect A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first
indication (FDI) detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its
primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs
and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the
correction (FEC) transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission can be corrected at the receive end.
frame delay variation A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames,
(FDV) where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH
connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR) A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered
divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the number
of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of service frames
arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service frames delivered at the
egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection.
frame relay (FR) A packet-switching protocol used for WANs. Frame relay transmits variable-length
packets at up to 2 Mbit/s over predetermined, set paths known as PVCs (permanent
virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but sacrifices X.25's error detection for the sake
of speed.
frequency division An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the uplink
duplex (FDD) and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts. Both
uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length.
G
G-ACH generic associated channel header
GAL generic associated channel header label
GCC general communication channel
GE Gigabit Ethernet

GE ADM A technique that improves the transmission of GE services on a metropolitan area

network. Using this technique, equipment configured with a high-speed backplane can
separately transmit, aggregate, or divert GE services over electrical-layer wavelengths
or sub-wavelengths. This achieves cross-connections of wavelengths and end-to-end
management of sub-wavelengths over a single device. GE ADM enables GE
convergence and cross-connections at the same time, thereby ensuring that network
resources are used effectively.
GFF gain flattening filter
GFP See Generic Framing Procedure.
GMPLS generalized multiprotocol label switching
GNE See gateway network element.
GPON gigabit-capable passive optical network
GPS See Global Positioning System.
GSM See Global System for Mobile Communications.
GSSP General Snooping and Selection Protocol
GTS See generic traffic shaping.
GUI graphical user interface
Generic Framing A framing and encapsulated method that can be applied to any data type. GFP is defined
Procedure (GFP) by ITU-T G.7041.
Global Positioning A global navigation satellite system that provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
System (GPS) timing services to users worldwide.
Global System for The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by European
Mobile Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for
Communications global mobile phone networks. The standard allows a subscriber to use a phone globally.
(GSM) GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching subsystem (MSS), base station
subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).
gateway A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to
translate the data in the two network segments.
gateway IP address The IP address of a gateway. A gateway is a node that forwards packets between
networks. Packets are sent to the gateway IP address when the destination network
address resides in a different network to the sender.
gateway network An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network
element (GNE) management system.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that proactively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
(GTS) to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
granularity The extent to which a system is broken down into small parts, either the system itself or
its description or observation. It is the extent to which a larger entity is subdivided. If a
system has more granularity for you to choose, that is, there are more granules in the
system for you to choose, then you can customize the system more flexibly.

HA system high availability system

HCS higher order connection supervision
HD-SDI high definition serial digital interface
HDB3 See high density bipolar of order 3 code.
HDLC High-Level Data Link Control
HDTV See high definition television.
HP higher order path
HPT higher order path termination
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
HSI high-speed Internet
HSL See high-level script language.
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
HUAWEI Electronic The software used to view, search for, and upgrade electronic documentation of Huawei
Document Explorer products. HedEx, pronounced as [hediks], has two editions, HedEx Lite and HedEx
(HedEx) Server.
HedEx See HUAWEI Electronic Document Explorer.
High Speed Downlink A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement
Packet Access for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
(HSDPA) maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
high definition A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080 interlaced
television (HDTV) active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using at least 540
progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines.
high density bipolar of A code used for baseband transmissions between telecommunications devices. The
order 3 code (HDB3) HDB3 code has the following feature: high capability of clock extraction, no direct
current component, error-checking capability, and a maximum of three consecutive
zeros.
high-level script A script language. Based on python, the HSL syntax is simple, clear, and extendable.
language (HSL)
I
IANA See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC See integrated circuit.
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.
ID See identity.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IF See intermediate frequency.

IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.

IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this
manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IGRP Interior Gateway Routing Protocol
ILM incoming label map
IM See instant messaging.
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM.
IMP instant message platform
IP Internet Protocol
IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host connected to the Internet.
An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values
of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the
IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifies
the host itself.
IP subnet A special submap used to identify an IP network segment. It is displayed as the submap
icon in the topological view.
IPA See intelligent power adjustment.
IPTV See Internet Protocol television.
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.
ISDN integrated services digital network
ISI intersymbol interference
ISL See Inter-Switch Link.
ISO International Organization for Standardization
IST internal spanning tree
ITU See International Telecommunication Union.
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
IWF Interworking Function
Institute of Electrical A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United
and Electronics States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
Engineers (IEEE) electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important
technology standards.
Inter-Switch Link A kind of link that realizes VLAN by adding a 26-bit ISL header (with VLAN ID) to the
(ISL) traditional Ethernet packets.

Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
Intermediate System datagram or packets through a packet-based network.
(IS-IS)
International A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
Telecommunication bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
Union (ITU) radio networks (ITU-R).
Internet Assigned A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space
Numbers Authority allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also
(IANA) maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including
autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a
Message Protocol host server and an Internet gateway.
(ICMP)
Internet Group One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
Management Protocol groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain
(IGMP) multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol A system that provides TV services over the IP network. In the IPTV system, media
television (IPTV) streams from satellites, terrestrial, and studios are converted by the encoder to the media
streams applicable to the IP network. Then the media streams are transmitted to the
terminal layer on the IP network. Media content is displayed on a TV set after media
streams are processed by specified receiving devices (for example, an STB).
Internet Protocol The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
version 4 (IPv4) assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together
are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the
network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
version 6 (IPv6) (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet
Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while
an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
identity (ID) The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively
recognizable or known.
input jitter tolerance The measure of a receiver's ability to tolerate jitter on an incoming waveform.
insertion loss The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector, coupler,
or splice, into a previously continuous path.
instant messaging (IM) A form of real-time communication between two or more people based on typed text.
The text is conveyed via devices connected over a network such as the Internet.
integrated circuit (IC) A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
intelligent power A technology that reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
adjustment (IPA) regeneration section in the upstream to a safe level if the system detects the loss of optical
signals on the link. IPA helps ensure that maintenance engineers are not injured by the
laser escaping from a broken fiber or a connector that is not plugged in properly.

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
(IF) signal.
inverse multiplexing A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a
over ATM (IMA) cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate
is approximately the sum of the link rates.
J
jitter The measure of short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and
control system instability.
L
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
L3VPN Layer 3 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LACPDU Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
LAPS Link Access Protocol-SDH
LAS line assurance system
LB See loopback.
LBM See loopback message.
LBR See loopback reply.
LC Lucent connector
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LCK See Locked signal function.
LCT local craft terminal
LDP Label Distribution Protocol
LER See label edge router.
LHP long hop
LLC See logical link control.
LLID local loopback ID
LM See loss measurement.
LMP link management protocol
LOP loss of pointer
LOS See loss of signal.
LPT link-state pass through
LRF location registration function

LSA link-state advertisement

LSP See label switched path.
LSR See label switching router.
LSS loss of sequence synchronization
LT linktrace
LTC loss of tandem connection
LTE Long Term Evolution
LTM See linktrace message.
LTR See linktrace reply.
Layer 2 multicast A technology that maps IP multicast addresses to multicast MAC addresses. When
Ethernet is used as the link layer, Layer 2 multicast uses multicast MAC addresses for
traffic transmission.
Link Aggregation A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
Control Protocol reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their
(LACP) parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed,
LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the
aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
Locked signal function A function administratively locks an MEG end point (MEP) at the server layer, informs
(LCK) consequential data traffic interruption to the peer MEP at the client layer, and suppresses
the alarm at the client layer.
label edge router (LER) A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to assign
labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
label switched path On an MPLS network, an LSR uses the same label switching mechanism to forward
(LSP) packets with the same features. The packets with the same features are called a
forwarding equivalence class (FEC). The path along which an FEC travels through the
MPLS network is called an LSP, or a tunnel.
label switching router Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
(LSR) composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
linear MSP linear multiplex section protection
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
(LAG) aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
adjustment scheme control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
(LCAS) bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the network and element management systems.
link status The running status of a link, which can be Up, Down, backup, or unknown.

linktrace message The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP.
(LTM) LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2.
linktrace reply (LTR) For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the
source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is
called LTR. LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM minus
1.
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
(LAN) kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate. Current
LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run at 1,000
Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
logical link control According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper
(LLC) sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media
(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
loopback (LB) A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
loopback message The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the destination
(LBM) node. LBM message carries its own sending time.
loopback reply (LBR) A response message involved in the 802.2ag MAC Ping function, with which the
destination MEP replies to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LBM.
The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving time of LBM and the sending
time of LBR.
loss measurement (LM) A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service frames
where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames between a
pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.
M
MA maintenance association
MAC See Media Access Control.
MAC address A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long.
MAC address aging A function that deletes MAC address entries of a device when no packets are received
from this device within a specified time period.
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
MAN See metropolitan area network.
MBB mobile broadband
MD See maintenance domain.
MD5 See message digest algorithm 5.
MDF See main distribution frame.
ME See maintenance entity.
MEG See maintenance entity group.

MEP maintenance association end point

MFAS See multiframe alignment signal.
MGC media gateway controller
MIB See management information base.
MID message identification
MIN mobile identification number
MIP See maintenance entity group intermediate point.
MLD See multicast listener discovery.
MML man-machine language
MNO See mobile network operator.
MOP See method of procedure.
MP maintenance point
MPI-R main path interface at the receiver
MPI-S main path interface at the transmitter
MPID maintenance point identification
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS VPN See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MPLS-TP See MultiProtocol Label Switching Transport Profile.
MRI See measurement result integrity.
MRO mobility robustness optimization
MS multiplex section
MS-AIS See multiplex section alarm indication signal.
MS-PW See multi-segment pseudo wire.
MSA multiplex section adaptation
MSDP See Multicast Source Discovery Protocol.
MSI mobile station identifier
MSOH multiplex section overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection.
MST See multiplex section termination.
MST region See Multiple Spanning Tree region.
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF See mean time between failures.
MTU See maximum transmission unit.

MUX See multiplexer.

MVOA mechanical variable optical attenuator
MWA mobile wireless access
Media Access Control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
(MAC) data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
MultiProtocol Label A packet transport technology proposed by IETF that combines the packet experience
Switching Transport of MPLS with the operational experience of transport networks.
Profile (MPLS-TP)
Multicast Source A protocol that is applicable only to the PIM-SM domain and meaningful only for the
Discovery Protocol Any-Source Multicast (ASM) model. After the MSDP peer relationship is set up between
(MSDP) RPs of different PIM-SM domains, multicast source information can be shared between
PIM-SM domains, and the inter-domain multicast can be implemented. After the MSDP
peer relationship is set up between RPs of the same PIM-SM domain, multicast source
information can be shared in the PIM-SM domain, and anycast RP can be implemented.
Multiple Spanning A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
Tree Protocol (MSTP) redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case,
the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The
protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This
solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/
RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiple Spanning A region that consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among
Tree region (MST them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST
region) region attributes belong to the same MST region.
Multiprotocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
Switching (MPLS) layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols.
main distribution A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
frame (MDF)
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by connectivity
(MD) fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are managed by a single
Internet service provider (ISP).
maintenance entity An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of a
(ME) transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail.

maintenance entity A MEG consists of MEs that meet the following criteria:
group (MEG)
l Exist within the same management edges.
l Have the same MEG hierarchy.
l Belong to the same P2P or P2MP connection.
maintenance entity An intermediate point in a MEG, which is able to forward OAM packets and respond to
group intermediate some OAM packets, but unable to initiate the transmission of OAM packets or perform
point (MIP) any operations on network connections.
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base (MIB) comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
unit (MTU) depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
mean time between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
failures (MTBF) of the reliability of the system.
measurement result Percentage of the number of the actually reported measurement results to the number of
integrity (MRI) the measurement results that should be reported.
message digest A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message
algorithm 5 (MD5) integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128
bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian
integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which
are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number.
method of procedure A document that describes the process of executing a specific task. It facilitates the
(MOP) mutual understanding of and cooperation between a service provider and a carrier. Before
executing a task, the representatives from both parties confirm this document and reach
an agreement on it. This document describes who, when, where, why, and how to execute
a task and what to do.
metropolitan area A medium-scale computer network with area larger than that covered by a LAN and
network (MAN) smaller than that covered by a WAN. It interconnects multiple LAN networks in a
geographic region of a city.
mobile network A company that has a network infrastructure, sells large network capacities, and provides
operator (MNO) transparent network channels.
multi-segment pseudo A collection of multiple adjacent PW segments. Each PW segment is a point-to-point
wire (MS-PW) PW. The use of MS-PWs to bear services saves tunnel resources and can transport
services over different networks.
multicast A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.

multicast listener A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
discovery (MLD) connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6
networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which
the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the
multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment A distinctive signal inserted into every multiframe or once into every n multiframes,
signal (MFAS) always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish
and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a simply
instance (MSTI) and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that
is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to
multiple MSTIs.
multiplex section alarm An all-ONES characteristic or adapted information signal. It's generated to replace the
indication signal (MS- normal traffic signal when it signal contains a defect condition in order to prevent
AIS) consequential downstream failures being declared or alarms being raised. AIS can be
identified as multiplex section alarm indication signal.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
protection (MSP) including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
multiplex section A function that generates the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) during the formation
termination (MST) of an SDH frame signal and that terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.
multiplexer (MUX) Equipment that combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of
aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels
being fixed.
multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
multiprotocol label An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol label
switching virtual switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network routers and
private network switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines traditional routing
(MPLS VPN) technology and label switching technology. It can be used to construct the broadband
Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.
N
NAS network access server
NBI See northbound interface.
NDF new data flag
NE network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, a user can query, manage, and
maintain NEs, boards, and ports.
NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a
unique NE ID.

NE Panel A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks,
boards, and ports on an NE. On the NE Panel, the user can complete most of the
configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.
NHLFE next hop label forwarding entry
NM network management
NMC network management center
NNI network-to-network interface
NOC network operations center
NOS network operating system
NP See network processor.
NPE network provider edge
NRZ non-return to zero
NRZ code non-return-to-zero code
NS network system
NSAP See network service access point.
NTP Network Time Protocol
network layer Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer
provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In
addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the TCP/
IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and implemented by
IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.
network processor (NP) An integrated circuit which has a feature set specifically targeted at the networking
application domain. Network Processors are typically software programmable devices
and would have generic characteristics similar to general purpose CPUs that are
commonly used in many different types of equipment and products.
network segment Part of a network on which all message traffic is common to all nodes; that is, a message
broadcast from one node on the segment is received by all other nodes on the segment.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made available
point (NSAP) to a Network service user by the Network service provider.
network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast
packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality
and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by network
connection or configuration problems.
noise figure A measure of degradation of the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), caused by components in
a radio frequency (RF) signal chain. The noise figure is defined as the ratio of the output
noise power of a device to the portion thereof attributable to thermal noise in the input
termination at standard noise temperature T0 (usually 290 K). The noise figure is thus
the ratio of actual output noise to that which would remain if the device itself did not
introduce noise. It is a number by which the performance of a radio receiver can be
specified.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element.

non-gateway network A network element that communicates with the NM application layer through the
element (non-GNE) gateway NE application layer.
northbound interface An interface that connects to the upper-layer device to provision services and report
(NBI) alarms and performance statistics.
O
O&M operation and maintenance
OA optical amplifier
OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
OAMS Optical fiber line Automatic Monitoring System
OC ordinary clock
OCI open connection indication
OCP optical channel protection
OCS optical core switching
OCh optical channel with full functionality
OD optical demultiplexing
ODB optical duobinary
ODF optical distribution frame
ODUk optical channel data unit - k
OEQ optical equalizer
OFC optical fiber communication conference and exhibit
OIF See Optical Internetworking Forum.
OLP See optical line protection.
OM optical multiplexing
OMS optical multiplexing section
OMU optical multiplexer unit
ONE See optical network element.
ONT See optical network terminal.
ONU See optical network unit.
OOS out of service
OPEX operating expense
OPS optical physical section
OPU See optical channel payload unit.
OPUk optical channel payload unit - k

ORT See operation response time.

OSA See optical spectrum analyzer.
OSC See optical supervisory channel.
OSI reference model See Open Systems Interconnection reference model.
OSN optical switch node
OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio.
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.
OSS operations support system
OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer.
OTM optical terminal multiplexer
OTN optical transport network
OTS See optical transmission section.
OTU See optical transponder unit.
OTUk optical channel transport unit - k
OUI organizationally unique identifier
OWSP optical wavelength shared protection
Open Shortest Path A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses
First (OSPF) cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology,
which is identical on all routers in the area.
Open Systems An open network architecture model developed by the International Organization for
Interconnection Standardization (ISO) and the ITU-T. This module consists of 7 layers. Each layer has
reference model (OSI special network functions, such as addressing, flow control, error control, encapsulation,
reference model) and reliable message transmission. The lowest layer (physical layer) is closest to media
technologies. The lower two layers are implemented in hardware and software, and the
upper five layers are implemented only in software. The highest layer (application layer)
is closest to users. The OSI reference model is a widely used method of understanding
network functions.
Optical A worldwide non-profit organization with membership open to any organization
Internetworking interested in shaping the future of optical internetworking.
Forum (OIF)
operation response The average time taken by a storage device to respond to each request. It is a critical
time (ORT) storage performance indicator.
operation, A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification, location,
administration and and repair.
maintenance (OAM)
optical add/drop A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel
multiplexer (OADM) and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. An optical attenuator is
used to ensure that the optical power of a signal at the receive end is not excessively
high.

optical channel payload A protection architecture that allows one wavelength to provide protection for multiple
unit (OPU) services between different stations, saving wavelength resources and lowering costs.
optical line protection A mechanism that protects line signals using the dual feeding and selective receiving
(OLP) principle, featuring single-ended switching.
optical network A transport entity that implements the NE functions (terminal multiplexing, add/drop
element (ONE) multiplexing, cross-connection and regeneration) in a DWDM layer network. The types
of ONEs include OTM, OADM, OLA, REG and OXC.
optical network A device that terminates the fiber optical network at the customer premises.
terminal (ONT)
optical network unit A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical
(ONU) signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to
individual subscribers.
optical signal-to-noise The ratio of signal power to noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most
ratio (OSNR) important index for measuring the performance of a DWDM system.
optical spectrum A device that can analyze a region of the optical spectrum and is commonly used to
analyzer (OSA) diagnose DWDM systems.
optical supervisory A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among
channel (OSC) nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain
channel.
optical time domain A device that sends a series of short pulses of light down a fiber-optic cable and measures
reflectometer (OTDR) the strength of the return pulses. An OTDR is used to measure fiber length and light loss,
and to locate fiber faults.
optical transmission A section in the logical structure of an optical transport network (OTN). The OTS allows
section (OTS) the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between NEs.
optical transponder A device or subsystem that converts accessed client signals into a G.694.1/G.694.2-
unit (OTU) compliant WDM wavelength.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
P
P2MP point-to-multipoint
P2P See point-to-point service.
PBS See peak burst size.
PCB See printed circuit board.
PCC protection communication channel
PCN product change notice
PCS physical coding sublayer
PDG polarization-dependent gain
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDL See polarization-dependent loss.

PDM pulse duration modulation

PDU See power distribution unit.
PE See provider edge.
PER packet error ratio
PET polyester
PFI packet forward interface
PGA program global area
PHB See per-hop behavior.
PID photonics integrated device
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PIR peak information rate
PLC See packet loss compensation.
PLL See phase-locked loop.
PM performance monitoring
PMD polarization mode dispersion
PMI payload missing indication
PMS Product Management System
PMU power monitoring unit
POH path overhead
PON passive optical network
POS See packet over SDH/SONET.
POTS See plain old telephone service.
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PPS pulse per second
PPT PDH physical terminal
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRC primary reference clock
PSI payload structure identifier
PSN See packet switched network.
PSTN See public switched telephone network.
PT payload type
PTI payload type indicator
PTN packet transport network

PTP Precision Time Protocol

PTP clock See Precision Time Protocol clock.
PVC permanent virtual channel
PVP See permanent virtual path.
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
Precision Time A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588
Protocol clock (PTP V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control
clock) system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.
packet loss A technology of compensating packets according to an appropriate algorithm if packets
compensation (PLC) are lost in the transmission.
packet over SDH/ A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS
SONET (POS) interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of
packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
packet switched A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
network (PSN)
packing case A case used for packing a board or subrack.
paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the
backplane.
parity check A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of bits,
usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd or
even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the
transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of 1s in the frame and
attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity error,
may ask for the data to be retransmitted.
patch loading During patch loading, the software is written into the Flash boards and the patch area of
the board memory from the specified storage area of the OMU board or the BAM of NEs
through commands.
peak burst size (PBS) A parameter that defines the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP
packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate.
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
(PHB) behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
performance threshold A limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement result
reaches or exceeds the preset alarm threshold, the performance management system
generates a performance alarm.
permanent virtual path Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
(PVP)

phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector that compares the frequency of a
(PLL) voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator. The output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,
is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the
incoming or reference frequency.
ping A method used to test whether a device in the IP network is reachable according to the
sent ICMP Echo messages and received response messages.
plain old telephone The basic telephone service provided through the traditional cabling such as twisted pair
service (POTS) cables.
plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
hierarchy (PDH) rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.
point-to-point service A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
(P2P) terminal users.
pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to
the frame reference of the transport entity on which this pointer is supported.
polarization-dependent A measure of the peak-to-peak insertion loss or gain variation caused by a component
loss (PDL) when stimulated by all possible polarization states. PDL is specified in dB.
power distribution unit A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
(PDU)
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
(PCB) using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
private line A line, such as a subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are leased by the
telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special user requirements.
protection path A path in a protection group that transports services when a fault occurs on the working
path.
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging
routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and
forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be
a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent of
sequence (PRBS) the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence.
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a
edge-to-edge (PWE3) telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network
(PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division
multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
public switched A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public
telephone network subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.
(PSTN)

Q
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying.
QinQ See 802.1Q in 802.1Q.
QoS See quality of service.
quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
keying (QPSK) the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-
bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
quality of service (QoS) A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
RAN See radio access network.
RBW reverse-band working
RDI remote defect indication
RED See random early detection.
REG See regenerator.
RF See radio frequency.
RFC See Request For Comments.
RIP See Routing Information Protocol.
RJ45 registered jack45
RMEP remote maintenance association end point
RMON remote network monitoring
RMS resource management system
RMU rack monitoring unit
RNC See radio network controller.
ROADM reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer
ROPA See remote optical pumping amplifier.
RPR resilient packet ring
RS regenerator section
RS232 See Reference Standard 232.

RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital
interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others
are the same as RS232.
RSOH regenerator section overhead
RST regenerator section termination
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol.
RSVP-TE See Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering.
RTP real-time performance
RX receive
RXD receive data
RZ return to zero
RZ code return-to-zero code
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree
Protocol (RSTP) convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Reference Standard A standard that defines the electrical characteristics, timing, and meaning of signals, and
232 (RS232) the physical size and pinout of connectors.
Remote Authentication A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized
Dial In User Service access control mechanism. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its
(RADIUS) transmission protocol to ensure real-time quality. RADIUS also supports the
retransmission and multi-server mechanisms to ensure good reliability.
Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
(RFC) operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources
such as InterNIC.
Resource Reservation A protocol that reserves resources on every node along a path. RSVP is designed for an
Protocol (RSVP) integrated services Internet.
Resource Reservation An extension to the RSVP protocol for setting up label switched paths (LSPs) in MPLS
Protocol-Traffic networks. The RSVP-TE protocol is used to establish and maintain the LSPs by initiating
Engineering (RSVP- label requests and allocating label binding messages. It also supports LSP rerouting and
TE) LSP bandwidth increasing.
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
Routing Information A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
Protocol (RIP) based on the smallest hop count between the source and destination. RIP is a distance
vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers
and is known to waste bandwidth.
radio access network The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates the CN
(RAN) from wireless network.

radio frequency (RF) A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
radio network A device in a radio network subsystem that is in charge of controlling the usage and
controller (RNC) integrity of radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
(RED) to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
receiver sensitivity The minimum acceptable value of mean received power at point Rn (a reference point
at an input to a receiver optical connector) to achieve a 1x10-12 BER when the FEC is
enabled.
recognition Consumer awareness of having seen or heard an advertising message.
reference clock A stable and high-precision autonomous clock that provides frequencies as a reference
for other clocks.
regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
regenerator (REG) A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
regional root The root of the Internal Spanning Tree (IST) and Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
(MSTI) in the MST region. The regional root differs with the topology of the spanning
tree in the MST region.
remote optical A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply and
pumping amplifier monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation
(ROPA) solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
reservation An action that the charging module performs to freeze a subscriber's balance amount,
free resources, credits, or quotas before the subscriber uses services. This action ensures
that the subscriber has sufficient balance to pay for services.
ring network A network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a
circular pathway for signals.
route The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. Routes can change
dynamically.
router A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the
optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a
network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for
sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a
WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.
routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers
regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the
destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in
hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.
Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.

S-VLAN service virtual local area network

S1 byte A byte to transmit network synchronization status information. On an SDH network,
each NE traces hop by hop to the same clock reference source through a specific clock
synchronization path, realizing synchronization on the entire network. If a clock
reference source traced by an NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference
source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole
network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source
it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status
information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to
indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks
in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching
protocol.
SAI service area identifier
SAN See storage area network.
SAPI service access point identifier
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SBS synchronous information backbone system
SCA selective call acceptance
SCE See service creation environment.
SD See signal degrade.
SD-SDI See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDI See serial digital interface.
SDP See Session Description Protocol.
SELV safety extra-low voltage
SES severely errored second
SETS SDH equipment timing source
SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SHDSL See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.
SLA See service level agreement.
SLIP See Serial Line Interface Protocol.
SLM single longitudinal mode
SM section monitoring
SMB Server Message Block
SMF See single-mode fiber.
SNC subnetwork connection

SNCP subnetwork connection protection

SNCTP subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNR See signal-to-noise ratio.
SO See security object.
SOH section overhead
SONET See synchronous optical network.
SPI SDH physical interface
SPM service processing module
SQL See structured query language.
SRG See shared risk group.
SRLG shared risk link group
SRP satellite reference point
SRS stimulated Raman scattering
SSD See service support data.
SSH See Secure Shell.
SSL See Secure Sockets Layer.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
STG synchronous timing generator
STM See synchronous transport module.
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
STS space time spreading
Secure File Transfer A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Protocol (SFTP)
Secure Shell (SSH) A set of standards and an associated network protocol that allows establishing a secure
channel between a local and a remote computer. A feature to protect information and
provide powerful authentication function for a network when a user logs in to the network
through an insecure network. It prevents IP addresses from being deceived and simple
passwords from being captured.
Secure Sockets Layer A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer
(SSL) and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities.
Serial Line Interface A protocol that defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement transmission
Protocol (SLIP) of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnection function
with a known IP address.
Session Description A protocol intended for describing multimedia sessions for the purposes of session
Protocol (SDP) announcement, session invitation, and other forms of multimedia session initiation.

Simple Network A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
Management Protocol the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
(SNMP) transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Synchronization Status A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message (SSM) SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network or
synchronization network.
security object (SO) A main part of the information security. It is not related with the communication mode
or terminal. It does not only focus on the security of the information exchange but also
provides feasible solutions of security for the user information, including the user identity
authentication, user password, and encryption.
segment A subset of an identity type. This is a different subset from a trust level including but is
not limited to the following examples: A subset based on customer age, a subset based
on where the identity was registered or based, a subset based on the customer's gender,
and a subset based on an association that the identity may have. For example, an
organization is confirmed as a supermarket or a customer is a member of a society.
serial digital interface An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.
(SDI)
service creation A service generation tool that provides a graphical user interface (GUI) for programming.
environment (SCE)
service level agreement A service agreement between a customer and a service provider. SLA specifies the
(SLA) service level for a customer. The customer can be a user organization (source domain)
or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). An SLA may include
traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole
or partially.
service support data An identifier that defines data parameters of specific service feature descriptions in the
(SSD) global functional plane.
shaping A process of delaying packets within a traffic stream to cause it to conform to specific
defined traffic profile.
shared risk group A group of resources that share a common risk component whose failure can cause the
(SRG) failure of all the resources in the group.
signal degrade (SD) A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect
condition is active.
signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal-to-noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
(SNR) given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB.
single-ended switching A protection mechanism that takes switching action only at the affected end of the
protected entity in the case of a unidirectional failure.

single-mode fiber A type of optical fiber through which only one type of optical signal with a fixed wave
(SMF) length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10
microns. This type of fiber can transmit data over a long distance.
single-pair high-speed A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and
digital subscriber line HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user
(SHDSL) terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse
amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide
the broadband access service.
split ratio The ratio of the number one to the number of optical signal channels that are split from
a channel of downstream optical signals in a GPON network. A larger split ratio implies
greater optical splitting which creates the need for an increased power budget to support
the physical reach.
standard definition- Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
serial digital interface
signal (SD-SDI)
storage area network An architecture to attach remote computer storage devices such as disk array controllers,
(SAN) tape libraries and CD arrays to servers in such a way that to the operating system the
devices appear as locally attached devices.
structured query A programming language widely used for accessing, updating, managing, and querying
language (SQL) data in a relational database.
subnet A type of smaller networks that form a larger network according to a rule, for example,
according to different districts. This facilitates the management of the large network.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the device and is matched
with the IP address.
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the
hierarchy (SDH) transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN.
synchronous optical A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to
network (SONET) connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple
data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbit/s, but
multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
synchronous transport An information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists
module (STM) of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a
block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably conditioned
for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the
network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher
capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities
for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
T
T1 A North American standard for high-speed data transmission at 1.544Mbps. It provides
24 x 64 kbit/s channels.
TAC See type approval code.

TCM tandem connection monitor

TCN topology change notification
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TD-SCDMA See Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access.
TDD time division duplex
TDM See time division multiplexing.
TE terminal equipment
TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
TIM trail trace identifier mismatch
TLS Transport Layer Security
TLV See type-length-value.
TM See terminal multiplexer.
TMN See telecommunications management network.
TOS type of service
TPID tag protocol identifier
TR token ring
TST See Test.
TTI trail trace identifier
TTL See time to live.
TUG tributary unit group
TX transmit
Telnet A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows users
to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local system.
Telnet is defined in RFC 854.
Test (TST) A function which is used to perform one-way on-demand in-service or out-of-service
diagnostics tests. This includes verifying bandwidth throughput, frame loss, bit errors,
and so on.
Time Division- A 3G mobile communications standard found in UMTS mobile telecommunications
Synchronous Code networks in China as an alternative to W-CDMA. TD-SCDMA integrates technologies
Division Multiple of CDMA, TDMA, and FDMA, and makes use of technologies including intelligent
Access (TD-SCDMA) antenna, joint detection, low chip rate (LCR), and adaptive power control. With the
flexibility of service processing, a TD-SCDMA network can connect to other networks
through the RNC.
Transmission Control The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
Protocol (TCP) be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.

Trivial File Transfer A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for
Protocol (TFTP) applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP
restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication.
telecommunications A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
management network network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of
(TMN) equipment, networks, and services.
terminal multiplexer A device used at a network terminal either to multiplex multiple channels of low rate
(TM) signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate
signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.
time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
multiplexing (TDM) (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3…), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
time to live (TTL) A specified period of time for best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets from
looping endlessly.
token bucket algorithm The token bucket is a container for tokens. The capacity of a token bucket is limited, and
the number of tokens determines the traffic rate of permitted packets. The token bucket
polices the traffic. Users place the tokens into the bucket regularly according to the preset
rate. If the tokens in the bucket exceed the capacity, no tokens can be put in. Packets can
be forwarded when the bucket has tokens, otherwise they cannot be transferred till there
are new tokens in the bucket. This scheme adjusts the rate of packet input.
trTCM See two rate three color marker.
traffic classification A function that enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different
priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified QoS in the entire
network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently.
traffic shaping A way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the
performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the
scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices,
avoiding packet loss and congestion.
traffic statistics An activity of measuring and collecting statistics of various data on devices and
telecommunications networks. With the statistics, operators can be aware of the
operating status, signaling, users, system resource usage of the devices or networks. The
statistics also help the operators manage the device operating, locate problems, monitor
and maintain the networks, and plan the networks.
transparent mode A method of binary synchronous text transmission in which only transmission control
characters preceded by the data link escape (DLE) character are processed as
transmission control characters.
transparent A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but
transmission encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
trunk Physical communications line between two offices. It transports media signals such as
speech, data and video signals.
tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.

two rate three color An algorithm that meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates,
marker (trTCM) Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their
associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it
exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it
exceeds or does not exceed the CIR.
type approval code A portion of the 15-digit IMEI code used to uniquely identify wireless devices.
(TAC)
type-length-value An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called Code-
(TLV) Length-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined through different
values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V indicates the actual data of the
TLV and is most important. TLV encoding features high expansibility. New TLVs can
be added to support new features, which is flexible in describing information loaded in
packets.
U
UDP See User Datagram Protocol.
UI user interface
UNI See user-to-network interface.
UPE user-end provider edge
UPI user payload identifier
UPM uninterruptible power module
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
User Datagram A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
Protocol (UDP) datagram to an application program on another. UDP uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP
provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery
service. That is, UDP messages may be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of
order. The destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet
is received.
upstream In an access network, the direction that is far from the subscriber end of the link.
upstream board A board that provides the upstream transmission function. Through an upstream board,
services can be transmitted upstream to the upper-layer device.
user-to-network The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
interface (UNI) example, ATM switches).
V
V-NNI virtual network-network interface
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface.
VA value assurance
VAS See value-added service.
VB virtual bridge
VBR See variable bit rate.

VC See virtual channel.

VC trunk See virtual container trunk.
VCC See virtual channel connection.
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCG See virtual concatenation group.
VCPLM virtual concatenation payload mismatch
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board.
VDSL2 See very-high-speed digital subscriber line 2.
VLAN virtual local area network
VLAN mapping A technology that enables user packets to be transmitted over the public network by
translating private VLAN tags into public VLAN tags. When user packets arrive at the
destination private network, VLAN mapping translates public VLAN tags back into
private VLAN tags. In this manner, user packets are correctly transmitted to the
destination.
VM virtual memory
VOA variable optical attenuator
VPLS See virtual private LAN service.
VPN virtual private network
VPWS See virtual private wire service.
VRRP See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
VSI See virtual switching instance.
Virtual Router A protocol designed for multicast or broadcast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of
Redundancy Protocol routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as
(VRRP) a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP address.
The host in the network communicates with other networks through this virtual router.
If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers in this backup
group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the network.
VoD See video on demand.
VoIP See voice over Internet Protocol.
value-added service A service provided by carriers and service providers (SPs) together for subscribers based
(VAS) on voice, data, images, SMS messages, and so on. Communication network technologies,
computer technologies, and Internet technologies are used to provide value-added
services.
variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
very-high-speed digital An extension of the VDSL technology, which complies with ITU G.993.2, supports
subscriber line 2 multiple spectrum profiles and encapsulation modes, and provides short-distance and
(VDSL2) high-speed access solutions to the next-generation FTTx access service.

video on demand (VoD) An interactive video service system through which you can demand desired programs
at any time.
virtual channel (VC) Any logical connection in the ATM network. A VC is the basic unit of switching in the
ATM network and is uniquely identified by a virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual channel
identifier (VCI) value. It is the channel on which ATM cells are transmitted by a switch.
virtual channel A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A point-
connection (VCC) to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple end
points.
virtual circuit A channel or circuit established between two points on a data communications network
with packet switching. Virtual circuits can be permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) or
switched virtual circuits (SVCs) .
virtual concatenation A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
group (VCG) virtual concatenation link.
virtual connection A logical tunnel built in a non-backbone area between two ABRs in a same OSPF routing
domain. It is used to maintain the logical connections between physical division areas.
The two ends of the virtual connection must be ABRs. In addition, to make a virtual
connection effective, the ABRs must be configured at the same time. The virtual
connection is identified by the ID of the peer router.
virtual container trunk The logical path formed by some cascaded VCs.
(VC trunk)
virtual private LAN A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
service (VPLS) enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private wire A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR,
service (VPWS) Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.
virtual switching An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to the
instance (VSI) virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridge
function and can terminate PW.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
interface (V-UNI) classification and traffic control in HQoS.
voice over Internet A value-added service technology for IP calls. The VoIP service is a new IP telecom
Protocol (VoIP) service. It can run on fixed and mobile networks and support flexible access points. Fees
for VoIP subscribers are relatively low. Calls between VoIP subscribers who belong to
the same carrier are free of charge.
W
WAN wide area network
WCDMA See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM wavelength division multiplexing
WFQ See weighted fair queuing.
WLAN See wireless local area network.
WRED See weighted random early detection.

WRR weighted round robin

WSS wavelength selective switching
WTR See wait to restore.
WXCP See wavelength cross-connection protection.
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE
management layer of the transport network.
Wideband Code A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived
Division Multiple from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
Access (WCDMA)
wait to restore (WTR) The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
wavelength cross- A type of channel protection based on ring network topology. WXCP employs the dual
connection protection feed and selective receiving principle and uses the cross-connection function to
(WXCP) implement service switching between the working and protection channels.
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
(WFQ) scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
detection (WRED) synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
wireless local area A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses
network (WLAN) wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data interaction
through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional LAN.
X
X.25 A data link layer protocol. It defines the communication in the Public Data Network
(PDN) between a host and a remote terminal.
xDSL x digital subscriber line


OSN 8800 V100R008C10 Product Description 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OSN 8800 V100R008C10 Product Description 01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OSN 8800 V100R008C10 Product Description 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 8800 V100R008C10

iManager U2000 V200R001C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT V200R001C00

This document is intended for:

l Network Planning Engineer

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Based on Product Version

1 Introduction Updated the description of 1.1.1 Product Highlights.

Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

5 Hardware l The TN15LSC, TN57NS4, TN54NS4M, TN12WSMD9,

A Power The TN15LSC, TN57NS4, TN54NS4M, TN12WSMD9,

B Complied Updated the complied standards.

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-12-31) Based on Product Version

5 Hardware l The TN12LTX and TN13OAU107 boards are added.

6 Node 6.1 Configuration Principles for Optical Attenuators is added.

A Power The TN12LTX and TN13OAU107 boards are added.

B Complied Updated the complied standards.

Updates in Issue 01 (2013-07-30) Based on Product Version

Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Whole manual l Deleted the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack.

1 Introduction Added 1.3 Typical Application.

2 System Added the description of the universal line board.

4 Product l 4.1 Line Rate: Updated the description of 100 Gbit/s.

5 Hardware l Added 5.5 OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack.

6 Node Modified the typical configurations of an OLA node.

Updates in Issue 03 (2013-05-16) Based on Product Version

Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

11 Technical 11.6 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications: Modified the

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-04-20) Based on Product Version

Whole manual The required U2000 version is changed from V100R008C01 to

9 Operation and l Deleted the "Automatic Deployment Commissioning".

13 Environment Update the descriptions of the environment requirement.

A Power Added descriptions of the TN52NS2.

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-11-30) Based on Product Version

Whole manual l Added descriptions of the TN54TTX, TN54TSC, TN14LSX.

Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

3 Service Access For 3.1 Service Types,

4.11 Deleted the ELPS feature of 4.11.3 Network Level Protection

5 Hardware Modified the description of Cross-Connect Unit and System and

9.17 License l Modified the descriptions of 9.17.1 Feature License.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-12-15) Based on Product Version

5 Hardware Modified the descriptions of Cross-Connect Unit and System and

9 Operation and l Deleted the "Automatic Deployment Commissioning".

Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

11 Technical Modified the 100 Gbit/s Span Transmission Distance of 11.1

B Complied l Added B.3 IETF Standards and B.5 MEF Standards.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-09-30) Based on Product Version